Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Manual Civil 3D 2011
Manual Civil 3D 2011
User’s Guide
April 2010
© 2010 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be
reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder.
Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., and/or its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the USA and other countries:
3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, Algor, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo),
ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface,
Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap,
AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backburner, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale,
Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design
Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG
Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Fempro, Fire, Flame, Flare,
Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT,
Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, Lustre, MatchMover, Maya,
Mechanical Desktop, Moldflow, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, MPA, MPA (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, Moldflow
Plastics Insight, MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert, Mudbox, Multi-Master Editing, Navisworks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open
Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, Pipeplus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials,
RasterDWG, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage,
Softimage|XSI (design/logo), Sparks, SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, ToolClip, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual,
Visual LISP, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo).
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Disclaimer
THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS.
Published By:
Autodesk, Inc.
111 Mclnnis Parkway
San Rafael, CA 94903, USA
Contents
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter 2 Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Moving Data from Land Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Labels and Tables Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Project Management Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Survey Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Points Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Surfaces Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Grading Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Parcels Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
iii
Alignments Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Superelevation Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Corridor Modeling Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Intersection and Roundabout Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Profiles Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Sections Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Material and Quantity Analysis Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Pipe Networks Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
File and Data Sharing Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Plan Production Tools Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
iv | Contents
Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Contents | v
Chapter 14 Survey Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Survey Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Survey Command Language Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
vi | Contents
Renumbering Table Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
Lines and Curves Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Contents | vii
Chapter 24 Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
Understanding Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
Alignment Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929
Alignment Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
Criteria-Based Alignment Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
Alignment Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946
Creating Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948
Widenings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
Adding Lines, Curves, and Spirals to an Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970
Alignment Labels and Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043
Editing Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060
Reversing Alignment Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083
Reversing Alignment Sub-Entity Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084
Using AutoCAD Object Snaps with Alignment Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085
Deleting Alignment Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087
Alignment Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088
viii | Contents
Chapter 29 Pipe Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1325
Understanding Pipe Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1325
Creating Pipe Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332
Editing Pipe Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343
Editing Pipe Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1345
Displaying Pipe Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1364
Checking for Interferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369
Part Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1378
Part Catalog and Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380
Part Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390
Labeling Pipe Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1404
Adding Pipe Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1414
Adding Structure Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415
Rendering Pipe Network Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1416
Using Hydraulics and Hydrology Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417
Pipe Network Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1428
Contents | ix
Understanding Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537
Creating Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
Managing and Editing Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1548
Sharing Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1552
Understanding Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1555
Creating Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1557
Managing and Editing Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1562
Sharing Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1565
Using Codes and Code Set Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1567
Assembly and Subassembly Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1583
x | Contents
Using Azimuth and Distance to Specify a Point Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1773
Using Side Shots to Specify a Point Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1774
Using Northing and Easting to Specify a Point Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1775
Using Grid Northing and Easting to Specify a Point Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1776
Using Latitude and Longitude to Specify a Point Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1776
Using a Point Number to Specify a Point Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1777
Using a Point Object to Specify a Point Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1778
Using a Point Name to Specify a Point Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1779
Using a Station Offset to Specify a Point Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1779
Using a Profile Station and an Elevation to Specify a Point Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1780
Using an Alignment and Surface to Specify a Point Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1781
Using an Alignment and COGO Point to Specify a Point Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1782
Using Station and Elevation to Specify a Point Location in a Profile View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1782
Using Elevation and Grade to Specify a Point Location in a Profile View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1783
Using Grade and Length to Specify a Point Location in a Profile View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1784
Using Grade and Station to Specify a Point Location in a Profile View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1784
Specifying a Length by Selecting an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1785
Specifying a Radius by Selecting an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1786
Entering an Elevation for a Transparent Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1786
Using Point Filters Within Transparent Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1787
Transparent Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1788
Contents | xi
Chapter 43 LandXML Import and Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1875
Understanding LandXML Import and Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1875
Viewing and Editing LandXML Drawing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1880
Importing LandXML Drawing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1883
Exporting LandXML Drawing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1884
LandXML Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1885
xii | Contents
Create Offset Alignments Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1981
Curve and Spiral Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1983
Edit Feature Settings - Alignment Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1983
Offset Alignment Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1989
Profile Geometry Points Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1992
Superelevation Critical Points Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1993
Contents | xiii
Corridor Surfaces Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2045
Edit Code Sets Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2047
Create COGO Points Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2048
Create Corridor Baseline Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2049
Create Corridor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2049
Create Corridor Region Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2051
Create Corridor Surfaces Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2051
Create Feature Line From Corridor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2051
Create Simple Corridor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2052
Define Slope Patterns Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2053
Edit Feature Settings - Corridor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2053
Frequency to Apply Assemblies Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2060
Match Region Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2061
Select a Feature Line Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2061
Select a Profile Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2062
Select a Subassembly to Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2062
Select Entities by Layer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2062
Set Slope or Elevation Target Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2063
Set Width or Offset Target Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2064
Target Mapping Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2064
View/Edit Corridor Section Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2065
xiv | Contents
Set Grading Layers Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2123
Slope Pattern Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2123
Edit Geometry Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2126
Edit Elevations Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2127
Feature Line Contextual Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2129
Create Feature Lines Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2129
Assign Elevations Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2130
Create Feature Line From Alignment Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2131
Feature Line Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2132
Weed Vertices Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2133
Fit Curve Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2135
Set Elevations From Surface Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2136
Feature Line Site Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2136
Apply Feature Line Names Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2138
Apply Feature Line Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2138
Edit Feature Line Curve Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2138
Contents | xv
LandXML Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2214
Export To LandXML Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2219
xvi | Contents
Criteria Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2308
Interference Check Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2309
Interference Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2311
Interference Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2312
Match Elevation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2313
Pipe Table Creation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2313
Structure Table Creation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2313
Table Cell Components Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2314
Component Row Order Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2315
Rename Pipe Network Parts Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2315
Export to Storm Sewers Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2316
Part Matchup Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2316
Contents | xvii
Chapter 69 Point Clouds Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2379
Edit Feature Settings-Point Cloud Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2379
Create Point Cloud Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2379
Point Cloud Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2381
Point Cloud Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2383
Add Points Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2385
Add Points to Surface Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2385
xviii | Contents
New Folder Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2457
New Project Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2457
Project Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2457
Properties - Civil 3D Projects Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2458
Protect Points Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2458
Reset Points To Checked In Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2458
Select Projects To Display Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2458
Set Data Shortcuts Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2459
Sync To Project Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2459
Undo Check Out Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2460
Undo Check Out Points Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2460
Unprotect Points Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2460
Contents | xix
Section Data Band Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2528
Section Display Controls Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2530
Section Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2531
Section Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2532
Section Sources Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2533
Section Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2534
Section View Bands Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2535
Section View Band Set Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2535
Section View Group Bands Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2538
Section View Group Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2540
Section View Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2542
Section View Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2550
Select Page Layout Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2558
Sheet Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2558
Sheet Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2559
xx | Contents
Superelevation View Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2608
Superelevation View Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2609
Superelevation Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2610
Contents | xxi
Import / Re-import Field Book Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2679
Import / Re-import Survey LandXML Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2681
Import / Re-import Point File Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2683
Import / Re-import Points From Drawing Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2684
Import Survey Data Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2685
Least Squares Analysis Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2686
Manage Extended Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2687
New Control Point/Control Point Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2688
New Direction/Direction Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2689
New/Edit Extended Property Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2690
New Figure Group/Figure Group Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2690
New Network Group/Network Group Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2692
New Non-Control Point/Non-Control Point Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2692
New Setup/Setup Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2693
New Survey Network Dialog Box/Survey Network Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2694
New Survey Point Group/Survey Point Group Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2695
New Traverse/Traverse Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2696
Process Linework Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2696
Preview Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2697
Survey Command Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2697
Survey Database Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2698
Survey Database Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2698
Survey Figure Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2704
Survey Figure Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2707
Survey Network Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2710
Survey Network Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2711
Survey Panorama Vistas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2713
Survey Point Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2724
Survey Tab Item View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2725
Survey User Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2726
Translate Survey Database Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2730
Traverse Analysis Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2732
xxii | Contents
Blocks Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2759
Inquiry Tool Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2760
Coordinate Tracker Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2760
Export To SDF Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2761
DWF Publishing Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2762
Civil Batch Drawing Converter Dialog Box Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2763
Sight Distance Check Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2765
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2767
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2789
Contents | xxiii
xxiv
Getting Started
1
2
New Features
1
AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011 contains many new features and enhancements.
Automatic curve New widening features have been added to dynamic offset Select an offset alignment.
widening based alignments. Now you can automatically add widening around Click Offset Alignment
on rules horizontal curves based on a design standard (specified in a tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Add
design criteria file), or manually by setting numeric values.
Automatic Widening .
■ New Widening Criteria tab has been added to the Create
Offset Alignment dialog box.
■ New Add Automatic Widening command provides the
ability to add automatic widening to existing offset align-
ments.
Segmented trans- New command settings improve the way that offset alignments In Toolspace ➤ Settings
itions around are drawn in curve conditions. Now you can specify the number tab, expand Alignment ➤
curves for offset of segments, and the segment type (lines or arcs) used to dis- Commands ➤ right-click
alignments tribute a widening transition linearly along curves. This enables AddWidening ➤ Edit
more realistic looking transitions on offset alignments. For more Command Settings. The
information, see Setting Defaults for Linear Transitions Around new Linear Transition
Curves in Widenings (page 969). Around Curves node con-
tains the new command
settings.
Improved station The station locking behavior on alignments has been enhanced. When moving alignments,
locking behavior Now design points, such as design speed locations and station you may notice that design
on alignments equation definitions, remain in relative geometric locations when points, such as design speed
the alignment geometry is edited. Previously, these locations locations and station equa-
would move to the new station location, losing their geometric tion definitions, now remain
relevance. in relative geometric loca-
3
Feature Description Location
tions when the alignment
geometry is edited.
.NET API .NET API support has been added for the following objects:
■ Offset Alignments
■ Profile and Profile View Labels
■ Superelevation
NOTE AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011 also includes the API enhancements to styles, command settings,
and alignment labels that were included in AutoCAD Civil 3D - .NET API Extension R1 and
AutoCAD Civil 3D Update 2.
Corridor editing A variety of new, and some existing, corridor editing commands Select a corridor. On the
enhancements are now available from the Corridor ribbon tab. Corridor ribbon tab there
For example, now you can modify corridor regions using com- are new panels and com-
mands available from the ribbon. These commands are still mands.
available from the Corridor Properties dialog box; however, ac-
cessing these commands from the ribbon often provides a more
streamlined workflow.
The following new panels have been added to the Corridor rib-
bon tab: Modify Corridor, Modify Region, Modify Corridor Sec-
tion, Analyze. For more information, see Managing and Editing
Corridors (page 1478).
Baselines in Pro- The Corridors collection in Prospector now displays the baselines In the Toolspace, on the
spector associated with each corridor. Now you can view and select the Prospector tab, expand
baselines associated with a corridor from the Prospector, as well Corridors ➤ Corridor
as from the Corridor Properties dialog box. For more information, name.
see Corridors Collection (Prospector Tab) (page 1474).
Add corridor sta- A new setting automatically adds all geometry points of the offset Select a corridor. Click Cor-
tions based on target objects and offset baseline alignments into the corridor ridor tab ➤ Modify Region
offset targets definition. This reduces the need for manual operations. Addi-
panel ➤ Edit Frequency
tional assembly insertion stations are automatically added to the
. Select a region. In the Fre-
regions at these points. For more information, see Adding Assem-
quency To Apply Assemblies
blies At Offset Geometry Points (page 1485).
dialog box, see the new At
Offset Target Geometry
Points option.
Associate Project This command is used to associate a default Data Shortcut project In Toolspace, on the Pro-
To Current to current drawing. It can also be used to remove the drawing’s spector tab, right-click Data
Drawing association to a project. For more information, see Associating Shortcuts ➤ Associate
a Drawing with a Data Shortcut Project (page 150). Project To Current Drawing.
Associate Project This command is used to associate a default Data Shortcut project In Toolspace, on the Pro-
To Multiple to multiple drawings contained in a specified folder on the file spector tab, right-click Data
Drawings system. It can also be used to remove the project association Shortcuts ➤ Associate
from multiple drawings. For more information, see Associating Project To Multiple Draw-
Multiple Drawings with a Data Shortcut Project (page 150). ings.
Support for 64- Due to the requirement to support a 64-bit operating system, On the Prospector and Sur-
bit Operating existing external project point databases and survey database vey tabs in Toolspace, an
System requires files must be migrated to Microsoft® SQL Server® Compact 3.5 item that requires migration
database migra- format from Microsoft Access Database format. will display the “out-of-
tion The following AutoCAD Civil 3D project files created in AutoCAD
date” icon to provide a
Civil 3D 2010 or earlier versions must be migrated to Microsoft
visual cue that it requires
SQL Server Compact format before they can be accessed in
migration.
AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011.
To complete the migration,
■ PointsGeometry.mdb
right-click the item and se-
■ PointsStatus.mdb lect the migration com-
■ Survey.sdb mand.
Support for 64- Vault projects must also be migrated due to the requirement to On the Prospector tab in
bit Operating support a 64-bit operating system. Toolspace, expand the Pro-
System requires When you perform the migration, Vault checks the project out, jects collection. An item
Vault project mi- migrates the files, then checks them back in, and the version that requires migration will
gration number is incremented. display the “out-of-date”
The migrated project files are not backwards-compatible with
icon to provide a visual
previous versions of AutoCAD Civil 3D.
cue that it requires migra-
For more information, see Migrating Old Civil 3D Projects (page
tion.
176).
To complete the migration,
right-click the item and se-
lect the migration com-
mand.
Decimal charac- The following new label options are available: Properties tab of the Text
ter and digit ■ Decimal Character: Use Operating System Setting is now Component Editor - Con-
grouping support provided as an option in addition to the existing options tents dialog box
Period and Comma.
■ Digit Grouping Symbol: Select Period, Comma, or Use
Operating System Setting.
■ Digit Grouping: Select a digit grouping or Use Operating
System Setting.
Station Equation The Station Equation ID property is useful in situations where Properties tab of the Text
ID as a label and there are duplicate stations along an alignment because station Component Editor - Con-
table property equations have been assigned. The new label property indicates tents dialog box.
which station equation a specific station value (as shown in the
label) is associated with.
The Station Equation ID property is available for the following
types of label and table styles with station values:
■ Alignments
■ Profiles
■ Profile Views
■ Section Views
■ Mass Haul Line
■ Mass Haul View
■ Pipes
■ Structures
■ Intersections
■ Quantity Takeoff
■ View Frame
■ Match Line
Grid and geodet- In general line label styles the following grid and geodetic label Properties tab of the Text
ic line labels options have been added: Component Editor - Con-
■ General Segment Grid Distance tents dialog box.
Profile view band Previously, profile labels within profile view bands were always In Toolspace, on the Set-
style anchor con- drawn at the midpoint of the segment drawn in the profile view, tings tab, expand Profile
trol regardless of whether this was the true midpoint. Now using View ➤ Band Styles, Hori-
the Anchor Label To setting, you can specify whether you want zontal Geometry or Vertical
to keep this behavior (Segment In Band), or to create the label Geometry types
at the true midpoint (True Geometry Location). For more inform-
ation, see Band Details Tab (Profile Data Band Style Dialog Box)
(page 2414).
Split Network The new Split Network command enables you to split a pipe Select a pipe network. Click
network in to two pipe networks. The selected pipe network Pipe Networks tab ➤ Modify
parts do not move, however, they are associated with a new panel ➤ Split Network .
pipe network name. For more information, see Splitting Pipe
Networks (page 1358).
Merge Networks The new Merge Networks command enables you to merge two Select a pipe network. Click
pipe networks into a single pipe network. For more information, Pipe Networks tab ➤ Modify
see Merging Pipe Networks (page 1359). panel ➤ Merge Networks
.
Vertex Elevation Now when you create a pipe network from an object, you can Home tab ➤ Create Design
Reference specify the location on the part to use as a Vertex Elevation Ref- panel ➤ Pipe Network drop-
erence. Instead of automatically assigning the elevation of the down ➤ Create Pipe Net-
object to the centerline of the pipe, you can now specify which work From Object .
part of the pipe (Outside Top, Crown, Centerline, Invert, or
Outside Bottom) is used to specify the elevation of the part. For
more information, see Using Vertex Elevations (page 1336).
List Available A new command, List Available Point Numbers, is available to Select a COGO point. Click
Point Numbers help you determine which point numbers have already been COGO Point tab ➤ COGO
used in the drawing. It lists the points that are in use in the cur-
Point Tools panel ➤
rent drawing file, and the point numbers that are available to
➤ List Available Point
be assigned for the creation of new COGO points.
Listing Available Point Numbers (page 541). Numbers .
Point group dis- The Point Groups dialog box now includes Move to Top and In Toolspace, on the Pro-
play order Move to Bottom buttons to control the display order. spector tab, right-click the
This dialog box also supports multiple selections of point groups, Point Groups collection ➤
using standard Windows selection methods. Use Shift + click to Properties.
select a contiguous group, and CTRL + click to select a non-
contiguous group.
For more information, see Changing the Point Group Display
Order (page 558).
Geodetic inverse Geodetic direction and distance information is now reported in Analyze tab ➤ Inquiry pan-
reporting the Point Inverse inquiry type.
el ➤ Inquiry Tool .
For more information, see Inquiry Types (page 1808).
Add point cloud The new Add Points To Surface command enables you to extract Select a point cloud. Click
points to surface points from a point cloud to add to a new or existing surface. Point Cloud tab ➤ Point
You can use the entire point cloud or points within a specified Cloud Tools panel ➤ Add
region.
For more information, see Adding Point Cloud Points to Surfaces Points To Surface .
(page 600).
QTO based on A new parameter, Part Depth, is now available in the Pay Item Analyze tab ➤ QTO pan-
pipe or structure Formula dialog box.
el ➤ QTO Manager . In
depth Part Depth can currently be used for AutoCAD Civil 3D pipe and
the QTO Manager vista,
structure entities. For pipes, Part Depth is defined as (maximum
click in the Formula cell of
cover + minimum cover) /2 + part outer diameter. This new
a pay item.
parameter can be used to compute trenching volume for pipes,
for example. For structures, Part Depth is equal to the structure's
height.
For more information, see Applying and Editing Formulas (page
1305).
Milling report A new report, intended to be used with corridor surfaces created In Toolspace, on the Tool-
by milling/overlay subassemblies, provides station and offset box tab, in the Reports
data of the milling areas. This report also includes the total area Manager ➤ Corridor collec-
of milling for the specified corridor and baseline. tion
For more information, see Create Reports - Milling Report (page
2480).
PDF output Adobe PDF output is now provided for most report types. For Available in report dialog
more information, see Generating a Report (page 1758). boxes as a file type.
LandXML Report- The settings for the LandXML reports are now exposed in the In Toolspace, on the Tool-
ing Settings Toolbox. box tab, click the Report
For example, the General Legal Description reports for align- Settings button.
ments and parcels use the Legal Descriptions settings.
For more information, see Specifying Report Settings (page 1757).
Additional volu- The existing Compute Materials command and the Sample Line Analyze tab ➤ Volumes And
metric methods Group Properties (Material List tab) have been enhanced to allow Materials panel ➤ Compute
the selection of the volume computation method: Average End
Area, Prismoidal, or Composite Volume. Previously, section Materials .
volumes were calculated using only the Average End Area
method.
For more information, see Sectional Volume Methods (page 1277).
Gap definitions A new gap definition capability has been added to the Sample Select a sample line. Click
Line Group Properties (Material List tab). You can define gaps Sample Line tab ➤ Modify
in materials based on station ranges. In addition, you can define panel ➤ Group Properties
Run Out Distance and Run In Distance properties for the gaps
to allow for better volume calculations in those areas. . Click the Material List
For more information, see Defining Gaps and Pockets of Materials tab, and then click in the
(page 1283). Gap column.
Create layouts The new Create Section Sheets command enables you to gener- Click Output tab ➤ Plan
from section ate layouts for plotting cross sections. For more information, see Production panel ➤ Create
views Section Sheet Production (page 1934).
Enhancements have been made to the Create Multiple Views Section Sheets .
command to support the Create Section Sheets command. To
generate sheets, you must first generate multiple cross section
views using the new Production option and select a DWT with
a Section type viewport. For more information, see Section
Placement Page (Create Multiple Section Views Wizard) (page
2487).
Project objects to The new Project Objects To Multiple Section Views command Click Home tab ➤ Profile &
multiple cross enables you to project objects to multiple section views based Section Views panel ➤ Sec-
sections in a on their proximity to the sample line. tion Views drop-
single operation For more information, see Projecting Objects to Multiple Section down ➤ Project Objects To
Views (page 1265).
Multiple Section Views
.
Calculate/Edit Su- The new Calculate/Edit Superelevation command replaces the Select an alignment. Click
perelevation Superelevation tab on the Alignment Properties dialog box and Alignment tab ➤ Modify
command enables you to use a wizard and an editor: panel ➤ Superelevation
■ The Calculate Superelevation wizard walks you through the drop-down ➤ Calcu-
calculation of superelevation for all curves or any given
curves in an alignment. The wizard also provides some new late/Edit Superelevation
options such as the ability to resolve overlap conditions. For .
more information, see Calculating Superelevation Data Using
the Wizard (page 1098).
■ Prior to calculating superelevation, the Superelevation Curve
Manager displays the details for each curve in the alignment
and the status of the superelevation. When you calculate
Superelevation The new Superelevation Tabular Editor provides a tabular inter- Select an alignment. Click
Tabular Editor face where you can edit superelevation data after creation and Alignment tab ➤ Modify
also add or delete critical stations in each region. The editor panel ➤ Superelevation
displays all of the critical stations and calculated superelevation drop-down ➤ Calcu-
data including the cross slopes for each lane.
For more information, see Editing Superelevation Data in the late/Edit Superelevation
Tabular Editor (page 1108). .
In the Superelevation Curve
Manager, click Open Tabu-
lar Editor.
Superelevation The new Superelevation View command provides the ability to Select an alignment. Click
views create superelevation views, which show a graphical represent- Alignment tab ➤ Modify
ation of the superelevation along the curves of an alignment. panel ➤ Superelevation Ed-
The superelevation views provide grips for graphical editing. itor drop-down ➤ Superel-
You can use Ctrl + click to select a single station. Superelevation
Views collections are provided in Toolspace. For more informa- evation View
tion, see Using Superelevation Views (page 1105). .
Superelevation New options are provided to control the superelevation band On the Toolspace Settings
bands on profile height and to specify a vertical exaggeration. tab, expand Profile View ➤
views For more information, see Band Details Tab (Profile Data Band Band Styles ➤ Supereleva-
Style Dialog Box) (page 2414). tion Data.
Right-click a Superelevation
Data style ➤ Edit. Click the
Band Details tab.
Bounded The Bounded Volumes command has been enhanced to calcu- Analyze tab ➤ Volumes And
Volumes com- late surface-to-datum elevation volumes. Previously, for terrain Materials panel ➤ Volumes
mand adds sup- surfaces, the volume was calculated from the zero elevation to drop-down ➤ Bounded
port for datum the elevations in the bounded area. Now instead of defaulting
elevation to zero, you can specify the datum elevation to use. Volumes .
For more information, see Calculating Bounded Volumes (page
742).
Commands for The Toolspace window, and each Toolspace tab, can now be Home tab ➤ Palettes panel
opening and opened and closed individually. and View tab ➤ Palettes
closingToolspace For more information, see Opening or Closing the Toolspace panel.
tabs Window (page 96).
Survey Toolspace In the Survey Toolspace collections, the order and functionality Survey tab of Toolspace
commands for some of the right-click commands has changed.
The panorama vista editor is displayed when you use the right-
click Edit command on an item in the Network collection.
The panorama vista editor is displayed when you use the right-
click Edit command from the Network Groups, Figure Groups,
and Survey Point Groups collections.
The right-click Edit command is no longer available from selected
items in the item list view in Survey Toolspace.
Survey Toolspace The preview pane has been removed from the Survey tab and Survey tab of Toolspace
is now shown in a separate window.
■ The preview window can be opened and closed by selecting
the Survey Preview button from the Survey tab toolbar.
■ The Survey Preview Settings can be accessed by selecting
the Survey Preview Settings button from the Survey tab
toolbar.
■ When the preview window is open, any item selected in the
Survey Toolspace (tree view or list view) that supports a
preview will be displayed in the preview window according
to its current Survey Preview Settings.
Attach a DGN You can import MicroStation DGN drawing files into DWG files. Insert tab ➤ Import pan-
File as an Under- The import process translates basic DGN data into the corres-
lay ponding DWG file data. The DGN data is placed into the DWG el ➤ Import. Select a
as an underlay. Depending on the settings that you specify, the DGN file. On the Import
DGN entities and their associated linetypes may be nested DGN Settings dialog box,
within the DGN underlay, and then copied into the host drawing. select the Import Into Cur-
For more information, see Attaching a DGN File as an Underlay rent Drawing check box.
(page 1897).
Copy nested ob- You can copy objects that are nested in a DGN underlay that Home tab ➤ Modify pan-
jects nested in a exists in the current drawing. The NCopy command copies el ➤ Copy Nested Objects
DGN underlay nested objects from DGN underlays, xrefs, or blocks into the
host drawing. For more information, see Copying Objects that
are Nested in a DGN Underlay (page 1898).
HEC-RAS Exten- The HEC-RAS Import and Export Tools Extension is now integ- Click Output tab ➤ Export
sion rated intoAutoCAD Civil 3D. These tools enable you to analyze panel ➤ Export To HEC RAS
flood data using the River Analysis System public domain soft-
ware from the United States Army Corps of Engineers’ Hydrologic .
Engineering Center. For more information, see HEC-RAS Import Click Insert tab ➤ Import
and Export (page 1887). panel ➤ ➤ Import HEC
RAS .
Stage Storage Ex- The Stage Storage Tool Extension is now integrated into Auto- Click Analyze tab ➤ Stage
tension CAD Civil 3D. Using these tools, you can calculate incremental
Storage .
and cumulative volumes of a basin from an AutoCAD Civil 3D
surface, using either a surface or polylines to define the basin.
For more information, see Calculating Stage Storage Volumes
from a Surface (page 743).
Create Alignment Provides the ability to create a new alignment from all or part Click Home tab ➤ Create
From Existing of an existing horizontal alignment. For more information, see Design panel ➤ Alignment
Alignment Creating an Alignment from an Existing Alignment (page 957). drop-down ➤ Create Align-
ment From Existing Align-
ment .
Create Best Fit Provides the ability to create a new alignment using points sur- Click Home tab ➤ Create
Alignment veyed along a roadway centerline. Input can also be polylines Design panel ➤ Alignment
or blocks. For more information, see Creating an Alignment by drop-down ➤ Create Best
Best Fit (page 960).
Fit Alignment .
Spiral By Swept Provides the ability to draw a spiral by specifying the total angle Additional prompt added
Angle that the spiral sweeps through. The prompt for angle is added to existing spiral creation
to the existing prompt for A value or length. For more informa- command.
tion, see To add a fixed spiral (page 1017).
Import Superelev- Provides the ability to import superelevation data from a Mi- Select an alignment. Click
ation Data From crosoft Excel CSV file. For more information, see Importing Su- Alignment tab ➤ Modify
File perelevation Data (page 1100). panel ➤ Superelevation
drop-down ➤ Calcu-
late/Edit Superelevation
.
Select the Tabular Editor
button on the Supereleva-
tion Curve Manager dialog
box.
Minimum Dis- Provides the ability to list the shortest 2D distance between two Click Analyze tab ➤ Inquiry
tance Between entities and to optionally draw a persistent line to identify the
panel Minimum Dis-
Entities location of this distance. For more information, see Identifying
the Shortest Distance Between Two Entities (page 1811). tance Between Entities
.
Minimum Dis- Provides the ability to list the minimum vertical distance between Click Analyze tab ➤ Ground
tance Between two surfaces. For more information, see Identifying the Shortest
Data panel Minimum
Surfaces Distance Between Two Surfaces (page 770).
Distance Between Surfaces
Minimum Vertic- Provides the ability to list the vertical distance between two en- Click Analyze tab ➤ Inquiry
al Distance tities at the point where they cross in plan view. For more inform-
panel Minimum Vertic-
Between Entities ation, see Identifying the Vertical Distance Between Two Entities
al Distance Between Entities
(page 1812).
.
Create Point Provides the ability to create a point cloud object, which is a Click Home tab ➤ Create
Cloud collection of points scanned from a terrestrial or airborne laser
Ground Data panel
scanner. For more information, see Creating Point Cloud Objects
(page 596). Create Point Cloud .
There are new collections in the Toolspace Settings and Prospect-
or trees for managing point clouds.
For more information about point cloud settings, see Point Cloud
Settings dialog box (page 2379).
Zoom To Point Provides the ability to zoom to a COGO point, specified by Ribbon: Select a point. Click
number or name. For more information, see Zooming to a Point COGO Point tab ➤ COGO
(page 1768). Point Tools panel Zoom
To Point .
Subscription Features | 13
Feature Description Location
Transparent Commands
toolbar:
Create Best Fit Provides the ability to create a new profile using points surveyed Click Home tab ➤ Create
Profile along a roadway centerline. Input can also be polylines or blocks. Design panel ➤ Profile
For more information, see Creating a Profile by Best Fit (page drop-down ➤ Create Best
1154).
Fit Profile .
Profile Grade Elev- Provides the ability to create a point of vertical intersection (PVI) Transparent Commands
ation at a specific elevation along a fixed grade line. For more inform-
toolbar: .
ation, see Using Elevation and Grade to Specify a Point Location
in a Profile View (page 1783).
Solve Tangent In- Provides the ability to create a continuous profile of tangents Available from the Profile
tersection and PVIs from existing profile tangents that do not currently in- Layout Tools ➤ tangent
tersect. For more information, see Extending Profile Tangents creation drop-down.
to a PVI (page 1165).
Create Round- Provides the ability to automatically draw a roundabout by se- Click Home tab ➤ Create
about lecting existing alignments. For more information, see Creating Design panel ➤ Intersec-
Roundabouts (page 1631). tions drop-down ➤ Create
Roundabout .
Edit Roundabout Provides the ability to edit a roundabout that had been drawn Select a roundabout align-
using the Create Roundabout feature. For more information, see ment.Click Alignment
Editing Roundabouts (page 1634). tab ➤ Modify Roundabout
panel ➤ Edit Roundabout
Delete Round- Provides the ability to delete elements created using the Create Select a roundabout align-
about Roundabout feature. For more information, see Deleting ment.Click Alignment
Roundabouts (page 1637). tab ➤ Modify Roundabout
panel ➤ Delete Roundabout
Add Approach Provides the ability to add an approach road to a roundabout Click Home tab ➤ Create
that has been created using the Create Roundabout feature. For Design panel ➤ Intersec-
more information, see Adding Approach Roads (page 1632). tions drop-down ➤ Add
Approach .
Add Turn Slip Provides the ability to add a slip lane to a roundabout that has Click Home tab ➤ Create
Lane been created using the Create Roundabout feature. For more Design panel ➤ Intersec-
information, see Adding Slip Lanes (page 1633).
Create Cropped Provides the ability to crop a section of a large surface along Click Home tab ➤ Create
Surface existing triangulation lines, and to put the cropped surface in a Ground Data panel ➤ Sur-
new or existing drawing. For more information, see Cropping faces drop-down ➤ Create
Surfaces (page 716).
Cropped Surface .
Create Surface Provides the ability to create a surface based on Arc Spatial Data Click Home tab ➤ Create
From GIS Data Engine (ArcSDE). For more information, see Creating Surfaces Ground Data panel ➤ Sur-
from GIS Data (page 658). faces drop-down ➤ Create
Resolve Crossing Provides the ability to identify and resolve crossing breaklines in Click Analyze tab ➤ Ground
Breaklines a surface or a survey database. For more information, see Finding
Data panel Resolve
and Fixing Crossing Breaklines (page 771).
Crossing Breaklines .
Breakline Reports Provides reports to list crossing breaklines in a surface or a survey In Toolspace, on the Tool-
database and to list invalid breakline conditions. For more inform- box tab, expand Reports
ation, see Creating Breakline Reports (page 772). Manager ➤ Breakline.
Creating new Create new survey figures by selecting COGO Points, Survey In Toolspace, on the Survey
survey figures Points, or other positions in the drawing. For more information, tab ➤ right-click Figures
see Creating a New Figure (page 347). collection ➤ New.
Survey Figure Provides a new interface for editing survey figures. For more in- Select a figure in the draw-
Properties formation, see Editing Survey Figure Vertices (page 366). ing. Click Survey
tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Sur-
Importing mul- Provides the ability to use control-click to select multiple point Click Home tab ➤ Create
tiple point files files for import. For more information, see Importing Multiple Ground Data panel ➤ Im-
Point Files (page 262).
port Survey Data .
Import TSS File Provides the ability to import TSS field survey data files. For more Click Home tab ➤ Create
information, see Importing Multiple Point Files (page 262). Ground Data panel ➤ Im-
Importing point Provides the ability to import point files using point file formats Click Home tab ➤ Create
files that contain that contain user-defined properties. For more information, see Ground Data panel ➤ Im-
user-defined Importing Point Files that Contain User-defined Properties (page
properties 263) port Survey Data .
Subscription Features | 15
Feature Description Location
Display Change Provides a report to show changes to the survey database. For In Toolspace, on the Survey
Report more information, see Survey Database Change Report (page tab, right-click a survey
221). database ➤ Display
Change Report.
Drive Displays a 3D visual perspective that simulates “driving” along Click Analyze tab ➤ Design
a roadway. For more information, see Using the Drive Command panel ➤ Visibility Check
(page 1842).
drop-down ➤ Drive .
Point To Point Provides line of sight analysis between any two points in the Click Analyze tab ➤ Design
model with respect to one or more surfaces. For more informa- panel ➤ Visibility Check
tion, see Checking Sight Distance Using Point to Point Line of drop-down ➤ Point To
Sight (page 1845).
Point .
Check Sight Dis- Provides line of sight analysis at specified intervals along a cor- Click Analyze tab ➤ Design
tance ridor. For more information, see Calculating Sight Distance Along panel ➤ Visibility Check
a Corridor (page 1846). drop-down ➤ Check Sight
Distance .
Zone Of Visual Provides line of sight analysis 360 degrees around a single point Click Analyze tab ➤ Design
Influence with respect to one or more surfaces. For more information, see panel ➤ Visibility Check
Checking Sight Distance Using a Zone of Visual Influence (page drop-down ➤ Zone Of
1848).
Visual Influence .
New templates for section sheet creation New imperial and metric templates are provided for section
sheet creation. These templates have a viewport that is set to
“Section” type.
The following section templates are located in the Template\Plan
Production folder:
■ Civil 3D (Imperial) Section.dwt
■ Civil 3D (Metric) Section.dwt
Drawing Settings
Feature Description
Drawing Settings dialog box, Object Layers Superelevation View layer: C-ROAD-SE-VIEW
tab
General Settings
Feature Description
General line label styles Geodetic and grid direction and distance properties can be
labeled on line segments. The following new label styles are
provided as sample content to support these new direction and
distance properties.
■ Geodetic Azimuth Over Distance
■ Geodetic Bearing Over Distance
■ Grid Azimuth Over Distance
■ Grid Bearing Over Distance
Alignment Settings
Feature Description
Corridor Settings
Feature Description
Label Styles Default names for Plan Profile labels are now consistent for im-
perial and metric templates (“Length Description and Slope”
and “Name Only”).
Point cloud styles ■ True Color: Displays point cloud points in true color if the
point cloud database contains RGB data.
■ LIDAR Point Classification: Displays point cloud points by
LIDAR point classification if the point cloud database contains
LIDAR point classification data.
■ Elevation Ranges: Displays the point cloud points in elevation
ranges, at a specified number of ranges or range interval
and a color scheme.
■ Grayscale Intensity: Displays point cloud points in a grayscale
intensity if the point cloud database contains intensity data.
■ Scaled Color Intensity (Red, Green, Blue versions): Displays
point cloud points in either a red, green, or blue scaled color
intensity if the point cloud database contains intensity data.
■ Single Color: Displays the point cloud points in a single color.
Point file formats The following new point file formats are provided to support the
importing of point cloud data using the point cloud commands
CreatePointCloud and AddPointsToSurface.
Comma and space-delimited versions of the following:
■ XYZ_Intensity: Contains X, Y, Z coordinates and Intensity
data
■ XYZ_RGB: Contains X, Y, Z coordinates and RGB data
■ XYZ_LIDAR Classification: Contains X, Y, Z coordinates and
LiDAR point classification data
Command Settings: CreateSampleLines ■ Default Swath Widths: Widths are changed to 20.000m
(metric templates only)
■ Sampling Increments: Increments are changed to 20.000m
Migrate the LDT data ----- There are various tools and methods for moving
Land Desktop data into AutoCAD Civil 3D.
21
Setting Up Label Settings and Styles
Specify settings for labels at various levels in the hierarchal Settings tree. In addition, you define specific
settings for individual labels in the label styles, which manage label content.
The highest levels of settings can serve as a general prototype model for settings that are lower in the
hierarchy. Those settings, if not locked at the drawing level, can be overridden in subordinate settings.
Define a label style (page 1656) ----- Define the settings for a new label style.
22 | Chapter 2 Workflows
You can modify label object properties by
Modify labels in a drawing (page
----- right-clicking a label and selecting Label Properties
1712) or Properties to open the AutoCAD Properties
palette.
Add expressions (page 1726) ----- Set up mathematical expressions to use in label
styles.
Manage layout properties (page You use the Layout tab of the Label Style
----- Composer dialog box to control text and border
1671)
settings, display properties, and content.
Manage dragged properties (page Use the Dragged State tab of the Label Style
----- Composer dialog box to define leader visibility
1681)
and properties for dragged label text.
Set up table styles (page 1738) ----- Table styles define which data is displayed in the
table, and control the table appearance.
Modify tables (page 1750) ----- You can modify the appearance of a table, or add
or remove data.
Standard Workflow
Use these steps as a guide to create an efficient network of drawings within a project.
Create individual design objects ----- Create the basic surfaces, alignments, and other
object to be shared.
24 | Chapter 2 Workflows
Data Shortcuts Workflow
Follow these steps for each new data shortcut project.
Set up the project data (page 146) ----- Select the appropriate project template, then
create a project folder within the working folder.
Set up the data shortcuts folder Designate the new project folder as the active
----- data shortcuts folder. Save project drawings in
(page 148)
the appropriate subfolders of the project folder.
Create data shortcuts (page 151) ----- Open each design drawing and create shortcuts
for any objects to be shared with other drawings.
Validate data shortcuts (page 155) ----- Periodically validate shortcuts and repair any
broken references.
Add drawings to the project (page While adding source drawings to the project,
----- designate which objects can be shared with other
177)
drawings.
Synchronize drawings with latest Ensure that data references are regularly updated
----- with the latest versions of project objects as
project data (page 182)
designs change.
Survey Workflow
For information about project phases, see Survey Project Phases (page 210).
Verify Survey user settings (page Survey user settings are specific to a Windows
----- user login account and affect only the survey
227)
features including linework defaults.
26 | Chapter 2 Workflows
Set or verify equipment properties
----- Equipment properties specify the values
(page 246) associated with a specific surveying instrument.
Create/verify Figure Prefix database The Survey Figure Prefix database contains
----- information on how figures are created and
(page 222)
stylized.
Verify Survey drawing settings Survey drawing feature settings specify the default
----- styles for the survey network object and the figure
(page 247)
object.
Review/update import events The import event provides a framework that you
----- can use to view and edit specific survey data that
(page 274)
is referenced within the import event.
Create/edit survey figures (page Use the Survey Figure commands to create and
----- edit survey figures, as well as to perform figure
347)
inquiries.
Analyze Survey Figures (page 382) ----- Obtain figure information using mapcheck and
inverse methods.
Analyze Survey traverses (page 403) ----- Analyze traverse data to determine the error of
closure.
28 | Chapter 2 Workflows
Export survey data to a field book
----- Export survey data from an individual network,
(page 269) individual figure, or collection of figures.
Create surface breaklines (page 349) ----- Use figures that you located in your survey as
surface breaklines.
Export data to LandXML (page 270) ----- Export survey LandXML data directly from the
survey database.
Points Workflow
Refer to this section for high-level descriptions of tasks you might perform when working with points in
AutoCAD Civil 3D.
Create a new drawing (page 132) ----- Open an existing drawing or create a new one.
Create the point styles (page 450) ----- Create the point styles for the template.
Points Workflow | 29
Create the point label styles (page
----- Create the point label styles for the template.
452)
Create the point groups (page 561) ----- Create the point groups for the template.
Create a new drawing (page 132) ----- Open an existing drawing or create a new one.
30 | Chapter 2 Workflows
Create points in the drawing (page
----- Use any method, including importing point data
456) from a file.
Create/import the points (page 456) To create copies of project points, use either the
or create copies of project points ----- Get From Project command or the Check Out
(page 192) command.
Change the appearance of points Use another style. For example, you can remove
(page 449) or use point group ----- the point numbers from the display.
overrides (page 555) Use point group overrides to change the
appearance of all the points in a point group.
Delete unwanted points (page 519) ----- You can delete unwanted points using the Point
Editor.
Surfaces Workflow
Refer to this section for high-level descriptions of tasks you can perform when working with surfaces in
AutoCAD Civil 3D.
32 | Chapter 2 Workflows
To create a drawing template for surfaces
Create a new drawing (page 132) ----- Open an existing drawing or create a new one.
Create the surface styles (page 749) ----- Use the Toolspace Settings tab to create a surface
style.
To create a surface
Create a new drawing (page 132) ----- Create a drawing based on the desired template.
Add/edit surface data (page 660) ----- Edit operations are added to a surface definition.
34 | Chapter 2 Workflows
Manage the surface (page 730) ----- View and change the surface and its data.
Calculate volumes (page 740) ----- Query composite and bounded volume
differences between surface.
Determine the boundaries for a Before you analyze a basin, use either surface
----- objects or polylines to create the basin
basin to be analyzed (page 743)
boundaries.
Edit display settings for contours Before you can calculate basin volumes, you must
----- ensure the contours are displayed in the surface
(page 744)
style.
36 | Chapter 2 Workflows
Grading Workflow
Refer to this section for high-level descriptions of the most common grading tasks you might perform when
working with grading in AutoCAD Civil 3D.
Setting up Gradings
This section provides high-level descriptions of grading-related tasks you might perform during the early
stages of a project.
Before you begin, save time and effort in the design and drafting phase by doing some setup tasks. Establish
and save grading criteria as a collection of values for commonly used slope methods and projections. Then
apply saved criteria to any grading you create. The following is a list of setup tasks:
Create grading styles (page 802) ----- Grading styles determine how gradings appear
in the drawing.
Grading Workflow | 37
Create the grading (page 855) ----- Use the Grading Creation Tools.
Edit grading styles (page 802) ----- Use styles to establish the display of the grading
and surface.
Produce reports (page 1758) ----- Use the AutoCAD Civil 3D Reports feature to
produce reports that include cut and fill volumes.
Parcels Workflow
Refer to this section for high-level descriptions of how to work with parcels in AutoCAD Civil 3D.
38 | Chapter 2 Workflows
Setting up Parcels
To set up styles for a project with parcels
Create a new drawing (page 132) ----- Save as a drawing template if needed.
Create parcel styles (page 894) ----- Parcel styles control the way a parcel is displayed
in a drawing.
Create parcel label styles (page 900) ----- Parcel label styles control the way a parcel’s labels
are displayed.
Create parcel table styles (page 910) ----- Parcel table styles control the way a parcel’s tables
are displayed.
Setting up Parcels | 39
To design and create parcels
Edit parcels (page 886) ----- Use the Parcel Layout Tools toolbar to edit parcels.
Alignments Workflow
Refer to this section for high-level descriptions of tasks you perform when creating, designing, and finishing
alignments in AutoCAD Civil 3D.
Setting Up Alignments
Establish different alignment and label styles for each design phase.
All objects have a default style that you can copy, edit, and then save with a new name. You may begin by
establishing styles for different design phases. For example, design styles might have details that would not
be necessary in plotting styles.
To set up alignments
Set up alignment styles (page 946) ----- Alignment styles control the visual display of each
alignment component.
40 | Chapter 2 Workflows
Set up alignment label sets (page Alignment label sets control the label styles that
----- are applied to the individual elements that you
1045)
want to label on the alignment.
Set up the design criteria file (page The design criteria file contains minimum local
----- standards tables for design speed, radius, and
936)
length of individual alignment sub-entities.
Create the alignment (page 948) ----- Draw an alignment, or create one from a polyline,
reference, pipe network, or LandXML file.
Superelevation Workflow
Refer to this section for high-level descriptions of tasks you might perform when working with superelevation
in AutoCAD Civil 3D.
Setting Up Superelevation
Before calculating superelevation data, you need to ensure that required settings and styles are specified
correctly.
Verify alignment feature settings Review the alignment feature settings for
----- Superelevation Options and Dynamic Alignment
(page 930)
Highlight.
Verify default label abbreviations Review the default label abbreviations for
----- geometry points and superelevation critical
(page 83)
points.
42 | Chapter 2 Workflows
Customize the criteria files using the Design
Customize criteria files (page 939) ----- Criteria Editor. Superelevation is calculated based
on these files.
Create the alignment (page 948) ----- Create an alignment to use for superelevation
calculations.
Create the superelevation view Create a Superelevation View and use grips for
----- graphical editing. Use right-click edit options to
(page 1107)
change the properties and display of the view.
Create a corridor (page 45) ----- IMPORTANT Corridor modeling should not be
done until superelevation is finalized. Changes in
a corridor baseline alignment are not reflected in
Superelevation. Changing superelevation does
not update the corridor model.
44 | Chapter 2 Workflows
Corridor Modeling Workflow
Refer to this section for high-level descriptions of tasks you might perform when working with corridors in
AutoCAD Civil 3D.
Open a drawing (page 132) ----- Open an existing drawing or create a new one.
Create the styles (page 1473) ----- Styles control the display and design
characteristics of drawing objects.
Create the label styles (page 1654) ----- You can define default label settings at three
different levels.
Create the quantity takeoff criteria Use quantity takeoff settings to specify the default
----- style and name format settings for quantity
(page 1275)
takeoff.
Create the profiles (page 1141) ----- Use existing ground profiles and design finished
grade profiles (vertical alignments).
46 | Chapter 2 Workflows
Corridor Design and Creation
This section provides the processes used to create corridors.
Create a corridor (page 1475) ----- Use the Create Corridor or Create Simple Corridor
commands.
Modify the corridor (page 1478) ----- Make any required customizations to settings or
styles for the corridor.
Visualizing Corridors
After you have created a corridor, create corridor surfaces and boundaries to help you visualize the corridor.
To visualize a corridor
Create a corridor surface (page 1511) ----- When you create a corridor surface, it is added
to the Surfaces collection.
Export corridor points as COGO Export all points from a selected corridor or
----- constrain the selection based on station ranges
points (page 1531)
or point code types.
Set the driving direction (page 1592) ----- The driving direction option determines how curb
returns are drawn when creating intersections.
48 | Chapter 2 Workflows
Create the intersection (page 1592)----- Use the Create Intersection wizard.
Labeling Intersections (page 1618) ----- You can add labels to intersection objects.
Set up the data required to create Create the base geometry required to create the
----- roundabout. You must have at least two
the roundabout (page 1625)
alignments.
After you have created a roundabout, the 2D layout can be continued to be designed in profile, and you can
also create a corridor using existing methods.
Profiles Workflow
Refer to this section for high-level descriptions of tasks you perform when working with profiles and profile
views.
Setting Up Profiles
Use standards to create a consistent format for the profiles in a drawing.
Standard format and content for profiles is often required to comply with your requirements or to make it
easier to compare several profiles. You can create these formats and content standards with styles and settings
for profiles, profile views, labels, and data bands. The following process helps you evaluate existing styles
and settings and to decide whether to change anything.
Add profile view labels (page 1132)----- Manually place a few profile view labels for station
elevation and depth.
Review profile styles (page 1122) ----- Review the standards for the graphed profile line.
50 | Chapter 2 Workflows
Review profile label styles (page
----- Review the standards for the automatic labels
1129) along the profile line.
Create the surface profile and Optionally add offset profiles to the left and right
offsets (page 1142) or Export feature ----- of the centerline profile.
lines as profiles (page 1530) If you have existing corridors, you can create
profiles directly from the corridor feature lines.
Design a layout profile (page 1143)----- Using the reference lines in the profile view,
design a layout profile on the profile view grid.
Create a superimposed profile If the profile view includes the profile of any linear
----- feature not parallel to the main alignment, create
(page 1149)
a superimposed profile.
Sections Workflow
Refer to this section for high-level descriptions of tasks you might perform when working with sections in
AutoCAD Civil 3D.
Setting Up Sections
Use this information to determine a standard, consistent format for the sections in a drawing.
Standard format and content for sections is often required to comply with your requirements or to make it
easier to compare several sections. These standards are created by means of styles and settings for sample
lines, sections, section views, labels, and bands. Use the following workflow to help you evaluate existing
styles and settings and decide whether anything should be changed.
Create the section view (page 1258) ----- Create a section view to display the section(s).
52 | Chapter 2 Workflows
Review the sample line styles (page
----- Review or modify the standards for the sample
1234) line(s).
Review the section styles (page 1236) ----- Review and modify the standards for the section.
Add section view labels (page 1243)----- Place a few section view labels for offset elevation
and grade.
Add section view bands (page 1246) ----- Add bands above or below the section grid for
the section data.
Create sample lines (page 1246) ----- Use appropriate sources, styles, and left and right
swath widths across of the alignment.
54 | Chapter 2 Workflows
Analyzing Sectional Volumes
Refer to this section for high-level descriptions of tasks used to set up quantity takeoff properties for sample
line groups and create quantity takeoff tables and reports in AutoCAD Civil 3D.
Editing quantity takeoff settings The settings include the default quantity takeoff
----- criteria used to create material lists and default
(page 1276)
styles for tables.
Add subcriteria (page 1289) ----- Add subcriteria if needed to address more
complex material conditions.
Import pay items and A pay item file contains the pay item codes,
----- descriptions, and units of measure for the master
categorization files (page 1294)
pay item list.
Filter and categorize pay item lists You can filter the pay item list for individual pay
----- items, either by Pay Item ID or by the text in the
(page 1295)
Description for the pay items.
Tag objects with pay items (page You can assign pay items to objects or groups of
----- objects in your drawing. You can assign pay item
1298)
lists to corridors and pipe networks.
56 | Chapter 2 Workflows
To create a mass haul diagram
Specify mass haul settings (page Specify settings, including the default styles for
----- mass haul lines and views, and for mass haul
1319)
commands.
Confirm pre-requisite objects (page Confirm that you have a baseline alignment, a
----- sample line group, and a material list from which
1312)
you can create your mass haul diagram.
Create the mass haul diagram Specify source objects, materials, mass haul view
----- and mass haul line styles, and free haul distance,
(page 1315)
using the Create Mass Haul Diagram wizard.
Edit mass haul styles (page 1317) ----- Edit mass haul line and view styles to improve
visibility of the mass haul diagram.
Create a new drawing (page 132) ----- Open an existing drawing or create a new one.
Create the styles (page 66) ----- Styles control the display and design
characteristics of drawing objects.
Define the label settings (page 1654) ----- You can define default label settings at three
different levels.
58 | Chapter 2 Workflows
Creating, Modifying, and Analyzing Pipe Networks
This section summarizes the basic process for creating and analizing a pipe network.
Create the pipe network (page 1332) ----- There are several ways you can create pipe
networks.
Add single pipe or pipe span labels You can add labels to pipe network parts either
----- when you create the objects or after you create
(page 1404)
them.
60 | Chapter 2 Workflows
Exporting and Importing HEC-RAS Data
Use the HEC-RAS Tools in AutoCAD Civil 3D to export surface and alignment data in HEC-RAS format for
use in flood analysis.
Export the AutoCAD Civil 3D data Using the HEC-RAS Export Tool, enter the stream
----- section data, and save a GEO file containing the
(page 1247)
AutoCAD Civil 3D information.
Analyze the flood information in Import the GEO file into the HEC-RAS software
----- program, analyze the flood information, and save
the HEC-RAS software (page 1889)
an SDF file to import back into AutoCAD Civil 3D.
Import the flood analysis into In AutoCAD Civil 3D, use the HEC-RAS Import
----- Tool to import the SDF file you created in
AutoCAD Civil 3D (page 1889)
HEC-RAS.
Prepare the template and Before using plan production tools, make sure
----- the drawing templates have appropriately
configure viewports (page 1902)
configured viewports.
Set up plan production styles Plan production styles and labels control the
(page 1929) ----- display of all plan production components and
and labeling (page 1927) labeling.
Manage the sheet sets ----- Use the Sheet Set Manager to organize drawing
layouts into named sheet sets.
Plot and publish the drawings ----- You prepare your drawing for plotting or
publishing by specifying page setup settings.
Prepare the template and Before using plan production tools, make sure
----- the drawing templates have appropriately
configure viewports (page 1902)
configured viewports.
Manage the sheet sets ----- Use the Sheet Set Manager to organize drawing
layouts into named sheet sets.
62 | Chapter 2 Workflows
Understanding Objects and
Styles 3
In AutoCAD Civil 3D, objects are the basic building blocks that enable you to create design drawings.
The underlying program code for AutoCAD Civil 3D uses an object-oriented architecture. As a result, design entities in
the drawing, such as points and surfaces, are intelligent objects that maintain relationships with other objects. For example,
if a horizontal alignment is modified, any profiles and sections based on that alignment are automatically changed.
The primary AutoCAD Civil 3D object types that enable you to create civil engineering design components, and the icons
that represent them, are as follows. For more information about the object, click the corresponding link.
63
Sites (page 779) Survey Figures (page 215)
These types of objects are sometimes referred to as graphical objects or drawing objects because when you use them, a
graphical object or shape, for example, a pipe network, surface, or corridor, is inserted into the drawing.
Use the Prospector and Settings tabs in Toolspace to access detailed object properties and settings. For more information,
see The Toolspace Window (page 96).
For information on basic object behavior, see the AutoCAD Help.
Object Relationships
AutoCAD Civil 3D objects automate the design process by interacting with other AutoCAD Civil 3D objects.
A design team typically spends many hours ensuring that revisions are transferred correctly between surfaces,
alignments, profiles, sections, and other design data. Redrafting, relabeling, and checking the work can be
time-consuming tasks. AutoCAD Civil 3D eliminates the need for most of these tasks by introducing dynamic
links between design objects. This system of links and dependencies derives from the object model within
the application design.
The following diagram illustrates how AutoCAD Civil 3D data objects are related to each other.
Points Surfaces
Profiles Intersections
Assemblies Corridors
Object Relationships | 65
Object and Label Styles
Styles control the display and design characteristics of drawing objects.
You can use styles to efficiently manage object appearance. When you create a new object, you can apply
a predefined style for its display. Later, you can apply a different style. Also, you can create new styles to
suit the needs of different users and different project stages. If you change a style definition, the changes
are applied automatically to all objects using that style.
The object styles in AutoCAD Civil 3D have general attributes, such as object color, visibility of components,
linetypes, and fill patterns.
Similarly, label styles work with text format, data content, location, and graphic elements, such as leader
lines and bounding boxes.
Within your design process, object and label styles should be created with specific purposes in mind, such
as representing objects at different approval stages, or displaying the right information for different types
of users. Before you create object styles, experiment with editing styles for different objects to learn the
available controls.
Styles for each object type are managed on the Toolspace Settings tab. The General collection contains styles
that can be used by more than one object type (called Multipurpose styles) as well as shared label styles. All
AutoCAD Civil 3D objects have a Basic style that can be used as is, or as the basis for building new styles. If
you want to customize some attributes of a style, you can create a new style, or make changes to an existing
style and save it with a new name. Groups of styles can be collected and saved as a drawing template (.dwt)
file. All drawings created from a specific .dwt will share the same styles. The controls for creating styles are
standardized as much as possible across all features to make the process easier.
For objects, you can add labels by using the Annotate tab to access the Add Labels dialog box or feature-specific
label menus.
You can create sets of label styles for alignments, profiles, and sections in order to manage multiple labels
easily. After the set is defined, it can be applied to or removed from an object in a single operation.
■ On the Settings tab in Toolspace,expand an object style collection ➤ right-click object style ➤ Copy,
Edit, Delete.
For more information on styles, see the help topics for that object type:
Points Point Styles (page 449) Point Style Dialog Box (page 2354)
Point Clouds Displaying and Stylizing Point Point Cloud Style Dialog Box
Clouds (page 598) (page 2381)
Surfaces Surface Styles and Visualization Surface Style Dialog Box (page
(page 748) 2644)
Parcels Parcel Styles (page 894) Parcel Styles Dialog Box (page
2253)
Profiles/Profile Views Styles and Display of Profiles and Profile Style Dialog Box (page
Profile Views (page 1122) 2426) and Profile View Style Dialog
Box (page 2435)
Corridors Corridor Styles and Display Corridor Style Dialog Box (page
(page 1473) 2044)
Grading Using Grading Styles (page 802) Grading Style Dialog Box (page
2116)
Assemblies and Sub- Subassembly Styles (page 1556) Assembly Style Dialog Box (page
assemblies 1997)
Pipe Networks Pipe Network Styles and Display Pipe Style Dialog Box (page 2281)
(page 1328) and Structure Style Dialog Box
(page 2294)
Sample Lines/Sec- Sample Line, Section, and Sec- Section Style Dialog Box (page
tions/Section Views tion View Styles and Display 2534)
(page 1233)
Survey Survey Styles and Display (page Survey Network Style Dialog Box
216) (page 2711) and Survey Figure
Style Dialog Box (page 2707)
View Frames View Frame Styles and Display View Frame Style Dialog Box
(page 1931) (page 2336)
Match Lines Match Lines Styles and Display Match Line Style Dialog Box
(page 1933) (page 2337)
Multipurpose Styles
Use the Multipurpose Styles collection to create specific styles that can be used by more than one object
type.
For example, Slope Pattern style can be shared by gradings and corridors and Marker Styles can be shared
by points and survey components.
For more information, see General Collection (Settings Tree) (page 112).
Label Styles
Label Styles are used to control and manage the display of labels and expressions for a class of objects.
Labels are associated with many objects, and their content is updated whenever the object itself is changed.
Labels are also controlled by styles. You can modify the label styles in the same way that you modify the
object styles: right-click a style name on the Toolspace Settings tab, and then click Edit.
You can create and save label sets for alignments, profiles, and sections, which allows you to apply multiple
label types in one operation. For example, an alignment label set could include labels for major stations,
minor stations, and geometry points.
Labels can include text, blocks, lines, ticks, and leaders. You can create labels and preview their appearance
in the Label Style Composer dialog box, as shown in the following illustration:
For more information about the Label Styles collections, see The Label Styles Collections (Settings Tree)
(page 113).
The General Label Styles are used by lines, curves, feature lines, and corridors. This collection also contains
Note label styles, which are not specific to an object.
For general information about labels, see Label Objects (page 1643).
For information about managing label styles, see Creating and Editing Label Styles (page 1656).
Data properties include the data format, order of columns, text style, and whether the table title and column
headers are repeated if the table is split. Display components include the borders, separators, fill, and text.
You can control the visibility, color, linetype, and scale of each component.
For information on the Table Styles collections, see The Table Styles Collections (Settings Tree) (page 113).
For general information about tables, see Tables (page 1737).
1 On the Settings tab in Toolspace, right-click an existing object style and click Edit.
2 Review and edit settings on the various tabs of the Style dialog box.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
■ Description keys
■ Pipe rules
Both the item you want to copy and the name of the destination drawing must be visible in the Settings
tree before you begin the drag-and-drop operation.
To drag an item from one drawing to another, click the item or collection you want to copy, hold down the
left mouse button, and drag the item to the name of destination drawing in the Settings tree. When the
cursor changes to , release the mouse button to copy the item into the drawing. The item is automatically
added to the correct collection in the drawing.
If the drawing already contains an item with the name of the item being copied, the Duplicate Item Name
Dialog Box (page 2029) is displayed which allows you to decide how to handle the conflict.
If you drag a label style with one or more child styles from one drawing to another, only the selected style
is copied into the drawing; the child styles are not copied. If you copy a child style into another drawing,
the parent style is also copied.
■ Drag a child label style (and its children) up to a higher level in the style collection to sever the parent/child
relationship.
■ Return the child label style to its original location in the tree to reinstate the parent/child relationship.
■ Drag a child label style to another label style collection. The child label style inherits the properties of
the new parent.
Both the label style you want to copy and the destination location of the style must be visible in the Settings
tree before you begin the drag-and-drop operation.
To drag a label style within a drawing, click the label style you want to copy, hold down the left mouse
button, and drag the label style to the destination collection. When the cursor changes to , release the
mouse button to drop the style into the collection located at the tip of the cursor arrow.
When you copy a label style within a drawing, all child styles are copied with the parent style.
To transfer styles
4 On the Marker tab, select the option Use AutoCAD BLOCK Symbol For Marker.
7 Browse to the template file that contains the styles you want and click Open.
Object Properties
AutoCAD Civil 3D object properties can be modified using the civil object properties dialog boxes, the
Properties palette, and the Quick Properties palette.
Properties Palette
The Properties palette can be used as an alternate method of editing AutoCAD Civil 3D object properties.
In AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011, more civil object properties are exposed in the Properties palette than in previous
releases. Properties are now organized into four categories: Information, General, Data, and Geometry.
By exposing these properties in the Properties palette, they are now also available to be used with the QSELECT
command.
For more information, see Control the Properties of Objects in the AutoCAD Help.
■ Select a AutoCAD Civil 3D object and click <Object Name> Properties on the Modify panel of the
contextual ribbon tab.
OR
■ Right-click an AutoCAD Civil 3D object and click <Object Name> Properties in the shortcut menu.
■ Select an AutoCAD Civil 3D object and click Properties on the General Tools panel of the contextual
ribbon tab.
OR
■ Right-click an AutoCAD Civil 3D object and click Properties in the shortcut menu.
1 Enable the Quick Properties mode by entering QPMODE at the command line and entering 1. Or click
the Quick Properties button on the Drawing Status Bar.
Layers
Each object in AutoCAD Civil 3D has a base layer on which the object physically resides, and component
layers that control the display of object components, such as surface triangles or contours.
The base layer is defined in the Drawing Settings or at creation time. The component layers are defined in
the object styles.
When you create an object, you can accept the default or specify a new layer. The base layers are used only
for the main object types, such as surfaces and alignments.
Because the object physically resides on the base layer, you can control object visibility by changing the
layer state. For example, if you turn off the base layer for surfaces, all surfaces are turned off in the drawing.
TIP To append an object name to the layer name for that object, add an asterisk (*) as a prefix or suffix to the
base layer name.
For more information, see Object Layers Tab (Drawing Settings Dialog Box) (page 2076).
Layers | 73
The component layers, such as C-ROAD-LINE, allow you to work with objects as if parts of them are located
on different layers. For example, to turn off only the alignment lines, you can turn off the C-ROAD-LINE
layer in the drawing.
Objects are physically created on the base layer, but the display of components is governed by the associated
component layers. Each object component uses the visibility settings for the component layer (such as
on/off), as well as the color, linetype, lineweight, and plot style for the layer if the various Component
Display settings are set to ByLayer.
NOTE Layer 0 has a special meaning in the Component Display settings. When the layer is set to 0, the object
base layer is used for that component. For example, if the alignment base layer is C-ROAD, and the layer for the
Line component is set to 0, then the alignment lines behave as if they are located on layer C-ROAD (not layer 0).
For more information, see Display Tab (Style Dialog Box) (page 2017).
TIP Using the ByLayer settings provides more control over object display to people viewing AutoCAD Civil 3D
drawings in object-enabled AutoCAD.
However, if you want the object to always have the same settings regardless of component layer settings,
you can set specific Component Display settings.
For more information, see Using ByLayer and ByBlock to Assign Display Values (page 2019).
Naming Objects
AutoCAD Civil 3D objects use a name template to specify the object name.
A name template is a default name format that can be incremented for each new object of that type.
For example, when you create an alignment, you will see Alignment - (<[Next Counter(CP)]>) in the Create
Alignment dialog box. This is a name template. This default template will use the word “Alignment” and
then follow it with the next available number (the next counter), each time you create a new alignment.
For example, “Alignment - 1”, “Alignment - 2”, and so on.
Next to the object name field, you can click to display the Name Template dialog box (page 2022), where
you can set up the default format you want to use.
Or, you can specify a name manually by clearing the name template format from the object name field, and
then typing a new name.
Object names are displayed in Toolspace. You can edit the object names by changing the object properties.
■ / (forward slash)
■ \ (backward slash)
■ + (plus sign)
■ “ (double quotes)
■ : (colon)
■ ; (semi colon)
■ = (equals)
■ | (vertical line)
■ , (comma)
■ * (asterisk)
■ ? (question mark)
■ ‘ (single quote)
See also:
■ Drawing settings establish values for the whole drawing. If you are creating a drawing template, ensure that these are
set correctly.
■ Feature settings control behavior for a particular feature, such as Parcels or Grading.
■ Command settings apply to individual commands within a feature, such as the CreateParcelByLayout command within
the Parcels feature.
Each lower level object in the settings hierarchy can either inherit or override settings in the level above it. The following
illustration shows an override set for area units at the Parcels feature level.
77
The arrow in the Child Override column of the Drawing Settings dialog box (upper drawing) indicates that an override
has been set at a lower level. The check mark in the Override column in the Parcel Settings dialog box (lower drawing)
indicates that the value set in this dialog box overrides the setting at a higher level.
At the drawing level you can cancel an override by clicking it. You can prevent overrides by locking a setting.
Drawing-Level Settings
There are two types of drawing-level settings:
■ Drawing-wide settings, which include units and zone, transformation settings, abbreviations, and object
layers.
■ Ambient settings, which affect a variety of AutoCAD Civil 3D behaviors. You can change ambient settings
at the drawing level, and you can also override ambient setting values at either the object level or the
command level.
You access drawing-level settings by right-clicking the drawing name in the Settings tree and clicking Edit
Drawing Settings.
At the drawing level, the Edit Settings dialog box contains only the ambient settings for the drawing:
Command-Level Settings
Use the Commands collection level in the Settings tree to override both the object-level settings and drawing
ambient settings on a command-by-command basis. You can also specify command-specific settings.
Access the command-level settings by expanding the Commands collection for an object type in the Settings
tree, right-clicking the command, and clicking Edit Command Settings.
At the command level, this dialog box also contains command-specific settings, such as the Parcels and
Alignments settings that are used by the CreateSite command.
The following summarizes the controls in the Edit Settings dialog box:
■ The Override column indicates that the default value has been changed for the setting.
■ The Child Override column indicates whether the setting has been overridden at a lower level in the
Settings tree.
■ Use the Lock column to control whether a setting can be changed at a lower level in the Settings tree.
For more information, see Edit Settings Dialog Box (page 2025).
Coordinate Systems
Coordinates in AutoCAD Civil 3D are expressed using northings and eastings.
The AutoCAD Civil 3D coordinate system is always relative to the AutoCAD World Coordinate System
(WCS). Northing is equivalent to AutoCAD Y and Easting is equivalent to AutoCAD X.
AutoCAD Civil 3D object data is always presented in AutoCAD World Coordinate System coordinates. For
example, the alignment data in the Alignment Entities vista in the Panorama window is listed in world
coordinates. In addition, the AutoCAD Civil 3D transparent commands are based on the AutoCAD World
Coordinate System. However, when you create an object and have an AutoCAD User Coordinate System
(UCS) defined, the UCS is honored when you specify locations, which means that an insertion point or a
coordinate is interpreted relative to the UCS.
AutoCAD Civil 3D objects are not aligned with the UCS. For example, labels can be oriented relative either
to the current view, the World Coordinate System, or the labeled object, depending on the Orientation
Reference setting, but they cannot be oriented to the UCS.
Similarly, objects, such as profiles, sections, and tables, cannot be oriented to the current UCS.
For more information about AutoCAD World Coordinate Systems and AutoCAD User Coordinate Systems,
see the AutoCAD Help.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the drawing name at the top of the collection, and
click Edit Drawing Settings.
2 In the Drawing Settings dialog box, click the Units and Zone tab (page 2073).
6 Select the Scale Objects Inserted From Other Drawings check box to scale objects inserted from another
drawing to match drawing units in the current drawing.
7 Select the Set AutoCAD Variables To Match check box to synchronize AutoCAD settings with AutoCAD
Civil 3D settings. If there are no equivalent AutoCAD settings, a message is displayed asking if you want
to match as closely as possible. The AutoCAD settings that are synchronized to theAutoCAD Civil 3D
settings include the AUNITS, DIMAUNIT, INSUNITS, and MEASUREMENT AutoCAD system variables
(sysvars).
8 Under Scale, select the intended plot scale in imperial or metric units.
9 Under Custom Scale select the plotted size of various annotation-related components, such as label
text, ticks, and band heights. If you change the scale, all annotation objects adjust accordingly.
11 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
■ Relate local coordinates to grid coordinates by transforming distances measured on the Earth (or geoid)
to distances on an ellipsoid.
■ Relate distances on the ellipsoid to the flat plane (projection) of the current zone’s grid coordinate system.
These transformations are accomplished through the use of scaling factors. First, a sea level scale factor is
applied to the local values measured on the geoid, and then a grid scale factor is applied, which relates the
ellipsoid values to the grid projection. The scaling factors can be defined in two ways:
■ The sea level scale factor relates the distances on the geoid to the distances on the ellipsoid.
■ The grid scale factor relates the distances on the ellipsoid to the distances on the grid projection.
■ By the grid and local coordinates of two known reference points in your drawing.
■ By the grid and local coordinates of one known point and a known rotation to grid north.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the drawing name at the top of the collection, and
click Edit Drawing Settings.
2 In the Drawing Settings dialog box, click the Transformation tab (page 2074).
IMPORTANT You must specify the coordinate system on the Units and Zone tab (page 80) before you can
specify settings on the Transformation tab.
TIP If you know the combined scale factor, then you can clear the Apply Sea Level Scale Factor check box,
select User Defined as the Grid Scale Factor, and enter a combined scale factor in the Grid Scale Factor box.
The combined scale factor is the combination of the scale factor for converting local to sea level and the scale
factor for converting sea level to grid.
5 Enter a default Elevation, such as the average elevation of your project site from sea level.
6 Optionally, change the Spheroid Radius, which is the radius of a mathematical figure close to the shape
of the Earth at sea level, approximately 6,370 km. The value shown in this box is initially derived from
the current zone's ellipsoid and can be changed if local observations differ. In most cases, the default
value shown is the accepted value.
7 For the Grid Scale Factor, select a method for Computation. For more information, see Transformation
tab (page 2074).
8 Specify the Reference Point values. The reference point could be a benchmark that was used in a survey.
It can be any point for which you know both the local coordinates and the grid coordinates. To specify
the Reference Point values, do one of the following:
■ Click the Select Point button and then select a point in the drawing, or use Transparent commands.
9 To define the rotation angle for the transformation, do one of the following:
■ Click the Select Point button and then select a point in the drawing.
11 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the drawing name at the top of the collection, and
click Edit Drawing Settings.
2 In the Drawing Settings dialog box, click the Object Layers tab (page 2076).
3 For each object type, click in the Layer column to display the Layer Selection dialog box.
4 In the Select Layer (page 2222) dialog box, select the layer for that object type and click OK.
5 To add a modifier to the layer name, select Prefix or Suffix in the Modifier column and then enter the
text string for the modifier in the Value column.
TIP To include the object name in the layer prefix or suffix, enter an asterisk in the Value column.
6 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the drawing name at the top of the collection, and
click Edit Drawing Settings.
2 In the Drawing Settings dialog box, click the Abbreviations tab (page 2077).
3 Specify the abbreviations for the properties by modifying the entries in the Value column.
NOTE For individual abbreviation definitions, see the Glossary (page 2767).
4 Click OK.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the drawing name at the top of the collection, and
click Edit Drawing Settings.
2 In the Drawing Settings dialog box, click the Ambient Settings tab (page 2078).
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the object collection and click Edit Feature Settings.
■ Click the cell in the Value column. Enter the value or select a value from the list.
■ Click the cell in the Value column. Enter the value or select a value from the list.
After you change the value, the check box in the Override column is automatically selected, indicating
that the drawing ambient setting is overridden.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Commands collection that contains the command whose
settings you want to edit.
3 To change a command-specific setting, do the following in the Edit Settings (page 2025) dialog box:
■ Expand the category that contains the setting.
■ Click the cell in the Value column. Enter the value or select a value from the list.
■ Click the cell in the Value column. Enter the value or select a value from the list.
After you change the value, the check box in the Override column is automatically selected, indicating
that an object-level setting is overridden.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: right-click command name in object Commands collection ➤ Edit Command Settings
Ribbon
AutoCAD Civil 3D commands and features are available from the ribbon.
87
Contextual tabs contain commands that are related to the currently selected object. Most contextual tabs
can be closed simply be deselecting the object.
AutoCAD Civil 3D contains the following contextual tabs:
■ Alignment
■ Assembly
■ Cogo Point
■ Corridor
■ Feature Line
■ Grading
■ Intersection
■ Label
■ Profile
■ Profile View
■ Parcel
■ Plan Production
■ Pipe Network
■ Point Cloud
■ Projected Object
■ Sample Line
■ Section
■ Section Sheet
■ Section View
■ Subassembly
■ Surface
■ Survey
■ Table
NOTE To learn more about basic ribbon functionality, see The Ribbon in the AutoCAD User’s Guide Help.
if you click the Assembly button on the Modify tab, the Assembly non-object select contextual tab
displays, and that tab has a purple background color. This provides access to all commands related to
assemblies without having to select an assembly in the drawing.
The following illustration shows an example of a contextual tab that is displayed when no objects are selected.
Non-object selection contextual tabs have a Close button at the end to dismiss them. If you select an object
while this tab is displayed, the non-object selection tab is automatically closed and replaced with the object
select contextual tab.
menu .
The Where is My Command tool? contains only AutoCAD Civil 3D 2009 menu commands. It does not
identify ribbon locations for new AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011 commands and features that did not exist in
AutoCAD Civil 3D 2009.
Printing
It can be useful to print out some or all pages of the Where is My Command Tool? to quickly and easily
reference this information any time.
To print out all of the Where is My Command? Help topics, right-click the AutoCAD Civil 3D 2009 Menus
in the left pan Contents tab, and select Print. On the Print Topics dialog box, select Print the selected heading
and all subtopics.
To print out a single topic, right-click an item in the left pan, and select Print. On the Print Topics dialog
box, select Print the selected topic, or place your cursor in the right pane, and select Print from the right-click
shortcut menu.
1 In the InfoCenter toolbar located at the top right side of the application window, click the drop-down
3 In the left pane, on the Contents tab, expand AutoCAD Civil 3D 2009 Menus.
4 In the left pane, click a menu item. For example, click Pipes to display the choices that exist on the
AutoCAD Civil 3D 2009 Pipes menu.
Some AutoCAD Civil 3D 2009 menu commands do not exist on the ribbon, but instead are available from
the command line or other access method. For those commands, the Ribbon Location column lists the
appropriate access method.
basic ribbon function- The Ribbon in the AutoCAD User’s Guide Help (User’s Guide ➤
ality The User Interface ➤ Tools in the Application Window ➤ The
Ribbon)
customizing the rib- Customize The Ribbon in the AutoCAD User’s Guide Help (User’s
bon Guide ➤ The User Interface ➤ Tools in the Application Win-
dow ➤ The Ribbon ➤ Customize The Ribbon)
learning how to use ■ User Interface Overview in the AutoCAD Civil 3D User’s Guide
the ribbon Help (Getting Started ➤ The User Interface ➤ User Inter-
face Overview)
■ Tutorial: Understanding the AutoCAD Civil 3D User Interface
in AutoCAD Civil 3D Tutorials (Getting Started Tutorials ➤
Tools in the Application Window ➤ Understanding the
AutoCAD Civil 3D User Interface)
finding command Using the Where is My Command? Tool (page 90) (User’s Guide
locations on the rib- Help ➤ Getting Started ➤ The User Interface ➤ Ribbon ➤
bon Using the Where Is My Command? Tool)
Menus
While the ribbon is the primary access point for AutoCAD Civil 3D commands, many commands are also
available from the application menu and from shortcut menus that are displayed when you right-click an
object in Toolspace or in the drawing window.
.
The application menu also provides a search tool which you can use to search for commands. Only those
commands that are available in the current workspace are shown and searched. For more information, see
The Application Menu in the AutoCAD User’s Guide Help.
Shortcut Menus
Shortcut menus are available throughout AutoCAD Civil 3D. To display a shortcut menu, right-click your
pointing device on items in the Toolspace, Panorama, or other window, or on objects in the drawing area.
NOTE The legacy menu bar contains only AutoCAD Civil 3D 2009 commands and has not been updated with
new AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011 commands and features. Therefore, if you display the menu bar, it is important to
understand that it does not provide access to all AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011 features.
Workspaces
AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011 comes with a default workspace for working with AutoCAD Civil 3D commands.
You can use this workspace as-is or modify it according to your requirements.
Workspaces are sets of user interface components, such as ribbon tabs and panels, toolbars, palettes, and
menu bars, that are grouped and organized so that you can work in a custom, task-oriented drawing
environment. When you select a workspace, only the user interface components specified in that workspace
are displayed. You can still access other commands by entering their command names at the command line.
You can switch to another workspace by using the Workspace Switching button , which is located in
the application status bar.
Workspaces in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011 include:
■ Civil 3D: This workspace displays user interface components related to civil engineering design and survey
features available in AutoCAD Civil 3D.
■ 2D Drafting & Annotation: This workspace displays user interface components related to AutoCAD 2D
drafting and annotation features available in AutoCAD Civil 3D.
■ 3D Modeling: This workspace displays user interface components related to AutoCAD 3D modeling
features available in AutoCAD Civil 3D.
■ Tool-based Geospatial: This workspace displays user interface components related to AutoCAD Map 3D
features available in AutoCAD Civil 3D. It is designed for those who are already familiar with the AutoCAD
ribbon.
■ Task-based Geospatial: This workspace displays user interface components related to AutoCAD Map 3D
features available in AutoCAD Civil 3D.
1 Configure your workspace. For example, you can close the Tool Palette if you do not want it to come
up every time you start AutoCAD Civil 3D.
NOTE You can also use the CUI command to edit the Workspace using a dialog box interface. For more
information, see Customer User Interface Dialog Box in the AutoCAD Command Reference.
3 In the Save Workspace dialog box, enter a name for the new workspace. You can also select the name
of an existing workspace to overwrite it with your modified configuration.
4 Click Save.
Quick Reference
Command Line
Workspace
See also:
3 Enter Show.
Tabs
The Toolspace window always displays at least two tabs, Prospector and Settings. The Panorama window
displays named tabs if you have more than one tool (vista) active in the window.
Shortcut Menus
Right-click in the Toolspace or the Panorama window to display a shortcut menu of available commands.
Right-click a single item, or select one or more items and right-click, to display a menu containing commands
related to the item(s). If you right-click an area that contains no items or data, the menu contains commands
related to the window.
Closed Open
To activate Auto-hide for the Toolspace or the Panorama window, click on the title bar. To deactivate
Auto-hide, click on the title bar. You can also right-click the title bar and use the shortcut menu to
control Auto-hide. For more information about Auto-hide, see the AutoCAD Help.
TIP You can quickly undock a window by double-clicking the window’s control bars.
For more information about working with docked and floating windows, see the AutoCAD Help.
Use the Prospector tab to manage design objects, data shortcuts, and Vault projects. For more information,
see The Toolspace Prospector Tab (page 103).
Use the Settings tab to manage object settings, styles, and other drawing items, such as point file formats,
description key sets, and grading criteria sets. For more information, see The Toolspace Settings Tab (page
107).
Use the Survey tab to manage survey projects, data, and settings. For more information, see The Toolspace
Survey Tab (page 115).
Use the Toolbox tab to access reports and subscription extensions, and to add custom tools. For more
information, see The Toolspace Toolbox Tab (page 117).
You cannot see the Toolspace Click Home or View tab ➤ Palettes panel
window.
➤ Toolspace .
The tab you want to use is not Use the buttons on the Palettes panel (on the Home
open in the Toolspace window. or View ribbon tab) to open the Toolspace tabs. The
buttons are used to both open and close the tabs.
When the Toolspace tabs are in the “open” state, the
ribbon buttons have a blue background.
Only the Toolspace title bar is Move the cursor over the title bar to display the full
displayed. Toolspace window.
To disable Auto-hide, right-click the Toolspace title
bar and click Auto-hide to remove the check mark
next to it.
The contents of a tab are out of Right-click in the window and click Refresh.
date.
NOTE At least one Toolspace tab must be in the “open” state or the Toolspace button is grayed out. In this
case, click one of the tab display buttons on the ribbon to open the tab.
2 If the tabs you want to use are not open in the Toolspace window, use the following ribbon buttons to
open them:
■ Prospector (page 104)
BEST PRACTICE Closing the Toolspace window can help improve overall performance as well as save memory,
so it is recommended to close the Toolspace window when it is not necessary to have it open. Likewise, it is
recommended to close the Toolspace tabs (Prospector, Settings, Survey, or Toolbox) which you do not need
to have open.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Tree Structure
The Toolspace trees display items in a hierarchical structure. Any item that can contain other items below
it in the tree is a collection. For example, in the illustration, Open Drawings, Points-2, and Sites are all
collections. The symbol displayed at the tree node, to the far left of each collection name gives you information
about the display of the items in the collection:
The collection contains items that are not displayed. Click to expand
the tree and display the items.
The collection contains items that cannot be displayed in the tree. Click
the collection name to list the items in a Toolspace item view. For more
information, see The Toolspace Item View (page 99).
Icons
A row of icons appears at the top of each Toolspace tab. For more information about these, see The Prospector
Tab Icons (page 104), The Settings Tab Icons (page 108) and the The Survey Tab Icons (page 116).
Tree View
Use the drop-down list above the tree to control which items are displayed in the tree. For more information,
see Controlling the Items Displayed in the Settings Tree (page 108) and Controlling the Items Displayed in
the Prospector Tree (page 105).
Item Views
When you select items in the tree, additional information may be displayed in an item view, which is shown
in a pane next to or beneath the main tree. You can adjust the size of the item view by moving the bar that
separates the item view from the tree.
An item view is one of the following, depending on the item selected:
■ List view. Displays information in a list or table. In some cases, this information can be edited.
For more information, see The Toolspace Item View (page 99).
NOTE To see the item view, you may need to increase the size of the Toolspace window or move the bar that
separates the item view from the Prospector, Settings, or Survey tree. To move the bar that separates the item
view from the Prospector, Settings, or Survey tree, you must first select a collection that displays an item view.
An item view takes one of the following forms, depending on the selected item:
List View
A list view is a table displayed by the Toolspace trees for some items. In some cases, this information can be
edited. The following illustration shows a Prospector list view of points:
Graphical View
A graphical view displays an image of the selected item. The following illustration shows a Prospector
graphical view of a parcel.
To view graphical item previews, you first click the Item Preview button on the Prospector tab. Then
right-click the object or object collection and select Show Preview. Then click on the object name in the
Prospector tree.
Right-click in the graphical preview to display a shortcut menu that allows you to manipulate the image
using commands such as Pan and Zoom.
Not all items on the Prospector and Settings, or Survey trees have item views associated with them.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector, Settings, or Survey tab, click an item that displays a list view.
NOTE Some items do not have list views associated with them.
2 In the list view, click the icon at the left of the row that contains the first item you want to select.
■ To select additional non-contiguous items, hold down Ctrl and click the items you want to select.
■ To select every item from the current item to the beginning of the list, hold down Shift and press
Home.
■ To select every item from the current item to the end of the list, hold down Shift and press End.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector, Settings, or Survey tab, click an item that displays a list view.
NOTE Some items do not have list views associated with them.
2 To show the names of all the columns that can be included in the list view, right-click any column
heading.
Check marks indicate which columns are currently displayed in the list view.
3 To show all the columns in the list view, click Show All Columns.
■ Right-click any column heading to display the column heading shortcut menu, and clear the check
mark from the column you want to hide.
5 To show a hidden column, right-click over any column heading to display the column heading shortcut
menu, and select the column you want to show.
6 To change the position of a column in the list view, drag the column heading right or left.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector, Settings, or Survey tab, click an item to display its list view.
NOTE Some items do not have list views associated with them.
2 If any items in the list view are selected, press Esc to clear the selection.
3 Right-click the column heading of the column you want to change and click Edit.
4 In the edit box that is activated, enter the new value and press Enter.
Zoom To (Drawing items only) Zoom the drawing to the selected item
or items in the list view.
Pan To (Drawing items only) Pan the drawing to the selected item or
items in the list view.
Line Shading Display the list view with a shading guide every three rows.
Copy Value To Clip- Copy the contents of the specific value in the cell. This com-
board mand copies the contents of a selected cell as a raw text (float-
ing point) value. For example, if you use this command to copy
station data displayed as 2+00.00 in the list view, the value is
copied to the clipboard as 200.00.
1 Select the items you want to copy. For more information, see Selecting Items in a List View (page 100).
2 Right-click to display the list view shortcut menu for the selected items.
4 Open a prepared Excel spreadsheet or a text file and paste the clipboard contents into the file.
On this tab, all of the objects in a drawing or project are arranged in a hierarchy that you navigate in standard,
Windows Explorer–like fashion.
The Prospector tab and the Settings tab share some basic functions. For more information, see Functions
Shared by the Prospector, Settings, and Survey Tabs (page 98).
■ Open Drawings. For more information about this collection, see The Prospector Tree (page 105).
■ Projects. For more information about this collection, see Project Management (page 143).
NOTE The Projects collection in the Prospector tree is not visible if you have not installed Autodesk Vault client
and server applications. During a drawing session, the Projects collection lists the projects that are available
after you have logged into an Autodesk Vault server and Vault database. For more information, see Logging
in to a Vault Server (page 169).
■ Drawing Templates. For more information about this collection, see Drawing Templates (page 127).
NOTE When the tab is in the “open” state, the button has a blue background . When the tab is in the
When running any of following commands, the Prospector tab is opened automatically.
■ Create Sheets
■ Export To LandXML
■ Clicking the Pipe Network Vistas button on the Network Layout Tools toolbar
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Icon Purpose
Switches the orientation of the item and list views. Available only
when the Toolspace is undocked.
Displays Help.
■ Master View. Displays all project and drawing items, including drawing templates. The name of the
active drawing is highlighted.
■ Active Drawing View. Displays only items in the active drawing. If you switch to another drawing, the
tree is updated to reflect the new drawing.
View Frame Groups View Frame Groups Collection (Prospector Tab) (page 1930)
Sample Lines Sample Line Groups Collection (Prospector Tab) (page 1228)
Section Views Section View Groups Collection (Prospector Tab) (page 1229)
Standard shortcut menu commands are available for many Prospector tree items and collections. To display
the shortcut menu, right-click a collection or item in the Prospector tree. The following commands are
available on the Prospector shortcut menu whenever they are applicable to the selected item(s):
Pan To Pan the drawing to the selected item or items contained in the
selected collection
NOTE Some Prospector shortcut menus do not include all the commands in the preceding table. Also, a Prospector
shortcut menu can contain additional commands that are related to the selected collection or item, including
project management access control commands.
The Prospector tree contains collections for projects and drawing templates. For more information, see
Project and Drawing Items in the Prospector Tree (page 159).
On this tab, styles are organized for different object types. Even in a blank drawing, most of these styles are
present in a standard hierarchy. You can create and modify styles in a drawing, then save it as a template.
Subsequent drawings based on the template will automatically have the same set of styles available. You
can modify object, label, and table styles. You can also control settings for drawings and commands.
The Prospector tab and the Settings tab share some basic functions. For more information about basic
Toolspace tree operations, see Functions Shared by the Prospector, Settings, and Survey Tabs (page 98).
NOTE When the tab is in the “open” state, the button has a blue background . When the tab is in the
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Icon Purpose
Toggles the orientation of the item view when the Toolspace window
is floating. For more information, see The Toolspace Item View (page
99).
Displays Help.
■ Master View. Displays items for all open drawings. The name of the active drawing is shown in boldface.
■ Active Drawing Settings View. Displays only the items for the active drawing.
■ Active Drawing Labels Only View. Displays only label style collections and label styles items for the active
drawing.
Mass Haul Line Editing Mass Haul Line Settings (page 1319)
Mass Haul View Editing Mass Haul View Settings (page 1320)
View Frame Group View Frame Group Collection (Settings Tab) (page 1930)
Most of the object collections above conform to a standard layout and use a standard shortcut menu.
Edit Feature Settings Modify the settings for all commands that pertain to the object.
Edit Label Style De- Set default settings for all label styles belonging to the object.
faults
For detailed information about the settings, click Help in the dialog box that is displayed when you select
the menu item.
Right-click the style collection to display a standard shortcut menu with the following commands:
Right-click a style name to display a shortcut menu that contains the following commands:
For detailed information about the settings, click Help in the dialog box that is displayed when you select
the menu item.
Right-click a label style name to display a shortcut menu that contains the following commands:
For detailed information about the settings, click Help in the dialog box that is displayed when you select
the menu item.
For detailed information about the settings, click Help in the dialog box that is displayed when you select
the menu item.
Right-click a table style name to display a shortcut menu that contains the following commands:
Delete Delete the table style. This command is displayed only when
the style can be deleted.
For detailed information about the settings, click Help in the dialog box that is displayed when you select
the menu item.
This tab displays survey project data, organized within databases for survey projects, equipment, and figure
prefixes. The project databases record the survey points, networks, and figures. The equipment databases
record standard deviations and other operational parameters of individual pieces of survey equipment. The
figure prefix databases record the conversion routines that are applied when creating lots, buildings, or other
figures from survey points.
The contents of the Survey tab are not specific to a drawing. This tab reflects the survey data in your AutoCAD
Civil 3D Projects folder, so it facilitates access to survey data from multiple drawings.
The surveyed points and figures in a project can be converted to AutoCAD Civil 3D points and parcels.
The Survey tab and Prospector tab share some basic functions. For more information, see Functions Shared
by the Prospector, Settings, and Survey Tabs (page 98).
NOTE When the tab is in the “open” state, the button has a blue background . When the tab is in the
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Icon Purpose
Displays the Survey User Settings dialog box. User settings are
specific to a Windows user login account and affect the Survey
feature system, not database or drawing data.
Displays the Survey Preview Settings dialog box. Select the com-
ponents that you want to display in the preview.
Switches the orientation of the item and list views. Available only
when the Toolspace is undocked.
Displays Help.
■ Survey Databases. A survey database collection expands to display all the networks (page 224) (which
collect the control points (page 280), non-control points (page 283), known directions (page 309), observations
(page 289), setups (page 285), and traverse definitions (page 401)), figures (page 347), and survey points.
■ Equipment Databases. Expands to display available equipment database. For more information about
this collection, see Survey Equipment Database (page 221).
■ Figure Prefix Databases. Expands to display available figure prefix databases. Figure prefix databases
enable you to determine the layer that a figure is drawn on by creating a prefix for a group of figure
names. For more information about this collection, see Survey Figure Prefix Database (page 222).
■ Linework Code Sets. Expands to display available Linework Code Sets. Linework code sets are used to
interpret the syntax of the field codes that are entered into the data collector by the survey field crew.
For more information about this collection, see Linework Code Sets (page 252).
Standard shortcut menu commands are available for many Survey tree items and collections. To display the
shortcut menu, right-click a collection or item in the Survey tree.
Reports
The Toolbox tab organizes reports for each object type. The reports provide useful engineering data from a
drawing in a compact, portable format. Some are in LandXML format, with predefined or custom XSL style
sheets. Other reports are .NET format, with custom dialog boxes that allow you to select the data and various
options.
You can add your own reports to the Toolbox menu. These reports can be in a variety of formats, including
XML, VBA, COM, or .NET.
See also:
NOTE When the tab is in the “open” state, the button has a blue background . When the tab is in the “closed”
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Icon Purpose
Opens the Edit Report Settings (page 2464) dialog box, where you
can edit settings for all report types.
Opens the Toolbox Editor (page 2463), where you can add custom
reports. You can also add other custom tools.
Displays Help.
and they remain active until you dismiss them by clicking . Other vistas, such as the Alignment Entities
vista, are controlled by a specific command. This type of vista can only be activated or closed when the
command is running, and its display is controlled from the command toolbar.
The active drawing controls the state of the Panorama window. When you switch between drawings, the
Panorama window either becomes inactive or shows only the vistas associated with the active drawing.
You can dock the Panorama window or use Auto-hide to reduce the amount of screen space it requires. For
more information, see The Toolspace Window (page 96).
The Panorama window is dis- If the Panorama window has a tab for the vista, click
played, but the vista you the tab to display the vista. If the named tab is not vis-
want to work with is not dis- ible, you must activate the vista.
played. For instructions about activating a specific vista, refer
to Help for that vista.
Only the Panorama title bar Move the cursor over the title bar to display the full
is displayed (Auto-hide is act-
ive). Panorama window. To disable Auto-hide, click on
the Panorama title bar.
The icons or commands available on an AutoCAD Civil 3D layout toolbar depend upon the toolbar in use.
Most AutoCAD Civil 3D layout toolbars include the following three icons in the upper right corner:
Icon Purpose
Pins the toolbar, which places it in a fixed location and also shrinks
the toolbar down to a small placeholder when the cursor moves
outside the toolbar. To display the expanded toolbar, move the
For information about the icons and commands that are available from a specific layout toolbar, refer to
the following table, or click the Help button on the toolbar.
Point Object Creation Toolbar Create Points Dialog Box (page 2357)
Tool Palettes
Tool palettes provide convenient access to a variety of tools and content.
Tool palettes are a standard feature in AutoCAD. You can open tool palettes using the ToolPalettes command,
or from the ribbon.
2 In the Tool Palettes Window, on the title bar, click the Properties icon .
3 From the bottom of the menu, select the tool palette to display.
2 Switch to the tool palette you want to add the subassembly or assembly to, or create a new tool palette.
4 In the Content Browser, locate the subassembly or assembly you want to add to a tool palette.
6 Hold down your pointing device and drag the subassembly or assembly to the location in the tool
palette where you want to place it.
Now you can use the procedure described in Creating a Subassembly from a Tool Palette (page 1557) to add
this subassembly to a drawing. For more information about working with the Content Browser and tool
palettes, see Adding Content to a Tool Catalog in the Content Browser Help.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Content Browser
The Content Browser is a library of tool catalogs containing tools, tool palettes, and tool packages. You can
publish catalogs so that multiple users have access to standard tools for projects.
Metric and imperial subassembly tool catalogs are included. You can drag and drop subassemblies from a
catalog onto a tool palette for easier access.
For more information, see Understanding the Content Browser in the Content Browser Help.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Object Tooltips
Proximity and rollover tooltips are displayed for civil drawing objects. You can control the display of tooltips
for the drawing, for an object type, or for a specific object.
■ A rollover tooltip displays information about an object when you hover the cursor directly over it. If the
object highlighting setting is on, the object will be highlighted when this tooltip is displayed.
■ A proximity tooltip displays information about the current location of the cursor with respect to one or
more objects in the drawing. More specifically, it displays information about the proximity of the cursor
to the objects. These tooltips are displayed without having to hover the cursor over any specific entity
in the drawing.
The most important object information is displayed at the beginning of the tooltip. For alignments and
surfaces, the tooltip displays the station/offset information for the closest alignment to the cursor and the
elevation of the topmost surface.
If you keep your cursor in the same location, additional information is displayed in an expanded tooltip
that shows up to four more items. Which items are displayed depends upon the objects in the drawing and
whether tooltips are enabled for that object (page 124). If there are five alignments and five surfaces in the
drawing, for example, the proximity tooltip will display three alignments and three surfaces.
■ Click Application Menu ➤ Options. On the Display tab, select or clear the Show ToolTips and Show
Rollover ToolTips check boxes.
NOTE The Show ToolTips check box controls the display of tooltips for the ribbon and for dialog boxes, as
well as proximity tooltips. The Show Rollover ToolTips check box controls the display of AutoCAD and AutoCAD
Civil 3D rollover tooltips.
2 In the Edit Feature Settings dialog box, under General, edit the Show Tooltips value.
NOTE This setting can be overridden at the object level in the object properties dialog boxes.
■ Yes: Displays tooltips for all objects of the selected type by default.
■ No: Does not display tooltips for the selected object type.
■ Off: Sets the default state of tooltips for new objects to be turned off.
4 Click OK.
■ In any civil object properties dialog box, on the Information tab, select or clear the Show Tooltips check
box.
Command Description
NOTE AutoCAD Civil 3D uses the standard AutoCAD drawing functionality. For more information, see the help
topics.
Use the list at the top of the Prospector tab to control whether only the active drawing is listed in the prospector tree or
all open drawings are listed.
Drawing Templates
Use drawing templates to eliminate duplication of effort and to help maintain consistency across drawings.
You start a new AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing using a template file. An AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing template
can contain standard AutoCAD information, such as AutoCAD settings and layers, and AutoCAD objects,
such as lines and text. In addition, it can include any AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing information that is listed
in either the Settings tree (including AutoCAD Civil 3D settings, styles, label styles, tables, description keys,
and point import/export formats) or the Prospector tree (including any AutoCAD Civil 3D object, such as
point groups).
Templates are listed under the Drawing Templates collection in the Prospector tree Master View.
The Drawing Template File Location path on the Files tab of the Options dialog box specifies where AutoCAD
Civil 3D templates are located.
1 In the Toolspace Prospector, click Master View from the drop-down list.
127
2 Expand the Drawing Templates collection and right-click a template to:
■ Create a new drawing based on the template.
Out-of-the-box Templates
AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing templates are included in the product.
The AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing templates are based on the National CAD Standard version 3.1. The following
templates are included:
NOTE These templates do not contain styles named ‘Standard.’ If you base a new drawing on a non-Civil 3D
drawing template, such as acad.dwt, then styles named ‘Standard’ are created by default in the new drawing.
When you start a new drawing using the New command on the Application menu, you can choose which
template you want to use.
The QNEW command, which is available on the Quick Access Toolbar, automatically uses the template
specified in the AutoCAD Options dialog box. For more information, see “Use a Drawing Template File” in
AutoCAD Help.
■ Discipline Designator: Required; the AutoCAD Civil 3D templates use the C and V discipline designators,
which stand for Civil and Survey/Mapping.
■ Major Group: Required; identifies elements such as roads, topographic elements, and storm sewers. To
adhere to the standards, custom Major Group fields are not allowed.
■ Minor Group: Optional; identifies sub-elements such as road profiles. You can include up to two minor
groups per layer name, and you can define your own custom Minor Groups. For example, the layer
C-ROAD-LINE-EXTN has two Minor Groups: “Line” and “Extn”.
For example, C-TOPO-MINR-N stands for Civil - Topographic element - Minor Contours - New.
1 Click ➤ Open.
2 In the Select File dialog box, select the file you want to use as a template.
3 Click OK.
5 In the Save Drawing As dialog box, under Files of Type, select the Drawing Template file type.
DWT files must be saved in the current drawing file format. To create a DWT file in a previous format,
save the file in the desired DWG format, and then rename the DWG file using a DWT extension.
7 Click Save.
9 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Menu
➤ Save As
Command Line
SaveAs
To see the available templates, click Application Menu ➤ New. If you want some preset object styles, the
templates that have names beginning with “_AutoCAD Civil 3D”, are recommended.
After choosing your initial template, the next logical step is to review and edit settings. On the Toolspace
Settings tab, right-click the drawing name and click Edit Drawing Settings. The Drawing Settings dialog box
includes five tabs and many settings.
■ The Units and Zones tab is used to set linear and angular units, intended plot scale, and coordinate zone
for the current drawing.
■ The Transformation tab provides functionality to transform the coordinate system specified on the Units
And Zones tab to local specifications.
■ The Object Layers tab provides a convenient table for assigning objects to layers, and creating or renaming
layers. Objects on the same layer are turned on and off together if you change the layer visibility. For
maximum display flexibility, spread objects and their components across several layers. The color of a
layer affects all objects assigned to that layer and drawn in a style that uses the ByLayer color setting. If
you set up styles this way, you can change the color of many objects by simply changing the layer color.
■ The Abbreviations tab is a central location in which to set the abbreviations used in object labels, especially
for alignment and profile geometry points.
■ The Ambient Settings tab provides global default settings, such as the precision of numeric values, and
the visibility of tooltips.
One setting on this tab often overlooked is the Save Command Changes To Settings under the General
setting group. If you set this to Yes, then whenever you change a setting, such as the radius of an alignment
curve, it is saved as the default value for next time.
Another important setting is Independent Layer On. Set it to No if you want to be able to control object
visibility by turning layers on and off.
The ambient settings you configured at the drawing level are available at the feature level in case you
want to override them.
On the Ambient Settings tab, you see an arrow in the Child Override column next to any setting that is
changed for one or more features (objects) in the drawing. You can cancel the override by clicking the
arrow, and you can click the lock icon to lock any setting and prevent overrides at the feature level.
1 Click ➤ New.
2 In the Select Template dialog box, select a template on which the drawing will be based, and click Open.
Quick Reference
Menu
➤ New
Toolspace
Prospector (Master View): Drawing Templates ➤ right-click <template name> ➤ Create New Drawing
Command Line
New
NOTE You can change the active drawing by right-clicking a drawing name in the Prospector tree Master View
and clicking Switch To.
1 Click ➤ Open.
2 In the Select File dialog box, browse to the folder containing the drawing, select the drawing, and click
Open.
➤ Open
Command Line
Open
To create a selection set of objects that have the same style and that are on the same layer
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Isolating Objects
AutoCAD Civil 3D provides an easy-to-use feature for temporarily hiding and displaying selected objects in
your drawing.
Use this operation when you want to focus on individual areas of large drawings and need to display or hide
some of the objects.
Do the following:
1 Select the objects in the drawing that you want to isolate and display.
Alternatively, you can click on the right side of the drawing window status bar, then click Isolate
Objects, and select the objects you want to isolate.
When you have isolated objects in your drawing, the light bulb in the drawing window status bar turns
red .
3 If you want to isolate additional objects in your selection set, select one or more isolated objects, and
run the Isolate Objects command again.
Alternatively, you can click the red light bulb in the drawing window status bar and click Isolate
Additional Objects.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Alternatively, you can click the light bulb in the drawing window status bar and click Hide Objects.
NOTE After isolating and hiding objects multiple times, it may be difficult to know whether any objects are hidden,
or whether all objects are displayed in the drawing. When you have isolated objects in your drawing, the light
bulb on the right side of the drawing window status bar is displayed in red . When all objects are displayed
and none are isolated or hidden, the light bulb is displayed in yellow . Alternatively, to ascertain that no objects
are hidden, select an object in the drawing, right-click, and click Isolate Objects. If the End Object Isolation
command is unavailable, all objects are displayed. If the shortcut menu command End Object Isolation is active,
there are hidden objects in the drawing. To display all objects, see Ending Object Isolation in a Drawing (page
136).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Alternatively, click on the right side of the drawing window status bar. Click End Object Isolation.
NOTE If no objects have been isolated, the End Object Isolation command is unavailable and the light bulb in
the drawing window status bar is displayed in yellow . In that case, no further action is necessary.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE If you want to distribute a drawing with isolated objects, make sure that you and the recipient of the
drawing are working with the same version of AutoCAD Civil 3D. A recipient who is working with an earlier version
of AutoCAD Civil 3D, AutoCAD, or Object Enabler is not able to display the hidden objects. In this case, end the
object isolation before saving and distributing the drawing.
■ You can isolate an external reference within a host drawing as a whole by selecting it and isolating at as
described in Isolating Objects to Display (page 134).
■ You can isolate individual objects within an external reference by opening the external reference, isolating
and hiding objects as needed, saving the external reference drawing, and then reloading the external
reference.
■ You cannot display hidden objects in an external reference while editing it with REFEDIT in the host
drawing. You need to use XOPEN and save the desired Hide/Isolate settings within the external reference.
Item View
When you click an object or an object collection on the Prospector tab, for example, Points or Alignments,
an item view appears. An item view can be either a list view or a graphical view, depending on the object
selected.
The item view presents a table in which you can review and edit data for each object in the selected collection.
For example, if you select a point group, the item view table includes a row for each point in the group.
Grips
When you select an object in the drawing, grips appear on the object. You can use these grips to click and
drag the object to a new location.
For example, when editing alignments, you can use grips to move points of intersection or points of line-arc
tangency.
Panorama Window
Some object types, such as alignments and profiles, use the Panorama window to display a table of entities
that make up that object.
The Panorama window is a floating, dockable window that you can keep open as you work. It can include
several tables, called vistas, on different tabs. Panorama data shown in black text can be edited; data shown
in gray text cannot be edited.
Property Editors
When you right-click any object on the Prospector tab, and then click Properties, you can view all the
AutoCAD Civil 3D properties of that object, and edit some of them.
These properties typically include the styles, labels, related objects, and some structural details of the current
object.
■ When the cursor is above a horizontal alignment, and one or more profile views for the same horizontal
alignment are in the drawing, a temporary line is drawn in each profile view at the station defined by
the orthogonal projection of the cursor onto the horizontal alignment. The temporary line is drawn to
the full height of the profile view, and moves as the cursor moves.
■ When the cursor is within a profile view, a temporary line is drawn orthogonal to the horizontal alignment
at the cursor's station. The line extends 200 world distance units to the left and right sides of the horizontal
alignment. As the cursor's position changes in the profile view, the temporary line's position is redrawn
at the new station location.
■ When the cursor is within a section view, a temporary line is drawn orthogonal to the horizontal alignment
at the station of the cross-section view. The line extends 200 world distance units to the left and right
sides of the horizontal alignment. Additionally, a vertical line is drawn in each associated profile view.
The vertical line is drawn at the station of the section view.
➤ Click Analyze tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Station Tracker drop-down ➤ Current Viewport .
➤ Click Analyze tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Station Tracker drop-down ➤ All Viewports .
Quick Reference
Ribbon
DWG file format type Created in which version(s)? Can be opened only by which ver-
sions?
2004 2004, 2005, 2006 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009,
2010
■ You cannot edit the proxy object or make changes to the design.
■ If you need to edit objects in a previous release of AutoCAD Civil 3D, your only option is to export the
Civil objects to a LandXML file, then import the LandXML data into the previous version. For more
information, see Supported LandXML Data for Drawing Import and Export (page 1876).
Country Kits
Autodesk provides country kits that make AutoCAD Civil 3D more applicable to local standards in many
places around the world. Each year these country kits are updated to the new formats and enhanced by new
features. Many country kits are available on the AutoCAD Civil 3D DVD, and others are provided at
www.autodesk.com/civil3d-countrykits. You should not have to do anything to migrate a country kit, except
if you derive company or project standards from the country kit. Install the new country kit and read the
documentation to learn about changes and additions and to determine how to apply the latest version.
Country kits are installed using the Content Pack mechanism. For more information about Content Packs,
see “What are Content Packs?” in the installation guide.
■ Save (AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011 to AutoCAD or other Autodesk products) If you save a drawing in AutoCAD
Civil 3D 2011 and open it in AutoCAD, all AutoCAD Civil 3D objects, are displayed as proxy objects. If
PROXYGRAPHICS was set to 1 at the time you saved the drawing in AutoCAD Civil 3D and PROXYSHOW
is set to 1 at the time you open the drawing in AutoCAD, the proxy objects display as graphic images
(you see your design correctly). If PROXYGRAPHICS and/or PROXYSHOW are not set to 1, you might
see only a bounding box, or the proxy may not be displayed.
■ Save with Object Enabler (AutoCAD Civil 3D to AutoCAD or other Autodesk products) If you have
installed the AutoCAD Civil 3D object enabler, additional information, such as surface statistics, corridor
and pipe network information is available to you in the AutoCAD property palette.
■ Export to AutoCAD - This command converts all AutoCAD Civil 3D objects (points, alignments, labels,
corridors) to plain AutoCAD objects (for example, blocks, lines, arcs, text) in order to best match the
■ Export to other software - Export the AutoCAD Civil 3D design to LandXML and use a third party
application to import the LandXML.
■ AutoCAD Civil 3D Object Enabler - Installing the Object Enabler with another Autodesk product allows
you to see the AutoCAD Civil 3D objects regardless of the drawing settings. You can query the properties
of theAutoCAD Civil 3D objects and obtain extended information, but you cannot edit the objects.
There are other specific converters such as Bentley MX GENIO Extension, France PISTE Extension, German
ISYBAU, OKSTRA, UK Microdrainage
NOTE In situations where the previously suggested methods for converting files does not work, use the Export
to AutoCAD command and then save as DXF. The 3rd party software may be able to use the 2D or 3D graphical
and text information to construct a model.
Command Description
HideDrawingTips Turns off the display of the Station Tracker (page 140)
SelectSimilar Selects all objects that have the same style and that
are on the same layer (page 133)
For information on recommended workflows for project management, see Project Management Workflow (page 24).
■ The size of the project team and number of people requiring access to the files
For more information on project management options and the decision-making process, see Project
Management in the AutoCAD Civil 3D Best Practices Guide.
Object Sharing
Sharing design objects such as surfaces and alignments across drawings can provide major savings in project
time lines, if done correctly.
Three main methods are available for sharing data within a project. These are also known as data reference
types:
■ External references (xrefs), in which the contents of one drawing (DWG) is imported into another.
For a detailed description of each method, including advantages, limitations, and best practices, see Project
Management in the AutoCAD Civil 3D Best Practices Guide.
143
A best practice common to all project structures is to organize individual design objects such as alignments
and surfaces in separate drawings. These objects are referenced into base drawings during the design process.
Complete engineering plans and final production drawings are prepared with a combination of object
references and drawing references.
The figure shows the collections for a Vault project named Trio and a data shortcut project named Arc. Both
project types are created from the default project template. As a result, they have identical collections of
surfaces, alignments, and other objects that can be referenced into multiple drawings.
You can store multiple projects in the same working folder. The default location of the working folder for
data shortcuts projects is C:\Civil 3D Projects, and for Vault projects is My Documents\Vault (Microsoft
Windows XP), or Documents\Vault (Microsoft Vista).
Several Vault projects can be displayed in the Projects collection. For data shortcut projects, you switch from
one to another by changing the data shortcuts folder.
See also:
The recommended use of this Import function is to bring individual surfaces, alignments, or pipe runs into
new drawings for use in AutoCAD Civil 3D projects.
Data shortcuts can be used for surfaces, alignments, profiles, pipe networks, and view frame groups.
If you create a reference to a profile data shortcut, a data shortcut to the parent alignment is also created.
NOTE The term ‘project’ is used here for ease of reference, and to explain a sample data structure. Formal projects
and particular folder structures are not required with data shortcuts and references, but some form of structure
usually helps to keep related data organized.
On the Toolspace Prospector tab, the Data Shortcuts node displays the path to the active project, where data
shortcuts are stored. These data shortcuts can be created from any drawings associated with the active project.
The figure shows how the Data Shortcuts node appears if the active project is Arc.
If you change the active project, the new project name appears on the Data Shortcuts node, and the subfolders
contain only the shortcuts in the new active project. A particular consumer drawing can contain data
references from multiple projects.
Project Setup
This section explains how to organize the data for a new project, including some configuration options to
consider.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click Data Shortcuts ➤ Set Working Folder.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
2 Copy the folder _Sample Project, then paste it in the same location and rename it. This is your new
template.
3 Open your new template and review the structure of folders and subfolders.
4 Do not change the top-level folder, _Shortcuts, or any folders inside it, but feel free to change the names
of other folders and their hierarchical structure.
Using a project template is a best practice that you will appreciate as your collection of projects and data
expands.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click Data Shortcuts ➤ New Data Shortcuts Folder.
2 In the New Data Shortcut Folder dialog box, specify a name, and optionally a text description of the
project folder.
3 Optionally, select Use Project Template, browse to another location for the project template folder, and
click the name of a project template.
4 Click OK. The new project folder is created in the working folder.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE You can override the Data Shortcuts working folder by creating a Windows environment variable named
DSSYSVAR. This may be useful in situations where multiple users share a project, and the project directory is in
different locations on each user’s machine.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click Data Shortcuts and click Set Data Shortcuts Folder.
2 In the Set Data Shortcuts dialog box, click the name of the project you want to work with.
3 Check that the new project path is displayed on the Data Shortcuts node on the Prospector tab.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 Click ➤ Options.
3 Select the Project Files Search Path item, and click Add.
5 Enter the search path for the data shortcuts project. The path should be in Universal Naming Convention
(UNC) format.
NOTE This procedure explicitly creates an association. If the current drawing is not associated with a project, and
a data reference is inserted, an association is created implicitly.
1 Open the drawing for which you want to set the default data shortcuts project.
2 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click Data Shortcuts and click Associate Project to Current
Drawing.
3 In the Associate Project to Current Drawing dialog box, select the project to associate in the Select
Project drop-down.
NOTE To remove the associated project, set the Select Project dropdown to None.
4 Click OK. The project becomes the default data shortcut project for the drawing, and appears under
the drawing’s Data Shortcuts node in the Prospector.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Data Shortcut Collection
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click Data Shortcuts and click Associate Project to Multiple
Drawings.
2 In the Associate Project to Multiple Drawings dialog box, select the project to associate in the Select
Project dropdown.
NOTE To remove the associated project, set the Select Project dropdown to None.
3 Click OK. In the Browse for Folder dialog box, navigate to the folder on the filesystem that contains
the drawings to associate with the project.
4 Click OK. The project is associated with all drawings contained in the folder, and appears in each
drawing’s Data Shortcuts tree in the Prospector.
NOTE The system will not allow you to create multiple shortcuts for a given object or to create a data shortcut
to a reference object from another drawing.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click Data Shortcuts ➤ Create Data Shortcuts.
2 In the Create Data Shortcuts dialog box, click any objects to be referenced in other drawings, and then
click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
See also:
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Data Shortcuts collection to find the object you want
to reference.
2 Right-click the object. Click Create Reference. A copy of the object is inserted into the active drawing.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Data Shortcut Collection
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Data Shortcuts collection to find the shortcut you want
to remove.
2 Set the value to 0 to disable the Data Shortcuts node, or 1 to enable the node.
Synchronizing References
Synchronizing a data reference brings in any changes made to its source object.
When references become out of date with the data shortcuts, the icon displays a message prompting you
to synchronize the references. Additionally, in the Prospector tree, the icon is displayed next to reference
objects that need to be synchronized.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the drawing node. Expand the object collection (for example,
Surfaces).
NOTE The Synchronize menu item is displayed only for reference objects that are out of date.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Right-click ➤ Synchronize
Usage Guidelines
■ Before using this command, you must be logged in to Vault, and the project you want to add to Vault
must appear on the Prospector Data Shortcuts node as the current project.
■ As a best practice, put all project drawings and files within a project folder, using a standard template.
The structure of folders will be replicated in Vault, including the paths to all source drawings.
■ After being added to Vault, the data shortcut project remains in place and is usable.
1 On the Toolspace Prospector tab, right-click Data Shortcuts ➤ Add To New Vault Project.
2 In the New Project dialog box, enter a project name, and optionally a Description. This project name
cannot be identical to the data shortcut project folder name.
3 Click OK. The Vault project is created, and appears on the Projects node on the Prospector tab.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Promoting References
Promote references to independent objects.
A promoted reference becomes an independent object, and is no longer automatically updated if the original
source is edited.
To promote a reference
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Data Shortcuts collection to see the data shortcut of
interest.
2 In the Promote All Data References dialog box, click Promote All Referenced Objects Into The Current
File.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Single object: Select the reference object. Click ➤ Name tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Promote Data Reference
All objects in drawing: Click Manage tab ➤ Data Shortcuts panel ➤ Promote All Data References
Menu
When a data shortcut reference is broken, the icon is displayed next to the invalid data reference in
Toolspace, on the Prospector tab.
Validation reloads the data references if the drawing paths have not changed. Otherwise, you must repair
broken references.
■ In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click Data Shortcuts ➤ Validate Data Shortcuts.
The system checks data shortcut references. If any references are broken, the Event Viewer opens and
displays details that you can use to fix the problem.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
When a data shortcut reference is broken, the icon is displayed next to the invalid data shortcut in
Toolspace, on the Prospector tab for the host or consumer drawing.
Broken references typically occur if a source drawing has been renamed or moved to a different folder. If
you can identify the new name or location, it is quite easy to repair the references. If the source drawing
contains multiple data shortcuts, once you identify the drawing you are prompted to repair all of the
references.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click the object name of the broken reference, and then click
Repair Broken References.
2 In the Choose the File dialog box, navigate to the source drawing for the referenced object, and then
click Open.
If the source drawing contains other broken references, the Additional Broken References dialog is
displayed. You can click the Repair All Broken References button, or click Cancel to repair only the
broken reference you selected.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, select the parent node for the object. For example, if the data
reference object is a centerline alignment, click Centerline Alignments.
2 In the Item List view, scroll until the Source Drawing column is visible.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Data Shortcuts collection to see the data shortcut of
interest.
2 Right-click the data shortcut, and then click Open Source Drawing.
The source drawing for the data shortcuts is displayed in a new document window.
Quick Reference
Menu
In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click Data Shortcut ➤ Open Source Drawing.
1 From the Windows desktop, click the Start menu and navigate to your list of programs.
2 Open the AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011 folder and click Data Shortcuts Editor. The editor opens in a separate
window.
4 In the shortcut table, display the data shortcuts you want to migrate. Display all of them by clicking
the data shortcut folder at the top of the tree, or display a subset by clicking an object type such as
Surfaces or Alignments.
5 Click File menu ➤ Save As, then specify the folder where you want to save the data shortcuts.
Precautions
Before editing data shortcuts, ensure that no one else is currently creating or editing the same set of data
shortcuts within AutoCAD Civil 3D. Otherwise, one user can overwrite changes made by the other.
Changes made in the Data Shortcut Editor window do not take effect until shortcuts are reloaded. To reload
the shortcuts, use the procedure Setting the Data Shortcuts Folder (page 148), or close AutoCAD Civil 3D and
restart it.
Best Practices
On the Edit menu in the Data Shortcut Editor, use the Find and Replace command to quickly change text
strings in the names of data shortcuts, paths, or source drawings.
In the shortcut table, set the Use to Match column to associate data shortcuts with their source objects by
means of the source object’s name or handle, or both. The object’s handle is its unique identifier used by
the system. Users cannot change the handle, so it can be the most reliable matching attribute if an object’s
name has changed.
One situation in which you would match by name is if you delete an object, then re-create it and apply the
same name. The new object has a different handle, but if you use the match-by-name option, the old data
shortcuts will automatically reference the new object.
1 From the Windows desktop, click the Start menu and navigate to your list of programs.
2 Open the AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011 folder and click Data Shortcuts Editor. The editor opens in a separate
window.
3 In the Data Shortcuts Editor window, click File menu ➤ Open Data Shortcuts Folder, and navigate to
the project folder that contains the data shortcuts you want to edit.
Using Vault
Autodesk Vault is a complete document management system for drawings, project objects, and project-related
files.
Autodesk Vault provides access control and version control for all project drawings. One master copy of
each project drawing is maintained in the project database. Other team members can reference the master
copy, and they are notified when the master copy is updated.
Most project team members can access all required Vault features using the Prospector tree. However, you
will need a knowledgeable system administrator who installs the server and client Vault software, uses ADMS
Console or the Autodesk Vault administration tool to customize Vault for your purposes, and regularly
performs system administration tasks such as data backups. Most of the topics in this section are geared
toward your system administrator.
TIP Some tasks, such as managing user accounts, can be done with either the Autodesk Vault tool or ADMS
Console. When Help suggests using the Vault tool to perform a task, you can often use ADMS Console instead.
For information about installing Autodesk Vault, see the Autodesk Data Management Server Installation
Guide.
Autodesk Vault provides access control and file version control. AutoCAD Civil 3D provides commands in
the Prospector tree to create and access project drawings and shared project data.
After you have logged in to Vault, each project visible to the Vault user is displayed as a collection on the
Projects node of the Prospector tree..
Project Points
When using Vault, project management for AutoCAD Civil 3D points is handled differently from project
management for other objects. For more information, see Working with Vault Project Points (page 187).
■ Whether or not you have logged into Vault from the Prospector tree.
■ The state (for example, checked-in or checked-out) of the selected project item.
■ The location of the project item in the Prospector tree. For example, some drawing-related commands
are available at the Open Drawings collection level, some are available at the Projects collection level,
and some are available at both levels.
■ Any circumstances that make the operation invalid for the selected item.
The user information that is defined for you on the current Vault server also affects the actions you are
permitted to perform. For example, you might have permission to get copies of project drawings, but not
create project drawings.
■ Projects. Lists the projects available to you after you have logged in to a Vault server and a Vault database.
■ Drawing Templates. Lists the available drawing templates. For more information, see Drawing Templates
(page 127).
Icon Meaning
If no icon is displayed, then the drawing has been added to the project,
but you do not have a local copy.
The drawing is available to be checked out, and your local copy is older
than the latest version in the Vault database.
The drawing is checked out to you, but you do not have a local copy
of the object.
The drawing is checked out to you, and the version of the drawing in
the Vault database matches your local copy.
The drawing is checked out to you, and your local copy is newer than
the latest version in the Vault database. This usually means that you
have changed the drawing since you checked it out.
The drawing is checked out to you, and your local copy is older than
the latest version in the Vault database.
The drawing is checked out to someone else, and you do not have a
local copy.
The drawing is checked out to someone else, and your local copy
matches the latest version in the Vault database.
The drawing is checked out to someone else, and your local copy is
newer than the latest version in the Vault database.
The drawing is checked out to someone else, and your local copy is
older than the latest version in the Vault database.
When your drawing contains a reference to a shared object, and the local copy of the source drawing becomes
out of date, is displayed next to the drawing name in the Prospector project tree. This generally occurs
when someone adds a newer version of the project object’s source drawing to the project.
Icon Meaning
Object is locked.
NOTE To display the drawing item modifier icons, click at the top of the Prospector tab.
Icon Meaning
The local copy of the project object no longer matches the project
version, which means that you have edited it.
The following table lists all combinations of the drawing item modifier icons:
No No No
Yes No No
No Yes No
Yes Yes No
No No Yes
Yes No Yes
No Yes Yes
NOTE Some of the above icons are displayed only in the Points list view.
NOTE To view the Projects collection in the Prospector tree, select Master View from the list at the top of the
Prospector tab.
Click a collection in the Prospector tree Projects collection to display a list view.
■ Project name
■ Description
If the selected item is a collection or folder containing drawing files, the following information is displayed
in the list view:
■ Name
■ Version
■ Date checked in
■ Comment
If the selected item is a collection containing shared objects, the following information is displayed in the
list view:
■ Object name
■ Description
For more information about changing the list view display, see Customizing a List View (page 101).
When a user checks out a file that is stored at another site, the system replicates that file at the user’s site.
As long as the file remains shared, the system remembers to update that copy with any changes. Vaults and
individual files are replicated only where they are really in use. Backup and restore operations can be managed
from any site that has all vaults enabled. For more information, see ADMS Console Help.
Project Folders
Any file (drawing or not) that is associated with a project, especially any file that would benefit from version
control, should be stored in the project. Temporary files, such as preliminary design drawings, do not need
to be stored in the project.
For ease of use, all projects should use consistent folder structure and folder names. A practical structure is
provided when you use the project template. You can easily create your own custom template if the default
version is not suitable.
NOTE In general, a user who creates a folder or project data can delete it using the Autodesk Vault tool. For this
reason, it is recommended that all new projects be created by a system administrator. This will prevent other users
from advertently deleting a project and associated files.
You do not need to create a folder for point database files or survey database. These are automatically stored
directly beneath the main project folder.
A project can also include files that are not drawings. Using the Autodesk Vault tool, create folders for such
files directly under the project folder. Possible folder names might include: Proposals, Client Correspondence,
and Contracts. You can store and access the files in non-drawing folders using the Vault tool.
8 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Windows, from the Start menu, open the Control Panel. Depending on your system, the Control
Panel may be on a Settings submenu.
5 In the Autodesk Vault Installation Wizard dialog box, click Add or Remove Features.
6 In the Select Features to Install field, select the MS Office Add-In. Click Next.
7 Click Next.
8 Click Finish.
To use Vault with a Microsoft Office application, click File menu ➤ Autodesk Vault and select one of the
Vault options.
Project.xml
This file contains information about the project and the shared project objects. The presence of this file is
what indicates to AutoCAD Civil 3D that the folder containing this file is an AutoCAD Civil 3D project
folder. Do not delete, modify, or move this file.
PointsGeometry.db
This file contains the project’s point geometry. The points contained in the file are listed in the project’s
Points list in the Prospector tree. This file is not checked in and out directly as project drawing files are; it
is checked in and out indirectly when users use point access control commands.
PointsStatus.db
This file contains access control information about the points in PointsGeometry.mdb, including the status
(checked-in, checked-out, or protected) of individual points.
NOTE Each instance of a Vault Data Management server has a separate set of user accounts. If a user requires
access to multiple servers, you must define an account for him on each server.
■ Click Tools ➤ Administration and then use the Security tab to add a new user.
To add a group in the Vault tool, click Tools menu ➤ Administration ➤ Global Settings, and then use the
Security tab to add the group. You can also add users to a group here. For more information, see Managing
Groups in Autodesk Vault help.
Folder Permissions
With Autodesk Vault in AutoCAD Civil 3D, system administrators can extend permissions down to folders
and sub-folders in a vault.
Before setting folder permissions, you may want to manage specific Vault users, groups, or roles from the
Tools menu in the Autodesk Vault tool.
1 In the Vault tool window, expand the Vault Explorer ($) tree to the folder whose permissions you want
to set.
3 To add a user or group to the Access Control List, in the Properties dialog box, Security tab, click Add.
4 In the Add Members dialog box, select the member(s) to add to the Access Control List. Click Add.
5 Click OK.
Pack and Go
Use the Vault Pack and Go feature to hand off project data to someone else.
NOTE You must select Master View from the list at the top of the Prospector tab before you can view the Projects
collection.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, select Master View from the list at the top of the Prospector tab.
4 In the Log In (page 2456) dialog box, enter your Vault user name.
9 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
2 Click Properties.
3 In the Properties - AutoCAD Civil 3D Projects (page 2458) dialog box, under Working Folder, click .
4 In the Browse For Folder dialog box, browse to the folder and click OK.
Creating Projects
If you are logged in to Vault, you can use the Prospector tree to create a new project in the project database.
You create the project using either the default Sample Project template, or another template you have saved.
Project templates provide the capability to create a new project with a predetermined folder structure, where
each folder can also contain files of any type. The template folders are found in the AutoCAD Civil 3D Project
Templates folder on your local disk.
NOTE In general, a user who creates a folder or project data can delete it using the Autodesk Vault tool. For this
reason, it is recommended that all new projects be created by a system administrator. This will prevent other users
from inadvertently deleting a project and associated files.
To create a project
2 Click New.
3 In the New Project (page 2457) dialog box, enter a project name.
4 If you want to create your new project from a template, select Use Project Template.
5 On the Project Template list, click the template you want to use.
6 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Project Administration
Your system administrator can use ADMS Console or the Autodesk Vault tool to customize Vault for your
purposes and to regularly perform project administration tasks on an on-going basis.
These tasks include the following:
■ Deleting a project
■ Modifying the state of a file, for example, checking in a file that for some reason cannot be checked in
by the person who originally checked it out
For more information, see the ADMS Console Help and Administrative Tasks in Autodesk Vault help.
NOTE The active project is not displayed in the Select Projects To Display (page 2458) dialog box.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Projects collection and right-click a project.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab (Master View): Projects collection ➤ right-click <project name> ➤ Set Active
3 In the Select Projects To Display (page 2458) dialog box, select the check box next to the name of any
project that you want listed in the Prospector Projects collection.
NOTE The name of the active project is not included in the list.
6 Click OK.
Prospector tab (Master View): right-click Projects collection ➤ Select Projects To Display
Dialog Box
Select Projects To Display Dialog Box (page 2458)
Deleting a Project
Delete a project from the project database using the Autodesk Vault tool.
A project can be deleted by a system administrator or by the user that created it. It is recommended that all
projects be created by a system administrator to protect projects from being inadvertently deleted by users
who are not system administrators.
To delete a project from the project database, delete the top-level project folder. You cannot delete a file
that is checked out.
After a project has been deleted from the Vault database, its name remains in the Projects collection in the
Prospector tree until you refresh the display of the tree.
After the project has been deleted from the Vault database, use Windows Explorer to delete local copies of
project files and folders from the working folder.
1 On the Windows Start menu, click Programs ➤ Autodesk ➤ AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011 ➤ Data Shortcuts
Editor.
2 In the Data Shortcuts Editor, click File menu ➤ Open Data Shortcuts Folder. In the Browse for Folder
dialog box, browse to the folder for the project that you want to convert. The default location is C:\Civil
3D Projects.
After you select the project folder, the Vault references are loaded into the table.
4 In the Data Shortcuts Editor, click File menu ➤ Save As, and then save the new Shortcuts folder in its
current location.
Exporting a Project
Export a project to a ZIP file for storage, or to move the project to another vault.
When a project is exported, copies of the latest versions of all drawings and other documents are compressed
and saved in a ZIP archive. This archive can be reliably imported to a vault, retaining the data references
between drawings.
The export operation does not affect the original project documents. They remain in place for ongoing use.
TIP Label your project files, then export them to archive a copy of the files at a specific milestone.
See also:
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, in Master View, expand the Projects node to see the list of projects.
3 In the Browse for Folder dialog box, navigate to and select the folder where you want to save the ZIP
file, then click OK.
The system displays a progress bar while the files are compressed and saved.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
See also:
To import a project
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, in Master View, right-click the Projects node ➤ Import From, and
click either ZIP File or Folder.
2 In the dialog box that opens (Import Project Archive or Browse for Folder, depending on project format),
navigate to and select the project container, and then click OK.
The system displays a progress bar and status messages during the import operation.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, in Master View, right-click the Projects node ➤ Manage Prompts.
2 In the Manage Prompts dialog box, review the Response and Frequency settings for each prompt, making
any required changes.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
databases requiring migration are indicated with the out of date icon .
2 Projects that require migration are indicated with the out of data icon. Right-click on a project that
requires migration, and select Migrate.
3 A warning dialog displays and indicates that migrated projects are not backwards-compatible with
previous versions of AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011. Click Yes to continue.
The selected project and associated databases are checked out, migrated, then checked back in with an
incremented version.
TIP All projects requiring migration can be migrated at once by right-clicking on the Projects collection and
selecting Migrate.
3 In the Select Civil 3D Project Folder To Migrate dialog box, browse to the project folder to be migrated.
4 Select the folder that contains the project and click Open.
The new project is created on the Vault server in the database that you are logged in to.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab (Master View) ➤ right-click Projects collection ➤ Migrate Pre-Civil 3D 2007 Project
TIP Before adding a drawing to a project, save the drawing in the most appropriate folder in the project working
folder. Doing this ensures that Vault can determine where to save the drawing in the database.
While adding a drawing to a project, specify which objects (if any) in the drawing you want to share with
others. Those objects are then added to the appropriate Prospector project object collection (such as Surfaces,
Alignments, or Pipe Networks) and can be referenced by others.
NOTE You should only share objects that are required by others. If you are unsure whether an object should be
shared, do not share it. You can share it later using the Check Out and Check In commands.
While adding a drawing to a project, you can specify that associated files, including surface data files, image
files, and xrefs, are added to the project. You can also specify whether a .dwf file is created and added to the
project for display in drawing item views and the Autodesk Vault tool.
NOTE Previews from .dwf files are not displayed in 64-bit versions of Vault and AutoCAD Civil 3D.
If a drawing containing a surface is added to a project, and the surface references external data files, a folder
is created under the drawing to hold those files. The files are placed in the folder, and the surface definition
in the drawing is updated to reflect the new (relative) location of the files.
An open drawing must be saved before you can add it to a project. A copy of the drawing is created in your
local working folder and the master copy is added to the project.
4 On the Select A Project (page 2446) page of the Add To Project wizard, select the project to which you
want to add the drawing.
5 Click Next.
6 On the Select A Drawing Location (page 2446) page of the Add To Project wizard, specify the location of
7 Click Next.
8 On the Drawing File Dependencies (page 2446) page of the Add To Project wizard, specify file dependencies
and .dwf creation options.
NOTE Previews from .dwf files are not displayed in the 64-bit versions of Vault and AutoCAD Civil 3D.
9 Click Next.
10 In the Share Data (page 2447) page of the Add To Project wizard, specify which objects in the drawing
you want to share with others.
11 Click Finish.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Open Drawings collection ➤ right-click <drawing name> ➤ Add to Project
Add To Project Wizard
Select A Project Page (page 2446)
Select a Drawing Location Page (page 2446)
Drawing File Dependencies Page (page 2446)
Share Data Page (page 2447)
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, under the Projects collection, expand the project collection and
the project Drawings collection that contains the drawing you want to check out.
NOTE If a drawing is open under the Open Drawings collection, all right-click functions are transferred to
that location.
3 In the Check Out Drawing (page 2449) dialog box, specify whether dependent files should also be checked
out.
5 If Include File Dependencies is selected, specify which project files should be checked out.
6 Click OK.
Prospector tab (Master View): Projects collection ➤ project Drawings collection ➤ right-click <drawing
name> ➤ Check Out
Dialog Box
Check Out Drawing Dialog Box (page 2449)
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, under the Projects collection, expand the project collection and
the project Drawings collection that contains the drawing you want to check in.
NOTE If a drawing is open under the Open Drawings collection, all right-click functions are transferred to
that location.
3 On the Drawing File Dependencies (page 2448) page of the Check In Drawing wizard, specify any file
dependencies, .dwf creations options, and comments.
4 Click Next.
5 On the Share Data (page 2449) page of the Check In Drawing wizard, specify which objects in the drawing
you want to share with others.
NOTE If the drawing does not contain objects that can be shared, this dialog box is not displayed. Objects
that were shared during the Add to Project command or a previous Check In command are not listed.
6 Click Finish.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab (Master view): Projects collection ➤ project Drawings collection ➤ right-click <drawing
name> ➤ Check In
OR
Prospector tab: Open Drawings collection ➤ right-click <drawing name> ➤ Check In
Check In Drawing Wizard
Drawing File Dependencies Page (page 2448)
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, under the Projects collection, navigate to the folder that contains
the drawing you want to open.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab (Master View): Projects collection ➤ project Drawings collection ➤ right-click <drawing
name> ➤ Open
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, under the Projects collection, right-click the drawing, collection,
or folder you want to update.
3 In the Get Latest Version (page 2455) dialog box, select Include File Dependencies to display any dependent
files in the Project Files list.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab (Master View): Projects collection ➤ right-click collection, folder, or item ➤ Get Latest
Version
Dialog Box
Get Latest Version Dialog Box (page 2455)
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, under the Projects collection, expand the project collection and
the project Drawings collection that contains the drawing you want to reset.
NOTE If a drawing is open under the Open Drawings collection, all right-click functions are transferred to
that location.
4 In the Undo Check Out (page 2460) dialog box, select Include File Dependencies to display dependent
files.
5 If dependent files are displayed, clear the check boxes next to files that should remain checked-out.
6 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab (Master View): Projects collection ➤ project Drawings collection ➤ right-click <drawing
name> ➤ Undo Check Out
OR
Prospector tab: Open Drawings collection ➤ right-click <drawing name> ➤ Undo Check Out
Dialog Box
Undo Check Out Dialog Box (page 2460)
To synchronize a drawing
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, under the Open Drawings collection, right-click the drawing you
want to synchronize.
3 In the Sync To Project (page 2459) dialog box, select the out-of-date project objects you want synchronized.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Open Drawings collection ➤ right-click <drawing name> ➤ Sync to Project
Dialog Box
Sync To Project Dialog Box (page 2459)
WARNING When you detach a drawing from a project, all links to project source drawings and project data are
severed and cannot be re-established.
A drawing must be open to be detached from a project. When you detach a drawing from a project, all
references in the drawing to shared project objects are replaced with object data that can be edited.
When a drawing contains a project object, such as a reference to a project surface, the project object is
promoted to a surface object that has no reference back to the original source drawing that its geometry it
based on. You can edit the promoted surface, but you cannot rebuild it based on the original source data.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, in the Open Drawings collection, right-click the drawing you want
to detach.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Open Drawings collection ➤ right-click <drawing name> ➤ Detach Project
1 Open the drawing to which you want to add the reference, and make it the active drawing.
3 Expand the project and object collections that contain the project object.
6 In the Create Reference dialog box for the object, specify how the object’s geometry will be displayed
in the drawing.
7 Click OK.
Prospector tab (Master View): Projects collection ➤ <project> collection ➤ <object> collection ➤
right-click <object> ➤ Create Reference
2 Expand the project and object collections that contain the project object.
4 Click Remove.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab (Master View): Projects collection ➤ <project> collection ➤ <object> collection ➤
right-click <object> ➤ Remove
NOTE The Get Latest Version command is available at all levels of a project in the Prospector tree, when applicable.
5 In the Get Latest Version (page 2455) dialog box, select Include File Dependencies to display dependent
files in the Project Files list.
6 Clear the check boxes next to files and folders that you do not want updated.
7 Click OK.
Prospector tab (Master View): Projects collection ➤ <project> collection ➤ <object> collection ➤
right-click <object> ➤ Get Latest Version
Dialog Box
Get Latest Version Dialog Box (page 2455)
NOTE If you do not have the drawing checked out, you can only open the drawing in read-only mode.
■ If you do not have the source drawing checked out, click Open Source Drawing (Read-only) to open
it.
■ If the drawing is open, click Switch To Source Drawing to make it the active drawing.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab (Master View): Projects collection ➤ <project> collection ➤ <object> collection ➤
right-click <object> ➤ Open Source Drawing
OR
Prospector tab (Master View): Projects collection ➤ <project> collection ➤ <object> collection ➤
right-click <object> ➤ Open Source Drawing (Read-only)
OR
Prospector tab (Master View): Projects collection ➤ <project> collection ➤ <object> collection ➤
right-click <object> ➤ Switch To Source Drawing
4 Right-click the project object and click Check Out Source Drawing.
5 In the Check Out Drawing (page 2449) dialog box, specify whether file dependencies should be included.
7 If Include File Dependencies is selected, specify which project files should be checked out with the
drawing file by selecting the check boxes next to them.
8 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab (Master View): Projects collection ➤ <project> collection ➤ <object> collection ➤
right-click <object> ➤ Check Out Source Drawing
Dialog Box
Check Out Drawing Dialog Box (page 2449)
4 Right-click the project object and click Undo Check Out Source Drawing.
5 In the Undo Check Out (page 2460) dialog box, select Include File Dependencies to display dependent
files.
6 If dependent files are displayed, clear the check boxes next to files that should remain checked out.
7 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab (Master View): Projects collection ➤ <project> collection ➤ <object> collection ➤
right-click <object> ➤ Undo Check Out Source Drawing
WARNING Promoting an object reference severs all connections to project object source data. The connection
cannot be re-established.
You should promote an object reference only when you have no need to maintain the project object’s link
to its source drawing or data.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, under the Open Drawings collection, expand the drawing that
contains the project reference object you want to promote.
2 Expand the drawing object collection that contains the object reference you want to promote.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Open Drawings collection ➤ <object> collection ➤ right-click <object> ➤ Promote
Command Line
PromoteAllReferences
Icon Meaning
The local project point database matches the latest version of the project
point database in the project’s Vault database.
The local project point database is newer than the latest version of the
project point database in the project’s Vault database.
The local project point database is older than the latest version of the
project point database in the project’s Vault database.
Many of the project management operations (such as check-in and check-out) that can be performed on
points in a drawing can also be performed using point groups.
Icon Meaning
The point is checked out to a drawing other than your active drawing.
This could be a drawing that belongs to you or to someone else.
NOTE To view project points in the Prospector tree, select Master View from the list at the top of the Prospector
tab.
In Prospector ➤ Projects, click the project Points collection to display a list view that lists all of the project
points. Project management information is listed, including:
■ User who last modified the point and the date it was modified
■ Current state of the point (checked-in, checked-out, or protected) and the date the state was last changed
■ If checked-out, the drawing and host computer that the point is checked out to
Project point state icons are displayed next to each point. For more information, see Project Point State Icons
(page 188).
■ If you already have a copy of a project point in a drawing, use the shortcut menu in the Prospector
drawing Points list view to check in, check out, protect, or get a copy of the point.
■ If you do not have a copy of the point in a drawing, use the shortcut menu in the Prospector project
Points list view to check in, check out, protect, or get a copy of a point.
■ If you have point groups defined in the drawing, right-click a point group in the Prospector tree and use
the point group shortcut menu to check in, check out, protect, or get copies of project points.
In some cases, only valid project management commands are displayed on a shortcut menu. For example,
if a set of points are not available for check out, the Check Out command might not be displayed, but the
Get From Project command would be displayed so that you can get a read-only copy of the point. In some
cases, a drawing must be saved before project management commands are available.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, under the Open Drawings collection, expand the drawing that
contains the points you want to add to the project.
3 In the list view, select the points, right-click, and click Add To Project.
Any Survey points included in the selection are not added to the project. Survey points are stored only
in the project’s Survey Point database.
6 From the Check In Options list, select an option to specify the state of the points after you add them
to the project.
7 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Open Drawings collection ➤ click Points collection ➤ right-click selected points in list
view ➤ Add To Project
OR
Prospector tab: Open Drawings collection ➤ Point Groups collection ➤ right-click <point group> ➤
Add Points To Project
Dialog Box
Add Points To Project Dialog Box (page 2445)
NOTE When working with project points, the term local copy refers to the copy of the point in your drawing.
Checking out a project point creates a local copy of the point in the drawing. The Check Out command
gives you exclusive access to the project point; no one else can check it out while you are working on it.
If the Check Out command is not available, you can use the Get From Project command to a read-only local
copy of the point. For more information, see Copying Project Points into a Drawing (page 192).
1 Verify that the drawing you want to bring the points into is the active drawing. If it is not, right-click
the drawing name in the Open Drawings collection in the Prospector tree and click Switch To.
2 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Projects collection and then expand the project that
contains the points you want to check out.
4 In the list view, select the project points you want to check out, right-click, and click Check Out.
Prospector tab (Master View): Projects collection ➤ project Points collection ➤ right-click selected points
in list view ➤ Check Out
OR
Prospector tab: Open Drawings collection ➤ Point Groups collection ➤ right-click <point group> ➤
Check Out Points
Dialog Box
Check Out Points Dialog Box (page 2450)
Checking In Points
You can use the Check In command to check in checked-out project points.
NOTE When working with project points, the term local copy refers to the copy of the point in your drawing.
After you edit one or more project points, use the Check In command to replace the existing project point
with your local copy of the project point, and increase the project point’s version number.
The Check In command always updates the project point from the drawing that the point was checked out
to.
1 Verify that the drawing that you want to check the points in from is the active drawing. If it is not,
right-click the drawing name in the Open Drawings collection in the Prospector tree and click Switch
To.
6 From the Check In Options list, select an option to specify the state of the points after you check them
in.
7 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab (Master View): Projects collection ➤ project Points collection ➤ right-click selected points
in list view ➤ Check In
OR
Prospector tab: Open Drawings collection ➤ drawing Points collection ➤ right-click selected points in
list view ➤ Check In
OR
Prospector tab: Open Drawings collection ➤ Point Groups collection ➤ right-click <point group> ➤
Check In Points
1 Verify that the drawing to which you want to copy is the active drawing. If it is not, right-click the
drawing name in the Prospector tree and click Switch To.
2 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Projects collection and then expand the project collection
that contains the points you want to copy.
4 In the list view, select the points to copy, right-click, and click Get From Project.
5 In the Get From Project (page 2456) dialog box, click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab (Master View): Projects collection ➤ project Points collection ➤ right-click selected points
in list view ➤ Get From Project
OR
Prospector tab: Open Drawings collection ➤ drawing Points collection ➤ right-click selected points in
list view ➤ Get From Project
OR
Prospector tab: Open Drawings collection ➤ Point Groups collection ➤ right-click <point group> ➤
Get Points From Project
Dialog Box
Get Points From Project Dialog Box (page 2456)
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Projects collection and then expand the project collection
that contains the points you want to protect.
3 In the list view, select the points to protect, right-click, and click Protect.
A lock icon is displayed next to a protected project point in the Points list view.
Prospector tab (Master View): Projects collection ➤ project Points collection ➤ right-click selected points
in list view ➤ Protect
OR
Prospector tab: Open Drawings collection ➤ drawing Points collection ➤ right-click selected points in
list view ➤ Protect
OR
Prospector tab: Open Drawings collection ➤ Point Groups collection ➤ right-click <point group> ➤
Protect Points
Dialog Box
Protect Points Dialog Box (page 2458)
A lock icon is displayed next to a protected point in the Points list view.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Projects collection and then expand the project collection
that contains the points you want to unprotect.
3 In the list view, select the protected points, right-click, and click Unprotect.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab (Master View): Projects collection ➤ project Points collection ➤ right-click selected points
in list view ➤ Unprotect
OR
Prospector tab: Open Drawings collection ➤ drawing Points collection ➤ right-click selected points in
list view ➤ Unprotect
OR
Prospector tab: Open Drawings collection ➤ Point Groups collection ➤ right-click <point group> ➤
Unprotect Points
Dialog Box
Unprotect Points Dialog Box (page 2460)
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Projects collection and then expand the project collection
that contains the points you want to delete.
3 In the list view, select the points to delete, right-click, and click Delete From Project.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab (Master View): Projects collection ➤ project Points collection ➤ right-click selected points
in list view ➤ Delete From Project
OR
Prospector tab: Open Drawings collection ➤ drawing Points collection ➤ right-click selected points in
list view ➤ Delete From Project
OR
Prospector tab: Open Drawings collection ➤ Point Groups collection ➤ right-click <point group> ➤
Delete Points From Project
Dialog Box
Delete Points From Project Dialog Box (page 2455)
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Projects collection and then expand the project collection
that contains the points you want to reset.
3 In the list view, select the points to reset, right-click, and click Undo Check Out.
4 In the Undo Check Out (page 2460) dialog box, click OK.
Prospector tab (Master View): Projects collection ➤ project Points collection ➤ right-click selected points
in list view ➤ Undo Check Out
OR
Prospector tab: Open Drawings collection ➤ drawing Points collection ➤ right-click selected points in
list view ➤ Undo Check Out
OR
Prospector tab: Open Drawings collection ➤ right-click <point group> ➤ Undo Check Out
Dialog Box
Undo Check Out Points Dialog Box (page 2460)
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Projects collection, and then expand the project
collection that contains the points you want to reset.
3 Select the checked-out or protected points, right-click, and click Reset To Checked In.
NOTE The Project Points item list can be sorted to assist selecting the project points to be reset to a checked
in state.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab (Master View): Projects collection ➤ project Points collection ➤ right-click selected points
in list view ➤ Reset to Checked In
Dialog Box
Reset Points To Checked In Dialog Box (page 2458)
Error Codes
Errors encountered during Vault project management commands are reported in two ways.
If a single error is encountered during a project management operation, it is displayed in a message box. If
multiple errors occur during a single operation, the resulting Vault error codes are displayed in the Event
SysErrCodes
CoreErrCodes
SecurityErrCodes
DocServiceErrCodes
1065
SerializeErrCodes
Command Description
205
206
Understanding Survey
8
You can use the AutoCAD Civil 3D survey features to download, create, analyze, and adjust survey data. The survey features
extend the functionality of AutoCAD Civil 3D by streamlining the process of transferring field-captured survey data to
and from the office.
Survey Overview
You can use the complete set of tools in AutoCAD Civil 3D to import survey data, perform surveying
calculations, and automate symbol placement and line work.
AutoCAD Civil 3D survey data and figures persist in a survey database, and can be accessed using multiple
drawings attached to the same AutoCAD Civil 3D survey database.
The survey database stores angle values in Radians and distance values in Meters. Survey data is transformed
according to the database units for the purposes of display and input. AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing units can
be independent of the survey database units. If drawing objects are imported from the survey database and
the AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing units and coordinate zone differ, the objects are transformed.
During the field survey data collection process, you can use a coding convention established in AutoCAD
Civil 3D to automate the conversion of field survey data, collected with data collection equipment, into
AutoCAD Civil 3D linework.
207
Imported Survey data without linework coding
Survey objects and their components are displayed based on their styles. Before creating survey components,
you should be familiar with creating and managing styles (page 66).
Survey Database Settings Control the default settings for all database
properties.
Linework Code Set Define the codes that are used in the filed
to determine the connectivity of linework
from point descriptions.
Survey Feature Settings Control the default styles for figures and
networks.
For more information about settings, see Survey Settings (page 227).
Import Survey Data Wizard Use the Import Survey Data wizard to im-
port field book files, point files, and
LandXML files or to select points in the
drawing.
Import Survey Land XML Import Survey LandXML data into the sur-
vey database.
Add survey data to a network Use the commands from within a network
collection to create or edit control points,
non-control points, directions and observa-
tions from a network.
For more information about input and figures, see Adding and Editing Survey Data (page 279) and Survey
Figures (page 347).
For more information, see Survey Analysis and Output (page 389).
Update the survey objects in the drawing Select a survey object in the drawing and
use short-cut menus to update the drawing
object on the Prospector tab.
■ Each network can be analyzed and adjusted separately, but can reference data from another network.
■ When you create figures by importing data into a network, that network contains information as to
which figures will need to be updated if the network is modified.
Create a new survey network (page Create a network with a relevant name to the site
----- (<name>_Site Analysis) and import the points and
224)
line work into the survey database.
Import the field book file (page 267) ----- Import the survey data into the survey database.
Perform coordinate geometry In the Survey Command Window, use the Survey
calculations on the network (page ----- Command Language, commands to close the
2697) parcel and create a survey figure by performing
coordinate geometry calculations.
Create a new drawing (page 132) ----- Create a new drawing that contains the surface
for the site engineering.
Create a new surface (page 648) ----- Create a new surface and add the point group to
the surface.
Edit the surface (page 660) ----- Perform additional edits on the surface, such as
editing the surface boundary.
■ A survey is being done on a parcel of land by multiple survey crews. The survey will be analyzed within
a single survey network, for example a least squares network analysis.
Example: Using Networks with Import Events and Survey Data | 213
■ The data from each survey crew is downloaded into separate .fbk files and each .fbk file is imported into
the same network, creating a separate import event. During each import, potential point identifier (point
name or point number) conflicts can be resolved by applying a point identifier offset, and linework can
be processed using the specified linework code set.
■ The network is analyzed creating adjusted control points for each setup and updated coordinates for
each sideshot within each setup. The coordinates for each figure are updated in each import event.
Phase Two
■ In a later stage of the civil engineering process, an additional survey has to be performed to establish
control for construction stakeout of proposed roads and parcel corners.
■ This additional survey ties into the network that was adjusted in phase one and also requires a least
squares analysis.
■ A new network is created, and for each survey data file that is imported into this network an import
event is created.
Survey Tab
Use the Survey tab in Toolspace to access and manage survey settings, survey-related databases, and survey
project data.
For more information about the Survey tab, see The Toolspace Survey Tab (page 115).
■ In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click a network object or a figure object ➤ Browse To Survey
Data.
The Survey tab is displayed, and the selected network is displayed in the Survey tree, or the selected figure
is displayed in the Figures Editor in the Panorama window.
■ In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click a network object or a figure object ➤ Update From Survey
Data.
The drawing object is updated with the data in the survey database.
■ In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click a figure object ➤ Update Survey Data From Drawing.
The survey database is updated with changes made to the selected figure object.
■ In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Network collection. Right-click a network item. Click Survey
Command Window.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey Objects
Survey networks and figures persist in AutoCAD Civil 3D drawings as drawing objects.
■ Network object. Represents a survey network or traverse in the drawing. The network object is a read-only
object that cannot be edited in the drawing. If the network is modified in the database, the survey network
displayed on the Survey tab in Toolspace indicates that it needs to be updated.
■ Survey Point. A special type of COGO Point that is read-only in a drawing session. However, the display
properties of a Survey Point can be modified in the points or point groups collection on the Prospector
tab in Toolspace. A survey point is read-only in the drawing, because a survey point may have dependent
data, such as an Angle, Distance, Vertical Angle, Prism Height, from a specific instrument setup.
Survey drawing network and figure objects are displayed in the Toolspace Prospector tab under the Survey
collection.
For general information about AutoCAD Civil 3D objects, see Understanding Objects and Styles (page 63).
■ Network styles. Include display control for survey network components, including known and unknown
control points, non-control points, sideshot lines and sideshot points, direction lines, network lines,
error ellipses, and tolerance error points and lines. You can also control the network marker styles and
3D geometry display. For more information, see Survey Network Style Dialog Box (page 2711).
■ Figure styles. Include display control for survey figure components, including plan and model markers,
and 3D display. For more information, see Survey Figure Style Dialog Box (page 2707).
For more general information about styles, see Object and Label Styles (page 66).
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Survey collection. Right-click the Network Styles collection.
Click New.
2 In the Network Style dialog box, click the Information tab and enter a name and description for the
style.
3 To specify the styles for markers and the error ellipse scale factor in the network, click the Components
tab. For information on the components about this tab, see Components Tab (Survey Network Style
Dialog Box) (page 2711).
4 To specify the 3D geometry display of the network, click the 3D Geometry tab and specify the settings.
5 To define the display of the various network components, including network lines, points, and error
ellipses, click the Display tab.
6 To view summary information about the style, click the Summary tab.
7 Click OK.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Survey collection, right-click the Figure Styles collection,
and click New.
2 In the Figure Style dialog box, click the Information tab and enter a name and description for the style.
3 To define figure marker placement and styles, click the Markers tab and specify the options. For
information about the components on this tab, see Plan and Model Tab (Survey Figure Style Dialog
Box) (page 2707).
4 To specify the 3D geometry display of the figure, click the 3D Geometry tab and specify the settings.
5 To define the display of the various figure components, including figure lines, and markers, click the
Display tab.
6 To view summary information about the style, click the Summary tab.
7 Click Apply.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the name of the network or figure style that you want to
edit and click Edit.
2 In the Style dialog box, change the properties of the style as required.
Survey Databases
In AutoCAD Civil 3D, survey data is not drawing dependent and is stored in an external database. For display
and visualization, survey data can be manually and automatically inserted into a drawing when the survey
database is updated or when data is imported into the survey database.
The Survey database consists of two files, the.sdbx file is the main survey database and it contains all the
data in the survey database collections except for the Extended Properties definitions and values. The Survey
.sdxx file contains the Extended Properties definitions and values.
NOTE Survey databases from versions prior to AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011 will be converted to Microsoft® SQL Server®
Compact 3.5. New and converted survey database files have the file extensions SDBX and SDXX.
IMPORTANT To support a 64-bit operating system in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011, survey database files, equipment
database files, and figure prefix database files must be migrated to a new format. On the Survey tab in Toolspace,
a database item that requires migration will display the "out-of-date" icon to provide a visual cue that it requires
migration. To complete the migration, right-click the item and select the migration command.
Survey Database
Use the Toolspace Survey tab to create local survey databases. You can subsequently create a new AutoCAD
Civil 3D Project from the existing local survey database.
A survey database contains all the control points, known directions, observation measurements, traverse
definitions, figures, and standard deviations based on equipment data for the survey database. This includes
observations imported from data collector files, entered from the Toolspace Survey tab, the survey editors
(for example, Traverse Editor and Observation Editor), and Survey Command Window.
A survey database is displayed on the Toolspace Survey tab under the Survey Databases collection.
By default, survey databases are local and do not use the AutoCAD Civil 3D project management functionality.
You can subsequently create a new AutoCAD Civil 3D Project from the existing local database. When a new
NOTE AutoCAD Civil 3D project management determines the working folder, therefore the databases that are
displayed in the working folder may vary depending on whether you are logged in or logged out.
For more information about AutoCAD Civil 3D project management, see Project Management (page 143).
3 In the New Local Survey Database dialog box, enter the name for the database.
The database is created and displayed in bold text under the Survey Databases collection.
NOTE If you have Vault Explorer installed you can also set the working folder on the Prospector tab in the
Projects collection.
3 In the Browse For Folder dialog box, browse to the working folder location.
Survey databases in the working folder are displayed in the Survey Databases collection and all local
survey databases that you subsequently create are stored in this location.
NOTE By default, to save on resource usage, when you start AutoCAD Civil 3D, all survey databases are displayed
in a closed state.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the named survey database. Click Open For Edit or Open
For Read-only. If you double click the database it opens in read-only mode. A database in read-only
mode always displays and the only option provided is to open in for read-only. Writable databases
opened in read-only mode will display this icon only while they are open.
The named survey database is displayed in bold text and it is expanded to display the Networks, Network
Groups, Figures, Figure Groups, Survey Points, and Survey Point Groups collections.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Survey tab: expand Survey Databases ➤ right-click <database name> ➤ Open For Edit
or
Open For Read-only
To close a survey database click Survey tab: expand Survey Databases ➤ right-click <database name> ➤
Close Survey Database
NOTE If a survey database is located on a shared folder on the network and is opened for editing, it is opened
exclusively and all others are prevented from opening it, even in read-only mode. If the survey database is only
opened as read-only, others can also open it as read-only.
TIP Double-click a closed database to open it in read-only mode. Double-click an open database to display the
Survey Database Settings dialog box.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the survey database. Click Add To New Project.
2 In the Add To New Project dialog box, the database name is displayed. The project icon is displayed
next to the survey database name to indicate that the survey database is contained in an existing
AutoCAD Civil 3D project.
3 In Toolspace, click the Prospector tab, expand the Projects collection and right-click the newly created
project to access the standard project management functions. See Working with Vault Projects (page
169).
NOTE If the Projects collection is not visible, click Master View from the list.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: expand Survey Databases ➤ right-click <database name> ➤ Add To New Project
2 On the Translate Survey Database Base Point page, enter a point number from the open database or
click Pick In Drawing and select a point in the drawing. Click Next.
NOTE If the base point exists as a survey point within the survey database, the Name, Easting, Northing,
Elevation, Description, Latitude, and Longitude property values are displayed.
3 On the Translate Survey Database Rotation Angle page, click the value cell and enter a rotation angle.
Click Next.
4 On the Translate Survey Database Destination page, click the value cell and enter Easting, Northing,
and optional Elevation Change values. Click Next.
5 On the Translate Survey Database Summary page, review the values for Base Point, Destination Point,
and Translation. Click Finish.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
2 In the Survey User Settings dialog box, under the Change Reporting property, specify the Report Style
Path and Report Style. The report style is a style sheet (.xsl file) that is used in conjunction with an XML
file.
3 Right-click the database ➤ Edit Survey Database Settings.Under the Change Reporting property, select
Logging Enabled. This setting is off by default.
4 Right-click a survey database ➤ Display Change Report. The report is generated by reading the .log file
and formatted using the Change Report Style (.xsl).
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab ➤ expand <named> survey database ➤ right-click <named> network ➤ Display Change Report
NOTE Equipment databases that have been migrated to XML format have the file extension EDB_XDEF.
For information on equipment definition settings, see Equipment Database Manager Dialog Box (page 2672).
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the Equipment Databases collection. Click New.There is a
default equipment database named ‘Sample,’ which is displayed in the Equipment Databases collection.
NOTE A best practice is to enter the model number or the name of the equipment manufacturer in the
Name field.
3 To enter equipment definitions, right-click the equipment database and click Manage Equipment
Database.
4 In the Equipment Database Manager dialog box, enter a name for the Sample equipment definition
and modify other properties as required. For more information about the equipment properties, see
Equipment Database Manager Dialog Box (page 2672).
■ In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Equipment Databases collection. Double-click a database
to make it current or right-click the database ➤ Make Current.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Equipment Databases collection. Right-click a named
equipment database ➤ Manage Equipment Database.
2 In the Equipment Database Manager dialog box, click . The new definition is added with the
default name Sample.
3 Expand Sample and under Miscellaneous enter a name for the definition. Modify the properties as
required. For more information about the equipment properties, see Equipment Database Manager
Dialog Box (page 2672)
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Equipment Databases collection. Right-click the database
that contains the definition that you want to delete ➤ Manage Equipment Database.
2 In the Equipment Database Manager, select the definition you want to delete and click .
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: right-click Equipment Databases
or
Survey tab: Equipment Databases ➤ right-click <database-name>
or
Survey tab: Equipment Databases ➤ <database name> ➤ right-click <equipment-definition-name>
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the Figure Prefix Databases collection. Click New.
2 In the New Figure Prefix Database dialog box, enter a name for the new figure prefix database.
3 To create a figure prefix definition, right-click the figure prefix database. Click New.
4 In the Figure Prefix Properties dialog box, enter a name for the figure prefix definition and modify other
properties as required. For more information about the figure properties, see Figure Prefix Database
Manager Dialog Box (page 2677).
5 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Figure Prefix Databases collection. Click New.
7 In the Figure Database Manager, click . A new line called Sample is added to the database manager.
8 Click Sample and enter a new name. Specify the remaining values.
■ In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Figure Prefix Databases collection. Right-click the figure
prefix database. Click Make Current.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Figure Prefix Databases collection. Right-click the named
figure prefix database ➤ Manage Figure Prefix Database.
2 In the Figure Prefix Databases dialog box, select a figure definition and click the . The definition is
copied to the end of the list.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: right-click Figure Prefix Databases
or
Survey Networks
A survey network is a series of interconnected lines that represent the observed instrument setups, or stations.
It contains all associated known control points, known directions, setups, and observations.
TIP Use the Import Survey Data command to create a network and import data using the wizard interface. For
more information, see Import Survey Data Wizard (page 261).
After you have imported or created data in the survey network you can insert the network into your AutoCAD
Civil 3D drawing as a network object. For information about survey objects, see Survey Objects (page 215).
The following illustration shows the network components:
■ In a drawing you can hover your mouse over any network component to display a tooltip with component
information.
■ In the drawing, select a network component and right-click for options to browse to the survey data on
the Survey tab, edit, or update the data.
■ In Survey Toolspace, you can change the network display order using drag and drop functionality. When
you drag and drop a network it is inserted after the network on to which it is dropped. Drag a network
and drop it on the Networks collection to have it display first in the list.
■ You can drag and drop a Network from the Survey tab in Toolspace into the drawing.
■ In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the survey database. Right-click the Networks collection. Click
New.
■ In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the survey database, expand the Networks collection, right-click
the named network, and click Insert Into Drawing.
■ In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, select the network and drag and drop the selection onto an open drawing
in the AutoCAD Civil 3D.
A survey network object is created in the drawing. Browse to the Survey collection in the Toolspace Prospector
tab to view and modify the network object.
■ In the drawing, hover your cursor over a network object component to display a tooltip with relevant
data.
To browse to survey network data from the drawing to the Survey tab in Toolspace
■ In the drawing, use CTRL + Select to select a network object sub-component, such as a sideshot point,
and right-click to display commands for browsing to the survey data. The Survey tab is displayed (if
hidden) and the survey database item is highlighted.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
■ Click Survey tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Browse To Survey Data Browse To Network .
■ Click Survey menu ➤ Browse ➤ Browse To Network. Double click a network name on the Survey tab in
Toolspace to display the network in the drawing, or click a network in the drawing to highlight the
network on the Survey tab.
Click Survey tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Browse To Survey Data Browse To Network
Menu
User Settings
Survey user settings are specific to a Windows user login account and affect only the survey features, not
project or drawing data.
Specify the default settings for importing and exporting survey data and the display of interactive graphic
components.
Tips for working with Settings
■ Default Survey Database Settings can be set up and can then be used each time you create a new survey
database.
■ You can create a .sdb_set for imperial or metric survey database settings, or for use with for specific
coordinate zone.
■ Have everyone in your organization use the same path for the Survey User Settings.
2 In the Survey User Settings dialog box, expand the Survey Database Defaults property group.
3 Under Survey database settings path, specify the path to where survey database settings files are located.
This path should be in a common location within an organization.
227
4 Under Survey database settings, select a survey database settings file from the drop list. All files with a
*.sdb_set extension are listed. The settings in this file are used whenever a new survey database is created
by AutoCAD Civil 3D.
5 Under, Extended properties definition path, specify the path to where Extended Properties definitions
are located. This path should be a common location within an organization.
6 Under Extended properties definition, specify an extended properties definition file from the list. All
files in the extended properties definition path that has a *.sdx_def extension is listed.
For information about the setting equipment properties, see Equipment Database Manager Dialog Box (page
2672).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Survey tab:
Dialog Box
Survey User Settings Dialog Box (page 2726)
2 In the Survey User Settings dialog box, expand the Equipment Defaults property group.
3 Under Equipment Database Path, enter the path for the survey equipment databases or click to
browse to the folder. This is the path where all new equipment databases are stored.
4 Under Current Equipment Database, select the current database from the drop-down list.
The list of available databases is determined from the databases contained in the Equipment Databases
collection in the Toolspace Survey tab.
5 Under Current Equipment, select the current equipment from the drop-down list.
For information about the setting equipment properties, see Equipment Database Manager Dialog Box (page
2672).
Survey tab:
Dialog Box
Survey User Settings Dialog Box (page 2726)
2 In the Survey User Settings dialog box, expand the Linework Processing Defaults property group.
3 For Linework Code Sets Path, enter the path for the linework code or click to browse to the folder.
This is the path where all linework code set files are stored.
4 For Process Linework During Import, select the check box to process linework during the import.
Linework can also be processed after the import is completed.
WARNING In the Import Settings, clear the Process Linework check box if you are importing the following:
■ .fbk files created from the Survey Data Collection Link application because Linework Codes Set
definitions may not be recognized. However, the figure commands created using the Survey Data
Collection Link are recognized.
■ .fbk files that were created in Autodesk Land Desktop or in a previous version of AutoCAD Civil 3D.
Using the Process Linework command on these files may create duplicate and erroneous figures.
5 For the Current Linework Code Set, select a linework code set from the list.
6 For the Process Linework Sequence, select one of the following from the list:
■ By Import Order - processes points in the order which they are imported. Point names are always
processed by import order.
■ By Point Number - processes points sequentially by point number (ascending order only).
For more information about linework processing settings, see Survey User Settings Dialog Box (page 2726).
Survey tab:
Dialog Box
Survey User Settings Dialog Box (page 2726)
2 In the Survey User Settings dialog box, expand the Figure Defaults property group.
3 For Figure Prefix Database Path, enter the path for the figure prefix databases or click to browse to
the folder. This is the path where all new figure prefix databases are stored.
4 For Current Figure Prefix Database, select the current database from the drop-down list.
The list of available databases is determined from the databases contained in the Figure Prefix Databases
collection on the Toolspace Survey tab.
For more information about figure prefix settings, see Survey User Settings Dialog Box (page 2726).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Survey tab:
Dialog Box
Survey User Settings Dialog Box (page 2726)
2 In the Survey User Settings dialog box, expand the Miscellaneous property group.
3 For Use External Editor, select the check box to use an external editor.
NOTE If you do not specify to use an external editor, the default editor, specified in the AutoCAD Options
dialog box, is used.
4 For External Editor, enter the path and name for the editor or click to browse to the editor.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Survey tab:
Dialog Box
Survey User Settings Dialog Box (page 2726)
station transit
foresight line current figure
backsight prism
baseline
baseline offset line
baseline prism
NOTE Using interactive graphics when you are importing a field book file significantly slows the import process.
2 In the Survey User Settings dialog box, expand the Interactive Graphics property group.
3 Select the check boxes for the interactive graphics that you want to display.
For descriptions of the interactive graphic components, see Survey User Settings Dialog Box (page 2726).
4 Optionally, to change the colors for the components, click the color swatch to open the Select Color
dialog box, from which you can select a color.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Survey tab:
Dialog Box
Survey User Settings Dialog Box (page 2726)
2 In the Survey User Settings dialog box, expand the Import Defaults property group.
3 Select the check boxes for the defaults that you want to enable.
For descriptions of the import defaults, see Survey User Settings Dialog Box (page 2726).
NOTE The site is used if the Lot Line property for the figure is true and the Site property for the figure is not
specified.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Survey tab:
Dialog Box
Survey User Settings Dialog Box (page 2726)
■ In the Survey User Settings - Import Defaults, specify Yes for Display Tolerance Errors In Event Viewer.
The event viewer is displayed at the completion of any import function if the data contains tolerance
errors.
■ On the Survey tab in Toolspace right-click the Networks collection or a <named> network ➤ Report
Tolerance Errors.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: expand Survey Databases ➤ right-click Networks collection or right-click <named> Network ➤
Report Tolerance Errors
NOTE You can also run the Report Tolerance Error command from the right-click shortcut menu on the Networks
collection or an individual network.
Column Description
See also:
NOTE For more information about the syntax in the following section, see the Figure Commands (page 426).
■ If the figure vertex has a point number, then the figure vertex is defined by referencing the point in the
field book file:
BEG <figure name>
PT <point ID>
■ Then the following lines are added to the field book file:
NE SS <point ID> <north> <east> <elevation> <description>
BEG <figure name>
PT <point ID>
■ Then the following line is added to the field book file defining the figure vertex:
FIG NE <north> <east>
■ If the figure segment is a curve, then the curve segment is defined using the XC ZD (BULB) command.
The BULB parameter is used when the delta angle for the curve is greater than 180 degrees.
■ If both ends of the curve segment reference point IDs, then the following format is output:
XC ZD (AZ <point ID> <point ID>) (D <point ID> <point ID>)
NOTE For more information about the syntax in the following section, see the Figure Commands (page 426).
■ If the figure vertex has a point ID, then the following lines are added to the field book file:
BEG <Figure name>
PT <point ID>
■ If the vertex does not reference a point ID, then the following lines are added to the field book file:
BEG <figure name>
FIG NE <north> <east>
■ If the figure segment is a curve, then the curve segment is defined using the XC ZD (BULB) command.
The BULB parameter is used when the delta angle for the curve is greater than 180 degrees.
■ If both ends of the curve segment reference point numbers (and if this check box is selected), then the
following format is output:
XC ZD (AZ <point ID> <point ID>) (D <point ID> <point ID>)
When the Export Point Data is enabled, for each figure vertex that references a point ID, the following
format is output to the field book file prior to the section defining the figures:
NE SS <point ID> <north> <east> <elevation> <description>
2 In the Survey User Settings dialog box, expand the Export Defaults property group.
3 Select the check boxes for the defaults that you want to enable.
For descriptions of the properties, see Survey User Settings Dialog Box (page 2726).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Survey tab:
Dialog Box
Survey User Settings Dialog Box (page 2726)
NOTE The previews use the colors set by the Interactive Graphics settings. For information, see Specifying Interactive
Graphics Settings (page 231)
3 In the Survey User Settings dialog box, expand the Network Preview, Setup Preview, and Figure Preview
property groups.
4 Select the check boxes for the components that you want to display in the previews.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Survey tab:
Dialog Box
Survey User Settings Dialog Box (page 2726)
3 In the Save As dialog box, browse to the path where you want to save the settings file and enter a name.
4 Click Save.
3 In the Open dialog box, browse to the path where the settings file is located and select it.
4 Click Open.
The Survey User Settings dialog box is populated with the settings from the file.
Survey tab: ➤
Command Line
EditSvUserSettings
Database Settings
Survey database settings are specific to the survey features of an AutoCAD Civil 3D survey database.
By default, the survey database settings are stored in the C:\Civil 3D Projects\<database name>\Survey.sdb
file.
To edit survey database settings, the survey database must be open.
NOTE The survey database units are independent from the drawing units. If the survey database units and drawing
units are different, the survey data is transformed when it is inserted into the drawing.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Survey Databases collection, right-click on the database
name, and click Edit Survey Database Settings.
2 In the Survey Database Settings dialog box, expand the Units property group.
3 For the Coordinate Zone property, click and select the zone in the Select Coordinate Zone dialog
box.
4 For the other unit settings, click the drop-down list and select the value for the unit type that you want
to modify.
For more information about the settings, see the Units section of the Survey Database Settings Dialog
Box (page 2698).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ right-click <database-name> ➤ Edit Survey Database Settings
Dialog Box
Survey Database Settings Dialog Box (page 2698)
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Survey Databases collection, right-click the project name,
and click Edit Survey Database Settings.
2 In the Survey Database Settings dialog box, expand the Precision property group.
3 Click the value for the unit, and enter the precision value.
For more information about the settings, see the Precision section of the Survey Database Settings Dialog
Box (page 2698).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ right-click <database-name> ➤ Edit Survey Database Settings
Dialog Box
Survey Database Settings Dialog Box (page 2698)
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Survey Databases collection, right-click on the database
name, and click Edit Survey Database Settings.
2 In the Survey Database Settings dialog box, expand the Measurement Type Defaults property group.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ right-click <database-name> ➤ Edit Survey Database Settings
Dialog Box
Survey Database Settings Dialog Box (page 2698)
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Survey Databases collection, right-click on the database
name, and click Edit Survey Database Settings.
2 In the Survey Database Settings dialog box, expand the Measurement Corrections property group.
3 Select the check boxes for the corrections that you want to enable.
For more information about the settings, see the Measurement Corrections section of the Survey Database
Settings Dialog Box (page 2698).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ right-click <database-name> ➤ Edit Survey Database Settings
Survey Command Window
Equipment Correction Commands (page 428).
Dialog Box
Survey Database Settings Dialog Box (page 2698)
where:
■ R: Spheroid radius (if a coordinate system zone is set, this value is obtained from the zone)
■ k: Coefficient of refraction
where:
■ C: Constant for the EDM carrier (for example, Sokkia Lietz 0.86)
■ P: Atmospheric pressure in mm Hg
■ RI: Group refractive index for EDM carrier (for example, Sokkia Lietz 287.96)
where:
■ R: Spheroid radius (if a coordinate system zone is set, this value is obtained from the zone)
■ For FACE 1: Horizontal Angle = Measured Horizontal Angle + Horizontal Collimation Error
■ For FACE 2: Horizontal Angle = Measured Horizontal Angle - Horizontal Collimation Error
■ For FACE 1: Vertical Angle = Measured Vertical Angle + Vertical Collimation Error
■ For FACE 2: Vertical Angle = Measured Vertical Angle - Vertical Collimation Error
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Survey Databases collection, right-click on the project
name, and click Edit Survey Database Settings.
2 In the Survey Database Settings dialog box, expand the Traverse Analysis Defaults property group.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ right-click <database-name> ➤ Edit Survey Database Settings
Dialog Box
Survey Database Settings Dialog Box (page 2698)
1 In Toolspace, click the Survey tab, expand the Survey Databases collection, right-click on the database
name, and click Edit Survey Database Settings.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ right-click <database-name> ➤ Edit Survey Database Settings
Dialog Box
Survey Database Settings Dialog Box (page 2698)
1 In Toolspace, click the Survey tab, expand the Survey Databases collection.
2 Right-click the database name, and click Edit Survey Database Settings.
3 In the Survey Database Settings dialog box, expand the Survey Command Window property group.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ right-click <database-name> ➤ Edit Survey Database Settings
Dialog Box
Survey Database Settings Dialog Box (page 2698)
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Survey Databases collection, right-click on the database,
and click Edit Survey Database Settings.
2 In the Survey Database Settings dialog box, expand the Error Tolerance property group.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ right-click <database-name> ➤ Edit Survey Database Settings
Dialog Box
Survey Database Settings Dialog Box (page 2698)
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Survey Databases collection, right-click on the database,
and click Edit Survey Database Settings.
2 In the Survey Database Settings dialog box, expand the Extended Properties property group.
3 Specify Yes to create new definitions automatically when you are importing a LandXML file.
4 Specify Yes to display warnings for required properties that are missing when you export a LandXML
file.
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ right-click <database-name> ➤ Edit Survey Database Settings
Dialog Box
Survey Database Settings Dialog Box (page 2698)
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Survey Databases collection, right-click on the database
name, and click Edit Survey Database Settings.
3 In the Save As dialog box, browse to the path where you want to save the settings file and enter a name.
4 Click Save.
2 Right-click the database name, and click Edit Survey Database Settings.
4 In the Open dialog box, browse to the path where the settings file is located and select it.
5 Click Save.
The Survey Database Settings dialog box is populated with the settings from the file.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ right-click <database name> ➤ Edit Survey Database Settings ➤
or
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ right-click <database name> ➤ Edit Survey Database Settings ➤
Equipment Properties
The survey equipment properties specify the values associated with a specific surveying instrument, such as
the standard deviations associated with the measuring capabilities for the equipment. This information is
used in the Least Squares calculations.
The equipment property groups are:
■ Miscellaneous. Specifies the name and description of the equipment that is displayed in the equipment
database.
■ Electronic Distance Meter (EDM). Determines the Electronic Distance Measuring settings.
■ Standard deviations. Specifies the accuracy of the surveying equipment. These values are used in calculating
the standard errors that are displayed in the Least Squares input file.
NOTE For detailed descriptions of the equipment properties, see Equipment Database Manager Dialog Box (page
2672).
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Equipment Databases collection, and expand the database
name.
NOTE For information about creating equipment databases, see Survey Equipment Database (page 221).
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Equipment Databases ➤ <equipment database name> ➤ right-click <equipment name> ➤
Properties
Dialog Box
Equipment Database Manager Dialog Box (page 2672)
NOTE Overrides to the drawing ambient settings at the Survey collection level affect only the specified level. The
drawing level settings are not changed.
The topics in this section describe only those settings that affect survey-related commands, and do not cover
the drawing ambient settings that you can change at the survey collection level, even though those settings
are displayed in the Edit Feature Settings - Survey dialog box. For more information, see Specifying Ambient
Settings (page 84).
2 In the Edit Feature Settings dialog box (page 2670), make changes to the existing settings.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
■ Establish consistent point coding and linework connectivity. For more information, see Field Codes,
Figure Prefixes, and Description Keys (page 250).
■ Create a Linework Code Set based on the point coding and linework connectivity. For more information,
see Linework Code Sets (page 252).
■ Define the Survey User Settings. For more information, see User Settings (page 227).
■ Define the Survey Database Settings. For more information, see Database Settings (page 238).
■ Create a Survey Equipment Database. For more information, see Survey Equipment Database (page 221).
■ Create a Figure Prefix Database and figure prefixes. For more information, see Survey Figure Prefix Database
(page 222).
■ Create Description Key Sets and description keys. For more information, see Creating Description Keys
(page 584).
■ Import survey data based on a drawing template (*.dwt) that contains established styles and layers. For
more information, see Drawing Templates (page 127).
249
Perform the following tasks after importing survey data:
■ View data in an import event and re-import the data if necessary. For more information, see Import
Events (page 274).
■ Edit survey point properties and reprocess linework. For more information, see Editing Survey Point
Properties (page 275) and Processing Survey Linework (page 276).
■ Create a traverse and perform traverse analysis. For more information, see Survey Analysis and Output
(page 389).
■ Use the Survey Command Window and survey command language to batch process and record coordinate
geometry operations. For more information, see Survey Command Reference (page 419).
■ Automatic assignment of COGO point properties such as Layer, Symbol, and Label when inserted into
the drawing
■ Automatic assignment of line feature properties, such as Layer, Color, Linetype, and Lineweight when
inserted into the drawing
NOTE NOTE: When you import survey data, you can omit the Begin code if the feature name matches a
figure prefix that is defined in the current figure prefix database. If the feature name does not match a figure
prefix, you must specify a Begin code.
Field codes are associated with both the figure prefix database and the description keys in the current drawing.
If EP has been defined in the figure prefix database, then EP1 matches EP and is assigned the properties of
the EP figure prefix, such as layer, figure style, breakline. If the survey point with the description EP1 B is
placed in a drawing that has a description key of EP*, then EP1 B matches description key EP* and is assigned
the point properties defined in the EP* description key, such layer, point style, point label style.
The following table lists examples of features coded in the field and the field code assigned to the feature,
and the description keys and Figure prefixes created in AutoCAD Civil 3D to support the field codes:
■ 1: BC (back of curb)
■ 2: TC (top of curve)
■ 3: FL (flow line)
■ 4: EP (edge of pavement)
1 On the Survey tab in Toolspace, right-click the Linework Code Sets collection ➤ New.
2 In the New Linework Code Set dialog box, enter a unique file name.
3 In the Edit Linework Code Set dialog box, specify values for the following:
■ Information
■ Coding Methods
■ Special Codes
4 Click OK.
1 On the Survey tab in Toolspace, expand the Linework Code Sets collection.
2 Right-click the existing linework code set and click Copy or Edit.
3 In the Edit Linework Code Set dialog box, enter a unique file name.
By default, the Edit Linework Code Set dialog box displays the values of the copied file.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Coding Methods
WARNING It is recommended that you use <space> as the Field/Code Delimiter Property Value. Using decimal
characters as the Field/Code Delimiter Property Value may cause certain codes to fail. For example the (decimal).
character is valid for a right-turn value and the (minus sign) - character is valid for a negative right-turn value.
Field Code Escape: code EP1 SW1 B/Start of A / (forward slash) is the recommended
that indicates that any- sidewalk escape. Start of sidewalk is a comment.
thing entered after the You can enter and exit comment mode
escape indicator is a using multiple slashes. In the following
comment. example, /parking space line/is a com-
ment and ignored. EP1 B/parking space
line/LN CPN211.
Special Codes
Property Example Description
Begin: code that indicates the start EP1 B SW1 B or B EP1 EP1 and SW1 are figure names. The letter
of a new figure at the specified B SW1 B is the special code used to begin new fig-
point. ures named EP1 and SW1.
If a figure prefix exists that matches
the figure name, you can omit the
Begin code. This works best with
unique figure names.
Continue: code that indicates a EP1 C SW1 The figure is continued with an explicit
figure is continued from its last <Continue code>. EP1 is a figure name, C
vertex. continues the active figure named EP1
If the field code does not contain an explicit
<Continue> code and the figure name
within the field code matches an active fig-
ure, the figure is continued.
End: code that indicates the figure EP1 E SW1 B EP1 is the figure name, “ “ (space) is the
is terminated. Field/Code Delimiter, E is the End code and
continues an active figure with the name
EP1 to this point and then it is terminated
(it is no longer an active figure). SW1 is a
figure name, “ “ (space) is the Field/Code
Delimiter, and B is the Begin code and starts
a new figure named SW1. In this example,
if there is an existing figure named SW1 it
is terminated at its last vertex, and a new
figure named SW1 is started at this point.
Close: code that indicates that an EP1 SW1 CLS EP1 is a figure name and if it matches an
active figure is continued from its active figure it is continued to this point.
last vertex to the current point and SW1 is a figure name and if it matches an
closes the figure with a line seg- active figure it is continued from its last
ment back to the starting vertex vertex to this point, CLS is the Close code
for that figure. and a line segment is closed back to the
starting vertex for the figure SW1.
Horizontal Offset: code used to 101,500,490,100.01,BC1 Point 101: BC1 is the line feature name, " "
specify a relative horizontal offset B H-4 V.1 H.5 H.75 V- (Space) is the Feature/Code delimiter, B is
for creating a parallel figure start- .7 H2.25 V-.35 the <Begin> code, H is the <Horizontal off-
ing at the current point, or trans- ... set> code, -4 is the value for the first hori-
itioning to another offset if the 112,500,500,100.02,BC1 zontal offset value, V is the <Vertical offset>
active figure has a previous hori- ... code, .1 is the first vertical offset value, and
zontal offset. 123,500,510,100.03,BC1 so on for each of the remaining 3 offsets.
... Points 112, 123, 134, 145, and 156: BC1
134,500,520,100.04,BC1 figure with current offsets are continued.
... Point 167: BC1 is continued, but the offset
Vertical Offset: code used to spe- (Shown in the follow- A positive value is added to the elevation of
cify a relative vertical offset starting ing illustration) the current vertex for the active figure and
at the current point. A value must a negative value is subtracted from the cur-
follow the Vertical offset code. rent vertex for the active figure. If a Vertical
offset is specified with no previous Horizont-
al offset, the Horizontal offset value is as-
sumed to be zero. If a Horizontal offset is
specified with no Vertical offset or no previ-
ous Vertical offset, the Vertical offset value
is assumed to be zero.
V1 H1 H2 = H0 V1 H1 V1 H2 V1
H1 H2 V1 H3 = H1 V0 H2 V1 H3 V1
The following illustration shows an example using the codes for Horizontal Offsets, Vertical Offsets, and
Stop Offsets:
1,500,490,100.01,BC1 B H-4 V.1 H.5 H.75 V-.7 H2.25 V-.35
2,500,500,100.02,BC1
3,500,510,100.03,BC1
4,500,520,100.04,BC1
5,500,530,100.05,BC1
6,500,540,100.06,BC1
7,500,550,100.07,BC1 SO
8,500,560,100.08,BC1
Recall Point: code used to connect EP1 RPN EP1 is the figure name and contin-
the active figure with a segment EP1 RPN101 ues an active figure if the name
from the last point, or a specified matches. RPN is the Recall Point
pointID. code and if there is no point it
connects from the previous point
to the current point and inserts a
segment before the current point.
The code EP1 RPN101 connects
from the current point to the indic-
ated point.
Connect Point: code used to indic- EP1 B CPN101 In this example, a new figure is
ate the creation of a new figure (of created at the current point, and
the same feature) with a single line also another new figure with a
segment from the current point to single line segment is drawn to
the specified point ID. The spe- point 101, called EP1.CPN101. The
cified point ID follows the Connect figure name can be modified using
Point code. the Figure Properties command.
The Connect Point code always creates a figure composed of a single line segment. The following illustration
shows an example of the Connect Point code:
Rectangle: code used to offset the BLD1 <Rectangle>40 A positive number indicates an
segment coming into the current offset to the right, a negative
point by the specified number. number indicates an offset to the
left, which is relative to the direc-
tion of the line segment coming in
to the current point. If no number
follows the Rectangle code, this
code closes the figure by perform-
ing a perpendicular/perpendicular
line intersection between the previ-
ous segment coming into the cur-
rent point and the first segment of
the figure.
The following illustration shows the Rectangle code with a specified value of 40:
Right Turn: code used with a line BLD1 RT X10.1 5 -12.2 -5 -12.2 Continues an active figure BLD1
segment code to allow for addition- to the current point, extends the
al vertices to be inserted perpendic- current segment 10.1 units, and
ular into the figure, or as exten- then draws perpendicular seg-
sions (straight offsets). ments for each value.
Offset values, <Extend>, or <Rect-
angle> codes follow the <Right
turn> code. Positive numbers indic-
ate a jog to the right and negative
numbers indicate a jog to the left.
The following illustration shows examples of the Right Turn code and the Rectangle code:
Extend: code that is used to make BLD1 X15.5 BLD1 continues an active figure,
an extension of a line segment X is the Extend code, and 15.5 is
ahead through the current point the value that the figure line seg-
by using a positive value or a line ment is extended through the
segment that is short of the current current point.
point by using a negative value.
The following illustrations show examples of the Extend code, Right Turn code, and Rectangle code:
Begin Curve: code used to specify EP1 BC EP1 is the active figure name and
that the current point is the begin- is continued to the current point,
ning of a single curve (arc) seg- “ “ (space) is the Feature/Code
ment or multiple curve segments. Delimiter, BC indicates that the
current point is the beginning of
curve segments.
The current point with this code is
the first point on the curve. The
next point with the same figure
name is considered a point on the
curve, and the third point with the
same figure name is the curve end-
point if no <End curve> code is
used to correspond with the <Be-
gin curve> code.
End Curve: code used with the 101 … EP1 BC EP1 is the active figure name and
<Begin curve> code to define curve 112 … EP1 is continued to the current point,
segments with more than three 123 … EP1 “ “ (space) is the Feature/Code
points. Points on a curve do not 134 … EP1 Delimiter, EC indicates that the
have to be located sequentially. 145 … EP1 EC current point is the end of curve
segments.
Circle: code that indicates the be- POOL CIR5.0 POOL is the figure name, “ “
ginning of the circle feature. This (space) is the Feature/Code Delim-
code stops the linework on the iter, CIR is the <Circle> code, and
previous point if it is a two or creates a new circular figure where
three-point circle. the current point is the radius
A one point circle with a radius point, and 5.0 is the circle radius
value is similar to the connect value. The elevation of the figure
point command. The linework is the elevation of the current
code stops and a new circle is cre- point. This example uses only the
ated using the point as the center current point as the center point,
point and the radius. The two and with the <Circle> code followed
three-point circles behave like be- immediately by the radius.
gin commands to create a new Method 1 uses only the current
figure and end an active feature point as the center point, with the
with the same name. <Circle> code followed immedi-
ately by the radius.
Method 2 uses two consecutive
points to define the circular figure.
The first point defines the center
location and the second point
defines the elevation and the radi-
us.
Method 3 uses three points to
define a circular figure. The eleva-
tion of all three points is used and
continues the closure with an arc
instead of a line.
Point On Curve: code to indicate EP1 OC EP1 matches the name of an active
that the current point resides on a figure, “ “ (space) is the Field/Code
curve segment. Delimiter, and OC is the Point On
Curve code. The figure is contin-
ued and the point is evaluated as
a point residing on a curve. If there
is no match to an active figure, EP1
OC may be a point coding error.
Curve Fit - No curve: In the following illustration, each survey point has the same EP1 figure name and are line
points (no <Point on curve> code indicating a curve point, or <Begin curve> code). The resulting figure is a
series of connected line segments.
Curve Fit - One point on curve: In the following illustration each point has the same EP1 figure name, and one
survey point is a coded as a curve point (OC <Point on curve> code). The resulting figure will have a calculated
point of curvature (PC) and point of tangency (PT), and the curve will pass through the point.
Curve Fit - Three-point curve: In the following illustration, each point has the same EP1 figure name, and there
is three consecutive curve points (OC <Point on curve> code, or BC <Begin curve> code at the beginning of
the curve). The resulting figure will have a begin curve (BC) at the first EP1 point, an end curve (EC) at the
third EP1 point, and the curve will pass through the second EP1 point.
Curve Fit - Multi-point curves: In the following illustration, each point has the same CL1 figure name, and
there are more than three consecutive points with an OC <Point on curve> code, or the first point on the curve
segments has a BC <Begin curve> code and the ending point of the curve segments has an EC <End curve>
code. The resulting figure will have a beginning of curve (BC) at the first CL1 point, and an end of curve (EC)
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Import Survey Data .
2 On the Specify Database page, select an existing database or click Create New Survey Database.
3 On the Specify Data Source page, select one of the following options:
■ Field Book File
■ LandXML File
■ Point File(When you import a point file, you must specify or create a point file format.)
4 On the Specify Network page, specify a network or click Create New Network.
NOTE Click None if you are importing project points that you do not want associated with a network. This
option is only available when you import points from a point file.
6 Click Finish.
An import event is created in the Import Events collection for the survey database.
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Import Survey Data
Toolspace
Survey tab: expand Survey Databases ➤ expand <named> database ➤ right-click Import Events ➤ Import
Survey Data
Command Line
ImportSurveyData
TIP You can also use the Import Survey Data wizard to import point files. For more information, see Import Survey
Data Wizard (page 261).
4 Make any necessary changes to the Import Point File settings and click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Import Survey Data
Toolspace
2 In the Import Survey Data Wizard - Specify Database page, select a database or create a new one.
3 In the Import Survey Data Wizard - Specify Data Source page, select Point File as the Data Source Type.
4 Click , and browse to the file(s) that you want to import. Use control-click to select multiple files
of the same format.
5 In the Specify Point File Format list, select the point file format or click New to display the Point File
Formats - Select Type dialog box. For more information on creating point file formats, see Understanding
Point File Formats (page 525).
NOTE The first time you import a with a Caltrans TSS point file format, you must specify a .SYM file or a .DIS
file, and a .RPT file. If you do not specify a .SYM file or a .DIS file, and a .RPT file, the data is imported using
the general properties.
6 In the Import Survey Data Wizard - Specify Network page, select a network or create a new one. If you
are importing project points that you do not want associated with a network, click <none> from the
list of networks. Click Next.
7 In the Import Survey Data Wizard - Import Options page, specify the import settings.
8 Click Finish.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Survey tab ➤ expand <named> survey database ➤ right-click <named> network ➤ Import ➤ Import Point
File
or
Survey tab ➤ expand Survey Databases collection ➤ right-click <named> survey database ➤ Import ➤ Import
Point File
Command Line
ImportSurveyData
Dialog Box
Import Survey Data Wizard (page 2685)
Limitations
■ Enumeration type attributes are not recognized by survey and are ignored during the attribute creation
and data mapping process.
■ Attributes that are displayed on the Survey tab in Toolspace are formatted using the units and the display
format that is defined in the survey database and user settings. The attribute units and display are not
based on the current Drawing Settings.
■ Attributes that are initially created in a drawing and then added to the survey database during import
do not map back to the same drawing side attribute when you add survey data to the drawing. Survey
creates a new survey specific attribute definition in the drawing. For example: a string attribute "Address"
that is created in the drawing would round trip back to the drawing as "Point.Address" within the Survey
User-defined classification.
■ User-defined Property support is only available for ASCII point file import using external point files and
the Point File Formats. User-defined Properties are not supported when you import points directly from
a drawing or from field book files.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the survey database collection ➤ New Local Survey Database.
Enter a name
TIP Importing the LandXML Property definitions before you create new user-defined properties can save
time because the LandXML property definitions may match the requirements for the additional properties.
For more information, see Extended Property Definition Files (page 273).
3 Define properties for the Survey Points. Expand the Survey Point node, right click User-Defined ➤ New.
For more information, see Creating and Editing User-defined Properties (page 272).
4 When you have completed creating the Survey Point user-defined attributes, in the Manage Extended
Properties dialog box right-click Survey Points ➤ Insert Into Drawing.
5 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Points collection and create a new Point File Format that
uses the new attributes you created in step 3. When you set the column name in the Point File format,
verify that the user-defined properties you created are prefaced with “Point.”. For more information,
see Understanding Point File Formats (page 525).
NOTE When you have completed creating the user-defined properties and the new point file format, save
the drawing as a new drawing template. You can use this template when you want to import points into the
survey database using the customized point file format.
6 Import a point file using the Import Survey Data wizard or the Import Points command. For more
information, see Importing Point Files (page 262).
TIP You can also use the Import Survey Data wizard to import points from a drawing. For more information, see
Import Survey Data Wizard (page 261).
4 Make any necessary changes in the Import Points From Drawing settings and click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Import Survey Data
Toolspace
■ If only the number conflicts, and there is a valid name, then only the name is assigned.
■ If only the name conflicts, the name has a sequence number added to the end, for example EOP112.1
or EOP112.2.
■ If the number conflicts and the name is blank, the number is used as the name and with a sequence
number added to the end of the name. For example, if there is a point 112 and no name assigned, point
112 will be hidden and the point is assigned the name 112.1.
■ If the name and number conflict, the number is ignored and a sequence is added to the existing name.
NOTE If you are using Windows Vista, you cannot display the Survey Data Collection Link Help files (Link32.hlp
and Survey Attribute Manager.hlp) by default. To display the Survey Data Collection Link Help files in Windows
Vista, download and install the Windows Help program (WinHlp32.exe) from the Microsoft Download Center.
To transfer data
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel Survey Data Collection Link to display Survey
Link DC.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel Survey Data Collection Link to display Survey
Link DC.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel Survey Data Collection Link
AutoCogo WILDSoft
CLM ASCII 2
ASCII Maptech
NOTE In the Import Settings, clear the Process Linework check box when you are importing . fbk files created
from the Survey Data Collection Link application because Linework Code Set definitions may not be recognized.
However, the figure commands created using the Survey Data Collection Link are recognized.
TIP You can also use the Import Survey Data wizard to import field book files. For more information, see Import
Survey Data Wizard (page 261).
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Networks collection and right-click the network to which
you want to import the field book.
3 In the Field Book Filename (.FBK) dialog box browse to the field book that you want to import. Click
Open.
4 In the Import Field Book dialog box, modify settings as required. For information about the settings,
see Import / Re-import Field Book Dialog Box (page 2679).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Import Survey Data
Toolspace
NOTE Notepad is the text editor unless you specify another editor in the External Editor in the Survey User Settings
dialog box. For more information, see Specifying External Editor Settings (page 231).
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Networks collection and right-click on a network name.
3 In the Field Book Filename (.FBK) dialog box, browse to the field book that you want to edit. Click
Open.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
■ Right-click the Figures collection that you want to export to a field book.
■ Expand the Figures collection and right-click a figure name to export it to a field book.
3 In the Save As dialog box, browse to the location where you want to save the field book and enter a file
name. Click Save.
4 If you are exporting a network to a field book, in the Export Field Book dialog box, modify the settings
as required. For information about the settings, see Export Field Book Dialog Box (page 2675).
Quick Reference
Toolspace
NOTE You can import reduced survey data directly into a AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing. For more information about
the different types of LandXML import functionality for survey data, see Importing Survey XML Data.
You can also export LandXML data from the survey database.
You specify both the LandXML import settings and data selection using the Import Survey LandXML
command.
The LandXML import and export functionality is based on the LandXML schema. For more information
about the LandXML schema, go to http://www.landxml.org.
TIP You can also use the Import Survey Data wizard to import Survey LandXML files. For more information, see
Import Survey Data Wizard (page 261).
NOTE You can only import a LandXML file into an open survey database. For information about creating and
opening a survey database, see Survey Database (page 217).
1 On the Survey tab in Toolspace, right-click a survey database ➤ Import Survey LandXML.
2 In the Select LandXML File dialog box, browse to the LandXML file that you want to import. Click
Open.
3 In the Import Survey LandXML dialog box, modify the import settings and select the survey data that
you want to import. For information about the import settings, see Import / Re-import Survey LandXML
Data Dialog Box (page 2681).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Import Survey Data
Toolspace
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Survey Databases collection and right-click a database
name.
3 In the Export Survey LandXML dialog box, modify the export settings and select the survey data that
you want to export. For information about the settings, see Export Survey LandXML Data Dialog Box
(page 2676).
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: expand Survey Databases ➤ right-click <database-name> ➤ Export Survey LandXML
■ Import Survey LandXML data and attributes into the survey database.
■ View Survey LandXML attributes and modify user-defined attributes using the AutoCAD Civil 3D Survey
user interface.
■ Insert Survey Points into a drawing with the Survey LandXML and user-defined attributes assigned.
■ Complete round-tripping of Survey LandXML and user-defined data using the Import Survey LandXML
and Export Survey LandXML commands on the Survey tab in Toolspace.
1 In the Survey Database Defaults specify the path and the extended properties definition file.
2 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Survey Databases collection and right-click a database
name ➤ Manage Extended Properties.
3 In the Manage Extended Properties dialog box, select the check boxes for collections or individual
properties.
For more information, see the Manage Extended Properties dialog box. (page 2687)
Survey tab: expand Survey Database ➤ right-click <database-name> ➤ Manage Extended Properties
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Survey Databases collection and right-click a database
name.
2 Click Manage Extended Properties. In the Manage Extended Properties dialog box, collections are
displayed for each of the <SurveyFeatureClasses>.
3 In the Manage Extended Properties dialog box, click to expand the <SurveyFeatureClasses>in the
tree. Each feature class has a collection for LandXML and User-defined.
4 Select a User-defined check box under a feature class, right-click ➤ New or Edit.
■ Display Name
■ Description
6 Select a type in the Property Field Type list. For more information on the display of property fields, see
Property Field Type Table (page 273).
7 Select the Required Value check box to display a warning icon for properties that have not been assigned
to an instance of a <SurveyFeatureClass>. The Event Viewer will also post a warning when you export
the LandXML file using the Export Survey LandXML command.
8 Select the Display check box to have the extended property display on the object.
9 If you specified String as the Property Field Type, enter values for String.
See also:
Quick Reference
Toolspace
To create a new Network Group, Figure Group, and Survey Point Group
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Survey Databases collection and expand a database name.
3 In the New <type> Group dialog box enter a name and description.
4 In the lower pane of the dialog box, check the items you want to add to the group.
NOTE If you are using the extended properties feature, and have created User-defined properties, they are
displayed. Click the cell in the Value column to assign an attribute.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Import Events
The import event provides a framework that you can use to view and edit specific survey data that is referenced
within the import event.
An import event is created each time you import data using either the Import Survey Data wizard, the import
commands on the survey network shortcut menu, or the import Survey LandXML command.
Import Events are displayed as a collection within a database on the Toolspace Survey tab. The default name
for the import event is the same as the imported file name "<File name>.<ext>".
The Import Events collection contains the Networks, Figures, and Survey Points that are referenced from
the specific import command, and provides a convenient way to remove, re-import, and reprocess linework,
and insert survey data into the current drawing.
TIP Commands entered in the Survey Command Window or from using the Run Batch File command do not
create an import event. To maintain the integrity of existing networks, you should create a separate network when
you use the Survey Command Window.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand a named survey database, and then expand the Import Events
collection.
2 In the Import Events Editor vista, select an import event, right-click ➤ Edit.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand a named survey database, and then expand the Import Events
collection.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand a named survey database, and then expand the Import Events
collection.
2 Select the import event and drag it to a new location in the collection.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: expand Survey Databases ➤ <named> survey database ➤ Import Events ➤ <named> event
■ Process Linework: Displays the Process Linework dialog box where you can edit settings if necessary and
then process the linework for all import events using the specified settings.
■ Insert Into Drawing: Inserts data from all import events into the current drawing.
■ Remove From Drawing: Removes data from the import events created in the current drawing.
Import Event
■ Properties: Displays the properties for a selected event, such as name, description, and linework code set.
■ Re-import: Displays the import settings for the event. Edit settings if needed and click OK to re-import
the event data.
■ Process Linework: Displays the Process Linework dialog box where you can edit settings if necessary and
then process the linework for the selected import events using the specified settings.
■ In the Figure Properties dialog box, click to display the Survey Point Properties dialog box.
2 In the Survey Point Properties dialog box, edit the point name and the point description.
3 Click OK. At the command line, you are prompted to select another point. Continue to edit the points
as necessary.
4 Press Enter to end the edit command and update the linework.
To process linework at anytime, right-click the Survey Points collection on the Survey tab in Toolspace ➤
Process Linework.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Expand Survey Point Collection ➤ right-click a survey point in a point list ➤ Properties
Command Line
EditSvPointProperties
IMPORTANT Figures that are created using a Linework Code Set do not automatically update when you modify
survey data by updating figures, changing survey point descriptions, editing point coordinates through changes
in observations, or network and traverse adjustment. In order to obtain the most accurate results, it is recommended
that you process the linework each time you make modifications to the survey data.
■ Right-click a named import event ➤ Process Linework. Linework for the event you selected is
processed.
■ Right-click the Survey Points collection ➤ Process Linework. Linework for all points, including
points from previous versions and manually entered points.
2 In the Process Linework dialog box, verify the settings and click OK.
■ Use the AutoCAD Civil 3D Toolspace Survey tab to define and manage survey data such as point, setups, directions,
traverses, and figures.
■ Use the AutoCAD Civil 3D Survey Command Window to define survey data such as baselines, centerlines, and
intersections, and to view and manage survey command input and output history.
In AutoCAD Civil 3D, a survey database holds all the observed angles and distances for each point.
■ To view and edit a single object, in Toolspace on the Survey tab, right-click the object in the list
view ➤ Properties.
2 Modify the available fields. When you make a changes to data, the entire row is displayed in bold until
you save the changes to the survey database.
3 To edit the values in multiple rows, select the rows, right-click the column heading, click Edit, and
enter the new value. If no rows are selected, then all rows are updated. Press the ESC key to clear the
selection.
279
4 To undo the changes for a single row or multiple rows, select the row(s), right-click ➤ Reload.
Alternatively, to undo all the changes in the vista, click .
5 To apply the changes for a single row or for multiple rows, select the row(s), right-click ➤ Apply.
Alternatively, to apply all changes in the vista, click .
6 For information about the standard panorama vista functions, see The Panorama Window (page 119).
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <database name> ➤ Networks ➤ <network name> ➤ right-click object
collection ➤ Edit
Control Points
You can use several methods to create control points.
Control points are points you create at a known location. Control points are not affected by any adjustments
or corrections you make. When you create a control point, it is added to survey database.
Click the Control Points collection on the Toolspace Survey tab to display individual control points in the
list view.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the Control Points collection. Click New to open the New
Control Point dialog box.
IMPORTANT If there is a Survey Point (Non-Control point) with a matching number then the data for that
point displays in the New Control Point dialog box. If there is no Survey Point defined in the Survey database
that has a matching name, the program checks the active drawing to see if there is an AutoCAD Civil 3D
point with a matching number. If there is an AutoCAD Civil 3D point with a matching number, then the
point information displays in the New Control Point dialog box.
IMPORTANT You can define a point by Name, or by deleting the number in the Number field and leaving
it blank. Enter a Name in the Name field. If there is already a control point with that name an error message
is displayed. If there is a Survey point with a matching name then the data for that point displays in the New
Control Point dialog box. If there is no survey point or control point defined in the Survey database that has
a matching name, the program checks the active drawing to see if there is an AutoCAD Civil 3D point with
a matching name. If there is an AutoCAD Civil 3D point with a matching name, then the point information
displays in the New Control Point dialog box.
8 Optionally, enter the latitude of the point. The Northing property value is calculated from the value
entered in this field.
NOTE This property is not available if the survey database does not have an assigned coordinate system
zone.
9 Optionally, enter the longitude of the point. The Easting property value is calculated from the value
entered in this field.
NOTE This property is not available if the survey database does not have an assigned coordinate system
zone.
10 Click OK to create the new control point. The new control point is displayed in the control points list
view in Toolspace.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click on the network that you want to add the control point to.
Click Survey Command Window.
2 To create a control point by northing and easting, at the Command line, enter:
NE (point) [north] [east] (description)
To create a control point by northing, easting, and elevation, at the Command line, enter:
NEZ (point) [northing] [easting] (elevation) (description)
3 To create a control point by latitude and longitude (if the survey database settings reference a coordinate
zone), enter:
LAT LONG (point) [latitude] [longitude] (description)
Examples
The following example sets point 2 at northing 2000, easting 2000 with an elevation of 100, and a description
of TP.
NEZ 2 2000 2000 100 TP
The following example sets point number 55 at latitude 45°16'17" and longitude 36°55'55".
LAT LONG 55 45.1617 36.5555
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Parameter Definition
point The point identifier of the new point. You do not need to as-
sign a point number if auto point numbering is on.
latitude The latitude of the point. Enter this value using the current
survey database Angle unit. Use a positive value to indicate a
location above the equator, or a negative value for one below
it.
longitude The longitude of the point. Enter this value using the current
survey database Angle unit. Use a positive value to indicate a
location east of the prime meridian, or a negative value for a
location west of the prime meridian.
■ To view and edit a single control point, in Toolspace on the Survey tab, click the Control Points
collection. In the item list view, right-click the point ➤ Properties.
NOTE When you make a change to any control point data, the entire row is displayed in bold until you save
the changes to the survey database.
3 To edit the values in multiple rows, select the rows, right-click the column heading, click Edit, and
enter the new value.
4 The selected row values for the column are updated with the new value.
5 To undo the changes for a single row or multiple rows, select the row(s), right-click, and click Reload.
Alternatively, to undo all the changes in the vista, click .
6 To apply the changes for a single row or for multiple rows, select the row(s), right-click, and click Apply.
Alternatively, to apply all changes in the vista, click .
7 For information about the standard panorama vista functions, see The Panorama Window (page 119).
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <database name> ➤ Networks ➤ <network name> ➤ right-click Control
Points ➤ Edit
Non-Control Points
Use the Survey tab to create non-control points.
Non-control points are created with a northing, easting, and optional elevation.
Non-control points can be promoted to control points if you reference the point as a control point for
creating a traverse, or reference the point as a setup to make observations to other points that may affect
locations during an analysis.
Click the Non-Control Points collection on the Toolspace Survey tab to display individual non- control
points in the list view.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the Non-Control Points collection and click New to open
the New Non-Control Point dialog box.
2 Enter the point number. You do not need to assign a point number if auto point numbering is on.
IMPORTANT If there is an AutoCAD Civil 3D point with a matching number, then the point information
displays in the New Non-Control Point dialog box.
IMPORTANT You can define a point by Name, by deleting the number in the Number field and leaving it
blank. Enter a Name in the Name field. If there is already a control point or non-control with that name an
error message is displayed. If there is a point Survey point with a matching name then the data for that point
displays in the New Non-Control Point dialog box. If there is no survey point or non-control point defined
in the Survey database that has a matching name, the program checks the active drawing to see if there is
an AutoCAD Civil 3D point with a matching name. If there is an AutoCAD Civil 3D point with a matching
name, then the point information displays in the New Non-Control Point dialog box.
8 Enter the latitude of the point. The Northing property value is calculated from the value entered in this
field.
NOTE This property is not available if the survey database does not have an assigned coordinate system
zone.
9 Enter the longitude of the point. The Easting property value is calculated from the value entered in this
field.
NOTE This property is not available if the survey database does not have an assigned coordinate system
zone.
10 Click OK to create the new non-control point. The new control point is displayed in the non-control
points list view in Toolspace.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network that you want to add control points to. Click
Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <database name> ➤ Networks ➤ <network name> ➤ right-click
Non-Control Points ➤ New
Survey Command Window Syntax
NE SS (point) [North] [East] (elevation) (description)
Parameter Definition
point The point identifier of the new point. You do not need to as-
sign a point number if auto point numbering is on.
■ To view and edit a single non-control point, in the Survey tab, click the Non-Control Points collection.
In the item list view, right-click the point ➤ Properties.
NOTE When you make a change to any point data, the entire row is displayed in bold until you save the
change to the survey database.
3 To edit the values in multiple rows, select the rows, right-click the column heading, click Edit, and
enter the new value.
4 The selected row values for the column are updated with the new value.
5 To undo the changes for a single row or multiple rows, select the row(s), right-click, and click Reload.
Alternatively, to undo all the changes in the vista, click .
6 To apply the changes for a single row or for multiple rows, select the row(s), right-click, and click Apply.
Alternatively, to apply all changes in the vista, click .
7 For information on the standard panorama vista functions, see The Panorama Window (page 119).
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <database name> ➤ Networks ➤ <network named> ➤ right-click
Non-Control Points ➤ Edit
Setups
Setups are the instrument setups that are defined in the survey database. The Setups collection on the
Toolspace Survey tab expands to display individual setups.
1 In the Survey Toolspace tab, right-click on the Setups collection and click New to display the New Setup
dialog box.
NOTE If you enter a non-existent station point, you are prompted to create a point and the New Control
Point dialog box is displayed where you can create a new station point.
3 Enter the backsight point for the setup. When this column contains a valid entry, the Backsight Direction
column displays the calculated backsight direction value and is read-only.
NOTE If you enter a non-existent backsight point, you are prompted to create a point and the New Control
Point dialog box is displayed from which you can create a new backsight point.
NOTE Setups can be created using the names of Survey Points that exist in the Survey Database. Enter the
point names in the Station Point and Backsight Point fields.
4 Enter a backsight direction. This field is read-only if the Backsight Point column contains a valid point
number.
NOTE This is the reference angle for all angle observations except Face1 and Face2 angles.
6 Enter the direct angle reference on the backsight for Face1 angles.
7 Enter the reverse angle reference on the backsight for Face2 angles.
8 Enter the measured instrument (theodolite) height. This is typically measured from the center of the
theodolite optics to the setup point on the ground.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click on the network that you want to add control points to.
Click Survey Command Window.
Example
This example sets the instrument on point 1. It is 5.1 feet above ground elevation. Therefore, the instrument
elevation is 105.1 feet.
NEZ 1 1000 1000 100
AZ 1 2 90
STA 1 5.1
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <database name> ➤ Networks ➤ <network name> ➤ right-click Setups
➤ New
Survey Command Window Syntax
STA [point] (instrument height) (description)
Parameter Definition
1 In the New Setup dialog box, enter the new station or backsight point in the respective fields.
2 Click Yes when you are prompted with the message asking you if you want to create the point.
3 In the New Control Point dialog box, enter the easting, northing, elevation, and description for the
new point. Click OK.
4 The point is added to the Control Points collection and the survey database.
To edit setups
■ To view and edit a single setup, on the Survey tab, cliches Setups collection. In the item list view,
click the setup you want to edit.
NOTE When you make a change to any setup data, the entire row is displayed in bold until you save the
change to the survey database.
3 To edit the values in multiple rows, select the rows, right-click the column heading, click Edit, and
enter the new value.
The selected row values for the column are updated with the new value.
4 To undo the changes for a single row or for multiple rows, select the row(s), right-click, and click Reload.
Alternatively, to undo all the changes in the vista, click .
5 To apply the changes for a single row or multiple rows, select the row(s), right-click, and click Apply.
Alternatively, to apply all changes in the vista, click .
6 For information about the standard panorama vista functions, see The Panorama Window (page 119).
1 On the Toolspace Survey tab, expand the network name and click Survey Points.
2 In the Toolspace list view, right-click the point for which you want to edit the setups that observe. Click
Edit Setups That Observe to open the Setups Editor.
3 In the Setups Editor, optionally, right-click a setup and click Edit Observations.
NOTE When you make a change to any setup data, the entire row is displayed in bold until you save the
change to the survey database.
5 To edit the values in multiple rows, select the rows, right-click the column heading, click Edit, and
enter the new value.
6 The selected row values for the column are updated with the new value.
7 To undo the changes for a single row or multiple rows, select the row(s), right-click, and click Reload.
8 To apply the changes for a single row or for multiple rows, select the row(s), right-click, and click Apply.
9 For information about the standard panorama vista functions, see The Panorama Window (page 119).
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <database name> ➤ Networks ➤ <network name> ➤ right-click Setups
➤ Edit
Deleting Setups
Delete setups from the Toolspace Survey tab list view or from the Setups Editor vista.
Use the Setups Editor vista to mark setups for deletion, and then accept or roll back the deletions.
NOTE When a setup is deleted, only the setup is deleted, not the points that were created by the setup.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the Setups collection and click Edit to open the Setups
Editor.
The setup icon is replaced with a and the row is set to read-only.
3 To undo the changes for a single row or for multiple rows, select the row(s), right-click, and click
Undelete. Alternatively, to undo all the changes in the vista, click .
4 To apply the changes for a single row or multiple rows, select the row(s), right-click, and click Apply.
Alternatively, to apply all deletions and changes in the vista, click .
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <database name> ➤ Networks ➤ <network name> ➤ right-click Setups
➤ Edit Observations
or
Survey tab: Survey Database ➤ <database name> ➤ Networks ➤ <network name> ➤ Setups ➤ right-click
<named setup> ➤ Delete
Observations
Observations are measured to survey points in relation to a setup.
You use the Toolspace Survey tab and the Observations Editor to add, edit, and manage observations at a
specific setup.
In addition to creating and editing observation at a specific setup in the Observations Editor, you can create
observations using the Survey Command Window.
Browsing to an Observation
Browse to an observation in the Observation Editor.
In the Observations Editor you have the options to view, create, and edit survey data.
To browse to an observation
1 Click Survey tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Browse To Survey Data Drop-down ➤ Browse To Observation .
2 At the command line, enter the point identifier for the observation you wish to find.
The specified observation is displayed in the Observation Editor.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Survey tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Browse To Survey Data Drop-down ➤ Browse To Observation
Command Line
BrowseToSvObservation
1 In the Toolspace Survey tab, right-click the survey database name and click Edit Survey Database Settings.
2 In the Survey Database Settings dialog box, expand the Survey Command Window property group.
■ To turn off automatic point numbering, clear the Auto Point Numbering check box.
4 Click OK.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network name for which you want to turn automatic
point numbering on or off. Click Survey Command Window.
Example
The following example shows a valid entry using the Automatic Point Numbering On command with 1001
as the starting point number:
AP ON 1001
If you do not enter a point number, then the program assigns the next available point number.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ right-click <database name> ➤ Edit Survey Database Settings
Survey Command Window Syntax
AUTO ON [point]
or
AUTO OFF
Parameter Definition
Creating Observations
Use the Observations Editor to add observations to an existing setup.
Add points using one of the following methods:
■ Angle: Creates an observation using an angle turned from either a specified reference line or a previously
determined backsight point. For an example and illustration of this method, see Creating an Observation
by Angle and Distance (page 292).
■ Deflection: Creates an observation using a deflection angle and distance from an established line. For
an example and illustration of this method, see Creating an Observation by Deflection Angle and Distance
(page 296).
■ Face1/Face2 angle: Creates an observation from a traverse station using a horizontal angle measured on
Face1 or Face2 of your instrument. For an example and illustration of this method, see Creating an
Observation Using a Face1 or Face2 Angle (page 298).
■ Azimuth: Creates an observation from an occupied traverse station by entering a recorded azimuth and
distance. For an example and illustration of this method, see Creating an Observation Using an Azimuth
(page 301).
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the setup name and click Edit Observations.
2 In the Observations Editor, right-click either an existing observation or an empty row and click New.
A new row is added to the Observations Editor.
NOTE If you select an existing row and add a new observation, the new observation uses the settings of the
selected row. If you select an empty row, the new observation's settings are based on the Database Settings
(page 238).
3 Modify the fields by selecting the field and entering the new value as needed.
4 To edit the Angle Type, Distance Type, Vertical Type, and Target Type fields, click the field and select
a new value from the drop-down lists. For information about these types, see Survey Database Settings
Dialog Box (page 2698).
5 To create an observation using a point name, delete the value in the point number field and then specify
the Angle and Distance values, and then enter a point name. The Angle and Distance values must be
entered before you enter the Name. If there is a point Survey point with a matching name then the
data for that point is displayed.
6 To undo the changes for a single row or multiple rows, select the row(s), right-click, and click Reload.
Alternatively, to undo all the changes in the vista, click .
NOTE If you have new observations and have not applied them, clicking the Reload button will discard the
new observations.
7 To apply the changes for a single row or multiple rows, select the row(s), right-click, and click Apply.
Alternatively, to apply all changes in the vista, click .
8 For information about the standard panorama vista functions, see The Panorama Window (page 119).
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <database name> ➤ Networks ➤ <network name> ➤ right-click Setups
➤ Edit Observations
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network that you want to add points to, and click Survey
Command Window.
To create an observation by angle, distance, and vertical angle, using the command language
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network that you want to add points to, and click Survey
Command Window.
To create an observation by angle, distance, and vertical distance, using the command language
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network that you want to add points to, and click Survey
Command Window.
Examples
This example creates point 103, which is located by turning a horizontal angle of 80°20'40" right at a distance
of 100 units from the instrument point with the description WELL. Because no method of vertical difference
determination was given, the elevation is <Null>.
AD 103 80.2040 100 WELL
This example creates point 101, which is located by turning a horizontal angle of 100°20'45" right from the
backsight and using a vertical angle of 91°15'15" at a distance of 100 units from the instrument point with
the description IP.
AD VA 101 100.2045 100 91.1515 IP
This example creates point 102, which is located by turning a horizontal angle of 90°30'30" right from the
backsight and using a vertical distance of -1.5 units at a distance of 200 units from the instrument point
with the description EL.
AD VD 102 90.3030 200 -1.5 EL
Points created with the angle distance command:
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Syntax
AD (point) [angle] [distance] (description)
or
AD VA (point) [angle] [distance] [vertical angle] (description)
or
AD VD (point) [angle] [distance] [vertical distance] (description)
Parameter Definition
distance The distance from the instrument point to the point being
located. It is measured in the current units unless otherwise
specified. Distance is assumed to be a horizontal distance un-
less VA is used. When VA is used, the distance is recognized
as slope distance.
vertical angle The direction of the vertical angle (zenith, horizontal, or nadir).
Specify the vertical angle in the current angular units.
vertical distance The elevation difference from the instrument to the prism. If
the prism is higher than the instrument, then this is a positive
value.
To create an observation using bearing and distance, using the command language
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network that you want to add points to, and click Survey
Command Window.
To create an observation using bearing, distance, and vertical angle, using the command language
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network that you want to add points to, and click Survey
Command Window.
To create an observation using bearing, distance, vertical distance, using the command language
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network that you want to add points to, and click Survey
Command Window.
Examples
The following example illustrates using the BD command when the units are set to feet:
NE 1 100 100
STN 1
BD 2 45 1 100 PT
! BEARING: N 45-00-00 E DISTANCE: 100.0000
! POINT 2 NORTH: 170.7107 EAST: 170.7107
! ELEV: <Null>
This creates point 2 at the bearing and distance specified.
Point created with the BD command:
N45° 00'00"E
{50.00 grads}
quadrant 1
ft }
00 m
1 48
0. reference parallel
instrument point {3
Point 2 is located by turning a bearing of 45°0'0" (50 grads) in Quadrant 1 (NE) at a distance of 100 feet from
the instrument point with the description PT.
Parameter Definition
point The point identifier of the new point. You do not need to as-
sign a point number if auto point numbering is on.
bearing The bearing. Enter this value in the current angular units (DMS,
grads, decimal degrees, mils, or radians).
quadrant The quadrant for the bearing. Specify the quadrant using one
of the following numbers: 1 (for NE), 2 (for SE), 3 (for SW),
or 4 (for NW).
distance The distance from the instrument point to the point being
located. It is measured in the current distance units. The dis-
tance is assumed to be a horizontal distance unless VA is used.
When VA is used, the distance is recognized as a slope distance.
vertical angle The direction of the vertical angle (zenith, horizontal, or nadir).
Type this value in the current angular units (DMS, grads,
decimal degrees, mils, or radians).
vertical distance The elevation difference from the instrument to the prism. If
the prism is higher than the instrument, then this is a positive
value.
To create an observation using deflection angle and distance, using the command language
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network that you want to add points to, and click Survey
Command Window.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network that you want to add points to, and click Survey
Command Window.
To create an observation using deflection angle, distance, and vertical distance, using the command language
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network that you want to add points to, and click Survey
Command Window.
Examples
The following example illustrates using the deflection distance command.
NE 1 100 100
STN 1
AZ 1 2 100
BS 2
DD 3 85.2657 60.960
! AZIMUTH: 385.2657 DISTANCE: 60.9600
! POINT 3 NORTH: 159.3345 EAST: 86.0167
! ELEV: <Null>
Points created using the DD command:
76°44'21"
{85.26 grads}
m}
backsight
instrument point
Point 3 is located by turning a deflected angle of 85.2657 right from the extension of the backsight line at
a distance of 200. Angles and distances are in the current units, unless you type a qualifying suffix.
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Syntax
DD (point) [angle] [distance] (description)
or
DD VA (point) [angle] [distance] [vertical angle] (description)
Parameter Definition
point The point identifier of the new point. You do not need to as-
sign a point number if auto point numbering is on.
angle The deflection angle as measured to the point. Type this value
in the current angular units (DMS, grads, decimal degrees,
radians, or mils).
distance The distance from the instrument point to the point being
located. It is measured in the current units unless otherwise
specified. The distance is assumed to be a horizontal distance
unless VA is used. When VA is used, the distance is recognized
as a slope distance.
vertical angle The direction of the vertical angle (zenith, horizontal, or nadir).
Type this value in the current angular units (DMS, grads,
decimal degrees, mils, or radians).
vertical distance The elevation difference from the instrument to the prism. If
the prism is higher than the instrument, then this is a positive
value.
To create an observation using a Face1 or Face2 angle, using the command language
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network that you want to add points to, and click Survey
Command Window.
To create an observation using a Face1 or Face2 angle and vertical angle, using the command language
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network that you want to add points to, and click Survey
Command Window.
To create an observation using a Face1 or Face2 angle and vertical distance, using the command language
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network that you want to add points to, and click Survey
Command Window.
Example: Face1
NE 2 200 200
AZ 2 1 100
STN 2 1.585
BS 1
F1 VA 101 0 30.480 100 BS
! AZIMUTH: 101.6126 DISTANCE: 30.4800
! POINT 101 NORTH: 199.2280 EAST: 230.4702
! ELEV: <Null>
F1 VA 102 89.5370 15.304 101.2052 IP
! AZIMUTH: 191.1682 DISTANCE: 15.3013
! POINT 102 NORTH: 184.8457 EAST: 202.1159
! ELEV: <Null>
50.21
{15.30 m
point set by Face 1
80°36'00"
ft
{89.54 grads}
}
point set by Face 1
Point 101 is located by turning a horizontal angle of 0 right from Face1, and a vertical angle of 100 at a
distance of 30.480 from the instrument point with the description BS.
Point 102 is located by turning a horizontal angle of 89.5370 right from Face1, and a vertical angle of
101.2052 at a distance of 15.304 from the instrument point with the description IP. Angles and distances
are in the current units, unless you type a qualifying suffix.
Example: Face2
NE 2 200 200
AZ 2 1 100
STN 2 1.585
F2 1 200
F2 VA 101 311.4954 15.30 301.0355 IP
! AZIMUTH: 213.1080 DISTANCE: 15.300
! POINT 101 NORTH: 198.2901 EAST: 199.6429
! ELEV: <Null>
Points created Face2 command:
100°20'45"
{111.49 grads}
Point 101 is located a distance of 15.30 from the instrument setup at an observed angle right from the
backsight of 311.4954. The actual physical angle turned is 111.49, with a vertical angle of 301.03. The
description for the point is IP. Angles and distances are in the current units, unless you type a qualifying
suffix.
NOTE This is an angle turned with the scope inverted. Normally, the backsight is set at a 180° angle, so that the
difference between it and the angle is the amount of the angle turned right (100°20'45").
Parameter Definition
point The point identifier of the new point. You do not need to as-
sign a point number if auto point numbering is on.
distance The distance from the instrument point to the point being
located. It is measured in the current units unless otherwise
specified. The distance is assumed to be a horizontal distance
unless VA is used. When VA is used, the distance is recognized
as a slope distance.
vertical angle The direction of the vertical angle (zenith, horizontal, or nadir).
Type this value in the current angular units (DMS, grads,
decimal degrees, mils, or radians).
vertical distance The elevation difference from the instrument to the prism. If
the prism is higher than the instrument, then this is a positive
value.
To create an observation using an azimuth and distance, using the command language
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network that you want to add points to, and click Survey
Command Window.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network that you want to add points to, and click Survey
Command Window.
To create an observation using an azimuth, distance, and vertical distance, using the command language
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network that you want to add points to, and click Survey
Command Window.
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Syntax
ZD (point) [azimuth] [distance] (description)
or
ZD VA (point) [azimuth] [distance] [vertical angle] (description)
or
ZD VD (point) [azimuth] [distance] [vertical distance] (description)
Parameter Definition
point The new point identifier. You do not need to assign a point
number if auto point numbering is on.
azimuth The measured azimuth from the traverse station to the point
being located. Type this value in the current angular units
(DMS, grads, decimal degrees, mils, or radians).
distance The distance from the instrument point to the point being
located. It is measured in the current distance units. The dis-
tance is assumed to be a horizontal distance unless VA is used.
When VA is used, the distance is recognized as a slope distance.
vertical angle The direction of the vertical angle (zenith, horizontal, or nadir).
Type this angle in the current angular units.
vertical distance The elevation difference from the instrument to the prism. If
the prism is higher than the instrument, then this is a positive
value.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network that you want to add points to, and click Survey
Command Window.
Example
NEZ 1 1000 1000 30.480
AZ 1 2 100
STN 1 1.585
BS 2
AD 3 100 30.480
PT OFFSET 4 15.240 7.620
! AZIMUTH: 224.2238 DISTANCE: 41.0350
! POINT 4 NORTH: 961.9000 EAST: 984.7600
! ELEV: <Null>
Point 4 is located at an offset distance of 15.240, and an ahead distance of 7.620, from point 3.
Point created by offset:
50 ft
{7.63 m}
{15.24 m}
25 ft
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Syntax
PT OFFSET (point) [offset] (ahead) (description)
Parameter Definition
point The point identifier of the new point. You do not need to as-
sign a point number if auto point numbering is on.
ahead The distance added to the line between the station and the
last point created to locate the position of the new point (op-
tional).
To create an observation using the stadia rod method, using the command language
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network that you want to add points to, and click Survey
Command Window.
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Syntax
STADIA (point) [angle] [distance] [rod] (vertical angle) (description)
Parameter Definition
point The point identifier of the new point. You do not need to as-
sign a point number if auto point numbering is on.
distance The distance from the instrument point to the point being
located. It is measured in the current units unless otherwise
specified. The distance is assumed to be a horizontal distance
unless a vertical angle is specified. When a vertical angle is
specified, the distance is recognized as a slope distance. The
distance required here is actually the rod intercept multiplied
by the stadia constant. For example, if 1.37 is intercepted on
the stadia board, and the stadia constant is 100, then you
should type 137 as the distance.
rod The rod reading taken by the central hairline of the instrument.
This is, in effect, the height above ground of the sighted target
point.
vertical angle The direction of the vertical angle to the rod (zenith, horizont-
al, or nadir) and must be specified in the current angular units.
Editing Observations
Use the Observations Editor panorama vista to edit the observations of a selected setup item in the list view.
NOTE When changes made in the Observations Editor are saved back to the survey database, the affected points
in the drawing are updated from the survey database.
1 In the Toolspace Survey tab, click the Setups collection. In the list view, right-click the setup ➤ Edit
Observations.
2 Modify the fields by selecting the field and entering the new value.
NOTE If an observation is marked with a , the observation has been modified outside of the Observations
Editor and must be reloaded (by right-clicking and clicking Reload) before you can make any edits to the
observation.
3 To edit the Angle Type, Distance Type, Vertical Type, and Target Type fields, click the field and select
a new value from the drop-down lists. For information about these types, see Database Settings (page
238).
4 To edit the values in multiple rows, select the rows, right-click the column heading, click Edit, and
enter the new value.
The selected row values for the column are updated with the new value. If no rows are selected, then
all rows are updated.
NOTE When you make a change to any observation data, the entire row is displayed in bold until you save
the change to the survey database.
5 To delete observations, click the observation(s) to delete, right-click, and click Delete. The observation
6 To undo the changes for a single row or multiple rows, select the row(s), right-click, and click Reload
or Undelete. Alternatively, to undo all the changes in the vista, click .
7 To apply the changes for a single row or multiple rows, select the row(s), right-click, and click Apply.
Alternatively, to apply all changes in the vista, click .
8 For information about the standard panorama vista functions, see The Panorama Window (page 119).
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <database name> ➤ Networks ➤ <network name> ➤ right-click Setups
➤ Edit Observations
To modify the description for a point, using the survey command language
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network that you to edit, and click Survey Command
Window.
Example
NE 1 1000 1000 FENCE
MOD DESC 1 HOUSE
! POINT 1 DESC: HOUSE
This example changes the description of point 1 from FENCE to HOUSE.
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Syntax
MOD DESC [point 1] [description]
Parameter Definition
point 1 The point number which has the description you want to
modify.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network that you want to edit, and click Survey Command
Window.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network that you want to edit, and click Survey Command
Window.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network that you want to edit, and click Survey Command
Window.
Example
This example modifies the elevation of point 2 from 33.528 to 32.004 and then increases the elevation of
point 2 by an increment of 10.0. Elevations are in the current units, unless you type a qualifying suffix:
NEZ 1 100 100 30.480
NEZ 2 200 200 33.528
MOD ELEV 2 32.004
! POINT 2 ELEVATION: 32.004
MOD ELEV BY 2 10.0
! POINT 2 ELEVATION ADDED: 42.004
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Syntax
MOD ELEV [point 1] (elevation)
or
MOD ELEVS [point 1] [point 2] [elevation]
or
MOD ELEV BY [point 1] (amount)
or
MOD ELEVS BY [point 1] [point 2] (amount)
Parameter Definition
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the collection or item for which you want to update the
points with the survey database.
The points in the drawing and point database are updated with the values from the survey database. Points
that are not referenced in the survey database are not affected by the Update command.
The points will not be updated if the points reside on a locked layer.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
1 In the Survey tab, right-click the collection or item for which you want the points (referenced in the
survey database) inserted, and click Points ➤ Insert Into Drawing. If you select points that are already
in the drawing, then the Duplicate Point Number dialog box is displayed.
■ Replace to replace the existing point in the drawing with the selected point in the point database.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
➤ In the Survey tab, right-click the collection or item for which you want the points (referenced in the
survey database) removed from the drawing, and click Points ➤ Remove From Drawing.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Directions
A direction is an angle measured from the north or south meridian.
A direction can be formatted as either a bearing or azimuth and must be defined from an existing control
point to another point (either a false point or another control point).
A bearing is less than 90 degrees (PI/2 radians or 100 grads), and is measured clockwise in the NE quadrant,
counter-clockwise in the SE quadrant, clockwise in the SW quadrant, and counter-clockwise in the NW
quadrant.
foresight point
foresight point
setup point
foresight point
foresight point
south meridian
south east bearing quadrant SE-2
south west bearing quadrant SW-3
Directions | 309
An azimuth is measured clockwise from either the north or south meridian and is always less than or equal
to 2PI.
north meridian
foresight point
north azimuth
south azimuth
setup point
foresight point
south meridian
Creating a Direction
Use the Toolspace Survey tab to create directions.
To create a direction
1 In the Toolspace Survey tab, right-click the Directions collection and click New.
2 In the New Direction dialog box, specify the point and direction information. For information about
the direction properties, see New Direction/Direction Properties Dialog Box (page 2689).
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Expand Survey Databases ➤ <database name> ➤ Networks ➤ <network name> ➤ right-click
Directions ➤ New
Editing a Direction
Use the Toolspace Survey tab item view to edit directions.
You can change the direction value and type.
2 In the Survey tab item view, click the field for the direction that you want to edit. Editable fields are
colored white.
For information about common functions available in the list view, see Survey Tab Item View (page
2725).
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: expand Survey Databases ➤ expand <named project> ➤ click Directions ➤ edit in the item
view
Baselines
You can create baselines, which are reference lines from a baseline start point and a baseline end point.
You can create or list points in respect to the defined baseline. The Inverse Point command determines the
station and offset distance of an existing point, or group of points, from an existing baseline. The
Station/Offset command creates a new point using a station and an offset distance in reference to an existing
baseline. Before you can use the Inverse Point, or the Station/Offset commands, you must define the current
baseline. If you haven't defined the baseline and you select one of these commands, you are prompted to
define the baseline.
Defining a Baseline
Use the Survey Command Window to define a baseline.
You can create a baseline as a reference line, and then create or list points in relation to the line.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
4 Enter the point identifier for the end point of the baseline.
5 Enter the point identifier for the starting station of the baseline.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
Baselines | 311
NEZ 2 1500 1500 32.004
BL IS 1 2 100
The baseline runs from point 1 to point 2. Point 1 is set as station 1+00. Direction and distances are in the
current units, unless you type a qualifying suffix.
Baseline from point 1 to point 2:
baseline point 2
point 1
station 1+00
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window
Parameter Definition
point 1 The existing point identifier for the beginning point of the
baseline. This point is assigned the station number given for
the station component.
point 2 The existing point identifier for the end point on the baseline.
When you assign this point, you define the direction and
length of the baseline.
station The station for the assigned point number. Type the station
in the current distance units. Some examples of station entries
are 0, 50, and 100. For example, station 150 indicates that
the station is 150 feet or meters along the baseline.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window
Parameter Definition
point 2 Used with point 1 to specify a range of points that you want
to list. If you do not specify point 2, then only point 1 is listed.
Creating a New Point from a Baseline Using a Station and Offset | 313
NOTE For parameter descriptions, see the Quick Reference tab.
To create a point by station and offset from the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
NOTE If Auto point numbering is on, then the next point number is displayed.
4 Enter the station of the new point. The station can be a positive or a negative value.
5 Enter the offset of the new point. The offset can be a positive or a negative value.
To create a point at an offset from a baseline, using the survey command language
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
50 ft station 2+70
{15.24 m}
Baseline ➤ Station/Offset
Survey Command Window Syntax
BL PT (point 1) [station] (offset) (description)
Parameter Definition
point 1 The point identifier for the new point. You do not need to as-
sign a point number if auto point numbering is on.
station The station location of the assigned point. Type the station in
the current distance units. Some examples of station entries
are 0, 50, and 100. For example, station 150 indicates that
the station is 150 feet or meters along the baseline.
Centerlines
A centerline is defined from a figure. After you define the current centerline and current cross section, you
can create new points in relation to them.
Before using the Inverse Point command, you must define the current centerline. If you haven't defined the
centerline, you are prompted to define the centerline.
The cross section commands operate in a similar manner; if you have not set the current cross section, then
you are prompted to set the cross section.
If you have not set the height of instrument and you use either the Station/ Offset Vertical Distance or the
Station/Offset Rod command, then the Set Height of Instrument command is automatically invoked. Likewise,
the Offset Rod or Offset Vertical Distance commands invoke the Prism command the first time you select
them.
Defining a Centerline
Use the Survey Command Window to quickly define a centerline.
To define a centerline, you specify a figure name, starting station, and starting point number.
If you use a point off the centerline to determine the beginning station, then a perpendicular line is established
and that intersection is the starting station. Therefore, any point you use to establish the beginning station
must be adjacent to some leg of the centerline.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
Centerlines | 315
4 Enter the starting station value.
5 Enter the starting station point identifier. This is the location to start stationing from. The starting
station is the perpendicular intersection of the starting station point identifier and the centerline.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
station 500
centerline figure
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window
Parameter Definition
point An optional reference point for the station. The point specified
need not be on the centerline, but it must be adjacent to the
centerline (not beyond the end points).
To display point data in reference to the current centerline from the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
3 Enter the point number range you want the station, offset, and elevation information for.
To display point data in reference to the current centerline, using the survey command language
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window
Parameter Definition
point 2 Used with point 1 to specify the range of points affected. This
point is optional. If you do not specify point 2, then only data
for point 1 displays.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
NOTE The Set Height of Instrument command does not affect the height of the traverse station. It lets you
process level data.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Parameter Definition
elevation The elevation of the optical axis of the instrument above datum
(not the height above ground).
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
NOTE If Auto point numbering is on, then the next point number is displayed.
4 Enter the station of the new point. The station can be a positive or a negative value.
5 Enter the offset of the new point. The offset can be a positive or a negative value.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
NOTE The point 102 input uses the Ditto command. Angles and distances are in the current units, unless you
type a qualifying suffix.
centerline figure
- 300 ft
90°{100 grads}
90°
station 2+00 {100 grads}
45°{50 grads}
t
9 m}
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Centerline ➤ Station/Offset
Parameter Definition
point 1 The point identifier for the new point. You do not need to as-
sign a point number if auto point numbering is on.
To create a point by station, offset, and elevation from the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
NOTE If Auto point numbering is on, then the next point number is displayed.
4 Enter the station of the new point. The station can be a positive or a negative value.
5 Enter the offset of the new point. The offset can be a positive or a negative value.
To create a point by station, offset, and elevation, using the survey command language
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Parameter Definition
point The identifier of the new point that you want to create. You
do not need to assign a point number if auto point numbering
is on
elevation The elevation of the new point. Elevations are in the current
units, unless you type a qualifying suffix.
To create a point along a centerline using a rod reading from the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Parameter Definition
point The point identifier for the new point. You do not need to as-
sign a point number if auto point numbering is on.
rod The rod height. This value is subtracted from the height of
instrument elevation to determine the elevation of the new
point.
To create a point along a centerline using a vertical distance from the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
NOTE If auto point numbering is on, then the next point is displayed.
4 Enter the station of the new point. The station can be a positive or a negative value.
5 Enter the offset of the new point. The offset can be a positive or a negative value.
To create a point along a centerline using a vertical distance, using the survey command language
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Parameter Definition
point The identifier of the new point that you want to create. You
do not need to assign a point number if auto point numbering
is on.
vertical distance The elevation difference from the instrument to the prism. If
the prism is higher than the instrument, then this is a positive
value.
To set the current cross section from the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
To set the current cross section, using the survey command language
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
Parameter Definition
To create a point with offset and elevation from the current cross section from the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click on the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
To create a point with offset and elevation from the current cross section using the survey command
language
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click on the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
Parameter Definition
point The identifier of the new point that you want to create. You
do not need to assign a point number if auto point numbering
is on.
Creating a New Point on the Cross Section by Offset and Rod Height
You can create a point by giving an offset and rod height with respect to the current cross section, height
of instrument, and centerline.
The elevation is computed by subtracting the rod from the current value you set with the Set Height of
Instrument command.
To create a point by offset and rod height from the current cross section in the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click on the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
4 Enter the offset of the new point. The offset can be a positive or a negative value.
To create a point by offset and rod height from the current cross section, using the survey command
language
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click on the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
Creating a New Point on the Cross Section by Offset and Rod Height | 327
NE 3 1300 1700
END
CL IS CL1
XS 350
HI 200
XS ROD 100 150 7.25
! POINT 100 NORTH: 850.000 EAST: 1350.000 ELEV: 192.750
Point 100 is offset from cross section 350 a distance of 150 with an elevation of 192.75 (height of instrument
- rod).
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Parameter Definition
point The identifier of the new point that you want to create. You
do not need to assign a point number if auto point numbering
is on.
offset The distance from the cross section to the new point.
rod The rod height. This value is subtracted from the height of
instrument elevation to determine the elevation of the new
point.
To create a point by offset and vertical distance from the current cross section in the Survey Command
Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click on the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
To create a point by offset and vertical distance from the current cross section, using the survey command
language
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click on the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Parameter Definition
point The identifier of the new point that you want to create. You
do not need to assign a point number if auto point numbering
is on.
offset The distance from the centerline to the new point. A positive
distance indicates an offset to the right, and a negative dis-
tance indicates an offset to the left.
vertical distance The elevation difference from the instrument to the prism. If
the prism is higher than the instrument, then this is a positive
value.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
N60° 00'00"E
{66.67 grads}
50 4 m}
{15
ft
.2
ft
50 m}
5 .24
{1
intersection located by Bearing Bearing
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Centerline ➤ Station/Offset
Survey Command Window Syntax
BB [point 1] [bearing 1] [quadrant 1] [offset 1] [point 2] [bearing 2] [quadrant 2] [offset 2]
Parameter Definition
point 1, point 2 The existing point identifiers that establish the beginning of
the bearings.
bearing 1, bearing 2 The bearings for the lines from the existing points. Bearings
establish a direction for each vector and are expressed in cur-
rent angle units.
quadrant 1, quadrant The quadrants in which the bearings exist. The possible values
2 are: 1 (for NE), 2 (for SE), 3 (for SW), and 4 (for NW).
offset 1, offset 2 The offsets from the lines. This acts as if the lines are moved
X feet or meters to the left or right. An offset to the right is a
positive number, and an offset to the left is a negative number.
If you do not want an offset, then use zero.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
5 Enter an offset.
8 Enter an offset.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
{183.33 grads}
intersection located by
Azimuth-Azimuth
-20 ft {6.10 m}
10 ft {3.05 m}
{50 grads}
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Intersections ➤ Azimuth/Azimuth
Parameter Definition
point 1, point 2 The existing point identifiers defining the beginning of the
azimuths
azimuth 1, azimuth 2 The azimuths for the lines from the existing points (point 1
and point 2). Azimuths establish a direction for each vector
and are expressed in current angle units.
offset 1, offset 2 The offsets from the lines. This acts as if the lines are moved
X feet or meters to the left or right. An offset to the right is a
positive number, and an offset to the left is a negative number.
If you do not want an offset, then use zero.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
5 Enter an offset.
8 Enter an offset.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
10
0
ft
-100 ft
{-30.48 m}
{3
0.
48
m
}
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Intersections ➤ Line/Line
Survey Command Window Syntax
LNLN [point 1] [point 2] [offset 1] [point 3] [point 4] [offset 2]
Parameter Definition
point 1, point 2 The point identifiers that establish the position and direction
of vector 1. Point 1 is the end point and Point 2 is the start
point. These points can be any points including figure points.
offset 1, offset 2 The offsets from the lines. This acts as if the vectors are moved
X feet or meters to the left or right. An offset to the right is a
positive number, and an offset to the left is a negative number.
If you do not want an offset, then use a zero for the offset.
point 3, point 4 The point numbers that establish the position and direction
of vector 2. Point 3 is the end point and point 4 is the start
point. These points can be any points including figure points.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
5 Enter the point identifier of the point offset from the line.
AutoCAD Civil 3D determines the offset distance of the point (entered in step 5) from the line established
by the first two points. This establishes one known side distance and two known side directions. Using
this information, AutoCAD Civil 3D calculates the corners of a square and creates the corner of the
square offset from the line (established in steps 3 and 4) at the same distance as defined by the point
entered in step 5.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
ref 1 ref
ref 2
offset
90°
ahead
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Parameter Definition
reference 1 The existing end point on the vector. It can be any type of
point, including a figure point.
reference 2 The existing start point on the vector. Ref 1 and Ref 2 establish
a direction on the vector.
reference The point off the vector. The intersection point creates a right
angle between the vector and this point.
To calculate the intersection of an arc and bearing line in the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
8 Enter an offset.
■ 1: To select intersection 1.
■ 2: To select intersection 2.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
-50 ft {-15.24 m}
200
{60 ft
.96
intersection located by m}
Arc-Bearing
N45°00'00"E
{50.00 grads}
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Intersections ➤ Arc/Bearing
Survey Command Window Syntax
ARCB [point] [radius] [point 1] [bearing] [quadrant] [offset]
Parameter Definition
point The radial point. This is an existing point that is used as the
center point for the arc.
radius The radial distance. This is the distance in feet or meters from
the radial point to the arc.
point 1 The existing point from which a vector extends. It can be any
type of point including a figure point.
bearing The bearing of the line from the existing point. A bearing es-
tablishes a direction for the vector and is expressed in current
angle units.
quadrant The quadrant in which the bearing exists. The possible values
are: 1 (NE), 2 (SE), 3 (SW), and 4 (NW).
offset The offset left or right from the vector. This acts as if the line
is moved X feet. An offset to the right is a positive number,
and an offset to the left is a negative number. If you do not
want an offset, then use zero for the offset.
To calculate the intersection of an arc and a line determined by an azimuth in the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
7 Enter an offset.
■ 1: To select intersection 1.
■ 2: To select intersection 2.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
N45°00'00"E 50 ft {15.24 m}
{50.00 grads}
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Intersections ➤ Arc/Azimuth
Survey Command Window Syntax
ARCAZ [point] [radius] [point 1] [azimuth] [offset]
Parameter Definition
point The radial point. This is an existing point that is used as the
center point for the arc.
radius The radial distance in feet or meters for the first arc. Radial
distance is the length of a line from the radius point to the
arc.
point 1 The existing point from which a vector extends. It can be any
type of point including a figure point.
azimuth The azimuth of the line from the existing point. An azimuth
establishes the direction for the vector and is expressed as
current angle units.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
7 Enter an offset.
■ 2: To select intersection 2.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
200 ft
{60.96}
-1
00
{-3 ft
0.
intersection located by 48
m
Arc-Line }
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Intersections ➤ Arc/Line
Survey Command Window Syntax
ARCLN [point] [radius] [point 1] [point 2] [offset]
Parameter Definition
radius The radial distance in feet or meters. The radial distance is the
length of a line from the radius point to the arc.
point 1, point 2 The existing points that establish the position and direction
of the line. Point 1 is the start point and point 2 is the end
point. These points can be any points including figure points.
offset The offset from the vector. This acts as if the line is moved a
specified number of feet (or meters) to the left or right. An
offset to the right is a positive number, and an offset to the
left is a negative number. If you do not want any offset, then
use zero.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
■ 1: To select intersection 1.
■ 2: To select intersection 2.
To calculate the intersection of two arcs, using the survey command language
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
100 ft
200 ft
{30.48
{60.9
6 m}
m}
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Intersections ➤ Arc/Arc
Survey Command Window Syntax
ARCARC [point 1] [radius 1] [point 2] [radius 2]
Parameter Definition
radius 1 The radial distance in feet or meters for the first arc. The radial
distance is the length of a line from the radius point to the
arc.
radius 2 The radial distance in feet or meters for the second arc.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the network to edit, and click Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Syntax
SAVE [NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, WEST, 1, 2, ALL] (point) (description)
Parameter Definition
1 Saves intersection 1.
2 Saves intersection 2.
Batch Files
Use batch files to record all survey commands that you use.
You can use the commands on the Batch File menu and the Output menu in the Survey Command Window
to provide a historical record of a surveyor's decisions. A best practice is to create a new survey network to
use in the Survey Command Window where you can perform calculations involving points from other
existing survey networks. By using a new network, the data that is being input is captured in the batch file,
where it can be edited and run with the corrections, and it will not affect the integrity of the other survey
networks.
These commands are from data that is downloaded from a field book or entered from either the menus or
at the Survey Command Window. You can open this file in your text editor to review and edit it.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Survey Databases collection, right-click the database, and
click Edit Survey Database Settings.
3 Ensure that Use Batch File is selected and enter the name for the batch file.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ right-click <database-name> ➤ Edit Survey Database Settings
Survey Command Window
Use Batch File
and
Batch File ➤ Set File Name
NOTE Some text editors format files. The batch file must be saved in standard ASCII format to work correctly.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Networks collection and right-click a network item. Click
Survey Command Window.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Networks collection and right-click a network item. Click
Survey Command Window.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Networks collection and right-click a network item. Click
Survey Command Window.
2 In the Survey Command Window, click Batch File menu ➤ Run - Slow Motion.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Networks collection and right-click a network item. Click
Survey Command Window.
2 In the Survey Command Window, click Batch File menu ➤ Run - Walk Through.
3 Press Enter after each line is displayed to continue. You must repeat this until you import the whole
file.
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window
Creating Figures
When you create a figure, it is stored in the survey database and may be also inserted into the active drawing
depending on the Survey User Settings. Create a figure by either entering coordinates or referencing an
existing point, and then giving a distance and direction to the next point.
Each figure consists of points or locations that have a relationship. You use figures to represent features such
as fences, buildings, or roads. Figures are always referenced by name, and can consist of letters and numbers.
For example: ROAD_1. One survey database may contain many figures. The AutoCAD Civil 3D Survey feature
has options to perform figure inquiries that identify a figure and determine exact courses and closure.
NOTE Numeric figure names should not start with the number zero. For example, a figure name of 235 is
acceptable but 0235 is not.
1 On the Survey tab in Toolspace, expand <named> survey database ➤ right-click Figures collection ➤
Create Figure Interactively.
3 In the drawing, select point objects or use a selection window to select the points.
4 Press Enter. The Figure Properties dialog box is displayed with the new figure name and the figure
properties match the current figure prefix database. Vertices are defined from the selected point objects
or digitized points.
347
5 Optionally, to edit survey point properties, in the Figure Properties dialog box, click to display the
Survey Point Properties dialog box.
For more information on editing figure properties, see Survey Figure Properties Dialog Box (page 2704).
Quick Reference
Toolspace
■ 2D Line
■ 3D Line
■ 2D Polyline
■ 3D Polyline
■ Feature Line
■ Lot Line
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the Figures collection ➤ Create Figure from Object.
4 Click OK. The figure is created and listed in the Figures collection.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ ➤ Create Figure From Object
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Figures ➤ right-click ➤ Create Figure From
Object
Dialog Box
Create Figure From Object Dialog Box (page 2669)
2 In the Create Breaklines dialog box, click the Select Surface drop-down list and click a surface name or
click to open the New Surface dialog box, where you can create a new surface. Figures are displayed
in the list view part of the dialog box.
3 In the Breakline column, click the check box next to the figures that you want as breaklines. Optionally,
to prevent a breakline from being created from a figure, in the list view, click the check box and set the
value to No.
NOTE Click to set the breakline property for all figures to Yes. Click to clear all the breakline property
check boxes.
5 In the Add Breaklines dialog box (page 2615), enter a Description for the breakline operation, specify the
Type of breaklines, or specify the Mid-ordinate distance for any breaklines that have curved segments.
6 Click OK. The breaklines are inserted into to the drawing, or if necessary updated if they already exist
in the drawing.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <survey database name> ➤ Figures collection ➤ right-click Create
Breaklines
Closing Figures
Close a figure by joining the last point of a figure to the first point of the same figure using the CLOSE
command.
To close a figure
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
CLOSE
CLOSE BUILD
CLOSE RECTANG [offset]
Command Synonyms
CLOSE BLDG
CLOSE BLD
CLOSE RECT
Parameter Definition
offset The distance to the other side of the rectangle when you are
closing a rectangle figure.
■ In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the Figures collection ➤ Insert Into Drawing.
■ In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, click the Figures collection. In the list view, select the figures to insert,
right-click ➤ Insert Into Drawing.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
3 Select the figure that you want to create the points on.
4 At the Command line, enter the starting point number or accept the default. A survey point is created
for each figure vertex.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <network name>
➤ Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
point on curve
PC
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
C3
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
4 Enter MCE to end the curve on the figure. Entering MCE does not end the figure. Enter END to end
the active figure or enter BEGIN to start a new figure.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
BEGIN [figure] and then MCS
Command Synonyms
BEG and MCS to start curve
MCE to end the Multi-point Curve command
Parameter Definition
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
PC
To create a curve
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
2 In the Command line, enter any capitalized curve parameters, plus the radius and the curve parameter
value:
■ CURVE DELTA [radius] [value]
■ CURVE LENGTH
■ CURVE DEFL
■ CURVE TANGENT
■ CURVE CHORD
■ CURVE MID
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
CURVE DELTA [radius] [value]
CURVE LENGTH [radius] [value]
Parameter Definition
DELTA The value parameter indicates the angle of the circular curve.
LENGTH The value parameter indicates the length of the circular curve.
TANGENT, TAN The value parameter indicates the tangent distance of the
curve.
CHORD The value parameter indicates the chord length of the curve.
radius The distance from a center point to the curve. You must enter
this value in the current survey database distance units. Use a
negative radius to draw the curve in a counter-clockwise (left)
direction.
value A curve value that depends on the curve parameter that you
specified. For example, if you specify CHORD, then the value
is the chord length. You must enter all distances in the current
survey database distance units, and angles in the current survey
database angular units, either DMS, grads, decimal degrees,
mils, or radians. If you enter a negative value, then the negative
sign is ignored. The radius component described above is used
to control the direction of the curve.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
NOTE Distances are in the current survey database units, unless you enter a qualifying suffix.
IP WELL
EL
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
FIGURE ANG-DIST [angle] [distance]
Command Synonyms
FIG AD
Parameter Definition
angle The clockwise angle to turn from the last vertex in the figure.
Enter this value in the current survey database angular units,
either DMS, grads, decimal degrees, radians, or mils.
distance The distance from the current vertex in the figure. Enter this
value in the current survey database distance units.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
reference meridian
azimuth
current vertex
last vertex
distance
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
FIGURE AZ-DIST [azimuth] [distance]
Parameter Definition
azimuth The desired azimuth from the current vertex to the new vertex.
Enter this value in the current survey database angular units,
either DMS, grads, decimal degrees, radians, or mils.
distance The distance from the current vertex in the figure to the new
vertex. Enter this value in the current survey database distance
units.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
angle
last vertex
current vertex
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
FIGURE DEFL-DIST [angle] [distance]
Command Synonyms
FIG DD
Parameter Definition
distance The distance from the current vertex in the figure. Enter this
value in the current survey database distance units.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
reference meridian
bearing
last vertex
distance
quadrant 3 quadrant 2
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
FIGURE BRG-DIST [bearing] [quadrant] [distance]
Command Synonyms
FIG BD
Parameter Definition
bearing The desired bearing. Enter this value in the current survey
database angular units, either DMS, grads, decimal degrees,
mils, or radians.
distance The measured distance from the current vertex to the new
vertex. Enter this value in the current survey database distance
units.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
FIGURE NORTH-EAST [northing] [easting]
Command Synonyms
FIG NE
Parameter Definition
northing The northing of the new vertex location that you want to
create.
easting The easting of the new vertex location that you want to create.
To specify an existing survey point in the survey database to be the next location of the figure
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
POINT [point]
Command Synonyms
PNT
RECALL
PT
Parameter Definition
point The point identifier of the point to use in the figure. This point
must already exist in the survey database.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
90°
current vertex
(+) distance 90°
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
RT-TURN [distance]
Command Synonyms
RIGHT
RT
Parameter Definition
distance The distance from the current vertex to the new vertex. Enter
this value in the current survey database distance units.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
SET (point)
Parameter Definition
Editing Figures
Adjust the point data in a defined figure. After you enter the adjusted data, you can update and rename the
figure.
The Figures Editor, which is accessible in the Survey Toolspace, provides a centralized way of editing and
managing figure data.
IMPORTANT Figures that are created using a Linework Code Set do not automatically update when you modify
survey data by updating figures, changing survey point descriptions, editing point coordinates through changes
in observations, or network and traverse adjustment. In order to obtain the most accurate results, it is recommended
that you process the linework each time you make modifications to the survey data. For more information, see
Processing Survey Linework (page 276).
NOTE You can use the Survey Database Settings dialog box to set the Direction Type, Angle Unit,
Distance/Coordinate Unit that is displayed for the Figures Editor vista.
■ To view and edit a single figure, click the Figures collection to display figures in the list view, where
you can edit the figure data.
2 Modify the fields as required by selecting the field and entering or selecting the new value.
In the Breakline field, select the check box to indicate that the figure will be used as a surface breakline
when you run the Create Breakline command.
For more information, see Creating Breaklines from Figures (page 349). When you make a change to any
figure data, the entire row is highlighted in bold until the change is saved to the survey database.
3 To edit the values in multiple rows, select the rows, right-click the column heading, click Edit. Enter
the new value. The selected row values for the column are updated with the new value.
4 To delete figures, click the figure(s) to delete, right-click, and click Delete.
The figure icon is replaced with and the row is set to read-only.
5 To undo the changes for a single row or multiple rows, select the row(s), right-click, and click Reload
or Undelete. To undo all the changes in the vista, click .
6 To apply the changes for a single row or multiple rows, select the row(s), right-click, and click Apply.
To apply all changes in the vista, click .
Quick Reference
Toolspace
1 Open the Figure Properties dialog box by doing one of the following:
■ Right-click a figure in the drawing ➤ Edit Survey Figure Properties.
■ In the drawing select a figure. On the Figure contextual tab, click Survey Figure Properties.
3 Use the icons to perform editing operations. For a description of the available options, see Survey Figure
Properties Dialog Box (page 2704).
4 In the list view Number or Name column, you can clear the value to disassociate the vertex from the
referenced survey point. Enter a new point number or name if necessary. When the Number or Name
column is clear, the Easting, Northing, and Elevation columns are enabled and you can edit those
values.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select a figure in the drawing ➤ Figure contextual tab ➤ Survey Figure Properties
Toolspace
Survey tab ➤ click Figures collection ➤ in the figure list view select a figure ➤ right-click Properties
Command Line
EditSvFigureProperties
Dialog Box
Survey Figure Properties Dialog Box (page 2704)
Browsing to a Figure
Browse to a figure in the Figures collection on the Survey tab in Toolspace.
The figure is highlighted in the Figures collection on the Survey tab in Toolspace.
To browse to a figure
1 Click Survey tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Browse To Survey Data Drop-down ➤ Browse To Figure .
2 Select a figure in the drawing. The figure is displayed in the Figures Editor.
Survey tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Browse To Survey Data Drop-down ➤ Browse To Figure
Menu
➤ Click Survey tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Update Figure drop-down ➤ Update Figure From Survey Data .
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Survey tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Update Figure drop-down ➤ Update Figure From Survey Data
Toolspace
Prospector tab ➤ Survey ➤ Figures ➤ <named figure> ➤ Update from Survey Data
Command Line
UpdateFromSvFigure
➤ Click Survey tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Update Figure drop-down ➤ Update Survey Data From Drawing
.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Survey tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Update Figure drop-down ➤ Update Survey Data From Drawing
Toolspace
Prospector tab ➤ Figures collection ➤ right-click <named figure> ➤ Update from Survey Data
Command Line
UpdateSvFigureFromDwg
■ If you are working in the list view, click the figure name field.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
To update figures
■ To update a single figure, click the Figures collection and in the list view, right- click the individual
figure ➤ Update Figure.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Figures collection ➤ Update Figures
Offsetting a Figure
You can offset an existing figure by a specified distance. A positive value indicates an offset to the right; a
negative value indicates an offset to the left.
To offset a figure
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
second point
figure figure
(-) distance
first point
(+) distance
figure offset (@ + distance)
before after
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
OFFSET [figure] [distance]
Command Synonyms
OFFSETS
Parameter Definition
distance The offset distance from the current point. Enter this value in
the current survey database distance units.
Ending a Figure
Use the End command to disable the DRAW mode. After you disable the DRAW mode, you can use commands
not related to the figure, such as commands to add points or plot the drawing.
NOTE The Begin and Continue commands also end the current figure. However, these commands also cause a
different figure to become the current figure.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
END
Command Synonyms
E
Deleting Figures
Delete figures from either the Toolspace list view or the Figure Editor vista, and also in the Survey Command
Window.
Use the Figures Editor vista to mark figures for deletion and then accept or roll back the deletions.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, click the Figures collection to display the Figures list view.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click the Figures collection ➤ Edit Figures to display the Figures
Editor.
2 Select the figure(s) to delete, right-click, and click Delete. The figure icon is replaced with a and
the row is set to read-only and cannot be edited.
3 To undo the deletion for a single row or multiple rows, select the row(s), right-click, and click Undelete.
To undo all the deletions in the vista, click .
4 To apply the deletion for a single row or multiple rows, select the row(s), right-click, and click Apply.
To apply all deletions and changes in the vista, click .
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ clickFigures collection ➤ right-click <named>
Figurein list view ➤ Delete
Survey Command Window Syntax
DELETE FIGURE (name)
Command Synonyms
DEL FIG
Parameter Definition
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
NOTE Use the BULB parameter if the resulting curve is greater than 180 degrees.
end point
chord angle chord
chord distance
centerline figure
radius
radius point
current vertex
chord deflection
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
radius The distance from a center point to the curve. Enter this value
in current survey database distance units. Use a negative radius
to draw the curve in a counter-clockwise (left) direction.
chord angle The clockwise angle to turn from the last vertex in the figure.
chord distance The distance from the current vertex in the figure.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network
➤ Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
XC C3 [point on curve] [end point]
Parameter Definition
end point The point identifier of the end point of the curve.
To create a non-tangential curve using a radius point and a point at the end of the curve
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
100 ft {30.48 m}
150 ft {45.72 m}
100 ft {30.48 m}
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
XC PTS [radius] [radius point] [end point]
Parameter Definition
radius The distance from a center point to the curve. Enter this value
in current survey database distance units. Use a negative radius
to draw the curve in a counter-clockwise (left) direction.
radius point The point identifier of an existing point that is used as the ra-
dial point for the arc.
end point The point identifier of the end point of the curve.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
XC BD BULB [radius] [chord bearing] [quadrant] [chord distance]
Parameter Definition
radius The distance from a center point to the curve. Enter this value
in the current survey database distance units. Use a negative
radius to draw the curve in a counter-clockwise (left) direction.
chord bearing The desired bearing. Enter this value in the current survey
database angular units, either DMS, grads, decimal degrees,
mils, or radians.
chord distance The distance from the current vertex in the figure. Enter this
value in the current survey database distance units.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
XC ZD BULB [radius] [chord deflection] [chord distance]
Parameter Definition
radius The distance from a center point to the curve. Enter this value
in the current survey database distance units. Use a negative
radius to draw the curve in a counter-clockwise (left) direction.
chord bearing The desired bearing. Enter this value in the current survey
database angular units, either DMS, grads, decimal degrees,
mils, or radians.
chord distance The distance from the current vertex in the figure. Enter this
value in the current survey database distance units.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Parameter Definition
radius The distance from a center point to the curve. Enter this value
in the current survey database distance units. Use a negative
radius to draw the curve in a counter-clockwise (left) direction.
chord bearing The desired bearing. Enter this value in the current survey
database angular units, either DMS, grads, decimal degrees,
mils, or radians.
chord distance The distance from the current vertex in the figure. Enter this
value in the current survey database distance units.
Modifying Figures
Use the Modify Figure commands to add points, segments and vertices to existing figures.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a Figure collection ➤ Modify Figure ➤ Begin New Figure.
3 Pick the first point. You can pick a point on the screen with object snaps.
4 Select the next vertex by selecting a point on the screen, or entering one of the following options:
■ AD and then the angle and distance.
■ RT and then a negative or positive right distance, which is a right angle departure from the last leg
of the figure.
■ CU to create a curve, type the radius, and select one of the following options for creating the curve:
Select entry (Tan/Chord/Delta/Ext/Mid/Length)<Length>:
■ CL to close the figure, linking the last vertex with the first point.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Modify Figure ➤ Begin New Figure
Command Line Syntax
BEGIN [figure]
Command Synonyms
BEG
Parameter Definition
To extend a figure from the start point in the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a Figure collection or in individual figure ➤ Modify Figure
➤ Start Figure.
3 Define the next vertex by selecting the points on screen or by entering one of the following options:
■ AD and then the angle and distance
■ RT and then a negative or positive right distance, which is a right angle departure from the last leg
of the figure.
■ CU to create a curve, type the radius, and select one of the following options for creating the curve:
Select entry (Tan/Chord/Delta/Ext/Mid/Length)<Length>:
■ CL to close the figure, linking the last vertex with the first point.
NOTE The Start command, like the Continue and Begin commands, ends the current figure.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Modify FigureStart Figure
Command Line Syntax
START [figure]
Parameter Definition
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a Figure collection or in individual figure ➤ Modify Figure
➤ Continue Figure.
3 Define the next vertex by selecting the points on screen or by entering one of the following options:
■ AD and then the angle and distance
■ RT and then a negative or positive right distance, which is a right angle departure from the last leg
of the figure.
■ CU to create a curve, type the radius, and select one of the following options for creating the curve:
Select entry (Tan/Chord/Delta/Ext/Mid/Length)<Length>:
■ CL to close the figure, linking the last vertex with the first point.
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Modify FigureContinue Figure
Command Line Syntax
Continue [figure]
Command Synonyms
CONT
Parameter Definition
You can access these commands by clicking Modify tab ➤ Edit Geometry Panel or Modify tab ➤ Edit Elevations
panel. For more information on these commands see Editing Feature Lines (page 816).
Identifying a Figure
Identify and display the figure name for a selected figure.
To identify a figure
2 In the list view, right-click a figure ➤ Properties. The properties for the figure are displayed in the
Figure Properties dialog box.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
ID FIG
Command Synonyms
DISP FIGS, LIST FIGS, DSP FIGS
To display all the figures in the current drawing in the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
DISPLAY FIGURES
Command Synonyms
DISP FIGS, LIST FIGS, DSP FIGS
NOTE Use the Inverse command to return exact distances and courses, based on the current survey database
distance units in the Survey Database Settings.
To do a Mapcheck in Toolspace
■ In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, click the Figures collection. In the list view, right-click a figure ➤ Display
Mapcheck. The Figure Display vista is displayed with the Mapcheck information for the selected figure.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Perimeter: 328.76
Precision 1: 70392.06
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
MAPCHECK FIGURE [figure]
Command Synonyms
MAPCHK FIG
CHECK FIG
CHK FIG
Parameter Definition
■ In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, click the Figures collection. In the list view, right-click a figure ➤
Display Inverse. The Figure Display vista is displayed with the Inverse information for the selected figure.
NOTE Figures that have vertices created using Point names will display the point name in the Point column.
To calculate the mathematical closure of a figure using the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Perimeter: 2261.16
Precision 1: 2261164601.60
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
INVERSE FIGURE [figure]
Command Synonyms
INV FIG
Parameter Definition
NOTE The area and perimeter information is also listed at the top of the Figure Display vista when displaying
Inverse information for the figure.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: Survey Databases ➤ <named survey database> ➤ Network ➤ right-click <named> Network ➤
Survey Command Window
Survey Command Window Syntax
AREA [figure]
Parameter Definition
figure The name of the figure for which you want to list the area and
the perimeter.
Labeling Figures
To label survey figures
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Figure ➤ Add Figure Labels .
2 In the Add Labels dialog box, specify the label type and label style.
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Figure ➤ Add Single Segment or
Multiple Segments .
2 If you select Single Segment you are prompted to select a point on an entity in the drawing. If you
select Multiple Segment you are prompted to select an entity in the drawing.
To add tables
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Figure ➤ Add Line/Curve/Segment
For more information, see Add Labels Dialog Box (page 2208) and Table Creation Dialog Box (page 2739).
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Figure ➤ Add Figure Labels
Menu
389
To create an input file for a network
■ In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Networks collections. Right-click a named network ➤ Least
Squares Analysis ➤ Create Input File.
NOTE The current equipment settings are used to compute the standard deviations for each observation, when
the observation is created.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: expand Survey Databases ➤ <named> survey database ➤ Networks ➤ right-click <named>
network ➤ Least Squares Analysis ➤ Create Input File
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Networks collection. Right-click a named network ➤ Least
Squares Analysis ➤ Edit Input File.
3 Click File menu ➤ Save. Click Exit to leave the text editor and return to the drawing.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: expand Survey Databases ➤ <named> survey database ➤ Networks ➤ right-click <named>
network ➤ Least Squares Analysis ➤ Edit Input File
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Networks collection. Right-click a named network ➤ Least
Squares Analysis ➤ Process Input File.
2 Use the scroll bar to review the information in the file. You can also save the output file to a new
filename, or print the file to your printer.
The least squares network output file initially displays the Survey Least Squares calculations data, based
on the processed network.lsi input file.
4 Page down again to display the adjusted coordinates for the network. The point identifiers, northing,
easting, northing standard deviation, and easting standard deviation for each unknown point are listed.
5 Page down to the end of the file to display the error analysis for the network. The values of the semi-major
and semi-minor axes, as well as the axis azimuth of the error ellipse for each unknown point are listed.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: expand Survey Databases ➤ <named> survey database ➤ Networks ➤ right-click <named>
network ➤ Least Squares Analysis ➤ Process Input File
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Networks collections. Right-click a <named> network ➤
Least Squares Analysis ➤ Display Output File.
2 Use the scroll bar to review the information in the file. Optionally, from the viewer, save the output
file to a new file name, or print the file to your printer.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: expand Survey Databases ➤ <named> survey database ➤ Networks ➤ right-click <named>
network ➤ Least Squares Analysis ➤ Display Output File
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Networks collections. Right-click a <named> network ➤
Least Squares Analysis ➤ Update Survey Database.
2 In the Least Squares Adjusted File Selection dialog box, select the network.adj file.
When you update the survey database and insert the network into the drawing, the network object can
display error ellipses according to the Style properties for the network.
The following illustration shows the least squares network:
Survey tab: expand Survey Databases ➤ <named> survey database ➤ Networks ➤ right-click <named>
network ➤ Least Squares Analysis ➤ Update Survey Database
where:
■ X is a matrix that contains the difference between the current coordinates and the new coordinates of
each unknown station, and that updates the current coordinates with each iteration (until X @ 0.0).
■ A is a matrix that is created from the observations and coordinates of the points, based on a linearization
by a Taylor series expansion of the specific observation type.
■ L is a matrix that contains the difference between measured observations and calculated observations.
Next, the L matrix is calculated based on the calculated observations derived from the coordinate matrix,
C, and the measured observations. The following formula is used to determine each Li observation value:
where:
Next, the diagonal weight matrix, P, is calculated based on the standard deviations of distances and angles.
The following formulas are used to solve for , the weighted distance value, and , the weighted
angular value:
where:
The final step is to calculate the A matrix, which relates the changes in coordinates to each observation
determined through the use of distance observation equations and angle or azimuth/bearing observation
equations. These equations are initially nonlinear, so the Taylor series approximation is used to render them
as linear equations.
and
where
residual error
reference meridian
where
The following illustration shows the geometry of the angle observation equation:
observed angle
residual error
most probable
coordinates for point I
reference parallel
and
where
The following illustration shows the geometry of the azimuth/bearing observation equation:
reference
meridian
most probable
coordinates for point J
residual error
reference parallel
Weighted Observations
The following calculated values are used in the A matrix:
The computed matrices A, P, and L are now plugged into the matrix formula for a system of weighted
observations to solve for the X matrix, as stated previously:
This results in the X matrix, that consists of the difference between the current coordinates and the most
probable values for the coordinates:
These values are used to revise the coordinate matrix, C. The iteration process continues, recalculating the
A, P, and L matrices and solving for the X matrix until the values in the X matrix are negligible.
where
The X2 value is small if the adjusted observations are close to the corresponding measured observations.
This is referred to as a "good fit." A goodness-of-fit test is then conducted in which the X2 value is compared
to those from a table of critical values of chi-square distribution at the 5% level. A X2 value below that listed
in the table passes, while a larger X2 value than that listed fails, indicating possible blunders in the initial
surveying measurements.
where
■ n = the number of unknowns (or 2n in the case of coordinates, since both x and y are unknown)
The next procedure is the calculation of the standard deviation of unit weight for a weighted adjustment,
So, which is done through the following matrix formula:
where
Calculation of the standard deviations of the individual adjusted quantities, , is next. These are determined
by the following formula:
where
■ = the diagonal element in the ith row and ith column from the covariance matrix Q
adjusted point
Where:
■ t = the orientation of the error ellipse, the direction of the semi-major axis
and
■ Qxx, Qyy, and Qxy are values from the covariance matrix.
Then, these values are used to solve two equations to determine Su, the semi-major axis length and Sv, the
semi-minor axis length:
and
where
Finally, the angle t, which the u axis makes with the Y axis, is solved for by the following equation:
The adjusted point is most likely found within this ellipse with either a 95% or 99% degree of confidence.
Traverses
Use the Traverses collection to manage the existing traverses defined within the network.
You can create a traverse from data in a field book file, or use the Traverse Editor to manually enter survey
data, for example hand notes or data from a site plan. Using the Traverse Editor is an efficient way to view
and edit all the setups in a traverse contained in a Network.
Creating Traverses
Create traverses to perform traverse closure analysis such as Compass Rule, Crandall Rule, or Transit Rule.
You can also perform a least squares analysis on a traverse.
You can create a traverse from data that you import from a field book file, or use the Traverse Editor to
manually enter traverse observations.
To create a traverse
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Networks collections. Expand a network ➤ right-click
Traverses ➤ New.
2 In the New Traverse dialog box, click a cell in the Value column and enter values. Click OK.
NOTE Observations created using Point names will display in the Value column.
Traverses | 401
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: expand Survey Databases ➤ <named> survey database ➤ Networks ➤ <named network>
➤ Traverses ➤ New
Dialog Box
Traverse Editor (page 2721)
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Networks collections. Expand a named network ➤ Traverses.
2 Click the Traverses collection. In the list view, right-click a named traverse ➤ Properties
3 In the Traverse Properties dialog box, click a cell in the Value column and make any necessary changes.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: expand Survey Databases ➤ <named> survey database ➤ Networks ➤ <named network>
➤ Traverses ➤ <named> traverse ➤ right-click Properties
Dialog Box
New Traverse (page 2696)
Editing Traverses
Edit the properties of all traverses using the Traverses Editor panorama window, or edit an individual traverse
in the Traverse Editor.
To edit traverses
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Networks collections. Expand a named network. Right-click
Traverses ➤ Edit.
2 In the Traverses Editor Panorama window, click a cell and enter changes.
3 Right-click a cell and click New to create a traverse or click Delete to remove an existing traverse.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Networks collections. Expand a named network.
2 Click the Traverses collection. In the list view, right-click a named traverse ➤ Edit.
3 In the Specify Initial Setup dialog box, enter the Initial Station and the Initial Backsight. Click OK.
NOTE If the Setup you select is the initial setup for the traverse and the backsight point is not defined by a
control point, you can enter the backsight direction. If the backsight direction is not assigned in the setup
properties, you can enter it as a backsight observation.
5 Expand each Station point. Enter or edit the observations for each Setup. A new blank observation row
is added to the last setup observation where you can enter a new backsight or foresight observation.
NOTE Observations created using Point names will display the name in the Name column.
6 Specify a backsight observation in a new row by entering the point identifier for the setup.
7 Specify a foresight observation to the next station point by entering a point identifier that has not been
referenced in the current traverse.
When you specify the new foresight point identifier, the next Station point and setup are created.
NOTE Once you have referenced a foresight point identifier, all new foresight observations must use the
same point identifier.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Survey tab: survey Survey Databases ➤ <named> survey database ➤ Networks ➤ <named network> ➤
Traverses ➤ right-click Edit
Survey tab: expand Survey Databases ➤ <named> survey database ➤ Networks ➤ <named network>
➤ Traverses ➤ <named> traverse ➤ right-click Edit
Dialog Box
Traverse Editor (page 2721)
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, expand the Networks collections. Expand a named network ➤
Traversescollection ➤ right-click named traverse ➤ Traverse Analysis.
2 Review the settings in the Traverse Analysis dialog box. Enter any changes and click OK.
Survey tab: expand Survey Databases ➤ <named> survey database ➤ Networks ➤ <named network> ➤
Traverses ➤ <named> traverse ➤ right-click Traverse Analysis
Dialog Box
Traverse Analysis Dialog Box (page 2732)
Mapcheck Analysis
Perform a Mapcheck Analysis by selecting AutoCAD Civil 3D line and curve labels to determine values from
label objects based on the precision of the annotation of the label object, or enter mapcheck data manually.
For more information, see Mapcheck Analysis (page 1795).
To list the horizontal angle between three points in the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
To list the horizontal angle between three points in the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Parameter Definition
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Parameter Definition
quadrant The quadrant for the bearing. Specify the quadrant using one
of the following numbers: 1 (for NE), 2 (for SE), 3 (for SW),
or 4 (for NW).
To list the azimuth between two points in the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
To list the azimuth between two points at the Command line in the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Parameter Definition
To determine the distance between two points in the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Parameter Definition
point 1 and point 2 The two existing points between which the distance is determ-
ined.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
2 In the Survey Command Window, click Point Information menu ➤ Inverse Points.
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Parameter Definition
point 1 and point 2 The two existing points between which the relevant informa-
tion displays.
To list angle and distance information using the Inverse Radial in the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
2 In the Survey Command Window, click Point Information menu ➤ Inverse Radial.
To list angle and distance information using the Inverse Radial at the Command line in the Survey Command
Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Parameter Definition
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
2 In the Survey Command Window, click Point Information menu ➤ Vertical Distance.
To list the elevation distance at the Command line in the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Parameter Definition
point 1 and point 2 These are the two existing points in the survey database.
To determine the slope distance between two points in the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
2 In the Survey Command Window, click Point Information menu ➤ Slope Distance.
To determine the slope distance between two points at the Command line in the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
slope angle
point
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Parameter Definition
point 1 and point 2 These are the two existing points between which an invisible
line is established. This line is used to determine the slope
distance between the two points.
To list the grade between two points in the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
To list the grade between two points at the Command line in the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
grade =
slope distance
point
grade (%)
vertical distance (Δ x)
point 1
horizontal distance (Δ x)
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Parameter Definition
point 1 and point 2 The two existing points between which the grade is determ-
ined.
To list the slope angle between two points in the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
2 In the Survey Command Window, click Point Information menu ➤ Slope Angle.
To list the slope angle between two points at the Command line in the Survey Command Window
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Parameter Definition
point 1 and point 2 The two existing points between which an invisible line is es-
tablished. This line is used to determine the slope between
the two points.
NOTE For other options on outputting survey data see Exporting a Field Book File (page 269) and Exporting Survey
Data to LandXML (page 270).
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
2 In the Survey Command Window, click Output File menu ➤ Use Output File. A check mark next to
the item indicates it is active. Click the menu item to clear the check mark. Specify the following settings:
■ Use Output File: a check mark next to the menu item indicates the Output File is active.
■ Use Point Course Echo: reports the course taken to reach a point, including the direction and the
distance.
■ Use Figure Course Echo: reports the course taken to create a figure, including direction and distance.
■ Use Point Coordinate Echo: displays the point coordinates, including northing, easting, and elevation
information.
■ Use Figure Coordinate Echo: displays figure point coordinates, including northing, easting, and
elevation information.
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Output File
1 In Toolspace, on the Survey tab, right-click a named network ➤ Survey Command Window.
Quick Reference
Survey Command Window Menu
Single Foresight
This procedure is recommended for Polaris observations, or any sightings that have a large vertical angle
inherent in the observation. The single foresight procedure uses the following sequence: direct on the target,
direct on Polaris, reverse on target, reverse on Polaris. A stopwatch time is recorded for each pointing on the
Polaris. The two stopwatch times and the four horizontal circle readings correspond to one set of data. It is
recommended that you perform a minimum of three sets.
Multiple Foresight
This procedure is used as a solar observation method. It uses the following sequence: direct on the target,
multiple direct on the sun, multiple reverse on the sun (same number of times as direct), reverse on the
target. A stopwatch time is recorded for each pointing on the sun. Pair up each observation on the sun (and
its stop time) with its related target observation, and enter it into the editor as a single direct or reverse pair.
The editor computes an azimuth (or bearing) for each pair. You can average any number of these azimuths.
Do not average the multiple observations themselves because they are time-dependent and not a linear
function of time.
To calculate an astronomic direction using the Sun Shot or Star Shot calculations
1 Click Analyze tab ➤ Ground Data panel ➤ Survey drop-down ➤ Astronomic Direction .
2 In the Calculation Type list, select either Sun Shot Calculation, or Star Shot Calculation.
■ Backsight Point
■ Station Latitude
■ Station Longitude
See Astronomic Direction Calculator Dialog Box (page 2667) for more information.
■ GHA 24 Hours
■ Declination 00 Hours
■ Declination 24 Hours
NOTE Enter zero (0) if you are sighting either the center or both the trailing and leading edges of the sun.
The left edge is always the leading edge at latitudes greater than 23.5 degrees north and greater than 23.5
degrees south. If only the left edge is being sighted (left when facing the sun), then the semi- diameter is
positive; likewise, the semi-diameter is negative when only the right edge is sighted.
5 Click to create an observation set. Enter Direct and Reverse observations for the Backsight
Observation, Sun Observation or Star Observation and the Stop Time.
The observations determine the true astronomic direction from the first setup to the backsight. When
you enter the stop time for an observation, the observed and average directions are calculated
automatically.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Survey Commands
The following table lists the survey-related AutoCAD Civil 3D commands that can be entered at the command
line.
Command Description
AddFeatureLineLabels Displays the Add Line labels dialog box (page 2208)
419
Command Description
TIP In the Survey Command Window, enter HELP at the command line to display a text file that lists all the Survey
Command Language commands.
■ []: Square brackets enclose a required parameter, such as a coordinate or an angle measurement.
NOTE Do not insert any brackets or parentheses when you type the command. The only exception to this rule is
when you use mathematical operations.
Example
The following is an example of the syntax to create a point by angle, distance, and vertical angle.
AD VA (point) [angle] [distance] [vertical angle] (description)
The following is an example of the actual data you would enter:
AD VA 5 67.5757 100.63 91.1546 IPF
NOTE If you use numeric descriptions such as 100, or descriptions that include one or more spaces such as VERY
LARGE MONUMENT, then you should enclose them in quotation marks.
Command Description
AD (point) [angle] [distance] (de- Creates a point by angle and distance (page 292)
scription)
DD (point) [angle] [distance] [ver- Creates a point by deflection angle and distance
tical angle] (description) (page 296)
F1 (point) [angle] [distance] (de- Creates a point using a FACE 1 angle (page 298)
scription)
F1 VA (point) [angle] [distance] Creates a point using a FACE 1 angle and a vertical
[vertical angle] (description) angle (page 298)
F1 VD (point) [angle] [distance] Creates a point using a FACE 1 angle and a vertical
[vertical distance] (description) distance (page 298)
F2 (point) [angle] [distance] (de- Creates a point using a FACE 2 angle (page 298)
scription)
F2 VA (point) [angle] [distance] Creates a point using a FACE 2 angle and a vertical
[vertical angle] (description) angle (page 298)
F2 VD (point) [angle] [distance] Creates a point using a FACE 2 angle and a vertical
[vertical distance] (description) distance (page 298)
LAT LONG (point) [latitude] [longit- Creates a control point using a latitude and longit-
ude] (description) ude (page 280)
NEZ (point) [northing] [easting] Creates a control point using a northing, easting,
(elevation) (description) and elevation (page 280)
PT OFFSET (point) [offset] (ahead) Createss a point by offsetting the last point (page
(description) 302)
STADIA (point) [angle] [distance] Creates a point using the stadia method (page
[rod] (vertical angle) (description) 304)
ZD (point) [azimuth] [distance] Creates a point using azimuth and distance (page
(description) 301)
ZD [VA] (point) [azimuth] [dis- Creates a point using azimuth, distance, and ver-
tance] [vertical angle] (description) tical angle (page 301)
ZD [VD] (point) [azimuth] [dis- Creates a point using azimuth, distance, and ver-
tance] [vertical distance] (descrip- tical distance (page 301)
tion)
NOTE These commands must be entered in the Survey Command Window. For more information, see Survey
Command Window (page 2697).
Command Description
B [point1] [point2] [bearing] Defines a bearing between two points (page 405)
[quadrant]
STN [point] (instrument. height) Creates a new setup station (page 285)
(description)
NOTE These commands must be entered in the Survey Command Window. For more information, see Survey
Command Window (page 2697).
Command Description
A [point 1] [point 2] [point 3] Lists the horizontal angle between points (page
404)
AZ [point 1] [point 2] Lists the azimuth between two points (page 406)
GRADE [point 1] [point 2] Lists the grade between two points (page 413)
INV PTS [point 1] [point 2] Lists the direction and distance between points
(page 408)
INVERSE RADIAL [backsight] [sta- Lists the angle and distance from a setup in a ra-
tion] dial direction from the backsight point (page 410)
SLOPE [point 1] [point 2] Lists the slope angle between two points (page
415)
SD [point 1] [point 2] Lists the slope distance between two points (page
412)
NOTE These commands must be entered in the Survey Command Window. For more information, see Survey
Command Window (page 2697).
Command Description
DEL PTS [point 1] (point 2) Deletes points from the survey databases (page
305)
MOD ELEV [point 1] [elevation] Modifies the elevation of a point (page 306)
MOD ELS [point 1] [point 2] [eleva- Modifies the elevation of multiple points (page
tion] 306)
Figure Commands
The following table lists the figure-related AutoCAD Civil 3D survey commands and briefly describes their
functionality.
NOTE These commands must be entered in the Survey Command Window. For more information, see Survey
Command Window (page 2697).
Command Description
AREA [figure] Lists the area and perimeter of a figure (page 386)
CRV [DELTA, LENGTH, DEFL, MID, Creates a curve in the current figure (page 355)
TAN, CHORD] [radius] [value]
DEL FIG [figure] Deletes a figure from the drawing (page 371)
DISP FIGS Lists all the existing figure names in the current
drawing (page 383)
FIG AD [angle] [distance] Creates a figure vertex using an angle and dis-
tance (page 356)
FIG ZD [azimuth] [distance] Creates a figure vertex using an azimuth and dis-
tance (page 358)
FIG BD [bearing] [quadrant] [dis- Creates a figure vertex using a bearing and dis-
tance] tance (page 360)
START [figure] Extends a figure from the start point (page 379)
XC ZD (BULB) [radius] [chord azi- Creates a curve using the chord azimuth (page
muth] [chord distance] 377)
XC BD (BULB) [radius] [chord Creates a curve using the chord bearing (page
bearing] [quadrant] [chord dis- 376)
tance]
XC DD (BULB) [radius] [chord de- Creates a curve using the chord deflection (page
flection] [chord distance] 376)
XC C3 [point on curve] [end point] Creates a curve using a point on the curve (page
374)
XC PTS [radius] [radius point] [end Creates the curve radius (page 374)
point]
NOTE These commands must be entered in the Survey Command Window. For more information, see Survey
Command Window (page 2697).
Command Description
SAVE [NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, Saves the intersection point (page 343)
WEST, 1, 2, ALL] (point) (descrip-
tion)
SAVE [NEAR, FAR] (point) [reference Saves the intersection point (page 343)
point number] (description)
SAVE PICK (point) (description) Saves the intersection point (page 343)
Command Description
ANGLES [RIGHT, LEFT] [ZENITH, Changes the horizontal angle type (right or left)
NADIR, HORIZ] and the vertical angle type
UNITS [METER, FOOT] [DMS, Changes the distance or angle units for measure-
DECDEG, GRAD, MILS, RADIANS] ments
VERT ANGLE [ZENITH, NADIR, Changes the vertical angle reference system
HORIZ]
Baseline Commands
The following table lists the baseline-related AutoCAD Civil 3D survey commands and briefly describes their
functionality.
NOTE These commands must be entered in the Survey Command Window. For more information, see Survey
Command Window (page 2697).
Command Description
BL INV [point 1] (point 2) Lists a baseline direction using inverse point (page
312)
NOTE These commands must be entered in the Survey Command Window. For more information, see Survey
Command Window (page 2697).
Command Description
CL PT (point) [station] (offset) Creates a new point by station offset (page 319)
(skew angle) (description)
CL ELEV (point) [station] [offset] Creates a point by station, offset, and elevation
[elevation] (description) (page 321)
CL ROD (point) [station] [offset] Creates a point using station, offset and rod height
[rod] (description) (page 322)
XS ELEV (point) [offset] [elevation] Creates a point with offset and elevation from the
(description) current cross section (page 326)
XS ROD (point) [offset] [rod] (de- Creates a point by offset and rod height from the
scription) current cross section (page 327)
XS VD (point) [offset] [vertical dis- Creates a point by offset and vertical distance from
tance] (description) the current cross section (page 328)
Command Description
ZOOM [WINDOW, EXTENTS, PRE- Zooms according to one of the specified paramet-
VIOUS, W, P, E, A] ers
Miscellaneous Commands
You can use commands to quickly access survey functionality.
The following table lists the survey-related AutoCAD Civil 3D commands and briefly describes their
functionality.
NOTE These commands must be entered in the Survey Command Window. For more information, see Survey
Command Window (page 2697).
Command Description
433
434
Points
15
Points are basic building blocks in AutoCAD Civil 3D. You can use points in land development projects to identify existing
ground locations and design elements.
Points are numbered and named uniquely. Each point has properties that can include information such as northing,
easting, elevation, and description. A point that is displayed in a drawing can have additional properties that control its
appearance, such as a point style, a point label style, and a layer.
A point can be included in an AutoCAD Civil 3D project so that it can be accessed by multiple users, or it can exist outside
a project in a single drawing. For more information about the differences between project and drawing points, see Managing
Points (page 453).
Understanding Points
In AutoCAD Civil 3D, you can create, work with, and manage points using a variety of commands and tools.
The points created by AutoCAD Civil 3D are called Coordinate Geometry (COGO) points, which are very
different from AutoCAD point nodes. AutoCAD point nodes have only coordinate data (XYZ values) associated
with them. However, COGO points, in addition to coordinate data, have a variety of properties associated
with them, including point number, point name, raw (field) description, and full (expanded) description.
Unlike AutoCAD point nodes, which exist in a single drawing, COGO points can be stored in a project
outside a drawing and referenced by multiple users. In AutoCAD Civil 3D, the term point refers to a COGO
point, not to an AutoCAD point node.
435
Examples of point label styles
Editing Points
Use the Point Editor to edit point properties. For more information, see Point Properties (page 437). You can
also use AutoCAD commands to edit points graphically. For more information, see Editing Points in a
Drawing (page 517).
Creating Points
Choose from many point creation commands to create points. For more information, see Creating Points
(page 456). You can also create points by importing point data from a file. For more information, see Importing
and Exporting Points (page 525).
When you create or import points, you can use description keys to automatically control the appearance of
a point in the drawing based on its raw (field) description. For more information, see Description Keys (page
571).
■ You can select points individually in the drawing and graphically change the location and rotation using
grips.
■ You can create a selection set of points to move their elevations to a surface.
■ You can modify point properties in the AutoCAD Properties dialog box which describes both the basic
and specific AutoCAD Civil 3D properties.
■ You can change the Next Point Number settings in the point creation commands.
NOTE To perform any of these functions, the point must be checked out, unlocked, and not a Survey Point.
You can use point groups to organize points and to control their appearance in a drawing. Point groups
reference the point data directly and are responsible for drawing the points. Point groups have an override
that forces all points in the group to use both that group’s preferred point style and point-label style, rather
than the styles assigned to the individual points.
When creating points you specify the point layer in the Edit Command Settings-CreatePoints dialog box.
For more information, see Edit Point Settings dialog box (page 2343).
You can use the AutoCAD LIST command to display point properties.
Point Properties
Use the Prospector tree to access point properties.
Point properties specify all the information associated with a point, including its data, such as point number,
northing, easting, and elevation. Properties for a drawing point include information about how the point
■ Edit the points in a drawing with the Point Editor. (page 517)
NOTE The Points shortcut menu in the Prospector tree and in the Points list view can also contain project
management access control menu items when they are available. The menu items that display can change
depending on the status of the selected point relative to the project, such as whether it is checked out.
If one or more points have been added to the current drawing, you can view a list of the points in the list
view next to or beneath the Prospector tree. For more information, see The Toolspace Item View (page 99).
Point File Formats Point File Formats Collection (Settings Tab) (page
526)
User-Defined Property Clas- Using Custom Properties with Points (page 445)
sifications
Point Settings
Point settings control how point-related commands behave.
You work with point settings the same way you work with other object settings in AutoCAD Civil 3D, using
the Toolspace Settings tree. You can control point-related settings at both the object collection (feature)
level and at the command level. For information about how the levels of settings work together, see
Understanding Settings (page 77).
Use the Settings tree Point collection shortcut menu to establish defaults for all point-specific settings and
to override the drawing ambient settings for all point-related commands. Use the Commands collection
under the Settings tree Point collection to override point-specific settings or drawing ambient settings for a
specific command.
NOTE Overrides to the drawing ambient settings at the Point collection level and the Point Commands collection
level affect only the specified level. The drawing level settings are not affected. For more information, see
Understanding Settings (page 77).
The topics in this section describe only those settings that affect point-related commands. They do not
describe the drawing ambient settings that you can edit at the Point collection level and the Point Commands
collection level, even though those settings are displayed. For more information about the drawing ambient
settings, see Specifying Ambient Settings (page 84).
IMPORTANT By default, in the Create Points dialog box - Points Creation section the Disable Description Keys
value is set to false and the controls in the Default Styles section are not available. To enable the Default Styles
controls, set the Disable Description Keys value to true.
1 Open the Edit Point Settings (page 2343) dialog box using one of the following methods:
■ Edit settings for all point-related commands: In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click Point ➤
Edit Feature Settings.
■ Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Point Creation Tools . Expand
the Create Points dialog box. Expand Points Creation.
■ Edit settings for a specific command: In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Commands
collection under the Point collection. Right-click the desired command. Click Edit Command Settings.
4 To specify a default point label style, edit the Point Label Style setting.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Point Creation Tools . Expand the
Create Points dialog box. Expand Points Creation.
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 Open the Edit Point Settings (page 2343) dialog box using one of the following methods:
■ Edit settings for all point-related commands: In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click Point ➤
Edit Feature Settings.
■ Edit settings for a specific command: In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Commands
collection under the Point collection. Right-click the desired command. Click Edit Command Settings.
3 To specify a default Point Group Name Template, click in the Point Group Name Template value column
and enter values in the Name Template dialog box.
4 To specify a default Point Name Template, click in the Point Name Template value column and enter
values in the Name Template dialog box.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Point Creation Tools . Expand the
Create Points dialog box. Expand Points Creation.
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
WARNING If you edit points without checking them out, you cannot check the points in to the project. Your
changes exist only in the drawing in which you made them.
1 Open the Edit Point Settings (page 2343) dialog box using one of the following methods:
■ Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Point Creation Tools . Expand
the Create Points dialog box. Expand Points Creation.
■ Edit settings for a specific command: In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Commands
collection under the Point collection. Right-click the desired command and click Edit Command
Settings.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Point Creation Tools . Expand the
Create Points dialog box. Expand Points Creation.
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Example: If you have a point in the drawing with the following properties:
■ Number: 23
■ Northing: 500
■ Easting: 500
■ Elevation: 70.5
■ Description: IP
■ Number: 23
■ Northing: 502.18
■ Easting: 498.65
If you set the If Point Number Already Exists setting to Overwrite before you import the point file, the point
in the drawing becomes:
Number: 23 Northing: 502.18 Easting: 498.65 Elevation: blank Description: blank
All properties are overwritten, even properties that aren’t defined in the point data file, such as elevation
and description.
If you set the If Point Number Already Exists setting to Merge before you import the point file, the point in
the drawing becomes:
Number: 23 Northing: 502.18 Easting: 498.65 Elevation: 70.5 Description: IP
The number, northing, and elevation are overwritten, but the elevation and description in the drawing are
preserved.
1 Open the Edit Point Settings (page 2343) dialog box using one of the following methods:
■ Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Point Creation Tools . Expand
the Create Points dialog box. Expand Points Creation.
■ Edit settings for a specific command: In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Commands
collection under the Point collection. Right-click the desired command and click Edit Command
Settings.
2 If needed, scroll the dialog box to Point Identity and expand the collection.
3 To specify point names and point numbers and to resolve duplicate point names and point numbers,
edit the following settings:
■ Next Point Number
■ Force Names
4 Click OK.
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Point Creation Tools . Expand the
Create Points dialog box. Expand Points Creation.
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 Open the Edit Point Settings (page 2343) dialog box using one of the following methods:
■ Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Point Creation Tools . Expand
the Create Points dialog box. Expand Points Creation.
■ In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Commands collection under the Point collection.
Right-click the CreatePoints ➤ Edit Command Settings.
NOTE The settings you specify when you right-click CreatePoints ➤ Edit Command Settings establish
the default settings in the Create Points dialog box.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Point Creation Tools . Expand the
Create Points dialog box. Expand Points Creation.
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 Open the Edit Point Settings (page 2343) dialog box using one of the following methods:
■ Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Point Creation Tools . Expand
the Create Points dialog box. Expand Points Creation.
■ In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Commands collection under the Point collection.
Right-click the CreatePoints ➤ Edit Command Settings.
3 To specify a new Layer, click the Value cell and specify a layer in the Layer Selection dialog box.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Point Creation Tools . Expand the
Create Points dialog box. Expand Points Creation.
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
■ Import points
■ Label points
You can also use user-defined properties for parcels. For more information, see Using Custom Properties
with Parcels (page 920).
NOTE User-defined properties can be defined only for points and parcels.
3 In the User-Defined Property Classification dialog box, enter a name for the classification.
For example, to group custom properties for trees, you can create a classification named Trees.
4 Click OK.
The new classification is displayed under User-Defined Property Classifications on the Settings tab of Toolspace
and also in the list view window.
Next, create user-defined properties (page 446).
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
4 Use the New User-defined Property Dialog Box (page 2027) dialog box to define the new property.
5 If you want a default value to be used for all points already in the drawing, as well as for new points as
they are created, select the Default Value check box and define the Default Value.
NOTE The default value is used for all points that do not already have a value for this property, regardless
of which point group they are assigned to.
6 Click OK.
The new property is displayed in Toolspace and also in the list view window.
Next, you can assign the property classification to a point group (page 447) or import or export point data
using the user-defined properties (page 448).
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab ➤ Point collection ➤ right-click a named User-defined Property Classification ➤ New
2 In the list view window, right-click a property cell. Select one of the following:
■ Edit Enumeration. Applies only to user-defined properties that use Enumeration as their type. For
more information, see the Edit Enumeration (page 2027) dialog box.
■ Delete
■ Line Shading
■ Copy to Clipboard
NOTE You can directly edit some values for the user-defined properties by clicking in the cells in the list view
and changing the values.
Quick Reference
List View Shortcut menu
Right-click a user-defined property cell ➤ Edit Enumeration, Delete, Line Shading, or Copy to Clipboard
1 In the drawing, define the properties within the User-Defined Classification. For more information, see
Creating a User-Defined Property Classification (page 446).
3 In the Point Groups list view window, click the Classification column. Select the User-Defined
Classification you want to assign to the specific point group.
4 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, select the point group to which you assigned the User-Defined
Classification.
5 In the point group list view window, right-click a column heading. Select the user-defined properties
you want to display in the list view window.
NOTE You can arrange the display of columns in the list view by dragging column headings. For more
information, see Customizing a List View (page 101).
6 You can now add data to each point directly in the list view. For more information, see Exercise 3:
Assigning User-Defined Properties to Points.
To import user-defined property values into the drawing and assign them to points
1 In the drawing, define the properties within the User-Defined Classification. For more information, see
Creating a User-Defined Property Classification (page 446).
2 Define a point file format that contains columns with the user-defined properties. The point file must
have a column containing the point identity, either Name or Number, that identifies which point is
assigned the user-defined property.
3 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Point Creation Tools .
5 In the Import Points dialog box, select the point file format that contains the user-defined properties.
For more information, see Importing Point Data (page 533).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Point Styles
Point styles control how point symbols display in a drawing.
Manage point styles the same way you manage all object styles in AutoCAD Civil 3D, using the Toolspace
Settings tree. In the Settings tree, all objects have a standard object style grouping called an object style
collection, which you use to create, edit, copy, and delete the styles for that object. For more information,
see The Object Style Collection (Settings Tree) (page 111).
When defining a point style, select from a set of default point symbols, or create a point symbol using an
AutoCAD Block. For more information about creating an AutoCAD Block, see AutoCAD Help.
Assign a point style to a drawing point either when you create the point or import the point. Use either the
Prospector Points list view or the Point Editor to change the point style. The point style referenced by a
point is not necessarily the point style used to display the point in the drawing. For more information, see
Controlling the Appearance of Points in a Drawing (page 454).
■ Point Style. Defines how a point symbol is displayed in the drawing. To change a point symbol, either
edit the point style or change the point so that it references a different point style. For more information,
see Point Styles (page 449).
■ Point Label Style. Defines how a point is labeled in the drawing. To change the way a point is labeled,
you can either edit the point label style or change the point so that it references a different point label
style. For more information, see Point Labels and Tables (page 451).
The point style determines the appearance of the point symbol, and the point label style determines how
the point is labeled:
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the Point Styles collection ➤ New.
2 In the Point Style dialog box, click the Information (page 2355) tab. Enter a name and description for the
point style.
3 To define the symbol used to display the point, click the Marker (page 2355) tab. Specify the symbol type
and options for size, scaling, and rotation.
4 To define how the point displays in 3D views, click the 3D Geometry (page 2356) tab. Specify the 3D
Geometry settings.
5 To define the display properties for the point style, click the Display (page 2357) tab. Specify the display
properties for the symbol.
6 To view summary information about the style, click the Summary (page 2357) tab.
7 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the point style you want to copy. Click Copy.
A copy is created and its properties are displayed in the Point Style dialog box.
2 In the Point Style dialog box, click the Information (page 2355) tab. Enter a name and description for the
new point style.
3 Use the tabs in the Point Style (page 2354) dialog box to modify the point style’s properties. For more
information, see Creating a Point Style (page 450).
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the desired point style. Click Edit.
2 In the Point Style (page 2354) dialog box, edit the properties of the point style.
For more information, see Creating a Point Style (page 450).
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Point Labels
Assign a point label style to a drawing point either when you create the point or import the point. Use the
Points list view on the Prospector tab or the Point Editor to change the style. The point style referenced by
a point is not necessarily the point style used to display the point in the drawing. For more information,
see Controlling the Appearance of Points in a Drawing (page 454).
2 Click the Label Styles collection, right click ➤ Edit Label Style Defaults.
For more information, see Adding Text Components to Labels (page 1686).
2 Click the Label Styles collection, right click ➤ New. For more information, see Creating and Editing
Label Styles. (page 1656)
For more information, see Adding Text Components to Labels (page 1686).
3 In the Text Component Editor dialog box, make the necessary changes.
4 Click OK.
For more information, see Adding Text Components to Labels (page 1686).
Point Tables
Use Point tables to display information about points in a drawing.
Specify the points to include in the table by selecting them from the drawing or specifying a point group.
The point information is automatically displayed in the table when you insert the point table into the
drawing.
Unlike some objects, that have multiple table styles, points have only the point table style.
You create and edit tables for most objects using the same common procedures and standard dialog boxes.
The procedure in this topic explains how to access the point table creation command. It provides a link to
information about the Point Table Creation dialog box. For information about modifying tables, see Modifying
Tables (page 1750).
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables Menu ➤ Add Point Table .
2 In the Point Table Creation (page 2375) dialog box, change the generic table settings as needed.
3 Click to select a point group that specifies the points to be included in the table.
5 Click OK.
6 Select the location for the upper-left corner of the table in the drawing.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables Menu ➤ Add Point Table
Menu
Managing Points
You can manage points using an AutoCAD Civil 3D project.
For example, you can add points to a project and protect them so they can be viewed and copied by others,
but not modified. For general information about project management, see Project Management (page 143).
For information about working with points in a project management environment, see Working with Vault
Project Points (page 187).
NOTE Survey points that are created using the Prospector Survey tab are not included in project management
operations even if they are selected. For example, any Survey points included in the selection list during the Add
to Project command are not added to the project.
You can populate a project with points by creating the points in the drawing and adding them to the project.
For more information, see Creating a Project Point Database (page 30).
For a recommended procedure for checking out, editing, and checking in a large number of project points,
see Modifying A Large Number of Project Points (page 523).
A locked point is designated by in the Prospector tree and the Point collection list view. The icon is
displayed only if the Toolspace tree drawing state icons are displayed. For more information, see Drawing
Item State Icons (page 161).
NOTE A locked point is locked only in the drawing. A protected point is protected at the project level. For more
information, see Protecting Project Points (page 192).
WARNING If you edit points without checking them out, you cannot check the points in to the project. Your
changes exist only in the drawing in which you made them.
Lock or unlock all the points in a drawing using the Points collection shortcut menu. Lock or unlock
individual drawing points using the list view shortcut menu. Lock or unlock all the points in a point group
point list using a single command.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, click the Points collection to display the Points list view.
2 Select the desired points. For more information, see Selecting Items in a List View (page 100).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Prospector tab: Points collection ➤ right-click points in List View ➤ Lock or Unlock
Command Line
LockPoints
or
UnlockPoints
Each individual drawing point can directly reference a point style and a point label style. These individual
point styles are assigned when a point is created. The individual point styles assigned during point creation
are determined either by description key matching or by the styles specified in the Create Points dialog box.
A point is not required to reference a point style or point label style. (If a point does not reference a point
style, the style referenced by the layer on which the point is created is used.
If a point does not reference a point style or point label style, the point style or point label style property
for the point is empty when viewed in the Point Editor or the Points list view. You can change or remove
individual point styles using the Point Editor or Points list view.
A point group can reference a default point style and a default point label style. View or change these point
group default styles using the Information tab (page 2348) or the Overrides tab (page 2353) on the Point Group
Properties dialog box. If you change the style on one tab, the other tab updates to reflect the change.
In addition, the default styles for a point group can be designated as point group override styles. Use the
check box on the Overrides tab (page 2353) of the Point Group Properties dialog box to specify that a point
group style is an override style.
The following describes, in order of precedence, which of the previously described styles are used to display
a point in a drawing:
Style
Point Group Over- The Object Style Collection (Settings Tree) (page 111)
ride Styles If the point belongs to more than one point group that specifies
override styles, the override styles specified by the highest point
group in the point group display order are used to draw the
point. For more information, see Changing the Point Group
Display Order (page 558).
Individual Point The Label Styles Collections (Settings Tree) (page 113)
Styles
Point Group Default Point File Formats Collection (Settings Tab) (page 526)
Styles
The _All Points Description Key Sets Collection (Settings Tree) (page 572)
group
NOTE All points belong to the _All Points point group. To display all the points in a drawing that use the same
style, specify an override style for the _All Points point group, and move it to the top of the point group display
order.
Layers
Use the point layer to control the appearance of a point in a drawing.
Specify a point layer for a point by setting its Layer property. Set the Layer property either during point
creation (using description key matching or the options in the Create Points dialog box) or after a point is
created (using the Point Editor or the Points list view).
If a point belongs to more than one point group, the highest point group controls the visibility of the point
in the point group display order.
A point can be displayed using the properties of a layer, such as visibility, color, line type, and line weight.
If an individual point style or point label style is used to display a point (as described earlier in this topic),
the ByBlock or ByLayer specifications in the point style or point label style refer to the layer that is assigned
to the point.
Printing Points
The Copy To Clipboard command lets you copy a list of drawing or project points to another application
for printing.
To print a list of points in a drawing or project, click the drawing or project Prospector tree collection to
display the points in a list view. Right-click the list view and select Copy To Clipboard to copy the list view
into a file you can print. For information, see Copying Items from a List View (page 103).
2 In the list view, select the points you want to zoom or pan to. For more information, see Selecting Items
in a List View (page 100).
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Points collection ➤ right-click points in List View ➤ Zoom To, Pan To
Creating Points
You can use the Create Points dialog box to create points using a variety of methods.
For standardization, you can use a drawing template that contains point settings, point styles, and point
label styles.
In the Create Points dialog box, choose commands from the following lists:
■ Miscellaneous
■ Intersection
■ Alignments
■ Surface
■ Interpolate
■ Slope
■ Import Points
You can expand the Create Points dialog box to access the settings that are relevant to point creation. If you
change the settings in this dialog box the changes are reflected in the CreatePoints command settings. For
more information, see Edit Feature Settings - Point Dialog Box (page 2343).
You can also use the Civil transparent commands in combination with the Create Points Manual command
to create points using known information such as angle and distance. For more information about the Civil
transparent commands, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
You can use description key substitution while creating drawing points to automatically assign point style,
point label style, layer, full description, and scale and rotation of the point symbol. For more information,
see Understanding Description Keys (page 571).
■ When creating drawing points, work in a drawing based on a template which contains the point settings,
point styles, point label styles, and description keys you want to use when creating the point. For more
information, see Drawing Templates (page 127).
■ Plan how you will control the point style and point label style used to draw points in a drawing. You
can set the point styles at the point group level, or at the point level, and automatically assign this
method of style selection during point creation. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance
of Points in a Drawing (page 454).
■ If you plan to use description keys to assign styles, layers, and other information when creating drawing
points, make sure that the description keys are present in the drawing before you create the points. For
more information, see Understanding Description Keys (page 571).
■ Specify settings that control, among other things, how you are prompted during the point creation
commands and how the created points are numbered. For more information, see Editing the Default
Point Creation Settings (page 444).
NOTE If prompted for an elevation or description and you want to create a point without these, enter a period
(.) at the prompt.
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points Menu ➤ Create Points - Miscellaneous ➤ Manual
.
NOTE You can also use transparent commands to specify point locations within a larger operation, such as
the creation of an alignment or a parcel lot line. Using transparent commands, you can calculate the location
for a point from information such as angle and distance, or from point object information, such as a point
number. For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
3 Specify the location for the point in the drawing. For more information, see Specifying Locations in a
Drawing (page 133).
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Miscellaneous ➤ Manual
Menu
NOTE To list the geodetic direction and distance, use the Point Inverse inquiry type. For more information, see
Using the Inquiry Tool (page 1806).
Point settings, styles, layers, point groups, and description keys can all affect how a point is created or how
it is displayed in a drawing. For more information, see Before You Create Points (page 457).
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
3 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Miscellaneous ➤ Geodetic
Direct .
5 Enter the geodetic azimuth from the point you previously specified to the location where you want to
create the point.
6 Enter the geodesic distance, which is the distance measured from the point you previously specified,
to the location where you want to create the point.
NOTE The options for labeling both the grid and geodetic distance and direction are available in the General
Line Label Styles.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Miscellaneous ➤ Geodetic Direct
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Miscellaneous ➤ Resection
.
3 Specify the first point, which is the backsight (or reference) point.
6 Enter the angle between the first point and the second point.
7 Enter the angle between the first point and the third point.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Miscellaneous ➤ Resection
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Miscellaneous ➤ Station/Offset
Object .
5 Enter the station at which you want to create the point or press Enter to accept the default.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Miscellaneous ➤ Station/Offset
Object
Menu
To create a point where lines cross each other, use the Create Points Manual command.
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Miscellaneous ➤ Automatic
.
3 Select objects. You can select lines, feature lines, lot lines, and arcs.
5 For each point, if prompted, enter the point name, description, and elevation.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Miscellaneous ➤ Automatic
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Miscellaneous ➤ Along
Line/Curve .
■ Press Enter, select another object, and follow the prompts as previously described.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Miscellaneous ➤ Along Line/Curve
Menu
When you create points using this command, you work with one object at a time. After points have been
added using a selected object, you can select another object and add points using that object. If the objects
you select and the options you specify while using the command would result in the creation of duplicate
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Miscellaneous ➤ On Line/Curve
.
5 For each point, if prompted, enter the point name, description, and elevation.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Miscellaneous ➤ On Line/Curve
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Miscellaneous ➤ Divide Object
.
6 For each point, if prompted, enter the point name, description, and elevation.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Miscellaneous ➤ Divide Object
Menu
When you create points using this command, you work with one object at a time. After points have been
added using a selected object, you can select another object and add points using that object. If the objects
you select and the options you specify while using the command would result in the creation of duplicate
points, for example, at the shared endpoints of two lines, only a single point is added. Duplicate points are
not created.
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Miscellaneous ➤ Measure
Object .
8 For each point, if prompted, enter the point name, description, and elevation.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Miscellaneous ➤ Measure Object
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Miscellaneous ➤ Polyline
Vertices - Manual .
4 Select a polyline.
Points are placed at the vertices of the polyline at the specified elevation.
5 For each point, if prompted, enter the point name and description.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Miscellaneous ➤ Polyline Vertices
- Manual
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Miscellaneous ➤ Polyline
Vertices - Automatic .
3 Select a polyline.
Points are placed at the vertices of the polyline.
4 For each point, if prompted, enter the point name and description.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Miscellaneous ➤ Polyline Vertices
- Automatic
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points -
Intersections ➤ Direction/Direction .
4 Specify the direction from the start point by doing one of the following:
■ Pick a point in the drawing.
8 Enter an elevation for the point, or press Enter to skip the elevation.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Intersections ➤ Direction/Direction
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points -
Intersections ➤ Distance/Distance .
7 Enter an elevation for the point, or press Enter to skip the elevation.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Intersections ➤ Distance/Distance
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points -
Intersections ➤ Direction/Distance .
6 Specify the direction from the start point by doing one of the following:
■ Pick a point in the drawing.
In the drawing, an X marks each intersection point. If only one intersection is located then the point
is automatically created.
10 Enter an elevation for the point, or press Enter to skip the elevation.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Intersections ➤ Direction/Distance
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
4 Specify the direction from the start point by doing one of the following:
■ Pick a point in the drawing.
8 Enter an elevation for the point, or press Enter to skip the elevation.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points -
Intersections ➤ Direction/Perpendicular
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points -
Intersections ➤ Distance/Perpendicular .
6 Enter an elevation for the point, or press Enter to skip the elevation.
8 NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance
of Points in a Drawing (page 454).
10 Enter an elevation for the point, or press Enter to skip the elevation.
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points -
Intersections ➤ Distance/Perpendicular
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points Menu ➤ Create Points - Intersections ➤ Direction/Object
.
3 Select an object.
6 Specify the direction from the start point by doing one of the following:
■ Pick a point in the drawing.
9 Enter an elevation for the point, or press Enter to skip the elevation.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Intersections ➤ Direction/Object
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Intersections ➤ Distance/Object
.
3 Select an object.
In the drawing, an X marks each intersection point. If only one intersection is located then the point
is automatically created.
9 Enter an elevation for the point, or press Enter to skip the elevation.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Intersections ➤ Distance/Object
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points -
Intersections ➤ Object/Object .
3 Select an object.
In the drawing, an X marks each intersection point. If only one intersection is located then the point
is automatically created.
9 Enter an elevation for the point, or press Enter to skip the elevation.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Intersections ➤ Object/Object
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Intersections ➤ Perpendicular
3 Select an object.
6 Enter an elevation for the point, or press Enter to skip the elevation.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Intersections ➤ Perpendicular
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points -
Intersections ➤ Direction/Alignment .
6 Specify the direction from the start point by doing one of the following:
■ Pick a point in the drawing.
In the drawing, an X marks each intersection point. If only one intersection is located then the point
is automatically created.
10 Enter an elevation for the point, or press Enter to skip the elevation.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Intersections ➤ Direction/Alignment
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points Menu ➤ Create Points -
Intersections ➤ Distance/Alignment .
In the drawing, an X marks each intersection point. If only one intersection is located then the point
is automatically created.
9 Enter an elevation for the point, or press Enter to skip the elevation.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Intersections ➤ Distance/Alignment
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points Menu ➤ Create Points -
Intersections ➤ Object/Alignment .
5 Select an object.
In the drawing, an X marks each intersection point. If only one intersection is located then the point
is automatically created.
9 Enter an elevation for the point, or press Enter to skip the elevation.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Intersections ➤ Object/Alignment
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
In the drawing, an X marks each intersection point. If only one intersection is located then the point
is automatically created.
9 Enter an elevation for the point, or press Enter to skip the elevation.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points -
Intersections ➤ Alignment/Alignment
Menu
1 Choose default settings, style, layers, point group, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points -
Alignments ➤ Station/Offset .
3 Select an alignment.
NOTE If the selected alignment has associated profiles, the Select a Profile dialog box displays. You can select
a profile from the list and the elevations for the points you create will be set from that profile. If there is no
profile section for a station on the alignment, or if you select <none>, the point elevation will be set according
to the Points Creation settings in the Create Points dialog box.
4 Enter the station number from which you want to offset a point. Do not include the station plus (+)
sign.
5 Enter the offset. If you have selected a profile, the offset value for the profile displays as the default.
6 If prompted, enter the name, description, and elevation for the point.
NOTE If you want the point description to be taken from the object, specify Automatic - Object in the
Prompt For Descriptions section of the Points Creation settings. The alignment name and station display in
the Raw Description column in the Point Editor.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Alignments ➤ Station/Offset
Menu
Point settings, styles, layers, point groups, and description keys can all affect how a point is created or how
it is displayed in the drawing. For more information, see Before You Create Points (page 457).
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Alignments ➤ Divide Alignment
.
NOTE If the selected alignment has associated profiles, the Select a Profile dialog box displays. You can select
a profile from the list and the elevations for the points you create will be set from that profile. If there is no
profile section for a station on the alignment, or if you select <none>, the point elevation will be set according
to the Points Creation settings in the Create Points dialog box.
4 Enter the number of segments into which you want to divide the selected alignment.
The command calculates the distances between points by dividing the total length of the alignment
by the number of segments specified.
5 Enter the offset. If you have selected a profile, the offset value for the profile displays as the default.
A series of equally spaced points are placed along the alignment at the specified offset.
6 If prompted, for each point, enter a point name, description, and elevation.
NOTE If you want the point description to be taken from the object, specify Automatic - Object in the
Prompt For Descriptions section of the Points Creation settings. The alignment name and station display in
the Raw Description column in the Point Editor.
TIP Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Alignments ➤ Divide Alignment
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Alignments ➤ Measure
Alignment .
3 Select an alignment.
NOTE If the selected alignment has associated profiles, the Select a Profile dialog box displays. You can select
a profile from the list and the elevations for the points you create will be set from that profile. If there is no
profile section for a station on the alignment, or if you select <none>, the point elevation will be set according
to the Points Creation settings in the Create Points dialog box.
6 Enter the offset. If you have selected a profile, the offset value for the profile displays as the default.
8 If prompted, for each point, enter a point name, description, and elevation.
NOTE If you want the point description to be taken from the object, specify Automatic - Object in the
Prompt For Descriptions section of the Points Creation settings. The alignment name and station display in
the Raw Description column in the Point Editor.
TIP Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Alignments ➤ Measure Alignment
When creating points using this command, you are not prompted for a description if the Prompt For
Descriptions Points Creation setting is set to Automatic-Object. The raw and full description for the point
is automatically assigned based on the type of point created. The assigned description displays in the drawing
if the current point label style contains a raw description or a full description text component.
The following table describes alignment vertex labels that are created and the description that is assigned
based on the point type:
PI Point of Intersection
PT Point of Tangency
PC Point of Curvature
TS Tangent-Spiral intersection
CS Curve-Spiral intersection
ST Spiral-Tangent intersection
Point settings, styles, layers, point groups, and description keys can all affect how a point is created or how
it is displayed in the drawing. For more information, see Before You Create Points (page 457).
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Alignments ➤ At Alignment
Geometry .
3 Select an alignment.
NOTE If the selected alignment has associated profiles, the Select a Profile dialog box displays. You can select
a profile from the list and the elevations for the points you create will be set from that profile. If there is no
profile section for a station on the alignment, or if you select <none>, the point elevation will be set according
to the Points Creation settings in the Create Points dialog box.
NOTE If you want the point description to be taken from the object, specify Automatic - Object in the
Prompt For Descriptions section of the Points Creation settings. The alignment name and station display in
the Raw Description column in the Point Editor.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Alignments ➤ At Alignment
Geometry
Menu
Point settings, styles, layers, point groups, and description keys can all affect how a point is created or how
it is displayed in the drawing. For more information, see Before You Create Points (page 457).
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Alignments ➤ Radial Or
Perpendicular .
3 Select an alignment.
NOTE If the selected alignment has associated profiles, the Select a Profile dialog box displays. You can select
a profile from the list and the elevations for the points you create will be set from that profile. If there is no
profile section for a station on the alignment, or if you select <none>, the point elevation will be set according
to the Points Creation settings in the Create Points dialog box.
4 Specify a point.
NOTE If you want the point description to be taken from the object, specify Automatic - Object in the
Prompt For Descriptions section of the Points Creation settings. The alignment name and station display in
the Raw Description column in the Point Editor.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Alignments ➤ Radial Or
Perpendicular
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Alignments ➤ Profile
Geometry Points .
3 Select an alignment in the drawing, or if there is more than one alignment, select it from the list.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Alignments ➤ Profile
Geometry Points
Menu
■ Station, Offset
Use commas or spaces as delimiters (separators) in the file. Include one or more comment lines in the file
by putting a semi-colon (;) or a pound sign (#) in the first column of a comment line.
The following is an example of data in an ASCII (text) file that is formatted using the Station, Offset, Elevation
format:
#station, offset, elevation: subdivision 1
0 20.0 112.00
10 23.5 114.64
20 22.5 116.56
30 23.0 116.32
40 22.0 115.83
The first line in this example is a comment line that is ignored when the points are imported. Each of the
remaining lines contains the station, offset, and elevation for a point. The file is delimited by spaces.
Before you import the file, you are prompted to describe the format of the ASCII (text) file. You can also be
prompted to specify invalid indicator values for station/offsets, elevations, and rod heights.
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Alignments ➤ Import
From File .
3 In the Import Alignment Station And Offset File dialog box, browse to the folder containing the file.
Click the file name, and click Open.
4 Enter a number between 1 and 6 to specify the format that describes the layout of data in your file, as
follows:
■ 1: Station, Offset
7 Select an alignment.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Alignments ➤ Import From
File
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Surface ➤ Random Points
.
3 Select a surface.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Surface ➤ Random Points
Menu
Because this command creates points using elevations from a surface, the Prompt For Elevations setting,
specified in the Points Creation settings, does not affect how you are prompted during this command.
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Surface ➤ On Grid
.
3 Select a surface.
4 Specify the location of the grid base point, which is the lower left corner of the grid, by doing one of
the following:
■ Enter X and Y coordinates on the command line.
6 Specify the grid X spacing by entering a value or pressing Enter to accept the default value.
7 Specify the grid Y spacing by entering a value or pressing Enter to accept the default value.
8 Specify the location of the upper-right corner of the grid by clicking on the screen.
A single grid square and the outline of the entire grid are drawn on the screen.
■ To change the grid, enter Yes and re-enter the rotation angle, grid base point, grid X spacing, grid
Y spacing, and the upper right corner as previously described.
10 For each point, if prompted, enter the point name and description.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Surface ➤ On Grid
Menu
Creating Points Along a Polyline or Surface Contour Using Distance and Surface
Elevations
Creates points on a surface at specified distances along a polyline object or a surface contour.
Create points using elevations from the surface. The points are created along a polyline based on a specified
distance.
The Prompt For Elevations setting, specified in the Points Creation settings, does not affect how you are
prompted during this command.
Point settings, styles, layers, point groups, and description keys can all affect how a point is created or how
it is displayed in the drawing. For more information, see Before You Create Points (page 457).
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Surface ➤ Along
Polyline/Contour .
3 Select a surface.
5 Select the polyline or surface contour along which to place the points.
The points are placed along the polyline or surface contour at the specified interval.
6 If prompted, for each point, enter the point name and description.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Surface ➤ Along Polyline/Contour
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
3 Select a surface.
5 If prompted, for each point, enter the point name and description.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Surface ➤ Polyline/Contour
Vertices
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Interpolate ➤ Interpolate
.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Interpolate ➤ Interpolate
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points Menu ➤ Create Points - Interpolate ➤ By Relative
Location .
■ Enter E, and select an arc, line, feature line, lot line, or polyline. Specify the distance and the offset
distance by either entering the distance, picking a point, or using Transparent commands.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Interpolate ➤ By Relative Location
Menu
Point settings, styles, layers, point groups, and description keys can all affect how a point is created or how
it is displayed in the drawing. For more information, see Before You Create Points (page 457).
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Interpolate ➤ By Relative
Elevation .
■ Enter E, and select an arc, line, feature line, lot line, or polyline. Enter the elevation and then specify
the offset distance by either entering the distance, picking a point, or using Transparent commands.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Interpolate ➤ By Relative Elevation
Menu
Point settings, styles, layers, point groups, and description keys can all affect how a point is created or how
it is displayed in the drawing. For more information, see Before You Create Points (page 457).
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Interpolate ➤ Number By
Distance .
■ Enter E, and select an arc, line, feature line, lot line, or polyline. Enter the number of points and
then specify the offset distance by either entering the distance, picking a point, or using Transparent
commands.
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Interpolate ➤ Number By Distance
Menu
Point settings, styles, layers, point groups, and description keys can all affect how a point is created or how
it is displayed in the drawing. For more information, see Before You Create Points (page 457).
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Interpolate ➤ Perpendicular
.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Interpolate ➤ Perpendicular
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Interpolate ➤ Incremental
Distance .
■ Enter E, and select an arc, line, feature line, lot line, or polyline. Specify the distance between points,
and then specify the offset distance by either entering the distance, picking a point, or using
Transparent commands.
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Interpolate ➤ Incremental Distance
Menu
Point settings, styles, layers, point groups, and description keys can all affect how a point is created or how
it is displayed in the drawing. For more information, see Before You Create Points (page 457).
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Interpolate ➤ Incremental
Elevation .
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Interpolate ➤ Incremental Elevation
Menu
Point settings, styles, layers, point groups, and description keys can all affect how a point is created or how
it is displayed in the drawing. For more information, see Before You Create Points (page 457).
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
3 Specify the interpolation region for the first intersection by doing one of the following:
■ Pick a point in the drawing and enter an elevation for the first point. Specify the second point and
then either enter D to specify the difference in elevation between the two points, or enter S to specify
the slope from the first point to the second point.
■ Enter E, and select an arc, line, feature line, lot line, or polyline. Specify the offset distance by either
entering the distance, picking a point, or using Transparent commands.
5 In the drawing, an X marks each intersection point. If only one intersection is located then the point
is automatically created.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Interpolate ➤ Intersection
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Slope ➤ High/Low Point
.
5 Specify the slope from the first point to the second point by doing one of the following:
■ Enter a slope value.
■ Enter G, and then enter a grade value, or enter S and then enter a slope value.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Slope ➤ High/Low Point
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Slope ➤ Slope/Grade -
Distance .
5 Specify the slope from the first point by doing one of the following:
■ Enter a slope value.
■ Enter G, and then enter a grade value, or enter S and then enter a slope value.
6 Specify the distance along the slope/grade by doing one of the following:
■ Pick a point in the drawing.
7 Specify the number of intermediate points from the start along the specified direction and distance.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Slope ➤ Slope/Grade -
Distance
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Slope ➤ Slope/Grade -
Elevation .
5 Specify the slope from the first point by doing one of the following:
■ Enter a slope value.
■ Enter G, and then enter a grade value, or enter S and then enter a slope value.
6 Specify the elevation along the slope/grade by doing one of the following:
■ Pick a point in the drawing.
7 Specify the number of intermediate points from the start along the specified direction and distance.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Points - Slope ➤ Slope/Grade -
Elevation
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points Menu ➤ Create Points - Miscellaneous ➤ Manual
.
■ Press Esc to end the transparent command and return to the Create Points Manual command.
NOTE Many factors affect how the point is displayed. For more information, see Controlling the Appearance of
Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Editing Points
You can edit individual drawing points graphically (in the drawing), or you can use the Point Editor.
Change the properties of multiple drawing points using utilities that perform batch operations, such as
renumbering or changing elevation.
You cannot edit project points directly. To edit project points, you must check the points out to a drawing,
modify them, and then check them back in to the project. For a procedure for changing large numbers of
project points, see Modifying A Large Number of Project Points (page 523).
For more information about working with project and drawing points, see Managing Points (page 453).
In the drawing, select a point label and click to rotate the point label.
■ To include all the points in a point group in the Point Editor, right-click the point group.
■ To include selected points, click the Points collection. Select the points in the list view and right-click.
The Point Editor is opened. If you cannot see the Point Editor, click at the top of the Prospector tab
to display the Panorama window.
3 Use the Point Editor (page 2370) to edit or view the points.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
For information about the access control items on the menu, see Working with Vault Project Points (page
187).
1 Open the Point Editor so that it lists the point you want to delete. For more information, see Listing
Points in the Point Editor (page 518).
NOTE You can also use the AutoCAD ERASE command to delete a point.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
2 On the Design tab expand the AutoCAD Civil 3D section to display the point properties for Display,
Information, Coordinate, and Labeling.
3 To change a property, click in the cell and enter a new value or select a value from the list.
Display
Point Style Modify the style for the point object. If the
point object does not have an assigned
style <default> is displayed, indicating the
point group label style is being used to
draw the point label.
Information
Coordinate
Point Elevation Modify the Easting value for the point ob-
ject.
Labeling
Point Label Style Modify the style for the point object label
style. If the point object does not have an
assigned style <default> is displayed, indic-
ating the point group label style is being
used to draw the point label.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, click the Points collection to display the Points list view.
4 In response to the prompt, specify a change in elevation by doing one of the following:
■ Enter a change in elevation. To specify a decrease in the elevation, use a minus sign (-) before the
value.
■ Enter R, for reference, then enter the old and new datum elevations. The points will be modified by
the differences between the two values.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, click the Points collection to display the Points list view, or right-click
a Points collection and select Edit Points to display the Point Editor.
3 Select a surface from the list and click OK. If you selected the command from the list view or the Point
Editor, the Point Elevation column reflects the elevation from the surface. If you selected the command
from the Points menu, you are prompted at the command line to select one of the following:
■ All: to select all points in the current drawing to move elevations to the selected surface.
■ Group: displays the Point Groups dialog box where you can select a point group.
Prospector tab: Points collection ➤ right-click points in List View ➤ Elevations From Surface
Renumbering Points
Use the Renumber command to assign new point numbers to selected drawing points.
This command adds an integer value to the point number of each selected point.
You may be prompted to resolve any numbering conflicts that arise when the renumbering occurs.
To renumber project points, check the points out of the project into a drawing, renumber them using the
Renumber command, and then check them back in to the project.
To renumber points
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, click the Points collection to display the Points list view.
2 In the list view, select the desired points. For more information, see Selecting Items in a List View (page
100).
4 Enter the value to be added to the point number of the selected points.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
2 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, under the Point Styles collection, right-click the Standard ➤ Edit.
3 On the Display tab, to turn off the display of point symbols, click in the Visible column for Marker so
that the light bulb icon is not available.
4 To turn off the display of point labels, click in the Visible column for Label so that the light bulb icon
is not available.
5 Click OK.
6 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, under the Point Groups collection, right-click the _All Points ➤
Properties.
7 In the Point Group Properties dialog box, on the Overrides tab (page 2353), in the Overrides column,
select the Standard point style. In the Properties column, select the check box next to Point Style.
8 In the Overrides column, select the Standard point label style. In the Properties column, select the check
box next to Point Label Style.
9 Click OK.
10 If the drawing has more than one point group, move the _All Points point group to the top of the point
group display order. For more information, see Changing the Point Group Display Order (page 558).
NOTE To quickly check out all the project points, right-click the _All Points point group in the drawing and
select Check Out Points.
12 In the drawing, edit the points using either a point utility, the Point Editor, or the Prospector Points
list view.
NOTE For information about changing a point property such as elevation to the same value for every point
in the Point Editor or the Points list view, see Changing the Contents of a Column in a List View (page 102).
13 Check the points in to the project. Do not keep them checked out to the drawing.
NOTE To quickly select all the points in the drawing for checking in, right-click the _All Points point group
and select Check In Points.
■ Import points into a drawing from either an ASCII (text) file or a Microsoft® Access database (.mdb) file.
■ Export points from a drawing to either an ASCII (text) file or a Microsoft® Access database file.
■ Transfer points from an ASCII (text) file or a Microsoft® Access database file to another file. You can
convert the point data during the transfer, which can include changing the coordinate zone.
Importing points is a quick way to place points into a drawing. For example, if a surveyor collects point data
using a data collector, the data can be downloaded from the collector as an ASCII (text) file and then imported
into an AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing.
Before you can import, export, or transfer point data, you must specify a point file format for each file that
point data is read from or written to. The point file format describes how the point data is stored in the file.
You can use the point file formats that are supplied with AutoCAD Civil 3D or create your own formats.
■ User Point File Format. This point file format type describes how the point data is arranged in an ASCII
(text) file.
■ User Point Database Format. This point file format type describes how point data is arranged in a
Microsoft® Access database file.
Use the point file formats that are supplied with AutoCAD Civil 3D or create your own formats. The point
file formats available in a drawing are listed in the Toolspace Settings tree.
You can also list available point file formats by clicking the Point File Formats collection to display a list
view. For more information, see The Toolspace Item View (page 99).
■ comment tag
■ transformation information
■ column names that describe the layout of the point data in the associated point data file
The dialog box you use to view and change the properties of a point file format depends on whether the
format is a user point file format or a user point database format. For more information about the dialog
box used to view and change the properties of a point file format, see Point File Format Dialog Box (page
2360). For more information about the dialog box used to view and change the properties of a user point
database format, see User Point Database Format Dialog Box (page 2361).
For information about creating a new point file format, see Creating Point File Formats (page 529).
Specify the contents of the first column in the point data file by clicking the first column heading and
specifying a point property, for example, Easting, in the Point File Formats - Select Column Name dialog
box. The first column heading is updated to reflect the specified column name:
Specify the contents of the second column in the point data file by clicking the second column heading in
the dialog box and specifying another point property, for example, Northing:
Continue to specify column headings until the point file format column names reflect the layout of the
point data file.
Some point file format columns can be used to perform calculations when they are included in the format.
For more information, see Using Point File Format Properties to Perform Calculations (page 528).
Columnated
Use the Columnated option to separate values in the point data file by tabs. When you import the file, the
data in the file is assumed to be arranged in columns and rows. Each row contains the data for a single point,
and the individual values in the row are separated by tabs. When you export points or transfer data, the
values in the resulting file are arranged in columns and separated by tabs, with one point per row.
For example, if your format column names are Number, Northing, Easting, and Elevation, the contents of
your point data file might appear as follows:
Delimited
The Delimited By option separates the values in the point data file by a delimiter, such as a comma or a
space. When you import the file, each row in the file is assumed to contain data for a single point, with the
individual values separated by the specified delimiter. When you export points or transfer data, the values
in the resulting file are written to the file, one point per row, with the individual values separated by the
specified delimiter.
For example, if your format column names are Number, Raw Description, Northing, Easting, and Elevation,
and you specified a comma (,) for a delimiter, the contents of your point data file might appear as follows:
101,MONA,300,500,0
102,MONB,302,499,0
103,MONA,303,501,0
■ Thickness: Include this column name in the format if your data includes surface thickness values, such
as the thickness of a layer of topsoil or clay. The value in the Thickness column can be subtracted from
the value in the Elevation column when points are imported or transferred.
■ Z+: Include this column name in the format to define a column for point data that was taken at a height
above the datum elevation. The value in the Z+ column can be added to the value in the Elevation
column when the points are imported or transferred.
■ Z-: Include this column name to adjust the elevation of a point in a file. The value in the Z- column for
a point can be subtracted from the value in the Elevation column when the points are imported or
transferred.
The values specified for Thickness, Z+, or Z- in the point data file are not automatically used to adjust the
elevation during import or export. Select the Do Elevation Adjustment If Possible option when importing
points when you want elevation adjustments to occur.
■ A series of column names that describe both the point information stored in the point data file and the
order in which the point information is stored.
■ The coordinate zone in which the point data was created. This information is optional, but if you include
it, you can automatically perform a coordinate transformation of the point data if you import it into a
drawing that uses a different coordinate zone, or if you transfer the points from one file to another.
NOTE If you are importing point data from and ASCII file that contains user defined columns, you must create a
user defined classification for each column. For more information, see Importing Point Data from an ASCII File
Containing User Defined Columns.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the Point File Formats ➤ New.
2 In the Point File Formats - Select Format Type (page 2360) dialog box, click User Point File. Click OK.
3 In the Point File Format (page 2360) dialog box, specify a name and file extension for the format.
4 Click Load to load a point data file so that you can refer to it as you create the format.
NOTE At any time, you can click the Parse button and the loaded file is displayed in the dialog box using
the format you are building.
8 In the Point File Formats - Select Column Name (page 2362) dialog box, select a column name from the
Column Name list. Specify other parameters as needed, and click OK.
9 Repeat the previous step for each column in the point file format.
10 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the Point File Formats ➤ New.
2 In the Point File Formats - Select Format Type (page 2360) dialog box, click User Point Database and click
OK.
3 In the User Point Database Format (page 2361) dialog box, specify a name for the format.
4 Click Load to load the Microsoft® Access file that you want the new format to match, so that you can
refer to it as you create the format.
8 In the Point File Formats - Select Column Name (page 2362) dialog box, select a column name from the
Column Name list. Specify other parameters as needed, and click OK.
9 Repeat the previous step for each column in the user point database format.
10 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Point File Formats collection.
2 Right-click the point file format you want to copy. Click Copy.
■ If the format you copied was a user point database format, use the User Point Database Format (page
2361) dialog box to change the format properties.
3D supplies. A point file format that cannot be changed or deleted has a displayed to the left of its name
in the Prospector tree.
A point file format cannot be changed if is displayed to the left of its name in the Prospector tree.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Point File Formats collection.
■ If the format is a user point database format, use the User Point Database Format (page 2361) dialog
box.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
If a point file format cannot be deleted, is displayed to the left of its name in the Prospector tree.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Point File Formats collection.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
IMPORTANT The highest point number allowed in Civil 3D is 4,294,967,295. You can use point names or User
Defined Properties to reference numbers greater than 4,294,967,295. For more information, see Using Custom
Properties with Points (page 445).
For more information, see Understanding Point File Formats (page 525) and Creating Point File Formats (page
529).
You can add the imported points to a point group, make adjustments to the data as it is imported, including
elevation adjustments, coordinate transformation, or coordinate data expansion, encounter how the imported
points are numbered as they are created.
1 Specify the Point Identity settings, which control the point numbers of the created points. For more
information, see Editing the Point Identity Settings (page 442).
2 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Point Creation Tools .
3 On the Create Points (page 2357) toolbar, click the Import Points button.
4 In the Import Points (page 2364) dialog box, specify the point file format that describes the layout of the
data in the point data file you are importing.
5 In the Import Points (page 2364) dialog box, click , and select the point data file you want to import.
NOTE To migrate points from Autodesk Land Desktop, select External Project Point Database as the format
type and select the Autodesk Land Desktop point database .mdb file as the source file.
6 Optionally, specify a point group to which the imported points are added.
7 Optionally, specify advanced options for elevation adjustment, coordinate transformation, or coordinate
data expansion.
Importing Point Data from an ASCII File Containing User Defined Columns
Before you import point data from an ASCII (text) file that contains user-defined columns you must create
a User-Defined Property Classification.
To import point data from and ASCII file that contains user-defined columns
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab expand the Point collection ➤ right-click User-Defined Property
Classification ➤ New. For more information, see Creating a User-Defined Property Classification (page
446).
2 Right-click the classification that you created in the previous step and click New to create a new
user-defined property. For more information, see Creating a User-Defined Property (page 446).
3 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab expand the Points collection and click Point File Formats ➤ New.
4 Select User Point File in the Point File Formats - Select Format Type dialog box and click OK.
5 Create the new point file format. For more information, see Creating Point File Formats (page 529).
6 To specify the user-defined columns, click an <unused> column heading to display the Point File Formats
- Select Column Name dialog box.
7 In the Column list, select the user-defined property you created in step two.
8 On the Prospector tab click Points ➤ Create ➤ Import Points. Select the ASCII file you wish to import
and select the Point File Format you defined in step five.
1 Create a point file format that describes the layout of the exported data file. For more information, see
Creating Point File Formats (page 529).
■ Click Output tab ➤ Export panel ➤ Export Points to export all the points in a drawing.
■ In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Point Groups collection. Right-click the point group
name ➤ Export Points to export only the points in a point group.
3 In the Export Points (page 2366) dialog box, in the Format list, select the point file format that describes
how you want the exported point data to be arranged in the point data file.
4 Click to specify the file to which you want to export the data.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 Create point file formats for the files you want to transfer points between. For more information, see
Creating Point File Formats (page 529).
3 In the Transfer Points (page 2367) dialog box, under Source, specify the format and file name, including
the path, for the Source file.
4 Under Destination, specify the format and file name, including the path, for the Destination file.
5 To create a new point file format or change an existing one, click Manage.
7 Click OK to transfer the point data from the source file to the destination file.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 Create a copy of the External Project Point Database format. For more information, see Creating a Point
File Format Based on an Existing Format (page 531).
2 Change the coordinate zone of the new format so that it matches the coordinate zone of the current
drawing. For more information, see Changing a Point File Format (page 532).
3 Export the points in the drawing using the new format. For more information, see Exporting Point Data
(page 534).
4 Change the current drawing coordinate zone to the zone you want the points to be converted to.
5 Import the points into the drawing. For more information, see Importing Point Data (page 533).
■ Substitute point elevation data when points are accessed through a point group.
To link these custom point databases to AutoCAD Civil 3D, create External Data References (XDRefs). For
more information, see Creating an External Data Reference (page 539). An XDRef is a pointer to an entire
column of data in a custom Microsoft Access database. All of the database entries must have a point number.
Then, when you use an XDRef to get a value for a point, the point number is looked up in the custom
database, and the value from the specified column is used instead of the original point value that is stored
in the drawing.
XDRefs do not overwrite or alter the points in the drawing. Use the External Data Reference collection on
the Settings tree in Toolspace to create and manage XDRefs.
■ There must be a Long Integer field index column, which contains the point numbers, in each table in
the database that can be used as an XDREF.
■ Currently, only Integer, Long Integer, Single, Double, and Text type fields are supported.
■ Any number of Tables can be defined in this database, but any that are referenced by XDRefs must have
an index column defined.
■ Any number of additional Text or Number columns may also be defined in this database table. There
are no restrictions on the names and order of the columns after the index column.
■ XDRefs are stored on the Settings tab in Toolspace under the Point collection.
3 In the File New Database dialog box, use the Save In list to locate a folder for future use.
6 On the Table tab, click New to open the New Table dialog box.
9 In the first table cell in the Field Name column, enter a name for the Index Column.
10 In the first table cell in the Data Type column, select Number.
11 In the lower part of the dialog box, verify the following information:
■ Long Integer is the Field Size
15 In the first table cell in the Field Name column, enter the name of the Index Column.
16 In the first table cell in the Sort Order column, select either Ascending or Descending.
17 In the lower part of the dialog box, change the following settings:
■ Primary field must be Yes.
21 In the Table dialog box, enter point information such as point numbers, elevations, and descriptions.
4 Optionally, if the database is password protected, enter the password to access the database.
7 Click OK. The new external data reference is listed in the External Data Reference folder under Points
in Toolspace.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
4 Select new values for the Table type, Index Column, and Value Column.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Point Utilities
you can use these commands to view and zoom to points in the project, to draw project extents, as well as
to create BLOCKS from COGO points and to export points.
Quick Reference
Menu
Quick Reference
Menu
Quick Reference
Menu
■ Click COGO Points contextual tab ➤ COGO Point Tools ➤ List Available Point Numbers.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
COGO Points contextual tab ➤ COGO Point Tools ➤ List Available Point Numbers
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Replace Softdesk Point Blocks .
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Replace Softdesk Point Blocks
Menu
1 Select settings and create styles, layers, point groups, and description keys. For more information, see
Before You Create Points (page 457).
2 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Convert AutoCAD Points .
4 For each point, if prompted, enter the point name and description.
NOTE If you do not want to be prompted for a description for each point, in the Points Creation section of
the Edit Point Settings dialog box set the Prompt for Descriptions Property to None. You can also use this
procedure when you want to disable Prompt for Point Names and Prompt for Elevation.
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Convert AutoCAD Points
Menu
1 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Blocks From COGO Points .
3 Under Selected Point Groups, click and specify the point groups you want included in the block.
NOTE You can select the points to include in the block using both the Spatial Filter and Point Group options.
For example, under Spatial Filter you could select the Current Display and under Point Groups you could also
include a specified point group.
4 In the Block Output section, under Block Creation, click either Use Existing Block or Make New Block.
If you select Make New Block, enter a name.
NOTE The option Use Existing Block is only available if the block contains at least three attribute definitions
with the exact names ELEV, POINT, and DESC. If there are no blocks in the drawing with these exact attribute
definitions, this option is not available. Then you must use the Make New Block option.
5 Under Block Layer, specify the layer on which you want to create the block.
NOTE The COGO points are not deleted when the blocks are created.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Blocks From COGO Points
Menu
1 Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Convert Land Desktop Points to display the
Convert Autodesk Land Desktop Points dialog box.
2 Configure point setting parameters by expanding the parameter, selecting a setting, then specifying a
new value in the Value column.
3 To assign the Land Desktop points to a point group, select Add Points To Point Group, then choose a
point group from the list or create a new point group. If you create a new point group, it is added to
the Add Points To Point Group list.
4 To keep the existing layers referenced by the Land Desktop points, select Preserve Original Point Layer.
NOTE When this check box is checked, the existing layer of the Land Desktop point is assigned to the
AutoCAD Civil 3D point when it is converted. If the Points Creation\Disable Description Keys setting is set
to False, and the Land Desktop point matches a description key, the original point layer will still be preserved.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Convert Land Desktop Points
Menu
NOTE You can run other commands while the Geodetic Calculator is active.
2 In the Geodetic Calculator (page 2373) dialog box, specify starting information by doing one of the
following:
■ In the Value column of the Geodetic Calculator, enter a set of coordinate values, either Latitude
and Longitude, Grid Northing and Grid Easting, or Local Northing and Local Easting.
3 Optionally, click to create a point with the values for the Local coordinates you entered or calculated.
You are prompted at the command line to enter a point description and elevation.
4 To perform additional calculations, enter a value for a coordinate field, such as Local Northing.
5 After you enter the value, click the Value column for another coordinate field, such as Grid Easting.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click a point in the drawing Analyze tab ➤ ➤ COGO points tab ➤ Geodetic Calculator
Menu
Command Description
553
You can create a point group either before or after you create the points that belong to it. The point list is
maintained dynamically, which means you are notified whenever a change occurs that could affect the
point list. For more information, see Out-of-Date Point Groups (page 556).
■ View information about out-of-date point groups before updating them. (page 556)
Expand the Point Groups collection to display a list of the point groups in the drawing. Right-click a point
group to do the following:
■ Lock or unlock the points in the point group’s point list. (page 560)
■ List the changes required to update the point group if it is out-of-date. (page 556)
■ It provides a default display for points that are created without a point style or point label style and do
not belong to any other point group. The appearance of a point in the drawing can be controlled both
by the point groups it belongs to and the order in which the point groups are displayed. For more
information, see Controlling the Appearance of Points in a Drawing (page 454).
Because the _All Points point group point list is automatically managed, you cannot change the point group
properties using the Point Groups, Raw Desc Matching, Include, Exclude, and Query Builder tabs in the
Point Group Properties dialog box. You can, however, change properties, such as styles and overrides using
the Information tab and the Overrides tab.
■ raw description
■ elevation
■ point style
The point group display order can affect the override values displayed in labels for raw description and
elevation. It can also affect the point style and point label style that can be used to display a point in a
drawing. For more information, see Changing the Point Group Display Order (page 558).
To specify a raw description override, click and enter a value or click and select or create an external
data reference. For more information, see Using External Data References (page 537). To stop using the
override, clear the check box.
Elevation Override
To specify an elevation override, click and enter a value or click and select or create an external data
reference. For more information, see Using External Data References (page 537). To stop using the override,
clear the check box.
To specify a User-Defined Property override, click and cycle through and select . Click in the row
and select a user-defined property from the list. For more information, see Assigning User-Defined Properties
to Point Groups (page 447). To stop using the override, clear the check box.
Use the Prospector tree to list the point groups in a drawing. An out-of-date point group has next to
it in the Prospector tree, in the point group list view, and in the Point Group dialog box. When a point
group is out-of-date, the points in the point list no longer match the criteria specified on the tabs in the
Point Group Properties dialog box.
NOTE Out-of-date icons are displayed only if the Toolspace tree modifier icon display is active. For more information,
see Drawing Item Modifier Icons (page 161).
A point group’s point list may be out-of-date when one or more of the following occurs:
■ You changed a point property (such as raw description or elevation) of a point belonging to the point
group, so that the point no longer meets the criteria for being included in the point group.
■ You created new points that match the point group’s properties.
For information about updating out-of-date point groups, see Updating All Out-of-Date Point Groups (page
557) and Updating a Single Out-of-Date Point Group (page 558).
An out-of-date point group has next to it in the Prospector tree, the point group list view, or the Point
Group dialog box.
NOTE Out-of-date icons are displayed only if the Toolspace tree modifier icon display is active. For more information,
see Drawing Item Modifier Icons (page 161).
Before you update the point groups, you can use the Point Groups dialog box to view a list of the points
that must be added to or removed from the out-of-date point groups to bring them up to date.
1 Click COGO Point tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Point Group List .
The Point Groups dialog box is displayed. Point groups marked with are out-of-date.
2 In the Point Groups (page 2358) dialog box, click to display information about the out-of-date point
groups.
3 In the Point Group Changes (page 2359) dialog box, click to update all out-of-date point groups.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click COGO Point tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Point Group List
Menu
NOTE Out-of-date icons are displayed only if the Toolspace tree modifier icon display is active. For more information,
see Drawing Item Modifier Icons (page 161).
A point group is out-of-date when the points in the point list do not match the point group’s properties.
For more information, see Out-of-Date Point Groups (page 556).
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click a point group that is out-of-date. Click Show Changes.
The Point Group Changes (page 2359) dialog box displays a list of the changes required to bring the point
group up to date.
TIP If you do not want to review the changes required to bring the point group up to date, click Update on
the shortcut menu instead of Show Changes.
3 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click the Point Groups collection. Click Properties.
2 In the Point Groups (page 2358) dialog box, select the point group you want to move in the display order.
3 Hover your cursor over the arrow icons. The arrows give you options to move the point group up or
down one place in the display order, or to the top or bottom of the display order.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Menu
A locked point group has next to it in the Prospector tree and the point group list view. The icon is
displayed only if the Toolspace tree drawing state icons are displayed. For more information, see Drawing
Item State Icons (page 161).
Locking a point group does not lock the points in the point list. You can lock points individually in the
Prospector list view, or you can lock all the points in the point group list at the same time using a single
command. For more information, see Locking and Unlocking Point Lists (page 560).
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click the point group you want to lock or unlock.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
A locked point cannot have its properties changed in the drawing. A locked point has next to it in point
lists such as the Prospector tab Points list view. The icon is displayed only if the Toolspace tree drawing state
icons are displayed. For more information, see Drawing Item State Icons (page 161).
Use a single command to lock or unlock all the points in a point group’s point list.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click the point group whose point list you want to lock or
unlock.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Prospector tab: right-click Point Groups item ➤ Lock Points or Unlock Points
1 In Toolspace, on Prospector tab, right-click the point group you want to change. Click Properties.
2 In the Point Group Properties dialog box, click the Query Builder (page 2351) tab.
3 To enable or disable case-sensitive matching for raw and full descriptions, select or clear Use
Case-Sensitive Matching.
4 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: right-click Point Group item ➤ Properties ➤ Query Builder tab
Command Line
ShowPointGroupProperties
Dialog Box
Query Builder Tab (Point Group Properties) (page 2351)
IMPORTANT The highest point number allowed in Civil 3D is 4,294,967,295. You can use point names or User
Defined Properties to reference numbers greater than 4,294,967,295. For more information, see Using Custom
Properties with Points (page 445).
Use the tabs on the Point Group Properties dialog box to define the properties of a point group. The tabs
you use depend on which method you use to define a point group:
■ The Basic Method. Use this method to easily define the properties for many point groups. Use the Point
Groups, Raw Desc Matching, Include, and the Exclude tabs of the Point Group Properties dialog box.
■ The Query Builder Method. Use this advanced method to create point groups by combining expressions,
which allows you to use a single tab, the Query Builder tab, to build a point group based on combinations
of point properties or point groups. When you create a point group using the query builder method, the
Point Groups, Raw Desc Matching, Include, and Exclude tabs are not available.
NOTE You should understand how to create a point group using the basic method before using the query builder.
After you create a point group, do not try to interchange the two methods to make changes to a point group.
You can create a point group using the basic method and then change the point group properties using the
Query Builder tab. However, you will lose the changes you made on the Query Builder tab if you then change
the point group using the Point Groups tab, the Raw Desc Matching tab, the Include tab, or the Exclude
tab.
You can always access the Information tab, the Overrides tab, the Point List tab, and the Summary tab
regardless of the method used to define or change the point group’s properties.
Because the list of points that belong to a point group (the point list) is updated dynamically, you can create
point groups either before or after you create points in the drawing. If you create the points first, and then
create the point group, the point list of the newly created point group is immediately updated with the
existing points that match the criteria for inclusion in the point group. If you create a point group before
you create points that qualify for inclusion in the point group, the point group is marked as out-of-date on
the Prospector tab as points are created. You can easily update the point list to include the new points. For
more information, see Out-of-Date Point Groups (page 556).
Also, you can create a point group when you import points. In the Import Points dialog box, specify the
name of the point group to be created.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Point Group .
2 In the Point Group Properties dialog box, on the Information (page 2348) tab, enter a name, description,
default styles, and a layer for the point group.
3 To include points from other point groups, click the Point Groups (page 2348) tab and select the check
box next to any point group you want to include.
4 To include points using raw descriptions, click the Raw Desc Matching (page 2349) tab and select the
check box next to the raw descriptions you want to match.
All points in the drawing are searched, and points with a raw description that matches a raw description
specified on the tab are included in the point group.
5 To specify criteria that explicitly includes points in the point group, click the Include (page 2349) tab and
define the criteria that a point must match to be included in the point group.
6 To specify criteria that explicitly excludes points from the point group, click the Exclude (page 2350) tab
and define the criteria that a point must match to be excluded from the point group.
8 To view the points in the point group’s point list, click the Point List (page 2354) tab.
9 To view a summary of the point group’s properties, click the Summary (page 2354) tab.
10 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Point Group
Menu
The contents of the entire grid on the Query Builder tab is called a query. Each row in the query builder is
an expression. You create a query by combining expressions using the set operators AND, OR, and NOT. For
more information about building queries, see Understanding Point Group Queries (page 565).
NOTE Since the query builder is an advanced tool for creating point groups, it is recommended that you master
point group creation using the basic method before you attempt to use the query builder.
■ In the Point Group Properties dialog box, click the Query Builder tab.
■ Examine the starting query, which is created from the information you specified on the Point Groups,
Raw Desc Matching, Include, and Exclude tabs.
■ Make changes to the options on one of the above tabs, then return to the Query Builder tab and notice
how the changes affected the query.
The Modify Query check box on the Query Builder tab determines which tabs in the Point Group Properties
dialog box are active. When this check box is cleared, the Query Builder tab is inactive, and you can change
the point group properties using the Point Groups, Raw Desc Matching, Include, and Exclude tabs. When
the check box is selected, the Query Builder tab is active, you can change the query, the Point Groups, Raw
Desc Matching, Include, and Exclude tabs are inactive.
In general, when you change the properties of a point group, you should set the state of the Modify Query
check box once and leave it. Every time you select or clear the Modify Query check box, you can lose
information on some tabs in the Point Group Properties dialog box. For example, if you change the query,
and then clear the Modify Query check box to activate the other tabs in the dialog box, you lose the changes
you made to the query.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Point Group .
2 In the Point Group Properties dialog box, on the Information (page 2348) tab, enter a name, description,
default styles, and a layer for the point group.
4 On the Query Builder tab, select Modify Query to activate the query builder.
A starting query is created based on the contents of the Point Groups, Raw Desc Matching, Include,
and Exclude tabs, and those tabs become inactive. If you are creating a new point group, the starting
query is empty.
5 Each row in the query builder contains an expression. Do one of the following:
■ To create a new expression, activate the first row in the grid by right-clicking it and clicking Insert
Row.
■ To modify an existing expression in the query or an existing empty row, activate the row containing
the expression by clicking in it.
■ To delete an expression, click in the row containing the expression and press Delete.
6 Click in the Set Operator column and select a set operator from the list.
7 Click in the “(“ column to turn the left parenthesis on or off for the expression.
10 Click in the Value column and enter a value that is valid for the property you specified in Step 8.
11 Click in the “)“ column to turn the right parenthesis on or off for the expression.
14 To specify overrides for points in the point group, click the Overrides (page 2353) tab.
15 To view the points in the point group’s point list, click the Point List (page 2354) tab.
16 To view a summary of the point group’s properties, click the Summary (page 2354) tab.
17 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Create Point Group
Menu
Expressions
An expression consists of the following three components:
Use properties, comparison operators, and values to create expressions such as the following:
Precedence of Operators
When parentheses are not used to combine expressions, the query is evaluated using only the following
precedence of operators. The following lists the precedence of the operators from highest to lowest:
■ NOT
■ AND
■ OR
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click the point group you want to copy. Click Copy.
2 On the Prospector tab, right-click the new, copied point group. Click Properties.
3 In the Point Group Properties (page 2348) dialog box, on the Information tab, change the name of the
new, copied point group.
4 Change the point group’s properties using either the basic method or the query builder:
■ See Creating a Point Group Using the Basic Method (page 562).
■ See Creating a Point Group Using the Query Builder (page 563).
NOTE You must use the query builder to change the point group’s properties if the Point Groups, Raw Desc
Matching, Include, and Exclude tabs are inactive
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Creating a New Point Group From the Import Survey Data Wizard
A new point group is created in the Point Groups collection on the Prospector tab when you import a Survey
LandXML file that has survey point groups defined .
The point group name defaults to the name of the file you import.
For more information, see Import Survey Data Wizard (page 261).
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click the point group you want to change. Click Properties.
2 In the Point Group Properties (page 2348) dialog box, use the Information (page 2348) tab to change the
name, description, default styles, or layer for the point group.
3 Change the point group’s properties using either the basic method or the query builder:
■ See Creating a Point Group Using the Basic Method (page 562).
Creating a New Point Group From the Import Survey Data Wizard | 567
■ See Creating a Point Group Using the Query Builder (page 563).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select a point. Click COGO Point ➤ <number> | <name> tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Point Group Properties
.
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Changing Point Group Properties by Dragging Points into the Point Group
Include drawing points in a drawing point group using the Prospector tree drag-and-drop capability.
The destination point group must be visible in the Prospector tree. The drawing point you want to drag into
the point group must be displayed in a list view.
NOTE To display all the points in the drawing in a list view, click the _All Points point group.
In the list view, select one or more points. Hold down the left mouse button, and drag the mouse to the
point group name in the Prospector tree. When the cursor display changes to , release the mouse button
to drop the points into the point group at the tip of the cursor arrow.
The points are added to the point group’s point list. The Include tab of the point group’s Point Group
Properties dialog box is modified to include the point number of the points.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click the point group you want to delete.
2 Click Delete.
■ Specify a point style, label style, and a layer for the point.
■ Specify scale and rotation of the point symbol.
■ Translate the raw description for the point into a full description.
Overview
Use description keys to automatically control some drawing point properties, such as the appearance of a
point in the drawing, when you create or import points. Before you create drawing points using description
keys, create a series of description keys. Then, when you create or import a drawing point, the raw description
for the point specifies which description key is used to create the point in the drawing. The properties defined
for that description key are applied to the point as it is added to the drawing.
NOTE Drag and drop functionality can be used to copy description keys. For more information, see Dragging
Styles or Items Within or Between Drawings (page 70).
The following are sample description keys, showing code, point style, point label style, format, and layer
properties:
Each description key in a drawing is defined by its properties. Both the code property and the format properties
are required in a description key.
571
Code property. Used during description key matching, for example, if the code matches the raw description
for the point, then the properties specified in that description key are applied to the point when it is created.
A description key code can contain characters, called wild cards, that expand the matching capabilities of
the description key. For more information, see Description Key Code (page 574).
Format property. Translates the raw description for a point into a full description. The default is $*, which
indicates that the full description is the same as the raw description.
Optional description key properties include:
■ point style
■ layer
NOTE Description key matching is case-sensitive, which means that an upper case letter does not match a lower
case occurrence of the same letter. For example, the raw description “TREE” would match the description key
code “TREE.” It would not match “Tree” or “tree.”
■ Specify the order in which the description key sets are searched during description key matching (page
582).
■ Display the name and description of the description key set (page 2368).
■ Edit the description keys in the description key set (page 590).
NOTE If the Disable Description Keys setting in the Create Points dialog box is changed, then the Disable Description
Keys in the Points Creation settings is changed to the same state if the Save Command Changes To Settings in
the Drawing Settings is set to No. For more information about changing the Disable Description Key setting, see
Editing the Default Point Creation Settings (page 444).
If description key matching is active and the raw description for the point matches a description key, the
point is created with the point style, point label style, and layer specified in the description key. If a format
is specified, the raw description is translated into a full description. If rotation or scaling parameters are
specified in the description key, the point symbol is rotated or scaled. For a more information, see Using
Description Keys When Creating Points (page 579) and Using Description Keys When Importing Points from
a File (page 580).
■ True. Indicates that parameters are used during description key matching to scale or rotate point symbols.
Because spaces are used to delimit description parameters, spaces in description key codes are not
recognized. Spaces should not be used when this option is selected.
■ False. Indicates that parameters are not used during description key matching to scale and rotate point
symbols. Spaces in description key codes are recognized.
To control whether raw description values are interpreted as parameters during point creation
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Commands collection under the Point collection.
3 In the Edit Point Settings (page 2343)dialog box, expand the Points Creation collection. For more
information, see Editing the Default Point Creation Settings (page 444).
4 For Match On Description Parameters ($1, $2, etc.), select either True or False to specify whether or not
raw descriptions contain parameters.
5 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: right-click command name in object Commands collection ➤ Edit Command Settings
Dialog Box
Edit Command Settings (page 2025)
* (asterisk) Matches any string and can be used anywhere in the search
string.
? (question mark) Matches any single character, for example, ?BC matches ABC
and 3BC.
[...] (brackets) Matches any one of the characters enclosed, for example,
[AB]C matches AC and BC.
' (reverse quote) Reads the next characters exactly, for example, '*AB matches
*AB.
The following table shows examples of description key codes containing commonly used wild card characters:
NOTE Description key matching is case-sensitive, which means that an upper case letter does not match a lower
case occurrence of the same letter. For example, the raw description “TREE” would match the description key
code “TREE.” It would not match “Tree” or “tree.”
The raw description for a point is always stored with the point and often corresponds to the point description
entered by a surveyor in the field. Sometimes, for example, when you are labeling a point in a drawing, the
raw description for the point does not contain information in the format you want. You can use the format
property to create a full description that contains a more readable description of the point.
NOTE The leading element in a raw description is not referred to as a parameter. “Parameter” refers to the
individual elements that follow the leading element in a raw description.
Example
You are creating a point, and for the raw description, you specify TREE OAK 7. One of your description key
sets contains a description key with the code TREE and the format “$2 inch $1 tree.”
The leading element in the raw description, TREE, matches the code in the description key, which is also
TREE. The format specified in the description key, “$2 inch $1 tree,” is used to translate the raw description
into a full description for the point.
The $2 in the format refers to the second parameter in the raw description, which is 7. The $1 in the format
refers to the first parameter in the raw description, which is OAK. The full description is created by substituting
7 for $2 and OAK for $1 in the format “$2 inch $1 tree.” The text in the format (“inch” and “tree”) is left
unchanged. After the substitutions are made, the translated full description is “7 inch OAK tree.”
The following is a chart of description key parameter substitution codes, including the code to use if you
want the raw description to be used for the full description:
$* Use the point's raw description for the If you used the raw descrip-
full description. tions UP-1, UP-2, and UP-
3, and you want to use
these descriptions for the
full description, then use
the $* as the format.
Specifying Point Symbol Scaling and Rotation Using Description Key Parameters
Use parameters to specify the point symbol scale or rotation value using the raw description for the point
when a point matches a description key.
Parameters are elements that are included in the raw description for a point. For example, the raw description
TREE OAK 7 consists of a leading element, TREE, followed by two parameters, OAK and 7, separated by
spaces.
NOTE You can also use parameters in the raw description to create a full description by using a description key
format. For more information, see Description Key Format (page 576).
■ Format
■ X-Y Scale
■ Z Scale
1 Create one or more description key sets containing the description keys you want to use to create the
points. For more information, see Creating Description Keys (page 584).
2 Specify the description key sets search order. For more information, see Changing the Description Key
Sets Search Order (page 582).
3 In the Point Creation settings, for Prompt For Descriptions select Manual. For more information, see
Editing the Default Point Creation Settings (page 444).
4 Specify the setting that indicates whether your description keys use parameters. See Controlling Whether
Raw Description Values Are Interpreted as Parameters During Point Creation (page 573).
5 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Point Creation Tools .
6 Expand the Create Points (page 2357) dialog box. Expand Points Creation and set the Disable Description
Keysvalue to True.
8 When prompted for a description, enter the leading element of a raw description that matches the code
specified in one of your description keys. If your description key requires parameters to complete the
full description or to rotate or translate the symbol, enter the parameters, separated by spaces.
The point is drawn using the properties specified in the description key, such as point style, point label
style, and layer.
1 Create one or more description key sets containing the description keys you want to use when importing
the points. For more information, see Creating Description Keys (page 584).
2 Specify the description key sets search order. For more information, see Changing the Description Key
Sets Search Order (page 582).
3 Specify the setting that indicates whether or not your description keys use parameters. For more
information, see Controlling Whether Raw Description Values Are Interpreted as Parameters During
Point Creation (page 573).
4 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Point Creation Tools .
6 Expand Points Creation and set the Disable Description Keysvalue to False. On the Points Creation
8 Import the points. For more information, see Importing Point Data (page 533).
Any point with a raw description that matches a description key is created in the drawing using the
properties specified in the description key, such as point style, point label style, and layer.
3 In the Description Key Set (page 2368) dialog box, enter a name and description for the description key
set.
4 Click OK.
The description key set is created.
6 In the Description Key Editor (page 2368), edit the properties of the starting description key.
7 Add additional description keys to the description key set. For more information, see Creating a New
Description Key (page 584).
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
2 In the Import Data From Autodesk Land Desktop Project dialog box, enter the Land Desktop Project
Path and the Project name.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
3 Right-click the description key set you want to copy. Click Copy.
A copy of the description key set is created. Its name is based on the name of the existing description
key set.
5 In the Description Key Set (page 2368) dialog box, enter a name and description for the new description
key set.
6 Click OK.
8 In the Description Key Editor (page 2368), edit the description keys in the new description key set.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
3 In the Description Key Sets Search Order (page 2368) dialog box, click the name of a description key set
to select it.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
3 Right-click the description key set you want to rename. Click Properties.
4 In the Description Key Set (page 2368) dialog box, enter a new name for the description key set.
6 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
3 Right-click the description key set you want to delete. Click Delete.
4 Click Yes.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
3 Right-click the description key set to which you want to add the description key. Click Edit Keys.
NOTE You can create a new description key set to which you can add the description key. For more
information, see Creating a New Description Key Set (page 581).
4 In the Description Key Editor (page 2368), right-click in the section that contains description keys. Click
New.
A new description key is created with default properties.
5 If necessary, display the columns that contain the properties you want to edit. Display and hide the
columns in the DescKey Editor as you would in a list view. For more information, see Customizing a
List View (page 101).
6 Edit the description key properties as needed. For more information, see Description Key Editor (page
2368).
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: Description Key Sets ➤ <description key set> ➤ right-click in List View ➤ New
3 Right-click the description key set to which you want to add the description key. Click Edit Keys.
4 In the Description Key Editor (page 2368), right-click the description key you want to copy. Click Copy.
A copy of the description key is created.
5 If necessary, display the columns that contain the properties you want to edit in the new description
key. Display and hide the columns in the DescKey Editor as you would in a list view. For more
information, see Customizing a List View (page 101).
6 Edit the properties of the new description key as needed. For more information, see Description Key
Editor (page 2368).
Settings tab: Description Key Sets ➤ <description key set> ➤ right-click in List View ➤ Copy
1 Before you begin, create a point style named UP_Symbol to be used to display the utility pole points
created in this example. For more information, see Point Styles (page 449).
The DescKey Editor is opened. If you cannot see the DescKey Editor, click at the top of the Settings
tab to display the Panorama window.
If you cannot see the column headings mentioned in the following steps, use the column heading
shortcut menu to display or expand the column headings. You display and hide the columns in the
DescKey Editor as you would in a list view. For more information, see Customizing a List View (page
101).
6 In the DescKey Editor, click in the first cell under the Code column heading. Enter UP* for the code.
The asterisk (*) indicates that the description key will match any raw description that starts with UP,
such as UP5A and UP5B.
7 Under the Point Style column heading, select the check box and click in the cell. In the Point Style
dialog box, select UP_Symbol. Click OK.
The UP_Symbol style will be used to display the symbol for points that match the description key you
are creating.
8 Under the Point Label Style column heading, make sure that the check box is selected and that the
Standard style is specified. The Standard style labels the point with point number, point elevation, and
full description.
9 Click in the cell under the Format column heading, and enter $*.
The dollar sign asterisk ($*) format means that the full description and raw description for the point
will be the same.
10 Under the Layer column heading, select the check box. Click in the cell and create a layer named
PTS_UP.
13 If you have multiple description key sets defined, move the UP_Example set to the top of the search
order. For more information, see Changing the Description Key Sets Search Order (page 582).
14 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Point Creation Tools . In the Create
15 Expand the Points Creation collection and specify the following settings:
■ For the Prompt For Descriptions, select Manual. For more information, see Editing the Default Point
Creation Settings (page 444)
18 Follow the prompts. When you are prompted for the description, enter UP1A.
NOTE Description key matching is case-sensitive, which means that an upper case letter does not match a
lower case occurrence of the same letter. For example, the raw description “UP1A” matches the description
key code “UP*”, but it would does not match “up*” or “Up*”.
19 The point is drawn using the UP_Symbol point style and the Standard point label style. The point is
created on the PTS_UP layer.
NOTE The following paragraphs are intended to help you understand this example. They do not provide a
complete overview of description keys. For general information about description keys, see Understanding
Description Keys (page 571). Before beginning this example, you should complete the example that shows you
how to create a basic description key. For more information, see Example: Creating a Basic Description Key (page
586).
When you create a point, the description you enter at the command line is the raw description for the point.
The raw description can consist of one element, such as UP5A, or of more than one element, such as UPNO
104. The leading element in a raw description is compared against description key codes during description
key matching. The remaining elements in the raw description are called parameters. You can use parameters
to create a full description for all points that match the description key.
In this example, you will create a description key that translate a raw description in the form UPNO <pole
number> to a full description in the form U_POLE <pole number>. For example, the field (raw) description
UPNO 104 will be translated to the full (drawing) description U_POLE 104.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the Description Key Sets collection. Click New.
The DescKey Editor is opened. If you cannot see the DescKey Editor, click at the top of the Settings
tab to display the Panorama window.
If you cannot see the column headings mentioned in the following steps, use the column headings
shortcut menu to display or expand the column headings. You display and hide the columns in the
DescKey Editor the same way you display and hide the columns in a list view. For more information,
see Customizing a List View (page 101).
4 In the DescKey Editor, click in the first cell under the Code column heading, and enter UPNO for the
code.
The code will match any raw description whose leading element is UPNO.
5 Under both Point Style and Point Label Style heading columns, select the check boxes. Verify that the
Standard style is specified.
NOTE The Standard point label style displays a full description for the point.
6 Click in the cell under the Format column heading, and enter U_POLE $1.
$1 refers to the first parameter in the raw description. This format will translate the raw description
“UPNO 104” to the full description “U_POLE 104.” For more information, see Description Key Format
(page 576).
7 Under the Layer column heading, select the check box, click in the cell and create a layer named
UP_LAYER. A point created using this description key will be placed on the UP_LAYER layer.
10 If you have multiple description key sets defined, move the Format_Example description key set to the
top of the search order. For more information, see Changing the Description Key Sets Search Order
(page 582).
11 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Point Creation Tools .
12 In the Create Points dialog box, click to expand the dialog box.
13 Expand the Points Creation collection and specify the following settings:
■ For the Prompt For Descriptions, select Manual. For more information, see Editing the Default Point
Creation Settings (page 444)
■ For the Match on Description Parameters ($1, $2, etc.) select True. For more information, see
Controlling Whether Raw Description Values Are Interpreted as Parameters During Point Creation
(page 573).
16 Follow the prompts. When you are prompted for the description, enter UPNO 104.
The point is drawn using the full description derived from the description key, U_POLE 104.
Example: Using Description Key Parameters to Format a Full Description and Scale
a Point Symbol
This example shows how to use description key parameters to both expand the raw description for a point
and to scale a point symbol.
NOTE The following paragraphs are intended to help you understand this example. They do not provide a
complete overview of description keys. For an overview of description keys, see Understanding Description Keys
(page 571). Before beginning this example, you should complete the example that shows you how to create a
basic description key. For more information, see Example: Creating a Basic Description Key (page 586).
When you create a point, the description you enter at the command line is the raw description for the point.
The raw description can consist of one element, such as TREE, or it can consist of more than one element,
such as TREE OAK 7. The leading element in a raw description is compared against description key codes
during description key matching. The remaining elements in the raw description are called parameters. You
can use parameters to create a full description for a point or to rotate or scale a point.
In this example, you create a description key that translates a raw description with the format TREE <tree
type> <tree size> into a full description that reads: <tree size> inch <tree type> tree, and you will scale the
point symbol using the <tree size> value. For example, the raw description TREE OAK 7 will be translated
to a full description 7 inch OAK tree. The point symbol will be scaled using a value of 7.
In the raw description TREE OAK 7, OAK is the first parameter and 7 is the second parameter. For more
information, see Description Key Format (page 576).
Example: Using parameters to format a full description and scale a point symbol
1 Before you begin, create a point style named Tree_Symbol which will display the tree points created in
this example. For more information, see Creating a Point Style (page 450).
2 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the Description Key Sets collection. Click New.
The DescKey Editor is displayed. If you cannot see the DescKey Editor, click at the top of the Settings
tab to display the Panorama window.
If you cannot see the column headings mentioned in the following steps, you may need to use the
column headings shortcut menu to display them, or you may need to expand the column headings.
You display and hide the columns in the DescKey Editor as you would in a list view. For more
information, see Customizing a List View (page 101).
5 In the DescKey Editor, click in the first cell under the Code column heading, and enter TREE for the
code.
The code will match any point raw description whose leading element is TREE.
6 Under the Point Style column heading, select the check box and click in the cell. In the Point Style
dialog box, select Tree_Symbol. Click OK.
Example: Using Description Key Parameters to Format a Full Description and Scale a Point Symbol | 589
7 Under the Point Label Style column heading, select the check box. Verify that the Standard point label
style is specified.
8 Click in the cell under the Format column heading, and enter $2 inch $1 Tree.
$2 refers to the second parameter in the raw description. $1 refers to the first parameter in the raw
description. This format will translate the raw description “TREE OAK 7” into the full description “7
inch OAK tree.”
For more information, see Description Key Format (page 576).
9 Under the Layer column heading, select the check box. Click in the cell and create a layer named
PTS_TREE. A point created using this description key will be placed on the PTS_TREE layer.
16 If you have multiple description key sets defined, move the Param_Example description key set to the
top of the search order. For more information, see Changing the Description Key Sets Search Order
(page 582).
17 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Points menu ➤ Point Creation Tools .
18 In the Create Points dialog box, click to expand the dialog box.
19 Expand the Points Creation collection and specify the following settings:
■ For the Prompt For Descriptions, select Manual. For more information, see Editing the Default Point
Creation Settings (page 444)
■ For the Match on Description Parameters ($1, $2, etc.), select True. For more information, see
Controlling Whether Raw Description Values Are Interpreted as Parameters During Point Creation
(page 573).
22 Follow the prompts. When you are prompted for the description, enter TREE OAK 7.
A point is drawn and labeled with the full description 7 inch OAK tree, and the tree symbol is scaled.
23 Create another point, and specify TREE OAK 5 for the raw description to see the impact on the full
description and the scaled symbol.
NOTE You can edit description keys in the Prospector item view. However, the DescKey Editor, because it is a
separate window, provides you with more viewing area and greater flexibility in your use of screen space.
NOTE You can also edit description keys in the Prospector item view. However, the DescKey Editor, because it is
a separate window, provides you more viewing area and greater flexibility in your use of screen space.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Description Key Sets collection.
2 Right-click the description key set you want to edit. Click Edit Keys.
3 Use the Description Key Editor (page 2368) to edit the individual description keys.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the description key set that contains the description key
you want to delete. Click Edit Keys.
2 In the Description Key Editor (page 2368), right-click the description key you want to delete. Click Delete.
Settings tab: Description Key Sets ➤ <description key set> ➤ right-click in List View ➤ Delete
1 Unclassified
2 Ground
3 Low Vegetation
4 Medium Vegetation
5 High Vegetation
6 Building
593
7 Low Point (noise)
9 Water
12 Overlap Points
See also:
■ Bounding box. The size and geometry of the bounding box component depend on the point cloud object
minimum and maximum coordinate values. The bounding box serves as a point cloud object proxy
when the point cloud source data is not accessible.
■ Point cloud points. This component represents the data points that build the point cloud object.
You can control the appearance of both point cloud components using the point cloud style settings.
The bounding box display properties include Visibility, Layer, Color, Linetype, LT Scale, Lineweight, and
Plot Style. The properties that are applicable to the point cloud points component include Visibility,
Layer, and Density. See Displaying and Stylizing Point Clouds (page 598).
The following illustrations show the different views and the basic components of a point cloud object.
You can:
■ Right-click the Point Cloud collection to create point cloud objects (page 596).
■ Right-click a named point cloud object to:modify point cloud properties (page 601),edit point cloud style
and display properties (page 598),add points to point clouds (page 599),add points to new or existing
surfaces, (page 600)add and remove Civil 3D properties from point cloud objects (page 602).
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel Create Point Cloud .
3 Select the standard style or, optionally, click to create a new style, to copy the existing style, or
to edit the current style. Click Next.
4 On the Source Data page (page 2380), specify the type of source data to use:
■ Select Create a New Point Cloud Database to create a point cloud object from the point cloud source
files.
■ Select Use an Existing Point Cloud Database to use the point cloud database file that exists on your
system or network.
NOTE For best results, use an existing point cloud database on a local file system.
5 If you use a new source file, select a point cloud file format and click to add point cloud source files
to the import list. You can select multiple files of the specified file format.
6 If you use an existing point cloud database file as a source, click and select an ISD (.isd) file.
7 Click Next.
Optionally, click Finish to start creating a point cloud database file.
8 On the Summary page (page 2381), review the properties assigned to the new point cloud object.
9 Click Finish.
NOTE Depending on the size of the source file, the process of generating a point cloud database file may
take several minutes. You can continue working while a new point cloud database file is being created.
View the point cloud icon in the lower right corner for the status of the point cloud database file creation
process.
NOTE You cannot add points if another add point or point cloud creation operation is running in the same
drawing.
10 When you receive notification that the new point cloud database was created, click the Click Here to
Zoom link on the notification bubble to display the point cloud object.
Quick Reference
Toolbox
2 Select a point cloud or click Modify tab ➤ Ground Data panel ➤ Point Cloud .
3 Click Point Cloud tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Point Cloud Properties drop-down ➤ Edit Point Cloud Style
.
4 On the Information (page 2381)page of the Point Cloud Style dialog box, enter the style name and
description.
5 On the Points page (page 2381), modify the settings specific to point data, such as point size, colors, and
elevation ranges.
NOTE To use the LiDAR point classification scheme, in the Color section, specify Classification as the value
for the Assign Color By property.
6 On the Classification page (page 2383), select the required LiDAR point classes, click and select a color
to assign to the point class. You can also assign points of a specific classification to separate layers.
■ Point cloud component display. Specify visibility settings and line properties
.On the Summary page (page 2383), review and, if required, modify the point cloud style settings.
1 Select a point cloud or click Modify tab ➤ Ground Data panel ➤ Point Cloud .
2 On the Point Cloud tab, move the point density slider to increase or decrease the number of displayed
points.
NOTE The displayed value is the percentage of 1.5 million points, which is the maximum number of points
that can exist in a drawing, regardless of the number of point clouds in the drawing.
3 To ensure point clouds are regenerated automatically after any manipulation, select Auto Update.
See also:
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select a point cloud object. Click Point Cloud tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Point Cloud Properties
drop-down ➤ Edit Point Cloud Style
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Expand Point Clouds collection ➤ right-click <point cloud object> ➤ Edit Point Cloud Style
Command Line
EditPointCloudStyle
PointCloudDensity
Dialog Box
Point Cloud Style (page 2381)
NOTE You cannot add points if another add point or point cloud creation operation is running in the same
drawing.
1 Select a point cloud or click Modify tab ➤ Ground Data panel ➤ Point Cloud .
3 In the Add Points (page 2385) dialog box, specify the point cloud file format.
4 Click and select one or several point cloud source files. By default, only files of the specified format
are visible.
Depending on the source file size, the process may take up to several minutes. You can continue using
AutoCAD Civil 3D while the new file is added to the existing point cloud. You are notified when the process
is complete.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select a point cloud object. Click Point Cloud tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Add Points
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Expand Point Clouds collection ➤ right-click <point cloud object> ➤ Add Points
Command Line
AddPointCloudPoints
Dialog Box
Add Points (page 2385)
2 Select the point cloud object or click Modify tab ➤ Ground Data panel ➤ Point Cloud .
NOTE To create an accurate TIN surface, you may not need to keep the default object density. If the point
cloud is too dense, drag the Point Density slider to decrease the density value.
3 Click Point Cloud tab ➤ Point Cloud Tools panel ➤ Add Points to Surface .
4 On the Surface Options (page 2385) page of the Add Points to Surface wizard, do one of the following:
■ To create a TIN surface, select Add Points to a New Surface.
■ To add points to an existing surface, select Add Points to an Existing Surface. This option is
unavailable if there are no surfaces in the current drawing.
5 If you selected Add Points to a New Surface, specify the surface name, enter the required description,
and apply a style to the surface.
6 Click Next.
7 On the Region Options page (page 2386), specify a point cloud region option.
9 If you selected Window, Window Polygon, or Object, click Define Region in Drawing and specify the
point cloud region in the drawing. Press Enter.
10 Click Next to view a summary of the Add Points operation or, optionally, click Finish.
A surface is created and a the surface name is displayed under the Surfaces collection in the Prospector
tree.
The following drawing shows a 3D view of a TIN surface created from a point cloud region specified using
the Window Polygon option.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select a point cloud object. Click Point Cloud tab ➤ Point Cloud Tools panel ➤ Add Points to Surface
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Expand Point Clouds collection ➤ right-click <point cloud object> ➤ Add Points to Surface
Command Line
AddPointsToSurface
Dialog Box
Add Points to Surface wizard (page 2385)
NOTE You can remove the AutoCAD Civil 3D properties from a point cloud object using a single command. See
Adding and Removing AutoCAD Civil 3D Properties from Point Cloud Objects (page 602).
1 Select the point cloud object or click Modify tab ➤ Ground Data panel ➤ Point Cloud .
2 Click Point Cloud tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Point Cloud Properties drop-down ➤ Point Cloud Properties
.
3 In the Point Cloud Properties dialog box, click the Statistics tab to review the current point cloud object
properties.
4 On the Information page, modify the point cloud name, description, and style and specify tooltip
display preferences.
6 On the Elevation Ranges page, modify the point elevation range values. You can:
■ Enter minimum and maximum values and click Update Range Details.
■ Click Reset from Style to apply the values specified in style settings.
■ Under Range Details, view the details of the current elevation range settings.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select a point cloud object. Click Point Cloud tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Point Cloud Properties
drop-down ➤ Point Cloud Properties
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Point Clouds ➤ right-click <point cloud name> ➤ Point Cloud Properties
Command Line
EditPointCloudProperties
Dialog Box
Point Cloud Properties (page 2383)
When you perform this command, AutoCAD Civil 3D removes the point cloud name, description, and any
style settings that you applied when creating the point cloud object. As a result, the point cloud displays
only the default subset of points.
Before After
1 In the drawing, select a point cloud object or click Modify tab ➤ Ground Data panel ➤ Point Cloud
.
NOTE The point cloud object icon in the prospector tree changes to .
You can reverse this operation and add the removed AutoCAD Civil 3D properties to the point cloud object.
1 In the drawing, select a point cloud object or click Modify tab ➤ Ground Data panel ➤ Point Cloud
.
4 In the Point Cloud Properties dialog box, review and, optionally, modify the current object properties.
Adding and Removing AutoCAD Civil 3D Properties from Point Cloud Objects | 603
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select a point cloud object. Click Point Cloud tab ➤ Modify panel Remove C3D Properties
Select a point cloud object. Click Point Cloud tab ➤ Modify panel Add Civil 3D Properties
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Point Clouds ➤ right-click <point cloud name> ➤ Remove Civil 3D Properties / Add Civil
3D Properties
Command Line
RemoveCivil3DProperties
AddCivil3DProperties
Command Description
EditPointCloudStyle Displays the Point Cloud Style dialog box to edit object
styles. (page 598)
Creating Lines
You can use the AutoCAD Civil 3D line creation commands to draft line geometry prior to defining it as
alignments or parcels, for example.
Several of the AutoCAD Civil 3D Line commands are simply the AutoCAD Line combined with an AutoCAD
Civil 3D transparent command. For example, when you run the Line By Bearing command, the AutoCAD
Line command starts, but the ‘BD transparent command also launches so you can immediately enter a
bearing value. For more information on transparent commands, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
6 To start a new line at the endpoint of the last line drawn, start the Line command again and press Enter
at the Specify Start Point prompt.
605
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line By Point # Range .
2 Enter the number of the point at which you want to start the line.
4 Enter the number of the point at which you want to end the line segment and press Enter.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line By Point # Range
Menu
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line By Point Object .
4 Continue to select points to define additional line segments. Or press Enter to return to the Line
command prompt where you can use additional options to define the line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line By Point Object
Menu
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line By Point Name .
4 Continue to enter point names to define additional line segments. Or press Enter to return to the Line
command prompt where you can use additional options to define the line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line By Point Name
Menu
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line By Northing/Easting .
NOTE The order in which you are prompted for northing and easting is controlled by the Transparent
Command setting Prompt For Easting Then Northing, located on the Ambient Settings tab of the Drawing
Settings dialog box. For more information, see Specifying Ambient Settings (page 84).
4 Continue to enter northing and easting values to define the line segments. Or press ESC to return to
the Line command prompt where you can use additional options to define the line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line By Grid Northing/Grid Easting .
4 Continue to enter grid northing and easting values to define the line segments. Or press ESC to return
to the Line command prompt where you can use additional options to define the line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line By Grid Northing/Grid Easting
Menu
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line By Latitude/Longitude .
NOTE The order in which you are prompted for latitude and longitude is controlled by the Transparent
Command setting Prompt For Longitude Then Latitude, located on the Ambient Settings tab of the Drawing
Settings dialog box. For more information, see Specifying Ambient Settings (page 84).
4 Continue to enter latitude and longitude values to define the line segments. Or press ESC to return to
the Line command prompt where you can use additional options to define the line.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line By Bearing .
2 Select a temporary start point for the angle measurement by clicking in the drawing or by using the .P,
.N, or .G point filters (page 1787).
3 Specify a quadrant number by either clicking in the drawing or entering a value between 1 and 4.
4 Specify the bearing within the quadrant by clicking in the drawing or entering a bearing using the
angular units for the drawing.
6 Continue to specify bearings and distances to define line segments. Or press Enter to return to the Line
command prompt where you can use additional options to define the line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line By Azimuth .
2 Select a temporary start point for the angle measurement by clicking in the drawing or by using the .P,
.N, or .G point filters (page 1787).
5 Continue to specify azimuths and distances to define line segments. Or press Enter to return to the
Line command prompt where you can use additional options to define the line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line By Angle .
2 Specify a temporary reference line for the angle by doing one of the following:
■ Select a line.
■ Enter Points, or P, and then specify a start point and endpoint for the line.
■ Enter C to switch the angle between counterclockwise and clockwise, and then specify the angle.
6 Enter angles and distances to define line segments. You can then press Enter to return to the Line
command prompt where you can use additional options to define the line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line By Deflection .
2 Specify a temporary reference line for the angle by doing one of the following:
■ Select a line.
■ Enter Points, or P, and then specify a start point and endpoint for the line.
■ Enter C to switch the angle between counterclockwise and clockwise, and then specify the angle.
6 Enter angles and distances to define line segments. You can then press Enter to return to the Line
command prompt where you can use additional options to define the line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line Station/Offset .
5 Specify a station and offset for the next point in the line. Or press Enter to return to the Line command
prompt where you can use additional options to define the line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line By Side Shot .
■ Enter Points, or P, and then specify a start point and endpoint for the line.
■ Enter Bearing, or B, and then specify the angle by specifying a quadrant and a bearing.
■ Enter C to switch the direction of the angle between clockwise and counterclockwise.
5 Continue to specify angles and distances to define line segments. Or presss Enter to return to the Line
command prompt where you can use additional options to define the line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line By Side Shot
Menu
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line By Extension .
■ Enter Total, or T, and then enter the total length of the segment. You can either type the new total
length, or select two locations to define the total length. This total length can be greater than (to
lengthen the line), or smaller than (to shorten the line), the current length of the line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line From End Of Object .
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line From End Of Object
Menu
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line Tangent From Point .
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line Tangent From Point
Menu
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line Perpendicular From Point .
3 Specify the point on the object where the line will extend from.
Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line drop-down ➤ Create Line Perpendicular From Point
Menu
Creating Curves
Use the curve commands to draft curve geometry prior to defining it as alignments or parcels.
The following illustration shows the curve parameters used by AutoCAD Civil 3D.
You can use the Curve Calculator (page 639) to determine the values required for defining the curve.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Curves drop-down ➤ Create Curves Between Two Lines .
■ Enter Tangent, or T, and then enter the tangent length or pick the distance in the drawing.
■ Enter External, or E, and then enter the secant length or pick the distance in the drawing.
■ Enter Chord, or C, and then enter the chord length or pick the distance in the drawing.
■ Enter Mid-ordinate, or M, and then enter the distance or pick the distance in the drawing.
■ Enter miN-dist, or N, and then select the end of an existing curve. Then enter the minimum distance
between the end of the new curve and the point selected on the existing curve.
NOTE The command sets the Object Snap to END for this prompt. The point you select does not have
to be on an existing curve; it can be any point along the adjacent tangent.
■ Enter Radius, or R, and then and then enter the radius or pick the distance in the drawing.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Curves drop-down ➤ Create Curves Between Two Lines
Menu
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Curves drop-down ➤ Create Curve On Two Lines .
■ Enter Tangent, or T, and then enter the tangent length or pick the distance in the drawing.
■ Enter External, or E, and then enter the secant length or pick the distance in the drawing.
■ Enter Chord, or C, and then enter the chord length or pick the distance in the drawing.
■ Enter Mid-ordinate, or M, and then enter the distance or pick the distance in the drawing.
■ Enter miN-dist, or N, and then select the end of an existing curve. Then enter the minimum distance
between the end of the new curve and the point selected on the existing curve.
NOTE The command sets the Object Snap to END for this prompt. The point you select does not have
to be on an existing curve; it can be any point along the adjacent tangent.
■ Enter Radius, or R, and then and then enter the radius or pick the distance in the drawing.
Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Curves drop-down ➤ Create Curve On Two Lines
Menu
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Curves drop-down ➤ Create Curve Through Point .
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Curves drop-down ➤ Create Curve Through Point
Menu
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Curves drop-down ➤ Create Multiple Curves .
4 Specify the number of curves to insert between the two tangents. You can specify a maximum of 10.
5 Specify which curve will have a floating length. One curve in the set must have a floating length that
is calculated by the lengths and radii of the other curves. This is usually a middle curve.
6 Enter the length and radius for all but the floating curve, and enter the radius of the floating curve.
If the results cannot fit between the two selected line objects, the following message is displayed:
Curves cannot fit between the tangents chosen.
Press any key to continue.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Curves drop-down ➤ Create Curve From End Of Object .
2 Select the line or arc nearest the end to which the new tangent arc is to be attached.
NOTE When drawing a curve, specifying a positive radius or degree of curve draws the curve clockwise
or to the right of the starting angle, whereas a negative radius or degree of curve draws the type curve
counterclockwise or to the left.
After you enter the radius or degree of curve, the following prompt is displayed:
Select entry [Tangent/Chord/Delta/Length/External/Mid-ordinate] <Length>:
■ Enter Chord, or C , and then enter the chord length, or pick the distance in the drawing.
■ Enter Delta, or D, and then enter the delta angle, or pick the distance in the drawing.
■ Enter Length, or L, and then enter the curve length, or pick the distance in the drawing.
■ Enter External, or E, and then enter the external distance, or pick the distance in the drawing.
■ Enter Mid-ordinate, or M, and then enter the mid-ordinate distance, or pick the distance in the
drawing.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Curves drop-down ➤ Create Curve From End Of Object
1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Curves drop-down ➤ Create Reverse Or Compound Curve .
2 Select the arc object nearest the end to which the new compound or reverse curve is to be attached.
After you enter the radius or degree of curve, the following prompt is displayed:
Select entry [Tangent/Chord/Delta/Length/External/Mid-ordinate] <Length>:
■ Enter Chord, or C , and then enter the chord length, or pick the distance in the drawing.
■ Enter Length, or L, and then enter the curve length, or pick the distance in the drawing.
■ Enter Delta, or D, and then enter the delta angle, or pick the distance in the drawing.
■ Enter External, or E, and then enter the external distance, or pick the distance in the drawing.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Curves drop-down ➤ Create Reverse Or Compound Curve
Menu
NOTE When using the best fit commands for profile design, use the Create Parabola command for vertical curves.
See Vertical Curve Design (page 1166) for more information.
1 If you are creating a best fit line for a profile, set the profile view style vertical exaggeration to 1. See
Creating and Editing Profile View Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Best Fit drop-down ➤ Create Best Fit Line .
3 In the Line By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select From COGO Points.
4 Select two or more points. Enter G to select a point group or N to enter points by number.
As you select points in the drawing window, a white X marks each regression point and a temporary,
dashed line is displayed in real time.
6 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window will be highlighted in red.
NOTE When the AutoCAD line is created, it will not retain any link to the regression points.
■ Click to create the line and keep the regression data. You may then use the data as a basis to
create more lines.
■ Click to create the line, clear the regression data, and close the Regression Data vista.
8 If desired, convert the AutoCAD line to an alignment or profile entity. See Converting an AutoCAD
Line or Arc to an Alignment Sub-Entity (page 1062) or Converting AutoCAD Entities to Profile Sub-entities
(page 1196) for more information.
1 If you are creating a best fit line for a profile, set the profile view style vertical exaggeration to 1. See
Creating and Editing Profile View Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Best Fit drop-down ➤ Create Best Fit Line .
3 In the Line By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select From AutoCAD Points.
6 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window will be highlighted in red.
NOTE When the AutoCAD line is created, it will not retain any link to the regression points.
■ Click to create the line and keep the regression data. You may then use the data as a basis to
create more lines.
■ Click to create the line, clear the regression data, and close the Regression Data vista.
8 If desired, convert the AutoCAD line to an alignment or profile entity. See Converting an AutoCAD
Line or Arc to an Alignment Sub-Entity (page 1062) or Converting AutoCAD Entities to Profile Sub-entities
(page 1196) for more information.
1 If you are creating a best fit line for a profile, set the profile view style vertical exaggeration to 1. See
Creating and Editing Profile View Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Best Fit drop-down ➤ Create Best Fit Line .
3 In the Line By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select From Entities. Specify the tessellation and mid-ordinate
tolerance settings.
NOTE You may select several types of entities listed at the command line.
As you select entities in the drawing window, a white X marks each regression point and a temporary,
dashed line is displayed in real time.
5 If you selected a profile object, specify the starting and ending station on the Specify Station Range
Dialog Box (page 2228).
7 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window will be highlighted in red.
NOTE When the AutoCAD line is created, it will not retain any link to the regression points.
■ Click to create the line and keep the regression data. You may then use the data as a basis to
create more lines.
■ Click to create the line, clear the regression data, and close the Regression Data vista.
9 If desired, convert the AutoCAD line to an alignment or profile entity. See Converting an AutoCAD
Line or Arc to an Alignment Sub-Entity (page 1062) or Converting AutoCAD Entities to Profile Sub-entities
(page 1196) for more information.
1 If you are creating a best fit line for a profile, set the profile view style vertical exaggeration to 1. See
Creating and Editing Profile View Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Best Fit drop-down ➤ Create Best Fit Line .
As you select points in the drawing window, a white X marks each regression point and a temporary,
dashed line is displayed in real time.
6 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window will be highlighted in red.
NOTE When the AutoCAD line is created, it will not retain any link to the regression points.
■ Click to create the line and keep the regression data. You may then use the data as a basis to
create more lines.
■ Click to create the line, clear the regression data, and close the Regression Data vista.
8 If desired, convert the AutoCAD line to an alignment or profile entity. See Converting an AutoCAD
Line or Arc to an Alignment Sub-Entity (page 1062) or Converting AutoCAD Entities to Profile Sub-entities
(page 1196) for more information.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Best Fit drop-down ➤ Create Best Fit Line
Menu
1 If you are creating a best fit arc for a profile, set the profile view style vertical exaggeration to 1. See
Creating and Editing Profile View Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Best Fit drop-down ➤ Create Best Fit Arc .
3 In the Arc By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select From COGO Points.
4 Select three or more points. Enter G to select a point group or N to enter points by number.
As you select points in the drawing window, a white X marks each regression point and a temporary,
dashed arc is displayed in real time.
6 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window will be highlighted in red.
NOTE When the AutoCAD arc is created, it will not retain any link to the regression points.
■ Click to create the arc and keep the regression data. You may then use the data as a basis to
create more arcs.
■ Click to create the arc, clear the regression data, and close the Regression Data vista.
8 If desired, convert the AutoCAD arc to an alignment or profile entity. See Converting an AutoCAD Line
or Arc to an Alignment Sub-Entity (page 1062) or Converting AutoCAD Entities to Profile Sub-entities
(page 1196) for more information.
1 If you are creating a best fit arc for a profile, set the profile view style vertical exaggeration to 1. See
Creating and Editing Profile View Styles (page 1125) for more information.
3 In the Arc By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select From AutoCAD Points.
6 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window will be highlighted in red.
NOTE When the AutoCAD arc is created, it will not retain any link to the regression points.
■ Click to create the arc and keep the regression data. You may then use the data as a basis to
create more arcs.
■ Clickk to create the arc, clear the regression data, and close the Regression Data vista.
8 If desired, convert the AutoCAD arc to an alignment or profile entity. See Converting an AutoCAD Line
or Arc to an Alignment Sub-Entity (page 1062) or Converting AutoCAD Entities to Profile Sub-entities
(page 1196) for more information.
1 If you are creating a best fit arc for a profile, set the profile view style vertical exaggeration to 1. See
Creating and Editing Profile View Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Best Fit drop-down ➤ Create Best Fit Arc .
3 In the Arc By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select From Entities. Specify the tessellation and mid-ordinate
tolerance settings.
NOTE You may select several types of entities listed at the command line.
As you select entities in the drawing window, a white X marks each regression point and a temporary,
dashed arc is displayed in real time.
5 If you selected a profile object, specify the starting and ending station on the Specify Station Range
Dialog Box (page 2228).
7 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
NOTE When the AutoCAD arc is created, it will not retain any link to the regression points.
■ Click to create the arc and keep the regression data. You may then use the data as a basis to
create more arcs.
■ Click to create the arc, clear the regression data, and close the Regression Data vista.
9 If desired, convert the AutoCAD arc to an alignment or profile entity. See Converting an AutoCAD Line
or Arc to an Alignment Sub-Entity (page 1062) or Converting AutoCAD Entities to Profile Sub-entities
(page 1196) for more information.
1 If you are creating a best fit arc for a profile, set the profile view style vertical exaggeration to 1. See
Creating and Editing Profile View Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Best Fit drop-down ➤ Create Best Fit Arc .
3 In the Arc By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select By Clicking On The Screen.
As you select points in the drawing window, a white X marks each regression point and a temporary,
dashed arc is displayed in real time.
6 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window will be highlighted in red.
NOTE When the AutoCAD arc is created, it will not retain any link to the regression points.
■ Click to create the arc and keep the regression data. You may then use the data as a basis to
create more arcs.
■ Click to create the arc, clear the regression data, and close the Regression Data vista.
8 If desired, convert the AutoCAD arc to an alignment or profile entity. See Converting an AutoCAD Line
or Arc to an Alignment Sub-Entity (page 1062) or Converting AutoCAD Entities to Profile Sub-entities
(page 1196) for more information.
Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Best Fit drop-down ➤ Create Best Fit Arc
Menu
NOTE When using the best fit commands for profile design, use the Create Parabola command for vertical curves.
See Vertical Curve Design (page 1166) for more information.
1 If you are creating a best fit parabola for a profile, set the profile view style vertical exaggeration to 1.
See Creating and Editing Profile View Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Best Fit drop-down ➤ Create Best Fit Parabola .
3 In the Parabola By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select From Entities. Specify the tessellation and
mid-ordinate tolerance settings.
NOTE You may select several types of entities listed at the command line.
5 If you selected a profile object, specify the starting and ending station on the Specify Station Range
Dialog Box (page 2228).
7 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window will be highlighted in red.
NOTE When the AutoCAD parabola is created, it will not retain any link to the regression points.
■ Clik to create the parabola and keep the regression data. You may then use the data as a basis
to create more parabolas.
■ Click to create the parabola, clear the regression data, and close the Regression Data vista.
9 If desired, convert the AutoCAD parabola to an alignment or profile entity. See Converting an AutoCAD
Line or Arc to an Alignment Sub-Entity (page 1062) or Converting AutoCAD Entities to Profile Sub-entities
(page 1196) for more information.
1 If you are creating a best fit parabola for a profile, set the profile view style vertical exaggeration to 1.
See Creating and Editing Profile View Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Best Fit drop-down ➤ Create Best Fit Parabola .
3 In the Parabola By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select By Clicking On The Screen.
As you select points in the drawing window, a white X marks each regression point and a temporary,
dashed parabola is displayed in real time.
6 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window will be highlighted in red.
NOTE When the AutoCAD parabola is created, it will not retain any link to the regression points.
■ Clik to create the parabola and keep the regression data. You may then use the data as a basis
to create more parabolas.
■ Click to create the parabola, clear the regression data, and close the Regression Data vista.
8 If desired, convert the AutoCAD parabola to an alignment or profile entity. See Converting an AutoCAD
Line or Arc to an Alignment Sub-Entity (page 1062) or Converting AutoCAD Entities to Profile Sub-entities
(page 1196) for more information.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Best Fit drop-down ➤ Create Best Fit Parabola
Menu
5 Continue to add line or arc segments or use the Undo option to undo the last segment.
NOTE When drawing a curve, specifying a positive radius or degree of curve draws the curve clockwise
or to the right of the starting angle, whereas a negative radius or degree of curve draws the type curve
counterclockwise or to the left.
After you enter the radius or degree of curve, the following prompt is displayed:
Select entry [Tangent/Chord/Delta/Length/External/Mid-ordinate] <Length>:
■ Enter Chord, or C , and then enter the chord length, or pick the distance in the drawing.
■ Enter Delta, or D, and then enter the delta angle, or pick the distance in the drawing.
■ Enter Length, or L, and then enter the curve length, or pick the distance in the drawing.
■ Enter External, or E, and then enter the external distance, or pick the distance in the drawing.
■ Enter Mid-ordinate, or M, and then enter the mid-ordinate distance, or pick the distance in the
drawing.
6 Continue to add line or arc segments or use the Undo option to undo the last segment.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE To change the units used in the Curve Calculator dialog box, use the Ambient Settings tab of the Drawing
Settings dialog box. Under Angle, change the Format value to the unit you want to use. For more information,
see To specify ambient settings for a drawing (page 84).
The following illustration shows the curve parameters used by AutoCAD Civil 3D.
2 Specify whether the degree of curve is determined by arc or by chord by selecting an option from the
Degree of Curve Definition drop-down list. The selected option affects how the Degree of Curve Property
is calculated.
■ Chord Definition: Use this option if the curve is a railway curve. Using this option, the degree of
curve is the angle at the center of a circular curve subtended by a chord of 100 units.
■ Arc Definition: Use this option if the curve is a roadway curve. Using this option, the degree of curve
is the central angle subtended by a circular arc of 100 units.
The program then holds as fixed either of the two parameters above while performing calculations.
■ Delta Angle: Specifies the delta angle of the curve. This option is not adjustible if Delta Angle is
specified as the Fixed Property.
■ Radius: Specifies the radius of the curve. This option is not adjustible if Radius is specified as the
Fixed Property.
■ Right-click and select Copy Value To Clipboard to copy the selected value to the clipboard.
■ Right-click and select Copy To Clipboard to copy the entire contents of the Curve Calculator to the
clipboard.
■ Click to select an arc in the drawing to display its values in the calculator. No edits you
subsequently make in the calculator are updated to the arc in the drawing.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Line And Curve ➤ Add Single
Segment Line/Curve Label .
OR
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Line And Curve ➤ Add Line And
Curve Labels .
2 In the Add Labels dialog box (page 2208), under Feature, ensure that Line And Curve is selected.
5 Click Add and then select the feature line or segment to label.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Line And Curve ➤ Add Single Segment
Line/Curve Label
Menu
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Line And Curve ➤ Add Multiple
Segment Line/Curve Labels .
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Line And Curve ➤ Add Line And
Curve Labels .
2 In the Add Labels dialog box (page 2208), under Feature, ensure that Line And Curve is selected.
5 Click Add and then select the feature line or segment to label.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Line And Curve ➤ Add Multiple Segment
Line/Curve Labels
Menu
Command Description
Understanding Surfaces
A surface is a three-dimensional geometric representation of an area of land, or, in the case of volume surfaces,
is a difference or composite between two surface areas.
Surfaces are made up of triangles or grids, which are created when AutoCAD Civil 3D connects the points
that make up the surface data.
To use a surface in your drawing, you can create an empty surface and then add data to it. You can also
import existing files containing surface information, such as LandXML, TIN (page 2785), or DEM (page 2772)
files.
Points or contours are usually a primary part of the original surface information and are supplemented with
breakline (page 2769) and boundaries (page 2769).
Boundaries define the visible area of a surface. Only the area within the boundary is included in calculations,
such as for total area and volume. You can also define masks to hide or show parts of a surface for editing
or presentation purposes, while still including that area in calculations.
645
Surfaces displaying boundaries, contours, and elevation analysis
Breaklines are used on TIN surfaces to define linear features that triangles cannot cross, such as retaining
walls or streams. Breaklines affect triangulation of the surface.
You can define different sets of contours, for example, for different intervals. Smoothing is provided for the
surface object as a whole, which gives better results than simply smoothing the contours. In AutoCAD Civil
3D, the build process for surfaces is incremental. Whenever data is added or corrected, the surface is updated.
Each surface has a definition list. This list contains all the operations performed on the surface. By turning
the operations on and off, you can return a surface to a previous state or modify it to support different types
of analysis.
■ Grid surfaces. Formed from points that lie on a regular grid (for example, Digital Elevation Models
(DEMs)).
For more information, see Creating a Grid Surface (page 650).
■ TIN volume surfaces. A composite surface created from a combination of points in a top (comparison)
and base surface, also known as a differential surface.
For more information, see Creating a TIN Volume Surface (page 651).
■ Grid volume surfaces. A differential surface based on user-specified top and bottom surfaces with
points on a user-specified grid.
For more information, see Creating a Grid Volume Surface (page 653).
■ Corridor surfaces. A corridor surface is a surface created using data extracted from an underlying
corridor model.
For more information, see Creating and Editing Corridor Surfaces (page 1506).
■ Turn on or off the surface preview (page 735). A check mark is displayed next to the Show Preview menu
item when the preview option is selected.
Expand the Surface collection to display and edit the styles and command settings that are available for
surfaces.
Creating Surfaces
You can create a surface that comprises a combination of points, breaklines, boundaries, and contours.
When you create a surface, the surface name is displayed in the Surfaces collection in the Prospector tree
so that you can perform other operations, such as adding data and editing the surface.
Initially, the surface may be empty and not be visible in the drawing. Once you add data to the surface, the
surface becomes visible in the drawing in accordance to the display settings specified in the referenced
surface style. See Surface Styles and Visualization (page 748).
■ Mapping highly variable surfaces with irregularly distributed sample data representing the influence of
streams, roads, and lakes.
TIN surfaces generally take longer to build and require more disk space than grid surfaces.
When AutoCAD Civil 3D creates a TIN surface from point data, it computes the Delaunay triangulation (page
2772) of the points. With Delaunay triangulation, no point lies inside the circle determined by the vertices of
any triangle.
Breakline data (from breaklines, contours, or boundaries) influences how the surface is triangulated. A
breakline edge between the points causes the program to connect these points with a triangle edge in the
TIN, even if doing so violates the Delaunay property.
A TIN surface with contour lines:
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Surfaces drop-down ➤ Create Surface .
In the Create Surface (page 2623) dialog box, in the Type list, select TIN Surface.
2 Click to select a layer. For more information about layers, see Object Layer Dialog Box (page 2221).
NOTE If you do not select a layer, the surface is placed on the current layer.
3 In the properties grid, click the Value column for the Name property and enter a name for the surface.
NOTE To name the surface, click its default name and enter a new name, or use the Name Template. For
more information, see Name Template Dialog Box (page 2022).
5 To change the render material for the surface, click the Render Material property in the properties grid
and click in the Value column.
The Select Render Material dialog box is displayed. For more information, see Applying Render Materials
to Objects (page 1763)
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Surfaces drop-down ➤ Create Surface
Menu
Grid surfaces generally load quickly and require less disk space than TIN surfaces.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Surfaces drop-down ➤ Create Surface .
In the Create Surface (page 2623) dialog box, in the Type list, select Grid Surface.
2 Click to select a layer. For more information about layers, see Object Layer Dialog Box (page 2221).
3 In the properties grid, click the Value column for the Name property and enter a name for the surface.
NOTE To name the surface, click its default name and enter a new name, or use the name template. See
Name Template Dialog Box (page 2022).
4 To change the style for the surface, click the Style property in the properties grid and click in Value
column.
The Select Surface Style dialog box is displayed. See Surface Styles and Visualization (page 748).
5 To change the render material for the surface, click the Render Material property in the properties grid
and click in the Value column.
The Select Render Material dialog box is displayed. See Applying Render Materials to Objects (page 1763)
6 Set the Grid Parameters, such as spacing and orientation. Enter their values or click to use the drawing
area to derive these values.
After the surface is created, the surface name is displayed in the Surfaces collection in the Prospector tree,
so that you can perform other operations, such as adding data and editing the surface.
For information about adding data to the surface, see Adding and Editing Surface Data (page 660).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Surfaces drop-down ➤ Create Surface
Menu
See also:
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Surfaces drop-down ➤ Create Surface .
In the Create Surface (page 2623), in the Type list, select TIN Volume Surface.
2 Click to select a layer. For more information about layers, see Object Layer Dialog Box (page 2221).
NOTE If you do not select a layer, the surface is placed on the current layer.
3 In the properties grid, click the Value column for the Name property and enter a name for the surface.
NOTE To name the surface, click its default name and enter a new name, or use the name template. For
more information, see Name Template Dialog Box (page 2022).
4 To change the style for the surface, click the Style property in the properties grid and click in the
Value column.
The Select Surface Style dialog box is displayed. For more information, see Surface Styles and Visualization
(page 748).
5 To change the render material for the surface, click the Render Material property in the properties grid
and click in the Value column.
The Select Render Material dialog box is displayed. For more information, see Applying Render Materials
to Objects (page 1763)
6 Click the Base Surface property to select the base (bottom) surface. Enter the surface name or click
to open the Select Base Surface (page 2027)dialog box where you can select the surface in the list.
NOTE Select a surface in the drawing by clicking and following the instructions at the command line.
7 Click the Comparison Surface property to select the comparison (top) surface. Enter the surface name
or click to open the Select Comparison Surface dialog box where you can select the surface in the
list.
NOTE Select a surface in the drawing by clicking and following the instructions at the command line.
Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Surfaces drop-down ➤ Create Surface
Menu
A grid volume surface is an approximation of the difference between the base and comparison surfaces. It
is formed by making a grid from points whose Z values are the differences between the Z values of the
comparison and base surfaces. Therefore, the grid volume surface gives the exact difference only at the grid
points. This is true whether the comparison and base surfaces are both grid surfaces, both TIN surfaces, or
one of each.
Grid volume surfaces enable you to generate a volume quickly, which is useful for iterative site design.
NOTE Grid spacing has a direct correlation as to how quickly grid volumes generate.
A volume surface is a persistent surface object. Therefore, you can display cut and fill contours, cut and fill
points, and add labels to it. View a volume property (cut, fill, net) of a volume surface by selecting Surface
Properties. For more information, see Editing and Viewing the Surface Definition (page 731).
If you want only to query and obtain information about a surface volume or a bounded volume (page 2769),
use the Volumes and Bounded Volumes utilities.
See also:
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Surfaces drop-down ➤ Create Surface .
In the Create Surface (page 2623) dialog box, in the Type list, select Grid Volume Surface.
2 Click to select a layer. For more information about layers, see Object Layer Dialog Box (page 2221).
NOTE If you do not select a layer, the surface is placed on the current layer.
3 In the properties grid, click the Value column for the Name property and enter a name for the surface.
NOTE To name the surface, click its default name and enter a new name, or use the name template. For
more information, see Name Template Dialog Box (page 2022).
4 To change the style for the surface, click the Style property in the properties grid and click in the
Value column.
The Select Surface Style dialog box is displayed. For more information, see Surface Styles and Visualization
(page 748).
5 To change the render material for the surface, click the Render Material property in the properties grid
and click in the Value column.
The Select Render Material dialog box is displayed. For more information, see Applying Render Materials
to Objects (page 1763)
6 Click the Base Surface property to select the base (bottom) surface. You can enter the surface name or
click to open the Select Base Surface (page 2027) dialog box where you can select the surface in the
list.
NOTE Select a surface in the drawing by clicking and following the instructions at the command line.
7 To set the grid parameters, such as spacing and orientation, enter their values into the Values column
or click to use the drawing area to derive these values.
NOTE The grid spacing parameters determine how precise a surface volume is. For example, small grid
spacing creates a precise volume measurement (but may increase the loading time).
8 Click the Comparison Surface property to select the comparison (top) surface. Enter the surface name
or click to open the Select Comparison Surface dialog box where you can select the surface in the
list.
NOTE Select a surface in the drawing by clicking and following the instructions at the command line.
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Surfaces drop-down ➤ Create Surface
Menu
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Surfaces drop-down ➤ Create Surface From TIN .
2 In the Create Surface From TIN dialog box, browse to the location of the TIN file and select it.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Surfaces drop-down ➤ Create Surface From TIN
Menu
TIP You can also import DEM files into an existing surface. For more information, see Adding DEM Files to a
Surface (page 686).
For more information about DEM file data, see DEM Files (page 683).
NOTE SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer Standard (page 2782)) DEMs are not supported in AutoCAD Civil 3D. There is a
number of free utilities that you can download and use to convert SDTS data to the supported DEM format.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Surfaces drop-down ➤ Create Surface From DEM .
2 In the Grid Surface From DEM dialog box, browse to the location of the file.
3 Select the DEM (.dem), GeoTIFF (.tif), ESRI ASCII Grid (.asc or .txt), or ESRI Binary Grid (.adf) file. The
filename is displayed in the File Name field.
4 Click Open.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Surfaces drop-down ➤ Create Surface From DEM
Menu
NOTE A surface reference has no data definition, but has masking and watershed analysis functionality.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, in Master View, ensure that the correct working folder is identified
on the Data Shortcuts node.
2 Expand the Data Shortcuts ➤ Surfaces collection, right-click the desired surface, and then click Create
Reference.
The Create Surface Reference dialog box is displayed, in which you can optionally change properties
of the reference surface, as described in the following steps.
3 In the Create Surface Reference dialog box, change the source of the reference by selecting a source in
the Source Surface drop-down list.
4 Click to select a layer. For more information about layers, see Object Layer Dialog Box (page 2221).
NOTE If you do not select a layer, the surface is placed on the current layer.
5 In the properties grid, click the Value column for the Name property. Enter a name for the surface.
NOTE To name the surface, click its default name. Enter a new name, or use the name template. For more
information, see Name Template Dialog Box (page 2022).
6 To change the style for the surface, select the Style property in the properties grid. Click in the Value
column.
The Select Surface Style dialog box is displayed. For more information, see Surface Styles and Visualization
(page 748).
7 To change the render material for the surface, select the Render Material property in the properties grid.
Click in the Value column.
The Select Render Material dialog box is displayed. For more information, see Applying Render Materials
to Objects (page 1763).
The surface name is displayed in the Surfaces collection in the Prospector tree with a next to it.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, in Master View, expand the Projects ➤ <project name> ➤ Surfaces
collection, right-click the desired surface, and then click Create Reference.
The Create Surface Reference dialog box is displayed, in which you can optionally change properties
of the reference surface, as described in the following steps.
2 In the Create Surface Reference dialog box, change the source of the reference by selecting a source in
the Source Surface drop-down list.
3 Click to select a layer. For more information about layers, see Object Layer Dialog Box (page 2221).
NOTE If you do not select a layer, the surface is placed on the current layer.
NOTE To name the surface, click its default name. Enter a new name, or use the name template. For more
information, see Name Template Dialog Box (page 2022).
5 To change the style for the surface, select the Style property in the properties grid. Click in the Value
column.
The Select Surface Style dialog box is displayed. For more information, see Surface Styles and Visualization
(page 748).
6 To change the render material for the surface, select the Render Material property in the properties grid.
Click in the Value column.
The Select Render Material dialog box is displayed. For more information, see Applying Render Materials
to Objects (page 1763).
The surface name is displayed in the Surfaces collection in the Prospector tree with a next to it.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu (for data shortcut project)
Prospector tab: Projects ➤ <project name> ➤ Surfaces ➤ <surface name> ➤ Create Reference
Command Line
CreateSurfaceReference (for Vault surface only)
Dialog Box
Create Surface Reference (page 2453)
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Surfaces drop-down ➤ Create Surface From GIS Data
.
2 On the Object Options page (page 2636) of the Import GIS Data wizard, specify the standard properties
for the new surface object.
■ If you select the SHP file as the data source type, click to specify a single shape file or click
to specify multiple files in a folder.
■ If you select ArcSDE- or Oracle-based datastores, specify a path and user login information. Click
Login.
IMPORTANT If you connect to a datastore using ArcSDE connection, you must install three DLL files. For
information about installing the DLLs, see Working with ESRI ArcSDE Data in the AutoCAD Map 3D User’s
Guide.
4 If connecting to Oracle or ArcSDE datastore, specify the datastore and click Connect to Datastore.
NOTE The connection to the datastore is terminated after the import GIS data operation is completed.
5 On the Schema and Coordinates page (page 2637), specify the GIS schema.
6 Optionally, assign the coordinate system, which may differ from the current Civil 3D drawing, to the
GIS feature class. In this case AutoCAD Civil 3D performs coordinate transformation.
8 Optionally, click Restore the Original Coordinate System to revert to the default setting.
9 Optionally, on the Geospatial Query page (page 2637), select Define Area of Interest By or and select the
geospatial query boundary type:
■ Polygon: Retrieve all objects in a defined polygon.
Alternatively, click to select an object in the drawing or specify the query area manually.
10 On the Data Mapping page (page 2638), preview the results of the geospatial query where the GIS feature
attributes are displayed in the GIS Field column and assign a corresponding Civil 3D object property
to each field.
11 Click Finish.
The objects are added to the Civil 3D drawing.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Surfaces drop-down ➤ Create Surface From GIS Data .
Command Line
CreateSurfaceFromGISData
Dialog Boxes
Import GIS Data wizard (page 2636)
■ Boundaries. Polygons that define outer, hide, and show surface boundary types.
■ Breaklines. Includes standard, proximity, non-destructive, and wall breaklines. You can define breaklines
from objects in the drawing or import them from a file.
■ Contours. Includes contour data that you can define from polyline objects.
NOTE To use SDTS files, first convert them into DEM files. For more information, see About DEM File Data
(page 684).
■ Drawing objects. Includes Line, Point, Block, Text, 3D Faces, and Polyfaces. Used for creating surface
points from AutoCAD entities.
See also:
Data Definition
The data definition for a surface comprises the data components that you can add to a surface.
The following table illustrates the data categories that are supported for each surface type. If the surface type
does not support a data type, the data type is not available in the surface Definition collection in the
Prospector tree.
Breaklines Yes No No No
Contours Yes No No No
Edits
Data edits are operations that are not added to any of the existing data components; rather, they are added
to a surface definition as edit operations.
For more information about surface edits, including the supported types of edits for the various surface
types, see Surface Editing Operations (page 699).
Operation List
The surface build process is incremental. Every time when you add data to a surface or edit the surface, the
surface is updated. When data is removed, the surface is rebuilt. For information about building a surface,
see Rebuilding a Surface (page 735).
To support the incremental build process, a surface has an operation list, which is a sequential list of all
operations performed on the surface in its current state. For more information about the surface operations,
see Surface Editing Operations (page 699) as well as the Surface Properties - Definition (page 2656) tab.
Boundaries
A boundary is a closed polygon that affects the visibility of the triangles inside it.
When you create boundaries, you specify whether they use arc tessellation (page 664) and non-destructive
breaklines (page 664).
Boundary Types
AutoCAD Civil 3D supports the following types of boundaries:
■ Outer. Defines the outer boundary of the surface; all triangles inside it are visible and all triangles that
are outside it, are invisible.
NOTE The outer boundary may be affected by subsequent edit operations, such as Add Breaklines. You may
need to move the Add Boundary operation to the bottom of the list to achieve the expected result.
Boundaries | 661
NOTE You can define multiple outer boundaries, but only the last defined outer boundary is displayed. You
can use the surface definition to switch between multiple outer boundaries.
■ Show. Displays all triangles inside the boundary; you can use it to create visible areas within hide
boundaries.
NOTE The effect of adding multiple boundaries to a surface is dependent on the order in which they are
added. The effects of a boundary can be wholly or partially overridden by a subsequent boundary.
■ Hide. Masks areas of the triangulation, and therefore contours are not visible in the area; used to punch
holes in a surface (for example, a building footprint).
A hide boundary created using non-destructive breaklines (page 664):
■ Data Clip. Creates a surface boundary limited by a polygon object from the drawing, such as 2D and 3D
polylines, feature lines, survey figures, parcels, and circles.
You can add more than one data clip boundary to a surface. When you add data, only the most recent
data clip boundary is affected. A data clip boundary does not affect the visible part of the surface, but
acts as a filter on all data, such as points and breaklines added to the surface after the creation of data
clip. For example, if you add a breakline to a surface following the creation of a data clip boundary, only
the part of the breakline that is inside the data clip boundary is added.
Surface boundaries are defined by selecting existing polygons from the drawing. The surface definition
displays the numerical ID and a list of vertices for each boundary.
1 Create a surface from imported data (TIN, grading, or corridor). See Creating a Surface From a TIN File
(page 655) , Creating a New Grading Group (page 806), Creating a Corridor Surface (page 1507).
2 Add the Data Clip boundary to the surface. See Adding Boundaries to a Surface (page 664).
3 In the Prospector tree, expand the Surfaces collection, right-click <surface name> ➤ Surface Properties.
5 Select the Add Data Clip Boundary operation and click to move it to the top of the list.
Boundaries | 663
6 Click Apply.
NOTE If the polygon is not closed, the boundary definition forces a closed polygon.
Areas hidden by boundaries are not included in calculations, such as total area and volume.
When creating a boundary, you set arc tessellation and specify whether the boundary uses non-destructive
breaklines when adding boundaries to a surface.
Arc Tessellation
When you use polygons/polylines that contain curves for boundaries or breaklines, set the mid-ordinate
distance of the chord segments, which is used to tessellate the arc segments of the boundary polygon/polyline:
Non-Destructive Breaklines
Specify whether a boundary uses non-destructive breaklines when you create it by selecting Non-destructive
breaklines in the Add Boundaries (page 2616) dialog box.
When you create a boundary with non-destructive breaklines along the edges of the boundary, the triangle
edges are clipped exactly where they cross the boundary:
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, right-click , and click
Add.
2 In the Add Boundaries (page 2616) dialog box, enter the boundary name in the Name field.
3 Select the boundary type from the Type list. See Boundaries (page 661).
4 Optionally, select Non-destructive breakline specify that the boundary uses non-destructive breaklines.
NOTE For a TIN surface, by default, the Non-destructive breakline check box is cleared and non-destructive
breaklines are not used. For grid surfaces, the Non-destructive breakline field is disabled and not available.
Boundaries | 665
5 Optionally, if the polygon from which you are creating a boundary has curves, either enter a value in
the Mid-Ordinate Distance field or click to specify a distance in the drawing area.
The Add Boundaries dialog box is closed. You are prompted to select a polyline.
■ An existing parcel
The boundary is created and added to the surface Boundaries collection in the Prospector tree.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
2 Right-click a boundary in the list view and click Insert Into Drawing.
■ If the boundary does not exist in the drawing, it is added as a polyline object.
■ If the boundary exists in the drawing, a message box is displayed stating that no boundaries are
inserted into the drawing.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection and click .
The Prospector list view displays the following:
■ The name of the boundary
3 Click Properties to open the Boundary Properties (page 2619) dialog box where you can edit the name of
the boundary. All other fields are read only.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Breaklines
Use breaklines to define features, such as retaining walls, curbs, tops of ridges, and streams. Breaklines force
surface triangulation along the breakline preventing triangulation across the breakline.
Breaklines are critical to creating an accurate surface model because it is the interpolation of the data, not
only the data itself, that determines the shape of the model.
Breaklines | 667
Types of Breaklines
Define standard, proximity, wall, and non-destructive breaklines for a TIN surface.
■ Proximity. Defined by drawing or selecting a grading feature line or polyline object in the drawing within
the extents of the surface boundary. The XYZ coordinates of proximity breakline vertices are determined
from the surface TIN points that are in closest proximity to the corresponding vertices of the defining
points or entity.
NOTE To specify breaklines from points, first convert the points into 3D or 3D polylines using the ’PN command.
For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
■ Wall. Defined using grading feature lines, 3D lines, 3D polylines, or by specifying points. A wall breakline
is stored as a standard breakline, but defined differently: you provide an offset side for the entire breakline,
and an elevation difference for each vertex, or for the entire breakline.
■ Non-destructive. Defined using grading feature lines and open or closed AutoCAD objects. A
non-destructive breakline maintains the integrity of the original surface.
You can also import breaklines from ASCII FLT files into the surface definition.
■ Convert Proximity Breaklines. Automatically converts proximity breaklines to standard breaklines when
they are created.
For more information, see Editing and Viewing the Surface Definition (page 731).
WARNING If you select a 2D polyline with a zero elevation, then it is saved with that elevation. Use proximity
breaklines if you want the elevations calculated automatically.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, right-click , and click
Add.
2 In the Add Breaklines (page 2615) dialog box, enter the breakline description in the Description field.
4 Optionally, if the polyline from which you are creating a breakline has curves, enter a value into the
Mid-Ordinate Distance field or to select a distance in the drawing area.
The Add Breaklines dialog box closes and you are prompted to select a polyline.
Breaklines | 669
5 Select the polyline or line to define the breakline.
The breakline is created and added to the surface Breaklines collection item in the Prospector tree.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Define proximity breaklines by selecting a polyline. You do not have to draw the polyline precisely between
surface points. The breakline definition automatically snaps to the surface point that is nearest each polyline
vertex when the breakline is added to the surface.
Proximity breaklines are 2D polylines with elevations of 0. The northing, easting, and elevation are calculated
for each vertex according to the closest surface point. By default, proximity breaklines are converted to
standard breaklines when added to a surface. You can disable the automatic conversion of proximity breaklines
to standard breaklines by setting the Convert Proximity Breaklines To Standard build option to No in the
Definition tab (page 2656) of the Surface Properties dialog box.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, right-click , and click
Add.
2 In the Add Breaklines (page 2615) dialog box, enter the breakline description in the Description field.
4 Optionally, if the polyline from which you are creating a breakline has curves, enter a value into the
Mid-Ordinate Distance field or click to digitize a distance in the drawing area.
The Add Breaklines dialog box is closed. You are prompted to select a polyline.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Breaklines | 671
There are two methods used to define wall breaklines:
■ Define by object vertex (Individual). Select a polyline, or line, and select the offset side. For each polyline
vertex, you select either the vertex elevation (Existing Vertex Elevation is the default) and the
corresponding offset vertex elevation (the default is Existing Polyline Vertex) or the corresponding offset
vertex elevation difference. If an elevation difference option is selected, the difference value is the default
for each subsequent vertex.
■ Define by object (All). Select a polyline, or line object, and select the offset side. Then, enter the difference
elevation to be applied for all offset vertices.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, right-click Breaklines,
and click Add.
2 In the Add Breaklines (page 2615) dialog box, enter the breakline description in the Description field.
4 Optionally, if the polyline from which you are creating a breakline has curves, enter a value into the
Mid-Ordinate Distance field or click to digitize a distance in the drawing area.
The Add Breaklines dialog box is closed. A message prompts you to select a polyline.
6 Select the offset side for the wall breakline. This is the side for the new offset line that represents the
elevation of material on the other side of the wall.
■ To define the wall breakline by object vertex, specify Individual at the prompt and enter the elevation
or delta for each vertex.
The prompts provide two ways to define elevations for each offset point: as an elevation (Elevation)
or as the elevation difference (Delta) between the control point and the offset point. Deltas may be
either positive or negative values.
The breakline is created and added to the surface Breaklines collection in the Prospector tree.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Breaklines | 673
The elevation for each new point is extracted from the original surface triangle, therefore maintaining the
integrity of the original surface.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, right-click , and click
Add.
2 In the Add Breaklines (page 2615) dialog box, enter the breakline description in the Description field.
4 If the object from which you are creating a breakline has curves, enter a value in the Mid-ordinate
distance field or click to digitize a distance in the drawing area.
5 Click OK.
The Add Breaklines dialog box closes. A message appears prompting you to select an object.
NOTE The Description column in the Prospector list view displays the ID of the breakline that was added to
the surface. To view information about the breakline vertices, open the Breakline Properties vista. For
information, see Viewing Breakline Information (page 676)
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
■ Maintain Link To File. Reads the breakline from the FLT file when they are added and when the surface
is rebuilt. If you edit or delete the source FLT file, the Import Breakline File operation is marked as
out-of-date. With this option, you cannot list individual breaklines, view them in the Breakline Properties
vista, or import them into the drawing.
■ Break Link To File. All breaklines in the FLT file are copied into the surface as Add Breakline operations.
The FLT file is no longer referenced. When you rebuild the surface, the internal copy of the breakline is
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, right-click , and click
Add.
2 In the Add Breaklines (page 2615) dialog box, enter the breakline description in the Description field.
4 Select the file link option. For information, see File Linking Options (page 674).
5 Click OK.
The Import Breakline File dialog box is displayed.
NOTE The breaklines are imported and grouped by type according to their order in the .flt file.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
■ Use one of the letters P, S, W, L, R, N (or ND) at the beginning of the line to describe the breakline
type. These letters stand for Proximity, Standard, Wall, Wall Left, Wall Right, and Non-destructive.
Identify a breakline type for each new breakline.
■ A description of the breakline can follow the first coordinate of the line.
Breaklines | 675
■ To create another breakline, enter the breakline type letter at the beginning of a line. In the following
example, an S is placed at the beginning of line 8 of the file. All the points from this point until the
next breakline letter modifier are in one breakline. This breakline is called EOP.
2 Right-click a breakline operation in the Prospector tree or list view and do one of the following:
■ Click Zoom To or Pan To to see the location of the breakline operation in the drawing.
■ Click Properties to display the Breakline Properties (page 2619) vista, which displays the individual
breaklines as well as a list of vertices and the coordinates and elevation for each vertex.
3 To zoom or pan to an individual breakline vertex, in the Breakline Properties vista, right-click the vertex
and click Zoom To or Pan To.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Editing Breaklines
Edit any breaklines that you have defined by selecting it in the drawing. You can insert, move, and delete
vertices, as well as redefine the elevation at a selected vertex.
Use any AutoCAD editing commands, including:
■ Change command
The surface stores an ID for each of the objects that are defined as breaklines. Therefore, if you modify any
of the breakline objects using any of the mentioned commands, the surface is marked as out-of-date until
you rebuild it.
NOTE You can rebuild a surface automatically by toggling the check mark next to the Rebuild - Automatic menu
entry available on the surface shortcut menu in Prospector. For more information, see Rebuilding a Surface (page
735).
1 Select the breakline either graphically or by using an AutoCAD command, such as Properties Edit (Pedit)
or Change.
If the breakline and surface definition become out-of-date, a is displayed next to its node in the
Prospector tree.
3 Rebuild the surface to update the breakline definition by right-clicking the surface in the Prospector
tree and clicking Rebuild.
NOTE You can rebuild a surface automatically by toggling the check mark next to the Rebuild - Automatic
menu entry available on the surface short-cut menu in Prospector. For more information, see Rebuilding a
Surface (page 735).
2 Click the breakline operation description in the list view and enter a new description.
NOTE You cannot rename individual breakline descriptions. They are named based on the breakline operation
description.
Breaklines | 677
NOTE You cannot insert into the drawing breaklines that you have imported from an .flt file (ASCII file format),
unless you used the Break Link To File option. For information, see Importing Breaklines from a File (page 674).
You may need to insert breaklines into the drawing if you deleted the original entity and did not update
the surface. In this case, you can import the breakline from the breakline collection.
If any of the selected breaklines exist in the drawing, a message box is displayed stating that no breaklines
are inserted into the drawing. Polyline objects are created on the current layer.
2 Right-click a breakline operation in the list view and click Insert to Drawing.
■ If the breakline objects in the breakline operation do not exist in the drawing, they are added to
the drawing as polyline objects.
■ If the breaklines exist in the drawing, a message box is displayed stating that no breaklines are
inserted into the drawing.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Contours
Use contour data to create or modify a surface.
Surface contour data are created from polylines whose points are all at the same elevation.
You can add contour data only to TIN surfaces.
NOTE For some contour data sets, Check for Contour Problems report large numbers of errors if you add the
contour data to the surface without specifying Minimize Flat Areas By options.
After you have added your contour data and repaired problems, verify the contours visually. Add additional
contours where needed, and add spot elevation data or breaklines only where they are required to correct a
specific problem. For more information on repair, see Supplementing Missing Contour Information (page
680) and Minimizing Flat Areas in a Surface (page 705). Repair all problems.
After you have identified and repaired contour problems, add additional surface data such as additional spot
elevation points. Add surface boundaries last. Add boundaries starting at the outside of the surface and
working toward the inside.
Weeding Factors
Weeding reduces the number of points generated along the contours. The weeding factors ignore both
vertices that are closer together than the distance factor and vertices that deflect less than the angle factor.
A larger distance and deflection angle weeds a greater number of points. The distance factor is measured in
linear units, and the angle factor is measured in angular units. The weeding factors must be less than the
supplementing factors.
A point on the contour is weeded by calculating its location in relation to the vertices before and after it. If
the length between these three points is less than the weeding length value, and the deflection angle is less
than the weeding angle value, then the middle point is not added to the contour data file.
Examples of weeding factor parameters:
Contours | 679
Supplementing Factors
Supplementing factors add vertices along contours.
The supplementing distance is the maximum distance between vertices. If the distance between vertices on
a contour is greater than the supplementing factor, then points are added along the contour at equal intervals
that are less than or equal to the supplementing distance. The smaller the distance, the greater the number
of supplemented points.
Example of the distance (SD) parameter with supplemented vertices:
The mid-ordinate distance is the distance from the midway point of an arc to the chord of the arc. The
mid-ordinate distance is used to add vertices to a polyline curve, creating an approximation of the curve
using straight line segments. The length of these segments depends on the value of the mid-ordinate distance.
Example of the mid-ordinate parameter:
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, right-click Contours,
and click Add.
2 In the Add Contour Data (page 2617)dialog box, enter the contour description in the Description field.
3 Enter the distance and angle weeding factors in the corresponding fields or click to digitize a distance
or angle in the drawing area. For more information, see Weeding and Supplementing Factors for Contours
(page 679).
4 Enter the distance and mid-ordinate distance supplementing factors in the corresponding fields or click
to select a distance or mid-ordinate distance in the drawing area.
5 Select options for minimizing flat areas in the surface. For more information, see Minimizing Flat Areas
in a Surface (page 705).
6 Click OK.
7 Select the polyline to define the contour data and press Enter.
The contour data is created and added to the surface Contours collection in the Prospector tree.
NOTE Before displaying the Add Contour Data dialog box, it can be useful to create a selection set of contour
objects using the QSELECT command at the command line or choosing Select Similar from the Edit menu.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Contours | 681
Dialog Box
Add Contour Data (page 2617)
2 Right-click a contour data item in the Prospector list view and click Zoom To or Pan To, to see the
location of the contour data in the drawing.
Editing Contours
Edit any contour that you have defined by selecting it in the drawing. You can insert, move, and delete
vertices, as well as redefine the elevation at a selected vertex.
You can use any AutoCAD editing commands, including:
■ Change command
The surface stores an ID for each of the objects that are defined as contours. Therefore, if you modify any
of the contour objects using any of the mentioned commands, the surface is marked as out-of-date until
you rebuild it.
NOTE You can rebuild a surface automatically by toggling the check mark next to the Rebuild - Automatic menu
entry available on the surface short-cut menu in Prospector. For more information, see Rebuilding a Surface (page
735).
1 Select the contour graphically or by using an AutoCAD command, such as PEDIT or CHANGE.
If the contour and surface definition become out-of-date, a is displayed next to its node in the
Prospector tree.
3 Rebuild the surface to update the contour definition by right-clicking the surface in the Prospector tree
and clicking Rebuild.
TIP You can update the surface automatically by turning on Rebuild - Automatic. For more information, see
Rebuilding a Surface (page 735).
1 In the Prospector tree, expand the Surfaces collection ➤ <surface name> ➤ Definition.
3 Right-click a contour operation in the list view and click Insert To Drawing.
■ If the contour objects in the contour operation do not exist in the drawing, they are added to the
drawing as AutoCAD polyline objects.
NOTE You can insert multiple contours using the Insert To Drawing command.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
DEM Files
Use digital elevation model (DEM) files or SDTS files converted to a DEM format to import points into a
surface.
DEM files are used to store and transfer large-scale topographic relief information for use in GIS, earth
sciences, resource management, land planning, surveying, and engineering projects. DEM files typically
contain land XYZ information at a regular grid-spaced interval to represent ground relief.
You can add and remove DEM files, and view DEM information. To transform DEM coordinates so they
match the coordinate system of the current drawing when the surface is built, specify a coordinate system
for the DEM file.
DEM files are a valuable data source for many planning and engineering tasks that might not need the type
of precision gained by doing a ground or aerial survey. DEM files can also, in some places, completely
eliminate the need for specific surveys. Usually, the DEM data is not precise enough to use on small-scale
studies, but is ideal for large-scale planning and analysis tasks.
NOTE SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer Standard) format DEM data is not supported for this release of AutoCAD Civil
3D. However, you can use free utilities to convert SDTS data to DEM format.
Descrip- 1 The first 140 characters of a DEM file, which may include
tion the file name and location.
Estimated N/A The estimated number of points in the DEM file, rounded
Point up to three significant digits.
Total
Vertical 31 The value is the average shift value for the four quad-
Datum rangle corners obtained from program VERTCON.
Shift AutoCAD Civil 3D adds this value to the vertical datum
to convert to NAVD88. If the vertical datum is NAVD88,
then the vertical datum shift value should be zero.
Minimum 12 The minimum elevation for the DEM. The value is the
Elevation units of measure defined by Elevation Units.
Maximum 12 The maximum elevation for the DEM. The value is the
Elevation units of measure defined by Elevation Units.
X Spacing 15 DEM spatial resolution for X values. The value is the units
of measure defined by the XY Units.
Y Spacing 15 DEM spatial resolution for Y values. The value is the units
of measure defined by the XY Units.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, right-click , and click
Add.
2 In the Add DEM File (page 2627) dialog box, enter the path and name of the DEM file or click and
browse to the location of the DEM file.
3 Select the DEM file so that its name is displayed in the File Name field and click Open.
The DEM file name and information is displayed in the corresponding Add DEM File dialog box fields.
4 Optionally, change the coordinate system of the DEM data. For more information, see Changing the
Specified Coordinate System of a DEM File (page 686).
The points of the DEM file are transformed from the specified coordinate system of the DEM file to the
coordinate system of the current drawing taking into account any Transformation settings specified in
the Drawing Settings dialog box.
NOTE DEM files cannot be transformed for grid surfaces. If you include a DEM file as part of a grid surface
definition, its coordinate system must match that of the drawing, or it cannot be added.
The DEM file is added to the surface DEM Files collection in the Prospector tree.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
NOTE Specify a coordinate system for the DEM file only if the coordinate system of the DEM file is different from
the current coordinate system of the drawing and you want a coordinate transformation to occur when you build
the surface.
If you used the wrong coordinate system when adding the DEM file, you can select a different coordinate
system for the file by changing the DEM file properties.
NOTE If the coordinates are transformed, the points no longer lie on a grid. Therefore, the transformation of DEM
data is not supported when adding a DEM file to a grid surface. You can change a DEM coordinate system only
when adding a DEM file to a TIN surface.
When the DEM Co- And the Drawing The following results occur:
ordinate System Coordinate System
(source) is set to... (destination) is set
to...
NH State Plane NAD27 NH State Plane NAD83 The DEM file coordinate data is trans-
formed from NAD27 to NAD83 when
you build the surface.
NH State Plane NAD27 None The DEM file data is not transformed
when the surface is built; the DEM file
data is taken at face value. For ex-
ample, point 100,100,100 in the DEM
file is point 100,100,100 in the sur-
face.
None NH State Plane NAD83 The DEM file data is not transformed
when the surface is built; the DEM file
data is taken at face value. For ex-
ample, point 100,100,100 in the DEM
file is point 100,100,100 in the sur-
face.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, and click DEM Files.
2 Right-click a DEM file in the Prospector list view and click Properties.
3 In the DEM File Properties (page 2627) dialog box, select the CS Code property field and click the browse
button.
4 In the Select Coordinate Zone (page 2640)dialog box, click the Category list and select a category.
6 Optionally, click Properties to view the properties of the selected coordinate system.
7 Click OK to select the coordinate system and close the dialog box.
The DEM file property group displays the newly selected coordinate system.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Surfaces ➤ <surface-name> ➤ Definition ➤ DEM Files ➤ right-click <DEM-file> in list
view ➤ Properties
Dialog Box
DEM File Properties (page 2627)
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, and click .
The DEM files with their names, modified dates, and sizes are displayed in the Prospector list view.
2 In the list view, right-click the DEM file for which you want to import the extents and click Import
DEM Extents.
The DEM extents are drawn as a polyline rectangle representing the four corners of the DEM extents.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Surfaces ➤ <surface-name> ➤ Definition ➤ DEM Files ➤ right-click <DEM-file> in list
view ➤ Import DEM Extents
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection and click DEM Files.
The DEM files are displayed in the Prospector list view.
2 In the list view, right-click a DEM file and click Zoom To or Pan To.
The drawing area displays the surface data zooming or panning to the area relative to the selected DEM
data (according to the surface style settings). For information about setting and changing the surface
display, see Surface Styles and Visualization (page 748).
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, and click .
The DEM files are displayed in the Prospector list view.
2 In the list view, right-click on the DEM file and click Properties to display the DEM File (Add/Properties)
Dialog Box (page 2627).
Detailed information about the DEM file is displayed in the DEM File Information field. For more
information, see About DEM File Data (page 684).
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Surfaces ➤ <surface-name> ➤ Definition ➤ DEM Files ➤ right-click <DEM-file> in list
view ➤ Properties
See also:
NOTE Drawing objects added to the surface are added as point data. After the point data has been added to the
surface there is no relationship between the surface and the original drawing objects.
You can select the following AutoCAD drawing objects to add points to a surface definition:
■ Points. The XYZ coordinates of the object are used to define the surface point.
■ Lines. The XYZ coordinates of the object endpoints are used to define surface points.
■ Blocks. The block insertion point XYZ coordinates are used to define the surface point.
■ Text. The text insertion point XYZ coordinates are used to define the surface point.
■ Polyfaces. The XYZ coordinates of the object endpoints are used to define surface points.
NOTE Optionally, when adding lines, 3D faces, and polyfaces, you can maintain the original AutoCAD object
edges as surface triangle edges.
NOTE To add COGO points to surface data, add point groups. For more information, see Point Groups (page
693).
1 In the Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, right-click , and
click Add.
2 In the Add Points From Drawing Objects (page 2618) dialog box, select the object type from the Object
Type list.
3 Click Maintain Edges From Objects if you are adding points from lines, 3D faces, or polyfaces, and you
want to maintain the AutoCAD object edges. This prevents AutoCAD Civil 3D from optimizing the
edges.
5 Click OK.
6 Select the object in the drawing or use any of the standard AutoCAD object selection methods.
The objects are added to the surface definition and are displayed in the surface Drawing Objects collection
list view with their description and type.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 Select a surface. On the Surface tab, click Surface Tools panel Move Blocks To Attribute Elevation
.
4 Click OK.
The selected block reference objects are moved to the elevation of the specified attribute.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select a surface. On the Surface tab, click Surface Tools panel Move Blocks To Attribute Elevation
Menu
1 Select a surface. On the Surface tab, click Surface Tools panel Move Text To Elevation .
2 Select the text object in the drawing or use any of the standard AutoCAD object selection methods.
3 Click Enter.
If the value of a text object is a real number, the text object is moved to the elevation corresponding to the
numeric text value.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select a surface. Surface tab ➤ Surface Tools panel Move Text To Elevation
Menu
An example of the contents of a PENZ space delimited format point text file:
26303 315872.971714 4838799.938284 111.250000
26304 315876.474880 4838813.524640 111.280000
26305 315873.911320 4838829.056520 111.950000
26306 315861.792509 4838799.287159 112.060000
26307 315855.883079 4838798.942969 114.160000
26308 315855.585197 4838811.389822 114.080000
26309 315861.566272 4838812.001057 111.920000
There are several supported point file formats. If your point files use a format that is not recognized by the
surface Add Point File command, you can convert the files to a supported format.
First, you create a point file format that describes the layout of the data in the point files. Then, using the
point file format, you convert the files to a supported format using the Transfer Points utility. For more
information, see Transferring and Converting Point Data (page 536).
You can manually create ASCII text files that contain point data. For more information, see Creating a Point
File Manually (page 693).
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, right-click , and click
Add.
2 In the Add Point File (page 2618) dialog box, select the format of the point file or click to create a
point file format that describes the layout of the data in the point data file.
3 Enter the point file path and name into the Source File field or click to browse and select the point
file.
2 Enter the point number, easting, northing, and elevation values. Separate each value by one or more
spaces.
3 Enter the information for each point on a separate line. For best results, do not include extra spaces at
the end of a line or blank lines at the end of the file. The file should consist entirely of point data.
However, you can add a comment line by entering a # sign at the beginning of a line.
Point Groups
Add point groups to a surface definition.
Use point groups to break the drawing COGO points into smaller groupings of points, to identify points
that share common characteristics, such as number, name, elevation, or that are used to perform a task,
such as creating a surface.
You can create point groups that contain specific points, such as all existing ground points, making it easier
to manage the surface points.
See Understanding Point Groups (page 553).
1 Create a point group if needed. For information, see Creating Point Groups (page 561).
2 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click the surface Point Groups collection and click Add.
3 In the Point Groups dialog box, in the list of available point groups, select the point group to add to
the surface.
NOTE For information about other point group functionality, such as viewing and changing the properties
of a point group, see Understanding Point Groups (page 553).
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 Select a surface. On the Surface tab, click Surface Tools panel Move Blocks To Surface .
2 If the drawing contains more then one surface, from the Select a Surface dialog box, select the surface
or click to pick the surface manually.
3 In the Move Blocks to Surface dialog box, select the Block Reference objects or click to select the
block reference objects directly from the drawing.
4 Click OK.
Each selected Block Reference object is moved from its current elevation to the elevation of the surface at
the object insertion point.
Select a surface. Surface tab ➤ Surface Tools panel Move Blocks To Surface
Menu
NOTE The extracted objects preserve the properties set in the current surface style.
The following table lists the extracted objects for each type of surface components.
Gridded (2D and 3D) ■ POLYLINE object (if the Border Display Mode (page 2645) is
set to Use Surface Elevation
■ LWPOLYLINE object (if the Border Display Mode (page 2645)
is set to Flatten to Elevation)
Directions (2D and 3D) The type of object depends on the surface style settings. See
Creating a Surface Style (page 749).
Elevations (2D and 3D)
1 Select a surface. On the Surface tab, Surface Tools panel, click Extract Objects .
2 If more than one surface is available in the drawing, in the Select a Surface dialog box, select the surface
from which to extract components.
3 In the Extract Objects from Surface dialog box, under Property, deselect the components that you do
not want to extract (all visible surface components are selected by default).
■ Choose Select From Drawing, click , and select the required surface components.
5 Click OK.
Every selected surface component is extracted from the surface object.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select a surface. On the Surface tab, Surface Tools panel, click Extract Objects
Menu
■ Item modified Indicates that the definition item has been modified after being added to the surface.
■ Item not found Indicates that the definition item is not found when the surface properties dialog
box is initialized.
■ Item not OK Indicates that the definition item was not successfully added due to a change in the
surface.
For more information about the Operation Type list, see (page 2656)
Build Errors
Use the Event Viewer to view surface build errors that occur when data or edit operations cannot be performed
due to removal of the data or its dependencies.
The following is a list of build errors that can be displayed:
Build Error - Duplicate Point A duplicate point XY location was ignored at <XY co-
ordinates>.
Build Error - Crossing Break- A crossing breakline was ignored at <starting or ending
line coordinate>.
When this occurs, is displayed in the Import Surface operation type on the (page 2656) of the Surface
Properties dialog box indicating that the item was not found. You cannot rebuild the surface. However,
additional data can be added, and certain edits (those that do not cause a rebuild) can be performed.
The problem can be fixed by editing the Operation Type parameter and entering the correct path and name
for the external file.
1 To update the path, right-click the surface name in the Prospector tree, right-click, and click Properties.
2 In the Surface Properties dialog box, on the Definition tab, click the folder icon next to Import XML
File.
3 In the Import XML File dialog box, browse to the location where you installed AutoCAD Civil 3D, and
locate the XML files.
5 When prompted if you want to rebuild the surface, click Yes to update the surface properties, and
rebuild the surface.
6 To update the snapshot, right-click the surface name in the Prospector tree, and click Rebuild Snapshot.
7 Right-click the surface name in the Prospector tree, and click Rebuild.
2 Click the Information tab and select the desired Object Style from the drop-down list.
2 In the Definition tab, under Operation Type, clear the Drawing Objects check box, or you can right-click
Drawing Objects and click Remove From Definition.
The drawing objects are removed from the surface definition, and the surface is automatically updated.
You can access the data editing functionality for a surface by right-clicking Edits under a surface Definition
in the Prospector tree. If a surface type does not support an edit operation, the operation is not listed. The
following table lists the edits that are supported for each surface type:
Edit Operation TIN Surface TIN Volume Grid Sur- Grid Volume
Surface face Surface
TIP To perform this operation, ensure that the surface style has triangles visibility enabled. See Surface Styles and
Visualization (page 748).
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, right-click , and click
Add Line.
3 Click existing vertices as the endpoints for the new TIN lines.
The triangulation of the surface is modified to reflect the new lines.
NOTE The Description column in the list view displays the coordinates of the selected points that created
the TIN line.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
■ TIN or grid lines within a pond or building foundation to create a void area to prevent contours from
being drawn through the void areas.
When you remove an edge, an interior border, following the adjacent lines, is created, or the exterior border
is modified to follow the new lines.
TIP To perform this operation, ensure that the surface style has triangles visibility enabled and that the OSNAP
Endpoint setting is disabled. See Surface Styles and Visualization (page 748).
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, right-click , and click
Delete Line.
2 At the command line, you are prompted to select the edges (lines) to remove.
3 Click the edges that you want to remove and press Enter.
NOTE If you are deleting grid lines, select the grid lines, not the triangulation lines.
The edges are removed. An interior border, following the adjacent TIN or grid lines, is created, or the
exterior border is modified to follow the new TIN or grid lines.
The edits are added as Delete Line or Delete Multiple Lines operations to the Edits list view in Prospector.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Swapping Edges
Use edge swapping to change the direction of two triangle faces in the surface model so that, for example,
the triangle edges match ridges or swales.
■ The edge is not a breakline edge or an edge created by an Add Line operation.
■ The quadrilateral formed by the two triangles (which are separated by the edge) is convex.
TIP To perform this operation, ensure that the surface style has triangles visibility enabled. See Surface Styles and
Visualization (page 748).
To swap an edge
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, right-click , and click
Swap Edge.
2 At the command line, you are prompted to select an edge (line) to swap.
NOTE The Description column in the Prospector list view displays the coordinates of the point that you
picked in the drawing area to select the edge.
Adding points in this manner constitutes a surface edit, and can be enabled and disabled in the surface
properties. This operation adds points to the surface definition rather than to the surface data components.
NOTE If you are adding a point to a grid surface, you can add points only outside the existing border or to a hole
with no points inside the surface area. This command uses the SNAP orientation (based on the spacing and
orientation of the surface being edited).
TIP To perform this operation, ensure that the surface style has triangles visibility enabled. See Surface Styles and
Visualization (page 748).
To add points
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, right-click , and click
Add Point.
NOTE The Description column in the list view displays the coordinates and elevation for the points that were
added.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
The points are not deleted from any of the existing surface data components. The deleted point operations
are added only to the surface definition.
TIP To perform this operation, ensure that the surface style has triangles or points visibility enabled. See Surface
Styles and Visualization (page 748).
To delete points
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, right-click , and click
Delete Point.
4 Press Enter.
NOTE When you delete an interior point from a grid surface, an interior border, following the adjacent grid
lines, is created.
NOTE The Description column in the list view displays the coordinates and elevation for the points that were
deleted.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
These points are not modified in any of the existing surface data components. The modify point operations
are added only to the surface definition.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, right-click , and click
Modify Point.
2 At the command line, you are prompted to select the points to edit.
4 Press Enter.
5 You are prompted to specify the new elevation for the points.
9 The modified points are added as Modify Point or Modify Multiple Points operations in the Edits list
view in Prospector.
NOTE The Description column in the list view displays the coordinates and new elevation (Z) for the points
that were modified.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
The points you move are not modified in any of the existing surface data components. The move point
operation is added to the surface definition. This operation does not require the surface points to be visible.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, right-click , and click
Move Point.
2 At the command line, you are prompted to select the point you want to move.
NOTE The Description column in the list view displays the coordinates of the old (from) and new (to) location
of the point.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
The following illustration shows a surface with flat areas where the triangles (in cyan) of a surface are created
from red contour lines. Some of the flat triangles and flat edges are indicated:
These flat areas represent inaccuracies in the surface. When the contours of such a surface are displayed,
they might not match the original contour data around the flat areas. Also, displayed contours might contain
points with three contour segments emanating from them instead of the expected two segments. Use the
Minimize Flat Areas operation to find and eliminate triangles that have three points at the same elevation
and edges that connect points on different data contours at the same elevation.
TIP You can view flat triangles graphically by using slope shading. If you shade the surface using one range with
a slope of 0.00 percent, you will see the flat areas along the contour data.
Filling Gaps
This option fills the small gaps that sometimes occur in displayed contours and creates one continuous
contour. If the two ends of the gap are close enough to be connected by a single triangle edge, the gap is
filled by making that edge and the two data contours it joins into a single data contour. No additional points
or edges are added.
If you want to control which gaps are filled, you can add contour data without selecting this option, and
then use the Check for Contour Problems operation, which reports both ends of the gap. If, after reviewing
the results of the operation, you identify gaps that you do not want filled, add a surface point between the
two gap endpoints with an elevation above or below the contour. Then use the Minimize Flat Areas operation
with the Filling Gaps In Contour Data option selected to fill the remaining gaps.
NOTE Gaps are filled in displayed contours only. The original surface contour data is not changed.
Swapping Edges
This option scans the surface looking for a flat triangle that shares a non-contour edge with a non-flat
triangle. If the two triangles form a convex quadrilateral, the common edge is swapped, creating two non-flat
triangles. This may result in other flat triangles sharing non-contour edges with non-flat triangles, and these
edges are swapped if possible. The process continues until no more swapping is possible.
This command reverses the direction of a TIN line between four adjacent surface points. To perform this
operation, ensure that the surface style has points visibility enabled.
See Editing a Surface Style (page 750).
After the command is performed, the surface size remains unchanged and the surface contains the same
number of points and triangles.
IMPORTANT The command does not remove all flat triangles and flat edges. Some of the new triangles may
have extremely steep slopes.
One benefit of the Swapping Edges option is that it does not increase the size of the surface. The Adding
Points To Flat Triangle Edges and Adding Points To Flat Edges options generally produce better results, but
they increase the size of the surface.
TIP You can differentiate between the display of points that are created from the contour data and the points
that are added by the Minimize Flat Areas operation by changing the surface style. On the Points tab in the surface
style, make the Data Point Symbol and Color different from the Derived Point Symbol and Color.
Before using the Minimize Flat Areas operation on a surface, you might find it helpful to evaluate flat areas
so you can control the results of the operation, as shown in the following examples.
The following illustration shows a surface generated for a ridge where an open contour ends near the border
of the surface but not on the border. The contours were added to the surface model with no Minimize Flat
Areas. By options specified:
These results occur because the NNI interpolation uses surrounding points to determine an appropriate
elevation for a new point. Because all surrounding elevations are lower than the flat triangle, elevations
lower than the flat triangle are selected for the added points, resulting in the dip in the ridge.
In this instance, you can supplement the contour data by adding a spot elevation point near the open end
of the contour, as shown in the following illustration. Then, the Minimize Flat Areas operation generates a
crown as desired.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, right-click , and click
Minimize Flat Areas.
2 In the Minimize Flat Areas (page 2639) dialog box, select check boxes to specify Minimize Flat Areas By
options.
The selected options are performed in the order in which they appear in the dialog box.
3 Click OK.
The operation is added as a Minimize Flat Areas operation to the Edits list view in the Prospector tree,
with the selected options listed in the Description column of the list view.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Surfaces ➤ <surface-name> ➤ Definition ➤ right-click Edits ➤ Minimize Flat Areas
Command Line
MinimizeSurfaceFlatAreas
A positive value increases the elevation; a negative value lowers the elevation.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, right-click , and click
Raise/Lower Surface.
The following prompt is displayed:
Amount to add to all elevations:
2 Enter a positive value to raise the surface or a negative value to lower the surface.
The surface is adjusted to the new elevation.
The operation is added as a Raise/Lower operation to the Edits list view in the Prospector tree.
NOTE The Description column in the Prospector list view displays the value by which the surface was raised
or lowered.
Pasting Surfaces
Use the Prospector tab to paste a surface into the current surface.
For example, if you have a building pad surface, you can paste it into a full-site surface. The building pad
replaces that portion of the site surface that it covers.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, right-click , and click
Paste Surface.
2 In the Select Surface To Paste (page 2027) dialog box, in the list of surfaces, select the surface that you
want to paste into the current surface, and click OK.
When the surface is pasted into the existing surface, the command adjusts the overlapping area to the
elevation and contouring of the pasted surface.
The operation is added as a Paste Surface item to the Edits list view in Prospector.
NOTE The Description column in the Prospector list view displays the name of the surface that was pasted.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Smoothing Surfaces
Surface smoothing adds points at system-determined elevations using Natural Neighbor Interpolation (NNI)
or Kriging methods, which results in smoothed contours with no overlapping.
Only TIN surfaces support surface smoothing.
There are other benefits to surface smoothing. The Kriging method enables you to extrapolate, beyond the
extents of a surface, based on the statistical trends across the existing surface. For example, if a site contains
a random sample of borehole elevations (a sparse set of data points), you can statistically extrapolate a
representation of a surface.
Because smoothing is an edit operation performed on a surface, you can specify smoothing properties and
turn them on or off. When you turn the smoothing off, the surface reverts back to its original state, but the
smoothing properties are preserved in the surface operation list. For more information about the operation
list, see Understanding the Surface Definition (page 660).
NOTE Surface smoothing can take a considerable amount of time proportional to the number of output points.
For the Kriging method, it is recommended that you use a relatively small sample point set (no more than 100 to
200 points).
NOTE For more information about the parameters, see the Smooth Surface (page 2642) dialog box help.
Centroids Location
Use the Centroids output location to interpolate surface points (NNI and Kriging) at the existing surface
triangle centroids within specified polygon areas selected in the drawing.
When this option is selected, the grid X and Y spacing and the orientation properties are disabled.
Using NNI, you select only the output locations of the interpolated points. The elevations of the interpolated
points are always based on the weighted average of the elevations of the existing neighboring points. The
outcome of the NNI method is more predictable than the Kriging method. NNI interpolates only within the
surface, whereas Kriging can extrapolate beyond the surface border based on a selected polygon.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, right-click , and click
Smooth Surface.
2 In the Smooth Surface (page 2642) dialog box, for the Select Method property, select Natural Neighbor
Interpolation.
3 In Point Interpolation/Extrapolation Output, select the one of the Output locations: Grid Based,
Centroids, or Random Points.
NOTE The Description column in the list view displays the type of surface smoothing that was used (Kriging
Smoothing or Natural Neighbor Smoothing).
1 Model the covariance or semivariogram of the spatial process. This involves choosing both a
mathematical form and the values of the associated parameters.
2 Use this dependence model in solving the Kriging system at a specified set of spatial points, resulting
in predicted values and associated standard errors.
Sample Data
You must select the output locations of the interpolated points. It is important to ensure that the sample
data is appropriate for the interpolated point locations (the output). For example, do not select points on
the opposite side of the surface to determine a trend for the interpolated/extrapolated points locations, as
that trend may not be appropriate for the interpolated/extrapolated point locations.
Semivariogram Model
Semivariance is a measure of the degree of spatial dependence between samples. The magnitude of the
semivariance between points depends on the distance between the points. A smaller distance yields a smaller
semivariance and a larger distance results in a larger semivariance. The plot of the semivariances as a function
of distance from a point is referred to as a semivariogram.
Kriging provides five semivariogram models:
■ Exponential
■ Gaussian
■ Monomial
■ Linear (default)
■ Spherical
The semivariance increases as the distance increases until at a certain distance away from a point the
semivariance will equal the variance around the average value, and will therefore no longer increase, causing
a flat region to occur on the semivariogram called a sill. The distance from the point of interest to where
the flat region begins is termed the range or span of the regionalized variable. Within this range, locations
are related to each other, and all known samples contained in this region, also referred to as the neighborhood,
must be considered when estimating the unknown point of interest.
TIP It is recommended that you understand Kriging methodology before using it to perform surface smoothing.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection, right-click , and click
Smooth Surface.
2 In the Smooth Surface (page 2642) dialog box, for Select Method property, select Kriging.
The Kriging Method properties are available and the Kriging semivariogram model is displayed at the
bottom of the dialog box.
4 Select a point selection method from the Point Selection Method list and following the prompts as
required.
5 Depending on the semivariogram model that you select, you can specify values for Parameter A,
Parameter C, and the Nugget Effect.
6 In Point Interpolation/Extrapolation Output, select the output locations: Grid Based, Centroids, or
Random Points.
NOTE The Description column in the list view displays the type of surface smoothing that was used.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Simplifying Surfaces
When you simplify a surface, you reduce the number of points or triangles in a TIN surface, while preserving
the surface accuracy.
To simplify a surface
1 Select a surface. On the Surface tab, Modify panel, click Edit Surface drop-down ➤ Simplify Surface
.
2 If more than one surface is available in the drawing, click the surface that you want to simplify or press
Enter to select a surface in the Select A Surface dialog box.
3 Follow the Simplify Surface wizard sequence and the command line prompts to specify:
■ A simplification method (page 2641).
4 Click Apply.
The total number of points to be removed is displayed.
The Simplify Surface operation appears in the surface definition in the Prospector tree.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select a surface. Surface tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Surface drop-down ➤ Simplify Surface .
Menu
Cropping Surfaces
Use the Create Cropped Surface command to create a surface that is a copy of a polygonal area of a source
surface.
Each cropped area becomes a separate surface object (a new surface) that you can manage and manipulate.
When you create a surface by cropping the source surface, or when you rebuild the new surface, AutoCAD
Civil 3D creates a copy from the saved version of the source surface. If you modify the source surface and
want the changes to be reflected in the new surface, save the drawing containing the source surface before
you rebuild the new surface.
NOTE When a new surface is created, AutoCAD Civil 3D takes a snapshot of the new surface. To rebuild the new
surface, you must first perform the Rebuild Snapshot command and then the Rebuild command.
IMPORTANT Before you crop a surface, save the surface in the drawing.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Surfaces drop-down ➤ Create Cropped Surface .
2 In the Create Cropped Surface dialog box (page 2624), Crop Information section:
b Click to specify the crop area in the drawing using the selection window, by drawing a polygon,
or by selecting objects.
NOTE If you use the select objects option, click inside the polygon you want to use. The specified crop
area is highlighted.
4 Depending on the type of drawing that you selected in the previous step, specify the destination drawing
for the cropped surface.
5 Optionally, modify the surface style. By default, AutoCAD Civil 3D applies the standard style to the
created surface.
If you chose to create a new drawing file for the cropped surfaces, this drawing is saved in the directory
where the source drawing resides.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Surfaces drop-down ➤ Create Cropped Surface .
Command Line
CreateCropSurface
Dialog Box
Create Cropped Surface (page 2624)
NOTE When deleting AutoCAD objects, the surface definition is deleted along with the AutoCAD object if the
Copy Deleted Dependent Objects option in the surface definition is set to No. For more information, see Definition
Tab (Surface Properties Dialog Box) (page 2656).
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, under the Surfaces collection, right-click the surface and click
Properties.
2 In the Surface Properties dialog box, click the Definition tab (page 2656).
3 In the Operations List, clear the operations that you want to exclude from the build and click OK.
You are prompted with a warning to confirm the changes that you made to the surface definition.
■ Remove it from the surface operations list in the Surface Properties dialog box.
To delete data from the surface definition using the Prospector list view
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Definition collection and click the collection
from which you want to delete data.
2 In the Prospector list view, right-click the list item and click Delete.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click the surface and click Properties.
2 In the Surface Properties dialog box, click the Definition tab (page 2656).
3 In the Operations List, right-click the operations that you want to delete from the surface and click
Remove From Definition.
You are prompted with a warning to confirm the changes that you made to the surface definition.
NOTE If you delete an AutoCAD object, the surface definition item is deleted only if the Copy Deleted Dependent
Objects option in the surface definition is set to No. For more information, see Definition Tab (Surface Properties
Dialog Box) (page 2656).
NOTE If you want to delete an AutoCAD object, and not delete the surface definition item ensure that the
Copy Deleted Dependent Objects option in the surface definition is set to Yes. For more information, see
Editing and Viewing the Surface Definition (page 731).
Masks
Use masks to block out areas of a surface and prevent them from being displayed or to render a section of
the surface using a specified render material.
Masks can be defined from AutoCAD Civil 3D parcels and from the following types of polygon-type objects:
■ Polylines ■ Faces
■ 3D Polylines ■ Survey Figures
■ Circles ■ Feature Lines
■ Ellipses ■ Parcel Segments
■ Rectangles ■ Surfaces
When you define a mask from a selected object, the mask geometry automatically updates when you make
changes to the original object. If the original object is deleted from the drawing, the mask is also deleted.
Points Trim
Triangles Cross
Border N/A*
Contours Trim
Grid Trim
Directions Cross
Elevations Cross
Slopes Cross
Watersheds Cross
NOTE If you define an inside mask, you cannot use an outside mask on the same surface.
Outside Masks
When you define a mask as an outside type, the portion of the surface outside the defined polygon is hidden
(the outside display is clipped to the mask segments):
Inside Masks
When you define a mask as an inside type, the portion of the surface residing inside the defined polygon is
hidden:
Creating a Mask
Create masks by selecting existing parcels or AutoCAD polygon-type objects.
To create a mask
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface collection, right-click Masks, and click Create
Mask.
3 In the Create Mask (page 2621) dialog box, in the properties grid, click the Value column for the Name
property and enter a name for the mask.
4 Click the Value column for the Description property and enter a description for the mask.
NOTE If you define an inside mask on a surface, you cannot create another inside or outside mask on the
same surface.
6 Depending on whether or not you want to set a selected object as a render-only mask, select Yes or No
for Render Only option.
NOTE If multiple objects are selected for the mask, the Render Only option is set to true and is unavailable.
7 Optionally, if the polygon object from which you are creating a mask has curves, enter a value in the
Mid-Ordinate Distance field or click to digitize a distance in the drawing area.
8 Specify the render material by clicking in the Render Material row and clicking .
The Render Material dialog box is displayed. For more information, see Applying Render Materials to
Objects (page 1763).
9 Click OK.
The mask is created and added to the surface Masks collection in the Prospector tree.
NOTE A render-only mask must be rendered before it is displayed. See Rendering Objects (page 1764)
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Viewing Masks
Select and view masks in the Prospector tab item view.
In the Prospector item view, you can manipulate the view of the mask, including zooming, panning, rotating,
and orbiting. You can also save the view to an image file.
A render-only mask must be rendered before you can view it. For information, see Rendering Objects (page
1764).
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the surface Masks collection and click the mask’s name.
2 Right-click anywhere in the item view and select the option you want, such as Zoom To or Pan To.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click the surface Masks collection and click Display Order.
The Mask Display Order (page 2638) dialog box is displayed.
2 From the list, click a mask and click to move the mask up in the list or click to move the mask
down.
The mask at the top of the list has the highest display priority and is drawn on top of any overlapping
masks.
3 Click OK to apply the changes and close the Mask Display Order dialog box.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Modifying a Mask
Use the Mask Properties dialog box to edit a mask’s properties. You can also modify the extents, location,
and positioning of a mask using the appropriate AutoCAD command (depending on the type of the originating
object).
2 Right-click the mask in the Prospector tree or list view and click Mask Properties.
The Mask Properties (page 2621) dialog box is displayed. Edit the name, description, boundary type, render
material, and mid-ordinate distance.
3 Click OK to apply the changes and close the Mask Properties dialog box.
NOTE You can move masks based on AutoCAD objects. You cannot move parcel-based masks.
■ Use the AutoCAD grip editing capabilities of the original objects (for example, polylines, circles, and
parcels) to modify masks.
Deleting a Mask
Use the Prospector tab to remove a mask from a surface by deleting the mask or by deleting the AutoCAD
object that it was created from.
To delete a mask
3 To delete the AutoCAD object, select it in the drawing area and press Delete.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Surfaces ➤ <surface-name> ➤ Masks ➤ right-click <mask-name> in list view ➤ Delete
Watersheds
Use watersheds to analyze how water flows along and off of a surface.
Types of Watersheds
Watershed types are based on the type of drain target the watershed has.
A drain target is the location where the water flow either stops or leaves the surface. Water that flows along
an area or across a surface triangle eventually flows off the surface, or it reaches a point from which there
is no downhill direction.
For each drain target in a surface, AutoCAD Civil 3D determines the region of the surface that drains to that
target. This region is called the watershed for that drain target.
Each watershed that you delineate is categorized as one of the following types, based on drain target.
Boundary Point
If the downhill end of a channel edge is on the surface boundary, then water flowing through that channel
continues off the surface. The boundary point is the lowest end of the channel.
If a watershed has this type of drain target, it is called a boundary point watershed.
In the following illustration, point p5 is a boundary point, the drain target of the channel p7-p6-p5:
NOTE The "t" in the illustration indicates that the triangle was split between two watersheds because the water
flowing across that triangle could go to either of two watersheds.
NOTE The "t" in the illustration indicates that the triangle was split between two watersheds because the water
flowing across that triangle could go to either of two watersheds.
Depression
If a point is at a lower elevation than all its neighboring TIN points, then when water flows to it, it has no
downhill place to go. Similarly, a connected set of points that are at the same elevation and all of whose
neighbors are at a higher elevation, is a single drain target. A depression is any such set of points.
If a watershed has this type of drain target, it is called a depression watershed.
In the following illustration, points p8 and p9 form a depression:
NOTE The "t" in the illustration indicates that the triangle was split between two watersheds because the water
flowing across that triangle could go to either of two watersheds.
Shallow Depression
If a point is at a lower elevation than all its neighboring TIN points, then water that flows to it has no
downhill place to go. Similarly, a connected set of points that are at the same elevation, and all of whose
neighbors are at higher elevation, is a single drain target. A depression is any such set of points.
A shallow depression is determined by the average depth of a depression, which is the average depth of the
depression when it is filled to overflowing. This is determined by dividing the value of water in the depression
by the area of the top surface of the water. A depression is considered part of the watershed it drains into
(provided there is only one watershed it drains into) if its average depth is less than the user-set threshold.
Flat Area
A flat area watershed is a flat area, from which water could flow down to more than one drain target. It also
includes the parts of the surface that drain to that flat area. A flat area is a connected set of triangles all of
whose vertices have the same elevation. Flat areas abut parts of the surface that slopes downhill.
If for every edge on the boundary of a flat area, the opposing, non-flat triangle slopes up from the edge,
then the flat area is the bottom of a depression watershed:
If some of the opposing, non-flat triangles slope down from the flat area boundary, but all flow to the same
drain target, then the flat area is part of the watershed for that drain target “a”, as shown in the following
illustration:
Multi-Drain
One type of ambiguous watershed is called a multi-drain or split channel watershed.
In the following illustration, the channel edges e2 and e3 flow to different drain targets.
Water flowing down edge e1 could eventually reach either of these drain targets. In a case like this, AutoCAD
Civil 3D determines the region that flows to edge e1 and defines this region to be a multi-drain watershed.
Also, in this situation, AutoCAD Civil 3D keeps track of the watersheds into which water from the multi-drain
watershed might drain, in this case “a” and “b”, as shown in the following illustration:
1 Configure the watershed display or style settings. For information, see Creating a Surface Style (page
749).
2 Configure the watershed analysis and legend. For information, see Analyzing Surfaces (page 764).
3 Display the watershed. Watershed display is set on the Surface Style Display (page 2655)and Surface
Properties Analysis (page 2653)tabs.
4 Insert the watershed legend table. For information, see Adding Surface Legend Tables (page 763).
2 Optionally, to pan or zoom to an individual watershed, right-click the watershed item in the list view
and click Pan To or Zoom To.
NOTE The watershed display needs to be enabled before you can view it. For information on displaying
watersheds, see Surface Styles and Visualization (page 748).
Managing Surfaces
You can manage instances of surfaces in the Surfaces collection in the Prospector tab and surface settings
in the Surface collection in the Settings tab.
■ General information, including the name, description, and style for the surface. For information, see
Information Tab (Surface Properties Dialog Box) (page 2656).
■ Definition attributes, including the build, data, and operation options, as well as a definition of items
that are in use in the surface. For information, see Understanding the Surface Definition (page 660).
■ Analysis information, which includes properties for all types of surface analysis, including contour,
direction, elevations, slopes, slope arrows, and watersheds. For information, see Analyzing Surfaces (page
764).
■ Statistics for the current state of the surface. For information, see Viewing Surface Statistics (page 739).
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Surfaces collection, right-click the surface, and click
Properties.
2 In the Surface Properties dialog box, click the Definition tab (page 2656).
3 To edit the general build information, expand the Build group and edit the values.
4 To specify whether certain data categories (for example, breaklines) are to be excluded from or included
in the surface build, expand the Data Operations definition group and set the corresponding values to
Yes or No.
5 To specify whether certain edit operation categories (for example, deleting points) are to be excluded
from or included in the surface build, expand the Edit Operations group and set the corresponding
values to Yes or No.
6 To reorder any of the surface operations, click the arrow buttons to the left of the Operation Type field.
7 Click Apply to make the changes or click OK to make the changes and close the Surface Properties dialog
box.
A warning message, which enables you to confirm or cancel your changes, is displayed.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Creating a Snapshot
Use the Prospector tab to create a surface snapshot.
The current surface points and triangles resultant from previous surface operations are contained in the
surface snapshot operation. When a surface is built, previous surface operations are ignored and the surface
build begins at the snapshot operation.
Snapshots can be created automatically. A LandXML setting enables you to specify that a surface snapshot
be created in the surface definition subsequent to the importing of a surface when using Import LandXML.
For more information, see Viewing and Editing the LandXML Import Settings (page 1880).
To create a snapshot
■ In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Surfaces collection, right-click the surface, and click
Create Snapshot.
NOTE If there is an existing snapshot operation, a warning dialog box is displayed from which you can confirm
or cancel the operation.
Surface operations that are included in the snapshot are marked with in the Prospector tree.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Rebuilding a Snapshot
You can rebuild a snapshot if any of the operations that precede it in the surface operation list change or
are removed.
If the snapshot operation is out-of-date, is displayed next to its node in the Prospector tree.
■ In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Surfaces collection, right-click the surface, and click
Rebuild Snapshot.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Deleting a Snapshot
You can remove an existing snapshot.
To delete a snapshot
■ In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Surfaces collection, right-click the surface, and click
Remove Snapshot.
■ A warning dialog box is displayed in which you can confirm or cancel the operation.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
■ Out-of-date snapshot. When an active snapshot is out of date, is displayed next to the snapshot
operation in the Definition tab of the Surface Properties dialog box.
■ Out-of-date surface. If the surface is out of date when you attempt to create a snapshot, a warning dialog
box is displayed, indicating that the snapshot will be created based on the current (out-of-date) state of
the surface.
■ Out-of-date data. If the surface data is out of date (Rebuild - Automatic is disabled) and is contained in
an active snapshot, the data item is shown as out of date in the Prospector tree, but the surface is
not shown as out of date.
To rename a surface
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Surfaces collection, right-click the surface, and click
Properties.
3 To edit the name of the surface, enter a new name in the Name field.
4 To edit the description of the surface, enter a new description in the Description field.
5 To change the style for the surface, select a style from the Object Style list or use the standard style
selection controls.
6 Click Apply to make the changes, or click OK to make the changes and close the Surface Properties
dialog box.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Surfaces ➤ right-click <surface-name> ➤ Properties or Prospector tab: Surfaces ➤ click
surface <property-name> in list view
Object Shortcut Menu
Surface Properties
Command Line
EditSurfaceProperties
Dialog Box
Surface Properties - Information Tab (page 2656)
Copying a Surface
Create a copy of an existing surface.
When a surface is copied, the copy is named using a naming convention. For example if the original surface
that is copied is named ‘Surface 1’, the new surface is named ‘Surface 1 (1)’. If Surface 1 is copied again, the
new surface is named ‘Surface1 (2)’. If ‘Surface 1(1)’ is copied, the new surface is named ‘Surface 1 (1) (2)’.
To copy a surface
1 In the drawing area, select the surface, right-click, click Basic Modify Tools ➤ Copy.
2 At the command line, you are prompted to specify a base point for the surface.
4 To edit the name of the surface, right-click the surface in the Prospector tree and click Properties.
The Surface Properties dialog box is displayed with the Information tab (page 2656) active. The Name
field contains the name of the copied surface, which is, by default “ <surface-name> (1).”
6 To edit the description of the surface, enter a new description in the Description field.
7 To change the style that the surface is using, select a style from the Object Style list or use the standard
style selection controls.
8 Click Apply to make the changes, or click OK to make the changes and close the Surface Properties
dialog box.
Previewing a Surface
You can preview a surface in the Prospector item list view.
To preview a surface
1 Ensure that the Item Preview button on the Prospector tab is selected. For more information, see
Graphical View (page 100).
2 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click the Surfaces collection and click Show Preview.
NOTE A check mark is displayed next to the Show Preview menu item when the preview is enabled.
3 In the Prospector tree, click the surface that you want to preview.
The surface is displayed in the Prospector item view.
NOTE The preview of the surface uses the same display styles as the surface in the drawing area.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Rebuilding a Surface
When you make changes to a surface, such as editing data or the build parameters, the surface may become
out of date and you can rebuild it.
If the surface definition is out of date, is displayed next to its node in the Prospector tree.
AutoCAD Civil 3D enables you to either automatically or manually rebuild a surface.
■ In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Surfaces collection, right-click the surface and click
Rebuild - Automatic.
NOTE A check mark is displayed next to the Rebuild - Automatic menu item when it is enabled.
When changes are made to the surface, it is automatically rebuilt and updated.
■ In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Surfaces collection, right-click the surface, and click
Rebuild.
NOTE If the surface definition is out-of-date, is displayed next to its node in the Prospector tree.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Deleting a Surface
Delete a surface, which erases it from the drawing and removes it from the Surfaces collection in the Prospector
tree.
To delete a surface
■ In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Surfaces collection, right-click the surface, and click
Delete.
The surface is erased from the drawing and removed from the Surfaces collection in the Prospector tree.
NOTE You cannot delete a surface from the Prospector tree if it has associated dependencies (such as other
objects). You can determine if the surface has dependencies by the orange triangle attached to the surface icon.
The Delete command for such surface is missing from the shortcut menu.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Locking a Surface
Lock a surface so that its properties and geometry cannot be changed. Certain tabs in the Surface Properties
dialog box and some menu items cannot be selected.
See also:
To lock a surface
■ In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Surfaces collection, right-click the surface, and click
Lock.
NOTE When moving, scaling, or rotating a surface, you should be aware that if you want to affect only the surface
and not the data, you should select only the surface. After moving, scaling, or rotating as surface, a ’Transform
By’ operation is added to the surface definition and is reapplied during subsequent rebuilding of the surface. If
the surface data in the drawing needs to be moved, scaled, or rotated, then the surface should not be selected
since the surface is rebuilt according to location of its dependent data.
NOTE Overrides to the drawing ambient settings at the Surface collection level and the surface Commands
collection level affect only the specified level. The drawing level settings are not changed.
The topics in this section describe only those settings that affect surface-related commands, and do not cover
the drawing ambient settings that you can change at the surface collection level and the surface command
level, even though those settings are displayed in the Edit Feature Settings dialog box. For more information,
see Specifying Ambient Settings (page 84).
■ To edit settings for a specific command: In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Commands
collection under the Surface collection. Right-click the name of the command for which you want
to change settings and click Edit Command Settings.
The Edit Feature Settings - Surface (page 2629) dialog box is displayed.
3 To specify the default surface type, edit the Surface Default Type settings.
4 To specify the default grid surface spacing and orientation, edit the following settings:
■ Grid Surface X-Spacing
5 To specify the default name format for a surface, expand the Default Name Format property group and
edit the Surface Name Template setting.
6 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
3 To specify a default surface style, change the Surface Default Style setting.
4 To specify a default spot elevation label style, change the Surface Spot Elevation Label Style setting.
5 To specify a default slope label style, change the Surface Slope Label Style setting.
7 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
■ General. Common to all surface types. Includes information such as bounding extents and elevations.
■ Extended. Available for (non-volume) TIN and grid surfaces. Includes information such as 2D and 3D
area as well as grade and slope values.
■ Grid. Specific to grid surfaces. Includes information such as grid spacing and orientation.
■ TIN. Specific to TIN surfaces. Includes information the number, area, and length of surface triangles.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Surfaces collection, right-click the surface, and click
Properties.
2 In the Surface Properties dialog box, click the Statistics tab (page 2662).
3 To view the statistics for the surface, expand the corresponding category.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
NOTE Every time you move the drawing file to a different location, you must move the companion file to the
same location.
This method gives accurate volume measurements between the two surface definitions.
See also:
1 Open, create, or import the TIN or grid surfaces for which you want to measure the composite volume.
See Creating Surfaces (page 648).
NOTE The Composite Volumes utility compares two surfaces (surface pairs), so you must have two surfaces
available in your drawing.
2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Volumes And Materials panel ➤ Volumes drop-down ➤ Volumes .
■ In the Composite Volumes (page 2620) vista, click and select the surfaces to compare by clicking
the <select surface> entry from the Base Surface and Comparison Surface columns (for the base and
comparison surfaces respectively).
■ In the Composite Volumes vista, click and select both the base and comparison surfaces from
the drawing area.
After you select the surfaces, the volumes are calculated and the following information is displayed:
■ Cut. The amount of material that has to be removed.
■ Net Graph. A graphical percentage representation of the whole volume. A fill net is displayed as a
green bar indicating that material needs to be added to the project site. A cut net is displayed as a
red bar, indicating that material must be removed.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
See also:
1 Open, create, or import the surface for which you want to measure the bounded volume. See Creating
Surfaces (page 648).
2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Volumes And Materials panel ➤ Volumes drop-down ➤ Bounded Volumes .
TIP Press F2 to open the AutoCAD Text Window where the results are also displayed.
■ At the command line, enter D to select the Datum option and then enter a value or snap (OSNAP)
to a point on the drawing.
Volumes at the selected datum elevation, as well the net volume and cut and fill values are displayed
in the command line window.
5 Select another bounding polygon or change the current datum elevation or press Enter to terminate the
command.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Analyze tab ➤ Volumes And Materials panel ➤ Volumes drop-down ➤ Bounded Volumes
Menu
■ An existing surface.
■ Existing polylines in the drawing. These must be lwpolylines, such as created with the PLINE command.
■ Contour elevation and area data that you enter into a dialog box.
To use either a surface or contours within a surface, contours must be visible (page 744).
To display contours
1 In AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011, open a drawing that contains a basin you would like to study.
2 To view surface contours, right-click on the surface, and click Edit Surface Style.
■ Click OK.
NOTE The units are based on the Drawing Unit specified in the Units And Zone tab (page 80) of the Drawing
Settings dialog box.
1 Turn on the visibility of contours (page 744) for the surface if you are going to use a surface or contours
to define the basin.
3 In the Stage Storage (page 2663) dialog box, enter Stage Storage Table Details.
4 For Volume Calculation Method (page 748), click Average End Area, Conic Approximation, or Both.
■ Select Define Basin From Entity, click Define Basin, and define the basin using polylines or selected
contours extracted from a surface (page 745).
■ Select Use Manual Contour Data Entry and click Define Basin to manually enter contour elevations
and areas (page 746).
To define the basin using all contour data from a surface object
■ Click Define.
2 In the drawing, select the surface (“1” in the following illustration) and right-click or press Enter.
2 In the Define Basin From Entities (page 2626) dialog box, click Define Basin From Polylines.
3 Optionally, if you want to extract polylines from surface contours to define the basin, click Extract
Objects From Surface, and then select the surface in the drawing and press Enter. When you click Define
in the Define Basin From Entities dialog box, you can then select the polylines that were created to
define the basin.
NOTE Whereas the Define Basin From Surface Contours option uses all of the surface contours for the input
data, you can use the Extract Objects From Surface option to extract data from selected contours, for example,
the contours that define a depression.
TIP This option cleans up the drawing by deleting any polylines that were created by the Extract Entities
From Surface button, but which you do not select with the Define button.
7 Select at least two polylines. In the following illustration a third polyline (3) is included. Either right-click
or press Enter.
NOTE The polylines must be lwpolylines (created with the PLINE command, for example).
The polyline data is extracted and listed in the Stage Storage Volume Table.
1 In the Define Basin From Entered Data (page 2627) dialog box, enter contour elevation and area data for
at least two contours.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Click OK.
■ Click Save.
The volume table is saved as an AeccSST file. You can click Load Table to import the saved data.
NOTE The stage storage tables are not dynamic. To update the table, you must recalculate the data and
re-insert the table.
■ Click Save.
The report is saved as a TXT file and opens in your default text file viewer.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
where V is the volume, calculated from the two end areas A1 and A2, and the distance L between the two
areas.
where V is the volume, calculated from the two areas A1 and A2, and the distance h between the two areas.
■ Contours. Includes minor, major, depression, and user-defined contour lines display.
For general information about AutoCAD Civil 3D styles, see Object and Label Styles (page 66).
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the Surface Styles collection and click New.
2 In the Surface Style dialog box, click the Information (page 2644) tab and enter a name and description
for the surface style.
3 To define the display of surface borders, click the Borders (page 2645) tab and specify the settings.
4 To define the display of surface contours, click the Contours (page 2646) tab and specify the settings.
5 To define the display of surface grid, click the Grid (page 2648) tab and specify the settings.
6 To define the display of surface points, click the Points (page 2649) tab and specify the settings.
7 To define the display of surface triangles, click the Triangles (page 2651) tab and specify the settings.
8 To define the display of watersheds, click the Watersheds (page 2651) tab and specify the settings.
9 To define the display the analysis, click the Analysis (page 2653) tab and specify the settings.
10 To define the display of the various surface components, click the Display (page 2655) tab.
11 To view summary information about the style, click the Summary (page 2655) tab.
12 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the name of the surface style you want to copy and click
Copy.
A copy is created, and its properties are displayed in the Surface Style dialog box.
2 In the Surface Style dialog box, click the Information (page 2644) tab and enter a name and description
for the new surface style
3 Use the Surface Style (page 2644) dialog box to change any of the surface style properties. For more
information, see Creating a Surface Style (page 749).
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the name of the surface style that you want to edit and
click Edit.
2 Use the Surface Style (page 2644) dialog box to change the properties of the surface style.
For more information, see Creating a Surface Style (page 749).
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
TIP To perform this operation, ensure that the surface display style has triangles visibility enabled. See Editing a
Surface Style (page 750). Also, ensure that Realistic is a default type of materials set in the Material Editor in the
Materials window (to view the settings, at the command line, enter MATERIALS).
2 Navigate to the location where the image is saved, select the image, and click Open.
3 In the Attach Image dialog box, specify Insertion Point, Scale, and Rotation or select Specify on Screen
to do the adjustments in the drawing.
4 Click OK.
5 Select a surface. On the Surface tab, Surface Tools panel, click Drape Image .
6 In the Drape Image dialog box, select the image from the Image list or click to select the image from
the drawing.
7 From the Surface list, select the surface on which you want to drape the image or click to select the
surface from the drawing.
8 Under Render Material Name, enter the name for the new render material. This name will be associated
with the new render material which is created from the image that you have imported.
NOTE By default, the name of the new render material is comprised of the surface name and the image file
name.
9 Click OK.
The image is draped over the surface. This image becomes associated with the new render material,
which is added to the materials palette.
If the image is smaller than the surface, the draping only occurs on the area covered by the image. If
the area of the image exceeds the area of the surface, the image is cropped along the surface boundary.
NOTE If you view your drawing in 2D plan view, the image displays in its 2D planar view.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Surface Labels
Surfaces can be labeled automatically when created, using the specified label styles. After creating a surface,
you can also add labels for the various components of the surface.
Surface Tables
You can use commands to insert surface legend tables into a drawing. Surface legend tables are used to
display surface analysis information. When you insert a table into the drawing, the detailed surface
information is inserted into the table.
■ Attributes (set on the Properties tab of the Text Component Editor - Contents dialog box)
■ Slope/Grade value
■ Percent
■ Decimal
■ Run/Rise
The following examples illustrate a label style that can label a spot elevation at the elevation decimal point.
The decimal point of the spot elevation value is represented by a block, or a point style specified at creation
time. The labeled elevation consists of two subtext components in the label style, each with different
properties:
text
attachment: middle right
contents: <elevation[feet:0:normal:lhs]>
general
anchor component: <feature>
anchor point: middle right
component name: elevation_right
text
attachment: middle left
contents: <elevation[feet:2:normal:rhs]>
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Surface ➤ Slope .
2 At the command line, enter either One-point or Two-point depending on the type of the slope label
that you want to add and then press Enter.
3 Digitize the location of the first point and the second point (if applicable).
OR
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Surface ➤ Add Surface Labels .
2 In the Add Labels dialog box, select Surface in the Feature list.
NOTE If you want to view or edit the settings for slope labels, click to open the Edit Command Settings
- AddSurfaceSlopeLabel dialog box.
4 Select the label style for the slope from the Slope Label Style list or use the standard style selection
controls.
NOTE Ensure that the slope label style is appropriate for one-point or two-point slope labels. A slope label
style that was composed for a start point and end point may not be appropriate for a one-point slope label.
5 Click Add.
6 At the command line, enter either One-point or Two-point depending on the type of the slope label
that you want to add and then press Enter.
7 Digitize the location of the first point and the second point (if applicable).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels ➤ Surface ➤ Slope
Menu
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Surface ➤ Spot Elevation .
OR
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Surface ➤ Add Surface Labels .
2 In the Add Labels dialog box, select Surface in the Feature list.
NOTE If you want to view or edit the settings for spot elevation labels, click to display the Edit Command
Settings - AddSurfaceSpotElevLabel dialog box.
4 Select the label style for the spot elevation from the Spot Elevation Label Style list or use the standard
style selection controls.
5 Select the marker style for the spot elevation from the Marker Style list or use the standard style selection
controls.
6 Click Add. You are prompted at the command line to select a point in the drawing area.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Surface ➤ Spot Elevation
Menu
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Surface ➤ Spot Elevations On Grid
.
OR
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Surface ➤ Add Surface Labels .
2 In the Add Labels dialog box, select Surface in the Feature list.
NOTE If you want to view or edit the settings for spot elevation labels, click to display the Edit Command
Settings - AddSpotElevLabelsOnGrid dialog box.
4 Select the label style for the spot elevation from the Spot Elevation Label Style list or use the standard
style selection controls.
5 Select the marker style for the spot elevation from the Marker Style list or use the standard style selection
controls.
6 Click Add. You are prompted at the command line to select a point in the drawing area.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Surface ➤ Spot Elevations On Grid
Menu
NOTE The line that is used to place the contour labels is a custom object called the Surface Contour Label Group
object. The default layer for this object is set on the Object Layers tab of the Drawing Settings dialog box.
TIP Freezing the default layer of the contour label line freezes the contour labels. To control the visibility of the
contour label line, change its display settings in the contour label line properties.
To make a contour label mask out the contour use the Background Mask property in the contour label style.
Edit the contour label style using the Label Style Composer, and on the Layout tab under Border, set the
value for Background Mask to True.
You can also use the Masking property in the AutoCAD Properties palette to mask contour lines. For more
information, see Background Mask (page 1675).
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Surface ➤ Contour - Single .
OR
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Surface ➤ Add Surface Labels .
NOTE If you want to view or edit the settings for surface contour labels, click to display the Edit Command
Settings - AddContourLabelingSingle dialog box. Set the Display Contour Label Line to false to display contour
label lines only when its label is selected.
3 Depending on the type of surface contour lines (major, minor, or user-defined) that the contour label
line crosses, specify the label styles for the corresponding contour lines:
■ From the Major Contour Label Style list, select the style for major contour lines.
■ From the Minor Contour Label Style list, select the style for minor contour lines.
■ From the User Contour Label Style list, select the style for user-defined contour lines.
4 Click Add.
5 Click on the contour line where you want to place a label. You can add as many labels as you want.
Press Enter when finished.
6 NOTE You can set the default interval value. In the Add Labels dialog box, to display the Edit Command
Settings - AddContourLabelingSingle dialog box and set the Interval Along Contour property.
All the surface contours that were intersected by the contour label line are labeled at the specified
intervals along their entire length.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Surface ➤ Contour - Multiple At Interval
Menu
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Surface ➤ Contour - Multiple .
OR
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Surface ➤ Add Surface Labels .
2 From the Label Type list, select Contour - Multiple to add multiple contour labels either along the
contour label line or polyline by picking segments to create Surface Contour Label Group objects from
the line or polyline objects.
NOTE If you want to view or edit the settings for surface contour labels, click to display the Edit Command
Settings - AddContourLabeling dialog box. Set the Display Contour Label Line to false to display contour
label lines only when its label is selected.
3 Depending on the type of surface contour lines (major, minor, or user-defined) that the contour label
line crosses, specify the label styles for the corresponding contour lines:
■ From the Major Contour Label Style list, select the style for major contour lines.
■ From the Minor Contour Label Style list, select the style for minor contour lines.
■ From the User Contour Label Style list, select the style for user-defined contour lines.
4 Click Add.
5 Click on the contour line to specify the start point. Drag the contour label line across multiple contour
lines until you reach the desired end point. Alternatively, after you specify the start point, you can click
at individual points on the contour lines to create a contour label polyline. Press Enter.
6 NOTE You can set the default interval value. In the Add Labels dialog box, to display the Edit Command
Settings - AddContourLabeling dialog box and set the Interval Along Contour property.
All the surface contours that were intersected by the contour label line are labeled at the specified
intervals along their entire length.
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Surface ➤ Contour - Multiple At Interval
Menu
Modify the properties of contour label lines to change the label style for major, minor, and user-defined
contour labels.
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Surface ➤ Contour - Multiple At
Interval .
2 Click on the contour line to specify the start point. Follow the prompt in the command line to specify
the next point on a contour label line and the interval along the contour line. Press Enter
OR
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Surface ➤ Add Surface Labels .
2 From the Label Type list, select Contour - Multiple at Interval to add multiple contour labels at a set
interval along the entire length of the contour crossed by the label line segment.
NOTE If you want to view or edit the settings for surface contour labels, click to display the Edit Command
Settings - AddContourLabelingGroup dialog box. Set the Display Contour Label Line to false to display contour
label lines only when its label is selected.
■ From the Minor Contour Label Style list, select the style for minor contour lines.
■ From the User Contour Label Style list, select the style for user-defined contour lines.
4 Click Add.
5 Click on the contour line to specify the start point. Follow the prompt in the command line to specify
the next point on a contour label line and the interval along the contour line. Press Enter.
NOTE You can set the default interval value. In the Add Labels dialog box, click to display the Edit
Command Settings - AddContourLabelingGroup dialog box and set the Interval Along Contour property.
All the surface contours that were intersected by the contour label line are labeled at the specified
intervals along their entire length.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Surface ➤ Contour - Multiple At Interval
Menu
This surface table Places the following surface information in the table...
style...
See also:
1 Generate the surface analysis that you are going to display in the legend table. See Analyzing Surfaces
(page 764).
2 To edit the styles for the tables, on the Settings tab, expand the Surface collection, expand the Table
Styles collection, and select the collection for the type of legend that you want to add. In the Settings
list view, right-click the style and click Edit.
3 To add the legend table, click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Add Surface
Legend Table .
4 You are prompted to select the surface from the drawing area.
5 You are prompted to enter the table type. Enter one of Directions, Elevations, Slopes, SlopeArrows,
Contours, UserContours, or Watersheds.
6 You are prompted to specify if you want the table to update automatically if the analysis information
changes. Enter Dynamic to enable automatic updating.
7 You are prompted to select the upper left-hand corner for the table in the drawing area.
The legend table is displayed.
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Add Surface Legend Table
Menu
Analyzing Surfaces
You can perform many types of surface-related analysis, including contour, directions, elevations, slopes,
slope-arrows, watersheds, and water drop path.
Surface analysis types include:
■ Directions. Used for aspect analysis. Renders surface triangles differently according to the direction they
face.
■ Elevations. Used for elevation banding analysis. Renders surface triangles differently according to their
elevation range.
■ Slopes. Renders surface triangles differently according to the slope range they fall within.
■ Slope Arrows. Used for slope direction analysis. Places a slope directional arrow at each triangle centroid.
The arrow color is based on the color assigned to a slope range, similar to slope analysis.
■ User-Defined Contours. Renders user-defined contour lines differently according to their elevation range.
■ Contour Problems. Used to locate problems with contours that are drawn according to the surface style
contour settings.
■ Water Drop. Used to trace the path that water would take across a surface.
Use the Analysis tab (page 2653) in the Surface Style dialog box to control the display and styles for direction,
elevation, slope, and slope arrow analysis. Contours and watersheds have corresponding tabs (Contours tab
(page 2646) and Watersheds tab (page 2651)), where their style and display are controlled. Use the Analysis tab
(page 2659) in the Surface Properties dialog box to create the actual analysis.
To check for contour problems using a separate utility, click Analyze ➤ Ground Data panel ➤ Contour
Check .
To perform water drop analysis in a separate utility, click Analyze ➤ Ground Data ➤ Water Drop .
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the Surface Styles collection and click New.
2 In the Surface Style dialog box, click the Information (page 2644) tab and assign a name and description
to the style.
3 Click the Analysis (page 2653) tab and modify the properties as required.
4 For contour analysis, to modify the default analysis values, click the Contours (page 2646) tab and modify
the Contour Ranges property group as well as the Major and Minor display settings.
5 For watershed analysis, click the Watersheds (page 2651) tab and modify the properties as required.
6 Click the Display (page 2655) tab and modify the display settings so that the analysis is displayed correctly.
7 Click OK to save the style and close the Surface Style dialog box.
8 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Surfaces collection, right-click the surface for which
you want to create an analysis, and click Properties.
9 In the Surface Properties dialog box, click the Analysis (page 2659) tab and select the analysis that you
want from the Analysis Type list.
NOTE The Analysis tab displays varying fields and options depending on the type of analysis that you select.
10 Optionally, select a legend style. For information about creating a legend, see Adding Surface Legend
Tables (page 763).
11 Modify the range or watershed parameters as required and click to generate the analysis.
12 Optionally, modify the details of the analysis by editing the fields in the Details table. For more
information, see the Analysis (page 2659) tab.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
NOTE The Check for Contour Problems utility operates on TIN surfaces only.
The utility takes into account the base elevation and interval specified in the surface style. When the utility
encounters an invalid condition, a warning is displayed in the Event Viewer.
The utility looks at every surface point that falls on a contour. For each point, the utility counts the number
of neighboring points (that is, points to which it is connected by an edge or a point that lies on the opposite
side of a triangle that it belongs to) that fall at the same elevation. If the number of same-elevation neighbors
is one, the warning “Contour ends at [x,y,z]” is displayed in the Event Viewer. If the number of same-elevation
neighbors is more than two, the warning “Multiple contours at [x,y,z]” is displayed in the Event Viewer. In
The “contour ends” condition can mean that a gap in the data contour was too wide for the triangulation
process to connect the ends with an edge. You can fill this gap by creating and adding a breakline that
connects the two ends.
The multiple contours condition, which occurs when a point has more than two neighboring points with
the same elevation, generally happens in a flat area of the surface. When this condition is detected, you can
use the Minimize Flat Areas operation to correct the problem. For more information, see Minimizing Flat
Areas in a Surface (page 705). If the point is on the surface border, the flat area can simply be an unintended
artifact of the triangulation process. You can remove these unintended triangles by using the Delete Line
operation or by adding a hide boundary.
If no contour problems are found, a message is displayed in the Event Viewer stating that no problem were
found for the surface style setting for contour base elevation and interval.
NOTE All contour problems occur when the elevation of a data contour point is the same as the elevation at
which a contour is drawn. If no points in the surface are at contour elevations, there will be no problems with
drawn contours. It is often possible and acceptable to adjust the contour base elevation value to create a condition
where no points fall on surface contours, thus avoiding contour problems entirely.
2 If more than one surface is available in the drawing, click the surface on which to perform the check
or press Enter to select a surface in the Select A Surface dialog box.
3 Click OK.
Any detected contour problems are displayed in the Event Viewer.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
You can use either a 2D or 3D polyline to draw the flow line. The line type that you use depends on your
analysis requirements. Following are usage examples for each line type:
■ 2D polyline. Delineate an area that represents a drainage area for water runoff analysis. You create a
closed 2D polyline using AutoCAD editing commands. You can use the resulting closed 2D polyline to
query the area and perform other analysis.
■ 3D polyline: You want to perform visualization and drape the lines over the surface. You can also create
grading feature lines from the water drop lines for grading purposes.
2 If more than one surface is available in the drawing, click the surface on which to perform the water
drop analysis or press Enter to select a surface in the Select A Surface dialog box.
4 To specify the type of polyline to use for the water drop path, click the Path Object Type field. Select
the type.
5 To specify whether to draw a marker at the start of the water drop path, click the Place Marker At Start
Point field. Select either Yes or No.
6 To set the style for the start point maker, click the Start Point Marker Style property. Click in the
Value column.
The Point Style dialog box is displayed.
7 Click OK.
NOTE To be certain that any changes that you make to the water drop settings persist, ensure that the
drawing setting Save Command Changes To Settings is set to Yes. For information, see Specifying Ambient
Settings (page 84)
8 Click a point on the surface for the start of the water drop path.
9 Click another point to draw another water drop path or press Enter if finished.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE The Catchment Area command performs the analysis only on the selected surface region and does not
account for overflow situations occurring in the neighboring surface regions.
b Select the water drop path polyline, right-click, and choose Properties.
c In the Properties manager, under Geometry, navigate to the last vertex and copy and paste the X-
and Y-coordinate values (comma-separated with no space) into a text file.
4 In the Catchment Area dialog box, click the Value column for the Catchment Layer property and click
to select an existing layer, or create a layer in the Create Layer dialog box (page 2222).
BEST PRACTICE It is useful to place the catchment region on a separate layer. Then you can control visual
style elements, such as color and line types.
5 Click the Value column for the Catchment Object Type, and select a line type.
TIP If you select 2D Polyline, you can use the AutoCAD Area command on the catchment region. If you
select 3D Polyline, you can use the elevation values of the polyline vertices for analysis.
6 Click the Value column for the Catchment Marker property, and specify whether you want to mark
the catchment point.
7 Click in the Value column of the Catchment Marker Style property, and then select a style in the
Catchment Marker Style dialog box. Click OK.
8 If more than one surface is available in the drawing, click the surface on which to perform the catchment
region analysis, or press Enter to select a surface in the Select A Surface dialog box.
9 Specify a catchment location. You can either paste the coordinates that you copied in Step 2 or click
in the desired location.
The catchment region boundary appears on the drawing, and the value of the region area displays at
the command line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 Click Analyze tab ➤ Ground Data panel ➤ ➤ Minimum Distance Between Surfaces .
2 In the drawing, select the first surface or press Enter to select it from the list.
3 Select the second surface or press Enter to select it from the list.
4 In the displayed prompt, select Y or N to specify whether you want to draw the marker line connecting
the two points that lay at the shortest distance from one another.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Breakline Tools
Use the AutoCAD Civil 3D breakline tools to find, report, and correct intersecting breaklines in a survey
database or in a surface to which the breakline geometry has been added.
Breaklines are important elements in a digital terrain model (DTM). Any invalid conditions in breakline
geometry can cause issues in surface creation.
The following drawing shows an example of two crossing breaklines that create an invalid condition when
two elevations exist at the intersection point of the breaklines (1 and 2).
■ Identify crossing breaklines in a survey database, survey figure, or a surface created from survey data. See
Finding and Fixing Crossing Breaklines (page 771).
■ Edit breakline elevations to resolve issues caused by crossing breaklines. See Finding and Fixing Crossing
Breaklines (page 771).
■ Create reports on crossing breaklines or breaklines that fall outside of specified ranges. See Creating
Breakline Reports (page 772).
2 At the dynamic input prompt or at the command line, specify the location to look for crossing breaklines:
Survey Database, Figure, or Surface.
3 In the Crossing Breaklines vista (page 2625) that displays, view the list of intersecting breakline data, for
example:
Breakline 1 Breakline 2 Easting Northing Elevation Differ-
ence
4 To view the crossing breaklines in the drawing, click an item in the list and then click Zoom To.
NOTE If Auto Zoom is selected, the intersection point of the selected pair of breaklines is automatically
centered and zoomed to.
The breakline with lower elevation (1) appears in red. The blue color identifies the breakline with higher
elevation (2).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ All intersecting breaklines in the current drawing. This report specifies the x- and y-coordinates of the
intersection points and the elevation difference at these points.
■ All surface breaklines, breaklines in a survey database, or survey figures that are outside of the specified
ranges.
1 In Toolspace, click Toolbox tab ➤ Reports Manager ➤ Breakline ➤ Crossing Breakline Report.
2 In the Create Reports - Crossing Breakline dialog box (page 2622), select Survey Databases, Survey Figures,
or Surfaces as the objects to analyze for crossing breaklines.
If the selected object exists in the drawing, survey database, or survey figure, the object is displayed in
the list.
3 Select the boxes in the Include column beside the objects that you want to have analyzed.
4 Optionally, click Check All to select or deselect all the entries in the list. Only the selected objects are
analyzed.
5 Under Report Settings, click to specify the location for saving the report.
6 Click Create Report and wait until the report is generated and opens in a browser window.
3 Select the boxes in the Include column beside the objects that you want to have analyzed.
4 Optionally, click Check All to select or deselect all the entries in the list. Only the selected objects are
analyzed.
5 Under Report Settings, specify the query conditions for breaklines. See Create Reports - Breakline Check
Report dialog box (page 2622) for setting descriptions.
7 Click Create Report and wait until the report is generated and opens in a browser window.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Exporting to DEM
You can export surface data to a DEM file and use the surface in other applications that support DEM data
files.
Applications such as AutoCAD MAP 3D and AutoCAD Raster Design support both USGS and GeoTIFF
standards. You can export all types of AutoCAD Civil 3D surfaces, including terrain and volume surfaces.
2 Select a surface. Click Surface tab ➤ Surface Tools panel ➤ Export To DEM ..
3 If more than one surface is available in the drawing, and you have not selected the surface in the
previous step, in the drawing, click the surface which you want to export.
4 In the Export Surface to DEM (page 2634) dialog box, under Export, add information on the exported
file, such as DEM file name, coordinate system, grid spacing, and elevation.
6 Click OK.
The surface data is imported to a DEM file in the location that you specified.
The exported DEM file inherits the coordinate zone assigned to the drawing. If the drawing does not have
a coordinate zone assigned, you must specify one.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Exporting to LandXML
Export a TIN surface to a LandXML format file.
For more information about AutoCAD Civil 3D LandXML import and export functionality, see Viewing and
Editing LandXML Drawing Settings (page 1880).
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Surfaces collection, right-click the surface, and click
Export LandXML.
The Export LandXML (page 2219) dialog box is displayed with the current surface selected for export.
2 To change the export selection set (for example, to add another surface), select or clear the check boxes
in the data tree.
4 In the Export LandXML dialog box, enter the name for the LandXML file.
The file is saved with the .xml extension.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Command Description
CreateSurfaceFromTIN Creates a TIN surface from a TIN data file (page 655)
Understanding Sites
Use sites to collect or group collections (parcels, alignments, gradings, and feature lines) by a topology that
they have in common.
Examples of sites include soil maps, watersheds, or subdivisions. Sites can geographically overlay each other
as is shown in the following illustration, while remaining independent. For example, a soils map and a
subdivision with roads and lots can overlay each other, but remain independent of each other. Therefore,
a parcel in a soils site would never be affected by an alignment in a subdivision site, even if their extents
overlap.
All objects in a site topology collection share a common topology and have relationships to each other.
NOTE Editing an object, or moving an object from one site to another, can cause changes to other objects that
share the same topology.
779
When you create parcels and gradings, you specify a site for them. If you create these objects before explicitly
creating a site, a default site named Site 1 is created for them.
When you create an alignment, you may either accept the default <none> site selection, place the alignment
on an existing site, or create a new site. When an alignment is placed on a site, it will create parcels if it
forms closed regions and subdivide existing parcels on the site if it crosses through them. Accepting the
<none> site selection places the alignment in the top-level Alignments collection, which prevents it from
forming or interacting with parcels or any other objects. See Alignment and Site Interaction (page 781) for
more information.
NOTE An object, such as an alignment, parcel, or grading, can only exist in one site. All dependent objects, such
as profiles and sections, exist in the same site as the parent object.
Sites Collection
Use the Prospector tree to access the Sites collection, which can contain one or more site topology collections.
Each site topology collection contains collections for alignments, gradings and parcels:
NOTE You can assign names to the site topology collections, but the Sites collection cannot be renamed.
Alignments may be assigned to either the Alignments collection within a topology collection or the top-level
Alignments collection. When placed in the topology collection’s Alignment collection, an alignment
subdivides parcels it crosses over and creates new parcels if it forms closed regions. Alignments that are
placed in the top-level Alignments collection do not interact with parcels or any other objects on any site.
See Alignment and Site Interaction (page 781) for more information.
Expand the Sites collection node to view the sites in the collection. The site names with their respective area
and perimeter values are displayed in the Prospector tab list view.
Access all site-related functionality by right-clicking the Sites collection and the named site topology collection
(for example, Site 1 or Site 2) in the Prospector tree.
■ Edit and display the properties of the site, including 3D geometry and numbering conventions.
NOTE Parcel-related properties of a site are accessible from the site’s Parcels collection. For more information, see
Site Parcels (page 875).
■ If an alignment exists on a site with parcels, the alignment will subdivide any parcels it crosses over.
■ If one or more alignments on a site form a closed region, a parcel will be created from the region.
■ The top-level Alignments collection. When placed in this collection, an alignment will not interact with
any other objects, including itself.
■ The Alignments collection within a topology collection, or site. When placed here, alignments will
interact with other alignments and parcels on the site. If you want alignments to form parcels by closed
regions but not subdivide existing parcels, assign alignments and parcels to separate sites.
■ Alignments Site allows you to specify the site on which the alignments will reside. The default selection
is <None>, which places the alignments in the top-level Alignments collection and prevents them from
interacting with parcels.
For more information about importing to and exporting from a LandXML file, see LandXML Import and
Export (page 1875).
Managing Sites
After you create a site, you can edit its properties and add objects to it.
Before working with sites, you should review the following aspects of site functionality:
■ Sites can be copied or moved. If there is a naming conflict at the destination site, the site name is
automatically appended with the next sequential number.
■ Objects can be copied or moved between sites. If there is a naming conflict at the destination site, the
object name is automatically appended. For example, if the identical "Parcel A" object is copied three
times into the same site, the name conflict is resolved as Parcel A (1), Parcel A (2), and Parcel A (3).
■ Parcel linework, grading objects, and alignments can only belong to one unique site and do not interact
with objects in a different site.
■ Sites can only be deleted after all objects have been deleted from the site.
Creating a Site
Use the Prospector tree to create a new site. You can create a site before creating the site topology (alignments,
parcels, and grading).
NOTE When creating parcels and gradings, you must specify a site for them. You can create a new site when
creating these objects. If you do not specify a site, a default site (Site 1) is created for them. You can rename the
site using the Site Properties (page 784) dialog box.
To create a site
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click the Sites collection and click New.
The Site Properties (page 2597) dialog box is displayed with the Information tab active.
2 Enter a name and description for the site in the corresponding fields.
3 Click the 3D Geometry (page 2597) tab and specify the 3D display settings for the site.
4 Click the Numbering (page 2598)tab and specify the numbering properties for alignments and parcels.
5 Click OK.
The site is added to the Sites collection in the Prospector tree.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Sites collection, right-click a site, and click Properties.
2 Optionally, on the Information (page 2597) tab, edit the name and description for the site.
3 Optionally, click the 3D Geometry (page 2597) tab and edit the 3D display settings for the site.
4 Optionally, click the Numbering (page 2598) tab and edit the numbering properties for the parcel
components.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
NOTE Editing an object could cause changes to other objects that share the same topology.
1 Follow the specific procedure to create the object requiring a site (for example, parcel, alignment or
grading object).
2 When the Create dialog box for the object is displayed, do one of the following:
■ Click the Site list and select the site to which you want to add the object.
When creating an alignment, select <None> to assign the alignment to the top-level Alignments
collection. See Alignment and Site Interaction (page 781) for more information.
■ Click the Down arrow next to the Site list and click Pick From Drawing.
The following prompt is displayed:
Select object in site:
Select an object (parcel, alignment, or grading object) contained in the site to which you want to
add the new object.
■ Click the Down arrow next to the Site list and click Create New, then use the Site Properties (page
2597) dialog box to define the new site and click OK.
Deleting a Site
Use the Prospector tree to delete a site. You must first delete all the objects that are contained in the site.
To delete a site
2 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Sites collection, right-click a site, and click Delete.
The site is removed from the Prospector tree.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
IMPORTANT Anytime you experience problems with a drawing, you should use the RECOVER and AUDIT
commands first before using the FindSiteOverlaps command.
3 Review the command results. For example, you may see results as follows if you have overlapping feature
lines in your drawing:
Checking Alignments
Checking Lot Lines
Checking Feature Lines
2 overlapping segments found
This command will move these to their own new site: RemoveDupFeatureLines
Checking Gradings and Attached Lot Lines
2 overlapping segments found
Can only be moved with Move To Site
AutoCAD points on layer _OVERLAPPING_SEGMENT_LOCATIONS indicate location of overlapping
segments.
4 An AutoCAD point is placed in the center of each overlapping segment. If needed, use the DDPTYPE
command to change the AutoCAD point style to better see the point nodes. Or use the LAYER command
to isolate the _OVERLAPPING_SEGMENT_LOCATIONS layer.
Overlapping feature lines with an AutoCAD point marking the center of the collinear segment
5 Use one or more of the following recommended commands to resolve the overlapping segments:
■ RemoveDupFeatureLines (page 788)
6 Erase the AutoCAD points that were created and run the FindSiteOverlaps command again to see if any
overlaps remain.
NOTE If, after removing any overlaps that can be found, there are overlaps reported for gradings, it may be
possible to edit the gradings slightly so that they no longer overlap.
7 Use the AUDIT command to detect and resolve any remaining issues with your drawing.
WARNING This command cannot be undone. Save a copy of your drawing before using it.
2 If overlapping feature lines are found, then at the Command line, enter RemoveDupFeatureLines.
WARNING This command cannot be undone. Save a copy of your drawing before using it.
2 If overlapping lot lines are found, then at the Command line, enter RemoveDupLotLines.
WARNING This command removes all alignments from the site, not just those with overlapping segments. It is
the equivalent of using the Move To Site command and selecting the <None> site.
2 If overlapping alignments are found, then at the Command line, enter RemoveAlignmentsFromSite.
3 Select the site from which you want to remove the alignments and click OK.
Quick Reference
Command Line
FindSiteOverlaps
RemoveDupFeatureLines
RemoveDupLotLines
RemoveAlignmentsFromSite
NOTE If there is a naming conflict, duplicate objects should be deleted from the destination site prior to moving
or copying sites or objects within a site. If duplicates objects occur, the names are automatically resolved. For
example, if the destination site contains an Alignment - (1), it is renamed to Alignment - (1) (1).
See also:
See also:
2 Right-click a site, or collections or individual objects within the site, and click Move To Site.
3 In the Move To Site dialog box, under Destination Site, select an existing site from the list, or click
to either pick a site in the drawing or create a new site.
When moving only alignments, select <None> to move the alignments to the top-level Alignments
collection. See Alignment and Site Interaction (page 781) for more information.
4 Navigate in the data tree to view the selected objects and expand the collections. Select or clear the
check boxes to filter the objects that you want to move.
5 Click OK. The selected objects are moved to the destination site. The original source site objects are
removed.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Prospector: Right-click object or object collection (Site, Alignment, Parcel, or Grading) ➤ Move To Site
Object Shortcut Menu
Drawing: Right-click object (Site, Alignment, Parcel, or Grading) object ➤ Move To Site
Command Line
MoveToSite
Dialog Box
Move To Site (page 2599)
2 Right-click a site, or collections or individual objects within the site, and click Copy To Site.
3 In the Copy To Site dialog box, under Destination Site, select an existing site from the list, or click
to either pick a site in the drawing or create a new site, which is then returned and displayed in the list.
When copying only alignments, select <None> to copy the alignments to the top-level Alignments
collection. See Alignment and Site Interaction (page 781) for more information.
5 Click OK. The selected objects are copied to the destination site. The original site objects remain in the
source.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Command Description
Understanding Gradings
A grading object has its own properties and behavior, like other object types in AutoCAD Civil 3D.
A grading normally consists of a face bounded by a base line, a target line, and several projection lines. The
base line can be any open or closed figure from which you want to project the grading. It can be a feature
line or a lot line. A feature line is any linear feature in the drawing, such as a ridge line, building footprint,
or the bottom of a swale. The target for the grading can be a surface, a distance, or an elevation (absolute
or relative).
793
Line components of a grading object
Before you start grading, you must configure settings and establish criteria such as the following:
■ Grading site: Gradings are created in a site topology. If you do not want a grading to interact with other
objects in a site, create a new site for your grading objects.
■ Grading group: Grading objects in a grading group (page 2775) are consolidated to create one grading
group surface so you can compute volumes. Before you create gradings, decide how you want to manage
them with regard to surface creation and volume computations.
After you create a grading group, volume tools within AutoCAD Civil 3D show you the amount of cut
and fill required for the grading design. You can raise or lower the grading group incrementally to adjust
volume requirements. You can also change the elevation of points along a grading base line, change the
grade of a base line, or modify the grading criteria.
■ Grading targets: Grading objects require a target. This can be a surface, a distance, or an elevation.
surface as target
daylight
footprint
footprint
daylight
specified elevation
footprint
relative elevation
daylight
footprint
daylight
■ Grading criteria: When you start grading, you specify grading criteria (page 2775). This is how many of the
grading settings, such as grading target, are specified.
The list of grading objects defined in the drawing appears in Toolspace, within the Sites collection on the
Prospector tab.
Grading styles (page 802) and Grading Criteria Sets appear in Toolspace on the Settings tab.
footprint
center marker
projection line
daylight line
The footprint can be an open or closed figure. The footprint must be either a feature line (page 2774), a lot line,
or the resulting daylight line (page 2772) of another grading.
A feature line is a line that represents some important feature in the drawing, such as a ridge line or the
bottom of a swale. A feature line can be drawn with the Draw Feature Line command, or created from 2D
and 3D polylines, lines, and arcs. You can also export feature lines from corridor models.
The target for the grading can be a surface, a distance, an elevation, or a relative elevation.
Grading Regions
You define grading regions where a grading object requires different criteria along different parts of the
footprint.
TIP To paste a dynamic grading surface into another surface (the “destination surface”), you must select the Paste
command from the destination surface node in the Prospector tree.
You cannot paste the grading surface into the surface that you are using as the target surface. This is disallowed
because of the dynamic relationship between the gradings and the target surface. To accomplish this task
you should create a copy of the target surface and paste the grading surface into the copy.
Finer values of spacing lead to a more accurate representation of the grading model, but increase the
computation time. These values should be set according to the size of grading object in consideration.
Calculating Volumes
To use the Grading Volume Tools, a dynamic surface must exist for the grading group and a Volume Base
Surface must be specified in the Grading Group Properties. You can also use the surface volume commands
to compute volumes between dynamic or detached surfaces and any other surface.
A black dot glyph indicates a feature line in the site. To edit the feature line style, expand the Site collection,
right-click Feature Lines and select Properties. In the dialog box, set the feature line style priority on the
Options tab (page 2137). If no feature lines have been created in the site, you can set the feature line style
priority to determine the precedence for assigning elevations when feature line segments intersect. Then,
when feature lines are created and points intersect, the elevations will be determined accordingly. You can
Icons indicate the state of the feature line. indicates a feature line with no dynamic links. indicates
a feature line with a dynamic alignment link. indicates a feature line with a dynamic corridor link. For
more information, see Creating Feature Lines (page 808).
These feature line icons display a small green square in the lower corner if the feature line is in use as a
surface breakline . You can find the name of the surfaces by listing or viewing the properties of individual
feature lines. For more information, see Adding a Feature Line to a Surface as a Breakline (page 851).
You can edit a feature line Style or Layer value by clicking the cell to open a style or layer dialog box. To
edit multiple values, use Ctrl+left-click to select multiple rows. Then right-click the column heading and
click Edit to open a Select Style or Layer Selection dialog box. For more information about the AutoCAD
Civil 3D list view, see The Toolspace Item View (page 99).
Right-click the Feature Lines collection to do the following:
■ View properties for the site feature lines and to resolve split point elevations by specifying style priority
(page 866).
■ Apply feature line styles (page 811). If the feature line does not have a style set, the context menu Edit
Feature Line Style option is disabled. The style can be set in the Feature Line Properties dialog box.
■ Remove dynamic links to alignments (page 812). If there is no feature line dynamic link, the Remove
Dynamic Links command is unavailable.
For more information, see The Toolspace Item View (page 99).
Expand the Grading Groups collection to view the names of the grading groups and to display a tabular list
of the grading groups at the bottom of the Prospector tab. For more information, see The Toolspace Item
View (page 99).
Expand the Grading collection to display and edit grading styles (including center markers and slope patterns),
criteria sets, and command settings that are available for grading.
2 In the Edit Settings (page 2097) dialog box, change the existing settings.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
TIP The General feature setting Save Command Changes To Settings is typically set to No. If you change it to
Yes, then each time you run an affected command, the values you specify are saved as defaults for the next time
you run the command. This setting affects the grading criteria and styles in the Grading Creation Tools (page 2114)
dialog box as well as the grading commands.
2 Expand the Commands collection and right-click a command name such as CreateGrading. Click Edit
Command Settings.
3 In the Edit Settings (page 2097) dialog box, expand the command-specific property, such as Grading
Creation, and edit the values.
4 Click OK.
Settings tab: Expand Grading collection ➤ Commands ➤ right-click command name ➤ Edit Command
Settings
Dialog Box
Grading Settings (page 2097)
2 In the Grading Style dialog box, click the Information tab (page 2116) and enter a name and optional
description for the grading style.
3 To define the size of the center marker for a grading, click the Center Marker tab (page 2117).
4 To define the slope pattern for a grading, click the Slope Pattern tab (page 2117).
5 To define the display properties for the grading style, click the Display tab (page 2017) and select the
display properties.
6 To view summary information about the style, click the Summary tab (page 2020).
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand Multipurpose Styles ➤ Slope Pattern Styles.
2 Select Standard or another existing style that is similar to what you want. Right-click and click Copy.
The Slope Pattern Style dialog box is displayed.
3 On the Information tab (page 2123), enter a name and optional description for the new style.
4 On the Layout tab (page 2124), edit parameter values for each component of the slope pattern and add
or delete components as required.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
See also:
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Grading drop-down ➤ Grading Creation Tools .
2 In the Grading Creation Tools (page 2114), click to view the current criteria and the style.
3 Select the grading style that you want to apply from the list of all the styles defined in the drawing.
When grading to a surface or elevation, there can be two style types, one for cut slopes and one for fill
slopes.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Grading collection. Expand the Grading Styles collection.
Select the grading. Click Grading tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Grading Properties drop-down ➤ Edit Grading
Style
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
■ Projection type. Choices include cut/fill slope, cut slope, fill slope, and distance.
■ Interior corner overlap resolution. Choices include averaging the slopes and increasing or decreasing
one of the slopes. For more information and illustrations of the options, see Criteria Tab (Grading Criteria
Dialog Box) (page 2105).
■ Associated values. Depending on the target and projection type, you can specify default elevations,
distances, and cut/fill slopes to use.
Organize and access the criteria in the Settings tree, using the Grading Criteria Sets folders.
When setting up new criteria, it is recommended you use a descriptive naming convention. For example,
the standard AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing templates include several different criteria with names like “Surface
@ 2-1 Slope.” By using a clear naming convention, you do not need to review the criteria properties to know
how it was defined.
■ When creating a grading, you are prompted for both values. The prompts default to 3:1 and 1.50, but
can be changed.
■ If the criteria definition is edited to change either value, it affects only the default prompt value for
grading creation; existing grading objects do not change.
■ If the criteria definition is edited and one of the values is changed from unlocked to locked, that locked
value is applied to all gradings that use the criteria.
■ When creating grading, you are prompted only for the relative elevation value. Grading objects that use
this criteria always have a 3:1 slope.
■ If the criteria definition is edited to change the locked slope value to 2:1, the change applies to all grading
objects that use that criteria. If the criteria definition is edited to unlock the slope value, it does not
change existing gradings, but allows you to edit the slope value for existing grading objects.
■ If the criteria definition is edited to change the unlocked relative elevation value, it affects only the
default prompt value for new grading objects created with the criteria. If the criteria definition is edited
to lock the relative elevation, all grading objects using that criteria are set to the locked relative elevation
value.
■ When creating grading, you do not receive prompts for the criteria values.
■ If the criteria definition is edited to change either value, the change applies to all grading objects that
use the criteria.
■ If the criteria definition is changed to unlock either value, it does not change the grading objects but
allows you to edit the value for existing grading objects that use the criteria.
3 In the Grading Criteria Set Properties (page 2110) dialog box, enter a name and optional description for
the set and click OK.
2 Expand the Grading Criteria Sets collection. The defined sets are listed.
4 In the Grading Criteria dialog box, click the Information tab (page 2104) and enter a name and an optional
description.
5 Click the Criteria tab (page 2105), and edit the values to define the criteria you want.
6 Lock the items that you do not want to change when you are creating grading objects. For example, if
you are setting up a criteria to always create a 3:1 slope, lock the Slope value by clicking the lock icon.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Grading drop-down ➤ Grading Creation Tools .
2 In the Grading Creation Tools (page 2114) dialog box, click (Select A Criteria Set).
Click if you want to view the settings for the current criteria.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand Sites, then expand the site to which you want to add the
new grading group.
4 Optionally, to create a surface for the grading group, select Automatic Surface Creation to activate
additional options for the output surface and the base surface. It also creates a surface in the Surfaces
collection in the Prospector tree.
NOTE When you create a surface using the Automatic Surface Creation option, the Grading Group is listed
on the Definition tab of that surface’s Properties dialog box.
5 Optionally, if you plan to do any calculations of cut and fill volumes for the grading group surface,
select Volume Base Surface and select the base surface from the list.
6 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
3 In the Select Grading Group (page 2122) dialog box, select or create a grading group for the grading object
to be in.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
See also:
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Feature Line drop-down ➤ Create Feature Lines From Objects
.
2 In the drawing, select one or more polylines, lines, or arcs. Then press Enter.
You can select the objects one at a time, or you can make a multiple selection by drawing a window.
3 In the Create Feature Lines (page 2129) dialog box, specify the feature line options.
The feature line retains the elevations of the objects from which it was made. To edit these elevations,
see Editing the Elevations of a Feature Line (page 818).
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Feature Line drop-down ➤ Create Feature Lines From Objects
Menu
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Feature Line drop-down ➤ Create Feature Lines From Objects
.
2 In the Create Feature Lines (page 2129) dialog box, select the Assign Elevations check box and press OK.
3 In the Assign Elevations (page 2130) dialog box, enter an elevation in the edit box select the Elevation
option and press OK. If the object is a 3D polyline with varying elevations, the first point is set to the
specified elevation and the rest of the points are raised/lowered by the same relative amount so that
the elevation differences between the points remain.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Feature Line drop-down ➤ Create Feature Lines From Objects
.
2 In the Create Feature Lines dialog box (page 2129), select the Assign Elevations check box and press OK.
3 In the Assign Elevations (page 2130) dialog box, select the From Surface option.
NOTE If there are no surfaces in the drawing, the From Surface option is unavailable.
4 Select a surface from the list or click the arrow icon to select it in the drawing.
5 Select the Insert Intermediate Grade Break Points check box to insert intermediate grade breaks where
the entity crosses surface TIN lines. Additional elevation points are created at these locations.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Feature Line drop-down ➤ Create Feature Lines From Objects
.
2 In the Create Feature Lines dialog box (page 2129), select the Assign Elevations check box.
3 Select the From Gradings option. This option is similar to the From Surfaces option but acquires the
elevations directly from any gradings that it overlaps in the site that the feature line is to be created in.
NOTE If there are no gradings in the drawing, the From Gradings option is unavailable.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Feature Line drop-down ➤ Create Feature Lines From Objects
Menu
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Feature Line drop-down ➤ Create Feature Lines From Objects
.
3 In the Create Feature Line From Alignment (page 2131) dialog box, specify the feature line options.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Feature Line drop-down ➤ Create Feature Lines From Objects
Menu
1 In the drawing, select a feature line, right-click, and click Apply Feature Line Names.
2 In the Apply Feature Line Names (page 2138) dialog box, in the Name field, enter a name for the feature
line.
To name the feature line, either select its default name and enter a new name, or use the name template.
For more information, see Name Template Dialog Box (page 2022).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the feature line. Click Feature Line tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Apply Feature Line Names
Menu
1 In the drawing, select two or more feature lines, right-click, and click Apply Feature Line Styles.
2 In the Apply Feature Line Styles (page 2138) dialog box, specify the feature line style.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the feature line. Click Feature Line tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Apply Feature Line Styles
Menu
1 In the drawing, select a feature line, right-click, and click Edit Feature Line Style.
2 In the Feature Line Style Dialog Box (page 2118), specify the feature line style components.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the feature line. Click Feature Line tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Feature Line Properties drop-down ➤ Edit
Feature Line Style
Command Line
EditFeatureLineStyle
1 In the drawing, select a feature line, right-click, and click Remove Dynamic Links.
2 In the Apply Feature Line Styles (page 2138) dialog box, specify the feature line style.
Quick Reference
Menu
See also:
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Arcs are created tangential to the previous segment except when the Second Point option is selected to create
a three-point arc.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Feature Line drop-down ➤ Create Feature Line .
2 In the Create Feature Lines (page 2129) dialog box, specify a site, an optional name, and an optional style
for the feature line. Select a layer and note that the option to use a selected entity layer is disabled.
Click OK.
3 Select the start point for the line. You can use Osnaps or transparent commands to snap to existing
geometry.
4 Specify the elevation for the start point by doing one of the following:
■ Enter an elevation at the command line.
■ Enter Surface (S) and select a surface from which to obtain the elevation.
NOTE If there are no surfaces in the drawing, the Surface option is not available. If there is only one
surface in the drawing, that surface is selected automatically.
NOTE See To draw curve segments of feature lines (page 815) for information about the Arc option.
6 If you wish to specify each elevation point as you create points, skip down to Step nine. To continue
drawing points without establishing the elevation until the end:
■ Enter the Transition command.
■ Create a new point. When Transition is selected, as each subsequent point is created the elevation
prompt will default to Transition.
Transition or [SLope/Elevation/Difference/SUrface] <Transition>
7 Press Enter to continue drawing another point(s) without specifying the elevation.
8 After creating points, select and enter the desired keyword to specify the elevation, grade, slope, or
elevation difference. If you end the command while still in the Transition prompt, you will be prompted
to specify an ending elevation.
■ Enter Slope (SL) and enter a slope. The slope is applied to the segment between the first and second
points.
■ Enter Elevation (E) and enter an elevation. The elevation is applied to the second point and the
grade of the segment between the points is calculated.
■ Enter Difference (D) and enter an elevational difference between the first and second points.
■ Enter Surface (SU) and specify a surface from which to obtain the elevation of the second point.
10 Specify the next point on the feature line by doing one of the following:
■ Select the next point in the drawing.
11 Specify the elevation of the point using the options described in Step 6.
1 Complete Steps 1-4 in Drawing Feature Lines (page 813) to draw straight segments.
2 When you are prompted to select the next feature line point, enter Arc (A). The following prompt is
displayed:
Specify arc end point or [Radius/SecondPnt/Line/Undo]:
NOTE If you have not drawn any feature line segments, you are first prompted to establish the arc direction.
For more information, see To establish arc direction (page 815).
NOTE Because this option specifies a radius and the arc is tangent to the previous segment, the actual
end point of the arc may not be at the selected end point.
■ Enter SecondPnt (S) and specify the second point for the arc.
After selecting the second point, the following prompt is displayed:
Specify arc end point or [Length]:
Select the end point or enter Length. If you use the Length option, specify a length and then a
direction for the arc.
NOTE The Length option creates an arc that is tangent to the previous segment and passes though the
second point. The arc may stop short of the second point if the length is shorter than the arc length to
the point.
5 Continue to select arc points or enter Line to draw straight segments or Close to close the feature line.
1 If you use the Arc option of the Draw Feature Line command prior to drawing any segments, it defaults
to drawing a three-point arc. The following prompt is displayed:
Specify arc second point or [Direction]:
■ Enter an angle at the command line. Use the DD.MMSS (degrees, minutes, seconds (page 2772)) format.
■ Enter Bearing (B). Temporary graphics are displayed on screen and the following prompt is displayed:
■ Enter Azimuth (Z). Temporary graphics are displayed on screen and the following prompt is displayed:
Specify azimuth or [Bearing/Angle]:
Use your mouse to specify the azimuth or enter it at the command line. Use the DD.MMSS format.
3 After you have established the arc direction, the following prompt is displayed:
Specify arc end point or [Radius/SecondPnt/Line]:
See To draw curve segments of feature lines (page 815) for more information.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Feature Line drop-down ➤ Create Feature Line
Menu
NOTE You can use the feature line commands to edit survey figures, including control points. You should update
the survey database after editing a feature line. If you do not, the next time you recalculate the figure from the
database, your edits to the feature lines will be overwritten.
NOTE You can also use the feature line commands to edit parcel lines.
The following table lists which objects are supported for each command.
Elevation Editor X X X
(page 820)
Quick Elevation X X
Edit (page 819)
Edit Elevations X X X X
(page 822)
Set Grade/Slope X X X X
Between Points
(page 823)
Set Elevation By X X X X
Reference (page
824)
Insert Elevation X X X X
Point (page 830)
NOTE Inserts
PI rather than
elevation
point.
Delete Elevation X X X
Point (page 832)
Raise/Lower (page X X X X
829)
Raise/Lower by X X X X X
Reference (page
826)
Adjacent Elevations X X X X
by Reference (page
827)
Grade Extension by X X X X
Reference (page
828)
NOTE This
command
also supports
AutoCAD
lines
Stepped Offset X X X X
(page 848)
Remove Dynamic X
Links (page 812)
Adding a Feature X
Line to Surface as
a Breakline (page
851)
Convert 2D to 3D X
Polyline (page 854)
Convert 3D to 2D X
Polyline (page 854)
1 Click Modify tab ➤ Design panel ➤ Elevations Drop-down ➤ Quick Elevation Edit .
NOTE The current site is listed at the command line. If you want to select a different site or an object in the
desired site, enter Site. Then, select either an object in the drawing or select Enter to access a list of available
sites in the Select Object(s) dialog box.
■ Triangles are displayed when you hover over a vertex or intersection point. The elevation is
displayed in a tooltip.
■ Circles are displayed when you hover over an elevation point (page 2773). The elevation is displayed
in a tooltip.
■ Arrows are displayed when you hover over a segment. The arrow points to the end of the
segment that is closest to the cursor. This is the point that will have its elevation changed with the
grade edit.The grade is displayed in a tooltip.
■ Gray glyphs are displayed when you hover over an elevation or grade that cannot be edited.
Uneditable lines include objects such as daylight and dynamically linked feature lines.
When you locate the elevation or grade you want to edit, click your mouse.
■ If you clicked an elevation point, you can also enter Surface to open the Select Surface dialog box
and select a surface to obtain the elevation from.
NOTE The Surface option only appears if there are surfaces in the drawing.
NOTE If the feature lines are being used as surface breaklines and the surface Rebuild-Automatic setting is turned
on, you can see the surface updating automatically as you make each edit.
1 Click Modify tab ➤ Design panel ➤ Elevations Drop-down ➤ Quick Elevation Edit.
2 Enter Reference.
3 Select the reference point to use. When picking the reference point, it defaults to a point in the site,
but you can also select the Pick option to use OSNAP to pick any location in the drawing.
4 Move the cursor around the reference point and a yellow line is drawn on screen from the reference
point to the closest point.
■ Enter Slope and then enter a slope. The slope is applied between the reference point and the point
on the feature line.
■ Enter Difference and then enter the elevational difference. The elevational difference is applied
between the reference point and the point on the feature line.
The assigned elevation for the point is displayed at the command line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Grading menu ➤ Edit Feature Line Elevations ➤ Quick Elevation Edit
Command Line
QuickEditFeatureElevs
Supported Objects
■ Feature lines
■ Parcel lines
■ Green triangles mark the points that represent the major horizontal geometry points. For example,
when you create a feature line, all vertices are shown as triangles. If you insert points of intersection (PI),
they are also shown as triangles.
■ White triangles indicate split points, where two feature lines cross although neither has a geometry
point at that location. You cannot directly edit the elevation of these points. For more information, see
Feature Line Site Properties (page 866).
■ Circles mark the elevation change points. Insert a new elevation point (page 2773) by using the Insert
Elevation Point icon in the Grading Elevation Editor.
■ Grade arrows display at segment midpoints (pointing downhill) to indicate feature line flow directions
and to display the segment that is being edited when a single row is selected.
NOTE When a vertex is a shared point with another intersecting feature line, a small + symbol is displayed
with the icon for that row.
When two features, such as feature lines, lot lines or survey figures cross and neither feature has a geometry
point at that location, a split point is created. You cannot edit this point directly, as it is controlled by the
grades of the two crossing segments which must have the same elevation at the crossing point. If the two
elevations are different, a grade break is inserted into one to match the elevation of the other.
You can assign a priority to feature line styles so that when two feature lines with different styles cross, the
one with the higher priority will set the elevation. Feature lines without a style have the lowest priority. Use
the Options tab in the Feature Line Site Properties (page 2137) dialog box to set the feature line style priority.
If two feature lines have the same style or no style, then the feature line that is modified last becomes
dominant, causing the other feature line to break at that point. To control the elevation at that point, use
the Insert PI command to create a vertex at the split point.
3 Change the elevation in the Grading Elevation Editor (page 2111) dialog box.
The Elevations From Surface option is unavailable if there are no surfaces in the drawing. If there is
only one surface, that surface is automatically used to assign the elevation. If there is more then one
surface, you are prompted to select the desired surface.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Feature lines
■ Parcel lines
■ Survey figures
3 To select the vertex or elevation point to edit, press Enter without entering a value. You can also enter
Next or Previous to change the direction the command uses to step through the points.
■ A triangle is displayed on the feature line when you select a vertex or intersection point.
■ A circle is displayed on the feature line when you select an elevation point (page 2773).
■ Enter Move and select a new location for the elevation point.
5 As you make each change, the feature line is updated in the drawing and the grading is adjusted.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Feature lines
■ Parcel lines
■ Survey figures
■ 3D polylines
1 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit Elevations panel ➤ Set Grade/Slope Between Points .
4 Optionally, specify the elevation of the start point by entering an elevation or by entering Surface and
selecting a surface to obtain the elevation from.
6 Do one of the following to establish the grade or slope between the points:
■ Enter a grade.
■ Enter Difference and specify an elevational difference between the two points.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Modify tab ➤ Edit Elevations panel ➤ Set Grade/Slope Between Points
Menu
Click Grading menu ➤ Edit Figure Elevations ➤ Set Grade/Slope Between Points
Command Line
SetFeatureGrade
Supported Objects
■ Feature lines
■ Parcel lines
■ Survey figures
■ 3D polylines
■ Enter Insert and then select a point on the feature line at which to insert a new elevation point. On
3D polylines, a new PI is inserted.
The distance between the selected point and the reference point, and the elevation and grade of the
selected point, are displayed at the command line.
■ Enter Slope and then enter a slope. The slope is applied between the reference point and the point
on the feature line.
■ Enter Difference and enter the elevational difference. The elevational difference is applied between
the reference point and the point on the feature line.
The assigned elevation for the point is displayed at the command line.
6 The original reference point remains active. Select another feature line to continue setting elevations
in reference to this point. Or, press Enter to end the command.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Feature lines
■ Parcel lines
■ Survey figures
■ 3D polylines
2 Select the reference point to use. Select the Pick option to use OSNAP to pick any location, in the
drawing or use the transparent commands to select a COGO point or surface elevation.
The elevation of the selected point is displayed at the command line.
3 Select the feature line or other object that you want to raise or lower.
■ Enter Slope and enter a slope. The slope is applied between the reference point and the point on
the feature line.
■ Enter Difference, and enter the elevational difference. The elevational difference is applied between
the reference point and the point on the feature line.
The assigned elevation for the point is displayed at the command line.
6 The original reference point remains active. Select another feature line to continue setting elevations
in reference to this point. Or, press Enter to end the command.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Feature lines
■ Parcel lines
■ Survey figures
■ 3D polylines
■ Polylines
Only points that fall within the range of the reference object can be modified.
■ Enter Grade and enter a grade. The grade is applied between the reference point and the point on
the feature line.
■ Enter Slope and enter a slope. The slope is applied between the reference point and the point on
the feature line.
■ Enter Variable. The Variable option steps along each point prompting for the elevation difference,
grade, or slope. It does not insert any new points along the feature
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Feature lines
■ Parcel lines
■ Survey figures
■ 3D polylines
3 Select the feature line or an other object that you want to edit.
As the cursor is moved along the feature line, it snaps to the nearest point that you can edit, displaying
a yellow line from the reference point to the edit point.
5 Press Enter to use the default reference grade. Do one of the following:
■ Enter a grade. The grade is applied between the reference point and the point on the feature line.
■ Enter Slope and then enter a slope. The slope is applied between the reference point and the point
on the feature line.
■ Enter Difference and enter the elevational difference. The elevational difference is applied between
the reference point and the point on the feature line.
The assigned elevation for the point is displayed at the command line.
6 Enter the grade to that point. The reference grade is the default.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Feature lines
■ Parcel lines
■ Survey figures
■ 3D polylines
■ Polylines
3 Enter the elevation difference by which to raise or lower the feature lines.
The default elevation difference is 1.0.
4 If the selected feature lines are all at the same elevation, an Elevation keyword appears. Select the
Elevation option to specify an elevation for the feature lines. The default is the elevation of the feature
lines.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Feature lines
■ Parcel lines
■ Survey figures
■ 3D polylines
■ Polylines
3 Click to select the location along the feature line to insert the elevation point.
4 Specify the elevation by entering a value. Or enter Surface to obtain the elevation from a surface. If
only one surface is in the drawing it is selected automatically.
3 Enter Distance.
4 Select an existing point on the feature line to specify the start of the distance. If you select a point other
than the start or end point, you must then select the direction.
■ Enter Elevation and enter an elevation. Or enter Surface to obtain the elevation from a surface.
3 Enter Increment.
4 Enter a value to define the length of the increment. Points are placed equidistant along the feature line
using the specified increment.
NOTE Using this option, you are not prompted for elevations. The points are automatically assigned the
elevation that exists at their location on the feature line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Feature lines
■ Parcel lines
■ Survey figures
3 Click to select the elevation point to delete. Or enter All to delete all elevation points.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Feature lines
■ Parcel lines
■ Survey figures
1 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit Elevations panel ➤ Insert High/Low Elevation Point .
3 Select the start point and the end point of the span that you want to add the point to. These points
can span multiple feature line segments.
After you select the start and end points, an arrow is displayed at the start of the span. The command
line displays the start and end elevations and the distance between the start and end points.
4 Enter the grade (or enter Slope and specify a slope) from the start point.
Enter a positive value to grade up or a negative value to grade down.
NOTE If an intersection cannot be found with the entered values a “No solution found” message is displayed.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Modify tab ➤ Edit Elevations panel ➤ Insert High/Low Elevation Point
Menu
Grading menu ➤ Edit Feature Line Elevations ➤ Insert High/Low Elevation Point
Command Line
InsertFeatureHighLowPoint
Supported Objects
■ Feature lines
■ Parcel lines
■ Survey figures
■ 3D polylines
2 In the Set Elevations From Surface (page 2136) dialog box, select a surface.
3 Select the Insert Intermediate Grade Break Points check box to insert intermediate grade breaks where
the entity crosses surface TIN lines. Elevation points are created at these locations.
■ Enter Partial, and then define a portion of the feature line to assign elevations to.
6 The feature line is assigned the elevations of the underlying surface. To edit these elevations, see Editing
the Elevations of a Feature Line (page 818).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Feature lines
■ Parcel lines
■ Survey figures
■ 3D polylines
Split points are created when two feature lines cross and neither has a geometry point. A split point cannot
be edited as it is controlled by the grades of the two crossing segments which must have the same elevation
at the crossing point. If their elevations are different, a grade break will be inserted into one to match the
4 Enter Distance. Then specify a distance from the start point at which a PI point along the feature line
is inserted.
5 Enter Increment. Specify distance between points, then click the feature line to to automatically insert
PI points separated by the specified distance. As this command inserts multiple points, the elevation
for each point will be determined by the existing elevation of the feature line at each point.
NOTE You are not prompted for the elevation if the object you selected is a 3D polyline.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Feature lines
■ 3D polylines
■ 2D polylines
2 Click the feature line or other object near the PI you want to delete.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Feature lines
■ Survey figures
■ 3D polylines
■ 2D polylines
2 Select the feature line you want to join other lines to.
3 Select the joining object or enter Multiple to make a selection of multiple feature lines, polylines, or
3D polylines.
Quick Reference
Menu
■ Feature lines
■ Survey figures
■ 2D polylines
■ 3D polylines
3 Select additional feature lines that you want to reverse. Or, press Enter to end the command.
NOTE Use Zoom to see the directional arrows that display on each segment.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Feature lines
■ Survey figures
■ 3D polylines
■ 2D polylines
■ Lines
2 Select the curve to edit. The curve is highlighted, and the points are displayed.
3 In the Edit Feature Line Curve (page 2138) dialog box, edit the curve. Use the Radius edit box to specify
the radius.
4 Use the Maintain Tangency option to control the curve tangency state.
When the radius is changed, if the arc is tangent to the segments on either side, the tangency is
maintained. Before selecting OK in the Edit Feature Line Curve dialog box, the new arc is displayed. At
the same time, the existing arc remains visible with the dashed highlighting.
If the curve is not tangent, the Maintain Tangency button is activated. If you toggle this button the
curve will be adjusted to make it tangent to the adjacent segments. If the curve is tangent, the button
is disabled.
NOTE When the Delete option is selected, the segments on either side of the curve are extended to an
intersection point.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Feature lines
■ Survey figures
■ 3D polylines
■ 2D polylines
■ Lines
■ Enter Join to join a connecting feature line and then select the feature line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Feature lines
■ Survey figures
■ 3D polylines
Tessellation occurs when you convert a 2D polyline with arcs to a 3D polyline. It also occurs when you
export feature lines with arcs from corridor models.
Grading created from tessellated footprint (left) compared with grading
created from arc (right)
■ Automatic selection: As you move your mouse over the feature line, arcs appear where they can be
inserted. Click your mouse to insert the arc.
■ Specifying start and end points over multiple segments: Use this method to define an arc using specified
start and end points.
■ Specifying start and end points for a single segment: Use this method to replace a single segment (such
as a chamfered corner) with an arc. If the corner is asymmetrical, two arcs are inserted that are tangent
to the line segments and to each other.
You can specify the command options by editing the FitCurveFeature command settings, or by using the
Options keyword when running the Fit Curve command.
To fit a curve
■ Enter Points (P). Then select the start and end point on the feature line for the arc location. This
option ignores the minimum number of segments setting.
If the start and end points span more than one segment but the points do not define an arc, an error
message is displayed indicating that an arc cannot be created between the specified points. This
error occurs if the segments do not all curve in the same direction or if there is a straight segment
that is composed of multiple small segments (which therefore have no deflection angle).
NOTE If the segments can define an arc but are not within the tolerance, you are prompted with an
option to override the tolerance setting and insert the arc.
■ Enter Options (O) to display the Fit Curve (page 2135) dialog box where you can change the tolerance
and minimum number of segments settings.
■ Feature lines
■ Survey figures
■ 3D polylines
■ 2D polylines
You can use these grips to adjust the arc directions at the start and end of the feature line.
Select and move grip to adjust arc direction
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Feature lines
Weeding Vertices
Use the Weed Vertices command to reduce the number of vertices on a feature line.
Vertices are weeded if found to be unnecessary for line location, based on weeding factors of angle, grade,
length, and 3D distance. Points selected for weeding are highlighted in red.
■ Are closer together in 2D space to their two neighboring vertices than the Length factor.
possible vertex to be
deleted
G1 %
G2
%
■ Are closer together in 3D space to their two neighboring vertices than the 3D Distance factor.
To weed vertices
■ Enter Partial and then select the object and the portion of the object to weed.
The vertices of the object(s) you selected are highlighted with green triangles and the Weed Vertices
(page 2133) dialog box is displayed.
3 Select the check boxes for the weeding factors that you want to apply and specify the values to use.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Feature lines
■ 2D polylines
■ 3D polylines
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Feature Line drop-down ➤ Create Feature Line From Stepped
Offset .
■ Enter Through, then select the object to offset and select a through point. The offset will be drawn
through this point.
■ Enter Multiple and specify the side and elevational difference for each offset.
If you enter Variable, it will display a marker at the first point on the offset feature line. You can specify
the elevation difference from the original point or the absolute elevation. After you enter a value, it
will move to the next point and prompt for its elevation. It will continue to do this for each point on
the feature line until you end the command.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Feature Line drop-down ➤ Create Feature Line From Stepped
Offset
Menu
■ Feature lines
■ Survey figures
■ 3D polylines
■ 2D polylines
NOTE if you enter the @ character at the prompt for the second break point, it uses the first point location,
creating a break without a gap.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Feature lines
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Feature lines
NOTE If there are no surfaces in the drawing, you are prompted to create one.
2 In the Select Surface dialog box, select a surface, and press OK. Or, select the Add button to create a
new surface.
NOTE If you list a feature line or view its properties, you will see the names of the surfaces and breakline
collections that the feature line is part of.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select a feature line. Click Feature Line tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Add To Surface As Breakline
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
On the Toolspace Settings tab, in the General Label Style collection, set up Line and Curve label styles (page
1659) to use for the feature lines.
On the Toolspace Settings tab, in the General Label Style collection, specify the default line label style (page
1655).
Use the Single Segment or Multiple Segment command to quickly label a feature line using the default label
style.
Use the Add Feature Line Labels option to access the Add Labels (page 2208) dialog box if you need to create
or modify a style before labeling a feature line.
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Feature Line ➤ Single Segment
.
OR
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Add Feature Line Labels ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Feature Line ➤ Add Feature
Line Labels
2 In the Add Labels dialog box (page 2208), under Feature, ensure that Line And Curve is selected.
5 Click Add and then select the feature line or segment to label.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Feature Line ➤ Single Segment
Menu
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Feature Line ➤ Multiple Segments
.
OR
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels button .
2 In the Add Labels dialog box (page 2208), under Feature, ensure that Line And Curve is selected.
5 Click Add and then select the feature lines or segments to label.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Feature Line ➤ Multiple Segments
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels button
Editing Polylines
You can use the Polyline Utilities to convert between types of polylines and to assign elevations to 2D
polylines.
Converting 2D Polylines to 3D
Use the Convert 2D To 3D Polylines command to convert 2D to 3D polylines.
Use this utility if you need to modify the elevations of individual vertices of a 2D polyline. 2D polylines are
coplanar objects. You can assign elevations to 3D polylines with the feature line elevation commands.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ 2D polylines
Converting 3D Polylines to 2D
Use the Convert 3D To 2D Polylines command to convert 3D to 2D polylines.
The new polyline will take on the elevation of the start point of the 3D polyline.
■ 3D polylines
3 Specify the elevation. All vertices are assigned the same elevation.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ 2D polylines
Creating Grading
You can use the Grading Creation Tools to create grading from a footprint or to copy the criteria and style
from another grading.
Use the tools to specify the grading group and criteria and then use the Create Grading options.
See also:
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Grading drop-down ➤ Grading Creation Tools .
3 Click to override the layer setting and then specify the layer for the grading.
If you have more than one set of named grading criteria, click to select the grading criteria set you
want.
5 If the criteria you selected uses Surface as its target, specify which surface to target. The selected surface
is displayed in the status bar of the layout toolbar. To select a different surface, click .
6 Select a grading style for the grading to use from the drop-down list.
If you don’t see the style selector, click to display the list of styles.
8 Click the footprint in the drawing. If you select a line, arc, or polyline, you are prompted to convert it
to a feature line.
9 Click in the drawing to indicate the side of the footprint that you want to apply the grading. If you are
grading from another grading’s daylight line, you are not prompted for the grading side because only
one side is available.
10 Specify whether the grading should be applied to the entire length of the line. To apply the grading to
a subset of the line, enter n, then follow the command line prompts and on-screen arrows to specify
the start and end points on the footprint.
Depending on the criteria definition, you may be prompted to specify a distance and a slope value. For
more information about the various options, see Criteria Tab (Grading Criteria Dialog Box) (page 2105).
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Grading drop-down ➤ Grading Creation Tools
Menu
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Grading drop-down ➤ Grading Creation Tools .
2 In the Grading Creation Tools (page 2114) dialog box, click the arrow next to . Click Copy Create
Grading.
3 In the drawing, select the grading from which you want to copy the criteria and style.
4 Select the footprint in the drawing and select the side of the footprint from which to grade.
If you are grading from another grading’s daylight line, you are not prompted for the grading side
because only one side is available.
5 Click in the drawing to indicate the side of the footprint to which you want to apply the grading.
Depending on the criteria definition, you may have to specify a distance and a slope value. For more
information about the various options, see Criteria Tab (Grading Criteria Dialog Box) (page 2105).
6 Specify whether you want to apply the grading to the entire length of the line. To apply the grading
only to a region, enter n and then specify the start and end points on the footprint that define the
region.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Grading drop-down ➤ Grading Creation Tools
Menu
Editing Grading
You can edit either grading criteria or the elevations of the footprint or daylight line using edit commands
on the Grading menu or the Grading Creation Tools.
Use the Grading Editor (Panorama) to edit unlocked criteria values for a grading object, the Grading Elevation
Editor (Panorama) for feature lines and parcel lines, and additional commands for specific editing operations.
You can also use grips to edit grading.
1 Select the grading. Click Grading tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Grading Editor .
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 Select the grading. Click Grading tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Grading .
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Inserting a Transition
Add a transition to fill an area between two existing grading objects or to create a grading that has
transitioning values.
A transition is an area that merges the grading of the regions on either side, for example, from 3:1 to 2:1.
transition inserted
■ You can select a location between two existing gradings. The transition start and end points are defined
by the existing projection lines.
existing grading
transition inserted
■ You can select start and end points for the transition and then define the parameters to use at each end.
You can use the same criteria for both ends or you can switch criteria.
In addition, you are sometimes prompted to create transitions when you use the Create Grading command.
This occurs when the start point of a new grading is inside or touching an existing grading.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Grading drop-down ➤ Grading Creation Tools .
4 Click the location where you want to add the transition (between two existing regions).
The transition is added and the grading is updated.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Grading drop-down ➤ Grading Creation Tools .
4 Enter Points.
6 Select the location where you want to add the transition (within an existing grading). The station of
the point you selected is displayed at the command line. You can change it or press Enter to accept the
location.
The transition is added and the grading is updated.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Grading drop-down ➤ Grading Creation Tools .
4 Enter Points.
6 Select the location where you want to add the transition. The station of the point you selected is
displayed at the command line. You can change it or press Enter to accept the location.
7 Follow the prompts to define the criteria values for the start of the transition.
■ Enter Length to specify a length for the transition. Then follow the prompts to define the criteria
values for the end point.
■ Enter Criteria and select a different criteria to apply to the end point of the transition. If you select
a criteria that is different from the criteria applied to the start point, the two are blended to create
the transition.
NOTE The following three options are available only if other gradings exist on the footprint.
■ Enter Next to define the transition end point as the edge of the next grading on the footprint (up
station).
■ Enter Previous to define the transition end as the edge of the previous grading on the footprint
(down station).
■ Enter Both to straddle the grading transition between the next and previous grading edges on the
footprint. This option overrides the selected start point.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Grading drop-down ➤ Grading Creation Tools
Command Line
CreateGradingTransition
Dialog Box
Grading Creation Tools (page 2114)
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Grading drop-down ➤ Grading Creation Tools .
3 Click the area that you want to fill. Valid areas that can be converted to infill are highlighted as you
move the cursor over them.
The grading face is added and the grading is updated.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Grading drop-down ➤ Grading Creation Tools
Command Line
CreateGradingInfill
Dialog Box
Grading Creation Tools (page 2114)
Component Description
Feature lines Grip appears at each vertex. Move the grip as you would when
you edit a polyline.
Projection lines Grip appears on projection lines. Slide the projection line along
the footprint to change the start or end point of the region.
Elevation points Grip appears at any location on a feature line or lot line to mark
an intermediate elevation point. Move the point to its correct
location.
1 In the drawing, select the grading or feature line you want to edit.
Deleting Gradings
Use the Delete Gradings command to delete a grading.
Surfaces based on deleted grading objects remain in the drawing.
To delete a grading
1 Select the grading. Click Grading tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Delete Grading .
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Feature lines
■ Parcel lines
■ Survey figures
Grading Properties
You can view and change grading group and grading properties.
2 Expand the Grading Groups collection. Right-click the grading group you want to edit.
3 Click Properties to open the Grading Group Properties (page 2113) dialog box.
4 Change the properties on the Information tab, or click the Properties tab to review the settings, styles,
criteria, and volumes for the grading group.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the grading. Click Grading tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Grading Group Properties
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 Select the grading. Click Grading tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Grading Properties drop-down ➤ Grading
Properties .
3 In the drawing, click a grading to open the Grading Properties (page 2116) dialog box.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the grading. Click Grading tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Grading Properties drop-down ➤ Grading Properties
2 In the Feature Line Properties dialog box, click the Information Tab (page 2132).
4 Enter a name or click to edit the name template in the Name Template Dialog Box (page 2022).
6 Select a style.
7 Click the Style Detail button to open the Style Detail dialog box. Preview the feature line style.
8 Click the Statistics tab (page 2133) to view feature line statistics and breakline data.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Feature Line tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Feature Line Properties drop-down ➤ Feature Line Properties
Object Shortcut Menu
NOTE If two feature lines have the same style or no style, then the feature line that is modified last becomes
dominant, causing the other feature line to break at that point. The last-edited feature line controls the elevation
at that point, which can cause undesirable results. To control the elevation at that point, use the Insert PI (page
834) command to create a vertex at the split point.
IMPORTANT Feature lines without a style applied can also assume the elevation of an alignment if they cross,
resulting in a vertex of zero at that point. If you find that any feature line has an elevation of zero be sure that you
have applied a style to that feature line. A feature line with a style applied will always take priority over an alignment,
and will not assume the alignment’s elevation.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the site collection ➤ right-click Feature Lines and click
Properties.
2 Click the Statistics (page 2136) or Grouped Statistics Grouped Statistics (page 2137)tabs to view data about
the feature lines in the drawing.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the site collection ➤ right-click Feature Lines and click
Properties.
3 Select the Filter Unused Styles check box to show only used styles.
4 You can drag and drop styles in the list or use the up/down arrows to specify priority.
NOTE When new styles are created, they are added to the end of the list.
Quick Reference
Object Shortcut Menu
TIP If you are designing a detention pond and want to size it by volume, it may help to create a temporary surface
to use as the Volume Base Surface for comparison. To do this, draw a polyline around the pond rim, assign it the
rim elevation, and add it as breakline data to a surface. When you use such a surface as the Volume Base Surface
for the grading group, you can more easily see how much volume the pond can contain.
1 Click Analyze tab ➤ Volumes And Materials panel ➤ Grading Volume Tools .
3 In the Select Grading Group (page 2122) dialog box, select a grading group or create a new one.
4 Optionally, click to review and change properties for the grading group.
NOTE If you do not see the information displayed in the Cut, Fill, and Net volumes boxes, check the Grading
Group Properties to ensure Automatic Surface Creation is selected and a Volume Base Surface is specified.
5 Select either Entire Group or Selection to identify the grading objects for which you want to raise or
lower to make the volume adjustments. For Selection, click and select objects in the drawing.
6 In the numeric field in the upper right of the Grading Volume Tools, enter the distance (typically feet
or meters) by which the grading objects will be raised or lowered for each elevation adjustment.
■ To manually adjust the grading elevation, click or and note the changed values for cut, fill,
and net volume.
■ To automatically adjust the elevation to meet a net volume target, click . Enter the target volume
in the Auto-Balance Volumes dialog box, then click OK. The elevation is adjusted several times,
getting as close to the target as possible.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Surfaces drop-down ➤ Create Surface From Grading
.
2 In the Select Grading Group (page 2122) dialog box, specify the site and the grading group.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Surfaces drop-down ➤ Create Surface From Grading
Menu
Command Description
AddFeatureLineLabels Adds line and curve labels to feature lines (page 852)
BreakFeatures Breaks a feature line into two feature lines (page 849)
Understanding Parcels
Parcel objects in AutoCAD Civil 3D are typically used to represent real estate parcels, such as lots in a
subdivision.
Parcel objects can also represent other features with closed boundaries, such as bodies of water and soil
regions.
Parcel Components
A parcel boundary is a closed polygon. The points where line segments join are called nodes. There are two
segment types: line and curve.
873
Each parcel has an area label, which refers to the parcel as a whole. You can click the area label to select the
parcel. A parcel can also have segment labels, and associated tables, which display information about the
parcel. Labels can contain user-defined property fields.
Each parcel maintains information about its segments and nodes, and the area they enclose. Editing parcel
segments dynamically updates the parcel properties. Deleting a segment can result in one parcel merging
with another.
Parcel Collections
Parcels are contained in a parcels collection, which in turn is contained in a site.
A drawing can include any number of sites, but each site has only one parcels collection. No unique parcel
can belong to more than one site. You can see these relationships in the Sites collection in Toolspace, on
the Prospector tab:
In situations that require overlapping parcels, such as overlaying a subdivision with soil regions, you can
put the subdivision parcels in one site and the soil region parcels in another site. Multiple sites can overlay
one another because their topologies are independent. Although everything within a site is topologically
related, sites are not topologically related to each other.
NOTE To prevent an alignment from changing a parcel, the two objects should be in different sites. To prevent
an alignment from interacting with any parcel objects, select <none> when prompted to select a site. See
Understanding Alignments (page 923).
Site Parcels
Associated with every site is a site parcel. The site parcel boundary is the outermost extent of a site, containing
all alignments, gradings, and parcels. Objects within a site parcel do not have to touch.
■ With none of the alignment overlaying the original site parcel, the site parcels perimeter increases by
twice the length of the alignment.
■ With all of the alignment overlaying the original site parcel, the site parcels perimeter does not increase.
■ With some of the alignment overlaying and some of it projecting, the site parcels perimeter increases by
twice the length of the part that projects.
In some circumstances, an unclosed sequence of parcel segments can define a valid parcel. With such a
parcel, as with an alignment, its area is zero, and its perimeter is twice the sum of its segment lengths.
Parcel Styles
Use styles to control the appearance of parcels, their labels, and their tables.
The Standard style is provided by default. Define additional styles as needed.
View the available parcel styles in the Parcels collection in Toolspace, on the Settings tab:
You can create, modify, copy, rename, or delete any style, including the Standard style, by right-clicking a
style in the Parcel tree and then clicking an item on the shortcut menu. Note, however, that you cannot
delete a style that is in use.
To set or change parcel settings, go to the Toolspace Settings tree and right-click Parcels ➤ Edit Feature
Settings.
For more information about the Parcel collection, see Parcel Collection (Settings Tab) (page 879).
For more information about parcel settings, see Parcel Settings (page 891).
Parcel Properties
Use Parcel properties to view or edit details of existing parcels.
To view or edit parcel properties, go to the Toolspace Prospector tab, right-click a parcel and click Properties.
The following illustration shows two parcels: OPEN SPACE 100, and OPEN SPACE 101:
For more information parcel collections, see Parcels Collections (Prospector Tab) (page 878).
You can also right-click a selected parcel in a drawing, then click Parcel Properties. To select a parcel, click
the text of its area label. If you have selected it correctly, the label text and its anchor point are highlighted.
If the area label is not visible, see Hiding or Showing Parcel Labels (page 909).
For more information about parcel properties, see Parcel Properties (page 892).
■ Zoom or pan to the collections site parcel in the drawing (page 885).
Expand the Parcels collection to view the names of the parcels and to display a tabular list of the parcels in
the Toolspace item view. For more information, see The Toolspace Item View (page 99).
Expand the Parcel collection to display and edit the styles and command settings that are available for
parcels.
Creating Parcels
Create parcels from drawing objects, by layout, or by subdividing an existing parcel.
When you create parcels from drawing objects, ensure that they have no drawing errors that would make
them invalid topology sources. Use the drawing cleanup tools in Autodesk Map. When you create parcels
by layout, you draw parcel segments directly.
You can define parcel sizing criteria when creating or editing parcels by subdividing
existing parcels.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Create Parcel From Objects .
2 If you clicked Create Parcel From Objects, click objects in the drawing to select them. When you finish,
press Enter.
This step occurs only if you are creating from objects.
3 In the Create Parcels dialog box (page 2235), you can edit default settings before creating any parcels.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Create Parcel From Objects
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Parcel Creation Tools
Menu
TIP To remove drawing errors from source geometry, use the drawing cleanup tools in Autodesk Map before you
import the objects.
1 Make sure that the AutoCAD objects that you are converting to parcels are free of drawing errors.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Create Parcel From Objects .
3 Click objects in the drawing to select them. When you finish, press Enter.
NOTE You can enter xref to select an object from an xref. The xref command supports multiple selections.
4 In the Create Parcels dialog box (page 2235), you can edit default settings before creating any parcels.
Click OK and the parcels are created.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Create Parcel From Objects
Menu
■ Precise sizing tools control the angles and directions of lot lines.
TIP Object Snap can be very useful when creating parcels, especially with the freehand tools. Use Object Snap to
attach lines exactly to existing endpoints and vertices.
NOTE Using the layout tools is the only activity possible while the Parcel Layout Tools toolbar is open.
See also:
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Parcel Creation Tools .
3 Specify a site with which to associate the parcel or accept the default <None>. For more information,
see Understanding Sites (page 779).
6 Specify the Parcel Label Set or accept the default. Click OK.
7 Use the commands on the Parcel Layout Tools toolbar to create the parcel.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Parcel Creation Tools
Menu
■ Slide Line. Holds either a fixed angle to the frontage or an absolute direction.
When creating or editing parcels with the Parcel Layout Tools, preview graphics display the proposed solution
which results from the specified layout parameters used to define parcel components such as minimum
parcel frontage, width, and depth. As you use the tools to determine the design of proposed new parcels,
these graphics display to illustrate the proposed solution, and you are prompted to either accept or reject
the solution. When you modify the layout parameters, the graphics update dynamically while the Parcel
Layout Tools toolbar is open and the parameters are being edited. For more information, see Parcel Layout
Tools (page 2245).
See also:
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Parcel Creation Tools .
2 On the Parcel Layout Tools toolbar, click to expand the toolbar. Specify the Parcel Sizing and
Automatic Layout parameters for the new parcel.
4 In the Create Parcels - Layout dialog box (page 2235), specify any changes to the default settings. Click
OK.
5 Click the Parcel Selection Area label to select the parcel or enter p and then click inside the parcel.
7 Click an end point along the frontage. A preview graphic highlights the proposed frontage.
8 Specify the angle, bearing or azimuth to place the new lot line. Preview graphics display if a solution
can be obtained.
NOTE When prompted for the angle, bearing or azimuth, you can press Enter to enter the default 90 degree
angle.
9 Accept the result to edit the parcel. If a solution based on the current parcel sizing parameter values is
not found, you are prompted to adjust the parameters or reenter a new value for the method you are
using.
10 Optionally, continue creating lot lines by repeating Steps 5-9. When you finish, press Esc.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Parcel Creation Tools .
2 On the Parcel Layout Tools (page 2245) toolbar, click to expand the toolbar. Specify the Parcel Sizing
parameters and Automatic Mode options for the new parcel.
4 In the Create Parcels - Layout dialog box (page 2235), specify any changes to the default settings. Click
OK.
7 Click an end point along the frontage. A preview graphic highlights the proposed frontage.
8 Specify the swing point. Preview graphics display if a solution can be obtained.
9 Accept the result to subdivide the parcel. If a solution based on the current parcel sizing parameter
values is not found, you are prompted to adjust the parameters, select a new point, or exit the command.
10 Optionally, continue creating lot lines by repeating Steps 4-10. When you finish, press Esc.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Parcel Creation Tools
Menu
Editing Parcels
Edit parcels to change their size, shape, or display properties.
Edit parcels in three main ways:
■ Use drafting tools. Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Parcel Creation Tools
. and use the Parcel Layout Tools (page 2245).
■ Change properties and labels. Click the area label to select the parcel, then right-click and select a menu
option.
■ Grip edit. Click lot lines and drag their nodes to new positions.
To locate a parcel
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Editing parcel label styles Editing Parcel Label Styles (page 901)
Replacing parcel label styles Applying Parcel Label Styles (page 903)
See also:
■ Precise sizing tools control the angles and directions of lot lines.
You can also modify settings for the Parcel Sizing parameters and Automatic Layout options.
Using layout tools is the only activity possible while the Parcel Layout Tools toolbar is open.
See also:
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Parcel Creation Tools .
4 When you finish editing parcels, press Esc to close the toolbar. (If one of the layout tools is still in use,
press Esc twice.)
Using layout tools is the only activity possible while the Parcel Layout Tools toolbar is open.
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Parcel Creation Tools
Menu
See also:
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Parcel Creation Tools .
3 In the Create Parcels - Layout dialog box, adjust default settings and press OK.
7 Click an end point along the frontage. A preview graphic highlights the proposed frontage.
Specify the angle, bearing or azimuth to edit the lot line. Preview graphics display if a solution can be
obtained.
NOTE When prompted for the angle, bearing or azimuth, you can press Enter to enter a 90 degree angle
as this is the default angle.
8 Accept the result to edit the parcel. If a solution based on the current parcel sizing parameter values is
not found, you are prompted to adjust the parameters or reenter a new value for the method you are
using.
9 When you finish editing parcels, press Esc to close the toolbar. (If one of the layout tools is still in use,
press Esc twice.)
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Parcel Creation Tools .
3 In the Create Parcels - Layout dialog box, adjust default settings and press OK.
7 Click an end point along the frontage. A preview graphic highlights the proposed frontage.
NOTE OSNAP must be turned off when using the Swing Line commands.
8 Specify the swing point. Preview graphics display if a solution can be obtained.
9 Accept the result to edit the parcel. If a solution based on the current parcel sizing parameters values
is not found, you are prompted to adjust the parameters or reenter a new value for the method you are
using.
10 When you finish editing parcels, press Esc to close the toolbar. (If one of the layout tools is still in use,
press Esc twice.)
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Parcel Creation Tools
Menu
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Create Right Of Way .
3 In the Create Right of Way dialog box (page 2236), specify the offset distance from the alignment to the
parcel boundaries.
4 If you want corner fillets at parcel boundaries along the right of way, select this option. Specify a radius.
5 If you want corner fillets at intersections with other alignments and rights of way, select this option.
Specify a radius.
6 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Create Right Of Way
Menu
Deleting Parcels
Delete a parcel only if it has one or more segments that are not shared with another parcel.
To delete a parcel
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Parcel Creation Tools .
3 On the Parcel Layout Tools toolbar, click Delete Sub-entity. Click a parcel segment that is not shared
by another parcel.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Parcel Creation Tools
Menu
Delete Sub-entity
Dialog Box
Parcel Layout Tools (page 2245)
Merging Parcels
To merge two parcels, delete a shared segment.
When you delete a shared segment, you delete the shared boundary. The two parcels become one.
If the shared boundary is composed of more than one segment, all the shared segments are deleted, not just
the one you selected.
NOTE If you delete a segment that is not shared, you delete the parcel that it belongs to. See Deleting Parcels
(page 889).
To merger parcels
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Parcel Creation Tools .
3 In the Parcel Layout Tools toolbar, click Delete Sub-entity. Click a parcel segment that is shared by
two parcels that you want to merge.
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Parcel Creation Tools
Menu
Delete Sub-entity
Dialog Box
Parcel Layout Tools (page 2245)
Parcel Settings
Parcel settings include settings for parcels, parcel commands, and parcel labels.
This section includes information about parcel settings and parcel command settings. For information about
Parcel label settings, see Parcel Label Settings (page 898).
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
3 In the Edit Feature Settings - Parcel (page 2236) dialog box, edit command settings.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Parcel Properties
Properties define each parcel in a drawing.
Properties control everything about a parcel except its segment label styles. A site parcel has an additional
property that specifies the display order of parcels within the site, including the site parcel itself.
For information about replacing parcel segment label styles, see Applying Parcel Label Styles (page 903).
■ Replace a parcel’s style, which governs the appearance of the parcel itself.
■ Replace a parcel’s area label style, which governs the appearance of its area label and the information
displayed in the label.
■ Specify the parcel’s Point Of Beginning, which is the parcel boundary’s initial node (start point of its
initial segment).
■ Renumber parcels to reset their starting and increment values and/or rename a parcel based on the parcel
name template.
■ Change parcel display order to set the properties of shared segments (such as color) when the two parcels
sharing it have different properties.
Edit parcel properties by right-clicking a parcel area label in the drawing, or by right-clicking a parcel in
Toolspace on the Prospector tab (or a Parcels collection for a site parcel).
3 In the Parcel Properties dialog box (page 2251), edit parcel properties.
1 Click a parcel.
2 Click Parcel tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Parcel Properties drop-down ➤ Parcel Properties .
■ Select Polyline, to select a polyline that crosses through the desired parcels. The polyline prompt
will repeat until you hit Enter to end the command.
■ Select All, to select all parcels and open the Edit Parcel Properties dialog box (page 2241).
■ Select Site, to open a Select Object (Site) dialog box with which to select another available site. After
selecting a site, start back at Step 2.
5 In the Edit Parcel Properties dialog box, edit the parcel properties.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
3 In the Site Parcel Properties dialog box, click the Composition tab.
4 On the Composition tab, under Parcel Style Display Order, change the list positions of styles listed
there.
To change a styles list position, select it. Click the Up or Down Arrow. You can also drag a style to a
new position. When you click Apply or OK, the parcels are redrawn, starting with the styles at the
bottom of the list and working up to the top.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Parcel Styles
Parcel styles govern how parcels are displayed in a drawing. Create, edit, or delete parcel styles in the Parcel
collection in Toolspace, on the Settings tab.
You can create an entirely new parcel style, or base it on an existing style.
The default Standard parcel style is always available. If you base a new drawing on a drawing template, the
styles defined in the template are available also.
3 In the Parcel Styles dialog box, name the new style and define the style settings.
2 Right-click the style that you want to edit and click Edit.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Parcel tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Parcel Properties drop-down ➤ Edit Parcel Style
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
2 Right-click the style that the new style will be based on and click Copy.
4 On the Information tab, under Object Style, specify the parcel style you want to apply.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE The Standard style can only be deleted if it is not being referenced by an existing parcel.
2 Right-click the style that you want to delete, then click Delete.
Delete is unavailable for any style that is used in the drawing.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
To run a Mapcheck Analysis on parcel labels, select the parcel labels and click Analyze tab ➤ Ground Data
panel ➤ Survey Drop-down ➤ Mapcheck. For more information, see Performing a Mapcheck Analysis (page
1796).
■ Expand a site and expand the main Parcels node, and then right-click an individual parcel.
■ Use Ctrl+click to select multiple parcels in the Parcel list view and right-click.
3 In the Export Parcel Analysis (page 2242) dialog box, specify the path to where the file will be exported
7 Click OK.
Settings tab: Right-click individual parcel, main Parcels node, or a selected group of parcels ➤ Export
Analysis
Dialog Box
Export Parcel Analysis (page 2242)
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click Parcel and click Edit Label Style Defaults.
2 In the Edit Label Style Defaults dialog box, edit label style settings.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
2 Right-click either an Area, Line, or Curve label style. Click Edit Label Style Defaults.
3 In the Edit Label Style Defaults dialog box, edit parcel label style settings.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: Label Styles ➤ Area, Line, or Curve. Right-click ➤ Edit Label Style Defaults
Dialog Box
Edit Label Style Defaults (page 2180)
3 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, specify a style name and the style settings.
Labels tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Label Properties drop-down ➤ Edit Label Style
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
OR
3 In the Select Style dialog box, specify a label style, create a new style, or copy or edit an existing style.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Labels tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Label Properties drop-down ➤ Edit Label Style
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
OR
3 In the Select Style dialog box, specify a label style, create a new style, or copy or edit an existing style.
NOTE The Parcel Area Selection label cannot be deleted as this is an embedded object and is used to select the
parcel.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
See also:
3 The AutoCAD Text Window dialog box displays parcel properties, including diameter, area and segment
information.
3 The AutoCAD Text Window dialog box displays the label type, and layer. For example,
AECC_PARCEL_FACE_LABEL Layer: “0”.
3 Right-click the label style that the new style will be based on and click Copy.
4 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, specify a name for the new style.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
3 Right-click the style that you want to delete and click Delete.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
NOTE Use the Properties palette Label Style drop down menu to access a list of available parcel styles including
the general line and curve label styles which can be used to annotate parcels.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the parcel label. Click Labels tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Label Properties drop-down ➤ Edit Label Style
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Parcel ➤ Single Segment .
OR
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Parcel ➤ Add Parcel Labels .
2 In the Add Labels dialog box, for Label Type, select Single Segment.
3 In the Add Labels dialog box, set Line Label Style and Curve Label Style and click Add.
NOTE You can label parcel segments with either General Line and Curve label styles or with Parcel Line and
Curve label styles.
4 Click a parcel segment in the drawing. The label is placed at the selected location. Click additional
segments if you want.
While you select segments, the dialog box remains open. You can return to it to change styles or settings
for the next sequence of clicks. After changing a label style, click Add. If you do not click Add before
continuing to click segments, the style change will be ignored.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Parcel ➤ Single Segment .
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Parcel ➤ Add Parcel Labels .
Menu
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Parcel ➤ Multiple Segments .
OR
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Parcel ➤ Add Parcel Labels .
2 In the Add Labels dialog box, for Label Type, select Multiple Segment to add labels to all segments in
a parcel.
3 In the Add Labels dialog box, set Line Label Style and Curve Label Style and click Add.
NOTE You can label parcel segments with either General Line and Curve label styles or with Parcel Line and
Curve label styles.
4 Click a parcel area label in the drawing. Labels are added to every segment of the parcel.
While you select segments, the dialog box remains open. You can return to it to change styles or settings
for the next sequence of clicks. After changing a label style, click Add. If you do not click Add before
continuing to click segments, the style change will be ignored.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Parcel ➤ Multiple Segments .
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Parcel ➤ Add Parcel Labels .
Menu
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Parcel ➤ Add Parcel Labels .
2 In the Add Labels dialog box, for Label Type, select Replace Multiple Segment.
3 You are prompted to select a parcel to be labelled. It will replace the labels with new ones using the
current Multiple Segment label style. If the Multiple Segment label style has already been added to the
selected parcel a message will be displayed and the labels will not be replaced.
While you select parcels, the dialog box remains open. You can return to it to change styles or settings
for the next sequence of commands. After changing a label style, click Add. If you do not click Add
before continuing to click segments, the style change will be ignored.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Parcel ➤ Add Parcel Labels
Menu
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Parcel ➤ Add Parcel Labels .
2 In the Add Labels dialog box, for Label Type, select Area.
■ Select All, to open a Select Object (Site) dialog box with which to select another available site. After
selecting a site, start back at Step 2.
■ Select Site, to open a Select Object (Site) dialog box with which to select another available site. After
selecting a site, start back at Step 2.
5 While you select parcels, the dialog box remains open. You can return to it to change styles or settings
for the next sequence of commands. After changing a label style, click Add. If you do not click Add
before continuing to click segments, the style change will be ignored.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Parcel ➤ Add Parcel Labels
Menu
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Parcel ➤ Add Parcel Labels .
2 In the Add Labels dialog box, for Label Type, select Replace Area.
3 You are prompted to select a parcel area label. It will replace that label with a new one using the current
Area label style. If the area label style has already been added to the selected parcel a message will be
displayed and the label will not be replaced.
While you select parcels, the dialog box remains open. You can return to it to change styles or settings
for the next sequence of commands. After changing a label style, click Add. If you do not click Add
before continuing to click segments, the style change will be ignored.
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Parcel ➤ Add Parcel Labels
Menu
2 Hit delete.
Quick Reference
Object Selection
Click label
3 In the Site Parcel Properties dialog box, click Composition. Select one of the following settings for Site
Area Label Style:
4 ■ To hide labels, set the style to <none>, or to a style with Visibility set to False.
■ To show labels, set the style to one with Visibility set to True.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
2 Right-click a table type: Area, Line, Curve, or Segment and click New.
3 In the Table Style dialog box, specify a name for the new style and define the style settings.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
3 Right-click the table style that you want to edit and click Edit.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Table tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Table Properties drop-down ➤ Edit Table Style
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
3 Right-click the table style that the new style will be based on and click Copy.
4 In the Table Style dialog box, specify a name for the new style.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
3 Right-click the style that you want to delete and click Delete.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Parcel ➤ Add Area .
2 In the Table Creation dialog box, specify settings as needed, except for the Selection settings.
3 To select parcels for the table, for Selection, do one of the following:
■ In the Label Style Name list, select one or more area label styles. When you select an area label style,
you automatically select all parcels using that style.
■ Click the parcel selector button. Click the text of one parcel label after another. When you finish,
press Enter.
4 Click OK.
The upper-left corner of the new table is attached to your pointer.
5 Click in the drawing to set the location for the new table.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Parcel ➤ Add Area
Menu
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Parcel ➤ Add Area
Command Line
AddParcelTable
Dialog Box
Table Creation (page 2739)
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Parcel ➤ Add Line .
2 In the Table Creation dialog box, specify settings as needed, except for the Selection settings.
3 To select segments for the table, for Selection, do one of the following:
■ In the Label Style Name list, select one or more segment label styles or general line/curve label styles.
When you select a segment label style, you automatically select all segments using that style.
■ Click the segment selector button. Click one segment after another. When you finish, press Enter.
4 Click OK.
The upper-left corner of the new table is attached to your pointer.
5 Click in the drawing to set the location for the new table.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Parcel ➤ Add Line
Menu
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Parcel ➤ Add Curve .
2 In the Table Creation dialog box, specify settings as needed, except for the Selection settings.
3 To select segments for the table, for Selection, do one of the following:
■ In the Label Style Name list, select one or more segment label styles or general line/curve label styles.
When you select a segment label style, you automatically select all segments using that style.
■ Click the segment selector button. Click one segment after another. When you finish, press Enter.
4 Click OK.
The upper-left corner of the new table is attached to your pointer.
5 Click in the drawing to set the location for the new table.
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Parcel ➤ Add Curve
Command Line
AddParcelCurveTable
Menu
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Parcel ➤ Add Segment .
2 In the Table Creation dialog box, specify settings as needed, except for the Selection settings.
3 To select segments for the table, for Selection, do one of the following:
■ In the Label Style Name list, select one or more segment label styles. When you select a segment
label style, you automatically select all segments using that style.
■ Click the segment selector button. Click one segment after another. When you finish, press Enter.
4 Click OK.
The upper-left corner of the new table is attached to your pointer.
5 Click in the drawing to set the location for the new table.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Parcel ➤ Add Segment
Command Line
AddParcelSegmentTable
Menu
1 Click a table title or a table column title in the drawing. The entire table is selected.
Quick Reference
Object Shortcut Menu
1 Click the table row you want to delete. The row is selected.
Quick Reference
Object Shortcut Menu
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
■ To number parcels automatically, create the parcels. They will be numbered automatically in creation
order. For more information, see Creating Parcels (page 879).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Parcel Creation Tools
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Parcel drop-down ➤ Create Parcel From Objects
Menu
Renumbering Parcels
Renumber area parcels after they have been created.
Parcels can be renumbered based on a starting number and increment value; they can be renamed based on
a name template.
To renumber parcels
3 In the Renumber/Rename Parcels dialog box, specify the site you want to work with and click Renumber.
5 Optionally, click Use Name Template In Parcel Style to ensure that the name template is used to resolve
the parcel name when renumbering.
6 Click OK.
7 Click in the drawing to select parcels using the selection jig (similar to the AutoCAD FENCE command,
which selects all objects that cross the selection fence). As each parcel is selected, a temporary line is
drawn and parcels faces are highlighted. When you finish picking parcels, the line disappears, enabling
you to repeat the selection process for another set of parcels.
The parcel numbers, which are displayed in the parcel area labels, are updated after you exit the
command.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Renaming Parcels
Rename area parcels after they have been created. The parcels can be renamed automatically based on the
name template.
3 In the Renumber/Rename Parcels dialog box, specify the site you want to work with and click Rename.
4 Specify a name by manually entering a string or click to open the Name Template dialog box (page
2022) where you can update the default parcel name, using the name template.
5 Optionally, click Use Name Template In Parcel Style to ensure that the name template is used to resolve
the name when renaming.
6 Click OK.
7 Click in the drawing to select parcels using the selection jig (similar to the AutoCAD FENCE command,
which selects all objects that cross the selection fence). As each parcel is selected, a temporary line is
drawn and parcels faces are highlighted. When you finish picking parcels, the line disappears, enabling
you to repeat the selection process for another set of parcels.
The parcel names, which are displayed in the parcel area labels, are updated after you exit the command.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 In the Table Tag Numbering dialog box (page 2209), specify the starting number and increment values.
2 Create a parcel segment table of the segments that you want to number/renumber if they are not in a
table already.
See Adding Tables of Parcel Segments (page 915).
5 When you finish renumbering segments, click OK. At the command prompt, enter E for End.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE You may also wish to review the following tutorial. While it focuses on user-defined properties for points,
the concepts also apply to parcels.
1 In the drawing, define a User-Defined Classification for parcels. For more information, see Creating a
User-Defined Property Classification (page 446).
2 Define the properties in the classification. For more information, see Creating a User-Defined Property
(page 446).
5 In the Site Parcel Properties dialog box, click the Composition tab.
6 On the Composition tab, under User-Defined Property Classification, select the User-Defined
Classification you want to assign to the Site Parcel. This makes your custom properties available to all
parcels that are within the site.
NOTE If you defined default values for your properties, the default value is used for all parcels in the site that
do not already have a value for this property.
7 Click OK.
8 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, select the site parcel to which you applied the classification by
clicking Sites ➤ <Site Name> ➤ Parcels collection.
9 In the parcel list view window, right-click a column heading. Select the user-defined properties you
want to display in the list view window.
NOTE You can arrange the display of columns in the list view by dragging column headings. For more
information, see Customizing a List View (page 101).
Next, you can define values for the custom properties by entering data in the list view. You can also set up
label styles to display these values, and then label the parcels. For more information, see Exercise 2: Creating
a Label Style That Displays a User-Defined Property.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Command Description
CreateParcelByLayout Creates parcels using the Parcel Layout Tools (page 882)
EditParcel Edits parcels using the Parcel Layout Tools (page 886)
For information on recommended workflows when working with alignments, see Alignments Workflow (page 40).
Understanding Alignments
You create alignments as a combination of lines, curves, and spirals that are viewed as one object.
Alignments can be stand-alone objects or the parent object of profiles, sections, and corridors. If you edit
an alignment, the changes are automatically reflected in any related objects.
Overview of Alignments
In AutoCAD Civil 3D, you create alignments as objects.
Use the Prospector and Settings tabs to manage alignments in Toolspace.
Alignments are listed in either the Alignments collection or a Site collection in the Prospector tab. From
these collections, you can change alignment properties, generate reports, and export LandXML. See Alignment
Collection (Prospector Tab) (page 925) for more information.
NOTE There is no limit to the number of alignments a user may define in an AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing.
Use the Settings tab in Toolspace to manage the details of alignment object styles, label and table styles, and
command settings.
Control the visual appearance of alignment components and labels through styles. You can create specific
styles to use in the various phases of a project. For more information, see Alignment Styles (page 946).
When you create an alignment, you specify a style for the alignment object and styles for the alignment
labels. In the Alignment Labels dialog box (page 1952), you can create groups of styles for alignment labels,
and then save those labels as a label set to use with other alignments.
Use station equations to change station-distance references at any point without physically changing the
geometry of the alignment.
923
Alignment lines, curves, and labels
Alignment Types
When creating an alignment, assign it a type of centerline, offset, miscellaneous, or curb return.
You can use these alignment types to categorize your data based on alignment function. Select the centerline
type for a road centerline, or the miscellaneous type for other uses, such as a utility conduit. These two types
are independent objects.
Offset alignments (page 2779) and curb return alignments (page 2771) can also be independent, but are often
dynamically linked to other alignments. Both offset alignments and curb returns can be created automatically
as components of an intersection. Offsets can also be used in widenings.
■ The top-level Alignments collection. When alignments are in the top-level Alignments collection, they
do not interact with parcels contained in Site collections. For more information, see Alignment and Site
Interaction (page 781).
■ A project Site collection. An alignment object can exist in only one Site. When an alignment is in a Site
collection, its geometry interacts with that of other objects in the site, such as parcels and feature lines.
Expand an Alignment collection to view the names of the alignments. Select an Alignment collection to
display a detailed tabular list of Alignment information at the bottom of the Prospector tab. For more
information, see The Toolspace Item View (page 99).
Right-click an individual alignment in the Alignment collection to:
■ Move or copy an alignment to either another Site or the top-level Alignments collection
Expand the Alignment collection to display and edit the alignment styles, label and table styles, and command
settings.
See also:
NOTE When you click New in a collection, the new style you create is based on installation defaults, not on the
existing styles in the collection. To create a style from an existing style, right-click the style. Click Copy, and save
the style with a new name.
Delete Delete the selected design check. You can only delete
design checks that are not referenced by a design check
sets.
See also:
NOTE When you click New in a collection, the new style you create is based on installation defaults, not on the
existing styles in the collection. To create a style from an existing style, right-click the style. Click Copy, and save
the style with a new name.
To edit, create, or copy a label style, right-click an existing alignment label style. Click a command on the
shortcut menu:
Delete Delete the selected style. You can only delete styles
that are not referenced by other objects or label sets.
NOTE When you click New in a collection, the new style you create is based on installation defaults, not on the
existing styles in the collection. To create a style from an existing style, right-click the style. Click Copy, and save
the style with a new name.
To edit, create, or copy a table style, right-click an existing alignment label style. Click a command on the
shortcut menu:
Delete Delete the selected style. You can only delete styles
that are not referenced by other objects or label
sets.
See also:
See also:
Alignment Settings
You can use alignment settings to specify the default behavior for alignment commands.
Settings are handled in a standard way throughout AutoCAD Civil 3D. You access settings using the Settings
tree. Control settings at three levels: the drawing level, the object collection (feature) level, and the command
level. For more information, see Understanding Settings (page 77).
See also:
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the Alignment collection ➤ Edit Feature Settings.
2 In the Edit Feature Settings - Alignment dialog box, expand the display for each setting. Click a cell in
the Value column and enter a new value or specify a different style.
3 Click Apply to accept the changes and continue working in the dialog box or click OK to accept the
changes and close the dialog box.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
To change the default Curve and Spiral Settings for all instances
1 On the Settings tab in Toolspace, expand the Alignments collection and then expand the Commands
collection.
3 In the Edit Command Settings-CreateAlignmentLayout dialog box, expand the Curve and Spiral Settings
property.
NOTE To save these command settings at the drawing level, on the Ambient Setting tab (page 84)select
Yes in the value column for Save Command Changes To Settings.
To change the Curve and Spiral Settings used by the tangent-tangent with curves method
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Alignment drop-down ➤ Alignment Creation Tools .
2 In the Create Alignment-Layout dialog box (page 1977), enter creation information.
3 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Curve And Spiral Settings.
4 In the Curve and Spiral Settings dialog box (page 930), enter curves values.
NOTE The spiral type you specify in the Curve and Spiral Settings dialog box is used in all spiral commands
on the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Alignment drop-down ➤ Alignment Creation Tools
Menu
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the Alignment Entities Vista (page 1947), enter values for the Curve Group Index and the Curve Group
Sub-Entity Index.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Alignment Properties
You can use the Alignment Properties dialog box to assign a name, style, and other properties to the alignment.
You can adjust the style, stationing, design criteria, and superelevation parameters of a selected alignment.
You can also view basic information about profiles and profile views that have been created for the current
alignment.
The Alignment Properties dialog box has the following tabs:
■ Station Control. Displays alignment length and raw stationing as well as options to change the station
reference point, and apply station equations.
■ Masking. Specifies one or more regions of the alignment that can be suppressed from display.
■ Design Criteria. Specifies design speed options to select points in the drawing where you want to assign
travel speeds to aid in design and labeling. When you assign a design speed to an alignment station, that
speed is applied to all subsequent points on the alignment, unless another speed is applied at some point.
This value also displays in the Superelevation Curve Manager dialog box (page 2602).
This tab also contains the options related to criteria-based design (page 2771). This optional feature allows
you to specify the design criteria file, default criteria, and design check set for the alignment.
■ Profile Views. Displays information for profile views associated with the alignment.
■ Offset Parameters. If the alignment is a dependent offset, this tab displays properties of the offset.
■ Curb Return Parameters. If the alignment is a curb return, this tab displays data about the two parent
alignments, offset values, and update mode.
NOTE Alignment label properties are controlled using the Alignment Labels dialog box (page 1952).
1 Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Alignment Properties drop-down ➤ Alignment Properties
.
NOTE The tab most recently opened in the Alignment Properties dialog box is displayed by default.
2 In the Alignment Properties dialog box, click the Information tab (page 1964).
6 Click the Style Detail button to open the Style Detail dialog box. Preview the alignment style.
1 Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Alignment Properties drop-down ➤ Alignment Properties
.
NOTE The tab most recently opened in the Alignment Properties dialog box is displayed by default.
2 In the Alignment Properties dialog box, click the Station Control tab (page 1965).
3 Under Reference Point, click . The Alignment Properties dialog box closes.
WARNING Changing the reference point location or the reference station value removes all station equations
and design speeds and can adversely affect objects and data already created from the alignment. Click OK
to continue or Cancel to abort this operation. Use Station Equations to change stations after you create Profiles
and Cross Sections.
4 In the drawing, pick a point where you want to establish the XY coordinates for the Reference Point.
The Alignment Properties dialog box is displayed again.
5 In the Reference Point box, under Station, enter a starting station value.
6 In the Station Equations box, click . The Alignment Properties dialog box closes.
7 In the drawing, pick the point for the first station equation. The Alignment Properties dialog box is
displayed again.
9 By default Station Ahead and Raw Station Back have the same value. Click the Station Ahead cell and
enter a new value.
10 Click the Increase/Decrease cell to determine whether the station values from the Station Equation
increases or decreases from the Station Ahead value.
1 Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Alignment Properties drop-down ➤ Alignment Properties
.
2 In the Alignment Properties dialog box, click the Masking tab (page 1966).
4 Specify the start station for the mask by clicking along the alignment, entering a numeric station value,
or clicking Lock to Start in the masking table.
5 Specify the end station for the mask by clicking along the alignment, entering a numeric station value,
or clicking Lock to End in the masking table.
TIP Use the Mask check box to temporarily enable or disable a mask without removing it from the list of masks.
1 Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Alignment Properties drop-down ➤ Alignment Properties
.
NOTE The tab most recently opened in the Alignment Properties dialog box is displayed by default.
2 In the Alignment Properties dialog box, click the Design Criteria tab (page 1966).
3 Click .
A new row is displayed in the table.
4 In the Start Station column, enter the station at which the design speed begins.
7 On the right side of the dialog box, modify the design criteria as desired.
8 Click OK.
NOTE If design criteria has been associated with the alignment, the entire alignment design is validated
when you click either Apply or OK.
1 Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Alignment Properties drop-down ➤ Alignment Properties
.
NOTE The tab most recently opened in the Alignment Properties dialog box is displayed by default.
2 Click the Profiles tab. For more information, see Profile Data Tab (Profile Properties Dialog Box) (page
2423).
1 Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Alignment Properties drop-down ➤ Alignment Properties
.
NOTE The tab most recently opened in the Alignment Properties dialog box is displayed by default
2 Click the Profile View tab. For more information, see Profiles Tab (Profile View Properties Dialog Box)
(page 2429).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Alignment Properties drop-down ➤ Alignment Properties
Prospector Shortcut Menu
NOTE Compound spiral length is not validated against the design criteria file. You must use design checks to
validate compound spiral length.
You can generate a report that documents validations or violations in the alignment design. The design
criteria report identifies whether each sub-entity within a given station range violates or meets the appropriate
design criteria and design checks.
NOTE If you use a custom a design criteria file, you must save it to a shared server to which all members of your
design team have access. If you send a drawing that uses a custom design criteria file, you must send the design
criteria file with the drawing.
NOTE Compound spiral length is not validated against the design criteria file. You must use design checks to
validate compound spiral length.
■ Automatically adding widening to dynamic offset alignments. For more information, see Adding Automatic
Widening to Dynamic Offset Alignments (page 966).
See also:
■ Copy the provided design criteria file. Rename the copy, and then modify the copy to reflect your design
standards.
■ Create an empty design criteria file. Add your local standards using the schema that is defined in the
design criteria file.
3 In the Design Criteria Editor Dialog Box (page 2067), click Open.
4 In the Select A Design Criteria File dialog box, select the design criteria file you want to copy. Click
Open.
5 In the Design Criteria Editor Dialog Box (page 2067), click Save As.
6 In the Enter A File Name To Save dialog box, enter a new name for the design criteria file. Click Save.
NOTE Design criteria files are saved in this directory: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users|Application
Data\Autodesk\C3D2011\enu\Data\Corridor Design Standards\<units>. The criteria-based design feature uses
the first file found in the directory. To ensure that your new file is used by default, give it a name that places
it before all other files in the directory.
7 In the Design Criteria Editor dialog box, click Expand All to expand all nodes in the tree on the left
side of the dialog box.
■ To create new tables and folders in the tree view, right-click the desired node and use the
commands on the shortcut menu.
10 Click Save And Close to save the new design criteria file and close the Design Criteria Editor dialog box.
See also:
4 New.
An untitled design criteria file is created, with empty Units, Alignments, and Profiles folders in the tree
view.
7 In the tree view, right-click either the Alignments or Profiles folder. Click the desired table category.
8 Right-click the table category folder you created in Step 5. Click the desired table.
11 Repeat Steps 5 through 8 to add more tables to the design criteria file.
NOTE Design criteria files are saved in this directory: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users|Application
Data\Autodesk\C3D2011\enu\Data\Corridor Design Standards\<units>. The criteria-based design feature uses
the first file found in the directory. To ensure that your new file is used by default, give it a name that places
it before all other files in the directory.
14 Click Save And Close to save the new design criteria file and close the Design Criteria Editor dialog box.
See also:
Quick Reference
Ribbon
3 In the Design Criteria File Editor dialog box (page 2067), expand the desired folder in the tree on the
left side of the dialog box.
■ To create new tables and folders in the tree view, right-click the desired node and use the
commands on the shortcut menu.
6 Click Save And Close to save the design criteria file with your changes and close the Design Criteria
Editor dialog box.
See also:
Quick Reference
Ribbon
See also:
NOTE Several design checks are included in the AutoCAD Civil 3D templates in the
Toolspace ➤ Settings ➤ Alignment and Profile ➤ Design Checks collections.
Type Line
Type Line
Formula De- If the design speed is greater than or equal to 45, the tangent
scription length must be greater than or equal to 100.
Type Curve
Formula De- If the design speed is greater than or equal to one of the specified
scription speed values, the radius must be greater than or equal to the
specified radius value for that speed.
Type Line
Formula De- If the design speed is greater than or equal to one of the specified
scription speed values, the tangent length value must be between the
maximum and minimum values specified for that speed.
See also:
See also:
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Alignment ➤ Design Checks collection.
2 Right-click the entity type collection for which you want to create a design check. Click New.
Alternatively, you can expand the entity type collection for which you want to create a design check,
right-click an existing design check, and click Copy.
3 In the Design Check Editor dialog box (page 2069), enter a name and description for the design check.
BEST PRACTICE The name of the design check should be similar to the formula you enter in the Design
Check field. When a design check is violated, only the design check name is displayed, and not the minimum
acceptable value. If the formula is in the design check name, it is easier to correct the violation.
5 Add functions, constants, and logical operators to complete the design check.
Because design checks return either a true or false value, they must contain one of the following logical
operators: > (greater than), < (less than), >= (greater than or equals), <= (less than or equals), != (not
equals), = (equals).
NOTE Do not insert anything into the { } brackets that surround the property fields.
■ Use the calculator buttons or click in the Design Check field and use your keypad to enter numbers,
constants, and mathematical operators like * (multiply) or / (divide).
NOTE For a complete list of operators and functions, see Design Check Editor Dialog Box (page 2069).
6 Click OK.
NOTE To apply a design check to an alignment or profile, it must be saved in a design check set. For more
information, see Creating a Design Check Set (page 945) or Editing a Design Check Set (page 945).
See also:
<drawing name> ➤ Alignment ➤ Design Checks ➤ <design check type collection> ➤ <right-click design
check in item view>
Dialog Box
Design Check Editor Dialog Box (page 2069)
See also:
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, select the Design Checks collection that contains the design check
that you want to edit.
4 Edit the design check using the (page 2069)Design Check Editor dialog box.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Settings Tab Shortcut Menu
<drawing name> ➤ Alignment ➤ Design Checks ➤ <design check type collection> ➤ <right-click design
check in item view>
Dialog Box
Design Check Editor Dialog Box (page 2069)
Create design check sets from the Alignment ➤ Design Checks ➤ Design Check Sets and Profile ➤ Design
Checks ➤ Design Check Sets collections in Toolspace on the Settings tab.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand either the Alignment ➤ Design Checks or Profile ➤ Design
Checks collection.
3 In the Design Check Set dialog box, on the Information tab (page 2070), enter a name and optional
description of the design check set.
4 In the Design Check Set dialog box, on the Design Checks tab (page 2071), from the Type list, select a
design check type.
6 Click Add.
The design check is added to the design check set and appears in the table in the dialog box.
7 Repeat Steps 4 through 6 to add other design checks to the design check set.
8 If you are creating a profile design check set, use the Apply To column to specify the type of curve (sag,
crest, or both) to apply each curve check.
9 Click OK.
See also:
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand either the Alignment ➤ Design Checks or Profile ➤ Design
Checks collection.
2 Right-click the design check set that you want to edit. Click Edit.
3 Use the Design Check Set dialog box, on the Design Checks tab (page 2071), to edit the design check set.
4 Click OK.
See also:
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu (alignment design check sets)
Alignment Styles
You can use Alignment Styles to control the visual display of each alignment component.
Changes made to a style are applied to all alignments that use the style.
Use styles to control the appearance of the alignment object components, as well as the types and appearance
of alignment labels.
You can create specific styles to use for the different phases of a project. For example, you can create one
style to use in the design layout phase and another style to use for plotting.
Access alignment styles using these methods:
On the Settings tab in Toolspace Right-click a style in the Alignment Styles folder
➤ Edit.
NOTE When you click New in a collection folder, the new style you create is based on installation defaults, not
on the existing styles in the collection. To create a style from an existing style, right-click the style. Click Copy and
save the style with a new name.
■ Markers. Specifies marker styles and marker placement options for alignment points.
■ Display. Lists the alignment components and display options as well as the choice of 2D or 3D visibility.
You can display components in plan, model, or section views.
2 Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Alignment Properties drop-down ➤ Alignment Properties
.
3 In the Alignment Properties dialog box (page 932), on the Information tab, use the Object Style list to
select a style.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Alignment Properties drop-down ➤ Alignment Properties
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Alignment Styles collection and right-click an existing
style.
3 In the Alignment Style dialog box, click the Information tab (page 1970). Enter a new name and description
for the alignment style.
4 Click the Design tab (page 1970). Specify the radius snap and the snap values.
5 Click the Markers tab (page 1970). Specify the display properties for the alignment.
6 Click the Display tab (page 1971). Specify the display properties for the alignment.
7 To view a summary of information about the style, click the Summary tab (page 1971).
8 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Alignment Properties drop-down ➤ Edit Alignment Style
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Creating Alignments
Create alignments in many ways using AutoCAD Civil 3D, such as creating them from polylines, and using
the Alignment Layout Tools.
When you create an alignment, you can use the criteria-based design (page 2771) feature to ensure that your
alignment design meets minimum local standards. For more information, see Criteria-Based Alignment
Design (page 935).
NOTE You can also create alignments either from pipe networks or by importing them from LandXML files. For
more information, see Creating Alignments from Pipe Network Parts (page 1338) and LandXML Import and Export
(page 1875).
■ Constraint-based tools that define individual entities by parameters such as length and radius.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Alignment drop-down ➤ Alignment Creation Tools .
2 In the Create Alignment - Layout Dialog Box (page 1977), enter a unique name for the alignment.
■ Alignment Style
■ Alignment Layer
6 On the Design Criteria tab, specify a Starting Design Speed to apply to the alignment starting station.
This design speed is applied to the entire alignment. Additional design speeds can be applied at other
stations after the alignment has been created. For more information, see Alignment Properties (page
932).
NOTE If you do not want to apply design criteria to the alignment, proceed to Step 8.
7 To associate design standards with the alignment, select the Use Criteria-Based Design check box.
For more information, see Criteria-Based Alignment Design (page 935).
On the Design Criteria tab, specify the following settings:
■ Use Design Criteria File
Select this check box to associate a design criteria file with the alignment. The default design criteria
file location and the Default Criteria properties becomes available when you select the check box.
NOTE The first design criteria file found in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users|Application
Data\Autodesk\C3D2011\enu\Data\Corridor Design Standards\<units> directory is used by default when
the criteria-based design feature is used.
9 Use the commands on the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar to draw the alignment. For more information,
see Alignment Layout Tools (page 1959) and Adding Lines, Curves, and Spirals to an Alignment (page
970).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Alignment drop-down ➤ Alignment Creation Tools
Menu
Tangent-Tangent No Curves
Use this command to create a quick layout of an alignment. Specify tangent points of intersection (PI).
Optionally add curves later.
See also:
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Alignment drop-down ➤ Alignment Creation Tools .
2 In the Create Alignment-Layout (page 1977) dialog box, enter creation information.
5 Continue to specify points. Press Enter to end the command, or click another command from the
Alignment Layout Tools toolbar.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Alignment drop-down ➤ Alignment Creation Tools .
2 In the Create Alignment-Layout (page 1977) dialog box, enter creation information.
5 Continue to specify points. Press Enter to end the command or select another command from the
Alignment Layout Tools.
Curves are created to comply with the values in one of the following places:
■ If the alignment has design criteria (page 935) applied to it, the minimum radius for the current
design speed is applied to the curve. If no solution can be found with the minimum radius value,
the curve is not drawn.
■ If the alignment does not have design criteria applied to it, the default value specified in the curve
and spiral settings is applied to the curve. For more information, see Curve and Spiral Settings (page
930).
3 In the drawing, pick a point near a tangent, where you want to insert the PI.
3 In the drawing, pick a point near the PI you want to break apart.
4 Specify the distance to split the PI by picking two points or entering a value on the command line. This
value is the distance each line is shortened from the PI.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Alignment drop-down ➤ Alignment Creation Tools
2 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Alignment drop-down ➤ Create Alignment From Alignment
.
NOTE Enter XREF at the command line to select entities from within the xref drawing. See AutoCAD Help
for more information about external drawing references.
4 In the Create Alignment From Objects Dialog Box (page 1975), enter a unique name for the alignment.
■ Alignment Style
■ Alignment Layer
8 On the Design Criteria tab, specify a Starting Design Speed to apply to the alignment starting station.
This design speed is applied to the entire alignment. Additional design speeds can be applied at other
stations after the alignment has been created. For more information, see Alignment Properties (page
932).
NOTE If you do not want to apply design criteria to the alignment, proceed to Step 8.
9 To associate design standards with the alignment, select the Use Criteria-Based Design check box.
For more information, see Criteria-Based Alignment Design (page 935).
On the Design Criteria tab, specify the following settings:
■ Use Design Criteria File
Select this check box to associate a design criteria file with the alignment. The default design criteria
file location and the Default Criteria properties become available when you select the check box.
10 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Alignment drop-down ➤ Create Alignment From Objects
Menu
See also:
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, ensure that the correct working folder is identified on the Data
Shortcuts node.
4 In the Create Alignment Reference dialog box, change the source of the reference by selecting a source
in the Source Alignment list.
5 Specify a Site with which to associate the alignment or accept the default <None>. For more information,
see Understanding Sites (page 779).
NOTE To name the alignment, click its default name. Enter a new name, or use the name template. For
more information, see Name Template Dialog Box (page 2022).
8 Click to select a layer. For more information about layers, see Object Layer Dialog Box (page 2221).
NOTE If you do not select a layer, the alignment is placed on the current layer.
The alignment name is displayed under the Alignments collection in the Prospector tree with a next
to it.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, in Master View, expand the Projects <project name> ➤ Alignments
collection.
3 In the Create Alignment Reference dialog box, change the source of the reference by selecting a source
in the Source Alignment list.
4 Specify a Site with which to associate the alignment or accept the default <None>. For more information,
see Understanding Sites (page 779).
NOTE To name the alignment, click its default name. Enter a new name, or use the name template. For
more information, see Name Template Dialog Box (page 2022).
7 Click to select a layer. For more information about layers, see Object Layer Dialog Box (page 2221).
NOTE If you do not select a layer, the alignment is placed on the current layer.
The alignment name is displayed under the Alignments collection in the Prospector tree with a next
to it.
Prospector tab: Projects ➤ <project name> ➤ Alignments ➤ <alignment name> ➤ Create Reference
Command Line
CreateAlignmentReference
Dialog Box
Create Alignment Reference (page 2450)
Left and right sides are determined from a position facing toward the end of the parent alignment.
The offset alignments retain their offset distance if the parent alignment is edited. The only geometric
attribute of the offset alignments to be edited directly is offset distance.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Alignment drop-down ➤ Create Offset Alignment .
2 In the Create Offset Alignments (page 1981) dialog box, select the following attributes:
■ Parent alignment
■ Name template
3 On the General tab, enter the site, alignment style, layer, and label set for the offset alignments.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Alignment drop-down ➤ Create Offset Alignment
Command Line
CreateOffsetAlignment
Dialog Box
Create Offset Alignments Dialog Box (page 1981)
■ Extract a portion of a source alignment to use as a baseline to create a secondary alignment that merges
with or exits from the primary (source) alignment.
Select a source alignment (1), and then specify a range of stations (2) to create an alignment (3). Add
sub-entities onto the new alignment (4) to create an alignment that merges into or exits from the source
alignment.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Alignment drop-down ➤ Create Alignment From Existing
Alignment .
NOTE Some spiral types cannot be partially selected. If the Unable to create alignment from partial
selection of this spiral type prompt is displayed, then you must specify start and end stations that
encompass the entire spiral.
■ To add a series of sub-entities from the source alignment, press Enter. Click the desired sub-entities
on the source alignment.
4 In the Create Alignment from Existing Alignment Dialog Box (page 1973), enter a unique name for the
alignment.
■ Alignment Style
■ Alignment Layer
8 On the Design Criteria tab, specify a Starting Design Speed to apply to the alignment starting station.
This design speed is applied to the entire alignment. Additional design speeds can be applied at other
stations after the alignment has been created. For more information, see Alignment Properties (page
932).
NOTE If you do not want to apply design criteria to the alignment, proceed to Step 10.
9 To associate design standards with the alignment, select the Use Criteria-Based Design check box.
For more information, see Criteria-Based Alignment Design (page 935).
NOTE The first design criteria file found in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users|Application
Data\Autodesk\C3D2011\enu\Data\Corridor Design Standards\<units> directory is used by default when
the criteria-based design feature is used.
10 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design Panel ➤ Alignment drop down ➤ Create Alignment from Existing Alignment
Command Line
CreateAlignFromExisting
Dialog Box
Create Alignment from Existing Alignment Dialog Box (page 1973)
When two paths of roughly parallel COGO points are used, an AutoCAD spline (1, 2) is created through
each path of points. The points from each spline are projected onto the other spline; points where the two
projections meet are used to create the centerline (3).
When the Create Spirals option is selected, AutoCAD Civil 3D creates a symmetrical pair of spirals (1) between
each curve and its tangents. If spirals that meet the specified R/A value do not fit between the tangents (2)
and the curve (3), then the curve radius is reduced (4) until a solution is found. When you specify this option
without the Match Tangents option, the spirals will be symmetrical, but the solution may have greater error.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Alignment drop-down ➤ Create Best Fit Alignment .
NOTE If you selected COGO Points as the Input Type, you can use a drop-down list to select a point group.
4 In the drawing, select the objects from which you want to create the best fit alignment. Press Enter.
NOTE You may only select objects that are the input type you selected in Step 2. You may not select multiple
types of objects.
5 If you wish to create the best fit alignment between two paths of objects, next to Path 2, click .
6 In the drawing, select the objects from which you want to create the best fit alignment. Press Enter.
7 If you chose either Feature Lines or AutoCAD Entities as the Input Data, click Weeding Options.
8 In the Best Fit Alignment Weeding Options Dialog Box (page 1972), specify whether to either weed
extraneous vertices or insert intermediate vertices. Click OK.
NOTE This value is an estimate. For best results, specify a value that is slightly greater than the largest
known radius in the input data.
■ Create Spirals—Specifies that spirals are created between the alignment tangents and curves. The
spirals on either side of a curve are symmetric unless the match tangents option is selected.
NOTE When this option is selected, the options below it become available.
■ Desired R/A for Spirals—Specifies the target R/A ratio for spirals that are created.
■ Create Spirals And Match Tangents Where Possible—Specifies that the solution will follow the
tangents as much as possible. If no solution is available, then the tangents are moved toward the
circles until a spiral solution is found between the tangent and the curve.
■ Minimum R/A For Spirals—Specifies the minimum R/A ratio for spirals that are created. This value
controls the length of the spirals:
■ A higher value produces shorter spirals.
■ Site
■ Alignment Style
■ Layer
11 Use the Show Report check box to specify whether to show a report of the best fit regression points.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Alignment drop-down ➤ Create Best Fit Alignment .
Command Line
CreateBestFitAlignment
Dialog Box
Create Best Fit Alignment Dialog Box (page 1980)
Best Fit Alignment Weeding Options Dialog Box (page 1972)
Widenings
You can apply widening for a specified length along any type of alignment.
Each widening (page 2787) includes transition regions at the entry and the exit. In the figure, region 1 is the
entry transition, and region 3 is the exit transition, based on the direction of the centerline alignment. Default
values for the length and shape of these transitions are determined by command settings for the AddWidening
command.
The transitions extend forward and back from the specified widening start and end stations. In the example
shown, the widening starts at station 3+00 and the transition length is 75, so the entry transition starts at
2+25.
Curb return alignments in intersections can be edited to add widenings at one or both ends. This type of
widening typically forms a turn lane at the entry to a curb return or a merge lane at the exit from a curb
return.
You can also add automatic widening to dynamic offset alignments. For more information, see Adding
Automatic Widening to Dynamic Offset Alignments (page 966).
In the command settings for alignment commands, you can configure a variety of options to control default
behavior for how widenings and transitions are created in widening situations. For example, on the
AddWidening command, you can configure the default settings for how the Linear Transition Around Curves
See also:
Creating Widening
Create a widened region along an existing alignment.
Use this command to create features such as turn lanes, bus bays, and roadside parking areas.
You can add a widening to any alignment type, or to another widening. In the creation process, you specify
the following attributes:
■ The side (left or right) to widen, based on facing in the forward direction along the alignment
A widening can be part of the parent alignment only if the parent is a dynamic offset or curb return.
See also:
To create a widening
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Alignment drop-down ➤ Create Widening .
2 Click an alignment to attach the widening to. This is also known as the parent alignment.
3 Specify whether to create the widening as a new alignment, or part of the parent alignment.
4 Specify start and end stations for the widening, either by clicking on the parent alignment or entering
numeric station values.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Alignment drop-down ➤ Create Widening
Command Line
AddWidening
You can control the widening values and transition lengths by specifying properties, such as the number of
lanes, vehicle type, wheelbase lengths, design speeds, and so on, in a design criteria file associated with the
parent alignment. You can also specify widening values and transition lengths manually by entering values
into the Add Automatic Widening dialog box. The automatically widened curves remain dynamic to the
parent alignment geometry based on the specified criteria.
When you use a design criteria file to specify widening methods, the rules that control automatic widening
are specified in the Superelevation Tables and Widening Methods sections of the design criteria file.
The default corridor design standards file (_Autodesk Civil 3D Imperial Roadway Design Standards.xml) is
typically stored in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\C3D
<version>\enu\Data\Corridor Design Standards\Imperial.
NOTE To use design criteria to specify automatic widening on an offset alignment, a valid design criteria file must
be associated with the parent (centerline) alignment. If there is no design criteria file associated with the parent
alignment, you are prompted to specify one.
The following procedures describe the two different methods that can be used to add automatic widening
to an offset alignment (either using a criteria file or by specifying values manually):
■ using a criteria file - describes the procedure for specifying a design criteria file, associated with the parent
alignment, and then specifying property values, and other parameters, using the Add Automatic Widening
dialog box. The available choices for property values are predefined in the specified design criteria file.
■ manually specifying parameters - describes the procedure for manually specifying the widening rules by
setting the Increase In Width property and the Transition Length property on the Add Automatic Widening
dialog box.
3 On the Add Automatic Widening (page 1945) dialog box, select one of the following: Along Entire
Alignment, At Curves Without Widening, or At Selected Curves.
5 Click OK.
The Offset Alignment Parameters dialog box is displayed.
3 On the Add Automatic Widening (page 1945) dialog box, select one of the following: Along Entire
Alignment, At Curves without Widening, or At Selected Curves.
5 In the Specify Widening Manually section, enter a value in the Increase in Width field to specify the
widening value.
7 Click OK.
The Offset Alignment Parameters dialog box is displayed.
3 On the Add Automatic Widening (page 1945) dialog box, select At Selected Curves.
5 In the drawing, click on the curves along the alignment that you want to apply automatic to. When
you are finished selecting curves, press Enter. The Add Automatic Widening dialog box is displayed.
6 Now you can proceed with specifying automatic widening either using criteria, or manually.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the offset alignment. Click Offset Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Add Automatic Widening
Command Line
AddAutomaticWidening
Dialog Box
Add Automatic Widening Dialog Box (page 1945)
1 On the Settings tab in Toolspace, right-click the Alignments collection, and then click Edit Feature
Settings.
1 On the Settings tab in Toolspace, expand the Alignments collection, right-click the Add Widening
command, and then click Edit Command Settings.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: Alignments ➤ Commands ➤ Right-click Add Widening ➤ Edit Command Settings
Dialog Box
Edit Feature Settings - Alignment Dialog Box (page 1983)
1 On the Settings tab in Toolspace, expand the Alignments collection and then expand the Commands
collection.
3 In the Edit Command Settings - Add Widening dialog box, expand the Linear Transition Around Curves
collection.
4 Specify values for the Number of Segments and the Transition Segment Type properties, and then click
Apply or OK.
See Edit Feature Settings - Alignment Dialog Box (page 1983) for descriptions of each property.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: Alignments ➤ Commands ➤ Right-click Add Widening ➤ Edit Command Settings ➤
Linear Transition Around Curves
Dialog Box
Edit Feature Settings - Alignment Dialog Box (page 1983)
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click the alignment and click Edit Offset Parameters. You can
also select the offset alignment in the drawing, and click Offset Parameters in the Modify tab in the
ribbon.
2 Use the Offset Alignment Parameters dialog box (page 1989) to edit widening parameters.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Entity Descriptions
This section contains descriptions of fixed, free, and floating alignment entities.
Fixed Entity
A fixed entity has the following characteristics:
■ Its parameters are fixed in their position. Only you can change the parameters that define this entity.
■ It is not dependent on any other entity to define its geometry or to maintain tangency, but its length
can be affected by another entity that is attached to it.
■ It can be initially created with a tangency association. Fixed entities that start from the beginning of
another fixed entity can be initially tangent to the other entity, but the tangency is not maintained when
either entity is edited.
Floating Entity
A floating entity has the following characteristics:
■ It is defined by the parameters that you specify and is always tangent to one entity.
Free Entity
A free entity has the following characteristics:
■ It is defined by the parameters that you specify and is always tangent to an entity before and an entity
after.
■ It can only be attached between either two fixed entities, two floating entities, or one fixed and one
floating entity, but in any order.
Adding Lines
Add fixed, free, or floating lines to build constraint-based alignment geometry for the areas of your design
that require maintaining tangency.
In most cases the length of the line automatically adjusts to meet the tangency point of the next or previous
entity.
After clicking a button on the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, follow the command prompts on the command
line.
TIP You can use transparent commands when you are prompted to specify direction, radius, or length, or use
station offsets to specify any points. For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Fixed Line (Two Points).
TIP Edit the line direction or location by moving either point or move the line using the middle grip.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Fixed Line (From Curve End, Length).
TIP You can edit either of the two points or the middle grip, but the initial tangency will not be maintained.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Fixed Line - Best Fit.
3 In the Line By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select From COGO Points.
4 Select two or more AutoCAD Civil 3D points. Enter G to select a point group or N to enter points by
number.
As you select points in the drawing window, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
line is displayed in real time.
6 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the line and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the line and close the Regression Data vista.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Fixed Line - Best Fit.
3 In the Line By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select From AutoCAD Points.
■ Click to create the line and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the line and close the Regression Data vista.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Fixed Line - Best Fit.
3 In the Line By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select From Entities. Specify the tessellation and mid-ordinate
tolerance settings.
NOTE You can select several types of entities listed on the command line.
As you select entities in the drawing window, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
line is displayed in real time.
5 If you selected a profile object, specify the starting and ending station in the Specify Station Range
Dialog Box (page 2228).
7 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the line and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the line and close the Regression Data vista.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Fixed Line - Best Fit.
3 In the Line By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select By Clicking On The Screen.
As you select points in the drawing window, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
line is displayed in real time.
6 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the line and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the line and close the Regression Data vista.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Floating Line (From Curve, Through Point).
3 Select the end of the curve to which you want to add the floating line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Floating Line (From Curve End, Length).
3 Select the end of the curve to which you want to add the floating line.
4 Specify a length by picking two points in the drawing, or by entering a length value on the command
line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
See also:
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Floating Line - Best Fit.
4 In the Line By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select From COGO Points.
5 Select one or more AutoCAD Civil 3D points. Enter G to select a point group or N to enter points by
number.
As you select points in the drawing window, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
line is displayed in real time.
7 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the line and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the line and close the Regression Data vista.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Floating Line - Best Fit.
4 In the Line By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select From AutoCAD Points.
7 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the line and keep the Regression Data vista open.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Floating Line - Best Fit.
4 In the Line By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select From Entities. Specify the tessellation and mid-ordinate
tolerance settings.
NOTE You can select several types of entities listed at the command line.
As you select entities in the drawing window, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
line is displayed in real time.
6 If you selected a profile object, specify the starting and ending station in the Specify Station Range
Dialog Box (page 2228).
8 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the line and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the line and close the Regression Data vista.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Floating Line - Best Fit.
4 In the Line By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select By Clicking On The Screen.
As you select points in the drawing window, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
line is displayed in real time.
7 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the line and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the line and close the Regression Data vista.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Free Line (Between Two Curves).
3 Specify the curve entity from which you want to add the free line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Adding Curves
Add fixed, free, or floating curves to build constraint-based alignment geometry for the areas of your design
that require maintaining tangency.
After clicking a button on the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, follow the command prompts on the command
line.
TIP You can use transparent commands when you are prompted to specify direction, radius, or length, or use
station offsets to specify any points. For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Fixed Curve (Three Point).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Adding a Fixed Curve with Two Points and a Direction at First Point
Add a fixed three-point curve defined by specified start and end points and a direction at the start point.
The result is a three-point curve. The specified curve direction (3) determines the location of the pass-through
point between the start (1) and end (2) points.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Fixed Curve (Two Points And Direction At First Point).
5 Specify the direction at the start point, or specify either a bearing or azimuth.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Adding a Fixed Curve with Two Points and a Direction at Second Point
Add a fixed curve defined by specified start and end points and a direction at the end point.
The result is a three-point curve. The specified curve direction (3) determines the location of the pass-through
point between the start (1) and end (2) points.
TIP You can use transparent commands when you are prompted to specify direction, radius, or length, or use
station offsets to specify any points. For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Fixed Curve (Two Points And Direction At Second
Point).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
TIP You can use transparent commands when you are prompted to specify direction, radius, or length, or use
station offsets to specify any points. For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Fixed Curve (Two Points And Radius).
4 Specify a radius.
■ If the alignment does not have design criteria applied to it, the default value specified in the curve
and spiral settings is displayed. For more information, see Curve and Spiral Settings (page 930).
5 Specify the curve direction, either clockwise or counter-clockwise. A preview of the curve is displayed.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
TIP You can use transparent commands when you are prompted to specify direction, radius, or length, or use
station offsets to specify any points. For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Fixed Curve (From Entity End, Through Point).
3 Select the entity for the start point and the direction.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
TIP You can use transparent commands when you are prompted to specify direction, radius, or length, or use
station offsets to specify any points. For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Fixed Curve (Center Point And Radius).
5 Specify a radius.
Specify a new value, or press Enter to accept the value that is displayed on the command line.
■ If the alignment has design criteria (page 935) applied to it, the minimum value for the current design
speed is displayed.
■ If the alignment does not have design criteria applied to it, the default value specified in the curve
and spiral settings is displayed. For more information, see Curve and Spiral Settings (page 930).
A preview of the curve is displayed. A fixed circle with a center point and a radius is created.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
TIP You can use transparent commands when you are prompted to specify direction, radius, or length, or use
station offsets to specify any points. For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Fixed Curve (Center Point, Through Point).
TIP Edit the curve by moving the center point or the pass-through point.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Adding a Fixed Curve with a Through Point, Direction at Point, and Radius
Add a full, fixed circle defined by a specified pass-through point, direction at the pass-through point, curve
direction, and radius.
The result is a circle with four pass-through points. The entity position is not affected by edits to adjacent
entities.
TIP You can use transparent commands when you are prompted to specify direction, radius, or length, or use
station offsets to specify any points. For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Fixed Curve (Through Point, Direction At Point And
Radius).
6 Specify a radius.
Specify a new value, or press Enter to accept the value that is displayed on the command line.
■ If the alignment has design criteria (page 935) applied to it, the minimum value for the current design
speed is displayed.
■ If the alignment does not have design criteria applied to it, the default value specified in the curve
and spiral settings is displayed. For more information, see Curve and Spiral Settings (page 930).
TIP Edit the curve by moving the center point or using the radius grips.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Fixed Curve - Best Fit.
3 In the Curve By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select From COGO Points.
4 Select three or more AutoCAD Civil 3D points. Enter G to select a point group or N to enter points by
number.
As you select points in the drawing window, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
curve is displayed in real time.
6 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the curve and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the curve and close the Regression Data vista.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Fixed Curve - Best Fit.
3 In the Curve By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select From AutoCAD Points.
6 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the curve and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the curve and close the Regression Data vista.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Fixed Curve - Best Fit.
3 In the Curve By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select From Entities. Specify the tessellation and
mid-ordinate tolerance settings.
NOTE You can select several types of entities listed on the command line.
As you select entities in the drawing window, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
curve is displayed in real time.
5 If you selected a profile object, specify the starting and ending station on the Specify Station Range
Dialog Box (page 2228).
7 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the curve and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the curve and close the Regression Data vista.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the Curve By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select By Clicking On The Screen.
As you select points in the drawing window, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
curve is displayed in real time.
6 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the curve and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the curve and close the Regression Data vista.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
TIP You can use transparent commands when you are prompted to specify direction, radius, or length, or use
station offsets to specify any points. For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
The following illustration shows a floating curve attached to a fixed line and two possible solutions for a
given radius and point:
The following illustration shows a floating compound curve attached to a curve and four possible solutions
for a given radius and pass-through point. The illustration also shows variables for greater than and less than
180 degrees and compound and reverse variables:
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Floating Curve (From Entity, Radius, Through Point).
3 Select the end of the entity to which you want to add the floating curve.
4 Specify a radius.
Specify a new value, or press Enter to accept the value that is displayed on the command line.
■ If the alignment has design criteria (page 935) applied to it, the minimum value for the current design
speed is displayed.
■ If the alignment does not have design criteria applied to it, the default value specified in the curve
and spiral settings is displayed. For more information, see Curve and Spiral Settings (page 930).
5 Specify whether the curve solution angle is either greater than or less than 180 degrees. A preview curve
is displayed.
NOTE If the attachment entity is a curve, you are prompted to specify either a compound curve or a reverse
curve.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
The result is a floating curve that is always tangent to the entity it is attached to.
TIP You can use transparent commands when you are prompted to specify direction, radius, or length, or use
station offsets to specify any points. For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Floating Curve (From Entity End, Through Point).
3 Select the end of the entity to which you want to add the floating curve.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
TIP You can use transparent commands when you are prompted to specify direction, radius, or length, or use
station offsets to specify any points. For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Floating Curve (From Entity End, Radius, Length).
3 Select the end of the entity to which you want to add the floating curve.
5 Specify a radius.
Specify a new value, or press Enter to accept the value that is displayed on the command line.
■ If the alignment has design criteria (page 935) applied to it, the minimum value for the current design
speed is displayed.
■ If the alignment does not have design criteria applied to it, the default value specified in the curve
and spiral settings is displayed. For more information, see Curve and Spiral Settings (page 930).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
The result is a floating curve that is always tangent to the entity it is attached to.
TIP You can use transparent commands when you are prompted to specify direction, radius, or length, or use
station offsets to specify any points. For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Floating Curve (From Entity, Through Point, Direction
At Point).
3 Specify the entity to which you want to add the floating curve.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
See also:
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Floating Curve - Best Fit.
4 In the Curve By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select From COGO Points.
5 Select two or more AutoCAD Civil 3D points. Enter G to select a point group or N to enter points by
number.
As you select points in the drawing window, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
curve is displayed in real time.
7 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the curve and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the curve and close the Regression Data vista.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Floating Curve - Best Fit.
4 In the Curve By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select From AutoCAD Points.
7 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the curve and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the curve and close the Regression Data vista.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Floating Curve - Best Fit.
4 In the Curve By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select From Entities. Specify the tessellation and
mid-ordinate tolerance settings.
NOTE You can select several types of entities listed on the command line.
6 If you selected a profile object, specify the starting and ending station on the Specify Station Range
Dialog Box (page 2228).
8 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the curve and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the curve and close the Regression Data vista.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Floating Curve - Best Fit.
4 In the Curve By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select By Clicking On The Screen.
As you select points in the drawing window, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
curve is displayed in real time.
7 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the curve and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the curve and close the Regression Data vista.
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
TIP You can use transparent commands when you are prompted to specify direction, radius, or length, and use
station offsets to specify any points. For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
Adding a Free Curve Fillet with a Specified Radius Between Two Entities
Add a free curve, with a specified angle range and radius, between two entities.
This entity is defined by the attachment entities (1, 2), radius (3), solution angle, and whether the required
solution is compound or reverse. The solution can vary greatly, depending on how you define the constraints.
TIP You can use transparent commands when you are prompted to specify direction, radius, or length, and use
station offsets to specify any points. For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
The following illustration shows a free curve fillet between two fixed clockwise curves:
The following illustration shows a free curve fillet between an overlapping clockwise curve and a
counter-clockwise curve:
The following illustration shows a free curve fillet between a line and a clockwise curve (on the left) with a
specified radius:
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Free Curve Fillet (Between Two Entities, Radius).
3 Specify the entity (line, curve) from which you want to add the free curve.
4 Specify the entity (line, curve) to which you want to add the free curve.
NOTE The entity before and the entity after must have the same direction.
5 Specify whether the curve solution angle is either greater than or less than 180 degrees.
To display a curve preview you must pick a point in the drawing or enter a coordinate value, then a
rubber band is drawn to the cursor from the selected point and the curve preview is displayed.
7 Specify the second point. You can enter a 2D coordinate point or use a transparent command. For more
information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Adding a Free Curve Fillet with a Through Point Between Two Entities
Add a free curve, with a specified pass-through point, between two entities.
You can add this entity between two lines, two curves, or a line and a curve. The attachment entities (1, 2)
and pass-through point (3) determine the curve radius and length. You cannot edit the radius and length
for this type of curve.
TIP You can use transparent commands when you are prompted to specify direction, radius, or length, or use
station offsets to specify any points. For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 Select the entity from which you want to add the free curve.
4 Select the entity to which you want to attach the free curve. A curve preview is displayed.
5 Specify the pass-through point. You can enter a 2D coordinate point or use a transparent command.
For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
See also:
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 Select the entity from which you want to attach the free curve (the First Entity).
4 Select the entity to which you want to add the free curve (the Next Entity).
NOTE The entity before and the entity after must have the same direction.
5 In the Curve By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select From COGO Points.
6 Select one or more AutoCAD Civil 3D points. Enter G to select a point group or N to enter points by
number.
As you select points in the drawing window, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
curve is displayed in real time.
8 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the curve and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the curve and close the Regression Data vista.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Free Curve - Best Fit.
3 Select the entity from which you want to attach the free curve (the First Entity).
4 Select the entity to which you want to add the free curve (the Next Entity).
NOTE The entity before and the entity after must have the same direction.
5 In the Curve By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select From AutoCAD Points.
8 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the curve and keep the Regression Data vista open.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Free Curve - Best Fit.
3 Select the entity from which you want to attach the free curve (the First Entity).
4 Select the entity to which you want to add the free curve (the Next Entity).
NOTE The entity before and the entity after must have the same direction.
5 In the Curve By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select From Entities. Specify the tessellation and
mid-ordinate tolerance settings.
NOTE You can select several types of entities listed on the command line.
As you select entities in the drawing window, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
curve is displayed in real time.
7 If you selected a profile object, specify the starting and ending station in the Specify Station Range
Dialog Box (page 2228).
9 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the curve and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the curve and close the Regression Data vista.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Free Curve - Best Fit.
3 Select the entity from which you want to attach the free curve (the First Entity).
4 Select the entity to which you want to add the free curve (the Next Entity).
NOTE The entity before and the entity after must have the same direction.
5 In the Curve By Best Fit Dialog Box (page 2225), select By Clicking On The Screen.
As you select points in the drawing window, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
curve is displayed in real time.
8 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data (page 2226) vista to make changes to the regression
points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the curve and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the curve and close the Regression Data vista.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Adding Spirals
Use the Spiral commands to add fixed, free, or floating spirals to the alignment geometry.
Spiral Definitions
Various transition curves are used in civil engineering to gradually introduce curvature and superelevation
between both tangents and circular curves as well as between two circular curves with different curvature.
In its relationship to other tangents and curves, each spiral is either an incurve (page 2776) or an outcurve (page
2779).
The two most commonly used parameters by engineers in designing and setting out a spiral are L (spiral
length) and R (radius of circular curve).
T1
Tangent 1 X1
LT1
ST1
TS PC PI
Y1 T2
SC Y2
P1 ST X2
K1 2
L1 CS LT
Curve 2
i1 PT
K2 ST P2
Spiral 1 L2
i2
Spiral 2
Tangent 2
i1 The central angle of spiral curve L1, which is the spiral angle.
i2 The central angle of spiral curve L2, which is the spiral angle.
P1 The offset of the initial tangent into the PC of the shifted curve.
P2 The offset of the initial tangent out to the PT of the shifted curve.
A2 The A value equals the square root of the spiral length multiplied
by the radius. A measure of the flatness of the spiral.
Formula
Compound Spiral
Compound spirals provide a transition between two circular curves with different radii. As with the simple
spiral, this allows for continuity of the curvature function and provides a way to introduce a smooth transition
in superelevation.
Clothoid Spiral
While AutoCAD Civil 3D supports several spiral types, the clothoid spiral is the most commonly used spiral
type. The clothoid spiral is used world wide in both highway and railway track design.
First investigated by the Swiss mathematician Leonard Euler, the curvature function of the clothoid is a
linear function chosen such that the curvature is zero (0) as a function of length where the spiral meets the
tangent. The curvature then increases linearly until it is equal to the adjacent curve at the point where the
spiral and curve meet.
Such an alignment provides for continuity of the position function and its first derivative (local azimuth),
just as a tangent and curve do at a Point of Curvature (PC). However, unlike the simple curve, it also maintains
continuity of the second derivative (local curvature), which becomes increasingly important at higher speeds.
Formula
Flatness of spiral:
Bloss Spiral
Instead of using the clothoid, the Bloss spiral with the parabola of fifth degrees can be used as a transition.
This spiral has an advantage over the clothoid in that the shift P is smaller and therefore there is a longer
transition, with a larger spiral extension (K). This factor is important in rail design.
Sinusoidal Curves
These curves represent a consistent course of curvature and are applicable to transition from 0 through 90
degrees of tangent deflections. However, sinusoidal curves are not widely used because they are steeper than
a true spiral and are therefore difficult to tabulate and stake out.
Formula
Sinusoidal curves can be expressed as:
Differentiating with l we get an equation for l/r, where r is the radius of curvature at any given point:
where and x is the distance from the start to any point on the curve and is measured along the
(extended) initial tangent; X is the total X at the end of the transition curve.
Where is central angle the spiral (illustrated as i1 and i2in the illustration)
Other key expressions:
Tangent distance at spiral-curve point from tangent-spiral point is:
Cubic Parabolas
Cubic parabolas converge less rapidly than cubic spirals, which makes their use popular in railway and
highway design. While they are less accurate than cubic spirals, cubic parabolas are preferred by highway
and railway engineers because they are expressed in Cartesian coordinates and are easy to set out in the
field.
So
for
Curvature of the second parabola:
for
This curve is specified by the user-defined length (L) of the transition curve.
Compound Curve Formulas
Curvature of the first parabola:
for
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
6 Specify a start radius by either picking two points in the drawing or entering a value on the command
line.
NOTE If the alignment has design criteria (page 935) applied to it, the minimum radius and spiral length
values for the current design speed are displayed on the command line. Specify new values, or press Enter
to accept the minimums.
8 Specify the length or start angle by either picking two points in the drawing or entering a value on the
command line.
9 Specify the end radius by picking two points in the drawing or entering a value on the command line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Fixed Spiral
IMPORTANT Adding a free spiral between two curves is only supported for Clothoid and Bloss spiral types.
The following illustrations show a free spiral between two curves. The solution depends on the selection
order of the curve that the spiral is being attached to. The first illustration shows a left solution, where the
inner circle was selected first. The second illustration shows a right solution, where the inner circle was
selected second:
CS
C C
free spiral (left solution)
CS
C
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Free Spiral (Between Two Entities).
The current spiral definition is displayed on the command line. For more information about changing
the default spiral definition, see Specifying Curve and Spiral Settings (page 930).
3 Select the entity before and the entity after to add the spiral to.
The solution depends on the order in which you select the curves that the spiral is being attached to.
For a solution where the spiral is coming from the left, select the inner circle first. For a solution where
the spiral is coming from right, select the inner circle second.
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
L
L
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Free Spiral (Between Two Entities).
The current spiral definition is displayed at the command line. For more information about changing
the default spiral definition, see Specifying Curve and Spiral Settings (page 930).
3 Select the entity before and the entity after to add the spiral to.
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
L
C
free spiral
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Free Spiral (Between Two Entities).
The current spiral definition is displayed at the command line. For more information about changing
the default spiral definition, see Specifying Curve and Spiral Settings (page 930).
3 Select the line before and the curve after to add the spiral to.
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
The spiral radii are identical at the spiral-spiral intersection point. The radius value is determined by the
total deflection angle and the two spiral lengths. The radius value cannot be edited.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Free Compound Spiral-Spiral (Between Two Curves).
The current spiral definition is displayed at the command line. For more information about changing
the default spiral definition, see Specifying Curve and Spiral Settings (page 930).
3 Specify the entity before and the entity after to which you want to add the spiral.
4 Optionally, enter a value for the ratio of A1 to A2, or select Length and enter a value for the ratio of L1
to L2. Otherwise, the A values and lengths of each spiral will be equal.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
By default, the two spirals have equal lengths and A values. Both values can be modified at the time of
creation by specifying a ratio of A1/A2 or L1/L2.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Free Reverse Spiral-Spiral (Between Two Curves).
The current spiral definition is displayed at the command line. For more information about changing
the default spiral definition, see Specifying Curve and Spiral Settings (page 930).
3 Specify the entity before and the entity after to which you want to add the spiral.
NOTE If the curves are in the same direction, a compound solution is given. Enter Yes at the command line
to accept the solution, or enter No to restart the command. There is no solution if the curves cross, or for
concentric curves.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Free Compound Spiral-Spiral (Between Two Tangents).
3 Select the tangent (the First Entity) from which you want to add the spiral group.
4 Select the tangent (the Next Entity) to which you want to add the spiral group.
5 Specify the length or A value of the first spiral (the spiral in).
■ If the alignment does not have design criteria applied to it, the default value specified in the curve
and spiral settings is displayed. For more information, see Curve and Spiral Settings (page 930).
6 Specify the length or A value of the second spiral (the spiral out).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Free Compound Spiral-Line-Spiral (Between Two
Curves, Spiral Lengths).
3 Specify the entity before and the entity after to which you want to add the spiral.
4 Specify either the length or the A value for the spiral in and the spiral out.
Specify a new value, or press Enter to accept the value that is displayed on the command line.
■ If the alignment has design criteria (page 935) applied to it, the minimum value for the current design
speed is displayed.
■ If the alignment does not have design criteria applied to it, the default value specified in the curve
and spiral settings is displayed. For more information, see Curve and Spiral Settings (page 930).
NOTE If the curves are in a different direction, a reverse solution is given. Enter Yes at the command line to
accept the solution, or enter No to restart the command. There is no solution for concentric curves.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Adding a Free Reverse Spiral-Line-Spiral with Specified Spiral Lengths Between Two
Curves
Add a free reverse spiral-line-spiral group, with specified spiral lengths, between two curves.
The two spirals bend in opposite directions. You specify the spiral lengths (2, 3). The line length is
automatically calculated. If either of the attachment curves (1, 2) are edited, the spiral lengths do not change.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Free Reverse Spiral-Line-Spiral (Between Two Curves,
Spiral Lengths).
The current spiral definition is displayed at the command line. For more information about changing
the default spiral definition, see Specifying Curve and Spiral Settings (page 930).
3 Specify the entity before and the entity after to which you want to add the spiral.
4 Specify either the length or the A value for the spiral in and the spiral out.
Specify a new value, or press Enter to accept the value that is displayed on the command line.
■ If the alignment has design criteria (page 935) applied to it, the minimum value for the current design
speed is displayed.
■ If the alignment does not have design criteria applied to it, the default value specified in the curve
and spiral settings is displayed. For more information, see Curve and Spiral Settings (page 930).
NOTE If the curves are in the same direction, a compound solution is given. Enter Yes at the command line
to accept the solution, or enter No to restart the command. There is no solution for concentric curves.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Free Compound Spiral-Line-Spiral (Between Two
Curves, Line Length).
The current spiral definition is displayed at the command line. For more information about changing
the default spiral definition, see Specifying Curve and Spiral Settings (page 930).
3 Specify the entity before and the entity after to which you want to add the spiral.
NOTE If the curves are in the same direction, a compound solution is given. Enter Yes at the command line to
accept the solution, or enter No to restart the command. There is no solution for concentric curves.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Adding a Free Reverse Spiral-Line-Spiral with a Specified Line Length Between Two
Curves
Add a free reverse spiral-line-spiral group, with a specified line length, between two curves.
The two spirals bend in opposite directions. You specify the line length (3). The spiral lengths are automatically
calculated. If either of the attachment curves (1, 2) are edited, the line length does not change.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Free Reverse Spiral-Line-Spiral (Between Two Curves,
Line Length).
The current spiral definition is displayed at the command line. For more information about changing
the default spiral definition, see Specifying Curve and Spiral Settings (page 930).
3 Specify the entity before and the entity after to which you want to add the spiral.
NOTE If the curves are in the same direction, a compound solution is given. Enter Yes at the command line to
accept the solution, or enter No to restart the command. There is no solution for crossing or concentric curves.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Floating Line With Spiral (From Curve, Through
Point).
The current spiral definition is displayed at the command line.
4 Specify either the spiral length or the A value, either by entering a numeric value, or selecting two
points in the drawing.
Specify a new value, or press Enter to accept the value that is displayed on the command line.
■ If the alignment has design criteria (page 935) applied to it, the minimum value for the current design
speed is displayed.
■ If the alignment does not have design criteria applied to it, the default value specified in the curve
and spiral settings is displayed. For more information, see Curve and Spiral Settings (page 930).
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Adding a Floating Line with a Spiral with Specified Lengths to a Curve End
Add a floating spiral-line group, with specified spiral and line lengths, to a curve.
When the attachment entity (1) is edited, the spiral (2) and line (3) lengths do not change. You can adjust
or move the attachment curve and the entire spiral-line group moves with it.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Floating Line With Spiral (From Curve End, Length).
The current spiral definition is displayed at the command line.
4 Specify the spiral length or the A value, by either entering a numeric value or selecting two points.
Specify a new value, or press Enter to accept the value that is displayed on the command line.
■ If the alignment has design criteria (page 935) applied to it, the minimum value for the current design
speed is displayed.
■ If the alignment does not have design criteria applied to it, the default value specified in the curve
and spiral settings is displayed. For more information, see Curve and Spiral Settings (page 930).
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
TIP You can use transparent commands when you are prompted to specify direction, radius, or length, or use
station offsets to specify any points. For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
TIP You can use transparent commands when you are prompted to specify direction, radius, or length, or use
station offsets to specify any points. For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
Adding a Floating Curve with a Spiral with a Specified Radius, Spiral Length, and
Through Point to an Entity
Add a floating spiral-curve group, with a specified radius, spiral length, and pass-through point, to an existing
line or curve entity.
When the attachment entity (1) is edited, the spiral length (3), solution angle (4), and curve radius (2) and
pass-through point (5) do not change. The attachment point and curve length adjust to accommodate edits
to the attachment curve.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Floating Curve With Spiral (From Entity, Radius,
Through Point) to add a floating curve with a spiral off a curve.
The current spiral definition is displayed on the command line.
■ If the alignment does not have design criteria applied to it, the default value specified in the curve
and spiral settings is displayed. For more information, see Curve and Spiral Settings (page 930).
6 Specify whether the curve solution angle is either greater than or less than 180 degrees.
7 Specify whether the curve is compound or reverse to the curve it is being added to.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
To add a floating curve with a spiral (from entity, radius, length) off a line
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Floating Curve With Spiral (From Entity End, Radius,
Length) to add a floating curve with a spiral off a line.
The current spiral definition is displayed at the command line.
■ If the alignment does not have design criteria applied to it, the default value specified in the curve
and spiral settings is displayed. For more information, see Curve and Spiral Settings (page 930).
6 Specify whether the curve solution angle is either greater than or less than 180 degrees.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
TIP You can use transparent commands when you are prompted to specify direction, radius, or length, or use
station offsets to specify any points. For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
Adding a Floating Reverse Curve with Spirals with a Specified Radius and Through
Point to a Curve
Add a floating reverse spiral-spiral-curve group, with a specified radius and pass-through point, to a curve.
The two spirals bend in opposite directions. The curve bends in the opposite direction of the attachment
curve. When the attachment curve (1) is edited, the spiral lengths (2, 4), curve radius (3) and pass-through
point (5) do not change. The attachment point and the length of the reverse curve adjust to accommodate
edits to the attachment curve.
■ Solutions that require a floating curve angle greater than 180 degrees. The following illustration shows
both the supported and unsupported solutions:
To add a floating reverse curve with spirals (from curve, radius, through point) off a curve
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Floating Reverse Curve With Spirals (From Curve,
Radius, Through Point) to add a floating reverse curve with spirals off a curve.
The current spiral definition is displayed at the command line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Floating Reverse Curve With Spirals (From Curve, Radius, Through Point)
Adding a Floating Reverse Curve with Spirals with Two Through Points to a Curve
Adds a floating reverse spiral-spiral-curve group, with two specified pass-through points, to an existing curve.
The two spirals bend in opposite directions. The curve bends in the opposite direction of the attachment
curve. When the attachment curve (1) is edited, the spiral lengths (2, 3) and pass-through points (4, 5) do
not change. The attachment point and the radius and length of the reverse curve adjust to accommodate
edits to the attachment curve.
To add a floating reverse curve with spirals (from curve, two through points) off a curve
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Floating Reverse Curve With Spirals (From Curve,
Two Points) to add a floating reverse curve with spirals off a curve.
The current spiral definition is displayed at the command line.
■ If the alignment does not have design criteria applied to it, the default value specified in the curve
and spiral settings is displayed. For more information, see Curve and Spiral Settings (page 930).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Adding Spiral-Curve-Spirals
Add a free spiral-curve-spiral group between two entities.
The type of spirals created (simple vs. compound) depends on the types of entities you attach it to. When
the attachment entities (1, 2) are edited, the spiral lengths (3, 4) and curve radius (5) do not change. The
attachment points and the curve length adjust to accommodate edits to the attachment entities.
The Spiral-Curve-Spiral command is similar to the command that adds a free curve by radius between two
entities. However, this command adds a transition spiral in and a transition spiral out. The curve group for
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Free Spiral-Curve-Spiral (Between Two Entities).
3 Select the entity from which you want to add the spiral-curve-spiral.
5 Select the spiral-in length by picking two points in the drawing or by entering a spiral-in A value.
Specify a new value, or press Enter to accept the value that is displayed on the command line.
■ If the alignment has design criteria (page 935) applied to it, the minimum value for the current design
speed is displayed.
■ If the alignment does not have design criteria applied to it, the default value specified in the curve
and spiral settings is displayed. For more information, see Curve and Spiral Settings (page 930).
7 Specify whether the curve solution angle is either greater than or less than 180 degrees.
8 Enter a radius value or select two points in the drawing to specify the radius.
To display a curve preview you must either pick a point in the drawing or enter a coordinate value.
Then, rubber band is drawn to the cursor from the selected point and the curve preview is displayed.
NOTE If you enter an A value for either the spiral-in or the spiral-out value, then the curve preview is not
displayed when you specify the radius.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
The compound Spiral-Curve-Spiral-Curve-Spiral (SCSCS) group is placed between two tangents. This group
is similar to the spiral-curve-spiral (SCS) group, but it has a second curve and spiral at the end of the group.
The SCSCS group accepts zero as a spiral length, which allows you to create a multiple curve group with or
without spirals. Any of the spirals in this group can have a zero length. A spiral with zero length is effectively
omitted from the group. The following combinations are possible by specifying zero as the spiral length:
SCSCS, SCSC, CSCS, CSC, SCCS, SCC, CCS, CC.
You cannot grip edit the SCSCS group, but you can edit the tangents to which it is attached. The point of
intersection (PI) of the original tangents is maintained, which causes the entire curve group to react to
changes to either tangent. You can edit the spiral or curve parameters directly in either the Alignment Layout
Parameters (page 1953) dialog box or the Alignment Entities (page 1947) vista. If a spiral in the group has zero
length specified, the spiral parameters are still displayed.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 Select the tangent (the First Entity) from which you want to add the curve group.
4 Select the tangent (the Next Entity) to which you want to add the curve group.
NOTE You can specify length by picking two points in the drawing. Zero is an acceptable length for any of
the spirals in this curve group.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 Select the tangent (the First Entity) from which you want to add the curve group.
4 Select the tangent (the Next Entity) to which you want to add the curve group.
5 Specify the length or A value of the first spiral (the spiral in).
NOTE You can specify length by picking two points in the drawing.
7 Specify the length or A value of the second spiral (the spiral out).
8 Specify the length or A value of the third spiral (the spiral in).
10 Specify the length or A value of the fourth spiral (the spiral out).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
You can also use commands to insert alignment tables into a drawing. Alignment tables organize and
consolidate the information about the alignment. When you insert a table into the drawing, full labels are
converted to tags, and the detailed alignment information is inserted into the table.
The topics in this section describe what is unique to alignment labels and tables. For a general overview of
labels, see Labels and Tags (page 1643). For an overview of tables, see Tables (page 1737).
Curve Group 1,
Curve Group 1,
Entity Number 1
Entity Number 0
Sta. 9
+20
+80
+40
+60
+60
. 10
+40
Curve Group 1,
+80
+20
.8
Sta
0
+2
0
00
0
+8
l) (S
+4
0
00.
ira
25.0
im
+6
Sp ple
+6
0
5 L 6 R=2
ple
+4
0
0
Sp
L=1
11
Sim
+8
0
0.0
ir
7
+2
( al)
a.
a.
=13
5 A= 0.00
St
0
1
St
=16 9+89.
.1
0
0
+2
+8
158
0
0
0
00
2
+4
+6
1.2
=
=7 5.00
.95
0.
0
0
Sta. 42.11 R
(1-2 ) : Sta
+4
+6
13
21
0
L=
0
6
+2
+2 . 12
1
21.9
+8
) (L
a.
=in L=
ine
): A
25
in
St
(L
(1-1
e
1.
St
0
5 R .11
)
.
1
+
f
+8
16
0
=
7
1 . 9 1 58
0
A=
+6
EC
0
):
+4
KE
7+ : A =
6
.0
(1-1
0
81 +89
1) :
+6
2
St (1 )
0
9
+8
(
BC
4
KA
56 a.
E
a.
L= : St
K
7.
in -2)
R= (1
Alignment labels
Station Equation Points added on the Station Control tab of the Align-
ment Properties dialog box.
Design Speeds Points added on the Design Speeds tab of the Align-
ment Properties dialog box.
■ Major Stations
■ Minor Stations
■ Geometry Points
■ Design Speeds
When you create an alignment, you select a label set, which is a predefined collection of label types with
associated styles. You can modify the station labels in an existing alignment, and then optionally save the
changes as a label set.
■ Major Stations
■ Minor Stations
■ Geometry Points
■ Station Equations
■ Design Speeds
For more information about modifying labels, see Modifying Labels in a Drawing (page 1712). For more
information about which properties of different label types can be modified, see Managing Layout Properties
for Label Styles (page 1671).
NOTE To change the label type defaults, right-click the <Label Type> collection on the Settings tree in Toolspace
and select Edit Label Style Defaults. For more information, see Default Settings for All Labels in a Label Type (page
1655).
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Add/Edit Station Labels
2 Select an alignment in the drawing to open the Alignment Labels dialog box.
3 In the Type list, select the type of label that you want to add.
NOTE To add minor station labels, you must have at least one major station label type added to the label
set.
5 Click Add.
TIP To delete a label, select the label type and click. You cannot delete a major station if it has a minor station.
6 If you select either the Geometry Points, Profile Geometry Points, or Superelevation Critical Points label
type, select the specific points to label.
7 In the Style column, either click the icon to change the style or accept the label style selection.
8 In the Increment column, either enter a value to determine the increment distance between major
station labels, or accept the default.
9 In the Start Station column, either clear the check box and enter a new starting station value or accept
the default.
10 In the End Station column, either clear the check box and enter a new end station value or accept the
default.
NOTE The default start and end stations for each label type are the beginning and end of the alignment. To
change either the start station or end station, clear the check box, and enter new start station and end station
values.
11 In the Geometry Points To Label column, click to update the points to label.
NOTE The Geometry Points To Label column is only available for the Geometry Points, Profile Geometry
Points, and Superelevation Critical Points label types.
12 Repeat Steps 2 through 10 to add more label types to the label set.
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Add/Edit Station Labels
2 Select an alignment in the drawing to open the Alignment Labels dialog box.
3 In the Alignment Labels dialog box, determine the label types you want to save in the label set.
5 On the Information tab (page 2206), enter a name and optional description for the label set.
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Add/Edit Station Labels
2 Select an alignment in the drawing to open the Alignment Labels dialog box.
4 In the Select Style Set dialog box, either select an existing label set or copy, edit, or create a label set.
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Add/Edit Station Labels
2 Select an alignment in the drawing to open the Alignment Labels dialog box.
3 In the Alignment Labels dialog box, do any of the following procedures, and then click OK.
1 In the Type list, select the type of label that you want to add.
NOTE To add minor station labels, you must have at least one major station label type added to the label
set.
3 Click Add.
4 If you select either the Geometry Points, Profile Geometry Points, or Superelevation Critical Points label
type, select the specific points to label.
To delete a label, select the label type and click . You cannot delete a major station if it has a minor
station.
1 In the Style column, either click the icon to change the style or accept the label style selection.
2 In the Increment column, either enter a value to determine the increment distance between major
station labels, or accept the default.
3 In the Start Station column, either clear the check box and enter a new starting station value or accept
the default.
4 In the End Station column, either clear the check box and enter a new end station value or accept the
default.
NOTE The default start and end stations for each label type are the beginning and end of the alignment. To
change either the start station or end station, clear the check box, and enter new start station and end station
values.
5 In the Geometry Points To Label column, click to update the points to label.
NOTE The Geometry Points To Label column is only available for the Geometry Points, Profile Geometry
Points, and Superelevation Critical Points label types.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Add/Edit Station Labels
Menu
■ Geometry Points
NOTE Superelevation critical labels are not dynamically linked to the parent alignment. If the alignment
geometry changes, the superelevation critical labels must be updated manually.
TIP Superelevation critical point labels can also display a diagram that represents the cross section at each
superelevation transition point. For more information, see Adding Superelevation Cross-Section Diagrams
Along an Alignment (page 1050).
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Add/Edit Station Labels
2 Select an alignment in the drawing to open the Alignment Labels dialog box.
3 In the Alignment Labels Dialog Box (page 1952) dialog box, in the Type list, select the type of geometry
point label that you want to add.
Select either Geometry Points, Profile Geometry Points, or Superelevation Critical Points.
5 Click Add.
6 In the <label type> Points dialog box, select the specific points to label.
NOTE If you selected Profile Geometry Points, you must specify a profile to reference in the Profile Geometry
Points Dialog Box (page 1992) dialog box.
7 In the Start Station column, either clear the check box and enter a new starting station value or accept
the default.
8 In the End Station column, either clear the check box and enter a new end station value or accept the
default.
NOTE The default start and end stations for each label type are the beginning and end of the alignment. To
change either the start station or end station, clear the check box, and enter new start station and end station
values.
NOTE In the Geometry Points To Label column, click to update the points to label.
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Add/Edit Station Labels
Menu
1 Compose a label style for each type of superelevation critical point that you want to label.
Each style must contain a block component that refers to an appropriate representation of the cross
section at that type of geometry point. Optionally, each style can include text, tick, and line components.
For information about composing a label style, see Creating New Label Styles (page 1656).
2 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Add/Edit Station Labels
3 Select an alignment in the drawing to open the Alignment Labels dialog box.
4 In the Alignment Labels Dialog Box (page 1952), in the Type list, select Superelevation Critical Points.
5 In the Superelevation Label Style list, select a style for the superelevation critical geometry point.
6 Click Add.
7 In the Superelevation Critical Points Dialog Box (page 1993), click Deselect All. Select the
superelevation critical points that correspond to the style you selected in Step 4. Click OK.
8 In the Start Station column, either clear the check box and enter a new starting station value, or accept
the default.
9 In the End Station column, either clear the check box and enter a new end station value, or accept the
default.
12 Optionally, click Save Label Set to save the current label configuration as a label set.
For more information, see Saving Alignment Label Sets (page 1046).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Add/Edit Station Labels
Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click a station label type. Click either Edit or New.
4 In the Text Component Editor, click the Format Value column. Select Station Index Format from the
list.
6 Click to insert the property into the Text Component Editor window.
7 Click OK.
■ 10+50.00
■ 10-50.00
■ 10_50.00
■ 1050.00
■ 10/50.00
■ 10C50.00
■ 10K50.00
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click a station label type. Click either Edit or New.
4 In the Text Component Editor, in the preview pane, select the station value property formula.
6 Click the Station Character Value column. Select the desired character from the list.
8 Click to insert the property into the Text Component Editor window.
9 Click OK.
See also:
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the drawing and click Edit Drawing Settings. Click the
Abbreviations Tab (Drawing Settings Dialog Box) (page 2077).
2 In the Alignment Geometry Point Entity Data section, select the entity endpoint type. Click in the
Value column to modify the label for that type.
3 In the Text Component Editor, select a property from the list and select modifiers as necessary.
4 Click to insert the property into the Text Component Editor window.
6 Repeat Steps 2-5 to format other alignment endpoint entities listed on the Abbreviations tab.
10 In the Properties list, select Geometry Point Entity Before Data. Click .
11 In the Properties list, select Geometry Point Entity After Data. Click .
12 Click OK.
The text you compose on the Abbreviations tab for the alignment endpoint entities is included in the labels
that display before and after the geometry point.
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Single Segment .
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Single Segment
Menu
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Add Alignment Labels
.
2 In the Add Labels dialog box, verify that Alignments is displayed in the Feature list.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Add Alignment Labels
Menu
NOTE You cannot label fixed spirals with the multiple tangent intersection label command.
NOTE If you move the alignment, labels that you add using the station offset labels command move with the
associated point.
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Station/Offset .
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Station/Offset
Menu
NOTE If you edit the alignment, labels that you add using the Station/Offset - Fixed Point command do not move.
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Station/Offset – Fixed
.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Station/Offset – Fixed
Menu
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Tangent Intersection
.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Tangent Intersection
Menu
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Multiple Tangent
Intersection .
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Multiple Tangent
Intersection
Menu
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Add Line .
2 In the Table Creation (page 2739) dialog box, select a Table Style and a Table Layer.
3 Specify the label styles or select labels in the drawing to create a tag child style for the labels.
7 Click the upper left corner in the drawing where you want the table to display.
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Add Curve .
2 In the Table Creation (page 2739) dialog box, select a Table Style and a Table Layer.
3 Specify the label styles or select labels in the drawing to create a tag child style for the labels.
7 Click the upper left corner in the drawing where you want the table to display.
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Add Spiral.
2 In the Table Creation (page 2739) dialog box, select a Table Style and a Table Layer.
3 Specify the label styles or select labels in the drawing to create a tag child style for the labels.
7 Click the upper left corner in the drawing where you want the table to display.
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Add Segment .
2 In the Table Creation (page 2739) dialog box, select a Table Style and a Table Layer.
3 Specify the label styles or select labels in the drawing to create a tag child style for the labels.
7 Click the upper left corner in the drawing where you want the table to display.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Add Line
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Add Curve
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Add Spiral
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Add Segment
Menu
Editing Alignments
Edit an alignment by modifying the geometry or parameter values.
You can grip edit an alignment, modify geometric values, or add constraint-based line, curve, and spiral
entities.
See also:
2 Edit the alignment sub-entity by either manipulating the grips (page 1068) or entering specific attribute
values (page 1066).
NOTE The Alignment Entities Vista (page 1947) displays only the selected sub-entity attributes.
1 In the drawing window, Ctrl+click the first alignment sub-entity in the desired range.
3 Right-click one of the selected sub-entities and select Edit Alignment Geometry.
4 Click Alignment Grid View on the Alignment Layout toolbar (page 1959).
5 Edit the alignment sub-entities by either manipulating the grips (page 1068) or entering specific attribute
values (page 1066)
NOTE The Alignment Entities vista displays only the attributes of the sub-entities in the range.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
■ Before it is converted, it must be attached to an unattached end point of another solved entity in the
alignment.
■ After it has been converted, it can be joined to the solved alignment geometry using the alignment layout
tools.
This command is useful when you must add an AutoCAD line or arc onto an existing alignment. AutoCAD
lines and arcs can be created using the best fit entities or other lines and curves commands. See Lines and
Curves (page 605) for more information.
2 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Convert AutoCAD Line And Arc.
5 If necessary, reverse the direction of the alignment sub-entity. See Reversing Alignment Sub-Entity
Direction (page 1084) for more information.
NOTE If the sub-entity you converted is hidden behind the source AutoCAD entity, use Shift+spacebar to select
it. Hover the cursor over the white AutoCAD entity. Press and hold Shift, then press the spacebar to highlight the
alignment sub-entity. Click to select the alignment sub-entity, then release the Shift key. Click the alignment
sub-entity again to select it and continue with the command.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
To add a PI to an alignment
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the drawing window, click the location for the new PI.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Insert PI
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the drawing window, click a point near the PI that you want to remove.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Delete PI
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the drawing window, click a point near the PI that you want to break apart.
4 Specify the distance that you want to break apart the PI.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Break-Apart PI
warning symbol appears next to the violation. For more information, see Viewing and Correcting
Alignment Design Criteria Violations (page 1080).
NOTE The attributes of a curve or other alignment entity that you can edit depends on the method you used to
create the entity. Generally speaking, you can edit the numeric value of a parameter if the parameter was used to
define the entity. For all other parameters, numeric values are calculated and displayed but cannot be edited.
See also:
To edit alignment layout parameters using the Alignment Entities vista and Alignment Layout Parameters
dialog box
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
NOTE You can edit only values that are available. You cannot edit unavailable (shaded) text in either the
Alignment Entities vista or Alignment Layout Parameters dialog box.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Sub-Entity Editor
Dialog Box
Alignment Entities Vista (page 1947)
Alignment Layout Parameters Window (page 1953)
Move an entire line. Moving this grip only affects the line location.
AT CENTER OF LINE
When a grip is selected, you can use either dynamic input or the Alignment Entities (page 1947) vista and
Alignment Layout Parameters (page 1953) dialog box to enter precise attribute values for the grip.
1 In the drawing, click an alignment containing a fixed curve through three points.
Grips for a fixed curve with three pass-through points:
2 Move any grip to change a pass-through point, which changes the radius of the curve.
To use grips to edit a fixed curve with a center point and radius
1 In the drawing, click an alignment that contains a fixed curve with a center point and radius.
Grips on a fixed curve with a center point and radius:
■ Move the center grip to change the center point of the circle.
To use grips to edit a fixed curve with a center point and a pass-through point
1 In the drawing, click an alignment that contains a fixed curve with a center point and a pass-through
point.
Grips for a fixed curve with a center point and a pass-through point:
1 In the drawing, click an alignment that contains either a fixed or a floating line.
2 Move the PI grip in any direction to edit the shared endpoints of the two lines.
1 In the drawing, click an alignment that contains a floating line with a pass-through point.
Grip for a floating line with a pass-through point:
1 In the drawing, click an alignment that contains a floating line attached to an entity.
Grips for a floating line attached to an entity:
NOTE You cannot move the triangular grip to the beginning of the line grip. Zero length lines are not
permitted.
To use grips to edit a floating curve with a pass-through point and radius
1 In the drawing, click an alignment that has a floating curve with a pass-through point and radius.
Grips for a floating curve with a pass-through point:
■ Moving the second circular grip, located at the mid-point of the curve, modifies the radius while
changing the pass-through point.
Changing a curve using the midpoint grip:
■ Moving the square grip at the end of the curve changes the pass-through point of the curve while
holding the curve radius.
Changing a curve using the end grip:
To use grips to edit a floating curve attached to an entity end with a pass-through point
1 In the drawing, click an alignment that contains a floating curve attached to an entity end with a
pass-through point.
Grips for a floating curve attached to an entity end with a pass-through point:
2 Move the circular grip to change the pass-through point at the end of the curve. Moving the pass-through
point also changes the radius.
1 In the drawing, click an alignment that has a free curve. Move any grip to modify the curve radius.
Grips for changing the curve radius:
■ Move the circular, mid-point grip to modify the pass-through point and radius for the curve. Move
the triangular grip to modify the radius for the curve while holding the pass-through point. By
moving either of these grips, you can create a curve of less than or greater than 180 degrees.
Changing the radius to less than 180 degrees:
Changing the radius to greater than 180 degrees using the circular pass-through point grip:
Changing the radius to greater than 180 degrees using the triangular radius grip:
1 In the drawing, click an alignment with a free curve and a pass-through point.
Grips for a free curve with a pass-through point:
2 Move the circular grip to change the pass-through point of the curve. This pass-through point is
maintained when you edit the attached entities.
in the Constraint2 column. Click in this column to edit the source regression data.
Regression data is not dynamically linked to the best fit entity. If the entity is edited, appears in both
the Regression Data and Alignment Entities vistas.
NOTE You can edit only values that are available, you cannot edit unavailable (shaded) text.
■ If the floating best fit entity is synchronized with the best fit sample data, it will maintain tangency when
the attachment entity is edited. The floating best fit entity geometry will change to adapt to changes to
the attachment entity, and continue to honor the regression points.
■ If the floating best fit entity is not synchronized with the best fit sample data, it will behave as a normal
floating entity. The floating best fit entity will remain tangent to the attachment entity, and its geometry
will not change to honor the regression points.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Edit Best Fit Data For All Entities.
NOTE You can also open the Regression Data vista from the Alignment Entities vista. In the Constraint2
column, click .
4 Click to apply the changes and close the Regression Data vista.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar, click Edit Best Fit Data For All Entities.
3 In the Regression Data vista, click Synchronize Entity To Best Fit Sample Data.
NOTE You can also synchronize the entity to the regression data from the Alignment Entities vista. In the
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Dialog Box
Regression Data Vista (for Best Fit Entity Analysis) (page 2226)
Alignment Entities Vista (page 1947)
■ Grip editing
Grip Editing
This editing method enables you to use freehand controls to reshape an offset or widening. Dimensions are
also available in tooltips.
The various grips and their use are described in the following table.
Grip Function
1 Click the offset alignment. Click Offset Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Offset Parameters .
2 In the Offset Parameters (page 1989) dialog box, modify station values, transition types, or other parameters.
1 Click the offset alignment or widening. Grips appear along the object.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the offset alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Offset Parameters
Object Shortcut Menu
Right-click alignment or widening. Click Edit Offset Parameters
Command Line
EditOffsetAlignParameters
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Alignment Properties
2 In the Alignment Properties dialog box, click the Design Criteria (page 1966) tab.
NOTE To use criteria-based design, an alignment must have at least one design speed.
6 On the right side of the dialog box, select the Use Criteria-Based Design check box.
NOTE The first design criteria file found in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users|Application
Data\Autodesk\C3D2011\enu\Data\Corridor Design Standards\<units> directory is used by default when
the criteria-based design feature is used.
8 Click OK.
NOTE The entire alignment design is validated when you click either Apply or OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Alignment Properties drop-down ➤ Alignment
Properties
■ The drawing window — The warning symbol is displayed on each sub-entity that violates the design
criteria.
NOTE The size of the warning symbol does not adjust automatically. After zooming in or out, enter REGEN
to resize the warning symbols.
■ The Alignment Entities vista — The warning symbol is displayed in the No. column of the sub-entity
that violates the design criteria. If a criteria in the design criteria file was violated, the warning symbol
is also displayed next to the specific criteria and parameter value that violates the design criteria.
■ The Alignment Layout Parameters dialog box — If a criteria in the design criteria file was violated, the
warning symbol is displayed in the Design Criteria panel next to the Property that was violated, and
in the Layout Parameters panel next to the Parameter that was violated. If a design check was violated,
the warning symbol is displayed in the Design Checks panel next to the design check that was
violated.
You can use the warning symbols in the drawing window to view information about criteria and
design checks that were violated. When the cursor is hovered over a warning symbol in the drawing window,
a tooltip displays information about the violation. If a design criteria was violated, the tooltip displays the
criteria that was violated, as well as the minimum value required to meet the criteria. If a design check was
violated, the tooltip displays the name of the design check that was violated.
BEST PRACTICE The name of the design check should be similar to the formula you enter in the Design Check
field. When a design check is violated, only the design check name is displayed, and not the minimum acceptable
value. If the formula is in the design check name, it is easier to correct the violation.
NOTE If a sub-entity violates more than one criteria or design check, only one warning symbol is displayed in the
drawing. To clear the warning symbol, the sub-entity must be modified to meet all the design criteria and design
checks.
For more information, see Correcting Alignment Design Criteria Violations (page 1082).
WARNING Settings in the Options dialog box affect the overall behavior of AutoCAD Civil 3D. If you clear the
Solution Tip Drafting check box, the warning symbol for all alignment and profile objects will be hidden in every
drawing that is opened on the current installation of AutoCAD Civil 3D.
WARNING If you turn off the criteria-based design feature, the alignment design will not be validated against
any design standards.
You can use the warning symbols in the drawing window to view information about criteria and design
checks that were violated. When the cursor is hovered over a warning symbol in the drawing window, a
tooltip displays information about the violation.
■ If a design criteria was violated, the tooltip displays the criteria that was violated, as well as the minimum
value required to meet the criteria.
■ If a design check was violated, the tooltip displays the name and formula of the design check that was
violated.
NOTE If a sub-entity violates more than one criteria or design check, only one warning symbol is displayed in the
drawing. To clear the warning symbol, the sub-entity must be modified to meet all the design criteria and design
checks.
The warning symbol disappears when the sub-entity meets the design criteria.
NOTE If a sub-entity violates more than one criteria or design check, only one warning symbol is displayed
on the sub-entity. To clear the warning symbol, the sub-entity must be modified to meet all the design
criteria.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the Alignment Entities vista, click the row that contains the warning symbol in the No. column.
The sub-entity parameters are displayed in the Alignment Layout Parameters dialog box.
4 In the Alignment Layout Parameters dialog box, locate the warning symbol in either of the following
panels:
■ Layout Parameters panel — In the Value column, enter a numeric value that meets the value specified
in the Constraints column.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
When you create an alignment, you can control the direction of the alignment, regardless of the direction
the polyline was drawn. If you create an alignment using the Create Alignment From Polyline command,
the alignment direction starts from the nearest endpoint you click the polyline. If you create an alignment
using the Create Alignment By Layout command, the alignment direction is determined by the direction
in which you draw the alignment. If you must change the direction of the alignment, you can use the Reverse
Alignment Direction command. However, it is important to note that all objects that are dependent on the
alignment (Profiles, Sample Lines, Sections, and Corridor objects, Superelevation) will change as well.
You can only change the direction of an alignment that is continuous.
You can also reverse the direction of an individual fixed, unattached alignment sub-entity. See Reversing
Alignment Sub-Entity Direction (page 1084) for more information.
➤ Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel Reverse Direction .
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel Reverse Direction
Menu
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Endpoint Yes No
Midpoint Yes No
Center Yes No
Quadrant Yes No
Intersection Yes No
Extension Yes No
Insertion Yes No
Perpendicular Yes No
Tangent Yes No
Nearest Yes No
Parallel Yes No
Endpoint Yes No
Midpoint Yes No
Center Yes No
Quadrant No No
Intersection Yes No
Extension Yes No
Insertion Yes No
Perpendicular Yes No
Tangent Yes No
Nearest Yes No
Parallel Yes No
Endpoint Yes No
Midpoint Yes No
Center Yes No
Node Yes No
Quadrant No No
Intersection Yes No
Extension Yes No
Insertion Yes No
Perpendicular Yes No
Tangent Yes No
Nearest Yes No
Parallel Yes No
Deleting an Alignment
Delete an alignment from either the drawing window or the Toolspace Prospector tab.
If other objects were created from an alignment, you cannot use Prospector to delete the alignment. You
can delete the alignment from the drawing window, but the dependant objects will also be deleted. Depending
on the object type, the objects can also be deleted from Prospector.
For example, a profile and corridor can be created from an alignment. If you right-click the alignment in
the Prospector, the Delete option is not available. If you select the alignment in the drawing window and
press Delete, the corridor and profile are cleared from the drawing window. The profile is also deleted from
Prospector because it is a child of the alignment object. The corridor object is still present in Prospector
because the alignment was only one of the objects from which it was created. You can add another alignment
to the corridor as a baseline, and then rebuild the corridor.
2 Press Delete.
■ A fixed entity cannot be deleted if it has a floating or free entity attached to it.
■ A floating entity cannot be deleted if it has either a floating or free entity attached to it.
■ Free entities are not used to define the geometry of other entities. You can delete a free entity at any
time.
1 Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
NOTE For more information about selecting alignment sub-entities, see Selecting Alignment Entities (page
1061).
2 Press Delete.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the alignment. Click Alignment tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Delete Sub-Entity
Command Description
NOTE Superelevation should be calculated before the corridor model is built along the alignment. The corridor
model is not dynamic to changes in the alignment superelevation parameters. You must rebuild the corridor to
include the updated superelevation.
1091
Transition Length Tables
A table of values you can use in the Superelevation Attainment Method formulas. You can use the table to
calculate the distances between the critical superelevation transition points for different types of roadways
as a function of curve radius and design speed. In many cases, the transition length tables provide the actual
length of transition of superelevation runoff.
■ Standard. Requires removal of adverse crown. This method is typically used on undivided, crowned
roadways and divided roadways with crowned or planar sections.
■ Planar. Does not require removal of adverse crown. This method is typically used on undivided,
planar-section roadways, such as ramps and service roads.
For more information and sample XML files, see Examples of Attainment Methods (page 1094).
In the design criteria file, each attainment method, superelevation rate table, and transition length table
have unique, defined names. Use the Calculate Superelevation - Attainment Page (page 2612) to specify the
name of the design criteria file.
{e} The full superelevation rate. This rate is determined from the su-
perelevation rate table, based on the design speed and curve ra-
dius.
{t} The value that is read from the transition length tables, based on
the design speed and the curve radius. In most cases, such as
AASHTO, this is the transition length value from Level Crown to
Full Superelevation. However, this value may not be an actual
length, but some other value, such as a transition rate from which
the length can be calculated.
{w} The normal width of the traveled way. This value is defined by
the user in the Calculate Superelevation - Lanes Page (page 2611).
The variables in the previous table are used to calculate the following:
NC Normal Crown
LC Level Crown
RC Reverse Crown
FS Full Super
This example defines an attainment method whose name is "AASHTO 2001 - Crowned Roadway" which
uses the standard adverse crown removal method of attaining superelevation. This example includes a
calculation for the transition distance needed for shoulder breakover removal (type="NStoNC").
In the following example, the Continuing section defines the Normal Crown to Full Superelevation distance
runoff length {t} (derived from the transition length tables), minus the runoff length times the normal
roadway slope {c} divided by the full superelevation rate {e}. The second formula defines the distance from
Normal Crown to the Beginning of Curve as a percentage of {t} based on the variable {p} minus {c} divided
by {e}.
superelevation rate and the as a function of design speed and curve radius. In this situation, the
value is used to derive the transition length based on the normal width of the roadway. The Transition
Length tables define the value instead of the actual transition length.
E% E% E% E% n/a
The following example shows attainment methods and formulas for two types of roadways based on the
previous table. The variable {w} is the normal roadway width from pivot point to edge-of traveled-way,
defined in the Superelevation wizard.
<SuperelevationAttainmentMethod name="Unspiraled ramp">
<TransitionStyle style="Planar"/>
<Continuing>
<TransitionFormula type="NCtoFS" formula="100*{e}*{w}/{t}"/>
<TransitionFormula type="NCtoBC" formula="{p}*{e}*{w}/{t}"/>
</Continuing>
<Opposing>
<TransitionFormula type="LCtoFS" formula="100*{e}*{w}/{t}"/>
<TransitionFormula type="LCtoBC" formula="{p}*{e}*{w}/{t}"/>
<TransitionFormula type="NCtoLC" formula="100*{c}*{w}/{t}"/>
<TransitionFormula type="LCtoRC" formula="100*{c}*{w}/{t}"/>
</Opposing>
</SuperelevationAttainmentMethod>
<SuperelevationAttainmentMethod name="Unspiraled 2 way roadway">
<TransitionStyle style="Standard"/>
<TransitionFormula type="LCtoFS" formula="100*{e}*{w}/{t}"/>
<TransitionFormula type="LCtoBC" formula="{p}*{e}*{w}/{t}"/>
<TransitionFormula type="NCtoLC" formula="100*{c}*{w}/{t}"/>
<TransitionFormula type="LCtoRC" formula="100*{c}*{w}/{t}"/>
<SuperelevationAttainmentMethod>
■ The following illustration shows an undivided road as a corridor type and a crowned cross section shape.
During superelevation, the simple crowned roadway undergoes adverse crown removal. In this illustration,
the adverse crown removal is the distance from End Normal Crown to Reverse Crown:
0%
2% PC/BC
Adverse Crown Removal
-e%
End Normal Level Reverse Begin Full
Crown Crown Crown Super
-2% -2% 0% -2% +2% -2% +e%
-e%
■ The following illustration shows an undivided road as the corridor type and the cross section shape is
planar. There is no crown, therefore no removal of adverse crown is necessary. This type of roadway
typically has a downward slope in one direction on the unsuperelevated sections. Because of this, the
distance required to achieve full superelevation varies depending on whether the superelevation continues
in the direction of the downward slope or superelevates in the direction opposite to the normal downward
slope. This example is typical of ramps, one-way traffic roads, and some service roads.
Runoff Length (L R)
L R * (C/e)
C Superelevation
opposes the normal
e roadway slope
C
B
C
e
A
C
A B C A B C B
A
Runoff Length (L R)
A
Superelevation
e continues the normal
B roadway slope
e
L R* (C/e)
C
A
A B C B
C
■ The following illustration shows a divided road as the corridor type and the cross section shape is planar.
The roadway undergoes adverse crown removal during superelevation:
Level Crown
Reverse Crown
■ The following illustration shows a divided road as the corridor type and a crowned cross section shape
on each side. The roadway undergoes adverse crown removal during superelevation:
Normal Crown
Level Crown
Reverse Crown
■ Store the design criteria in the superelevation curve manager for review or editing after data is calculated
NOTE The options on the wizard pages can vary depending on the type of roadway section you select. You must
complete the wizard or end the command to continue work in the drawing.
NOTE The first time you use the Calculate/Edit Superelevation command on an alignment that contains no
superelevation data, a superelevation curve is calculated for each curve (circular arc) in the alignment. A task
dialog is displayed with the following options:
■ Calculate Superelevation Now - choose this option to launch the Superelevation Calculation Wizard.
■ Open The Superelevation Curve Manager - choose this option to open the Superelevation Curve
Manager, where you can view curve data.
After the initial superelevation calculation, the Calculate/Edit Superelevation command automatically
displays the Superelevation Curve Manager.
NOTE In the list box specify the highside as Left Edge, Level, or Right Edge.
4 Click Next.
5 On the Calculate Superelevation - Lanes page, specify the number of lanes. Clear the Symmetric Roadway
check box if necessary and specify the number of lanes for the left and right sides.
NOTE If you select '1' for the number of lanes, the lanes that are displayed in the Superelevation Tabular
Editor (Panorama) (page 2606) are the outside lanes. Any labels, expressions, or other references for the inside
lanes do not return a value in the tabular editor. To display values for the inside lanes in the tabular editor,
select '2' for the number of lanes.
6 Enter the Normal Lane Width and Normal Lane Slope for each side of the road.
7 Click Next.
8 On the Calculate Superelevation - Shoulder Control page, specify the Shoulder Slope Treatment. The
options in the list for Shoulder Slope Treatment can vary depending on the roadway type.
11 Click Next.
NOTE In the list, choose Superelevation Rate By Formula in situations where you want to calculate the
superelevation rate based on a formula rather than a pre-defined table. In the out-of-box criteria files that
Civil 3D provides, there is a simple formula based on AASHTO standards that will calculate the
superelevation for a given radius and design speed. You can edit this formula to meet the requirements
of local agencies that may vary from AASHTO.
■ Attainment Method
■ Curve Smoothing. To apply curve smoothing select the check box and enter the smoothing value.
■ Automatically Resolve Overlap. If you select this option all overlap conditions on the entire alignment
are resolved.
■ Ignore - imports all data that matches up with a curve but does not import data that does not match.
■ Accept - imports all data and forces the detection of curves based on where the BFS and EFS station values
fall.
If you choose Ignore or Accept, the event viewer displays the stations that did not get imported.
Overlap is not automatically resolved on the imported data.
After you import the data you can use the Superelevation Curve Manager to view the curve data and make
edits using the Superelevation Tabular Editor and Superelevation Views.
IMPORTANT The columns in the CSV file must be in the following order:
■ Curve number
■ Station
■ Curve length
For successful import, each cell must contain a value. If a parameter does not have an associated value, enter
zero.
NOTE The first time you use the Calculate/Edit Superelevation command on an alignment that contains no
superelevation data, a superelevation curve is calculated for each curve (circular arc) in the alignment. A task
dialog is displayed with the following options:
■ Calculate Superelevation Now - choose this option to launch the Superelevation Calculation wizard.
■ Open The Superelevation Curve Manager - choose this option to open the Superelevation Curve
Manager, where you can view curve data.
After the initial superelevation calculation, the Calculate/Edit Superelevation command automatically
displays the Superelevation Curve Manager.
3 In the task dialog box, select Open The Superelevation Curve Manager.
7 In the Select File To Import dialog box, navigate to the appropriate file. Click Open.
NOTE If there is existing superelevation data, you receive a warning that existing data will be overwritten.
8 Click OK. The Superelevation Tabular Editor is populated with descriptions and values for each region.
NOTE When you are working in the Superelevation Curve Manager dialog box or the Superelevation Tabular
Editor, the curve you select is highlighted in the drawing.
■ Navigate and view the superelevation calculation status and criteria for each curve
■ Receive graphical feedback and navigate to locations in the drawing related to superelevation curves
■ View information for transition in and out regions for each curve
■ View and edit the superelevation criteria that was used to generate superelevation data for curves that
have calculated superelevation
NOTE When you are working in the Superelevation Curve Manager dialog box or the Superelevation Tabular
Editor, the curve you select is highlighted in the drawing.
■ Open The Superelevation Curve Manager - choose this option to open the Superelevation Curve
Manager, where you can view curve data.
After the initial superelevation calculation, the Calculate/Edit Superelevation command automatically
displays the Superelevation Curve Manager.
4 In the Superelevation Curve Manager dialog box, use the Previous and Next buttons to navigate through
each curve in the alignment, or select a curve from the list. The selected curve is highlighted in the
drawing.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Open The Superelevation Curve Manager - choose this option to open the Superelevation Curve
Manager, where you can view curve data.
After the initial superelevation calculation, the Calculate/Edit Superelevation command automatically
displays the Superelevation Curve Manager.
3 In the task dialog box, click Open The Superelevation Curve Manager.
5 In the drawing, select the starting entity and the ending entity for the superelevation curve group.
The user-defined curve is displayed in the Superelevation Curve Manager dialog box and the status is
“Not Calculated”.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Open The Superelevation Curve Manager - choose this option to open the Superelevation Curve
Manager, where you can view curve data.
After the initial superelevation calculation, the Calculate/Edit Superelevation command automatically
displays the Superelevation Curve Manager.
3 In the Superelevation Curve Manager, expand the Superelevation Criteria node and make necessary
changes.
The Superelevation Status changes to Out of Date.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the Superelevation View collection ➤ Edit Feature Settings.
3 Click Apply to accept the changes and continue working in the dialog box or click OK to accept the
changes and close the dialog box.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
■ In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Superelevation View Styles collection. Right-click ➤ New.
■ In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Superelevation View Styles collection. Right-click an existing
style ➤ Copy or Edit.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
On the Settings tab, Superelevation View collection ➤ Superelevation View Styles ➤ right-click <style
name> New, Edit, Copy, or Delete
Object Shortcut Menu
1 In the drawing, click any grid or axis line of the superelevation view you want to edit.
3 Review or change properties on the tabs in the Superelevation View Properties dialog box.
On the Prospector tab, expand the Alignments collection. Expand Centerline Alignment ➤ expand
Superelevation Views ➤ right-click Superelevation ➤ Properties
Object Shortcut Menu
NOTE You must calculate superelevation before you create a superelevation view. For more information, see
Calculating Superelevation Data Using the Wizard (page 1098).
2 In the Create Superelevation View dialog box, enter a view name, station range, and the display options
for the lanes.
3 Click OK.
5 Click the superelevation view to enable the grips. Hover over a grip to view a menu of the editing
options.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Categorize the incoming and outgoing superelevation data for each curve
■ Categorize superelevation regions and critical points within incoming and outgoing curve areas
■ Receive graphical feedback and navigate to locations in the drawing related to the selected regions and
critical points
NOTE The first time you use the Calculate/Edit Superelevation command on an alignment that contains no
superelevation data, a superelevation curve is calculated for each curve (circular arc) in the alignment. A task
dialog is displayed with the following options:
■ Calculate Superelevation Now - choose this option to launch the Superelevation Calculation Wizard.
■ Open The Superelevation Curve Manager - choose this option to open the Superelevation Curve
Manager, where you can view curve data.
After the initial superelevation calculation, the Calculate/Edit Superelevation command automatically
displays the Superelevation Curve Manager.
■ If you have previously calculated superelevation, choose Open The Superelevation Curve Manager
and click Tabular Editor.
4 In the Superelevation Curve column, click to expand the tree view. The transition regions and
superelevation parameters are displayed.
5 Add a critical station by clicking the or right-click an item in the tree view ➤ Add Station.
6 The Superelevation Tabular Editor temporarily closes and you are prompted to pick a station on the
alignment.
The Manual Station field is added.
NOTE In situations where an overlap occurs, a warning symbol is displayed in the Overlap column. Click
for options to automatically resolve the overlap or ignore the overlap.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE The first time you use the Calculate/Edit Superelevation command on an alignment that contains no
superelevation data, a superelevation curve is calculated for each curve (circular arc) in the alignment. A task
dialog is displayed with the following options:
■ Calculate Superelevation Now - choose this option to launch the Superelevation Calculation Wizard.
■ Open The Superelevation Curve Manager - choose this option to open the Superelevation Curve
Manager, where you can view curve data.
After the initial superelevation calculation, the Calculate/Edit Superelevation command automatically
displays the Superelevation Curve Manager.
5 In the Superelevation Tabular Editor, right-click a curve ➤ Add Station. In the drawing the curve is
highlighted and at the command line you are prompted to pick a station.
A Transition In Region is created.
6 Expand the Transition In Region ➤ right-click Manual Station ➤ Assign Critical Station and select the
critical station or enter a station name.
8 Expand the Transition Out Region ➤ right-click Manual Station ➤ Assign Critical Station and select
the critical station.
10 In the Overlap column a warning symbol indicates an overlap situation. When you click ,you are
prompted with a task dialog box where you can choose to automatically resolve the overlap or ignore
it.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE Superelevation data such as slopes and transition lengths are not updated when a curve radius or design
speed is changed because those changes make superelevation data invalid. In those situations a warning is displayed
and the curve is displayed as “out of date” in the Superelevation Curve Manager. Click Recalculate to recalculate
superelevation.
Command Description
Understanding Profiles
There are several types of profiles: surface profiles, layout profiles, superimposed profiles, quick profiles, and
corridor profiles.
■ A surface profile—often called an existing ground (EG) profile—is extracted from a surface, showing the
changes in elevation along a particular route.
■ A layout profile, by contrast, is a designed object that shows the proposed elevation changes to be
constructed. The layout profile—often called a design profile or finished grade (FG) profile—is typically
used for a roadway or other graded site. For a road, the layout profile can include slopes and curves that
are designed for safe driving at a particular speed.
■ A superimposed profile is a profile of an alignment superimposed onto profile views of different alignments.
These profiles are always dynamic and update when changes are made in the originating profile/alignment.
■ A quick profile is a temporary object that shows the elevations along any existing line or series of selected
points.
■ A corridor profile is created from a corridor feature line, such as an edge of pavement. This profile is
displayed on the profile view of the baseline alignment from which it is derived.
Layout profiles use two types of curves: crest curves and sag curves. Crest curves are placed on hilltops or
wherever the grade changes to a lesser value. There are three types of crest curves: a positive to negative
grade transition, positive to positive, and negative to negative:
1113
Sample Crest Curves
Sag curves are placed in valleys or wherever the grade changes to a greater value. There are three types of
sag curves: a negative to positive grade transition, negative to negative, and positive to positive:
An offset profile is another type of profile commonly used in road design. While the road centerline provides
the main horizontal alignment, various lines offset from the centerline mark other linear features, such as
You typically use a profile view to display several profiles along a proposed route for a road, pipe, fence, or
a similar structure. Use profile views to compare elevations of several surfaces or design profiles along the
alignment.
Within a profile view, you can superimpose the profile of another alignment. For example, in the profile
view for a road, you can superimpose the profile of a culvert that occupies the same corridor. By superimposing
a profile, you can analyze culvert elevations in relation to the same alignment stations used for the road
surfaces.
A profile view can include projected objects (page 2780) from the drawing that you want to see in relation to
a profile. See Adding Projected Objects to a Profile View (page 1219) for more information.
If you design a road, pipeline, or a similar structure across the landscape, and you want to compare the
feasibility of several possible routes, a profile view of each route can help with the comparison.
AutoCAD Civil 3D allows profiles to split to fit within a specified profile view height and displayed in either
single or multiple profile views. See Working with Profile Views (page 1206) for more information.
If one or more profiles exist in the current drawing, expand the Profiles collection in Toolspace on the
Prospector tab. The Profiles collection displays the names of all profiles associated with a particular horizontal
alignment, as well as a tabular list of the profiles.
Right-click an individual profile name to do any of the following:
■ Refresh the display of the Profile Views collection in the Prospector tab
Expand the Profile Views collection to display and edit the styles and command settings that are available
for profile views.
Profile View Label Styles Profile Labels and Label Styles (page 1127)
Profile Properties Open the Profile Properties Dialog Box (page 2423) for the se-
lected profile.
Edit Profile Style Open the Profile Style Dialog Box (page 2426).
Edit Profile Geometry Open the Profile Layout Tools (page 2419).
Superimposed Options Open the Superimpose Profile Options Dialog Box (page 2443).
Edit Labels Open the Label Set Dialog Box (page 2206)
Inquiry Open the Inquiry Tool Dialog Box (page 2760) with a Profile
inquiry selected
Profile View Properties Open the Profile View Properties Dialog Box (page 2427).
Edit Profile View Style Open the Profile View Style Dialog Box (page 2435).
Inquiry Open the Inquiry Tool Dialog Box (page 2760) with a
Profile inquiry selected.
Profile Properties
When you create a profile, you set the properties, including its name, style, station range, and labeling.
Use the Profile Properties Dialog Box (page 2423) to review or edit the name and other information for an
existing profile. The three tabs correspond to general types of properties: information, profile data, and
design criteria.
See also:
Profile Settings
You can review and edit the default style and name format settings for profiles and profile commands.
Settings are handled in a standard way throughout AutoCAD Civil 3D, and accessed in Toolspace on the
Settings tab. Control settings at three levels: the drawing, the feature, and the command. For more
information, see Understanding Settings (page 77).
On the Settings tab, use the Profile collection shortcut menu to establish default settings for all profiles. At
this level, you can either change profile-specific settings or override the drawing ambient settings.
Use the Profile Commands collection under the Profile collection to change settings for a specific command.
At this level, you can either change settings for profile commands or override the settings at the profile
feature level.
NOTE Overrides to the drawing ambient settings at the Profile collection level and the Profile Command collection
level affect only the specified level. The drawing level settings are not changed. For more information, see The
Commands Collections (Settings Tree) (page 114).
This section describes only the default styles and name format settings for profile commands. It does not
cover the drawing ambient settings, even though these settings are displayed in the Edit Feature Settings
dialog box. For more information about the drawing ambient settings, see Specifying Drawing Settings (page
79).
For more information about profile view settings, see Profile View Settings (page 1121).
■ In the Profile collection, open the Commands folder, right-click the command for which you want
to change settings. Click Edit Command Settings.
In the Edit Feature (or Command) Settings dialog box, profile feature-level settings are marked with
2 Expand the default styles and default name format to see the current settings.
3 In the Value column, click the entry you want to change. A small Browse button appears on the right
side of the cell.
4 Click the Browse button to open a dialog box where you can modify the value.
5 In the Edit Feature (or Command) Settings dialog box, click OK.
NOTE Overrides to the drawing ambient settings at the Profile View collection level and the Profile View Command
collection level affect only the specified level. The drawing level settings are not changed. For more information,
see The Commands Collections (Settings Tree) (page 114).
This section describes only the default styles and name format settings for profile view commands. It does
not cover the drawing ambient settings, even though these settings are displayed in the Edit Feature Settings
dialog box. For more information about the drawing ambient settings, see Specifying Drawing Settings (page
79).
For more information about profile settings, see Profile Settings (page 1120).
■ In the Profile View collection, open the Commands folder, right-click the command for which you
want to change settings. Click Edit Command Settings.
In the Edit Feature (or Command) Settings dialog box, profile view feature-level settings are marked
2 Expand the default styles and default name format to see the current settings.
3 In the Value column, click the entry you want to change. A small Browse button is displayed on the
right side of the cell.
4 Click the Browse button to open a dialog box where you can modify the value.
5 In the Edit Feature (or Command) Settings dialog box, click OK.
Profile Styles
You can use styles to control profile appearance in model, profile, and section views.
Use the Toolspace Settings tree to manage profile styles. All objects have an object style collection on the
Settings tab that you can use to create, edit, copy, and delete the styles for that object. For more information,
see The Object Style Collection (Settings Tree) (page 111).
To examine the properties of an existing style, follow the procedure for Creating and Editing Profile Styles
(page 1122).
A profile object can reference two style types:
■ Profile Style. This style controls the visibility of profile components and their rendering in both 2 and
3 dimensions.
■ Profile Label Style. This style controls the appearance and content of labels for stations, lines, curves,
and geometry points along the profile. For more information, see Profile Labels and Label Styles (page
1127).
■ Information. Specify the style name and description. See also Information Tab (Style Dialog Box) (page
2017).
■ Design. Specify the tessellation distance to control the accuracy of rendering profile curves in 3D view.
■ Markers. Specify the markers for locations on layout profiles such as PVI points, pass-through points,
and profile start and end.
■ Display. Specify the display attributes of profile components, including visibility, layer, color, linetype,
line weight, linetype scale, and plot style. See also Display Tab (Style Dialog Box) (page 2017).
■ Summary. Provides a concise display of the style properties. See also Summary Tab (Style Dialog Box)
(page 2020).
See also:
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Profile Styles collection. Right-click and click New.
2 In the Profile Style dialog box (page 2426), specify the name of the style and other settings as required.
3 Click OK.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Profile Styles collection. Identify the style you want to
copy as a basis for the new style.
3 In the Profile Style dialog box (page 2426), change the name of the style and other settings as required.
4 Click OK.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Profile Styles collection. Identify the style you want to
edit.
3 In the Profile Style dialog box (page 2426), change settings as required.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Profile Properties drop-down ➤ Edit Profile
Style
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Profile Properties drop-down ➤ Profile
Properties .
2 In the Profile Properties dialog box, on the Information tab (page 2423), select a style from the Object
Style list.
3 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Profile Properties drop-down ➤ Profile Properties
■ Profile View Style. This style controls the format of the graph on which the profiles are displayed, as well
as the title and annotations on the axes. For more information, see Creating and Editing Profile View
Styles (page 1125).
■ Label Style. This style controls the format of two types of manually placed labels along the profile: station
elevation and depth (elevation difference and/or grade between any two points). For more information,
see Profile Labels and Label Styles (page 1127).
■ Projection Style. This multipurpose style controls the appearance of objects projected into profile views
or section views.
■ Shape Style. This multipurpose style controls the appearance of hatching for cut and fill areas between
surfaces and profiles.
■ Information. Specify style name and description. See also Information Tab (Style Dialog Box) (page 2017).
■ Title Annotation. Specify content and appearance of titles for the overall profile view and individual axes
■ Horizontal Axes. Specify ticks, tick justification, tick and grid spacing, and annotation of the horizontal
axes
■ Vertical Axes. Specify ticks, tick justification, tick and grid spacing, and annotation of the vertical axes
■ Display. Specify display attributes for profile view components, including visibility, layer, color, linetype,
line weight, linetype scale, and plot style. See also Display Tab (Style Dialog Box) (page 2017).
■ Summary. Provides a concise display of the style properties. See also Summary Tab (Style Dialog Box)
(page 2020).
Before editing a style to change its properties, remember that any changes you make apply to all profile
views that use the style. To change the style of some profile views but not all, consider creating a separate
style.
See also:
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Profile View Styles collection. Right-click and click New.
2 In the Profile View Style dialog box (page 2435), specify the name of the style and other settings as required.
3 Click OK.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Profile View Styles collection. Identify the style you want
to copy as a basis for the new style.
3 In the Profile View Style dialog box (page 2435), change the name of the style and other settings as
required.
4 Click OK.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Profile View Styles collection. Identify the style you want
to edit.
3 In the Profile View Style dialog box (page 2435), change settings as required.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
See also:
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the General ➤ Multipurpose Styles collection. Right-click
Projection Styles and click New.
2 In the Projection Styles dialog box (page 2023), specify the name of the style and other settings as required.
3 Click OK.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the General ➤ Multipurpose Styles collection. Identify the
style you want to copy as a basis for the new style.
3 In the Projection Styles dialog box (page 2023), change the name of the style and other settings as required.
4 Click OK.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the General ➤ Multipurpose Styles collection. Identify the
style you want to edit.
3 In the Projection Styles dialog box (page 2023), change settings as required.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click a projected object. Click Projected Object tab ➤ Modify Projected Object panel ➤ Projection Properties
drop-down ➤ Edit Style
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Create: Settings tab, expand General ➤ Multipurpose Styles ➤ right-click Projection Styles ➤ New
Copy: Settings tab, expand General ➤ Multipurpose Styles ➤ Projection Styles ➤ right-click <style
name> ➤ Copy
Edit: Settings tab, expand General ➤ Multipurpose Styles ➤ Projection Styles ➤ right-click <style name>
➤ Edit
Command Line
EditProjectionStyle
Profile labels
When you create a layout profile, you can automatically label it using label styles you specify in the Create
Profile - Draw New dialog box (page 2394). For other types of profiles, add labels using the Edit Labels command.
■ Grade breaks
■ Lines
■ Sag curves
■ Crest curves
You can save profile label styles as a profile label set and apply the labels to a profile as a group.
See also:
■ Depth, showing the elevation difference between two points, and other data such as slope and distance.
■ Projection, showing the station and elevation of a projected object (page 2780).
See also:
■ Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Add/Edit Profile Labels . Select
a profile in the drawing to open the Label Set dialog box.
■ Click the profile line you want to edit. Right-click and click Edit Labels
2 In the Label Set Dialog Box (page 2206), review the existing labels and their attributes. Do any of the
following:
■ Add or remove labels of any type.
■ Stagger labels to avoid label collisions. For more information, see Staggering Profile and Section
Labels (page 1707).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Add/Edit Profile Labels
Menu
Click Profiles menu ➤ Add Profile View Labels ➤ Add/Edit Profile Labels.
Object Shortcut Menu
When you need a new profile label style, it is usually easiest to find an existing style that is similar to what
you need, then copy it and make the required changes. You can also create a style and change whatever
default values are not suitable.
You can group several profile label styles into a label set. Apply the label set to a profile as a single setting.
An existing label set can be edited or copied to create a new one.
Label spacing is an important design consideration for surface profiles. Wherever they cross uneven surfaces,
this type of profile can have many short tangents and closely spaced grade breaks. As a result, labels for these
features can overlap and become unreadable when they require more horizontal space than is available. To
address this condition for one label type, the Label Set Dialog Box (page 2206)provides a weeding setting that
suppresses grade break labels within a specified distance of each other.
Profile label styles are created and edited using the Label Style Composer. For more information, see Label
Style Composer Dialog Box (page 2180).
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Profile, Label Styles, and specific label style collection.
2 Right-click the name of the label style you want to copy, and click Copy. The Label Style Composer
dialog box (page 2180) is displayed.
3 Change settings as required to produce the style you want. Specify a name for the style.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Profile and Label Styles collections. Click a specific label
style collection.
2 Right-click the name of the label style you want to edit and click Edit. The Label Style Composer dialog
box (page 2180) is displayed.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Profile and Label Styles collections.
2 Right-click the collection of label style you want to create and click New. The Label Style Composer
dialog box (page 2180) is displayed.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Profile, Label Styles, Label Sets collections.
■ To copy an existing set as a starting point, right-click the set and click Copy
3 In the Label Set dialog box (page 2206), on the Information tab, specify a name for the label set. Optionally,
specify a description.
4 On the Labels tab (page 2207), specify the individual labels to include in the set, and settings for each
one.
■ Station Elevation labels show the elevation and station value at a specified point anywhere in the profile
view.
■ Depth labels show the elevation difference between two specified points, and other selected data, such
as slope and distance.
■ Projection labels show data about a projected object (page 2780), such as the elevation and station value.
Create and edit the styles for profile view labels using the Label Style Composer.
If a profile view contains projected objects, label styles for these objects are managed as feature settings for
the profile view object.
See also:
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Profile View, Label Styles, and specific label style collections.
2 Right-click the name of the label style you want to copy. Click Copy. The Label Style Composer dialog
box (page 2180) is displayed.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Profile View, Label Styles, and specific label style collections.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Profile View, Label Styles, and specific label style collections.
2 Right-click the name of the label style you want to create, and click New. The Label Style Composer
dialog box (page 2180) is displayed.
TIP To label points on a feature line projected into a profile view, use Station Elevation or Depth labels.
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Profile View ➤ Station Elevation
.
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Profile View ➤ Depth .
2 Click any two locations. Labels are displayed, showing the depths, grade, or other data about the
relationship between the two points.
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Profile View ➤ Add Profile View Labels
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Profile View ➤ Station Elevation
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Profile View ➤ Depth
Click Projected Object tab ➤ Labels panel ➤ Add Object Labels
Menu
Click Profiles menu ➤ Add Profile View Labels ➤ Add Profile View Labels
Click Profiles menu ➤ Add Profile View Labels ➤ Station Elevation
Click Profiles menu ➤ Add Profile View Labels ➤ Depth
Command Line
AddProfileViewLabels
AddProfileViewDepthLbl
AddProfileViewStaElevLbl
AddProjectionLabel
Pipe Data Location and key dimensions of pipe network parts, off-
set, elevation, direction
When you need a new data band style, it is usually easiest to find an existing style that is similar to what
you need, then copy it and make the required changes. You can also create one and change whatever default
values are not suitable.
The notes in this section describe what is unique to profile data bands. For a general overview of labels, see
Understanding Labels (page 1646).
See also:
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Profile View, Band Styles, and specific band style collections.
2 Right-click the name of the band style you want to copy. Click Copy. The Profile Data Band Style Dialog
Box (page 2414) is displayed.
3 On the Information tab (page 2414), enter a new name for the style. Optionally, add a description.
4 On the Band Detail tab (page 2414), compose the band title and modify any settings for the band title
and layout.
5 On the right side of the Band Details tab, select a label location. Click Compose Label to define the
property fields annotated by the band. For more information, see Layout Tab (Label Style Composer
Dialog Box) (page 2183).
6 On the Display tab (page 2416), modify any display settings for the band components.
7 On the Summary tab, review all settings for the style. Make any corrections.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Profile View, Band Styles, and specific band style collections.
2 Right-click the name of the band style you want to change. Click Edit. The Profile Data Band Style
dialog box (page 2414) is displayed.
3 Review the settings on the Information tab (page 2414), the Band Details tab (page 2414), and the Display
tab (page 2416). Make any changes.
4 On the Summary tab, review all settings for the style. Make any corrections.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand Profile View and Band Styles.
3 On the Information tab (page 2414), enter a new name for the style. Optionally, add a description.
4 On the Band Details tab (page 2414), compose the band title and modify any settings for the band title
and layout.
5 On the right side of the Band Details tab, select a label location and click Compose Label to define the
property fields annotated by the band. For more information, see Layout Tab (Label Style Composer
Dialog Box) (page 2183).
6 On the Display tab (page 2416), modify any display settings for the band components.
7 On the Summary tab, review all settings for the style. Make any corrections.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
See also:
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand Profile View and Band Styles.
2 Right-click the Band Sets folder, and click New. The Band Set dialog box (page 2389) is displayed.
3 On the Information tab (page 2389), enter a name and optional description for the band style set.
4 On the Bands tab (page 2390), in the List Of Bands area, specify the Location where you want to place
the bands.
5 In the Band Type field, select the type of band to add to the set.
6 In the Select Band Style field, select an existing band style or use one of the style buttons to create a
style.
9 Use the three band position buttons on the right side of the List of Bands to put the data bands in the
desired order and to delete unwanted bands.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Profile View, Band Styles, and Band Sets collections.
2 Right-click the name of the set you want to edit. Click Edit. The Band Set dialog box (page 2389) is
displayed.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Profile View, Band Styles, and Band Sets collections.
2 Right-click the name of the set you want to copy. Click Copy. The Band Set dialog box (page 2389) is
displayed.
3 On the Information tab (page 2389), enter a new name. Optionally, enter a description.
Information
The profile name, description, and object style. By changing the style here you can instantly change the
displayed appearance for the profile.
Profile Data
Each profile is one of the following types: surface, layout, superimposed, or corridor.
A surface profile can be either static or dynamic. The elevation data in a dynamic profile changes to respond
to changes in the parent alignment or surface. A static profile displays the elevation data at a particular time,
and does not respond to changes in other objects.
Design Criteria
A design criteria file (page 2773) and design check set (page 2772) can be applied to the profile if the parent
alignment has a design speed applied. The criteria-based design feature enables you to verify that a profile
design meets the minimum standards required by your local agency. These options are available if the Use
Criteria-Based Design check box is selected.
See also:
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Alignments collection, identify the parent alignment
for the profile you want to work with, and then expand the Profiles collection for that alignment.
2 Select the profile, right-click, and then click Properties. The Profile Properties (page 2423) dialog box
opens.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Profile Properties drop-down ➤ Profile Properties
Information tab
View or edit the profile view name, description, and object style.
Stations tab
Set the range of stations displayed in the profile view.
Elevations tab
Set the range of elevations displayed in the profile view. If the profile view is split, you can use this tab to
specify the stations and styles for the split segments. See The Profile View Object (page 1115) for more
information about split profile views.
Profiles tab
Specify which profiles to display in the profile view and whether the view is clipped to the extents of a
specific profile. You can edit the description, change the update mode (dynamic or static), layer, and style
The sample profile view before splitting shows an elevation range of 60 feet.
The split profile view is more compact, with an elevation range of about 38 feet. At the split station, a separate
elevation scale is provided for each part of the profile view.
Bands tab
Specify which data bands to include in the profile view and whether they are placed along the top or bottom
of the grid. The following data band types are available for displaying profile data: profile data, vertical
geometry, horizontal geometry, superelevation for a specified horizontal alignment, sectional data, and pipe
network data.
Hatch tab
Specify the style and location of hatching between surfaces, which shows cut regions and fill regions in the
vertical design.
Projection tab
Specify objects from plan view to project into the profile view, including AutoCAD objects and AutoCAD
Civil 3D objects. You can also specify the object display styles, elevation options, and elevation values. The
Projections tab is displayed only when projected objects (page 2780) exist in the profile view.
See also:
2 Click Profile View tab ➤ Modify View panel ➤ Profile View Properties drop-down ➤ Profile View
Properties .
3 In the Profile View Properties (page 2427) dialog box, set properties, and then click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile view. Click Profile View tab ➤ Modify View panel ➤ Profile View Properties
Prospector tab: Alignments ➤ <alignment name> ➤ Profile Views ➤ <profile view name> ➤ Properties
Object Shortcut Menu
See also:
NOTE Design criteria files can be created only with the Design Criteria Editor dialog box. Existing design criteria
data cannot be used unless it is input to an XML file using the Design Criteria Editor dialog box.
See also:
NOTE When you add curve design checks to a design check set, you must specify whether to apply it to sag
curves, crest curves, or both.
Design checks differ from label expressions in that they always return a true or false value. For example, you
can create a design check to issue a notification if a tangent is shorter than a specified minimum tangent
length.
See also:
See also:
Creating Profiles
Using profiles, you can view changes in elevation along a horizontal alignment.
In addition to the centerline profile, you can create offset profiles for features such as road edges or ditches.
Create a profile view to see one or more of the profiles associated with a horizontal alignment. Use the profile
view of a surface as a guide for creating the layout profile of a designed surface, such as a road. On a profile
view, you can also superimpose the profile of a different horizontal alignment that is in the same area.
To work most effectively with profiles, learn how to combine the create, copy, edit, and superimpose
operations to get the profiles you need for terrain analysis and design.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Profile drop-down ➤ Create Surface Profile .
2 In the Create Profile from Surface dialog box (page 2396), in the Alignment list, select the horizontal
alignment to use for the profile.
3 Ensure that the surface you want to use is listed in the Select Surfaces list. If multiple surfaces are listed,
use Ctrl + click to select one or more of them from which to create profiles.
4 Optionally, in the Station Range area, specify start and end stations if you want the profile to cover a
distance less than the entire length of the horizontal alignment.
6 Optionally, select the Sample Offsets check box. Enter the offset distances in the field if you want the
profile to include one or more offsets from the centerline of the horizontal alignment. Use positive
numbers to specify right offsets, and negative numbers for left offsets. Use commas to separate the
values. Example: 20,-20,30,40
7 Optionally, click Add to add the offset profiles to the Profile List.
8 In the table, review the data for each profile line and make corrections as required. Optionally, add or
delete profiles in the Profile list.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Profile drop-down ➤ Create Surface Profile
Menu
■ Use the Draw Tangents command to specify points of vertical intersection (PVIs) for a series of straight
tangents. Later you can add free curves (page 1184) with specific parameters between the tangents.
■ Use the Draw Tangents With Curves command to specify PVIs for the tangents, automatically creating
curves between the tangents using the parameters you specify in the Vertical Curve Settings Dialog Box
(page 2444).
■ Use the constraint-based profile design commands (page 1156) to create a profile one sub-entity at a time.
When you are prompted for point locations, you can use the Transparent Commands (page 1767) to specify
points in the profile.
To create a more detailed design using a specific parameter or other constraints, or to create curves without
first creating tangents, use the constraint-based tools included on the Profile Layout Tools toolbar. For more
information, see Adding Tangents and Curves to a Layout Profile (page 1156).
The criteria-based design (page 2771) feature allows a layout profile to be validated against local design standards.
You can select a design criteria file (page 2773) and/or a design check set (page 2772) using either the Create Profile
- Draw New dialog box (page 2394) when you create the layout profile, or the Design Criteria tab (page 2424) of
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Profile drop-down ➤ Profile Creation Tools .
3 In the Create Profile - Draw New dialog box (page 2394), enter a unique Name for the profile. Optionally,
enter a Description.
■ Profile Layer
NOTE If you do not want to apply design criteria to the profile, proceed to step 6.
5 If you would like to associate design standards with the profile, on the Design Criteria tab (page 2395),
select the Use Criteria-Based Design check box.
For more information, see Criteria-Based Profile Design (page 1139).
On the Design Criteria tab, specify the following settings:
■ Use Design Criteria File
Select this check box to associate a design criteria file with the profile. The default design criteria
file location and the Default Criteria properties becomes available when you select the check box.
7 Use the commands on the Profile Layout Tools (page 2419) toolbar to draw the profile.
You can use any of the following methods to lay out a profile:
■ Use the Draw Tangents command to specify points of vertical intersection (PVIs) for the tangents,
and then add free curves (page 1184) with specific parameters between the tangents.
■ Use the Draw Tangents With Curves command to specify PVIs for the tangents, automatically
creating curves between the tangents using the parameters you specify in the Vertical Curve Settings
dialog box (page 2444).
■ Use various Profile Layout Tools (page 2419) to create separate entities and then join them together.
TIP When you are prompted for point locations, you can use the Transparent Commands (page 1767) to specify
points in the profile.
When you use Use the Draw Tangents With Curves command, curves are created to comply with
the values in one of the following places:
■ If the profile has design criteria (page 935) applied to it, the minimum K value for the current design
speed is applied to the curve. If no solution can be found with the minimum K value, the curve is
not drawn.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Profile drop-down ➤ Create Profile From File .
2 Browse to the text file (a text file uses the .txt extension).
3 Click the text file and click Open. If the file is correctly formatted, it is read into the system and the
Create Profile - Draw New dialog box is displayed. For more information about correct file formatting,
see Format Requirements of Profile Files (page 1148).
4 In the Create Profile - Draw New dialog box (page 2394), review and revise any settings you want to change
for the profile name, description, and styles.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Profile drop-down ➤ Profile Creation Tools
Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Profile drop-down ➤ Create Profile From File
Menu
TIP You can use transparent commands when you are prompted to specify direction, radius, or length, or use
station offsets to specify any points. For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
See also:
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Profile drop-down ➤ Profile Creation Tools .
2 In the Create Profile-Layout (page 1977) dialog box, enter creation information.
3 On the Profile Layout Tools toolbar, click Draw Tangents Without Curves.
5 Continue to specify points. Press Enter to end the command, or click another command from the Profile
Layout Tools toolbar.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Profile drop-down ➤ Profile Creation Tools .
3 On the Profile Layout Tools toolbar, click Draw Tangents With Curves.
5 Continue to specify points. Press Enter to end the command or select another command from the
Profile Layout Tools.
Curves are created to comply with the values in one of the following places:
■ If the profile has design criteria (page 935) applied to it, the minimum radius for the current design
speed is applied to the curve. If no solution can be found with the minimum radius value, the curve
is not drawn.
■ If the profile does not have design criteria applied to it, the default value specified in the curve and
spiral settings is applied to the curve. For more information, see Curve and Spiral Settings (page 930).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Profile drop-down ➤ Profile Creation Tools
Menu
1 On the Settings tab in Toolspace, expand the Profiles collection and then expand the Commands
collection.
3 In the Edit Command Settings-CreateProfileLayout dialog box, expand the Profile Creation property.
NOTE To save these command settings at the drawing level, on the Ambient Setting tab (page 84)select
Yes in the value column for Save Command Changes To Settings.
To change the curve settings when you draw a profile using the tangent with curves method
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Profile drop-down ➤ Profile Creation Tools .
2 In the Create Profile - Draw New (page 2394) dialog box, enter creation information.
4 In the Vertical Curve Settings (page 2444) dialog box, enter curves values.
NOTE The curve type you specify in the Vertical Curve Settings dialog box is used in all curve commands
on the Profile Layout Tools toolbar.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Profile drop-down ➤ Profile Creation Tools
Menu
Curve Settings
Dialog Box
Vertical Curve Settings Dialog Box (page 2444)
1 Station. An element required for each line. Plus characters (+) cannot be used.
3 Curve length. An optional element. However it cannot be used on the first or last line of the file. All
vertical curves must be parabolic.
In this example, only the third and fifth PVIs include curves (lengths of 40.0 and 35.0). Use these other
format requirements for each profile file:
■ The first and last lines must not contain curve information.
■ The first line must provide the station and elevation for the first station.
■ The last item must be the elevation for the last station.
To superimpose a profile
1 Identify the source profile you want to superimpose. Ensure that each profile appears in a profile view.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Profile drop-down ➤ Create Superimposed Profile .
5 Optionally, on the Limits tab (page 2443), specify a limited range of stations to superimpose.
NOTE If you want the superimposed profile station range to remain fixed, then select the Select Start and
Select End checkboxes and the superimposed profile will not react to changes in the station range of the
source alignment. If the Select Start and Select End boxes are not selected, then the start and end of the
superimposed profile locks to the start and end of the source alignment. If the start or end of the source
alignment changes, the superimposed profile updates dynamically.
6 Optionally, on the Accuracy tab (page 2444), specify different mid-ordinate distances for curve tessellation.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Profile drop-down ➤ Create Superimposed Profile
Menu
Profiles derived from corridor feature lines are static and are displayed with a in the Profile collection in
the Prospector tree.
For information on creating a corridor profile, see Exporting Corridor Feature Lines as Profiles (page 1530).
See also:
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, ensure that the correct project folder is identified on the Data
Shortcuts node.
6 Change the source parent alignment by selecting an alignment from the Source Alignment list.
NOTE To name the profile, click its default name. Enter a new name, or use the name template. For more
information, see Name Template Dialog Box (page 2022).
9 Click to select a layer. For more information about layers, see Object Layer Dialog Box (page 2221).
NOTE If you do not select a layer, the profile is placed on the current layer.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, in Master View, expand the Projects <project name> ➤ Alignments
collection.
4 In the Create Profile Reference dialog box, change the source of the reference by selecting a source in
the Source Profile list.
5 Change the source parent alignment by selecting an alignment from the Source Alignment list.
NOTE To name the profile, click its default name. Enter a new name, or use the name template. For more
information, see Name Template Dialog Box (page 2022).
8 Click to select a layer. For more information about layers, see Object Layer Dialog Box (page 2221).
NOTE If you do not select a layer, the profile is placed on the current layer.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Right-Click Menu (for data shortcut project)
Prospector tab: Data Shortcuts ➤ Alignments ➤ <alignment name> ➤ Profiles ➤ Create Reference
Toolspace Right-Click Menu (for Vault project)
Prospector tab: Projects ➤ <project name> ➤ Alignments ➤ <alignment name> Profiles ➤ Create
Reference
Command Line
CreateProfileReference
Dialog Box
Create Profile Reference (page 2452)
Copying a Profile
Copy a layout profile or a static surface profile. Use the copy to create a profile or replace an existing one.
Profile copying operations allow you to create a profile that is based on another. For example, you can create
an offset profile for a road edge or ditch that is a specific elevation below the road centerline. In this case,
you can copy the centerline profile, then change the elevation of the copy to create the offset profile.
After copying a profile, you can raise or lower the copy to create an initial line for a related profile. For
example, to place a ditch five feet lower than a centerline, copy the centerline profile and lower the copy
five feet to create a ditch profile.
To copy a profile
3 In the Profile Layout Tools dialog box (page 2419), click Copy Profile.
4 In the Copy Profile Data Dialog Box (page 2392), check the data displayed in the Source Profile Information
area to ensure that this is the correct profile to copy.
5 Click the PVI range you want to copy: either All PVIs or those within a range of stations.
6 If you clicked Station Range, specify the start and end stations.
9 To overwrite all properties of the existing profile, select Overwrite All Properties.
10 Click OK to create the copy of the profile. The copy is initially named according to the naming template,
like any new profile. You can change the name. The copy is displayed in the current profile view,
superimposed on its source profile. It also appears in the Toolspace Prospector tab, in the list of profiles
for the parent alignment.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
■ 2D or 3D lines or polylines
■ Lot lines
■ Feature lines
■ Survey figures
■ A series of points
NOTE To simplify working with quick profiles, open two viewports before you create a quick profile. Use one
viewport to display the plan view and the other viewport to display the quick profiles.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Profile drop-down ➤ Quick Profile .
On the command line, you are prompted to pick an object.
2 In the drawing, select a line, polyline, lot line, feature line, or survey figure.
3 In the Create Quick Profiles dialog box, select the surfaces you want to sample, and the profile and
profile view styles.
4 Optionally, if you selected a 3D object, select Draw 3D Entity Profile to display elevation data for the
object in the quick profile and a profile style for the 3D object elevation data.
5 Click OK.
6 In the drawing window, click a location for the lower left corner (origin) of the profile view grid.
The quick profile is drawn.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Profile drop-down ➤ Quick Profile .
On the command line, you are prompted to pick an object.
2 Enter p (points).
5 Press Enter.
6 In the Create Quick Profiles dialog box, select the surfaces you want to sample, and the profile and
profile view styles.
7 In the drawing window, click a location for the lower left corner (origin) of the profile view grid.
The quick profile is drawn.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Profile drop-down ➤ Quick Profile
Menu
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Profile drop-down ➤ Create Best Fit Profile .
2 In the Create Best Fit Profile Dialog Box (page 2393), under Input Data, specify the type of data from
which to create the best fit alignment.
NOTE If you selected COGO Points or Surface Profile as the Input Type, you can use a drop-down list to
select a point group or surface profile.
4 In the drawing, select the objects from which you want to create the best fit profile. Press Enter.
NOTE You may only select objects that are the input type you selected in Step 2. You may not select multiple
types of objects.
5 If you wish to create the best fit profile between two paths of objects, next to Path 2, click .
NOTE If you selected Surface Profile as the Input Type, you cannot use a second path.
6 In the drawing, select the objects from which you want to create the best fit profile. Press Enter.
7 If you chose AutoCAD 3D Polylines, Surface Profile, or Feature Lines as the Input Data, click Weeding
Options.
8 In the Best Fit Profile Weeding Options Dialog Box (page 2392), specify whether to either weed extraneous
vertices or insert intermediate vertices. Click OK.
NOTE This value is an estimate. For best results, specify a value that is slightly greater than the largest
known radius in the input data.
■ Curve Type—Specifies the type of curve (either Parabola or Circular Arc) to create during the best
fit regression.
■ Profile Style
■ Layer
11 Use the Show Report check box to specify whether to show the Best Fit Profile Report Vista (page 2391),
which the results of the regression that was used to create the best fit profile.
12 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Profile drop-down ➤ Create Best Fit Profile
Double-click Create Best Fit Profile.
Command Line
C3D_BestFitProfile
Dialog Box
Create Best Fit Profile Dialog Box (page 2393)
Best Fit Profile Weeding Options Dialog Box (page 2392)
Best Fit Profile Report Vista (page 2391)
NOTE When drawing or editing constraint-based profile entities, ensure that the Profile Layout Tools (page 2419)
The three entity type describes the way an entity is defined and edited:
■ Fixed entities are defined by specifying parameters, such as pass-through points, tangent slope, and curve
radius. The entities are fixed in position and must be edited directly. Except for its length, the geometry
of a fixed entity is not dependent on adjacent entities. If an adjacent entity is edited, the geometry of
the fixed entity is not affected.
■ Free entities are defined by attachment to two entities, before and after. The free entity always remains
tangent to the two adjacent entities, and its geometry is defined by these adjacent entities.
displayed on the toolbar. The Draw Fixed Tangent By Two Points command is displayed by default.
After clicking a button on the Profile Layout Tools toolbar, follow the command prompts on the command
line.
TIP You can use transparent commands to specify a station and elevation when you are prompted to select a
point. For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Profile Layout Tools (page 2419) toolbar, click Draw Fixed Tangent By Two Points.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
NOTE Each best fit profile entity is drawn to the vertical scale set in the profile view style. To create an accurate
best fit entity, set the profile view style Vertical Exaggeration value to 1.000 to match the horizontal scale of the
profile view. For more information, see Creating and Editing Profile View Styles (page 1125).
See also:
To add a fixed vertical tangent by best fit from AutoCAD Civil 3D points
1 Set the profile view style Vertical Exaggeration value to 1.0000. See Creating and Editing Profile View
Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the Profile Layout Tools (page 2419) toolbar, click Fixed Tangent - Best Fit.
4 In the Tangent by Best Fit dialog box (page 2225), select From COGO Points.
5 In plan view, select two or more points. Enter G to select a point group or N to enter points by number.
As the points are selected in plan view, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
tangent is displayed in the profile view.
7 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data vista (page 2226) to modify the regression points.
■ Click to create the tangent and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the tangent and close the Regression Data vista.
1 Set the profile view style Vertical Exaggeration value to 1.0000. See Creating and Editing Profile View
Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the Profile Layout Tools (page 2419) toolbar, click Fixed Tangent - Best Fit.
4 In the Tangent by Best Fit dialog box (page 2225), select By Clicking On The Screen.
As you select points in the drawing window, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
tangent is displayed in real time.
7 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data vista (page 2226) to modify the regression points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the tangent and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the tangent and close the Regression Data vista.
1 Set the profile view style Vertical Exaggeration value to 1.0000. See Creating and Editing Profile View
Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the Profile Layout Tools (page 2419) toolbar, click Fixed Tangent - Best Fit.
4 In the Tangent by Best Fit dialog box (page 2225), select By Clicking On The Screen. Specify the tessellation
and mid-ordinate tolerance settings.
NOTE You can select several types of entities listed on the command line.
6 If you selected a profile entity, specify the starting and ending station on the Specify Station Range
dialog box (page 2228).
9 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data vista (page 2226) to modify the regression points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the tangent and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the tangent and close the Regression Data vista.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Profile Layout Tools toolbar, click Float Tangent (Through Point).
3 Specify the fixed or floating curve to which you want to attach the tangent.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
See also:
To add a floating vertical tangent by best fit from AutoCAD Civil 3D points
1 Set the profile view style Vertical Exaggeration value to 1.0000. See Creating and Editing Profile View
Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the Profile Layout Tools (page 2419) toolbar, click Float Tangent - Best Fit.
4 Select an existing fixed or floating profile entity to which to attach the best fit tangent.
5 In the Tangent by Best Fit dialog box (page 2225), select From COGO Points.
6 In plan view, select two or more points. Enter G to select a point group or N to enter points by number.
As the points are selected in plan view, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
tangent is displayed in the profile view.
8 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data vista (page 2226) to modify the regression points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the tangent and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the tangent and close the Regression Data vista.
1 Set the profile view style Vertical Exaggeration value to 1.0000. See Creating and Editing Profile View
Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
4 Select an existing fixed or floating profile entity to which to attach the best fit tangent.
5 In the Tangent by Best Fit dialog box (page 2225), select By Clicking On The Screen.
As you select points in the drawing window, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
tangent is displayed in real time.
8 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data vista (page 2226) to modify the regression points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the tangent and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the tangent and close the Regression Data vista.
1 Set the profile view style Vertical Exaggeration value to 1.0000. See Creating and Editing Profile View
Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the Profile Layout Tools (page 2419) toolbar, click Float Tangent - Best Fit.
4 Select an existing fixed or floating profile entity to which to attach the best fit tangent.
5 In the Tangent by Best Fit dialog box (page 2225), select From Entities. Specify the tessellation and
mid-ordinate tolerance settings.
NOTE You can select several types of entities listed on the command line.
7 If you selected a profile entity, specify the starting and ending station on the Specify Station Range
dialog box (page 2228).
8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to select other entities from which to create the best fit tangent.
As you select entities in the drawing window, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
tangent is displayed in real time.
10 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data vista (page 2226) to modify the regression points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the tangent and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the tangent and close the Regression Data vista.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 Specify the first fixed or floating curve to which you want to attach the tangent.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Free Tangent
Dialog Box
Profile Layout Tools (page 2419)
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
Menu
on the toolbar. The Fixed Vertical Curve (Three Points) command is displayed by default.
After clicking a button on the Profile Layout Tools toolbar, follow the command prompts on the command
line.
TIP You can use transparent commands to specify a station and elevation when you are prompted to select a
point. For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
Curve Types
■ Taylor Pohlman Parabolic. Most vertical curves in road design are symmetrical parabolic curves for a
good reason. The parabolic curve is the natural vertical curve followed by any projectile. A properly
designed symmetrical parabola minimizes the inertial forces on a vehicle traveling along the curve.
Highway curves are often designed with reference to curve tables, such as those provided by the American
Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (A.A.S.H.T.O. (page 2767)). These tables can be
used only with symmetrical parabolic curves.
Quadratic parabolas are preferred in vertical designs as they have a constant rate of change of grade along
the curve. Quadratic parabolas are a very close approximation to circular curves at flat grades and are
usually used in vertical design. This quality makes them very easy to stake out. Substituting these values
we get the quadratic parabola equation for vertical curve as:
■ L is the horizontal length of the curve that is fit between these two tangents
Since the rate of grade change is constant over the length of the curve, the parabolic curve parameter
can be expressed as:
■ Circular. These curves are easier to lay out and construct. This type is often used for the design of railways
or roads that are traveled at low speeds.
■ Asymmetrical parabolic. These curves are the least common type. This curve type consists of two different
parabolic curves that meet at the midpoint of the vertical curve.
K-value formula
Rider Comfort
This design method for sag curves provides a minimum curve length. The curve must be long enough so
that people in a standard vehicle do not experience excessive inertial force as they travel through the curve
at the designed speed.
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Profile Layout Tools toolbar, click Fixed Vertical Curve (Three Points).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Profile Layout Tools toolbar, click Fixed Vertical Curve (Two Points, Parameter).
■ To specify a minimum radius for the curve parabola, enter R (radius), and then specify the radius.
NOTE If the profile was created using the criteria-based design (page 2771) feature, a default value is
displayed on the command line. Minimum K values at given design speeds are specified in the design
criteria file (page 2773). Minimum curve length and radius are calculated from the minimum K value at the
current design speed.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Profile Layout Tools toolbar, click Fixed Vertical Curve (Entity End, Through Point).
3 Select the fixed or floating entity to which you want to attach the curve.
The nearest end point of the entity is the start point of the curve. The grade of the start point is the
start grade for the curve.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
To add a fixed vertical curve with two points and the start point grade
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Profile Layout Tools toolbar, click Fixed Vertical Curve (Two Points, Grade At Start Point).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Adding a Fixed Vertical Curve with Two Points and an End Point Grade
Add a fixed vertical curve by specifying two pass-through points and a grade at the end point.
To add a fixed vertical curve with two points and the end-point grade
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Profile Layout Tools toolbar, click Fixed Vertical Curve (Two Points, Grade At End Point).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
See also:
To add a fixed vertical curve by best fit from AutoCAD Civil 3D points
1 Set the profile view style Vertical Exaggeration value to 1.0000. See Creating and Editing Profile View
Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the Profile Layout Tools (page 2419) toolbar, click Fixed Vertical Curve - Best Fit.
4 In the Curve by Best Fit dialog box (page 2225), select From COGO Points.
5 In plan view, select three or more points. Enter G to select a point group or N to enter points by number.
As the points are selected in plan view, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed curve
is displayed in the profile view.
7 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data vista (page 2226) to modify the regression points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the curve and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the curve and close the Regression Data vista.
1 Set the profile view style Vertical Exaggeration value to 1.0000. See Creating and Editing Profile View
Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the Profile Layout Tools (page 2419) toolbar, click Fixed Vertical Curve - Best Fit.
As you select points in the drawing window, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
curve is displayed in real time.
7 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data vista (page 2226) to modify the regression points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the curve and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the curve and close the Regression Data vista.
1 Set the profile view style Vertical Exaggeration value to 1.0000. See Creating and Editing Profile View
Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the Profile Layout Tools (page 2419) toolbar, click Fixed Vertical Curve - Best Fit.
4 In the Curve by Best Fit dialog box (page 2225), select By Clicking On The Screen. Specify the tessellation
and mid-ordinate tolerance settings.
NOTE You can select several types of entities listed on the command line.
6 If you selected a profile entity, specify the starting and ending station on the Specify Station Range
dialog box (page 2228).
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to select other entities from which to create the best fit curve.
As you select entities in the drawing window, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
curve is displayed in real time.
9 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data vista (page 2226) to modify the regression points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the curve and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the curve and close the Regression Data vista.
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Profile Layout Tools toolbar, click Floating Vertical Curve (Parameter, Through Point).
3 Select the fixed or floating entity to which you want to attach the curve.
■ To specify a minimum radius for the curve parabola, enter R (radius), and then specify the radius.
NOTE If the profile was created using the criteria-based design (page 2771) feature, a default value is displayed
on the command line. Minimum K values at given design speeds are specified in the design criteria file (page
2773). Minimum curve length and radius are calculated from the minimum K value at the current design speed.
6 If selected a parabola in step 5, specify whether the resulting curve should be either a crest or sag.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
See also:
To add a floating vertical curve by best fit from AutoCAD Civil 3D points
1 Set the profile view style Vertical Exaggeration value to 1.0000. See Creating and Editing Profile View
Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the Profile Layout Tools (page 2419) toolbar, click Floating Vertical Curve - Best Fit.
4 Select an existing fixed or floating profile entity to which to attach the best fit tangent.
If you select the first half of the profile entity, the best fit entity will precede the profile entity. If you
select the second half of the profile entity, the best fit entity will succeed the profile entity.
5 In the Curve by Best Fit dialog box (page 2225), select From COGO Points.
6 In plan view, select two or more points. Enter G to select a point group or N to enter points by number.
As the points are selected in plan view, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed curve
is displayed in the profile view.
8 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data vista (page 2226) to modify the regression points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the curve and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the curve and close the Regression Data vista.
1 Set the profile view style Vertical Exaggeration value to 1.0000. See Creating and Editing Profile View
Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the Profile Layout Tools (page 2419) toolbar, click Floating Vertical Curve - Best Fit.
4 Select an existing fixed or floating profile entity to which to attach the best fit tangent.
If you select the first half of the profile entity, the best fit entity will precede the profile entity. If you
select the second half of the profile entity, the best fit entity will succeed the profile entity.
5 In the Curve by Best Fit dialog box (page 2225), select By Clicking On The Screen.
8 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data vista (page 2226) to modify the regression points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the curve and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the curve and close the Regression Data vista.
1 Set the profile view style Vertical Exaggeration value to 1.0000. See Creating and Editing Profile View
Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the Profile Layout Tools (page 2419) toolbar, click Floating Vertical Curve - Best Fit.
4 Select an existing fixed or floating profile entity to which to attach the best fit tangent.
If you select the first half of the profile entity, the best fit entity will precede the profile entity. If you
select the second half of the profile entity, the best fit entity will succeed the profile entity.
5 In the Curve by Best Fit dialog box (page 2225), select By Clicking On The Screen. Specify the tessellation
and mid-ordinate tolerance settings.
NOTE You can select several types of entities listed on the command line.
7 If you selected a profile entity, specify the starting and ending station on the Specify Station Range
dialog box (page 2228).
8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to select other entities from which to create the best fit curve.
As you select entities in the drawing window, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
curve is displayed in real time.
10 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data vista (page 2226) to modify the regression points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the curve and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the curve and close the Regression Data vista.
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Profile Layout Tools toolbar, click Floating Vertical Curve (Through Point, Grade).
3 Select the fixed or floating entity to which you want to attach the curve.
5 Specify a grade.
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Profile Layout Tools toolbar, click Free Vertical Curve (Parameter).
3 Select the first fixed or floating entity to which you want to attach the curve.
4 Select the second fixed or floating entity to which you want to attach the curve.
■ K Value: Enter K
■ Radius: Enter R
NOTE If the profile was created using the criteria-based design (page 2771) feature, a default value is displayed
on the command line. Minimum K values at given design speeds are specified in the design criteria file (page
2773). Minimum curve length and radius are calculated from the minimum K value at the current design speed.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the profile view, select a location near the PVI to which you want to add a curve.
■ K Value: Enter K.
NOTE If the profile was created using the criteria-based design (page 2771) feature, a default value is displayed
on the command line. Minimum K values at a given design speed are specified in the design criteria file (page
2773). Minimum curve length and radius are calculated from the minimum K value at the current design speed.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Profile Layout Tools toolbar, click Free Asymmetrical Parabola (PVI Based).
3 In the profile view, select a location near the PVI to which you want to add a curve.
4 Specify the length of the curve before the PVI by entering a value or by selecting two points in the
drawing window.
If the first length you specify is too large for the asymmetric curve, you cannot enter the length for the
second curve. The length of the first curve must be less than the station distance between the PVI you
select and the station value of the previous PVI (or end station of the previous curve.)
5 Specify the length of the curve after the PVI by entering a value or by selecting two points in the drawing
window.
NOTE If the profile was created using the criteria-based design (page 2771) feature, a default value is displayed
on the command line. Minimum K values at given design speeds are specified in the design criteria file (page
2773). Minimum curve length and radius are calculated from the minimum K value at the current design speed.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Profile Layout Tools toolbar, click Free Circular Curve (PVI Based).
3 In the profile view, select a location near the PVI to which you want to add a curve.
■ Length: Enter L.
NOTE If the profile was created using the criteria-based design (page 2771) feature, a default value is displayed
on the command line. Minimum K values at given design speeds are specified in the design criteria file (page
2773). Minimum curve length and radius are calculated from the minimum K value at the current design speed.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
NOTE Each best fit profile entity is drawn to the vertical scale set in the profile view style. To create an accurate
best fit entity, set the profile view style Vertical Exaggeration value to 1.000 to match the horizontal scale of the
profile view. For more information, see Creating and Editing Profile View Styles (page 1125).
See also:
To add a free vertical curve by best fit from AutoCAD Civil 3D points
1 Set the profile view style Vertical Exaggeration value to 1.0000. See Creating and Editing Profile View
Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the Profile Layout Tools (page 2419) toolbar, click Free Vertical Curve - Best Fit.
4 Select an existing fixed or floating profile entity (the First Entity) from which to attach the best fit
tangent.
5 Select an existing fixed or floating profile entity (the Next Entity) to which to attach the best fit tangent.
6 In the Curve by Best Fit dialog box (page 2225), select From COGO Points.
7 In plan view, select one or more points. Enter G to select a point group or N to enter points by number.
As the points are selected in plan view, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed curve
is displayed in the profile view.
9 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data vista (page 2226) to modify the regression points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the curve and keep the Regression Data vista open.
1 Set the profile view style Vertical Exaggeration value to 1.0000. See Creating and Editing Profile View
Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the Profile Layout Tools (page 2419) toolbar, click Free Vertical Curve - Best Fit.
4 Select an existing fixed or floating profile entity (the First Entity) from which to attach the best fit curve.
5 Select an existing fixed or floating profile entity (the Next Entity) to which to attach the best fit curve.
6 In the Curve by Best Fit dialog box (page 2225), select By Clicking On The Screen.
As you select points in the drawing window, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
curve is displayed in real time.
9 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data vista (page 2226) to modify the regression points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the curve and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the curve and close the Regression Data vista.
1 Set the profile view style Vertical Exaggeration value to 1.0000. See Creating and Editing Profile View
Styles (page 1125) for more information.
2 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the Profile Layout Tools (page 2419) toolbar, click Free Vertical Curve - Best Fit.
4 Select an existing fixed or floating profile entity (the First Entity) from which to attach the best fit
tangent.
5 Select an existing fixed or floating profile entity (the Next Entity) to which to attach the best fit tangent.
6 In the Curve by Best Fit dialog box (page 2225), select By Clicking On The Screen. Specify the tessellation
and mid-ordinate tolerance settings.
NOTE You can select several types of entities listed on the command line.
9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 to select other entities from which to create the best fit curve.
As you select entities in the drawing window, an X marks each regression point and a temporary, dashed
curve is displayed in real time.
11 In the Panorama window, use the Regression Data vista (page 2226) to modify the regression points.
As you highlight a row in the Regression Data vista, the corresponding regression point in the drawing
window is highlighted in red.
■ Click to create the curve and keep the Regression Data vista open.
■ Click to create the curve and close the Regression Data vista.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Selecting either the PVI Based or Entity Based button on the Profile Layout Tools (page 2419) toolbar
has three effects:
■ Changes the data shown in the Profile Entities vista (page 2416)
■ Changes the data shown in the Profile Layout Parameters Dialog Box (page 2417)
TIP You can use transparent commands when you are prompted to specify direction, radius, or length, or use
station offsets to specify any points. For more information, see Transparent Commands (page 1767).
changing the profile at the points of vertic- Editing PVIs (page 1193)
al intersection
using grips or entering precise parameter Editing Profile Curve and Tangent Paramet-
values er Values (page 1198)
3 In the Profile Layout Tools toolbar (page 2419), click Entity Based to enable the profile entity editing
tools.
NOTE The Profile Entities vista (page 2416) displays the attributes of only the selected sub-entity.
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 In the Profile Layout Tools toolbar (page 2419), click Entity Based to enable the profile entity editing
tools.
4 In the drawing window, Ctrl+click the profile sub-entity at the beginning of the desired range.
The selected sub-entity is highlighted in the drawing, and the Profile Entities vista displays attributes
for only the selected profile sub-entity.
5 In the drawing window, Ctrl+click the profile sub-entity at the end of the desired range.
The selected range of sub-entities is highlighted in the drawing, and the Profile Entities vista displays
attributes for only the selected profile sub-entities.
6 Edit the profile sub-entities by entering specific attribute values in the Profile Entities vista.
See Editing Profile Curve and Tangent Parameter Values (page 1198) for more information.
NOTE The Profile Entities vista (page 2416) displays the attributes of only the selected sub-entities.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Editing PVIs
Manage the elevations and grades along a layout profile or static surface profile by editing the points of
vertical intersection (PVIs).
To insert a PVI
1 Click the profile. Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 Specify a point along the profile for the location of the new PVI. Specify the point either by clicking
the point or by entering ‘pse and providing a numeric value.
5 Right-click to finish.
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 To place a curve at each inserted PVI, click the desired curve type in the Insert PVIs dialog box (page
2413). Otherwise, click None. The choice made here applies to all PVIs inserted at this time.
4 Click the first Station cell to activate it. Enter station and elevation values for each PVI. Press Enter after
each value to move the cursor to the next field. To change a value after entering it in the table, click
the cell and modify the entry.
5 After all values are entered, check the table to ensure that each value is correct.
To delete a PVI
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 In Profile Layout Tools dialog box (page 2419), click Delete PVI.
3 In the profile view, click near the PVI you want to delete. The PVI is removed, and the tangents are
adjusted to connect the adjacent PVIs or endpoints.
To lock a PVI
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 In theProfile Layout Tools dialog box (page 2419), select the PVI based display option.
4 Find the PVI to lock, and optionally edit its location by changing numeric data in the table.
To unlock a PVI
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 In the Profile Layout Tools dialog box (page 2419), select the PVI based display option.
4 Click the closed lock icon in the table row for the PVI. The icon changes to an open lock state, and
additional values in the table can be edited.
TIP You can also unlock a PVI by clicking the lock icon in the profile view.
To move a PVI
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the drawing window, click near the PVI that you want to move.
4 Click the new location for the PVI. The PVI is immediately moved to the new location. The adjacent
tangents are adjusted accordingly.
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the “Raise/Lower PVI Elevations dialog box”, enter the elevation distance to raise or lower the PVIs.
A positive number raises the PVIs and a negative number lowers them.
4 Click the PVI Range you want to move: either All PVIs or those within a range of stations.
5 If you clicked Station Range, specify the start and end stations.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
■ Before it is converted, it must be attached to an unattached end point of another solved entity in the
profile.
■ After it has been converted, it may be joined to the solved profile geometry using the profile layout tools.
2 Set the profile view style vertical exaggeration to 1. For more information, see Creating and Editing
Profile View Styles (page 1125).
3 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
4 On the Profile Layout Tools (page 2419) toolbar, click Convert AutoCAD Line And Spline.
NOTE If the sub-entity you converted is hidden behind the source AutoCAD entity, use Shift+spacebar to select
it. Hover the cursor over the white AutoCAD entity. Press and hold Shift, then press the spacebar to highlight the
profile sub-entity. Click to select the profile sub-entity, then release the Shift key. Click the profile sub-entity again
to select it and continue with the command.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
NOTE You cannot delete a tangent that has a curve attached to it. Before deleting a tangent, you must first
delete the PVI and any dependent curves and tangents.
You can delete profile sub-entities either using the Profile Layout Tools dialog box (page 2419) or selecting the
sub-entity and pressing Delete.
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 In the Profile Layout Tools dialog box (page 2419), click Delete Entity.
If you do not see the button, click
2 Press Delete.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Delete Entity
entity or PVI and each column represents a parameter. Use the PVI Based and Entity Based buttons
on the Profile Layout Tools toolbar to change the type of data that is displayed on the Profile Entities vista.
In the Profile Entities vista, you can right-click a column heading to display options for customizing the
display of detail in the column views.
The purpose of Profile Entities vista is to let you quickly scroll through the entities that make up the profile.
The list displays only the entities that have been selected (page 1192) in the drawing window. When you select
a row, the details for the corresponding entity are displayed in the Profile Layout Parameters dialog box.
The Profile Layout Parameters dialog box enables you to view and change the many attributes for a single
profile sub-entity. The Profile Layout Parameters dialog box contains up to three panels. The Layout Parameters
panel, which displays the geometric parameters of the selected sub-entity, is always present. In this panel,
the Value column lists the actual value of each sub-entity Parameter. If the profile was created using the
criteria-based design (page 2771) feature, the Constraint column lists the value to which a Parameter is
constrained by the specified design criteria. Use the Value and Constraint columns together to view whether
the sub-entity parameters meet the specified design criteria. If the profile was not created using the
criteria-based design feature, the Constraint column is not available.
Two additional panels may be present on the Profile Layout Parameters dialog box if the profile has design
criteria applied to it. If the profile has a design criteria file (page 2773) associated with it, the criteria from the
file are displayed in the Design Criteria panel. If the profile has a design check set (page 2772) associated with
it, the name and contents of the design check set are displayed in the Design Checks panel.
NOTE The attributes of a curve or other profile entity that you can edit depends on the method you used to create
the entity. Generally speaking, you can edit the numeric value of a parameter if the parameter was used to define
the entity. For all other parameters, numeric values are calculated and displayed but cannot be edited.
See also:
To edit profile layout parameters using the Profile Entities vista and Profile Layout Parameters dialog box
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 In the Profile Layout Tools (page 2419), click Profile Layout Parameters and Profile Grid View.
The Profile Entities vista (page 2416) displays the attributes of the selected profile entities. The Profile
Layout Parameters dialog box (page 2417) is empty.
4 In the Profile Entities vista, select the specific PVI, entity, or sub-entity you want to analyze. The
parameters of the selected the entities are displayed in the Profile Layout Parameters dialog box. Editable
values are in black text (not shaded).
NOTE Selecting another profile causes the Profile Layout Tools dialog box, Profile Entities vista, and Profile
Layout Parameters dialog box to become active for the new profile. See Selecting Profile Sub-entities (page
1192) for more information about profile sub-entity selection.
6 Review and edit the data as required. To edit another PVI, entity sub-entity, or range, repeat Steps 5
and 6.
7 When finished, close the Profile Layout Parameters dialog box and Profile Layout Tools toolbar.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
PVI Based
Entity Based
NOTE When a grip is selected, you can use either dynamic input or the Profile Entities (page 2416) and Profile Layout
Parameters (page 2417) dialog boxes to enter precise attribute values for the grip.
1 Click a profile object in a profile view. If the profile type is static, editing grips appear on the tangents
and vertical curves. Grip behavior depends on the type of grip:
Grip Type Behavior
2 Identify the grip you want to move, then click it once. The grip changes color from cyan to red.
3 Drag the grip to its new location, and click to place it there. The grip follows your mouse pointer, within
the constraints imposed by the grip type.
NOTE When a grip is selected, you can use either dynamic input or the Profile Entities vista (page 2416) and
Profile Layout Parameters dialog box (page 2417) to enter precise attribute values for the grip.
Constraint2 column. Click in this column to edit the source regression data.
Regression data is not dynamically linked to the best fit entity. If the entity is edited, appears in both
the Regression Data and Profile Entities vistas.
NOTE You can edit only values that are available, you cannot edit unavailable (shaded) text.
■ If the floating best fit entity is synchronized with the best fit sample data, it maintains tangency when
the attachment entity is edited. The floating best fit entity geometry changes to adapt to changes to the
attachment entity, and continue to honor the regression points.
■ If the floating best fit entity is not synchronized with the best fit sample data, it behaves as a normal
floating entity. The floating best fit entity remains tangent to the attachment entity, and its geometry
will not change to honor the regression points.
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
2 On the Profile Layout Tools toolbar, click Edit Best Fit Data For All Entities.
NOTE You can also open the Regression Data vista from the Profile Entities vista. In the Constraint2 column,
click .
4 Click to apply the changes and close the Regression Data vista.
3 On the Profile Layout Tools toolbar, click Edit Best Fit Data For All Entities.
4 In the Regression Data vista, click Synchronize Entity To Best Fit Sample Data.
NOTE You can also synchronize the entity to the regression data from the Profile Entities vista. In the
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
Dialog Box
Regression Data Vista (page 2226)
Profile Entities Vista (page 2416)
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Profile Properties drop-down ➤ Profile
Properties .
2 In the Profile Properties dialog box, click the Design Criteria tab (page 2424).
NOTE To apply design criteria to a profile, there must be at least one design speed applied to the alignment
from which the profile was created.
NOTE The design criteria file that is applied to the parent alignment is used by default. A separate design
criteria file can be applied to the profile.
5 Click OK.
NOTE The entire profile design is validated when you click either Apply or OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Profile Properties drop-down ➤ Profile Properties
■ The drawing window — The warning symbol is displayed on each sub-entity that violates the design
criteria.
NOTE The size of the warning symbol does not adjust automatically. After zooming in or out, enter REGEN
to resize the warning symbols.
■ The Profile Entities vista — The warning symbol is displayed in the No. column of the sub-entity
that violates the design criteria. If a criteria in the design criteria file was violated, the warning symbol
is also displayed next to the specific criteria and parameter value that violates the design criteria.
■ The Profile Layout Parameters dialog box — If a criteria in the design criteria file was violated, the
warning symbol is displayed in the Design Criteria panel next to the Property that was violated, and in
the Layout Parameters panel next to the Parameter that was violated. If a design check was violated, the
warning symbol is displayed in the Design Checks panel next to the design check that was violated.
BEST PRACTICE The name of the design check should be similar to the formula you enter in the Design Check
field. When a design check is violated, only the design check name is displayed, and not the minimum acceptable
value. If the formula is in the design check name, it is easier to correct the violation.
NOTE If a sub-entity violates more than one criteria or design check, only one warning symbol is displayed in the
drawing. To clear the warning symbol, the sub-entity must be modified to meet all the design criteria and design
checks.
NOTE If a sub-entity violates more than one criteria or design check, only one warning symbol is displayed in the
drawing. To clear the warning symbol, the sub-entity must be modified to meet all the design criteria and design
checks.
For more information, see Correcting Profile Design Criteria Violations (page 1205).
WARNING Settings in the Options dialog box affect the overall behavior of AutoCAD Civil 3D. If you clear the
Solution Tip Drafting check box, the warning symbol for all alignment and profile objects is hidden in every
drawing that is opened on the current installation of AutoCAD Civil 3D.
WARNING If you turn off the criteria-based design feature, the profile design will not be validated against any
design standards.
You can use the warning symbols in the drawing window to view information about criteria and design
checks that have been violated. When the cursor is hovered over a warning symbol in the drawing window,
a tooltip displays information about the violation.
■ If a design criteria was violated, the tooltip displays the criteria that was violated, as well as the minimum
value required to meet the criteria.
■ If a design check was violated, the tooltip displays the name and formula of the design check that was
violated.
NOTE If a sub-entity violates more than one criteria or design check, only one warning symbol is displayed in the
drawing. To clear the warning symbol, the sub-entity must be modified to meet all the design criteria and design
checks.
The warning symbol disappears when the sub-entity meets the design criteria.
NOTE If a sub-entity violates more than one criteria or design check, only one warning symbol is displayed
on the sub-entity. To clear the warning symbol, the sub-entity must be modified to meet all the design
criteria.
1 Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor .
3 In the Profile Entities vista, click the row that contains the warning symbol in the No. column.
The sub-entity parameters are displayed in the Profile Layout Parameters dialog box.
4 In the Profile Layout Parameters dialog box, locate the warning symbol in either of the following
panels:
■ Layout Parameters panel — In the Value column, enter a numeric value that meets the value specified
in the Constraints column.
■ Design Checks panel — Notice the design check that has been violated. Modify the profile design
to meet the parameters specified in the design check.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the profile. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify Profile panel ➤ Geometry Editor
Menu
■ A single profile view is typically used to design and edit a profile. It displays the specified station range
of the corresponding alignment in a single profile view grid.
■ Stacked profile views are a collection of related profiles drawn in separate, vertically arranged profile
views. Typically a centerline profile is contained in one profile view, and its left and right offsets are
drawn in profile views that are placed above and below the centerline profile view.
A profile can be split within either a single or multiple profile view. This allows a profile view to display a
profile elevation range that is greater than the specified height of the profile view.
See also:
See also:
1 Click Home tab ➤ Profile & Section Views panel ➤ Profile View drop-down ➤ Create Profile View
.
NOTE Click Create Profile View at any time to accept the current settings.
NOTE The Show Offset Profiles By Vertically Stacking Profile Views is only applicable when creating stacked
profile views.
■ Station Range page (page 2398) - Specify the starting and ending stations.
■ Profile View Height page (page 2398) - Specify the profile view height and any split profile options,
including split stations and styles for individual stations.
■ Profile Display Options page (page 2400) Specify the profiles to be drawn as well as their styles, labels,
and layers.
■ Pipe Network Display page (page 2402) - Specify the pipe networks or parts to be drawn.
■ Data Bands page (page 2402) - Specify the data band sets and their properties.
■ Hatch Options page (page 2403) - Specify how to mark areas between two profiles on the profile view,
such as where terrain must be cut or filled to create the design profile.
4 In the drawing window, click a location for the lower left corner (origin) of the profile view grid. The
profile view is drawn.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Profile & Section Views panel ➤ Profile View drop-down ➤ Create Profile View
Menu
1 Click Home tab ➤ Profile & Section Views panel ➤ Profile View drop-down ➤ Create Multiple Profile
Views .
2 In the Create Multiple Profile Views wizard (page 2397), navigate through the pages by using the links at
the left or clicking Back or Next.
NOTE Click Create Profile Views at any time to accept the current settings.
NOTE The option Show Offset Profiles By Vertically Stacking Profile Views is applicable only when creating
stacked profile views.
■ Station Range page (page 2398) - Specify the starting and ending stations.
■ Profile View Height page (page 2398) - Specify the profile view height and any split profile options,
including split stations and styles for individual stations.
■ Profile Display Options page (page 2400) Specify the profiles to be drawn as well as their styles, labels,
and layers.
■ Pipe Network Display page (page 2402) - Specify the pipe networks or parts to be drawn.
■ Data Bands page (page 2402) - Specify the data band sets and their properties.
■ Hatch Options page (page 2403) - Specify how to mark areas between two profiles on the profile view,
such as where terrain must be cut or filled to create the design profile.
■ Multiple Plot Options page (page 2404) - Specify how the multiple profile views will be laid out.
4 In the drawing window, click a location for the origin of the profile view grid. The profile view is drawn.
NOTE The profile view grid origin is determined by the Start Corner setting on the Multiple Plot Options
page.
Click Home tab ➤ Profile & Section Views panel ➤ Profile View drop-down ➤ Create Multiple Profile Views
Menu
1 Click Home tab ➤ Profile & Section Views panel ➤ Profile View drop-down ➤ Create Profile View
.
OR
Click Home tab ➤ Profile & Section Views panel ➤ Profile View drop-down ➤ Create Multiple Profile
Views .
3 On the General page, specify the alignment name and profile view name and description.
NOTE Click Create Profile Views at any time to accept the current settings.
4 On the Station Range page (page 2398), specify the starting and ending stations.
5 On the Profile View Height page (page 2398), specify the profile view height and any split profile options,
including split stations and styles for individual stations.
NOTE If the profile elevation values are relatively consistent, under the Profile View Datum By option, select
Mean Elevation. The Mean Elevation option vertically centers the profile line in the profile view, creating
equal space above and below the profile line.
6 On the Stacked Profile page, specify the number of stacked profile views, gap between the views, and
the profile view style to use in the top, middle, and bottom views.
NOTE The top and bottom profile views can use separate styles. All profile views between the top and bottom
must be created with the same style.
7 On the Profile Display Options page (page 2400), select a profile view from the Select Stacked View To
Specify Options For list.
8 In the Specify Profile Display Options table, specify the profiles to be drawn as well as their styles, labels,
and layers.
10 On the Pipe Network Display page (page 2402), specify which pipe networks or parts will be drawn in
each stacked profile view. Follow the workflow described in steps 7 through 9 to specify the options
for each stacked profile view.
11 On the Data Bands page (page 2402), specify the data band sets and their properties.
The data bands will appear at the top or bottom of the stack.
12 For multiple, stacked profile views, on the Multiple Plot Options page (page 2404), specify how the multiple
profile views will be laid out.
14 In the drawing window, click a location for the origin of the stack of profile views.
NOTE The profile view grid origin is determined by the Start Corner setting on the Multiple Plot Options
page.
Quick Reference
Menu
■ Use the Profile View Properties dialog box (page 2427) to specify the name, profile view style, profile extents,
included profile lines, data bands, and hatch options.
■ Use the Profile View Style dialog box (page 2435) to specify the annotation, vertical exaggeration, profile
direction, grid format, and displayed elements.
You can change properties for an individual profile view. However, any changes in the Profile View Style
dialog box affect all profile views that use that style. Therefore, if you must change one or more style items,
create a style that can be applied where required.
Typical editing activities:
■ Add or delete data bands that display data such as stations, elevations, and horizontal geometry.
In the Profile View Properties dialog box, use the Draw check box to turn existing profiles on or off in the
profile view. To delete a profile from the drawing, select it in the profile view and press the Delete key.
If you want to superimpose a profile from another alignment on a profile view, see Creating a Superimposed
Profile (page 1149).
2 Click Profile tab ➤ Modify View panel ➤ Profile View Properties drop-down ➤ Profile View Properties
3 In the Profile View Properties Dialog Box (page 2427), click the Profiles tab (page 2429).
4 In the tables of profiles, select the Draw check box for each profile you want to add to the profile view.
5 Click OK.
Click profile view. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify View panel ➤ Profile View Properties drop-down ➤ Profile
View Properties
Object Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Sites ➤ <Site name> ➤ Alignments ➤ <Alignment name> ➤ Profile Views, right-click
<profile view name> ➤ Properties
Dialog Box
Profile View Properties (page 2427)
See also:
2 Click Profile tab ➤ Modify View panel ➤ Profile View Properties drop-down ➤ Profile View Properties
3 In the Profile View Properties dialog box, on the Information tab (page 2428), select a style from the
Object Style list.
4 Click OK.
2 Click Profile tab ➤ Modify View panel ➤ Profile View Properties drop-down ➤ Profile View Properties
3 In the Profile View Properties Dialog Box (page 2427), click the Elevations tab (page 2428).
NOTE The start, intermediate, and end segments can each use a different style.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click profile view. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify View panel ➤ Profile View Properties drop-down ➤ Profile
View Properties
Object Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Sites ➤ <Site name> ➤ Alignments ➤ <Alignment name> ➤ Profile Views, right-click
<profile view name> ➤ Properties
Command Line
EditGraphProperties
Dialog Box
Profile View Properties (page 2427)
NOTE The individual geometry points to label can be specified with the Profile Data band type.
See also:
2 Click Profile tab ➤ Modify View panel ➤ Profile View Properties drop-down ➤ Profile View Properties
3 In the Profile View Properties Dialog Box (page 2427), click the Bands tab (page 2430).
4 In the List Of Bands area, select either the bottom or the top of the profile view as the location for the
new data band.
6 If you want to add more bands to the profile view, repeat steps 3 and 4. The List Of Bands is arranged
in the same order as the actual bands on the profile view.
7 Use the three buttons on the right side of the List Of Bands to arrange the bands as desired. You can
move selected data bands up or down in the stack, and delete unwanted bands .
8 Optionally, click Save As Band Set to save this arrangement of data bands as a set for reuse with other
profile views. For more information, see Profile View Band Sets (page 1135).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click profile view. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify View panel ➤ Profile View Properties drop-down ➤ Profile
View Properties
Object Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Sites ➤ <Site name> ➤ Alignments ➤ <Alignment name> ➤ Profile Views, right-click
<profile view name> ➤ Properties
Command Line
EditGraphProperties
Dialog Box
Profile View Properties (page 2427)
See also:
2 Click Profile tab ➤ Modify View panel ➤ Profile View Properties drop-down ➤ Profile View Properties
3 In the Profile View Properties Dialog Box (page 2427), click the Hatch tab (page 2432).
4 Use the buttons on the left side to add hatch areas for Cut Area, Fill Area, Multiple Boundaries, or From
Criteria.
5 For each hatch area, review the profiles specified for upper and lower boundaries. If necessary, select
different profiles from the list beside each boundary.
6 Optionally, review the shape styles assigned to the hatch area types, and make any desired changes.
7 Click OK. The hatch areas are displayed in the profile view.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click profile view. Click Profile tab ➤ Modify View panel ➤ Profile View Properties drop-down ➤ Profile
View Properties
Object Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Sites ➤ <Site name> ➤ Alignments ➤ <Alignment name> ➤ Profile Views, right-click
<profile view name> ➤ Properties
Command Line
EditGraphProperties
Dialog Box
Profile View Properties (page 2427)
Center No No No
Quadrant No No No
Using AutoCAD Object Snaps with Profiles and Profile Views | 1217
Osnap Dynamic Profile Static Profiles Profile Views
Extension No No No
Insertion No No No
Perpendicu- No No No
lar
Tangent No No No
Apparent No No No
Intersec-
tion
Parallel No No No
TIP Before projecting an object into a view, ensure that the elevation of the object has been specified. If the object
has a default elevation of 0, the view will be vertically expanded to include the 0 elevation if the Elevation Range
of the view is set to Automatic Height. For more information, see To project objects to a profile view (page 1219).
Pipe networks have a separate procedure for projection into profile views. See Displaying Pipe Networks in
Profile Views (page 1364) and Displaying Pipe Networks in Section Views (page 1366).
■ Survey figures
Grip editing the vertices of feature lines or 3D polylines in a profile view also changes the elevations of the
source objects in plan view. This behavior is useful for editing feature lines in relation to profiles. Grips
appear on 3D polylines only if the elevation is set to Use Object.
Grip editing point or block objects in profile or section views does not affect the elevations of source objects,
but it does break the dynamic link to the source object elevation. The Elevation Options setting changes to
Manual. At any time you can change this setting to Use Object, or to match a specific surface or profile.
The object and label styles of a projected object are independent of the styles used by the source object in
plan view. You can edit the styles of a projected object without affecting the source object.
See also:
1 Click Home tab ➤ Profile & Section Views panel ➤ Profile View drop-down ➤ Project Objects To Profile
View .
2 Click one or more objects in the drawing that you want to project. Right-click or press Enter after all
objects are selected.
3 Click the profile view in which you want the objects to appear.
4 In the Project Objects to Profile View dialog box (page 2442), verify the settings such as Elevation Options
and Label Style, then click OK.
5 If the elevation of one or more objects is outside of a manually specified profile view elevation range,
a task dialog box is displayed. Click one of the following:
■ Do Not Add Objects Outside Of Limits: Does not add objects that are outside the range of the profile
view.
■ Add All Objects: Adds all objects, regardless of their elevation. Some objects may not be visible in
the profile view, but they are still associated with the profile view and are visible on the Profile View
Properties dialog box Projections tab.
NOTE You can make the object visible by changing the elevation property of the profile view. On the
Profile View Properties dialog box, Elevations tab, change User Specified Height to Automatic Height.
Click Home tab ➤ Profile & Section Views panel ➤ Profile View drop-down ➤ Project Objects To Profile
View
Command Line
ProjectObjectsToProf
Dialog Box
Projections Tab (Profile View Properties Dialog Box) (page 2433)
Project Objects to Profile View Dialog Box (page 2442)
1 In the drawing window, in a profile view or section view, select the object for which to change the
style. Right-click. Click the menu option for the object type: Edit Point Style, Edit Feature Line Style,
Edit Survey Figure Style, or Edit Projection Style.
OR
In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand General ➤ Multipurpose Styles ➤ Projection Styles. Right-click
the style you want to change. Click Edit.
NOTE Multipurpose Projection Styles are used for AutoCAD objects. Each Projection Style includes settings
for all types of AutoCAD objects that can be projected. Ensure that you have the correct object selected in
the drop-down list when you are making the edits to the style.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the projected object. Click Projected Object tab ➤ Modify Projected Object panel ➤ Projection
Properties drop-down ➤ Edit Style
Object Shortcut Menu
■ Click the projected object. Click Projected Object tab ➤ Modify Projected Object panel ➤ Remove From
View .
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click the projected object. Click Projected Object tab ➤ Modify Projected Object panel ➤ Remove From
View
Command Line
RemoveFromProfileView
2 Create sheets (page 1910). On the first page of the wizard, select All Layouts In The Current Drawing.
NOTE Creating the sheets in the same drawing as the model space objects makes it simpler to display
projected objects on those sheets. The object projection feature requires the source object to be in the same
drawing as the profile view, so if you create the layouts (and thus the profile views) in separate drawings, the
objects to be projected would also have to be copied to those drawings before they could be projected.
3 Project (page 1219) the desired objects onto the profile views created by the Create Sheets command.
Command Description
■ Sections. Terrain elevations that cut across surfaces, including corridor surfaces, which are associated with a specified
sample line (page 2782) group. Elevations are sampled at each of the sample line XY vertices and also at locations where
the vertical plane defined by the sample line intersects with surface edges.
■ Section Views. For each sample line, views displaying some or all of the sections sampled at that sample line. This
graphical view has both horizontal limits based on the length of corresponding sample line and vertical values based
on the minimum and maximum elevations from the set of sections it is displaying.
■ Section Sheets. You can generate production-quality section layouts for plotting. For more information, see To create
layouts for section plotting (page 1934).
NOTE Before creating sections, a surface and one or more horizontal alignments must exist.
For more information, see Creating and Editing Sample Lines and Sections (page 1246).
Understanding Sections
You can use sections to examine existing and proposed surface elevations sampled across an alignment at
defined station intervals.
In AutoCAD Civil 3D, section data is defined and displayed using sample lines, sections, and section views,
all of which are managed through a collection called a sample line group. An alignment can have more than
one sample line group associated with it, each having a unique set of sample lines and sections.
For overview information about AutoCAD Civil 3D objects, see Understanding Objects and Styles (page 63).
1225
Sample Line Object
Use a sample line as a linear plan object representing the direction along which sections are cut for a set of
specified surfaces.
Sample lines are linear objects that are used to cut sections across an alignment. Sample lines have their
own styles and can be labeled (for example, SL-29). A set of sample lines makes up a named collection called
a sample line group. A sample line group centrally manages the display styles and label styles for a number
of sample lines, sections, section views, and mass haul lines and mass haul views.
Sample line groups related to an alignment are displayed in the Toolspace Prospector tree under that
alignment.
Section Object
Use a section object to examine surface elevations along a sample line (across an alignment). In AutoCAD
Civil 3D, each section is an object.
Sections cut across a linear feature, to a specified distance to the left and right. Typically, sections are cut at
given stations along a horizontal alignment.
A section is an object containing elevation data along a sample line. Each surface that intersects the vertical
plane defined by the sample line results in a section object. The type of section object is defined by the
elevation source, such as the TIN surface. Sections can also be extracted from corridor surfaces, corridors,
and pipe networks along a sample line.
When you create sample lines along an alignment, the section objects are also created for a specified set of
existing or proposed surfaces. The default set of surfaces to sample at each sample line are specified through
a sample line group. To plot the sections in the drawing, create individual section views or multiple section
views.
■ Vertices or grade break points, where a grade line ends and another line might begin
■ Line segments, which detail the grade of the surface between two grade break points
For example, if a section is sampled from a TIN surface, then the grade breaks are extracted at the point
where the (vertical plane defined by) sample lines intersect with the TIN edges. Elevation between these two
line segments is linearly interpolated and joined with a straight line (assuming that the sample line between
these two points is also a straight line).
Sections, like alignments and profiles, support label sets. Label sets enable you to save and apply an unlimited
number of different types of labels.
If one or more sample line groups have been added to the current drawing, expand the Sample Line Groups
collection to view the names of the sample line groups. A tabular list of the sample line groups is displayed
in the item view at the bottom of the Prospector tab.
Select Sample Lines of an individual sample line group to display the sample line group’s named sample
lines in the item view at the bottom of the Prospector tab. Similarly, expand the subordinate sections, section
views, mass haul lines and mass haul views collections to display in the item view the individual sections,
section views, mass haul lines and mass haul views. For more information, see The Toolspace Item View
(page 99).
Right-click a named sample line group to:
■ Surface sections
■ Corridor sections
When each type of section is selected, a tabular list of individual sections of that type is displayed in the
item view at the bottom of the Prospector tab. For more information, see The Toolspace Item View (page
99).
For more information about the contents of this shortcut menu, see “The Object Collection (Settings Tree)”.
Expand the Sample Line collection to display and edit the styles and command settings that are available
for sample lines.
Sample line settings Sample Line, Section, and Section View Settings
(page 1231)
Sample line styles Sample Line, Section, and Section View Styles (page
1234)
Sample line label styles Using Sample Line Labels (page 1241)
For more information about the contents of this shortcut menu, see The Object Collection (Settings Tree)
(page 110).
For more information about the contents of this shortcut menu, see The Object Collection (Settings Tree)
(page 110).
Section view styles Creating and Editing Section View Styles (page 1237)
Section view label styles Using Section View Labels (page 1243)
Band styles Creating and Editing Section View Styles (page 1237)
Sheet styles Creating and Editing Section View Styles (page 1237)
Group plot styles Creating and Editing Section View Styles (page 1237)
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the Sample Line collection. Click Edit Feature Settings.
In the Edit Feature Setting - Sample Line dialog box, note that appears next to the settings for default
styles and default name format, marking them as specific to sample lines.
2 Expand the default styles and the default name format to see the current settings.
5 In the Edit Feature Settings - Sample Line dialog box, click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Section Settings
You can change the default style and name format settings for sections.
To establish default settings for all sections, in the Settings tree, right-click the Section collection.
The default styles and name format settings for sections are described in this topic. Drawing ambient settings
are described in Specifying Drawing Settings (page 79).
NOTE Overrides to the drawing ambient settings at the Section collection level affect only the specified level. The
drawing level settings are not changed. For more information, see The Commands Collections (Settings Tree)
(page 114).
1 In Toolspace, in the Settings tree, right-click the Section collection. Click Edit Feature Settings.
In the Edit Feature Settings - Section dialog box, note that appears next to the settings for default
styles and the default name format, marking them as specific to sections.
2 Expand the default styles and the default name format to see the current settings.
NOTE Overrides to the drawing ambient settings at the Section View collection level and the Command collection
level affect only the specified level. The drawing level settings are not changed. For more information, see The
Commands Collections (Settings Tree) (page 114).
1 In Toolspace, in the Settings tree, right-click the Section View collection. Click Edit Feature Settings.
In the Edit Feature Settings - Section View dialog box, note that appears next to the settings for the
default styles and the default name format, marking them as specific to section views.
2 Expand the default styles and the default name format to see the current settings.
5 In the Edit Feature Settings - Section View dialog box, click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
NOTE Before editing an existing sample line style to change its properties, remember that any changes you make
will apply to all sample lines that use the style. If you want to change the style of some sample lines but not all,
consider creating a new style.
1 In Toolspace, in the Settings tree, expand the Sample Line Styles collection.
3 In the Sample Line Style dialog box (page 2525), enter or change the name of the style and other settings
as required.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, in the Settings tree, expand the Sample Line Styles collection.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
On the Settings tab, Sample Line Styles collection, right-click <style name> ➤ Copy
Dialog Box
Sample Line Style (page 2525)
1 In Toolspace, in the Settings tree, expand the Sample Line Styles collection.
3 In the Sample Line Style dialog box (page 2525), change settings as required.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
On the Settings tab, Sample Line Styles collection, right-click <style name> ➤ Edit
Command Line
EditSampleLineStyle
Dialog Box
Sample Line Style (page 2525)
1 In Toolspace, in the Settings tree, expand the Sample Line Styles collection.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
On the Settings tab, Sample Line Styles collection, right-click <style name> ➤ Delete
NOTE Before editing an existing section style to change its properties, remember that any changes you make will
apply to all sections that use the style. To change the style of some sections, but not all, consider creating a new
style.
■ Right-click the existing style you want to use as a template. Click Copy.
3 In the Section Style dialog box (page 2534), change the name of the style and other settings as required.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
3 In the Section Style dialog box (page 2534), change the name of the style and other settings as required.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
On the Settings tab, Section Styles collection, right-click <style name> ➤ Copy
3 In the Section Style dialog box (page 2534), change settings as required.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
On the Settings tab, Section Styles collection, right-click <style name> ➤ Edit
Command Line
EditCrossSectionStyle
Dialog Box
Section Style (page 2534)
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
On the Settings tab, Section Styles collection, right-click <style name> ➤ Delete
NOTE Before editing an existing section view style to change its properties, remember that any changes you make
will apply to all section views that use the style. To change the style of some section views, but not all, consider
creating a new style.
1 In Toolspace, in the Settings tree, expand the Section View Styles collection.
3 In the Section View Style dialog box (page 2550), enter or change the name of the style and other settings
as required.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, in the Settings tree, expand the Section View Styles collection.
3 In the Section View Style dialog box (page 2550), change the name of the style and other settings as
required.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
On the Settings tab, Section View Styles collection, Right-click <style name> ➤ Copy
Dialog Box
Section View Style (page 2550)
1 In Toolspace, in the Settings tree, expand the Section View Styles collection.
3 In the Section View Style dialog box (page 2550), change settings as required.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
On the Settings tab, Section View Styles collection, Right-click <style name> ➤ Edit
Command Line
EditSectionViewStyle
Dialog Box
Section View Style (page 2550)
1 In Toolspace, in the Settings tree, expand the Section View Styles collection.
On the Settings tab, Section View Styles collection, Right-click <style name> ➤ Delete
1 Select the section view whose group plot style you want to edit.
2 Click Section tab ➤ Modify View panel ➤ View Group Properties drop-down ➤ Edit Group Plot Style
3 In the Group Plot Style dialog box (page 2508), change settings as required.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the section view. Click Section tab ➤ Modify View panel ➤ View Group Properties drop-down ➤ Edit
1 Select a section view whose group layout may be modified by a style change.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the section view. Click Section tab ➤ Modify View panel ➤ Update Group Layout .
Command Line
LayoutSectionViewGroup
To add sample line labels automatically based on the default label style
1 In the Toolspace Settings tree, right-click Sample Line and click Edit Feature Settings.
2 In the Edit Feature Settings - Sample Line dialog box (page 2499) click Default Styles ➤ Sample Line Label
Style.
4 In the Sample Line Label Style dialog box (page 2021), set the default label style.
Sample line labels are displayed when you add sample lines to the drawing.
You can select a sample line label style in the Sample Line Labels dialog box, or create or edit a style in the
Label Style Composer.
2 Click Sample Line tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Edit Labels .
3 In the drawing, select a sample line to open the Sample Line Labels dialog box (page 2521).
4 Edit the label in the Label Style Composer dialog box (page 2180).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the sample line. Sample Line tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Edit Labels
Menu
Sections menu ➤ Add Section View Labels ➤ Add/Edit Sample Line Group Labels
Object Shortcut Menu
Grade Breaks Grade break labels applied at every grade break point
for a section. A user-specified weeding factor is suppor-
ted, thus avoiding close annotation.
Label Set The default set of label styles to use for sections when
a section view object is created.
For a general overview of labels, see Labels and Tags (page 1643).
■ Click the desired section view grid. Right-click and click Section View Properties. On the Sections
tab, click the Labels column.
3 In the Section Labels dialog box, for Type, select the label type in the list, either: Major Offset, Minor
Offset, Segments, or Grade Breaks.
4 Optionally, for Section <Label Style> Label Style, select the label style in the list or use the standard
controls to create a new style, copy or edit the current style selection, create a child of the current style
selection, or pick a style from the drawing.
6 Review the label set in the table and make the required adjustments. Click OK.
The labels are displayed along the section line in the section view.
3 In the Section Labels dialog box (page 2207), review the existing labels and their attributes. Do any of the
following:
■ Add or remove labels of any type.
■ Stagger labels to avoid label collisions. For more information, see Staggering Profile and Section
Labels (page 1707).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the section line. Section tab ➤ Labels panel ➤ Edit Section Labels
Object Shortcut Menu
1 Zoom to, and select, the section view that you want to label.
2 Click Section View tab ➤ Labels panel ➤ Add View Labels drop-down ➤ Grade.
3 Click any two points. A label is displayed, showing the grade label (default) or other data about the
relationship between the two points (depending on the label style).
4 Repeat Step 4 for each point or pair of points that you want labeled.
5 To end the procedure, press Esc. Close the Add Labels dialog box.
1 Zoom to, and select, the section view that you want to label.
2 Click Section View tab ➤ Labels panel ➤ Add View Labels drop-down ➤ Offset Elevation.
3 Click the location where you want a label. It is immediately displayed, showing the offset and elevation
values (default).
4 Repeat Step 4 for each point or pair of points that you want labeled.
5 To end the procedure, press Esc. Close the Add Labels dialog box.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Section View ➤ Grade
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Section View ➤ Offset Elevation
Menu
Band Sets Specifies the default set of bands to use (or import) when
creating a section view. Also, specifies various properties,
such as the gap between bands.
Section Segment Specifies section segment band style for each segment
(line) of a section object.
See also:
3 In the Section View Properties dialog box, click the Bands tab (page 2545).
4 In the List Of Bands area, select either Bottom or Top as the location for the new band in the section
view.
7 Optionally, on the right side of the List Of Bands, move selected bands up or down in the stack.
To delete any unwanted bands, click .
8 To save this arrangement of bands as a set for reuse, click Save As Band Set.
9 Click OK to close the Section View Properties dialog box. The bands are displayed in the section view.
NOTE To label corridor lane widths, create a corridor, build a corridor surface using ETW (edge-of-traveled-way)
feature lines, and label that surface with an appropriate section segment band. For more information, see Creating
and Editing Section Views (page 1258) and Understanding Corridor Modeling (page 1471).
Quick Reference
Shortcut Menu
NOTE When you create sample lines for the first time for an alignment, you are prompted to create a sample line
group in which to place the sample lines. This group also contains the list of surfaces, corridors, corridor surfaces,
and pipe networks (if any), based on the alignment so that you can select the data source(s) to be sampled.
In the drawing, sample lines can be labeled with annotations, including stations and other information.
The section can be displayed using the section view. For more information, see Creating and Editing Section
Views (page 1258).
1 Click Home tab ➤ Profile & Section Views panel ➤ Sample Lines .
The cursor changes to pick mode. You are prompted to select an alignment.
For information about creating an alignment, see Creating Alignments (page 948).
3 Specify a sample line group. A sample line must belong to a sample line group. Do one of the following:
■ If this is the first sample line group you are creating in the drawing, the Create/Edit Sample Line
Group dialog box (page 2485) is automatically displayed. Review the default styles. Change them if
necessary. Click OK.
■ If a sample line group already exists in the drawing, the Sample Line Tools toolbar (page 2526) is
displayed. To assign a sample line group to the sample line, select the sample line group in the list.
The cursor changes to station pick mode (default). You are prompted to select a station.
■ In the drawing, use the cursor tooltip to find the station along the alignment. Click the station.
■ In the drawing, at the desired distance, click the first point, which defines the start of the left swath
width. Click the second point, which defines the end of the left swath width (that is, the length).
■ In the drawing, at the desired distance, click the first point, which defines the start of the right swath
width. Click the second point, which defines the end of the right swath width (that is, the length).
NOTE For left and right swath widths, you can attach an alignment, such as a right-of-way alignment. This enables
you to define variable sample line widths. If you later use the Edit Swath Widths for Group tool on the Sample
Line Tools toolbar (page 2526), all sample line widths will be extended or trimmed to the group’s widths.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Profile & Section Views panel ➤ Sample Lines .
The cursor changes to pick mode. You are prompted to select an alignment.
3 Specify a sample line group. A sample line must belong to a sample line group. Do one of the following:
■ If this is the first sample line group you are creating in the drawing, the Create/Edit Sample Line
Group dialog box (page 2485) is automatically displayed. Review the default styles. Change them if
necessary. Click OK.
■ If a sample line group already exists in the drawing, the Sample Line Tools toolbar (page 2526) is
displayed. To assign a sample line group to the sample line, select the sample line group in the list.
The cursor changes to station pick mode (default). You are prompted to select a station.
4 On the Sample Line Tools toolbar, in the sample line create method list, click , which selects Pick
Points On Screen. You are prompted to select a start point.
5 In the drawing, use the cursor tooltip to find the start point. Click the start point.
■ In the drawing, click one or more points to define the sample line (section) with the final end point
on the opposite side of the alignment from the start point. Note that if the final end point is not
on the opposite side of the alignment from the start point, the sample line is interpolated to attach
to the centerline of the alignment.
NOTE When you create a sample line that is located between corridor stations, the data shown in the section
is interpolated between the preceding and succeeding stations.
Depending on the sample line style, a line or multi-segment line is drawn across the alignment that
represents the section.
To create perpendicular sample lines, by a range of stations, across an alignment at specified station intervals
1 Click Home tab ➤ Profile & Section Views panel ➤ Sample Lines .
The cursor changes to pick mode. You are prompted to select an alignment.
For information about creating an alignment, see Creating Alignments (page 948).
3 Specify a sample line group. A sample line must belong to a sample line group. Do one of the following:
■ If this is the first sample line group you are creating in the drawing, the Create/Edit Sample Line
Group dialog box (page 2485) is automatically displayed. Review the default styles. Change them if
necessary. Click OK.
■ If a sample line group already exists in the drawing, the Sample Line Tools toolbar (page 2526) is
displayed. To assign a sample line group to the sample line, select the desired sample line group in
the list.
4 On the Sample Line Tools toolbar, in the sample line create method list, click , which selects By
Station Range.
The Create Sample Lines - By Station Range dialog box (page 2491)is displayed.
5 Review the default settings. Change them if necessary. Click OK. Note that the station range defaults
to the entire length of the alignment.
Depending on the sample line style, sample lines are drawn along the alignment, cutting across the
alignment at the specified intervals. These sample lines represent the sections.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Profile & Section Views panel ➤ Sample Lines .
The cursor changes to pick mode. you are prompted to select an alignment.
For more information about creating an alignment, see Creating Alignments (page 948).
3 Specify a sample line group. A sample line must belong to a sample line group. Do one of the following:
■ If this is the first sample line group you are creating in the drawing, the Create/Edit Sample Line
Group dialog box (page 2485) is displayed. Review the default styles. Change them if necessary. Click
OK.
■ If a sample line group already exists in the drawing, the Sample Line Tools toolbar (page 2526) is
displayed. To assign a sample line group to the sample line, select the desired sample line group in
the list.
The cursor changes to station pick mode (default). You are prompted to select a station.
4 On the Sample Line Tools toolbar, in the sample line create method list, click to select From Corridor
Stations.
The Create Sample Lines - From Corridor Stations dialog box (page 2491) is displayed.
NOTE If you do not have any corridors defined based on the selected alignment, then this command will
be inactive.
5 Review the default settings. Change them if necessary. Click OK. Note that the station range defaults
to the entire length of the alignment.
Depending on the sample line style, sample lines are drawn along the alignment, cutting across the
alignment at the specified corridor stations. These sample lines represent the corridor sections.
NOTE For left and right swath widths, you can attach an alignment, such as a right-of-way alignment. This enables
you to define variable sample line widths. If you later use the Edit Swath Widths for Group tool on the Sample
Line Tools toolbar (page 2526), all sample line widths will be extended or trimmed to the group’s widths.
3 In the Edit Sample Line dialog box (page 2507), review the parameters for each vertex of the sample line
by clicking Previous Vertex and Next Vertex.
■ In the Sample Line Vertex Northing and/or Sample Line Vertex Easting field(s), enter new values.
■ In the Sample Line Segment Length field, change the length of the swath width to the desired
distance in ground units or click to pick a new segment length from the drawing.
■ In the Sample Line Station Value field, change the sample line station value or click to pick a
new station value from the drawing.
5 Close the Edit Sample Line dialog box and Sample Line Tools toolbar.
The sample line is redrawn with the new parameters.
Select the sample line. Sample Line tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Sample Line
Menu
2 Use the diamond-shaped center grip to move the sample line to a new location along the alignment.
The sample line slides to the new location while maintaining its relative geometry. As the sample line
moves, it reorients to the underlying entity (for example, spiral, curve, or other tangents). It always
remains perpendicular to the alignment.
3 Use the square-shaped end grips to stretch (lengthen or shorten), move, or rotate segments.
The sample line is redrawn.
4 Use the triangular-shaped grips at the ends of segments to stretch (lengthen or shorten) each segment
while keeping its relative direction.
The sample line is redrawn.
2 Use the square-shaped end grips to rotate segments off their perpendicular orientation to the parent
alignment.
Quick Reference
Object Shortcut Menu
3 In the Sample Line Properties dialog box, click the Information tab (page 2522).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the sample line. Click Sample Line tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Sample Line Properties drop-down ➤ Sample
Line Properties .
Command Line
EditSampleLineProperties
■ Select a source in the Sampled Sources field and click Remove << to remove it From the Available
Sources field.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the sample line. Click Sample Line tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Sample More Sources .
Command Line
SampleSectionSources
Editing Sections
Edit a section to change its appearance or move it in the drawing.
NOTE To edit a section, the section must be a static type section (that is, a section that is not dynamic). For more
information about static and dynamic update modes for sections, see Section Data Tab (Section Properties Dialog
Box) (page 2533).
Use the Section Editor to view and edit section data. If the section is dynamic, the data is grayed out in the
Section Editor and not editable. Change the Update Mode to Static in the Section Properties dialog box if
you want to edit a section.
You can also use section grip editing to manipulate static sections. For example, you can alter the section
yet maintain the grade or elevation while stretching a segment or moving grade points.
For more information about static and dynamic update modes for sections, see Section Data Tab (Section
Properties Dialog Box) (page 2533).
2 Use the Section Editor (page 2531) dialog box to edit the section.
1 In the drawing, zoom to a section view. Click the static section line you want to edit.
The section line is displayed with triangular grips at the start and end of each section segment and
rectangular grips at grade breaks.
NOTE To edit the section segment by editing the dynamic dimensions in place, press Tab to cycle through
the offset and elevation values displayed.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the section line. Click Section tab ➤ Modify Section panel Edit Section Geometry .
Command Line
EditCrossSection
Dialog Box
Section Editor (page 2531)
■ Sample Lines. Specifies the default properties of the sample lines that are included in the sample line
group. Also, you can specify the default label style. By changing the default label style here, you instantly
change the sample line’s displayed appearance.
■ Sections. Specifies the properties that draw and manage the section associated with the current sample
line group.
■ Section Views. Specifies the properties that draw and manage the section view associated with the current
sample line group.
■ Material List. Specifies the properties of material lists associated with the current sample line group. Each
list represents quantity takeoff calculation criteria for the specified materials.
Sample line properties display and specify data only about that sample line. Sample line group properties
display and specify rules for creating sample lines by range of stations or from corridor stations.
For more information, see Editing Sample Line Properties (page 1255).
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click the sample line group name you want to edit. Click
Properties.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Sites ➤ <site name> ➤ Alignments ➤ <alignment name> ➤ Sample Line Group ➤
<sample line group name> ➤ Properties
Command Line
EditSampleLineGroupProps
Dialog Box
Sample Line Group Properties (page 2515)
■ Information. Specifies the sample line’s name, text description, and object style. By changing the style
here, you instantly change the sample line’s displayed appearance.
■ Sample Line Data. Specifies the sample line’s group name, associated alignment, station information,
and whether the sample line locks to the station. Also, you can specify the label style. By changing the
label style here, you instantly change the sample line’s displayed appearance.
■ Sections. Specifies the properties that draw and manage the section associated with the current sample
line. For any sample line, you can also change its style.
■ Section Views. Specifies the properties that determine which section views are created from the current
sample line.
NOTE Sample line properties display and specify data only about that sample line. Sample line group properties
display and specify rules for creating sample lines by range of stations or from corridor stations.
3 Review or change properties on the tabs of the Sample Line Properties dialog box.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Sites ➤ <site name> ➤ Alignments ➤ <alignment name> ➤ Sample Lines ➤ <sample
line name> ➤ Properties
Object Shortcut Menu
Right-click <sample line object> (in the drawing) ➤ Sample Line Properties
3 Review or change properties on the tabs of the Section Properties dialog box (page 2532).
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Sites ➤ <site-name> ➤ Alignments ➤ <alignment name> ➤ Sample Line Groups ➤
<sample line group name> ➤ Sections ➤ <section name> ➤ Properties
Object Shortcut Menu
Right-click <section object> (in the drawing section view) ➤ Section Properties
Command Line
SectionProperties
Dialog Box
Section Properties (page 2532)
■ Information. Specifies the corridor section’s name, text description, and object style. By changing the
style here, you instantly change the corridor section’s displayed appearance.
■ Section Data. Specifies and displays tabular data with a single row listing the properties of that corridor
section. Some of these properties, such as layer, mode, and style can be edited. The other properties are
only for review.
■ Codes. Displays codes and style information for review. For information about changing the display style
of various point, link, and shape codes, see Using Codes and Code Set Styles (page 1567).
1 On the prospector, click the corridor section collection that contains the corridor section you want to
edit.
2 On the item view, right-click the individual corridor section . Click Properties.
3 Review or change properties on the tabs of the Corridor Section Properties dialog box (page 2483).
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 On the prospector, click the pipe network section collection that contains the pipe network section
you want to edit.
2 On the item view, right-click the individual pipe network section . Click Properties.
3 Review or change properties on the tabs of the Pipe Network Section Properties dialog box (page 2510).
Prospector tab: Sites ➤ <site-name> ➤ Alignments ➤ <alignment name> ➤ Sample Line Groups ➤
<sample line group name> ➤ Pipe Network Sections ➤ <pipe network section group name>. In the item
view, right-click <pipe network section name>, click Properties
Dialog Box
Pipe Network Properties (page 2510)
Each section view must be linked to an alignment. The section view displays new or existing sections. Sections
can also be created without displaying them on a section view. When you create a section view for an
alignment, the complete list of sections for the alignment is displayed. Choose which sections to include
in the section view.
Create either an EG (existing ground) section view or multiple section views. You can change the display
style of a section view, and add labels and bands.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Profile & Section Views panel ➤ Section Views drop-down ➤ Create Section View
.
2 In the Create Section View wizard (page 2495), click Create Section View to accept location, style, offset,
elevation, display, data band, and volume table defaults. You can later change the default settings in
the Section View Properties dialog box (page 2542). Alternatively, you can change settings in the following
pages of the wizard
■ General page (page 2398) – Change the location, name, layer and style of the new section view.
■ Offset Range page (page 2398) – Change the width of the offsets of the new section view.
■ Elevation Range page (page 2398) – Change the maximum and minimum elevation of the new section
view.
■ Section Display Options page (page 2400) – Change the visibility and style of the new section view.
■ Data Bands page (page 2402) – Change the band set and data band location for the new section view.
■ Section View Tables page (page 2404) – Change the type and style of volume tables, and their position
relative to, the new section view.
NOTE A material list must exist in the drawing, before you can modify Section View Tables settings.
3 In the drawing, find a suitable location for the section view, for example, outside the surface boundary
for ease of viewing. Click that location to define the origin.
The section view is displayed.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Profile & Section Views panel ➤ Section Views drop-down ➤ Create Multiple Views
.
2 In the Create Multiple Section Views wizard (page 2486), click Create Section Views to accept location,
style, offset, elevation, display, data band, and volume table defaults. Alternatively, you can change
settings in the following pages of the wizard:
■ General page (page 2487) – Change the location, name, layer and style of the new section views.
■ Section Placement (page 2487) – Select Production or Draft quality layout options.
■ Offset Range page (page 2488) – Change the width of the offsets of the new section views.
■ Elevation Range page (page 2488) – Change the maximum and minimum elevations of, and group
options for, the new section views.
■ Section Display Options page (page 2489) – Change the visibility and style of the new section views.
■ Data Bands page (page 2490) – Change the band set and data band location for the new section views.
■ Section View Tables page (page 2490) – Change the type and style of volume tables, and their position
relative to, the new section views.
NOTE A material list must exist in the drawing, before you can modify Section View Tables settings.
You can plot an entire sample line group, or you can specify a user-defined station range (1) to control how
many section views (2) are created.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Profile & Section Views panel ➤ Section Views drop-down ➤ Create Section View
Home tab ➤ Profile & Section Views panel ➤ Section Views drop-down ➤ Create Multiple Views
Command Line
CreateSectionView
CreateMultipleSectionView
1 In the section view, click the section line you want to change.
3 In the Section Properties dialog box, click the Information tab (page 2532).
3 In the Section View Properties dialog box, click the Information tab (page 2542).
Select the section view. Click Section tab ➤ Modify Section panel ➤ Section Properties drop-down ➤ Section
Properties .
Click Section tab ➤ Modify View panel ➤ Section View Properties drop-down ➤ Section View Properties
.
Command Line
SectionProperties
EditGraphProperties
1 Zoom to the section view area to clearly see the section view and its annotations.
2 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Section View ➤ Add Section View
Labels .
3 In the Add Labels dialog box (page 2208), for Label Type, select the type of label (either Grade or Offset
Elevation) in the list.
4 Optionally, for style, select the style in the list or use the standard controls to create a new style, copy
or edit the current style selection, or pick a style from the drawing.
5 Click Add.
On the command line, you are prompted to select a section view.
6 In the drawing, click a graph line of the section view you want to label.
On the command line, you are prompted to pick a point.
7 In the section view, click the point, or points for a grade label, that define the label.
The label is displayed at the desired location in the section view.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Section View ➤ Add Section View Labels
.
Command Line
AddSectionViewLabels
3 In the Section View Properties dialog box, click the Bands tab (page 2545).
4 In the List Of Bands area, select either Bottom or Top as the location for the new data band in the
section view.
7 Optionally, on the right side of the List Of Bands, move selected bands up or down in the stack.
To delete any unwanted bands, click .
8 To save this arrangement of bands as a set for reuse, click Save As Band Set.
9 Click OK to close the Section View Properties dialog box. The bands are displayed in the section view.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the section view. Click Section tab ➤ Modify View panel ➤ Section View Properties
drop-down ➤ Section View Properties .
Command Line
EditGraphProperties
3 In the Section View Properties dialog box, click the Profile Grade Lines tab (page 2548).
4 In the Alignment area, click an alignment in the list or click to pick an alignment from the drawing.
5 Click Add.
6 To add more grade point labels to the section view, repeat Steps 4 and 5.
7 Optionally, to delete any unwanted grade points, select them in the list. Click .
8 Click OK to close the Section View Properties dialog box. The profile grade points are displayed in the
section view.
Select the section view. Click Section tab ➤ Modify View panel ➤ Section View Properties
drop-down ➤ Section View Properties .
Command Line
EditGraphProperties
■ Information. Specifies the section view’s name, description, and object style. By changing the style here,
you instantly change the section’s displayed appearance.
■ Offsets. Displays the properties of the selected section view and the section view grid on which sections
are displayed.
■ Elevation. Specifies the elevation properties of the selected section view and the section view grid on
which sections are displayed.
■ Sections. Specifies which sections to display in the section view. For any section, you can also override
its style and label set to display it differently in the current section view.
■ Bands. Specifies which bands to include in the section view, and whether to place them along the top
or bottom of the grid. Data is displayed for specified section objects.
■ Volume Tables. Specifies table type and style, and the associated material, material list and layer.
■ Profile Grade Lines. Specifies a profile and displays its elevation by marking it at the appropriate offset
and elevation in the section view.
■ Projection. Specifies the name, style and elevation of projected objects in a section view.
For more information, see Section View Group Properties Dialog Box (page 2540).
1 In the drawing, click any grid or axis line of the section view you want to edit.
3 Review or change properties on the tabs of the Section View Properties dialog box (page 2542).
Select the section view. Click Section tab ➤ Modify View panel ➤ Section View Properties
drop-down ➤ Section View Properties .
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
On the Prospector tab ➤ Sites ➤ <site-name> ➤ Alignments ➤ <alignment name> ➤ Sample Line
Groups ➤ <sample line group name> ➤ Section View Groups ➤ <section view group name> ➤ Right-click
<section view name> (in item view) ➤ Properties
Object Shortcut Menu
Right-click <section view object> (in the drawing) ➤ Section View Properties
Command Line
EditGraphProperties
Dialog Boxes
Section View Properties (page 2542)
1 In the drawing, click any grid or axis line of any section view in the group you want to edit.
2 Right-click the section view grid. Click Section View Group Properties.
3 Review or change properties on the tabs of the Section View Group Properties (page 2540) dialog box.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the section view. Click Section tab ➤ Modify View panel ➤ View Group Properties drop-down ➤ View
Group Properties .
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
On the Prospector tab ➤ Sites ➤ <site-name> ➤ Alignments ➤ <alignment name> ➤ Sample Line
Groups ➤ <sample line group name> ➤ Section View Groups ➤ Right-click <section view group name>
➤ Properties
Object Shortcut Menu
Right-click <section view object> (in the drawing) ➤ Section View Group Properties
Command Line
EditSVBatchProperties
Dialog Boxes
Section View Group Properties (page 2540)
Edit Offset and Elevation Ranges (page 2506)
Profile Grade Points (page 2512)
1 Click Home tab ➤ Profile & Section Views panel ➤ Section Views drop-down ➤ Project Objects To
Section View .
2 Click one or more objects in the drawing that you want to project. Right-click or press Enter after all
objects are selected.
3 Click the section view in which you want the objects to appear.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Profile & Section Views panel ➤ Section Views drop-down ➤ Project Objects To Section View
Command Line
ProjectObjectsToSect
Linear objects such as feature lines, survey figures, and 3D polylines are projected only when they intersect
a sample line for a given section view. The projection rules do not apply to these objects.
If an object’s insertion point is within the area, then it is projected even if part of the object extends beyond
the region, as shown by the object in the lower-left corner of the illustration.
■ Sample lines (solid blue lines) are considered to be either perpendicular or radial to the alignment (dotted
blue lines).
■ The locations of the objects to be projected are considered to be relative to the alignment stations (1 and
2 in the following illustration).
In cases where you have non-perpendicular or non-radial sample lines, an object that appears to be “before”
or “after” a sample line can actually be in the opposite position because of the way the object’s station is
determined relative to the alignment.
The following illustration shows how this is determined. The station of object 1 is determined to be before
the location where the sample line crosses the alignment (4), so the projection rules for “before” are used
for it, even though the object itself appears to be after the skewed sample line (3).
1 Click Home tab ➤ Profile & Section Views panel ➤ Section Views drop-down ➤ Project Objects To
Multiple Section Views .
■ Select a section view in the drawing to select a section view group. By selecting a section view group,
objects will be projected only to those section views in that group.
The Project Objects To Multiple Section Views (page 2513) dialog box is displayed.
3 You can select a different sample line group or section view group, depending on which type you
selected in Step 2.
NOTE You cannot switch between sample line group and section view group after running the command.
If you want to switch, click Cancel and run the command again.
4 Specify the Projection Rules. You can specify a distance (page 1266) before and after the sample lines or
you can specify a percentage (page 1266).
NOTE The projection rules do not apply to feature lines, survey figures, or 3D polylines. Those objects are
projected only when they intersect a sample line for a given section view.
NOTE A distance or percent of zero projects non-linear objects whose insertion point is exactly on the sample
line.
NOTE You can control individual object settings later by using the Projections (page 2549) tab of the Section
View Properties dialog box. For example, if you only want one feature line projected, you can clear all of the
other feature lines from the selection.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Profile & Section Views panel ➤ Section Views drop-down ➤ Project Objects To Multiple
Section Views
Command Line
ProjectObjectsToMultiSect
Dialog Box
Project Objects To Multiple Section Views (page 2513)
2 On the ribbon, click Projected Object tab ➤ Modify Projected Object panel ➤ Remove From View
.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select a projected object. Click Projected Object tab ➤ Modify Projected Object panel ➤ Remove From
View.
Command Line
RemoveFromSectionView
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the projected object.Click Projected Object tab ➤ Labels panel ➤ Add Object Labels
Object Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the General ➤ Multipurpose Styles collection. Right-click
Projection Styles and click New.
2 In the Projection Styles dialog box (page 2023), specify the name of the style and other settings as required.
3 Click OK.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the General ➤ Multipurpose Styles collection. Identify the
style you want to copy as a basis for the new style.
3 In the Projection Styles dialog box (page 2023), change the name of the style and other settings as required.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the General ➤ Multipurpose Styles collection. Identify the
style you want to edit.
3 In the Projection Styles dialog box (page 2023), change settings as required.
4 Click OK.
1 In the drawing window, in a section view, select the object whose style you want to change.
2 Click Projected Object tab ➤ Modify Projected Object panel ➤ Projection Properties drop-down ➤ Edit
Style .
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the projected object. Click Projected Object tab ➤ Modify Projected Object panel ➤ Projection
Properties drop-down ➤ Edit Style
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Command Description
EditSheetStyle Edits the style of the selected section sheet (page 2559)
EditSVGroupStyle Edits the plot style of the selected section view group
(page 1240)
Creating material lists (page 1282) is the essential step in the creation of volume tables and reports. Creation of tables and
reports can be performed once the material lists are generated. As part of the production of the material lists, you will
need to set up quantity takeoff criteria (page 1279).
Import (page 1294) pay item files from contracting agencies, tag (page 1298) objects, closed areas, and collections, and compute
(page 1306) quantities to create quantity reports and tables (page 1308).
As with the creation of volume tables and reports, the creation of material lists is also a prerequisite to creating mass haul
diagrams (page 1314).
1275
If you change a property value, a check mark is placed in the Override column. This override is also noted
in the property table for related objects higher up in the Toolspace Settings tree, where an arrow appears in
the Child Override column. For more information, see Understanding Settings (page 77).
■ To edit the settings for a specific command: In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Commands
collection in the Quantity Takeoff collection. Right-click the command for which you want to
change settings.
The Edit Feature Settings - Quantity Takeoff dialog box (page 2569) is displayed.
2 To specify the default quantity takeoff criteria and material shape style, expand the Default Styles
property group, and edit the Quantity Takeoff Criteria and Material Shape Style settings.
3 To specify the default naming for quantity takeoff materials and material lists, expand the Default
Name Format property group, and edit the Material Name Template and Material List Name Template
settings.
4 To modify the default material volume table settings, expand the Table Creation property group, and
edit the standard table creation options. This property group is available if you accessed the settings
from the AddMaterialVolumeTable command in Step 1.
5 To modify the default display settings for objects with assigned pay items, expand the Assign Pay Item
To Area Options property group, and edit the layer and color options. This property group is available
when you access the settings from the AssignPayItemToArea command in Step 1.
NOTE You can also edit the Assign Pay Item To Area Options in the Quantity Takeoff Command Settings
dialog box.
6 To modify the default total volume table settings, expand the Table Creation property group, and edit
the standard table creation options. This property group is available when you access the settings from
the AddTotalVolumeTable command in Step 1.
7 To modify the default material definition settings, expand the Define Materials Options property group,
and edit the curve correction settings. For more information, see Generating Material Lists (page 1282).
This property group is available when you access the settings from the ComputeMaterials command
in Step 1.
8 To modify the default quantity takeoff report settings, expand the Quantity Report Options property
group, and edit the XML report display setting. This property group is available when you access the
settings from the GenerateQuantitiesReport command in Step 1.
9 To modify the default quantity takeoff computation settings, expand the Compute Takeoff Options
property group, and edit the report and table settings, pipe network settings, and formula setting. This
property group is available when you access the settings from the Takeoff command in Step 1.
NOTE You can also edit the Compute Takeoff Options in the Quantity Takeoff Command Settings dialog
box.
10 Click Apply.
■ Volumes along an alignment, comparing various design surfaces and existing ground surfaces.
■ Volumes for shapes, which are closed cross-sectional areas created by a single subassembly. For example,
a curb (a closed area within a concrete curb or curb and gutter).
You can display material volume information using standard AutoCAD Civil 3D table formats, or view and
export the information in an XML format file.
Material volume reporting uses criteria settings that are portable and extensible. You can create criteria based
either on existing data, including surfaces and sample line groups, or on standard surface names.
You prepare to generate material volume information by creating a list of materials and applying the
predefined criteria to it, mapping existing surfaces or other objects to the names in the criteria. After the
material list is generated, the settings and volume calculations are stored with the sample line group and
can be used to generate tables and reports.
■ If the cut/fill areas between two successive stations are of similar shape, then the Average End Area
Method (page 1278) can be used.
■ If the terrain has greater changes between stations, then the Prismoidal Method (page 1278) can be more
accurate.
■ The Composite Method (page 1278) uses the actual surface data and does not use formulas to interpolate
the volume between sample lines. This method is particularly useful if the any of the surface triangle
edges are smaller than the sample line interval.
You can specify which volume method to use in the following dialog boxes:
■ Compute Materials. For more information, see Generating Material Lists (page 1282).
■ Edit Material List. For more information, see Generating Material Lists (page 1282).
Prismoidal Method
The Prismoidal method is similar to the Average End Area method but uses an additional cross section at
the middle of the two successive stations.
Composite Method
The Composite method is limited to material lists that have only two surfaces and cannot be used for material
lists that contain corridor shapes.
To calculate composite volumes, AutoCAD Civil 3D creates polygons between sample lines and then computes
the bounded volumes of those polygons. The polygons are created by joining the offsets of the sample lines
between two successive stations, as shown in the following illustration.
■ If the offsets are uniform, then a line that matches the curvature of the centerline is used to join the
sample lines (1).
■ If the offsets are not uniform, then a straight line is used to join the sample lines (2).
■ The composite volume is then calculated for the area within the polygon (3) for each material in the
material list of the sample line group.
The volume is recorded at the second sample line of the polygon. The first sample line in the sample line
group will therefore have zero volume associated with it.
Defining Materials
Create quantity takeoff criteria as the first step in analyzing sectional material volumes.
Quantity Types
Quantity takeoff supports the following quantity types:
■ Cut. Used to calculate the material to remove. For example, this could be the amount below an existing
ground (EG) surface and above a finished ground (FG) surface:
■ Fill. Used to calculate the material to add. For example, this could be the amount above an existing
ground (EG) surface and below a finished ground (FG) surface:
■ Cut and Refill. Used to calculate the material to remove and add based on a refill factor that is different
from the cut factor. For example, an existing subsurface material area for a corridor may have to be
removed if it comprises loose soil or marsh land, and refilled with a different type of material to provide
structural stability.
■ Earthworks. Used to calculate the total cut and fill volumes. For example, this could be any differences
between the existing ground (EG) surface and the finished ground (FG) surface:
■ Cut factor - As the volume of material generally expands after it is removed, the cut factor is usually set
to greater than 1.0, indicating swell or expansion. For example, a 1.2 cut factor would mean that for
every 1.0 cubic meter of material removed, 1.2 cubic meters of volume would need to be accounted for
transport.
■ Fill factor - As the material generally compacts when used as fill, the fill factor is usually set to greater
than 1.0, to indicate compaction or shrinkage of the material when it is used as fill. For example, a 1.2
fill factor would mean that for every 1.0 cubic meter of material required for the fill site, 1.2 cubic meters
of that material would need to be transported.
NOTE For example, for a material that compacts to 93% of its original value when used as fill, enter 1.075
(which is derived by dividing 1.0 by .93) as the fill factor to compensate for the extra material that must be
added.
■ Refill factor - As this factor depends on the cut material type and other considerations, it can run across
a range. A heavy aggregate might have a Refill factor of 1.0, while fill cut from a rock ledge might have
a Refill factor of 1.2. Not all cut material may even be reusable, as when it is cut from bog or marsh. The
refill factor would then be 0.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings Tree, expand the Quantity Takeoff collection. Right-click the Quantity
Takeoff Criteria collection. Click New.
2 In the Quantity Takeoff Criteria dialog box, click the Information tab (page 2592).
3 To edit the name of the criterion, enter a new name in the Name field.
4 To edit the description of the criterion, enter a new description in the Description field.
5 Click Apply to make the changes, or click OK to make the changes and close the Quantity Takeoff
Criteria dialog box.
6 To define or edit the criterion, click the Material List tab (page 2593).
8 Select the new material. Click the Quantity Type field. Select the quantity type, either Cut, Fill, Cut
and Refill, Earthworks, or Structures.
10 Optionally, edit the cut, fill, and refill factors by selecting the corresponding fields. Enter new values.
11 If you selected a quantity type of Cut, Fill, Cut and Refill, or Earthworks to add surfaces, select the new
material. From the Data Type list, select Surface. In the Select Surface list, enter the surface name or
select a surface.
12 If you selected a quantity type of Structures, to add corridor shapes, select the new material. Select
Corridor Shapes from the Data Type list. In the Select Shape list, enter the shape name or select a shape.
Click the Shape Style field. Select a style for the shapes.
13 For each data type added to a material, click the Condition field. Select the condition.
14 Optionally, repeat Steps 7 through 13 to create all required materials and surfaces.
15 Optionally, add subcriteria. For more information, see To add a material with subcriteria to the material
list of a sample line group (page 1289).
16 Click Apply.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings Tree, expand the Quantity Takeoff collection. Right-click the Quantity
Takeoff Criteria folder and click New.
2 In the Quantity Takeoff Criteria dialog box, click the Information tab (page 2592).
3 To edit the name of the criteria, enter a new name in the Name field.
4 To edit the description of the criteria, enter a new description in the Description field.
5 Click Apply to make the changes, or click OK to make the changes and close the Quantity Takeoff
Criteria dialog box.
6 To define the criteria, click the Material List tab (page 2593).
8 In the Define Material Criteria dialog box, click the Select Alignment field. Select the alignment or click
9 Click the Select Sample Line Group field to select a sample line group.
10 Select the surfaces to use in the criteria by selecting or clearing the check box in the Select field next
to the surface name.
11 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Menu
Curve Correction
Curve correction may be required to correct volume calculations within a curvilinear section of an alignment
(or on two sides of a horizontal intersection point). If the sample lines are within a specified tolerance or if
the angle of deflection between the successive stations is small, then curve correction is not used.
NOTE Curve correction can be applied to the Average End Area method. It cannot be applied to the Prismoidal
or Composite method.
2 In the Select a Sample Line Group dialog box, click the Select Alignment field. Select an alignment from
3 Click the Select Sample Line Group field. Select a sample line group or click to select a group in the
drawing.
4 Click OK.
If there is no material list associated with the sample line group, the Compute Materials dialog box
(page 2562) is displayed.
If one or more material lists are already part of the sample line group properties, the Edit Material List
dialog box (page 2572) is displayed. You can add a new materials list or edit an existing list as required.
You can also add subcriteria (page 1285) to address more complex volume situations.
5 Click the Quantity Takeoff Criteria field. Select the criteria. For more information, see Creating Quantity
Takeoff Criteria (page 1279).
6 Select a Volume Calculation Method. For more information, see Sectional Volume Methods (page 1277).
7 Optionally, select the Curve Correction Tolerance check box and enter a curve correction value.
NOTE This control is grayed out if Composite Volume or Prismoidal is specified as the Volume Calculation
Method.
8 Map the object names to apply to the materials by clicking in the Object Name column and selecting
the appropriate object, such as a surface.
9 Optionally, if the criteria uses the same surface and structure names as objects in the drawing, you can
quickly map the names by clicking Map Objects With Same Name.
10 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
If marsh material is present between station 2+00 and 3+00 with short transitions before and after, you can
specify run in and run out instead of adding more sample lines, as shown in the following illustration.
The run in for the material is defined in the first gap, and the run out for the material is defined in the
second gap. Therefore, the first gap would have a run in of 50, and the second gap would have a run out of
75.
For this example, you would add 3 gaps (as represented by numbers 1, 2, and 3 in the illustration) with
appropriate run ins and run outs for material transitions. In the material list the gaps should only be applied
to Marsh material and not for the materials named Cut and Fill.
1 Select a sample line.Click Sample Line tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Group Properties .
3 If you have not yet added materials to the sample line group, add the required materials. For more
information, see Material List Tab (Sample Line Group Properties Dialog Box) (page 2518).
NOTE You can add material list definitions on the Material List tab, or you can use the Compute Materials
command. for more information, see Generating Material Lists (page 1282).
4 At the the Material List level, click the Gap column. The Define Gaps dialog box is displayed.
5 Use Define Gaps (page 2520) dialog box to define a list of gaps along the alignment. In this dialog box,
you define the start and end stations of the gaps for the entire material list. In Step 7 you use the Apply
Gaps dialog box to control the gaps for each individual material.
7 At the Material level, click the Gap column. The Apply Gaps dialog box is displayed.
8 In the Apply Gaps (page 2521) dialog box, clear the Apply Gaps check box for any material for which
gaps should not be applied. For example, if Cut or Fill material is found throughout the length of the
alignment with no gaps, clear the Apply check boxes for those gaps.
9 For materials for which you want to apply gaps, keep the Apply check box selected and define the Run
Out and Run In distances. These distances apply to the material before and after the gaps.
In the following illustration, the green areas 1 and 2 represent gaps in the material (5). Gap 1 does not
have a run out distance. However, Gap 1 has a run in distance of 40m as represented by the red area
number 3.
Overlapping Materials
The following illustration shows a condition of overlapping materials that can be addressed by subcriteria.
(1) is top of Existing Ground, (2) is top of Subsoil, and (3) is top of Rockbed.
To define materials for this situation, you can use the following subcriteria:
Material 1 Definition
■ Subcriteria 1
■ Surface name: EG; Condition: Below
To calculate volumes for this situation, AutoCAD Civil 3D adds vertical links (numbers 1-4) to create closed
envelopes as shown in the following illustration.
Then the subcriteria are applied as follows, where (1) is subcriteria 1 (below EG, above subsoil), and (2) is
subcriteria 2 (below EG, above Rockbed).
Non-Overlapping Materials
The same subcriteria can be applied to the case of non-overlapping materials, as shown in the following
illustration.
Intersecting Materials
The case of intersecting materials is shown in the following illustration.
In this case, because Subsoil and Rockbed surfaces intersect, this situation could be addressed with a subcriteria
that uses 3 surfaces: Below EG, Above Subsoil, and Above Rockbed.
■ Subcriteria 1
■ Surface name: Datum; Condition: Above
■ Subcriteria 2
■ Surface name: Rock Under; Condition: Above
■ Subcriteria 3
■ Surface name: Datum; Condition: Above
To calculate volumes for this situation, AutoCAD Civil 3D adds vertical links (numbers 1-2) to create closed
envelopes as shown in the following illustration.
Then the subcriteria are applied as follows, where (1) is subcriteria 1 (above Datum, below Rock Bed), (2) is
subcriteria 2 (above Rock Under, below Rock Top), and (3) is subcriteria 3 (above Datum, below Rock Top).
■ Quantity Takeoff Criteria dialog box, Material List tab. For more information, see Creating Quantity
Takeoff Criteria (page 1279).
■ Edit Material List dialog box. This dialog box is displayed when you run the Compute Materials command
and the selected sample line group already has a material list associated with it.
■ Sample Line Group Properties dialog box, Material List tab. This procedure is documented below.
To add a material with subcriteria to the material list of a sample line group
1 Select a sample line. Click Sample Line tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Group Properties .
NOTE The material definition must exclusively contain subcriteria. Subcriteria cannot be combined with
material contain criteria other than subcriteria.
3 Define the Quantity Type for the material as either Cut, Fill, or Cut And Refill.
NOTE Earthworks and Structure Quantity Types are not supported for subcriteria.
5 Select the Subcriteria and use the controls under Define Material to add surfaces to it.
6 Select the new material again and click Add A Subcriteria to define the next subcriteria for it.
1 Set up shape styles. For more information, see Copying or Editing Shape Styles (page 1580).
2 Set up a Quantity Takeoff Criteria. Assign each material in the Quantity Takeoff Criteria a shape style.
For more information, see Creating Quantity Takeoff Criteria (page 1279).
3 Generate a material list. For more information, see Generating Material Lists (page 1282).
4 Create sections in the drawing. For more information, see To create multiple section views (page 1259).
5 Examine how the shape styles are applied to the sections. If material areas do not have a shape style
applied, then the volume for that material area will not be included in the volume calculation.
■ Volumes along an alignment, comparing various design surfaces and existing ground surfaces.
■ Volumes for shapes, which are closed cross-sectional areas created by a single subassembly. For example,
a curb (a closed area within a concrete curb or curb and gutter).
The results of a quantity takeoff calculation are displayed using one of the following three methods:
■ Total Volume Table
■ Quantities Report
A Total Volume Table contains cut, fill, and cumulative volume information (for example, an earthworks
or cut/fill report).
A Material Volume Table contains cut, fill, and cumulative volume information for a specific material in
the material list (for example, the cumulative volume of a structure element).
A Quantities Report is an XML format file that contains the criteria definition (comparable surfaces), material
types (such as cut type), shrink and swell factors, as well as refill factors. The specific format is determined
by the style sheet you select.
Style Sheets
Three style sheets installed with AutoCAD Civil 3D are used to create external quantity takeoff reports:
■ Earthworks.xsl. Reports station-by-station values in a tabular format for cut and fill volumes, incremental
volumes, and cumulative net volume.
■ Select Material.xsl. Reports station-by-station values for the selected materials. At each station, all selected
materials defined in this criteria and cumulative volumes are reported.
■ Mass Haul - Multiple Materials.xsl. If you have defined many material types to remove (for example, for
embankment creation for road widening along the corridor), you can use this style sheet to aggregate
the material types and produce material-by-material reports at each station as well as aggregate volume
reports for mass hauls.
1 Click Analyze tab ➤ Volumes And Materials panel ➤ Total Volume Table .
2 In the Create Total Volume Table dialog box (page 2567), select a table style and layer.
3 Click the Select Alignment field. Select an alignment from the list or click to select an alignment
in the drawing.
4 Click the Select Sample Line Group field. Select a sample line group from the list.
5 Click the Select Material List field. Select a material list from the list.
6 Optionally, select Split Table, and then specify the maximum and minimum number of rows in a table,
the distance to offset tables from each other, and the method for arranging multiple tables.
8 Click OK.
The upper-left corner of the new table is attached to your cursor.
1 Click Analyze tab ➤ Volumes And Materials panel ➤ Material Volume Table .
2 In the Create Material Volume Table dialog box (page 2566), select a table style and layer.
3 Click the Select Alignment field. Select an alignment from the list or click to select an alignment
in the drawing.
4 Click the Select Sample Line Group field. Select a sample line group from the list.
5 Click the Select Material List field. Select a material list from the list.
6 Click the Select a Material field. Select a material from the list.
7 Optionally, select Split Table, and then specify the maximum and minimum number of rows in a table,
the distance to offset tables from each other, and the method for arranging multiple tables.
9 Click OK.
The upper-left corner of the new table is attached to your cursor.
2 In the Report Quantities dialog box (page 2595), click the Select Alignment field. Select an alignment
3 Click the Select Sample Line Group field. Select a sample line group from the list.
4 Click OK.
5 Click the Select Material List field. Select a material list from the list.
6 Enter a style sheet name in the Select A Style Sheet field or click to browse for one.
7 To display the quantity takeoff report, select the Display XML Report check box.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE If you generate a quantity takeoff report, the style of the external file is controlled using the specified style
sheet. For more information, see the report generation information in Creating Sectional Volume Tables and
Reports (page 1290).
1 In Toolspace, in the Settings tree, under Quantity Takeoff, expand the Table Styles collection.
2 For the Total Volume or Material collection, right-click the collection ➤ .New.
3 In the Table Style dialog box (page 2735), enter or change the name of the style and other settings as
required.
4 Click OK.
1 In Toolspace, in the Settings tree, under Quantity Takeoff, expand the Table Styles collection.
4 In the Table Style dialog box (page 2735), edit the name of the style and other settings as required.
5 Click OK.
1 In Toolspace, in the Settings tree, under Quantity Takeoff, expand the Table Styles collection.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
■ Specification, which describes the material to be used, the method of incorporating the material, and
how the completed work will be measured and paid for
■ Cost estimate, which is made to ensure that the overall design falls within the budget available for the
project
Incorporating pay item information correctly into design plans including plan sheets, summaries, the
engineer’s estimate and bid documents is a major task for highway designers. Designers can use the QTO
Manager functionality to automate the pay item management process to reduce errors and eliminate disputes
with contractors.
Pay items can be associated with AutoCAD lines, open or closed polygons, blocks, or any AutoCAD or Civil
3D entity after they have been created. When pay items are assigned to a AutoCAD Civil 3D code set style,
a corridor object is automatically tagged with the specified pay items. When pay items are assigned to a
AutoCAD Civil 3D pipe network parts list, any new pipes or structures are automatically tagged with the
specified pay items.
1 Open a drawing containing objects to which you want to attach pay items.
4 In the Open Pay Item File dialog box, for Pay Item File Format, select either:
■ CSV (Comma Delimited)
■ AASHTO TransXML
■ Florida DOT
■ Click Open.
■ Click Open.
■ Click Turn On Categorization to view the categories on the categorized pay item list.
■ Click Turn Off Categorization to view all pay items on the uncategorized pay item list.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
3 In the QTO Manager vista, click Turn Off Categorization so you can filter the pay item list.
4 Enter a filter keyword, such as ‘slab’, in the Enter Text To Filter Pay Items field.
5 Click .
Only pay items with the word ‘slab’ in the Description column remain in the field.
6 Right-click any of the pay items and click Add To Favorites List.
The selected pay item is added to the Favorites list.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
3 In the QTO Manager vista, click Turn On Categorization so you can see the categorization of the
pay item list.
5 In the Open dialog box, select a categorization file and click Open.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
you can easily identify those objects using the Highlight Objects With Pay Items command. In a drawing
or an area of a drawing where most objects have been tagged with pay items, you can easily identify those
objects without attached pay items using the Highlight Objects Without Pay Items command. Also, by
using the Highlight Objects With Selected Pay Items command, you can identify objects tagged with
specific pay items.
3 To identify objects that have pay items attached, click Highlight Objects With Pay Items.
Only objects to which pay items are attached will be highlighted. Untagged objects are dimmed.
3 To identify objects without pay items attached, click Highlight Objects Without Pay Items.
All untagged objects are highlighted. Tagged objects are dimmed.
3 Filter (page 1296) for a specific Pay Item ID or pay item name(s).
4 To identify objects that have the selected pay item(s) attached, click Highlight Objects With Selected
Pay Items.
Objects with the selected pay item(s) are highlighted. All other objects are dimmed.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Tagging Manually
Tag objects or groups of similar objects with one or more pay items.
Tag a single object or enclosed area with one or more pay item (page 2779)s, or select each one of a type of
object or closed area and assign pay items to all objects in the group. You can add or remove a pay item for
a single object or its entire group.
5 Press Enter.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
4 Press Ctrl+click to select each pay item you want to assign from the pay item list.
5 Press Enter.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
6 In the Pay Item List dialog box, select the pay item you want to attach to the object in the drawing.
Click OK.
6 Click .
3 Select an object or a group of objects with attached pay item(s) you want to remove.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Tagging Automatically
Automatically tag corridors or pipe networks with pay items.
After you modify general and command settings, you can automatically tag corridors or new pipe network
parts with pay item (page 2779)s.
3 In the Code Set Style dialog box, on the Information tab, enter a Name.
■ Expand Link and click in the Pay Item cells for the links to which pay items will be attached.
■ Expand Point and click in the Pay Item cells for the points to which pay items will be attached.
5 Click OK.
1 In a drawing with pay item code set styles you created, select a corridor.
3 On the Properties palette, under Data, for Code Set Style Name, select a pay item code set style you
have created.
4 Press Esc.
7 On the Properties palette, under Data, for Code Set Style Name, select a pay item code set style you
created.
8 Press Esc.
NOTE You can also assign pay items to a corridor in the Corridor Properties dialog box. For more information on
this method see the Assigning Pay Item Codes to Corridors tutorial.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: General ➤ Multipurpose Styles ➤ Code Set Styles ➤ All Codes
Dialog Boxes
Code Set Style (page 1999)
1 Open a drawing that has both a pipe network and an open pay item file.
4 In the Quantity Takeoff Command Settings dialog box, under Compute Takeoff Options:
■ For Length Computation Type, select 3D.
5 Click OK.
1 Open a drawing in which you set the QTO command settings for pipes.
4 In the Pipe Network Properties dialog box, on the Layout Settings tab, next to Network Parts List for
5 In the Network Parts List dialog box, on the Pipes tab, expand the list to the desired part family or part
size.
6 In the Pay Item cell for the part family or part size you selected, click .
■ Filter to select a pay item to apply to the part family or part size.
8 Repeat Steps 6 and 7 for other part families or part sizes, as needed.
1 Open a drawing in which you set the QTO command settings for pipes.
4 In the Select Pipe Network dialog box, click OK to select the highlighted network.
5 On the Network Layout Tools toolbar, select the appropriate Structure and Pipe from the drop-down
lists.
7 In the drawing, click two points to place a pipe and two structures, as selected on the toolbar.
8 Press Enter.
The pipe and structures are placed in the drawing.
1 Open a drawing in which you set the QTO command settings for pipes.
5 In the Pay Item list, select an appropriate pay item to attach to the selected pipe network part(s).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Defining Formulas
Define formulas to modify pay items for use in different situations.
For example, you can use pay item (page 2779) formulas to apply specific masses to volumes, to convert one
unit of measurement to another, to apply a pay item to a set volume, or a number of other mathematical
operations.
Pay item formulas, unlike other mathematical expressions in AutoCAD Civil 3D (label expressions and design
checks), save to a separate FOR file, rather than in the drawing.
BEST PRACTICE Save the pay item formula file in the same location as the drawing with which it is used. If you
send the drawing to another user, you must also send the formula file.
4 In the QTO Manager vista, click in the Formula cell of a pay item attached to the object you selected.
5 If a warning dialog box opens (meaning there is no formula file for the drawing), click Specify Pay Item
Formula File.
■ For File Name, enter a unique name for the takeoff formula file.
■ Click Save.
■ Click , and select either Item Area, Item Count, Item Length, Part Depth, or other user-defined
parameter (as appropriate to the pay item). Your selection is inserted into the Expression field.
■ Use the keyboard or the numeric and logical operator keys, and functions from the list in the
dialog box, to complete the formula.
is displayed in the Formula cell of the selected pay item in the QTO Manager.
1 Open a drawing in which formulas have been created for pay items.
4 Use the filter or scroll down through the pay item list to find the pay item whose formula you want to
edit.
■ Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
3 In the Compute Quantity Takeoff dialog box, for Report Type, click Summary or Detailed, based on
whether you want to include each object, or each type of object, with attached pay items in your report.
5 Clear Limit Extents To Alignment Station Range to extend the report beyond the objects along a single
alignment.
7 Click Compute.
■ Click Draw to draw the report to the drawing, and/or click Save As to save the report.
1 Open a sheet drawing created from view frames in a drawing in which pay items are attached to objects.
3 In the Compute Quantity Takeoff dialog box, for Report Type, click Summary or Detailed, based on
whether you want each object, or each type of object, with attached pay items included in your report.
6 Clear Limit Extents To Alignment Station Range to extend the report beyond the objects along a single
alignment.
8 Click Compute.
■ Click Draw to draw the report to the drawing, and/or click Save As to save the report.
4 In the Compute Quantity Takeoff dialog box, for Report Type, click Summary or Detailed, based on
whether you want each object, or each type of object, with attached pay items included in your report.
5 Clear Limit Extents To Alignment Station Range to extend the report beyond the objects along a single
alignment.
7 Click Compute.
■ Click Draw to draw the report to the drawing, and/or click Save As to save the report.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Click Compute.
4 In the Quantity Takeoff Report dialog box, review the report in the text field.
6 Click Draw.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Click Compute.
4 In the Quantity Takeoff Report dialog box, review the report in the text field.
5 For report style sheet, from the drop-down list at the bottom of the Quantity Takeoff Report dialog box,
select:
■ Detailed Area (<file format>).xsl, Detailed Count (<file format>).xsl, or Detailed Linear (<file
format>).xsl for a detailed report.
8 If required, you can save the report in any other format (CSV, HTML, TXT or XML).
NOTE If you select Detailed as Report Type in the Compute Quantity Takeoff dialog box, you can save the
report using any style sheet. If you select Summary as Report Type, you can save the report using any summary
style sheet.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Click Compute.
4 In the Quantity Takeoff Report dialog box, review the report in the text field.
5 For report style sheet, from the drop-down list at the bottom of the Quantity Takeoff Report dialog box,
select:
■ Detailed (XML).xsl, for a detailed report.
8 If required, you can save the report in any other format (CSV, HTML, or TXT).
NOTE If you select Detailed as Report Type in the Compute Quantity Takeoff dialog box, you can save the
report using any style sheet. If you select Summary as Report Type, you can save the report using
TransPortDesignInterface.xsl or any summary style sheet.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
To export an Autodesk Takeoff Catalog and DWFs for use in Autodesk QTO
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Identification of borrow pit (page 2769)s and dump site (page 2773)s
To generate mass haul diagrams, you need an alignment, a sample line group, and a list of materials.
For information about creating a material list, see Generating Material Lists (page 1282).
Mass Haul
Measure mass haul volumes and mark grade points, balance points, and free haul and overhaul volumes.
A mass haul (page 2778) diagram presents a graphical view of material moved in the proposed design site,
displaying balance point (page 2768)s, free haul (page 2774) and overhaul (page 2779) regions, and grade point (page
2775)s. Mass haul diagrams are graphed with stations (sample lines) along the x-axis and cumulative material
(typically earthworks) volume on the y-axis. The middle axis (zero cumulative volume) line is called the
balance line (page 2768). When the mass haul line (page 2778) rises, it indicates that a project is in a cut region
and when it descends, it is in a fill region. A mass haul region is marked with balance points and grade
points.
Grade Point Method: The arrows indicate free haul distance, The number (1) indicates
grade points. Freehaul volume is indicated in green (and by the grid between the
green areas and the balance line) and overhaul volume is indicated in red.
Balance Point Method: The arrows indicate free haul distance. The number (1) indicates
balance points. Freehaul volume is indicated in green and overhaul volume is indicated
in red.
In a mass haul diagram, the balance point (page 2768)s are located on the balance line, where the net volume
is zero. In the balance points method of measuring free haul, the mass haul line is duplicated and shifted
horizontally to the right (where the project transitions from cut to fill) or to the left (where the project
transitions from fill to cut) by the free haul distance. The area enclosed by the two mass haul lines on the
left if above the balance line, or on the right if below the balance line, represents the free haul volume. The
remaining intersecting area represents the overhaul.
■ Specify the sample line group from which the mass haul diagram will be created.
■ To edit the mass haul view style, next to Mass Haul View Style, click . (See Editing Mass Haul
View Styles (page 1318).)
3 On the Mass Haul Display Option page (page 2565), do any of the following:
■ Select a material list.
■ Select a material to display as mass haul line (Total Volume, Total Cut Volume, Total Fill Volume,
Total Unusable Volume, and any other material associated with the material list).
■ To edit the mass haul line style, next to Mass Haul Line Style, click . (See Editing Mass Haul Line
Styles (page 1317).)
4 On the Balancing Options page (page 2566), specify a free haul distance, and the type, location, and
capacity of borrow pits and dump sites.
6 In the drawing, find a suitable location for the mass haul diagram. For ease of viewing, place the diagram
outside the surface boundary, and above or below any section or profile views. Click that location to
set the origin of the balance line at the left side of the mass haul diagram.
The mass haul diagram is displayed.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 To select a mass haul line and open the Mass Haul Line Properties (page 2574) dialog box, do either of
the following:
■ In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Sites collection ➤ <site name> ➤ Alignments
collection ➤ <alignment name> ➤ Sample Line Groups collection ➤ <sample line group name>
➤ Mass Haul Lines collection. Right-click the mass haul line whose properties you want to edit.
Click Properties.
■ In the active viewport, select the mass haul line whose properties you want to edit. Right-click and
click Mass Haul Line Properties.
2 On the Information tab of the Mass Haul Line Properties dialog box, do any of the following:
■ Change the name of the current mass haul line.
■ To edit the current mass haul line style, under Object Style, click . For more information, see
Editing Mass Haul Line Styles (page 1317).
■ Add or remove borrow pits and dump sites, specifying their type, location and capacity.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab ➤ <drawing name> ➤ Sites ➤ <site name> ➤ Alignments ➤ <alignment name> ➤
Sample Line Groups ➤ <sample line group name> ➤ Mass Haul Lines ➤ right-click <mass haul line
name>. Click Properties.
Dialog Box
Mass Haul Line Properties (page 2574)
1 To select a mass haul view and open the Mass Haul View Properties dialog box (page 2578), do either of
the following:
■ In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Sites collection ➤ <site name> ➤ Alignments
collection ➤ <alignment name> ➤ Sample Line Groups collection ➤ <sample line group name>
➤ Mass Haul Views collection. Right-click the mass haul view whose properties you want to edit.
Click Properties.
■ In the active viewport, select the mass haul view whose properties you want to edit. Right-click and
click Mass Haul View Properties.
2 On the Information tab of the Mass Haul View Properties dialog box, you can do any of the following:
■ Change the name of the current mass haul view.
■ To edit the current mass haul view style, under Object Style, click . (For more information, see
Editing Mass Haul View Styles (page 1318).)
3 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab ➤ <drawing name> ➤ Sites ➤ <site name> ➤ Alignments ➤ <alignment name> ➤
Sample Line Groups ➤ <sample line group name> ➤ Mass Haul Views ➤ right-click <mass haul view
name>. Click Properties.
Dialog Box
Mass Haul View Properties (page 2578)
1 In the active viewport, select the mass haul line whose styles you want to edit. Right-click and click
Edit Mass Haul Line Style.
2 On the Free Haul tab (page 2577) of the Mass Haul Line Style dialog box, specify how you want to show
free haul in the mass haul diagram: measured from grade points (page 1313) or measured from balance
point (page 1314).
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab ➤ <drawing name> ➤ Sites ➤ <site name> ➤ Alignments ➤ <alignment name> ➤
Sample Line Groups ➤ <sample line group name> ➤ Mass Haul Lines ➤ right-click <mass haul line
name>. Click Properties. In the Mass Haul Line Properties dialog box, Information tab, under Object Style,
click .
Dialog Box
Mass Haul Line Style (page 2576)
1 In the active viewport, select the mass haul view whose styles you want to edit. Right-click and click
Edit Mass Haul View Style.
2 On the Information tab of the Mass Haul View Style dialog box, specify administrative information,
such as the name of the style, and a description of the style.
3 On the Graph tab, specify the vertical and horizontal scale, and the view direction.
4 On the Grid tab (page 2580), specify how you want to show the grid.
5 On the Title Annotation tab, specify attributes of the text used to annotate the graph.
6 On the Horizontal Axes and Vertical Axes tabs, specify attributes of the major and minor ticks in the
graph.
7 On the Display tab (page 2586), in Component Display, set the visibility and color for the graph.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab ➤ <drawing name> ➤ Sites ➤ <site name> ➤ Alignments ➤ <alignment name> ➤
Sample Line Groups ➤ <sample line group name> ➤ Mass Haul Views ➤ right-click <mass haul view
name>. Click Properties. In the Mass Haul View Properties dialog box, Information tab, under Object Style,
click .
1 In Toolspace, in the Settings tree, under Mass Haul Line, expand the Mass Haul Line Style collection.
2 For the Mass Haul Line Style collection, do one of the following:
■ Right-click the collection. Click New.
3 In the Mass Haul Line Style dialog box (page 2576), enter or change the name of the style and other
settings as required.
4 Click OK.
1 In Toolspace, in the Settings tree, under Mass Haul Line, expand the Mass Haul Line Style collection.
3 In the Mass Haul Line Style dialog box (page 2576), change the Free Haul or Display settings as required.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, in the Settings tree, under Mass Haul View, expand the Mass Haul View Style collection.
2 For the Mass Haul View Style collection, do one of the following:
■ Right-click the collection. Click New.
3 In the Mass Haul View Style dialog box (page 2579), enter or change the name of the style and other
settings as required.
4 Click OK.
1 In Toolspace, in the Settings tree, under Mass Haul View, expand the Mass Haul View Style collection.
3 In the Mass Haul View Style dialog box (page 2579), change the Graph, Grid, Title Annotation, Horizontal
Axes, Vertical Axes, or Display settings as required.
4 Click OK.
1 In Toolspace, in the Settings tree, under Mass Haul View, expand the Commands collection.
3 In the Edit Command Settings - CreateMassHaulDiagram dialog box (page 2568), expand the Mass Haul
Creation tree.
5 Specify the Free Haul Distance value or leave the default setting.
6 Specify the Borrow Pit Capacity value or leave the default setting.
7 Specify the Dump Site Capacity value or leave the default setting.
8 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Create style: Settings tab: right-click Mass Haul View collection ➤ New
Copy style: Settings tab ➤ Mass Haul View collection ➤ Mass Haul View Styles collection: right-click
<style name> ➤ Copy
Edit style: Settings tab ➤ Mass Haul View collection ➤ Mass Haul View Styles collection: right-click <style
name> ➤ Edit
Edit command settings: Settings tab ➤ Mass Haul View collection ➤ Commands collection: right-click
CreateMassHaulDiagram ➤ Edit Command Settings
Command Description
EditBalancingOptions Edits free haul distances and dump site and borrow
pit locations (page 1319)
EditMassHaulLineStyle Edits free haul type and free haul line component
appearance (page 1317)
1323
1324
Pipe Networks
29
Use AutoCAD Civil 3D pipe network features to draw 2D and 3D models of utility systems, such as storm sewers, sanitary
sewers, and more.
You can create, edit, and delete pipe networks in plan view. You can also display pipe network parts in profiles and section
views. Changes made to pipe networks in plan view are dynamically updated in any profile and section views.
Style-based rendering and labeling capabilities let you quickly create pipe networks with meaningful visual effects and
data. For example, you can use many different styles to represent two-dimensional pipe networks in construction documents.
You can also use visual rendering features to add realistic looking effects to three-dimensional pipe networks. Labeling
features let you automatically add labels to identify specific types of pipes and structures within a pipe network.
AutoCAD Civil 3D also has interference checking features let you quickly identify areas where pipes or structures physically
collide, or are too close to one another.
You can also import or export pipe network data using Autodesk LandXML format, or analyze pipe network data through
an API interface or with support from external, third-party analysis programs.
AutoCAD Civil 3D includes extension applications that enable you to perform a variety of hydraulics and hydrology tasks
on pipe network data. For more information, see Hydraulics and Hydrology Feature Overview (page 1331).
1325
A pipe network can contain pipes only, structures only, or, more commonly, both pipes and structures. A
part catalog provides access to pipe network items, such as circular, elliptical, or rectangular pipes, manholes,
catch basins, and headwalls, and more.
After you have added a pipe network to your drawing, you can edit it in the following ways:
■ Create a parts list comprised of only the part catalog items needed for a particular project or network
■ Add, change, or delete labels on pipes, a span of connected pipes, structures, or on the entire pipe network
■ Use styles to display pipes and structures according to their true shapes, or choose a symbolic
representation, such as a block, for a structure
After the pipe network is created, you can extract a variety of data using LandXML export. For information,
see LandXML Import and Export (page 1875).
It is also possible to perform quantity take-off tasks on pipe networks by assigning pay items to individual
parts in a pipe network parts list. For more information, see Using Pay Items to Analyze Quantities (page
1293).
Like other AutoCAD Civil 3D objects, display styles for pipe network objects are based on styles assigned to
the objects: specifically, the pipe objects and structure objects. Before creating pipe networks, you should
be familiar with both creating and managing styles (page 66) and command settings (page 114).
Pipe Network
The pipe network object is used as the container object to associate pipes and structures that are part of the
same pipe run or pipe network. A pipe network typically contains pipe objects and structure objects. Pipe
network object names are displayed in the Prospector tree and in the Prospector list view.
Pipe
A pipe object is a drawing shape that represents straight or curved pipes used in utility networks, such as
sewer and irrigation systems. In a drawing, the three-dimensional pipe shape is defined by: 1) the
two-dimensional Part Shape (circular, elliptical, egg-shaped, or rectangular) of the pipe part that is selected
from the part catalog; and 2) by specifying a linear path (for straight piped) or a curved path (for curved
piped). Object names for pipes are not displayed in the Prospector tree. They are, however, displayed in the
Prospector list view when you click Pipes under a pipe network in the Prospector tree.
Structure
A structure object is a drawing shape that is used to represent items, such as manholes, catch basins, and
headwalls, used in utility networks. Structure shapes are inherently more complex than pipe shapes. In a
drawing, the three-dimensional structure shape is defined by the definition of the structure part that is
selected from the part catalog. Like pipes, object names for structures are not displayed in the Prospector
tree. They are, however, displayed in the Prospector list view when you click Structures under a pipe network
in the Prospector tree.
Null Structure
A null structure object is a special type of structure object that is inserted automatically when you connect
a pipe directly to another pipe, with no structure shape between the two pipes. Just like other types of
structure objects, object names for null structures are not displayed in the Prospector tree, but are displayed
in the Prospector list view. You can assign a style to null structures so that they are not visible in the drawing.
For overview information about AutoCAD Civil 3D objects, see Understanding Objects (page 63).
Default object style, rules, and render Parts List definition. Specifically, you use the
material for pipe and structure ob- Pipes tab (page 2272) or the Structures tab (page
jects 2272) of the Network Parts List dialog box.
Label style for pipe network object Create Pipe Network By Layout Dialog Box
during creation (page 2259)
Object style, rules, or render material Pipe Properties Dialog Box (page 2275) or Struc-
for pipe and structure objects already ture Properties Dialog Box (page 2288)
in a drawing
Display style for pipes or structures Pipe Style Dialog Box (page 2281) or Structure
displayed in plan, profile, and section Style Dialog Box (page 2294). You can also over-
views already in a drawing ride styles in Profile View Properties dialog box.
Display style for pipe network inter- Interference Style Dialog Box (page 2312)
ferences
In addition to specifying and editing object styles, display styles, rules, and render material, you can also
add labels to pipe and structure objects either during creation or after the objects have been added to a
drawing. For more information about pipe and structure labels, see Labeling Pipe Networks (page 1404).
For more information about styles, see Object and Label Styles (page 66).
Structure Terms
■ Rim. The top elevation of a manhole or catch basin (junction) structure.
■ Frame. The support for the cover on a manhole or grate for a catch basin. The top elevation of the frame,
cover, and grate typically coincides with the insert (rim) elevation.
■ Cover. The top access cover of a manhole, used for servicing or inspecting the manhole. Covers are
typically circular in shape, but they can also be triangular, so that they do not fall into the manhole
when removed. The cover sits in the frame and is usually constructed of cast iron.
■ Grate. The top opening of a catch basin that typically contains numerous openings to allow surface water
entry into the structure. The grate sits in the frame and is usually constructed of cast iron. Grates can be
various shapes but are typically circular or square.
■ Sump and sump depth. Sump refers to the bottom area or chamber on the inside of a junction structure,
such as a catch basin. The sump area is sometimes used as a reservoir to catch debris. Sump depth refers
to the distance from the bottom of the inside of the structure to the lowest invert of all pipes connected
The following illustration shows the locations of components on a typical junction structure.
Pipe Terms
■ Invert. The elevation of the inside bottom of a pipe. Also referred to as flowline.
■ Cover or Depth. Refers to the depth of the material above the topmost outer part of a pipe.
■ Slope. When slope is used to refer to the slope of a pipe, it is a measure of steepness. For pipes, the slope
is defined by rise (or fall) over run, where rise is the difference in elevation along a run of pipe length,
measured horizontally. Slope is typically represented in percent. For example, a slope of pipe at 2% means
that for every 100 feet of horizontal length of pipe, the pipe rises 2 feet. In AutoCAD Civil 3D, the slope
can be represented in a variety of ways in dialog boxes and in labels in the drawing.
Extension Description
Hydraflow Storm Sewers Extension Enables you to perform storm sewer design and analysis on
pipe network models. It is designed primarily for hydraulic and
hydrologic analysis of simple and complex storm sewer networks
with pavement drainage and inlet analysis. It can also be used
as to determine the hydraulic grade line in an existing system,
or for planning or designing new systems. Using Storm Sewers,
you can add hydraulic information, such as hydraulic grade
lines and energy grade lines, to AutoCAD Civil 3D pipe network
models. For more information, see Moving Pipe Network Data
Between AutoCAD Civil 3D and Storm Sewers (page 1417) and
Adding Hydraulic Property Data to AutoCAD Civil 3D Pipe
Networks (page 1424).
Hydraflow Hydrographs Extension Used for detention pond design and modeling of simple or
complex watersheds using the SCS and/or Rational methods.
This extension lets you perform a host of functions, including
hydrograph combining, channel reach and pond routing, and
hydrograph diverting.
Hydraflow Express Extension Provides a collection of calculators for solving hydraulics and
hydrology tasks on culverts, channels, inlets, hydrology, and
weirs. You can model and design culverts with circular, box,
elliptical, and arch shapes; compute normal-depth rating curves
for rectangular, trapezoidal, triangular, compound gutter, cir-
cular, and user-defined channel shapes. You can also calculate
hydraulics for six inlet types, including curb, grate, combination,
drop curb, drop grate, and slotted. This extension supports
SCS, Rational, and Modified Rational methods for computing
a single hydrograph.
For information about using AutoCAD Civil 3D to perform hydraulics and hydrology tasks, see Using
Hydraulics and Hydrology Features (page 1417).
Command Description
Import Data From Land Desktop You can use the Import Data From Land Desktop
command (ImportLDTData) to import pipe run
data from AutoCAD Land Desktop into AutoCAD
Civil 3D. When you import pipe data, each con-
tinuous pipe run in AutoCAD Land Desktop is
imported as a new, single pipe network object in
AutoCAD Civil 3D. For more information, see
Importing LandXML Drawing Data (page 1883).
LandXML Import You can export pipe run data from AutoCAD Land
Desktop using the LandXML Export command
(LandXMLOut) and then import it into AutoCAD
Civil 3D using the LandXML Import command
(LandXMLIn). For more information about these
commands, see LandXML Import and Export
(page 1875).
Before importing Land Desktop pipe run data, make sure the Parts List you associate with the pipe network
has part sizes that make sense for the pipe run you will be importing. See Part Catalog and Parts Lists (page
1380) for more information.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Pipe Network drop-down ➤ Pipe Network Creation Tools
, or in the Prospector tree, expand the Pipe Networks collection, then right-click the Networks collection,
and click Create Pipe Network By Layout.
2 In the Create Network (page 2259) dialog box, in the Network Name field, enter a name for the pipe
network.
To name the pipe network, select a default name from the naming template, or enter a new name. For
more information, see Name Template Dialog Box (page 2022).
3 In the Network Description field, enter an optional text description for this pipe network.
4 In the Network Parts List field, select a parts list or accept the default parts list for this pipe network.
For more information, see Part Catalog and Parts Lists (page 1380).
5 To view or change the default layers that will be assigned to various pipe network parts as they are
created, click Layers to open the Network Layers (page 2301) dialog box.
6 To reference a surface and/or an alignment, select the item from the list, or click to select a surface
and/or alignment in the drawing.
7 Optionally, you may select label styles for pipes and structures added to the pipe network. When <none>
is specified, no labels are added to the items, but you can add labels later if desired. See Labeling Pipe
Networks (page 1404) for more information.
8 Click OK in the Create Pipe Network dialog box. The Network Layout Tools toolbar is displayed, and
the pipe network name is displayed in the Pipe Networks collection on the Prospector tab.
9 On the Network Layout Tools toolbar, select the desired parts (pipes and structures) in the Pipe List and
Structure List. For example, select 48-inch Concentric Catch Basin for a structure, and 12-inch Concrete
Pipe 1 US Imperial for a pipe. For more information, see Part Catalog and Parts Lists (page 1380).
10 Select the types of pipe network objects you want to insert by clicking the Down Arrow button next to
Draw Pipes And Structures and selecting one of the following:
■ Pipes and Structures. Inserts pipes and structures during the same command operation. This is
the default command when creating a new pipe network.
■ Pipes Only. Inserts just one or more pipes (without inserting structures) into the pipe network.
■ Structures Only. Inserts just one or more structures into the pipe network, without inserting
any pipes.
11 Click the Toggle Upslope/Downslope button to set the direction of the pipe networks part(s) to either
a positive slope value or direction (upslope) or a negative slope value or direction (downslope). This
button acts as a toggle. Downslope is the default. When the downslope icon is displayed, each
new pipe that is inserted will slope downstream from the previous part. When the upslope icon
is displayed, each new pipe inserted will slope upstream from the previous part.
12 Begin drawing the pipe network by specifying the insertion point for the first part (pipe or structure)
of the pipe network.
NOTE If you are in Draw Pipes And Structures mode, the first click defines the first structure insertion point,
as well as the starting point of the first pipe object. The second click specifies the end of the first pipe object,
and inserts a new structure object connected to that pipe. Subsequent clicks specify insertion points for
subsequent pipes and structures until you end the command by pressing Enter. If you are in Draw Pipes Only
mode, each click specifies the insertion point for a pipe end (a pipe start point or end point). If you are in
Draw Structures Only mode, each click specifies the insertion point for a structure.
14 When you finish drawing the pipe network, press Enter to end the command.
After you create a pipe network, you may want to refine parts of it. For example, you may want to add a
new pipe or structure, remove parts, move parts, or add labels. For information, see Editing Pipe Networks
(page 1345).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Pipe Network drop-down ➤ Pipe Network Creation Tools
Menu
Entity Description
You can select objects in the current drawing or from an Xref. You can create a pipe network that includes
the types of pipes and structures you specify.
This method of creating a pipe network uses the Pipes and Structures insertion method. You cannot use the
Pipes Only or Structures Only insertion mode with this command. If you want to create a single pipe, or a
single structure using this command, create the pipe network with pipes and structures, and then delete the
desired parts.
Vertex Elevation
Reference =
Outside Top
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Pipe Network drop-down ➤ Create Pipe Network From Object
.
You may be prompted to reverse flow direction. Press Enter or click OK to keep the current flow direction.
Click Reverse to change the current flow direction. Flow direction arrows indicate the direction of the
flow.
3 In the Create Pipe Network From Object (page 2260) dialog box, specify a name for the pipe network.
4 In the Description field, enter an optional description for the pipe network.
5 In the Network Parts List field, select a parts list or accept the default parts list for this pipe network.
For more information, see Part Catalog and Parts Lists (page 1380).
6 In both the Pipe To Create and Structure To Create fields, select the types of pipes and structures to be
used.
NOTE You must select both a pipe and a structure type. After creating the pipe network, if desired, you can
delete parts you want removed.
7 To view or change the default layers that will be assigned to various pipe network parts, click Layers to
open the Pipe Network Layers (page 2301) dialog box.
8 To reference a surface and/or an alignment, select the item in the list, or click to select a surface and/or
alignment in the drawing.
9 If you want the originally selected object to be removed from the drawing automatically, clear the Erase
Existing Entity check box.
10 Select the Use Vertex Elevations check box if you want to use the elevations of any vertices along the
selected entity to set the elevations of the pipes created in the network.
NOTE For 3D entity types, this option determines if the 3D vertex elevations are honored by the pipes
created. When checking this option, rules are not applied as they would likely be in conflict with the vertex
elevations.
11 If you selected the Use Vertex Elevations option, specify a Vertex Elevation Reference (Outside Top,
Crown, Centerline, Invert, or Outside Bottom).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Pipe Network drop-down ➤ Create Pipe Network From Object
Menu
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Alignment drop-down ➤ Create Alignment From Network
Parts
2 Select the first part (pipe or structure) to be used as the starting point for the alignment.
■ To select parts along an ambiguous path (for example, when laterals exist in the path), select the
desired parts to create the path defining the alignment.
4 Press Enter after you have selected the desired parts (defining the path for the alignment).
5 In the Create Alignment From Network (page 2261) dialog box, specify a Site or accept the default <None>.
See Alignment and Site Interaction (page 781) for more information.
11 Optionally, click Create Profile And Profile View to create a profile and a profile view from this alignment.
12 Click OK.
13 If you selected Create Profile And Profile View, the Create Profile View dialog box is displayed. Create
the profile view and click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Alignment drop-down ➤ Create Alignment From Network Parts
Menu
TIP You can use transparent commands for pipe network objects when you are prompted to specify radius, length,
or station offset. For more information, see Using Transparent Commands Within a Running Command (page
1768).
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Pipe Network drop-down ➤ Pipe Network Creation Tools
to create a new pipe network, or Pipe Networks tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Pipe Network to select
an existing pipe network.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Pipe Network drop-down ➤ Pipe Network Creation Tools
Menu
Pipes menu ➤ Create Pipe Network By Layout or Pipes menu ➤ Edit Pipe Network
You can draw curved pipes when you are using Draw Pipes And Structures insertion mode or when you
are using the Pipes Only insertion mode.
No matter which insertion mode you are using, the resulting curved geometry is equivalent to the AutoCAD
arc object, where the insertion point (or start point) of the pipe, the midpoint, and the endpoint of the
curved pipe can be gripped to edit the arc.
Curved pipe objects do not have persistent tangency once the curved pipe is created. Therefore, once a
curved pipe is grip edited, any tangency to adjacent pipes may be lost.
There are three ways that you can create curved pipes. Each of these methods are similar to methods used
for creating alignment curves, or AutoCAD arc objects.
TIP You can use transparent commands for pipe network objects when you are prompted to specify radius, length,
or station offset. For more information, see Using Transparent Commands Within a Running Command (page
1768).
1 On the Network Layout Tools toolbar, click Pipes Only or Pipes and Structures.
2 If you clicked Pipes and Structures mode, specify the insertion point for the structure.
If you clicked Pipes Only mode, specify the first pipe point.
1 On the Network Layout Tools toolbar, click Pipes Only or Pipes and Structures.
2 If you clicke Pipes and Structures mode, specify the insertion point for the structure.
If you clicked Pipes Only mode, specify the first pipe point.
1 On the Network Layout Tools toolbar, click Pipes Only or Pipes and Structures.
2 If you clicked Pipes and Structures mode, specify the insertion point for the structure.
If you clicked Pipes Only mode, specify the first pipe point.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Pipe Network drop-down ➤ Pipe Network Creation Tools
Menu
Pipes menu ➤ Create Pipe Network By Layout or Pipes menu ➤ Edit Pipe Network
Command Line
EditNetwork
Dialog Box
Network Layout Tools (page 2268)
See also:
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, in Master View, ensure that the correct working folder is identified
on the Data Shortcuts node.
2 Expand the Data Shortcuts ➤ Pipe Networks collection, right-click the desired network, and then click
Create Reference.
The Create Pipe Network Reference dialog box is displayed, in which you can optionally change properties
of the reference network, as described in the following steps.
3 In the Create Pipe Network Reference dialog box, to change the source of the reference, select the source
in the Source Pipe Network drop-down list.
4 Enter a unique name for the pipe network and optionally, a description.
7 Select to include, or not include, source drawing labels or select other label styles.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, in Master View, expand the Projects ➤ <project name> ➤ Pipe
Networks collection, right-click the desired network, and then click Create Reference.
The Create Pipe Network Reference dialog box is displayed, in which you can optionally change properties
of the reference network, as described in the following steps.
2 In the Create Pipe Network Reference dialog box, to change the source of the reference, select the source
in the Source Pipe Network drop-down list.
3 Enter a unique name for the pipe network and optionally, a description.
6 Select to include, or not include, source drawing labels or select other label styles.
Prospector tab: Data Shortcuts ➤ Pipe Networks ➤ <network name> ➤ Create Reference
Toolspace Right-Click Menu (for Vault project)
Prospector tab: Projects ➤ <project name> ➤ Pipe Networks ➤ <network name> ➤ Create Reference
Command Line
CreateNetworkReference (for Vault pipe network only)
Dialog Box
Create Pipe Network Reference Dialog Box (page 2451)
1 Select the pipe network. Click Pipe Networks tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Reset Labels .
2 Select a referenced pipe network part. The pipe network’s labels are deleted and replaced with labels
from the source drawing. If you select parts from multiple referenced pipe networks, changes apply to
all of the referenced pipe networks.
NOTE After selecting this command, if there are no referenced pipe networks in the current drawing, an
error message is displayed. If a source drawing is not found, an error message is displayed. If you select a
part that is not from a referenced pipe network, you are prompted to select a referenced pipe network part.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the pipe network. Pipes menu ➤ Utilities ➤ Reset Network Labels
Command Line
ResetNetworkLabels
NOTE Overrides to the drawing ambient settings at the Pipe Network collection level, the Pipe collection level,
the Structure collection level, and the Pipe Network Commands collection level affect only the specified level. The
drawing level settings are not changed.
The topics in this section describe only those settings that affect pipe networks and pipe network commands.
For more information about the drawing ambient settings for the Pipe Network, Pipe, and Structure collections,
see Specifying Ambient Settings (page 84).
■ To edit settings for a specific command: In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Commands
collection in the Pipe Network collection. Right-click the name of the command for which you want
to change settings. Click Edit Command Settings. For example, right-click the CreateNetwork
command and click Edit Command Settings.
2 To edit the default naming format for pipe networks and data that can be extracted from the pipe
network, expand the Default Name Format property group. Edit the Name Template settings.
3 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the Pipe Network collection. Click Edit Feature Settings to
open the Pipe Network Settings (page 2262) dialog box.
3 To specify a default style for pipe network objects, such as pipes and structures, or for render material,
click the corresponding field. Click to display the default style dialog box, where you can select a
style.
4 To specify a default label style for pipe network components in plan and profile views, click the
corresponding field. Click to display the label style dialog box, where you can select a label style.
5 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
■ editing pipe and structure properties using the Pipe Network Vista
■ exporting a pipe network to an .stm file, and then editing the .stm file using the Storm Sewers Extension.
Once edited, you can import the pipe network (.stm file) back into AutoCAD Civil 3D and the changes
that were made using the Storm Sewers Extension are recognized in AutoCAD Civil 3D.
2 Click a button in the Network Layout Tools (page 2268) dialog box to add, change, or delete pipe network
parts, or change the surface, alignment or parts list that are referenced.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select pipe network. Click Pipe Networks tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Pipe Network
Menu
See also:
1 Select a pipe network part in the drawing. Right-click the part and click Edit Network.
NOTE You can edit only values that are available, you cannot edit data in disabled (shaded) cells.
Grip editing a pipe that is connected to a structure does not move the structure along with it. Depending
on the rim and sump behaviors of the structure, it may be necessary to adjust the structure vertically to
accommodate a new sump elevation, or top of barrel, when the pipe is disconnected from the structure.
Snapping to 3D
When viewing and editing pipe networks in plan view, you can quickly edit not only the two-dimensional
geometry of the pipe, but you can also snap the pipe to three-dimensional locations to affect the elevation
of either end of a pipe, or both ends simultaneously.
■ Use the midpoint resize grip to change the width of the pipe.
exporting AutoCAD Civil 3D pipe Exporting Pipe Network Data to an .stm File (page
networks to an .stm file 1423)
importing an .stm file into the Hy- the Hydraflow Storm Sewers Extension User’s
draflow Storm Sewers Extension Guide Help
editing pipe networks in the Hydra- the Hydraflow Storm Sewers Extension User’s
flow Storm Sewers Extension Guide Help
importing an .stm file into AutoCAD Importing Pipe Network Data from an .stm File
Civil 3D (page 1422)
adding or editing hydraulic data Adding Hydraulic Property Data to AutoCAD Civil
(HGL, EGL, and so on) 3D Pipe Networks (page 1424)
You can also use the EditInStorm Sewers command to browse to an .stm file, and automatically open it in
the Storm Sewers Extension.
■ Click a pipe network in the drawing to display the Pipe Networks contextual tab. On the Pipe
Networks contextual tab, click Analyze panel ➤ Storm Sewers drop-down ➤ Edit In Storm Sewers
.
2 On the Export To Storm Sewers dialog box, select the pipe networks to export, and click OK.
NOTE You must select one or more entire pipe networks. You cannot select individual parts, or a series of
connected parts within a pipe network.
3 Enter a name and select a location for the .stm file, and click Save.
The .stm file is created, and the Storm Sewers Extension launches. The exported pipe network data is displayed
in Storm Sewers Extension. For more specific information about using the Storm Sewers Extension to edit
pipe networks, see the Storm Sewers Extension Help.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Pipe Networks tab ➤ Analyze panel ➤ Storm Sewers drop-down ➤ Edit In Storm Sewers
Command Line
EditInStormSewers
Dialog Box
Export to Storm Sewers Dialog Box (page 2316)
1 Select the pipe network. Click Pipe Networks tab ➤ Modify panel Change Flow Direction .
A prompt is displayed indicating that you should select the part (pipe or structure) that you want to be
used as the upstream starting point in plan view.
2 In the drawing, click a pipe or structure in the pipe network to define the upstream starting point for
the flow direction change.
A prompt is displayed indicating that you should select the part (pipe or structure) that you want to be
used as the downstream ending point in plan view.
■ You can click Undo at any time during this command to undo the previously selected part and path.
4 When you have finished defining the path for the flow direction change, press Enter to end the command
and implement the flow direction change on the parts in the selected path.
A prompt indicating that the flow direction has been successfully applied to the part(s) is displayed.
The Flow Direction property value on the Part Properties tab of the Pipe Properties dialog box is changed
(from Start to End to End to Start, or from End to Start from Start to End).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
What the structure grips change depends on how the structure’s Insertion (Rim) and Sump Behavior properties
are set. For example, if you have the structure’s Automatic Surface Adjustment property enabled, grip editing
the structure modifies the surface adjustment factor. If you have the Automatic Surface Adjustment property
disabled, grip editing the structure modifies the rim (insertion) elevation. For sump behavior properties, if
you have the Sump Depth property enabled, grip editing the structure modifies the sump depth. If you have
the Sump Elevation property enabled, grip editing the structure modifies the sump elevation. See the Part
Properties tab (page 2289) of the Structure Properties dialog box for more information.
■ To move the location of a structure that has pipes connected to it, in the drawing, click the center grip
of the structure and move it to a new location.
■ While viewing structures in a profile view, use the structure’s rim or sump depth grips to adjust the
elevation of either.
■ edit inner diameter, inner width, or inner height of pipes connected to a structure
■ quickly edit elevations on multiple pipes to match the elevation of a selected pipe
1 In the drawing, right-click the structure you want to edit, and then select Structure Properties from the
shortcut menu.
3 To edit the following properties, click the value in the cell and enter a new value, or select one from
the list: inner diameter (for circular pipes), inner width or inner height (for non-circular pipes).
NOTE On this tab, the read-only slope value refers to the slope of the pipe as it is coming out of the structure
(slope out).
4 To edit the elevation for a single pipe, select the pipe and edit the invert, centerline, or crown elevation
value.
5 To edit elevations for multiple pipes, see for Matching Elevations on Connected Pipes (page 1363) more
information.
6 Click Apply to make the changes, or click OK to make the changes and close the Structure Properties
dialog box.
Before editing junction structures, make sure you understand the following about the resize behavior:
■ Elevation changes to the junction structure’s rim, connected pipes, or sump, could occur when the
structure is grip edited, or when the referenced surface changes, or when pipe elevations are changed.
■ Note that the resize behaviors explained here apply only to junction structures. They do not apply to
inlet/outlet structures or null structure types.
■ To verify that a structure is categorized as a junction structure, check that the Part_Type property is set
to Struct_Junction. This is displayed on the Part Properties tab of the Structure Properties dialog box, in
the Part Data section.
These changes to elevation in the junction structure’s rim, connected pipes, or sump, could occur because
the structure is grip edited, or because the referenced surface is edited, or because a connected pipe elevation
is moved. Any of these types of edits may result in elevation changes to parts of the structure.
1 In the Prospector tree, click the pipe network object, right-click, and click Edit Network. The Network
Layout Tools toolbar is displayed.
2 On tNetwork Layout Tools toolbar, click and select one of the following choices: Pipes and Structures,
Pipes Only, or Structures Only.
3 In the drawing, specify the insertion point by clicking on the pipe network object you want to connect
to.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Pipe Network drop-down ➤ Pipe Network Creation Tools
Menu
NOTE Part swapping should not be confused with part sizing. In part sizing, an existing part is resized within the
same part family.
1 In the drawing, right-click the pipe or structure object to swap and click Swap Part.
2 In the Swap Part Size dialog box, expand a part family. Select the part to swap and click OK.
The new part is displayed in the drawing. View the description of the new part by right-clicking on the part
and selecting Pipe Properties.
The selected parts now belong to the destination pipe network. If you chose to create a new pipe network,
the new pipe network name is displayed in Prospector.
Most of the part properties of the selected parts are not modified when splitting a pipe network. Part properties
such as the referenced surface, referenced alignment and labeling, remain unchanged when the pipe network
is split. The only part property that changes is the pipe network that the parts are associated with.
3 In the Select Source Pipe Network dialog box, select the pipe network that you want to merge with
another pipe network, and then click OK.
The source pipe network is the pipe network that will be added to the destination pipe network.
4 In the Select Destination Pipe Network dialog box, select the desired destination pipe network, and
then click OK.
The pipe network parts from the source pipe network are added to the destination pipe network. The source
pipe network name is deleted from the Prospector tree.
Most of the part properties of the selected parts are not modified when merging pipe networks. Part properties
such as the referenced surface, referenced alignment and labeling, remain unchanged when merged. The
only part property that changes is the pipe network that the parts are associated with.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ When grip editing is used to move, lengthen, or shorten a pipe, the connectivity to any structures
connected to that pipe will be lost. There is one exception to this rule: if the pipe end being gripped is
moved to the location within the structure it was originally attached to, then the connectivity is
maintained.
■ When grip editing a pipe that is attached to a structure, moving the pipe does not move the structure.
The pipe becomes disconnected from the structure. The only affect this type of edit may have is to
possibly resize the structure vertically to accommodate for a new sump elevation or top of barrel when
the pipe is disconnected.
■ When grip editing a pipe, if no 3D OSNAP is used (any value other than zero), the elevation of the end
of the pipe is maintained when the pipe is grip edited and connected to a new structure.
■ When grip editing a pipe that is moved over an existing pipe that it will “break,” the end of the pipe
being edited moves to the elevation of the pipe being broken.
■ In the drawing, right-click the pipe or structure object and click Disconnect From Part. If you selected a
structure, you will be prompted to select the pipe to disconnect from.
The part name is displayed in the Pipe Networks collection on the Prospector tab.
1 In the drawing, right-click the disconnected pipe or structure object and click Connect To Part.
You can delete pipes or structures using the Basic Modify Tools ➤ Erase command, or using the Delete Pipe
Network Object button on the Network Layout Tools toolbar, or by selecting the object in the Prospector
list view and choosing Delete from the shortcut menu.
■ In the drawing, right-click the pipe or structure you want to delete. Choose Basic Modify Tools ➤ Erase,
or select the part and press the Delete key on your keyboard.
The structure or pipe object is erased from the drawing and removed from the Prospector list view.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Pipe Networks collection, then expand the Networks
collection.
2 Right-click the pipe network and choose Edit Network to display the Network Layout Tools toolbar.
3 On the Network Layout Tools toolbar, click Delete Pipe Network object.
The structure or pipe object is erased from the drawing and removed from the Prospector list view.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Pipe Networks collection, then expand the desired pipe
network to display the Pipes and Structures collections beneath it.
2 If you want to delete one or more pipe objects, click the Pipes collection in the Prospector tree. If you
want to delete one or more structures, click the Structures collection. Hold down the Shift key to select
multiple objects.
The structure or pipe object is erased from the drawing and removed from the Prospector list view.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Pipe Networks collection, then expand the Networks
collection.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
NOTE Make sure you select all of the pipe network. If you do not copy all of the parts associated with the
pipe network, the selected parts will be copied to the existing pipe network.
2 Use any of the following methods to copy the pipe network to the clipboard: CTRL+C, the AutoCAD
COPYCLIP command, or Clipboard ➤ Copy from the right-click shortcut menu.
3 Press CTRL+V.
At the command line, you are prompted to specify an insertion point for the pipe network.
5 To edit the name of the pipe network, right-click the pipe network in the Prospector tree. Click Network
Properties.
The Pipe Network Properties dialog box is displayed with the Information tab (page 2269) active. The
Name field contains the name of the copied pipe network, which is, by default, “ <pipe network-name>
(1).”
7 Optionally, enter a new description of the pipe network in the Description field.
8 Click Apply to make the changes, or click OK to make the changes and close the Pipe Network Properties
dialog box.
1 Select the pipe network. Click Pipe Networks tab ➤ Modify panel Rename Parts .
2 In the drawing, select the first part (pipe or structure) within the pipe network that you want to rename.
NOTE If you select a pipe or structure that is not connected to another pipe or structure, you can only rename
that single part.
3 Select the last part in the same pipe network that you want to rename.
5 You can enter a new starting number or leave this field blank.
6 Select one of the following Name Conflict Options. These determine how to handle any conflicts with
the naming or numbering, if there are any conflicts.
■ Skip Number: When this option is selected, if a name and number combination is already being
used by a pipe network part in the drawing, then the number is incremented until that name\number
combination is available as a name for the selected part.
■ Rename Existing Parts: When this option is selected, if a name and number combination is already
being used by a pipe network part in the drawing, then that part will be renamed so that the selected
part can use that desired name instead. The original part will be renamed using the next name and
number combination that is available.
■ In the drawing, right-click on a part and select Pipe Properties or Structure Properties. View the updated
pipe or structure names on the Information tab of the Pipe Properties or Structure Properties dialog box.
■ In the Prospector tree, expand the Pipe Networks ➤ Networks collection, and then expand the pipe
network containing the renamed parts. Click Pipes or Structures and view the updated part names in the
Pipe Network Vistas (page 2302).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the pipe network. Pipe Networks tab ➤ Modify panel Rename Parts
Menu
1 In the drawing, right-click the structure, select Structure Properties, and then click the Connected Pipes
tab.
2 Press and hold the CTRL key on your keyboard and select more than one of the pipes displaying on
the Connected Pipes tab.
NOTE You must select multiple pipes for the match crown, centerline, and invert options to display on the
right-click shortcut menu.
3 While still holding down the CTRL key, right-click and select one of the following options from the
shortcut menu.
■ Match crowns
■ Match centerlines
■ Match inverts
4 On the Match Elevation dialog box, click the pipe you want to match crown, centerline, or invert
elevations to.
5 Optionally, enter a Drop Amount to adjust the elevation by the specified value.
6 Click OK to make the changes and close the Match Elevation dialog box.
7 On the Connected Pipes tab, verify that the selected elevation value has been edited.
8 Click Apply to make the changes, or click OK to make the changes and close the Structure Properties
dialog box.
NOTE You cannot move the X, Y locations of parts in a profile view. However, you can grip edit elevations, edit
object properties, or resize parts.
NOTE The pipes are represented at the elevation of the pipe where they meet the structure, which is typically the
centerline.
1 Make sure that the desired profile view is already created. See Profiles (page 1113) for more information.
2 Make sure that the pipe network parts you want to display in the profile view have already been created
in plan view, and have valid station offset data from the alignment they reference.
3 Select the profile view. Click Profile tab ➤ Launch Pad panel ➤ Draw Parts In View .
4 In the drawing, select the pipe network parts you wish to add to the profile view, or enter E to select
an entire pipe network.
Only the pipe network parts that cross the sample line are displayed in the section view.
NOTE The smoothness (tessellation) of curved edges of the pipes in section view is controlled by the FACETDEV
(Facet Deviation) system variable. The default value for FACETDEV will usually cause circular pipe sections to be
displayed with eight segments. If you set FACETDEV lower, the appearance of the pipe sections will become more
circular. For more information, see Networks in Profile and Section Views.
Pipes and structures that cross the sample line are displayed in the section view as a crossing version of the
part. This is unlike profile views where pipe network parts can be displayed both as projected and crossing
versions. See Displaying Pipe Crossings (page 1367) for more information.
Pipe objects that are displayed in a section view are displayed according to the style specified on the Sections
tab. Structures are displayed in a section view as a representation of the body of the part, even if only a
portion of the shape crosses the sample line.
When you use the Create Sample Line Group dialog box to create a sample line, you can select any and all
pipe networks in the drawing. However, only pipe network parts that actually cross the sample line are
displayed in the section view.
If you wish to display pipe network parts in a section view, a Pipe Network Section object gets created when
you create a sample line with pipe network parts that cross it. The Pipe Network Sections collection is
displayed under the Sample Line Groups collection in the Prospector tree. See Sections (page 1225) for more
information.
NOTE Network parts displaying in a section view are exaggerated vertically to match the vertical scale factor of
the view in which they are being represented.
1 Make sure the pipe network parts you want to display in the section view have already been created in
plan view and have valid station offset data associated with them.
2 Create the desired sample line and section view. See Sections for more information. The procedure is
similar to the procedure for creating surface sections.
See also:
■ The overlapping pipe ends are trimmed to the inside edges of the pipes when only the inside edges are
displayed, or when both the inside and outside edges of the pipes are displayed.
■ The outside edges of the pipes are trimmed only when the outside edges of the pipes are displayed (when
the inside edges of the pipes are not displayed).
The following illustration shows a profile of a pipe to pipe connection with the pipe end clean up option
turned on.
When this option is not checked, the appearance of pipe to pipe connections displayed in profile view is
not cleaned up. The following illustration shows a profile of a pipe to pipe connection with the pipe end
clean up option turned off.
By default, this option is not checked (turned off). But you can simply turn it on for existing (legacy) pipes
to have the pipe to pipe connections cleaned up.
■ The pipe end clean up option can only be used when there is a null structure between two pipes.
■ This option behaves the same on straight and curved pipes displayed in profile views.
■ This option trims (removes) the overlapping pipe ends to the inside edges when only the inside edges
are displayed, or when both the inside and outside edges are displayed.
■ This option trims to the outside edges only when the outside edges are displayed (when the inside edges
are not displayed).
1 Right-click on a pipe in a pipe to pipe connection and click Edit Pipe Style.
3 At the bottom of this dialog box, place a check mark next to the Clean Up Pipe To Pipe Connections
option.
4 Click OK.
In profile views, the pipe ends in pipe to pipe connections are trimmed (cleaned up).
1 Right-click on a pipe in a pipe to pipe connection and click Edit Pipe Style.
3 At the bottom of this dialog box, place a check mark next to the Clean Up Pipe To Pipe Connections
option.
4 Click OK.
In plan views, the pipe ends in pipe to pipe connections are trimmed (cleaned up).
You can run an interference check that identifies parts in their 3D representation that are less than a specified
distance away from any part in the other network. The distance is checked in every direction surrounding
each part.
When you run an interference check, an Interference Check object gets created and is displayed in the
Prospector tree in the Pipe Networks ➤ Interference Checks collection. For more information, see Viewing
Interference Check Results (page 1375).
Specifying a Distance
When you choose to enter a specified distance to perform the proximity check, you can enter a value that
is used to perform the proximity check. When you run the check, interferences are created for any pipe
network part that is less than the specified distance away from any other part in the specified network(s),
in any direction.
1 In the Create Interference Check dialog box, click 3D Proximity Check Criteria.
■ Click Use Scale Factor to enter a scale factor. When the interference check is run, any pipe network
parts within that distance away from each other (on any side) are marked as an interference.
5 Click OK in the Create Interference Check dialog box to run the interference check.
The following prompt is displayed:
Interference check created. Number of interferences found: X.
To view the results, in Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Interference Checks collection, and
then select the interference check. The Interference Check data is displayed in the Panorama window and
Toolspace item view. See Viewing Interference Check Results (page 1375) for more information.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
3 Click again on the same part in the pipe network or on any other part in the same pipe network.
4 In the Create Interference Check dialog box, in the Name field, specify a name for this interference
check, or accept the default.
6 Specify the pipe network(s) for this interference check using the Network 1 and Network 2 fields.
These should be the same pipe network(s) that you clicked in step 3. If desired, you may change the
pipe network(s) here.
To run an interference check on a single pipe network, make sure the same pipe network name is
displayed in the Network 1 and Network 2 fields.
9 If you want the interference check to identify pipe network parts that are too close to one another,
using a specified distance or scale factor, click the 3D Proximity Check Criteria button.
10 To use proximity checking options, in the Criteria dialog box, click Apply 3D Proximity Check, and
then do one of the following:
■ Click Use Distance and enter a distance. When the interference check is run, interferences are created
for any pipe network parts that are less than the specified distance away from each other (on any
side).
■ Click Use Scale Factor and enter a scale factor. When the interference check is run, interferences are
created for any pipe network parts that are less than the specified scale factor distance away from
each other (on any side).
12 Click OK in the Create Interference Check dialog box to run the interference check.
The following prompt is displayed:
Interference check created.
Number of interferences found: X
To view the results, in Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Interference Checks collection, and
then select the interference check. The Interference Check data is displayed in the Panorama window and
Toolspace item view. See Viewing Interference Check Results (page 1375) for more information.
4 In the Create Interference Check dialog box, in the Name field, specify a name for this interference
check or accept the default.
6 Specify the layer the interference check results will be displayed on.
8 If you want the interference check to identify pipe network parts that are too close to one another,
using a specified distance or scale factor, click 3D Proximity Check Criteria.
9 To use proximity checking options, click Apply 3D Proximity Check on the Criteria dialog box, and
then do one of the following:
■ Click Use Distance to enter a distance. When the interference check is run, interferences are created
for any pipe network parts that are less than the specified distance away from each other (on any
side).
11 Click OK in the Create Interference Check dialog box to run the interference check.
The following prompt is displayed:
Interference check created.
Number of interferences found: X
To view the results, in Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Interference Checks collection, and
then select the interference check. The Interference Check data is displayed in the Panorama window and
Toolspace item view. See Viewing Interference Check Results (page 1375) for more information.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
An interference check is marked as out of date when any pipe network part in the interference check is
changed. Even changing a description on a pipe network part that is not in interference causes an interference
check to become out of date. So does moving, deleting, or adding parts to any network included in the
interference check.
When you update an interference check, you can leave the interference checking conditions as they are
currently set, or you can change them before rerunning the check.
Use the Interference Check Properties dialog to change interference check options, criteria, and other
properties.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Pipe Networks ➤ Interference Checks collection.
3 Click OK.
The interference check data is updated in the drawing and in the Prospector tree.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Pipe Networks ➤ Interference Checks collection.
3 Change information about the Interference Check Properties (page 2309) dialog box and click Apply to
save the changes.
5 Click OK.
The interference check data is updated in the drawing and in the Prospector tree.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Use the Pipe Network ➤ Interference Style collection on the Settings tab to create and manage interference
styles.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Pipe Network collection, then expand the Interference
Styles collection, and click New.
The Interference Style (page 2312) dialog box is displayed.
2 Click the Information tab, enter a name for the interference style and, optionally, a description.
3 Click the View Options tab (page 2312) and set interference style options for symbols (markers) and solids
that represent interferences.
4 Click the Display tab (page 2312) and set the display style options.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Pipe Networks ➤ Interference Checks collection.
3 Click Yes.
The interference check object is deleted from the Prospector tree. Any visual markers for the interference
checking displaying in the drawing are also deleted.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Category Description
Insertion (Rim) and Sump Behavior These properties are associated with junction
structures only. They specify the structure’s inser-
tion point (structure rim) and sump elevation and
adjustment behavior.
The Pipe Properties and the Structure Properties dialog boxes have the following tabs:
■ Information. Specifies the name, description, object style, and object render material assigned to the pipe
or structure object.
■ Part Properties. Displays a list of properties that exist for this part. These properties define the basic size
and shape of the part, as well as the part family the part belongs to. This section also specifies hydraulic
properties for the pipe network, if they exist. You can edit values for certain properties on this tab.
■ Rules. Displays a list of the rules that are associated with the part. These rules originate from the default
rule of the part in the part catalog. You can edit the part’s rules once you have inserted the part into a
drawing. Rules are used to validate certain properties of the part, and also to determine elevation during
layout, and during certain editing commands.
The Structure Properties dialog box has the following additional tab for viewing data about pipes connected
to the structure:
■ Connected Pipes. Displays a list of each pipe connected to the structure, and property values for each
pipe. You can edit values for certain properties, such as elevation data, on this tab. It’s very useful for
quickly editing elevations, slopes, diameters or descriptions for multiple pipes connected to a structure.
See also:
NOTE Changes made to either the Pipe Properties or the Structure Properties dialog box affect only the selected
part in the drawing. It does not affect the part definition in the part catalog or in a parts list.
1 Right-click a pipe or structure in the drawing. Click either Pipe Properties or Structure Properties.
2 In either the Pipe Properties or the Structure Properties dialog box, click the Part Properties tab (page
2276).
3 Click a property value, edit it, and click Apply or OK to save changes.
For example, to change the inner diameter of a structure, scroll to the Part Data property group, click
the value for the Inner Structure Diameter property, and select a new value.
NOTE Changes made to either the Pipe Properties or the Structure Properties dialog box affect only the selected
part in the drawing. It does not affect the part definition in the part catalog or in a parts list.
1 Right-click a pipe or structure in the drawing. Click either Pipe Properties or Structure Properties.
3 Click the desired property value in the Value column, enter a new value, and press Enter.
Quick Reference
Command Line
EditPipeProperties or EditStructureProperties
Dialog Box
Pipe Properties Dialog Box (page 2275)
Structure Properties Dialog Box (page 2288)
Part Catalog
The AutoCAD Civil 3D part catalog contains definitions for all the pipe network parts that you can insert
into a drawing. It is organized at the top level into two basic domains — one for pipe parts, such as cylindrical
or rectangular pipes, and another for structure parts, such as headwalls, catch basins, and so on.
Part catalog content is further organized into types, subtypes (also referred to as shapes), and part families.
The following table illustrates how the default part catalogs are organized for pipe parts and structure parts.
Egg-Shaped Concrete
Elliptical Concrete
Concrete Horizontal
The files that make up the part catalog content are typically installed to this location: C:\Documents and
Settings\All Users\Application Data\AutoCAD\C3D2011\enu\Pipes Catalog.
NOTE The pipe network part catalog is not related to the corridor (subassembly) catalogs that are available
through the Content Browser. Also note that pipe network parts cannot be accessed through a Tool Palette.
Parts List
A parts list contains a set of pipe network parts – pipes and structures – that you can use in a pipe network.
You have parts lists so that you do not have to navigate through the entire part catalog looking for the
specific pipe network part that you need.
When you open a new blank drawing by selecting a AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing template, you will typically
find default parts lists available, such as Standard. You can create your own parts lists to suit the needs of
each project. For example, you may want to create a parts list that contains only the types of parts you will
use in a particular project or pipe network. This saves you from having to navigate through the entire part
catalog to select a part. While there is only one pipe network part catalog included with AutoCAD Civil 3D,
you can create multiple parts lists for your projects.
A parts list also serves as a way to store defaults, such as styles, render materials and design criteria (rules)
to any given part upon creation. Parts lists are objects that you can access through the Pipe Network Properties
dialog box, the Pipe Network Layout Tools toolbar, and the Toolspace Settings tree.
NOTE You can also create a Full Parts list that contains all of the parts that exist in the current metric or imperial
part catalog. For more information, see Creating a Full Parts List (page 1382).
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Pipe Networks collection, right-click Parts List, and click
New. The Network Parts List (page 2271) dialog box is displayed.
2 Click the Information tab, enter a name for the parts list and, optionally, a description.
3 Click the Pipes tab to add pipe parts to this parts list, or the Structures tab to add structure parts.
4 On either the Pipes tab or the Structures tab, right-click the parts list name at the top of the Name field
and click Add Part Family. The Part Catalog dialog box (page 2273) dialog box is displayed.
5 In the part catalog, click the check box next to the part families you want to add, and click OK.
6 Click Apply on the Pipes tab or the Structures tabs to save the changes.
8 To add individual sizes of the part, click on and highlight the rows you want to add.
NOTE For many part definitions, optional properties are available to the part. For more information, see
Assigning Optional Properties to a Part Size (page 1385)
9 To add all available sizes of the part, place the check mark in the Add All Sizes check box. For more
information about adding sizes, see the Part Size Creator (page 2300) dialog box.
11 Click Apply to save changes on the Network Parts List dialog box.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
NOTE It is recommended that you do not use the full parts list while manually laying out (creating by layout)
new pipe networks or while editing existing pipe networks. Because the full parts list contains several thousand
parts, navigating for parts using this large volume of available part types could be time consuming. The
CreateFullPartsList feature is intended primarily to support pipe network data import.
1 On the Home tab, click Toolspace ➤ Settings tab, expand the Pipe Network collection, and then expand
the Parts Lists collection. Note the names of the existing parts lists displayed in the Settings tree.
Quick Reference
Modify ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Pipe Networks Contextual Tab ➤ Network Tools panel ➤ Parts List ➤ Create
Pipe Networks tab ➤ Network Tools panel ➤ Parts List ➤ Create Full Parts List
Command Line
CreateNetworkPartsListFull
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Pipe Network collection, then expand the Parts Lists
collection.
2 Right-click on the parts list you want to copy and click Copy. The Network Parts List (page 2271) dialog
box is displayed. A copy of the parts list is created, with Copy of appended to the parts list name.
3 Click the Information tab, change the name for the parts list and, optionally, enter or change the
description.
5 Click the Pipes tab to add or remove pipe parts to this parts list, or the Structures tab to add or remove
structure parts.
6 On either the Pipes tab or the Structures tab, right-click the parts list name at the top of the Name field
and click Add Part Family. The Part Catalog dialog box (page 2273) dialog box is displayed.
7 In the part catalog, click the check box next to the part families you want to add, and click OK. Note
that only part families that are not already included in the current parts list are displayed in the part
catalog so that you cannot add the same part family twice in one parts list.
8 Click Apply on the Pipes tab or the Structures tabs to save the changes.
9 On either the Pipes tab or the Structures tab, right-click a part family and click Add Part Size. The Part
Size Creator dialog box is displayed.
10 To add individual sizes of the part, click on and highlight the rows you want to add.
NOTE For many part definitions, optional properties are appended to the part name. For more information,
see Assigning Optional Properties to a Part Size (page 1385)
13 Click Apply to save changes on the Network Parts List dialog box.
1 With two drawings open, in the first drawing, in Toolspace, on the Setting tab, expand the Pipe Networks
collection, and then expand the Parts Lists collection.
2 Select the desired parts list, drag it (click and hold) to anywhere in the drawing area of the second
drawing, and then release the mouse cursor (drop).
3 In the second drawing, click the Settings tab, expand the Pipe Network collection, and then expand
the Parts Lists collection to see the new parts list.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Pipe Network collection, and then expand the Parts Lists
collection.
2 Right-click the desired parts list and click Edit Parts List. The Network Parts List dialog box is displayed.
3 Click the Pipes tab to add a pipe part family to this parts list, or the Structures tab to add a structure
part family.
4 On either the Pipes or the Structures tab, in the Name column, expand the parts list to view the part
families that are currently included.
5 Right-click the name of the parts list at the top level and click Add Part Family. The Part Catalog (page
2273) dialog box is displayed.
NOTE Part families that are included in the current parts list are not displayed in the part catalog. Only part
families that are available to be added to the current parts list are displayed in the part catalog.
6 In the part catalog, select the part families you want to add, and click OK.
7 Click OK or Apply on either the Pipes tab or the Structures tab to save the changes.
After you have added one or more part families to the parts list, the next step is to select the part sizes you
want. See Adding Part Sizes to a Parts List (page 1385).
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: Pipe Network ➤ Parts Lists ➤ <parts list name> ➤ Edit Parts List
Dialog Box
Network Parts List (page 2271)
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Pipe Network collection, and then expand the Parts Lists
collection.
2 Right-click the desired parts list and click Edit Parts List. The Network Parts List dialog box is displayed.
3 Click the Pipes tab to add sizes for pipe parts, or the Structures tab to add sizes for structures.
4 Expand the parts list so that you can see the part families that are currently included.
5 Right-click a part family and click Add Part Size. The Part Size Creator dialog box is displayed.
6 Use the Part Size Creator (page 2300) dialog box to add part sizes to the current part family.
You can select existing sizes one at a time, or you can use the Add All Sizes check box. For example, for
the Elliptical Concrete Pipe part family, you can add only the part size of “8-inch inner pipe width”,
or you can check Add All Sizes to add all the size choices that are available in the drop-down list
simultaneously: for example, 8, 12, 18, and 24.
7 For each part size that is added, you may also add optional properties which are not defined in the part
family.
For example, to specify a material for a pipe, add the optional Material property and enter the desired
text to set the property. For more information, see Assigning Optional Properties to a Part Size (page
1385).
9 Click OK or Apply on either the Pipes tab or the Structures tab to save the changes.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Pipe Network collection, and then expand the Parts Lists
collection.
3 Click the Pipes tab to assign an optional property to a pipe part size, or the Structures tab to assign an
optional property to a structure part size.
4 On either the Pipes tab or the Structures tab, in the Name column, expand the parts list so that you
can see the part families that are currently included.
5 Right-click the desired part family and select Add Part Size.
6 The Part Size Creator Dialog Box (page 2300) is displayed. The optional properties are identified in the
Source field.
7 If the optional property can be assigned, you can click in the Value field and set the property from a
list of choices. If the optional property has a static value, no choices are available.
NOTE All optional properties available for a part family can be set, even after the part has been created, by
displaying the Pipe Properties or Structure Properties dialog box.
1 Navigate to the Part Parameter Configuration xml file (AeccPartParamCfg.xml). The default location is
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD <version>\enu\Pipes Catalog\Aecc
Shared Content.
2 Open the file and select View ➤ Source in order to modify the file.
3 Navigate to the <AeccParamDeclaration> section. A sample optional property is the Hazen Williams
Coefficient flow analysis. The entry for this is: <AeccDfParameter name="ACHW" desc="Hazen Williams
Coefficient" context="FlowAnalysis_HazenWilliams" index="0" datatype="Float" usage="Double_General"
unit="" visible="True" internal="True"/>.
4 Copy an existing optional property and make changes as appropriate to create a new property.
5 In the <AeccParamUsage> section, the corresponding entry for the sample in step 3 is <AeccOptParam
context="FlowAnalysis_HazenWilliams"/>. Copy and modify an entry as appropriate to create an new
entry for your property.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel Set Pipe Network Catalog .
4 You may want to specify different pipe and structure catalogs, if they are available.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
3 Using the catalog tree, locate and select the Part Family you want to edit.
NOTE Pipe and structure families are organized by type. For example, pipe families are organized into types
such as circular pipes, egg-shaped pipes, and so on. Structure families are organized into inlet-outlet structures,
junction structures with frames, and so on.
4 Click the Modify Part Sizes button , or double-click the Part Family, to display the Part Family browser
window.
5 If this is a Part Family that shipped with AutoCAD Civil 3D, click the Save Part Family As button in
the Part Family browser window toolbar
6 In the Save Part Family As dialog box, enter a new Part Name and Part Description and then click OK.
This creates your own version of the selected Part Family you can edit.
7 In the Part Family browser window, right-click the Size Parameters node, and click Edit Values.
Pipe values
■ To change values for pipe sizes, select the row and size cell. Double-click to edit.
■ To delete a size row, select the row and click the Delete button on the Edit Part Sizes dialog box.
■ To add a size row, select the closest size and click the New button on the Edit Part Sizes dialog
box, and then edit the values in the new row.
Structure values
■ To edit list values for structure sizes, select the cell and click the New button on the Edit Part
Sizes dialog box.
10 After you have completed editing sizes, click OK on the Edit Part Sizes dialog box.
11 In the Part Family browser window toolbar, click the Save Part Family button .
12 When finished editing part sizes, close the Part Builder by clicking the close button in the upper
right corner of the Part Family browser window.
13 You will be prompted to save the part family with the following dialog box. Click Yes at this prompt.
14 Next, you may be prompted to save the part family drawing file with the following dialog box. Click
No at this prompt.
The new part family and the new part sizes you create will be available through the Network Layout Tools
toolbar.
3 In the catalog tree, expand the Circular Pipes node, then select the Concrete Pipe part family.
4 Double-click the Concrete Pipe part family or click the Modify Part Sizes button .
6 In the Save Part Family As dialog box, enter a new Part Name and Part Description for this new part
family and then click OK. This creates your own version of the selected Part Family you can edit.
7 In the Part Family browser, right-click the Size Parameters node, and click Edit Values.
8 In the Edit Part Sizes dialog box, click the Autosize Column Text button then find the Pipe Inner
Diameter (PID) value and the Wall Thickness (WTh) values.
9 Select any row in the table and click the New button on the Edit Part Sizes dialog box. The selected
row is copied to the table.
10 In the new table row, edit the PID and WTh values by double-clicking on them and typing in the new
values.
11 After you have completed editing sizes, click OK on the Edit Part Sizes dialog box.
12 In the Part Family browser window toolbar, click the Save Part Family button .
13 When finished editing part sizes, close the Part Builder by clicking the close button in the upper
right corner of the Part Family browser window.
14 You will be prompted to save the part family. Click Yes at this prompt.
15 Next, you may be prompted to save the part family drawing file. Click No at this prompt.
The new part family will not be available when creating or editing a pipe network until you edit the
parts list and add this new part family to your parts list. For more information, see Adding a Part Family
to a Parts List (page 1384)
Once you have added the new part family to your parts list, the new part family and the new part sizes you
created will be available through the Network Layout Tools toolbar.
1 Using Internet Explorer, navigate to the location of the part catalog, for example, C:\Documents and
Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\C3D2011\enu\Pipes Catalog\US Imperial Structures.
2 Double-click the name of the desired part catalog, for example, US Imperial Structures.htm.
3 In the left pane catalog tree, expand a node and then select a part family.
For example, expand the Junction Structures With Frames node, and then select the
AeccStructEccentricCylinder_Imperial part family.
Content for the selected part family is displayed in the right pane.
Part Rules
Part rules are properties that affect how pipe network parts behave on creation and when you move or edit
them.
AutoCAD Civil 3D pipe network objects use part rules in the following ways:
■ To determine elevations for pipes and structures when they are created.
■ To warn that certain criteria is not met while creating or editing pipe networks.
Primarily, part rules automatically determine reasonable elevations for parts as they are created. The specific
elevation behavior you see is based on choices you make, such as how you define the minimum slope,
minimum cover, and desired drop across a structure. Rules also provide automatic validation of your pipe
NOTE It is important to note that rules are not applied to pipes or structures when importing pipe networks from
either LandXML or from the Storm Sewers Extension. For more information about rules, see Part Rules (page 1390).
■ C3DPipeRules. This Visual Basic script file is similar in design and architecture to the script file that
controls AutoCAD Civil 3D subassembly behavior for corridor modeling.
■ C3DPipeRules.xml. This file defines the pipe network part rule parameters and rule names.
These files are located in located in the \data folder. The \data folder installed to \\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Application Data\Autodesk\C3D2011\enu\data by default.
Rule Sets
A default “rule set” exists for both pipes and structures that are inserted into your drawing. The rule set
behaves like a style, except that you can also override values if desired. Rule sets simply provide a way for
you to create a set customized set of rules. You can add or exclude certain rules, edit certain rule values, or
change the order in which the rules are processed on a part, and you can save all these changes in a named
rule set. This gives you the ability to control and customize the rule behavior for a specific pipe network or
pipe network part.
See also:
Rule Violations
Rule violations inform you when pipe network part parameter values have not been met or exceed certain
limits.
Whenever rules are applied to a part, validation checks occur to inform you, for example, if minimum or
maximum cover limits have been violated, or if some other condition needs attention.
When warnings occur due to rule violations, they are displayed as warning icons in the Pipe Network
Vistas (page 2302) (Panorama window or Toolspace item view). Rule violation information is also displayed
on the Rules tab (page 2280) of the Pipe or Structure Properties dialog box, in the Status column. Placing the
mouse cursor over the warning icon in the Prospector List View displays tooltip text describing the warning
(rule violation) condition. This tooltip displays the same rule violation text that is displayed in the Status
column on the Rules tab of the Pipe or Structure Properties dialog box.
The following illustration is an example of the Rules tab on a pipe in a drawing. In this example, the Minimum
Cover and Maximum Length properties for this pipe display with descriptive rule violation text in the
Pipe Value column because they violate the design criteria specified in the Value column. Note the rule
violation descriptive text that is displayed in the Status column; for example, “Minimum pipe cover exceeded”
and “Exceeds the maximum pipe length by”.
Note that if you edit the Rule Value on a pipe network part in a drawing, it does not affect the rule for other
parts in the drawing, for parts in the parts list, or for parts in the parts catalog. It also does not alter any
physical characteristics of the part in the drawing. It simply alters the rule limit on that particular part in
your drawing.
■ The elevation of a pipe network part has changed due to pipe network parts being moved.
■ You change the order in which rules are processed on the part.
If you look at the rule set assigned to a part, you can view the rule set, and the rules currently associated
with the part. You cannot change the processing order of the rules on the Structure or Pipe Properties Rules
tab. However, you can change the order of the rules by displaying the Rules tab on the Rule Set.
Applying rules does not automatically resolve rule violations. You can view rule violations leave them as is,
or resolve them.
In some situations, reapplying rules may result in more rule violations, some of which you may decide to
simply leave as violations. For example, there may be some situations where you have site-specific cover
constraints that you want to intentionally violate.
➤ In the drawing, right-click either a pipe or structure in a pipe network, and then click Apply Rules.
At the command line, a prompt is displayed indicating that rules have been successfully applied to the
network part(s).
Pipe Rules
These rules primarily govern how the elevations of a pipe object are determined when the object is created.
There are also rules to flag pipes that exceed certain values, such as maximum length, for example.
When a pipe rule is violated, you can complete the action, but a warning icon is displayed for the pipe
object in the Pipe Network Vistas (page 2302) (Panorama window or Toolspace item view), and on the Rules
tab (page 2280) of the Pipe Properties dialog box. This indicates that a rule violation exists.
After a pipe object is created, you may make changes to the pipe that result in the pipe rules being violated.
For example, you might move a pipe so that the Minimum Cover distance is not met.
NOTE Drag and drop functionality can be used to copy pipe rules. For more information, see Dragging Styles or
Items Within or Between Drawings (page 70).
The following sections describe the standard rules available for pipe objects.
■ The connections to structures are at a location as specified by the structure rules, if any are specified.
■ The pipe always slopes in the proper direction, with the minimum slope being honored, unless this is
in conflict with a connected structure.
■ The minimum cover is maintained unless this is in conflict with a connected structure.
Parameters
The following parameters govern the behavior of the pipe Cover And Slope rule.
■ Maximum Cover. Specifies the maximum cover of soil over the length of the pipe, based on the surface
being referenced by that pipe. If the maximum cover is exceeded, a rule violation occurs. Note that this
parameter provides validation only; it does not alter (move or resize) the part in the drawing in any way.
It simply produces a rule violation on the part if the specified value is exceeded.
■ Maximum Slope. Specifies the maximum slope of the pipe, expressed in percent. If the pipe slope is
greater than the maximum, a rule violation occurs for that object.
■ Minimum Cover. Specifies the minimum cover of soil over the pipe, based on the surface being referenced
by that pipe. During layout, a pipe will be created that attempts to maintain the minimum cover. This
■ Minimum Slope. Specifies the minimum slope of the pipe, expressed in percent. During layout, a pipe
will be created according to its minimum slope rule value. If the pipe is edited so that its slope is less
than the minimum, you can still edit the pipe as desired, breaking the minimum slope rule, but a rule
violation occurs for that object.
Parameters
The following parameters govern the behavior of this rule:
■ Maximum Pipe Cover. Specifies the maximum cover of soil over the pipe, based on the surface being
referenced by that pipe. If the pipe cover exceeds the maximum cover value, a rule violation occurs for
that object. Note that this parameter provides validation only; it does not alter (move or resize) the part
in the drawing in any way. It simply produces a rule violation on the part if the specified value is exceeded.
■ Minimum Pipe Cover. Specifies the minimum cover of soil over the pipe, based on the surface being
referenced by that pipe. During layout, a pipe will be created that attempts to maintain the minimum
cover. If the pipe is edited so that its cover is less than the minimum cover value, a rule violation occurs
for that object.
NOTE For spanning pipe labels Start Cover will display the cover at the beginning of the span of pipes that
comprise the spanning pipe label. End Cover will display the cover for the very end of the span.The start and end
of the spanning pipe label depends on the order in which pipes where selected when creating the pipe span.
Parameters
The following parameters govern the behavior of the Length Check rule.
■ Maximum Pipe Length. This parameter lets you define a maximum length for pipes. When this parameter
(rule) is in use, you can still draw pipes that exceed the defined maximum pipe length. However, the
■ Minimum Pipe Length. This parameter lets you define a minimum length for pipes. When this parameter
(rule) is in use, you can still draw pipes that are shorter than the defined minimum pipe length. However,
the object will be displayed with a warning icon in the Prospector list view. Note that this parameter
provides validation only; it does not alter (move or resize) the part in the drawing in any way. It simply
produces a rule violation on the part if the specified value is not met.
This rule manages conditions so that only continuous runs of pipe are created as typically expected. In pipe
networks where the pipe size is constant, pipes connected to other pipes must to match end to end. In pipe
networks where pipe sizes change, the point where pipes match may change, depending on the type of
system. For example, in pressure systems, it may be typical to match the pipe centerline. In gravity systems,
it may be typical to match the crowns of the pipes.
This rule also incorporates a drop value for cases where a pipe-to-pipe connection requires a drop amount.
Parameters
The following parameters govern the behavior of this rule:
■ Match Location. This parameter controls whether the inserted pipe holds to the pipe’s invert, crown, or
centerline elevation (location).
■ Drop Value. The drop value allows you to specify an additional drop amount at pipe to pipe connections.
Structure Rules
These rules govern primarily how a structure object is placed and sized during object creation. They also
can determine the elevations of connected pipes. There is also a rule to flag pipes that are too wide to connect
to a structure.
Just like pipe rules, when structure rules are violated, a warning icon is displayed for the object in the Pipe
Network Vistas (page 2302) (Panorama window or Toolspace item view), and on the Rules tab (page 2293) of the
Structure Properties dialog box.
The following sections describe the standard rules associated with structure objects.
■ A pipe exiting a structure is no higher than the lowest pipe entering the structure.
■ A pipe entering a structure is no lower than the highest pipe exiting a structure.
■ There is always a specified minimum drop distance between the lowest incoming pipe and the highest
outgoing pipe.
The drop can be based on a comparison between the crowns, inverts, or centerlines of pipes. A validation
check is performed for drops exceeding a certain distance. This determines whether a maximum drop value
is violated or whether a drop is required.
Parameters
The following parameters govern the behavior of this rule:
■ Drop Reference Location. Specifies the drop location by referencing the pipe’s invert, crown, or centerline
elevation.
■ Drop Value. Specifies the drop value between the lowest incoming pipe and the highest outgoing pipe
connected to the structure.
■ Maximum Drop Value. Specifies what the maximum drop value is between the lowest incoming pipe
and any outgoing pipe connected to the structure. Note that this parameter provides validation only; it
does not alter (move or resize) the part in the drawing in any way. It simply produces a rule violation
on the part if the specified value is exceeded. This is intended to raise awareness when a drop structure
might be needed.
In the following illustration, the junction structure has two incoming pipes already connected to it on the
left side of the structure. A new outgoing pipe is added to the right side of the structure. The pipe cover and
slope rule determines the optimal connection elevation for the new outgoing pipe.
Example 2: Existing Incoming Pipes with New Outgoing
Pipe
The following illustration shows a junction structure that has two outgoing pipes already connected to it
on the left side of the structure. A new incoming pipe is added to the right side of the structure. The pipe
cover and slope rule determines the optimal connection elevation for the new incoming pipe.
The following illustration shows a junction structure that has two outgoing pipes already connected to it
on the left side of the structure. A new outgoing pipe is added to the right side of the structure. The pipe
cover and slope rule determines the optimal connection elevation for the new outgoing pipe.
Example 4: Existing Outgoing Pipes with New Outgoing
Pipe
The following illustration shows a junction structure that has four pipes already connected to it on the left
side of the structure. Two of those pipes are incoming pipes, and the other two are outgoing pipes. A new
incoming pipe is added to the right side of the structure. The pipe cover and slope rule determines the optimal
connection elevation for the new incoming pipe.
The following illustration shows a similar situation with both incoming and outgoing pipes already connected.
In this case, a new outgoing pipe is added to the structure. The pipe cover and slope rule determines the
optimal connection elevation for the new outgoing pipe.
Example 6: Existing Incoming and Outgoing Pipes with
New Outgoing Pipe
Parameters
The following parameters govern the behavior of this rule:
■ Maximum Pipe Diameter or Width. For circular pipes, this parameter measures the pipe diameter. For
rectangular pipes, it measures width. If a pipe diameter or width exceeds the maximum value, a warning
is issued on the structure. Note that this parameter provides validation only; it does not alter (move or
resize) the part in the drawing in any way. It simply produces a rule violation on the part if the specified
value is exceeded.
Parameter
The following parameter governs the behavior of this rule:
■ Sump Depth. Specifies the sump depth, or the vertical distance from the invert of the lowest pipe attached
to the structure to the inside bottom of the structure.
1 In the drawing, right-click either a pipe or structure in a pipe network, and then click either Pipe
Properties or Structure Properties.
3 Select the value of the rule you want to edit and enter a new value.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand either the Pipe or Structure collection.
3 Double-click a rule set. The Pipe or Structure Rule Set dialog box is displayed.
1 In the drawing, right-click a pipe network part (either a pipe or structure), and then select either Pipe
Properties or Structure Properties.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand either the Pipe or Structure collection.
2 Right-click either Pipe Rule Set or Structure Rule Set. Click New.
3 On the Rule Set Information tab, enter a name for the new rule set. Optionally, enter a description.
6 In the Add Rule dialog box, in the Rule Name drop-down list, select a rule to add.
When you select a rule, its parameters are displayed in the Rule Parameters table.
8 Edit a rule value by clicking a value on the Rules tab and entering a new value, or select one from a list.
■ This command only converts the VBA-based AutoCAD Civil 3D pipe and structure rules that were included
with the product. It does not convert any VBA custom rules you may have created behind the scenes.
■ Internally, this command just changes a pipe rule reference to the .NET version of that rule, instead of
the VBA version of that rule.
■ In drawings, you can have a mix of pipe networks that point to VBA-based and .NET-based part rules.
For example, when you open a drawing that was created in Civil 3D 2008 or earlier in Civil 3D 2009,
that contains pipe networks, and then create a new rule set, that drawing will contain references to both
VBA and .NET rules.
■ In a single pipe network, you can have a mix of parts that point to VBA-based and .NET-based part rules.
1 Click Modify tab ➤ Design panel Convert VBA Pipe And Structure Rules To .NET .
You are prompted to make sure that you really want to convert all pipe and structure rules in the drawing
to .NET.
2 Click Yes.
All VBA pipe and structure rules in the drawing are converted to VB.NET. Prompts indicate that the
command has completed, and that the Event Viewer displays more details about the conversion.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Modify tab ➤ Design panel Convert VBA Pipe And Structure Rules To .NET
Menu
Pipes menu ➤ Utilities ➤ Convert VBA Pipe And Structure Rules To .NET.
Command Description
For more information, see Understanding Labels in AutoCAD Civil 3D (page 1646).
To label all pipes and structures within an entire network in plan views
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Entire Network
Plan .
2 Select the part contained in the network to be labeled. All pipes or structures will be labeled in the
network.
OR
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Add Pipe Network
Labels .
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Entire Network Plan
Menu
Pipes menu ➤ Add Pipe Network Labels ➤ Add Pipe Network Labels
Command Line
AddNetworkPlanLabels
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Entire Network
Profile .
2 Select the part contained in the network to be labeled. All pipes or structures in the network will be
labeled.
OR
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Add Pipe Network
Labels .
2 In the Add Labels dialog box (page 2208), under Feature, ensure that Pipe Network is selected.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Entire Network Profile
Menu
Pipes menu ➤ Add Pipe Network Labels ➤ Add Pipe Network Labels
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Entire Network
Section .
2 Select the part contained in the network to be labeled. All pipes or structures in the network will be
labeled.
OR
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Add Pipe Network
Labels .
2 In the Add Labels dialog box (page 2208), under Feature, ensure that Pipe Network is selected.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Entire Network Section
Menu
Pipes menu ➤ Add Pipe Network Labels ➤ Add Pipe Network Labels
Command Line
AddNetworkSectLabels
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Single Part Plan
.
2 Select the part contained in the network to be labeled. The individual part will be labeled.
OR
2 In the Add Labels dialog box (page 2208), under Feature, ensure that Pipe Network is selected.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Single Part Plan
Menu
Pipes menu ➤ Add Pipe Network Labels ➤ Add Pipe Network Labels
Command Line
AddNetworkPartPlanLabel
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Single Part Profile
.
2 Select the part contained in the network to be labeled. The individual part will be labeled.
OR
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Add Pipe Network
Labels .
2 In the Add Labels dialog box (page 2208), under Feature, ensure that Pipe Network is selected.
Quick Reference
Ribon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Single Part Profile
Menu
Pipes menu ➤ Add Pipe Network Labels ➤ Add Pipe Network Labels
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Single Part Section
.
2 Select the part contained in the network to be labeled. The individual part will be labeled.
OR
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Add Pipe Network
Labels .
2 In the Add Labels dialog box (page 2208), under Feature, ensure that Pipe Network is selected.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Single Part Section
Menu
Pipes menu ➤ Add Pipe Network Labels ➤ Add Pipe Network Labels
Command Line
AddNetworkPartSectLabel
See also:
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Spanning Pipes
Plan .
2 At the command line, you are prompted to select the first pipe network part (pipe or structure).
3 In the drawing, click a pipe or structure in the pipe network to define the starting point for the connected
pipe span.
4 At the command line, you are prompted to select the next pipe network part (pipe or structure).
5 Click a part (pipe or structure) to define the ending point for the span.
6 Press Enter.
The following prompt is displayed:
Specify label location on pipe:
7 Specify the location for the label by clicking one of the pipes in the span. You must click a pipe, not a
structure.
If you select a pipe that is not included in the span, a prompt is displayed indicating that the label
location must be on a spanned pipe.
Note that the label can be slid along the span with the slider grip .
OR
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Add Pipe Network
Labels .
2 In the Add Labels dialog box (page 2208), under Feature, ensure that Pipe Network is selected.
5 Click Add.
You are prompted to select the first part (pipe or structure) in the span.
6 Define the span by clicking the first and last parts (pipes or structures) in the span. The parts must
belong to the same pipe network.
7 Press Enter.
The following prompt is displayed:
Specify label location on pipe:
8 Specify the location for the label by clicking one of the pipes in the span. You must click a pipe, not a
structure.
If you select a pipe that is not included in the span, a prompt is displayed indicating that the label
location must be on a spanned pipe.
Note that the label can be slid along the span with the slider grip .
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Spanning Pipes
Profile .
3 In the drawing, click a pipe or structure in the pipe network to define the starting point for the connected
pipe span.
4 At the command line, you are prompted to select the next pipe network part (pipe or structure).
5 Click a part (pipe or structure) to define the ending point for the span.
6 Press Enter.
The following prompt is displayed:
Specify label location on pipe:
7 Specify the location for the label by clicking one of the pipes in the span. You must click a pipe, not a
structure.
If you select a pipe that is not included in the span, a prompt is displayed indicating that the label
location must be on a spanned pipe.
Note that the label can be slid along the span with the slider grip .
OR
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Add Pipe Network
Labels .
2 In the Add Labels dialog box (page 2208), under Feature, ensure that Pipe Network is selected.
5 Click Add.
You are prompted to select the first part (pipe or structure) in the span.
6 Define the span by clicking the first and last parts (pipes or structures) in the span. The parts must
belong to the same pipe network.
7 Press Enter.
The following prompt is displayed:
Specify label location on pipe:
8 Specify the location for the label by clicking one of the pipes in the span. You must click a pipe, not a
structure.
If you select a pipe that is not included in the span, a prompt is displayed indicating that the label
location must be on a spanned pipe.
Note that the label can be slid along the span with the slider grip .
■ Hover the cursor over the spanning label. This highlights all of the parts that are in the span.
■ Right-click the pipe span label and select Show Spanning Pipes. A dotted line will appear from the starting
point to the end point of the connected pipe span, as shown in the following illustration. The
diamond-shaped slider grip can be used to slide the label along the span. To remove the highlight, deselect
Show Spanning Pipes from the right-click menu.
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Spanning Pipes Plan
Menu
NOTE Spanning pipe labels have the same dragged state behavior as regular pipe labels. Click the round grip
to restore a dragged label to its default state.
Example 2
In the following example, the pipe to the left has been deleted, or detached from the vertical pipe. The result
is that only the remaining pipes are included in the span. The label indicates the span is now comprised of
three pipes.
Example 3
In the following illustration, the pipe with the span label has been deleted. The result is that the span label
is also deleted.
To reset the anchor position of a label that spans multiple pipe network parts
2 In the drawing, select a label that spans multiple pipe parts (spanning pipe label).
3 Select the new anchor point by clicking on a pipe in the same network. You must select a pipe, not a
structure.
The new anchor position is set, and the spanning label will display at the midpoint of the selected pipe.
1 In the drawing, select a pipe or structure and then click Pipe Properties or Structure Properties.
2 On the Pipe Properties dialog box, or the Structure Properties dialog box, click the Part Properties tab.
3 Scroll down to the Part Data section and the Material property should be displayed.
If the Material property is not displayed, this means that this part family does not contain the Material
property. See Adding a Material Property to a Part (page 1466) for instructions on how to add this property
to a part family.
4 Click in the Value cell to select an existing or enter a new value for the Material property.
5 Click OK on the Pipe Properties dialog box or the Structure Properties dialog box.
2 In the Text section, click in the Contents cell, and then click to display the Text Component Editor.
3 In the Text Component Editor, select Material in the Properties list and add it to your label.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Pipe collection, then expand the Label Styles collection.
2 In the Label Styles collection, expand a collection. For example, expand the Plan Profile collection ,
and then right-click on an existing label style. For example, right-click on Standard, and then click New
or Edit.
4 Under the Text collection, click the Browse button in the Value cell next to the Add Contents
property.
5 Use the Text Component Editor to add the desired hydraulic properties to the label style. For example,
on this dialog box, under Properties, click the drop-down arrow to display the list of properties you can
add to the label. Select the desired hydraulic properties from this list. For example, click Hydraulic Grade
Line Up, and then click the right-arrow button to add the property to the label style.
6 When finished composing label text using this dialog box, click OK to save changes.
7 Click OK on the Label Style Composer dialog box to save changes to the label style.
For more information, see Text Component Editor Dialog Box (page 2199)or Adding Content to Labels (page
1686).
Quick Reference
Dialog Box
Text Component Editor (page 2199)
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Add Pipe .
2 In the Pipe Table Creation (page 2313) dialog box, change the generic table settings as needed.
4 Click OK.
5 Select the location for the upper-left corner of the table in the drawing.
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Add Pipe
Menu
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Add Pipe
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Add Structure
.
2 In the Structure Table Creation (page 2313) dialog box, change the generic table settings as needed.
4 Click OK.
5 Select the location for the upper-left corner of the table in the drawing.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Add Structure
Menu
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Pipe Network ➤ Add Structure
2 Right-click the table style that you want to edit and click Edit.
1 Double-click a Structure Table cell in the Data Properties tab of the Table Style dialog box to access the
Table Cell Components dialog box.
2 Click the down arrow in , and then click to create a new text component.
You can add any number of components, and there can be more than one of any given component
type. The possible components are: Structure, Structure All Pipes, Structure In Flow Pipes, and Structure
Out Flow Pipes.
3 Click Text to access the Text Component Editor Dialog Box (page 2199). When this option is selected,
the component is added to the list of available components. You can edit the name of the component
and/or enter the content for the table cell.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
■ Use the AutoCAD Render command to render the pipe network. For more information, see Render
a Model in the AutoCAD Help.
Moving Pipe Network Data Between AutoCAD Civil 3D and Storm Sewers
You can migrate pipe network data between AutoCAD Civil 3D and the Storm Sewers Extension.
For example, with AutoCAD Civil 3D, you can:
■ export one or more AutoCAD Civil 3D pipe networks to an .stm file that can then be opened by the
Hydraflow Storm Sewers Extension for analysis and or editing
■ import one or more pipe runs from an .stm file that has been exported from the Hydraflow Storm Sewers
Extension into AutoCAD Civil 3D
When importing Storm Sewer data into AutoCAD Civil 3D, you can import a single pipe network, or multiple
pipe networks. However, you must import entire pipe networks; you cannot import individual parts, or a
series of connected parts within a pipe network.
Before migrating pipe network data between AutoCAD Civil 3D and the Storm Sewers Extension, there are
a few preparation tasks you must perform. For more information, see Preparing for Migrating Storm Sewers
Data (page 1418).
■ Pipes
■ Structures
■ Known Capacity
Task Description
Verify that your pipe network data meets the neces- Review the criteria for migrating pipe network data.
sary criteria for migration For more information, see Criteria for Migrating
Pipe Networks (page 1419).
Create the parts list that will be used during migra- When you import or export pipe networks between
tion AutoCAD Civil 3D and the Storm Sewers Extension,
a parts list that contains appropriate parts for the
import or export is required. You will need to create
this parts list first, before you begin importing or
exporting the data. You may need to create a full
parts list, containing all of the available parts in the
entire catalog, or you may need to create a smaller,
customized parts list that contains only the parts
included in the migrated data. For more informa-
tion, see Creating a Full Parts List (page 1382) or
Creating a Parts List (page 1381).
Set the part matchup settings that will be used In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, you need to
during migration configure defaults that will be used for matching
up part types between AutoCAD Civil 3D and the
Storm Sewers. For more information, see Setting
Part Matching Defaults for Migration (page 1419) .
Choose the default parts list that will be used during In Prospector, on the Settings tab, you also need
migration to choose the default parts list that will be when
you migrate data between AutoCAD Civil 3D and
the Storm Sewers. For more information, see Setting
the Default Parts List For Migration (page 1420).
■ Note that in the Storm Sewers Extension, a pipe and its corresponding upstream inlet structure make up
a Hydraflow Storm Sewers line.
■ The Storm Sewers Extension can accept a maximum of 250 pipes (lines) with structures in one project.
If a single AutoCAD Civil 3D pipe network contains more than 250 pipes (lines), then the pipe network
must be divided into smaller pipe networks (and therefore, multiple .stm files) before the pipe network
data can be opened in the Hydraflow Storm Sewers Extension.
■ All catch basin and junction structures must have an outlet pipe. To verify this, in AutoCAD Civil 3D
display the Connected Pipes tab of the Structure Properties dialog box. Look at the In/Out column.
It is also important to be aware of the following before exporting pipe networks to an .stm file (or any type
of export of pipe data):
■ If a pipe does not have an upstream structure in AutoCAD Civil 3D, it is given a null structure in the
exported file.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the Pipe Network collection and select Edit Feature Settings.
2 In the Edit Feature Settings - Pipe Network dialog box, expand Storm Sewers Migration Defaults.
3 For the Part Matching Defaults, click the Browse button in the V alue cell to display the Part Matchup
Settings - Storm Sewers Settings dialog box (page 2316).
4 To set the defaults that will be used when you are importing data from the Storm Sewers Extension
into AutoCAD Civil 3D, click the Import tab.
column on the right to display the Browse button . For example, click in the Concentric Cylindrical
Structure cell.
7 On the Part Catalog dialog box, select the desired AutoCAD Civil 3D part type and then click OK.
8 On the Import tab, scroll down to ensure that all part types in the first column are matched up with
appropriately part types in the second column.
9 To set the part type defaults that will be used when you are exporting data from AutoCAD Civil 3D
into the Storm Sewers Extension, click the Export tab.
10 On the Export tab, click in the column on the right to select appropriate parts from the drop-down list.
11 On the Export tab, scroll down to ensure that all part types in the first column are matched up with
appropriately part types in the second column.
12 When you are finished matching part type defaults, click OK.
Once you have finished matching up part types, the next step is to select the parts list that will be used for
migration by default. See Setting the Default Parts List For Migration (page 1420) for more information.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the Pipe Network collection and select Edit Feature Settings.
2 In the Edit Feature Settings - Pipe Network dialog box, expand Storm Sewers Migration Defaults.
3 For Parts List Used For Migration, click the Browse button in the Value cell to select a parts list.
When pipe network data is imported into or exported from AutoCAD Civil 3D, this is the parts list that will
be used to search for part families and part sizes.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: Right-click Pipe Network collection ➤ Edit Feature Settings ➤ Storm Sewers Migration
Defaults
Dialog Box
Part Matchup Settings Dialog Box (page 2316)
NOTE AutoCAD Civil 3D must be running in order to start the Hydraflow extensions. Once the Hydraflow extension
is launched, you can terminate AutoCAD Civil 3D if desired.
The extensions are typically installed by default when you install AutoCAD Civil 3D. If you chose not to
install them when you first installed AutoCAD Civil 3D, they can be installed later using Add or Remove
Programs from the Control Panel. For more information, see Add or Remove Features in the Stand-alone
Installation Guide.
You can launch the Storm Sewers Entension using either the StartStormSewers command or the
EditInStormSewers command. For more information, see Editing Pipe Networks Using the Storm Sewers
Extension (page 1350).
■ On the Pipe Networks contextual tab, click the Launch Pad ➤ Express .
■ On the Pipe Networks contextual tab, click the Launch Pad ➤ Hydrographs .
■ On the Pipe Networks contextual tab, click the Launch Pad ➤ Storm Sewers .
You can also launch the Storm Sewers Entension using the EditInStormSewers command. For more
information, see Editing Pipe Networks Using the Storm Sewers Extension (page 1350).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE It is important to note that rules are not applied to pipes or structures when importing pipe networks from
either LandXML or from the Storm Sewers Extension. For more information about rules, see Part Rules (page 1390).
1 From the Home tab, click the Insert tab, and then click Import Storm Sewers .
2 On the Import Storm Sewers File dialog box, navigate to the desired .stm file, select it, and then click
Open.
3 Choose to either update the existing pipe network, or to create a new pipe network.
NOTE It is important to note that rules are not applied to pipes or structures when importing pipe networks from
either LandXML or from the Storm Sewers Extension. For more information about rules, see Part Rules (page 1390).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ If a pipe does not have an upstream structure in AutoCAD Civil 3D, it is given a null structure in the
exported file.
NOTE You cannot open .stm files that were exported from AutoCAD Civil 3D, or that were saved in the Storm
Sewers Extension for Civil 3D 2010, in the Storm Sewers Extension for Civil 3D 2009, or earlier versions of the
Storm Sewers Extension.
■ In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click the Pipe Networks collection, or right-click the pipe
network you want to export, and then select Export to Storm Sewers .
3 On the Export Storm Sewers to File dialog box, specify the location and the name for the .stm file, and
then click Save.
To export an .stm file from AutoCAD Civil 3D and open it in Storm Sewers for editing
2 On the Export to Storm Sewers dialog box, specify the pipe networks to be exported, and then click
OK.
3 On the Export Storm Sewers to File dialog box, specify the location and the name for the .stm file, and
then click Save.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ by exporting the pipe network to an .stm file, importing that file into the Storm Sewers Extension, and
using the Storm Sewers Extension to add hydraulic properties to the pipe network
You can use the Storm Sewers Extension to perform the hydraulic analysis on the pipe run. Once you
have done this, you can then import the .stm file back into AutoCAD Civil 3D. At this point, the AutoCAD
Civil 3D pipe network will containing the valid hydraulic property data (HGL, EGL, and so on) that it
got from the Storm Sewers Extension.
■ You can also enter your own values for hydraulic properties using the Panorama. This may be useful if
you intend to later import the pipe network data into some other application, such as the Storm Sewers
Extension, to perform hydraulic analysis.
Once you have the hydraulic property data in a AutoCAD Civil 3D pipe network, you can display, edit, and
label the hydraulic grade lines and energy grade lines in profile views. You can also view and edit the specific
hydraulic property data values on the pipe and structure Properties dialog boxes and vistas.
When you add hydraulic analysis data to AutoCAD Civil 3D pipe networks, the following hydraulic properties
are populated with valid values for pipes and structures:
In AutoCAD Civil 3D, hydraulic grade lines and energy grade lines are displayed as a straight line through
structures, connected between the HGL Up or EGL Up property from one pipe to the HGL Down or EGL
Down property of the next pipe. See Viewing Hydraulic Data in Profile Views (page 1426) for an illustration
of a hydraulic grade line and an energy grade line displayed in a profile view.
You can also create label styles that display labels for hydraulic properties, such as HGL and EGL. For more
information, see Labeling Hydraulic Properties in Pipe Networks (page 1413).
1 In AutoCAD Civil 3D, export the pipe network to an .stm file. For more information, see Exporting Pipe
Network Data to an .stm File (page 1423).
2 Launch the Storm Sewers Extension. For more information, see Launching the Storm Sewers Extension
(page 1421).
3 In the Storm Sewers extension, perform the hydraulic analysis tasks on the pipe network. This adds
valid hydraulic property data (HGL, EGL) to the pipe network. For more information, see the Storm
Sewers extension Help.
4 Export the pipe network from Storm Sewers to an .stm file. For more information, see the Storm Sewers
extension Help.
In AutoCAD Civil 3D, import the .stm file that now contains valid hydraulic property data. For more
information, see Importing Pipe Network Data from an .stm File (page 1422)
Verify that the AutoCAD Civil 3D pipe network contains valid HGL and EGL data. See verifying hydraulic
property data (page 1426).
1 In AutoCAD Civil 3D, right-click a part in the pipe network and select Pipe Properties or Structure
Properties.
2 On the Pipe Properties or Structure Properties dialog box, click the Part Properties tab.
Note the items listed in the Hydraulic Properties section. The values listed here are set when the pipe network
is imported from the .stm file. For more information on these properties, see the Pipe Properties dialog box
(page 2275) or the Structure Properties dialog box (page 2288).
The energy grade line is displayed as a red dashed lined (on the top). The hydraulic grade line is displayed
as a green dashed line (below the energy grade line).
In order to view hydraulic and energy grade lines in profile views, you must ensure that the following tasks
have been performed:
Task Description
Add hydraulic property information to the For more information, see Adding Hydraulic Property Data
pipe network by performing hydraulic to AutoCAD Civil 3D Pipe Networks (page 1424).
analysis on the pipe network using the
Storm Sewers Extension
Edit the pipe style to configure display Edit the HGL and EGL components listed on the Display
styles for the HGL and EGL components tab of the Pipe Style dialog box. You only need to do this
for pipe styles, not for structure styles. See Editing Pipe
Display Styles for HGL and EGL Components (page 1427)for
step-by-step instructions.
Create profile view and profile For more information, see Displaying Pipe Networks in
Profile Views (page 1364).
Pipe or Structure Properties dialog box Click the Part Properties tab of the Pipe or Structure Proper-
ties dialog boxes, and scroll down to view the values for
hydraulic properties.
Pipe Network Vista Display the pipe network in the Pipe Network Vista, and
scroll to view or edit the hydraulic property data values.
For more information, see Displaying Pipe Networks in Profile Views (page 1364).
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Pipe collection, then expand the Pipe Styles collection.
5 For the Hydraulic Grade Line and Energy Grade Line components, turn on visibility, and set other
display characteristics, such as color and layer, as desired.
Multiple barrels were found in the .stm file. The import is successful, however, one or
more pipe networks in the .stm file con-
tained a No. of Barrels property that is set
to more than 1. In Storm Sewers a No. of
Barrels property that is set to more than 1
creates two lines (pipes) with the same
size, invert, slope, and so on, in parallel.
AutoCAD Civil 3D cannot represent pipes
in this way. Therefore, when you attempt
to import a Storm Sewers file that contains
No. of Barrels set to more than 1, AutoCAD
Civil 3D ignores this value, and displays
this message in the Event Viewer.
Error importing pipe network <pipe net- You attempted to import pipe network
work name>: The current layer is locked. data from an .stm file when the current
layer in the drawing is locked, or the object
layers for pipes or structures is locked. In
this case, no new pipe networks are cre-
ated, and no existing pipe networks are
overwritten. The import is aborted. Unlock
appropriate layers and try importing again.
Error overwriting pipe network <pipe net- You attempted to update an existing pipe
work name>: Objects reside on a locked network with a pipe network from an .stm
layer. file when the current layer in the drawing
is locked, or the object layers for pipes or
structures is locked. In this case, no new
pipe networks are created, and no existing
pipe networks are overwritten. The import
is aborted. Unlock appropriate layers and
try importing again.
Pipe or structure <pipe or structure name> The import was successful; however, one
was not matched exactly. The closest larger or more Storm Sewers parts could not find
matching part size was used. part sizes that matched exactly with Auto-
CAD Civil 3D part sizes. In cases like this,
AutoCAD Civil 3D uses the closest larger
part size for the imported Storm Sewer
part.
Command Description
WARNING Before using Part Builder to create or modify pipe network parts, it is important that you create and
save a backup copy of the AutoCAD Civil 3D pipe network part catalogs and support files. These files are installed
by default in: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\C3D2011\enu\Pipes Catalog.
Create and save a backup copy of this folder and its contents, including all subfolders and their corresponding
content.
■ Pipe parts created with Part Builder must have a width, a height, and a centerline. Therefore, any pipe
shapes that do not meet this criteria are not supported in AutoCAD Civil 3D pipe networks. This includes
open channel pipes.
■ The section profiles of a pipe must have an enclosed loop. Therefore, it is not possible to create pipe
types such as horseshoe shape or U-shape (open channel).
■ Pipe part definitions must include a uniform wall thickness. Therefore, you cannot create pipe parts with
varying wall thicknesses.
■ Part Builder cannot create a rectangular box culvert shape that has chamfers on the inner diameter
corners.
■ When a pipe connects to a structure, there is a single point of connection between the pipe and the
structure. Therefore, you cannot customize a pipe part to have two connection points at one end of the
pipe, where it connects to the structure.
For more information, see the Pipe Networks chapter in the AutoCAD Civil 3D Best Practices Guide.
1431
Part Builder Overview
With Part Builder, you can design and edit shapes for drawing content that represent real-world pipe network
parts, such as pipes, manholes, catch basins, and headwalls.
Each piece of content represents a part family, such as concrete pipe, ductile iron pipe, and concrete elliptical
culvert. Each part family contains a collection of part sizes within that part family. For example, within the
concrete pipe part family, there are a variety of pre-defined part sizes available for that part. Part Builder
enables you to create and modify part families as well as individual part sizes.
When you use Part Builder, you can build 2D models of pipe parts, and/or 3D models of structure parts, and
generate 2D drawing views of those parts to use in design layouts. The model you create is defined according
to the size, shape, and position of the features that make up the part. Parts are stored in a part catalog, such
as the US Imperial Pipe Catalog, and you can navigate to and select the part from within a catalog when
you want to add it to your layout.
To access Part Builder, click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Part Builder.
When you do this, the Getting Started - Catalog Screen dialog box is displayed.
The icons on this dialog box let you perform several tasks. If you position your mouse over an icon, a tooltip
provides an explanation of the icon. Icons are activated based on what is selected in the catalog tree.
select the part in the catalog tree, and click Modify Part Sizes.
modify an exist- The building environment is opened for modifying the part.
ing part size
click New Chapter and enter a name. You can add chapters to
add a new the catalog or to another chapter.
chapter for a part
select the part and click Delete. The part is deleted from the
delete a part catalog and is removed from the catalog tree.
■ Part browser. The part browser is displayed on the left side of the screen. It provides an organized view
into the features of the currently selected part. As you define your part, additional features are nested in
a hierarchy under the appropriate folder. In the browser, you can show more or less detail by expanding
or collapsing the folders.
■ Modeling area (viewport). The modeling area (viewport) is displayed on the right side drawing space and
is designed to give you full view control over your part model. You can use the standard AutoCAD view
commands to change the direction in which you view your part model.
■ Toolbar. The toolbar provides quick access to select Part Builder commands. Icons are available for saving
your part, saving an existing part as a new part, generating a preview image, validating your part, and
specifying part options.
■ Feature-specific menus. Feature-specific menus are available by right-clicking a part feature in the browser
window. Options not available are shaded.
■ Pipes: An 8-inch circular pipe looks the same as a 10-inch circular pipe, except for the size of the diameter.
By creating a parametric part, you can create a 2D cross section of a circular pipe and assign a parameter
for the pipe diameter that can change in size. When the pipe is placed in your drawing, the 3D pipe uses
this cross-sectional shape parametrically sized to match your part size selection. You specify which size
pipe you want and the appropriate diameter is dynamically built to match.
■ Structures: A 38-inch concentric catch basin looks the same as a 48-inch catch basin, except for the height
and diameter. By creating a parametric part, you can create a 3D model of a catch basin structure and
assign parameters for the height and diameter that can change in size. When the catch basin is placed
in your drawing, you can specify the height and diameter, and the appropriate size catch basin structure
is dynamically built to match.
Key Terms
Understanding the following key terms will help as you begin using Part Builder.
constraint Controls the shape of a feature by establishing relationships between features in the model.
degree of freedom In part modeling, determines how a geometric object, such as a line, arc, or circle, can
change shape or size. For example, a circle has two degrees of freedom: center and radius. When these values
are fixed, degrees of freedom are said to be eliminated.
dimension Controls the size of a feature. When changed, the feature is resized. May be expressed as a
constant value, a value as part of a table, a calculated value, or a list of values.
domain Refers to the part category. There are only two domain types by default: pipes and structures. Each
domain type has a unique behavior in AutoCAD Civil 3D.
feature A building block of a pipe network part model. You combine features to create pipe network part
models.
model The part shape representing all possible sizes, and defined by parameters, geometry, dimensions, and
geometric constraints.
part size A specific set of values applied to the parametric model to define a single size.
work plane An infinite plane related to one or more features of the model. Work planes provide a defined
place in space from which to build the model.
3 Generate a preview image and define the insertion position of the part.
Once you have finalized the model, you generate a preview image for the part by taking a snapshot of
the model. You also specify the placement position that you use to place the part in your drawing. For
more information, see Generating a Preview Image of a Part (page 1461) and Defining Part Insertion
Position (page 1461).
Part Configuration
Defining the part configuration is the first step in creating a part.
When the parametric building environment opens, the top folder in the part browser is the Part Configuration
folder. The part configuration defines the characteristics and behavior of the part according to the domain
(pipe or structure), type, and subtype, and it is required to save the part. To ensure that the part can be
validated and saved correctly, you should define the part configuration before starting to model the part.
Part Description Describes the part family. When you create and name a new part, you enter the description
in the New Part dialog box. By default, the description is the same as the part name unless a different
description is entered. For existing parts, the part description is predefined.
Part Domain Defines the family of parts. The two basic domains are pipes and structures. You cannot edit
the part domain in the part browser. The part domain is predefined based on the part catalog you selected
in the Getting Started - Catalog Screen dialog box of Part Builder. The part domain is selected from a list of
predefined domains for pipe networks (pipes and structures). In the illustration above, the part domain is
Structure.
Part Type The part type defines certain behavior properties that are assigned to the part.
For pipes, the predefined part type is always “pipe”. A variety of pipe shapes may be available; for example,
circular, egg-shaped, elliptical, and rectangular. However, they are all defined with same part type (pipe).
For structures, the predefined part types include general, inlet-outlet structures, and junction structures. As
previously mentioned, the part type defines certain application behavior properties that are associated with
the part. A general structure, for example, has a different set of application behavior properties than an
inlet-outlet structure, and so on. In the illustration above, the part type is Inlet-Outlet Structure.
From the part browser, you can specify the part type by right-clicking on an item under Part Configuration
and choosing Edit. The list of predefined part types is displayed.
Part Subtype Lets you organize parts into more detailed, logical groupings. This grouping does not affect
the part behavior. In the part browser, you specify the part subtype from the list of predefined subtypes.
You can also enter a custom part subtype if you wish. The part subtype is helpful during part selection to
filter a large group of parts that are of a similar type. In the illustration above, the part subtype is Undefined.
Part Modeling
Modeling a part involves configuring a variety of part features.
In Part Builder, the term model refers to the graphical representation of a part. A model consists of various
features that have specific relationships to each other and that define the behavior of the part. Some features
require that you create simple shapes or points, while others require an extrusion or path. Some features
represent visible geometry, and some help you to position geometry precisely on a part. You can modify
features to refine and improve your parts over time. You change features by modifying their size and shape
or by flipping or moving them. To effectively model a part, it is important to understand how each feature
relates to the other features of modeling.
The following sections introduce the features of modeling. Refer to this illustration as you learn more about
each feature to help you understand the relationships between features.
NOTE To ensure a manageable model size, it is recommended to use a minimum number of work planes.
When you right-click on a work plane in the part browser, it is highlighted in the modeling area. You can
change the view direction to match that of the selected work plane when adding geometry or dimensions
by using the Set View option on the Work Plane shortcut menu.
IMPORTANT Any features attached to a work plane are restricted to the original plane. If you move a work plane,
any features attached to the plane also move. If you delete a work plane, any features attached to the plane are
also deleted. Each feature attached to a work plane appears under the Work Plane folder in the part browser.
Part Builder provides three default work planes that intersect at the origin of the X, Y, and Z axes. The default
work planes help you to get started with modeling a part. Generally, it is best to start your modeling in the
top work plane, and add others as needed. You can add work planes at any time during the modeling process.
Each work plane has its own internal coordinate system. Work planes can be created on any plane in the
current user coordinate system (UCS) or in the World Coordinate System (WCS).
Custom Creates a work plane that is not available by the preset work planes. The work plane has user-defined
values for the X and Y direction and the origin of the plane in the current UCS.
Offset Creates a work plane that is offset by a specified distance from a selected source work plane. For more
information, see Offset and Reference Work Planes (page 1438).
Reference Creates a work plane that is attached to the extents of a modifier feature. For more information,
see Offset and Reference Work Planes (page 1438).
Top Creates a work plane that matches the standard Top 3D view.
Bottom Creates a work plane that matches the standard Bottom 3D view.
Front Creates a work plane that matches the standard Front 3D view.
Back Creates a work plane that matches the standard Back 3D view.
Left Creates a work plane that matches the standard Left 3D view.
Right Creates a work plane that matches the standard Right 3D view.
Viewing default work planes
Geometry
Geometry features are the basic building blocks for defining the size and shape of the model.
In Part Builder, geometry that you define is constraint based, two-dimensional (2D), and must be attached
to a work plane. You can switch between work planes to define different geometry. As you add geometry to
a work plane, the geometry features appear under the Geometry folder of the associated work plane.
WARNING Avoid using basic AutoCAD geometry commands. AutoCAD geometry is not valid for work planes
and cannot be used to create features for part models.
Part Builder provides nine types of geometry you can use to build the model:
Point Defined by an X and Y coordinate.
Line Defined by a position and a direction; constrained by a start point and endpoint.
Unbounded Line Defined by a position and a direction; infinite in length because it has no constraining
start point or endpoint.
Arc Defined by a center point and a radius; constrained by a start point and endpoint.
Geometry | 1439
Rectangle Defined by lines and points that are constrained to maintain start points and endpoints for each
side and perpendicular angle.
Oval Defined by lines, arc, and points that are constrained to create two arcs tangent to two lines, with
defined start points and endpoints.
Point Reference Defined by a point in the work plane that is based on a source point selected from a different
work plane. A point reference is moved or deleted with the source point.
Project Geometry Defined by a projection of a modifier on a specified work plane. The project geometry is
fixed and cannot be moved in the work plane. It is linked to the modifier and adjusts as the modifier changes.
Dimensions
Add dimension information to specify the length, diameter, or rotation angle of geometric elements in the
model.
Models require dimension information to define the size and position for the design. Dimensions are typically
added after you have finalized the geometric features of the model; however, you can add dimensions at
any time during the creation process. When you add dimensions, you apply rules that control the size and
position of features in the model. Dimensions work in conjunction with constraints. The model is updated
when changes are made to the dimensions.
Dimensions specify the length, diameter, or rotation angle of geometric elements in the model. When a
dimension is added, a corresponding size parameter is also added. This parameter creates a placeholder value
for the dimension that provides flexibility for defining the values of dimensions. Dimensions can be defined
as default numeric constants or as equations. Although you can use them interchangeably, they each have
specific uses.
■ Numeric constants are useful when a geometric element has a static or fixed size that is populated as a
value in a basic table, list, or constant storage type.
■ Equations are useful when the size of a feature icon must be mathematically defined relative to the size
of another feature.
Part Builder assigns a variable name to each dimension parameter. Letters and numbers are used to signify
the type of dimension (such as length or diameter) and the sequence in which the dimension was added to
the model (1 for first, 2 for second, and so on). To keep the model shape from becoming distorted as the
dimensions resize it, define the large dimensions first. Dimension type depends on the feature you choose
and where you place the dimensions.
NOTE When adding dimensions it is recommended to select points to specify the start and end locations. It is
also helpful to turn off geometry that you not dimensioning for ease of selection.
Horizontal Distance Can be defined for pairs of geometry of all types. Defines a value between two features
in a horizontal direction. The value of a distance dimension cannot be negative.
Vertical Distance Can be defined for pairs of geometry of all types. Defines a value between two features
in a vertical direction. The value of a distance dimension cannot be negative.
Parallel Distance Can be defined for pairs of geometry of all types. Defines a value between two features in
a parallel direction. The value of a distance dimension cannot be negative.
Perpendicular Distance Can be defined for pairs of geometry of all types. Defines a value between two
features in a perpendicular direction. The value of a distance dimension cannot be negative.
Diameter Can be defined for circular and arc geometry. Defines a value for the diameter of a circular feature.
Angle Can be defined for pairs of linear geometry. Defines a value for the degrees between two linear features.
Constraints
Add constraints to create rules that control how a part can change in shape or size.
Depending on the geometry of the model, you may need to add one or more constraints to define the shape
or size of the model. Constraints enforce rules that you want the model to obey. Constraining a model
controls how a model can change in shape or size, called “degrees of freedom.” For example, a circle has
two degrees of freedom: the location of its center and its diameter. If the center and diameter are defined,
the circle is fully constrained and those values can be maintained. Constraints specify the relationships of
geometric features; for example, whether two features are perpendicular, parallel, tangent, concentric, or
have the same midpoint or radius.
NOTE After you add geometry, dimensions, or constraints to the model, the degrees of freedom are listed on the
command line.
Constraints work in conjunction with dimensions to control the shape and size of the model. Any time you
modify the model, the geometry retains the relationships among features in accordance with the applied
constraints. You add constraints to indicate your design intent. For example, a parallel constraint could be
defined between two lines based on the geometry of the model. You could also add a constraint to force
both lines to have the same length.
As you apply geometric constraints, continue to analyze the model, reviewing and replacing constraints as
necessary. As you gain experience, you will be able to determine which constraints control the model to
meet your design requirements. Some constraints work only with lines, while others work only with arcs,
circles, or points.
See Adding a Constraint (page 1459) for step by step instructions on how to add a constraint.
Applying a tangent constraint
Constraints | 1441
Applying a parallel constraint
Part Builder provides ten geometric constraints. The following list describes these constraints and the features
with which they can be used.
Tangent Can be defined between curved geometry (such as a circle or arc) and either another curved geometry
or a line. Makes two curves tangential to one another, even if they do not physically share a point. Tangency
is commonly used to constrain a line to an arc or circle.
Parallel Can be defined between pairs of geometry with a direction, such as lines. Causes two or more lines
to be parallel to one another.
Perpendicular Can be defined between pairs of geometry with a direction, such as lines. Causes selected
lines to lie at right angles to one another.
Concentric Can be defined for any combination of circles and points. Fixes the centers of the geometry to
the same location. Common uses include circle to circle, where the center of both circles is the same; circle
to point, where the point lies at the center of the circle; and point to point, where the points are the same.
Coincident Can be defined between a point and any geometry. Fixes two points (including center points)
together; essentially, the point lies on the geometry.
Equal Distance Can be defined between two pairs of geometry. The distance between the first pair of
geometries is fixed to the distance between the second pair. Equal distance constraints do not control the
actual distance. Each pair of geometries must be one of the following: any combination of points and lines,
two circles or arcs concentrically constrained, or a point and circle or arc concentrically constrained.
Equal Radius Can be defined between two circles or two arcs. Fixes the radius of both circles or arcs to be
of the same value. Equal radius constraints do not control the value of the radii.
Symmetric Can be defined between two geometries of the same type and a line. The two geometries are
symmetrically arranged on opposite sides of the line. The symmetric constraint does not force constrained
geometry to maintain an exact mirror image.
Normal Can be defined between a line or curve and a curve. (Two lines cannot be made normal; a
perpendicular constraint must be used instead.) The curves intersect and the directions of curve tangents
are perpendicular at the point of intersection. A common use is constraining a line to the normal of an
ellipse.
Profiles
Create profiles to define a two-dimensional (2D) outline of a part’s geometric shape.
Using Part Builder, creating a profile is as easy as drawing a closed shape. Profiles are similar to geometry in
that they are a visual representation of the 2D shapes that make up the model. Because profiles automatically
associate constraints to the geometry, you can use profiles as a source of information from which to create
features. You create profiles on a work plane and apply modifiers, such as extrusions, to them.
NOTE Profiles can be used to create solids using modifiers. Non-profile geometry cannot be used to create solids
directly. However, you can group a set of non-profile geometries together to create a custom profile.
Part Builder provides four types of profiles to use for creating features in the model:
Circular Creates a profile based on a circle defined by a center point and diameter to maintain its shape.
Rectangular Creates a profile based on a rectangle defined by four lines, four points, and four perpendicular
constraints to maintain its shape.
Oval Creates a profile based on an oval defined by two lines, two arcs, four points, and four tangent
constraints to maintain its shape.
Custom Creates a profile from existing geometry in the model. The geometry must be attached to a single
work plane. Constraints are assigned as needed to maintain the shape of the geometry as it was selected.
Modifiers
Use modifiers to create three-dimensional features of the model.
A modifier is a general term for any operation that affects features of the model. After creating profiles, you
can use modifiers to extrude, add, or subtract features and to sweep a profile along a path. You can also use
modifiers to create cut planes and transition features.
Part Builder provides six types of modifiers: extrusion, path, transition, cut plane, Boolean add, and Boolean
subtract. The extrusion modifier is the most common type used in part modeling and is generally the base
feature for a model. When you extrude a profile to create a feature, you specify how the feature will modify
the shape by choosing one of four operations: midplane, plane, from-to, or blind.
See Applying a Modifier (page 1460) for step by step instructions on how to apply a modifer.
Profiles | 1443
Applying a midplane extrusion modifier
Path Modifier
A path modifier sweeps a profile along path geometry. It creates a 3D feature based on the start and end
profile of a piece of geometry, such as a line or an arc. The start and end profiles can be different.
Applying a path modifier
You can also specify the number of segments to use to create a 3D feature.
Transition Modifier
A transition modifier creates a transition body between two profiles. A transition includes both a start and
end profile, which cannot be in the same work plane. Point references are useful to ensure that the profiles
align between work planes; however, the centers do not need to align.
Applying a transition modifier
Modifiers | 1445
Cut Plane Modifier
A cut plane modifier cuts a feature into two parts, only one of which is kept. A cut plane modifier enables
you to change the end of a feature to a slope, providing for the creation of more advanced features, such as
an exhaust vent. You can modify the cut plane by dragging the normal, or perpendicular axis, of the modifier
to create custom slopes. Cut planes are updated when the length of the modifier changes.
NOTE Cut planes cannot be defined parametrically. How they are defined in the model is how they will be
displayed when placed in your drawing.
Placement Points
Use the Autolayout Data option to define the part placement point in the drawing.
After finalizing the part model, you need to define the placement point for the part to ensure that it can be
placed correctly in a drawing. The Autolayout Data option in the part browser controls how placement
points can be defined. When you enable this option, an Autolayout Data folder is available in the part
browser that includes commands for adding placement points.
This is done by selecting a fixed point in the model. This point must be in the z = 0 plane. By choosing a
fixed point, the parametric model will retain this position as it is dynamically sized.
The placement point is the insertion point used to place the part in a drawing. You simply specify a point
in your model for the placement point.
Model Parameters
Configuring model parameters enables you to control the model’s shape and size by establishing relationships
between defined parameters.
As you add dimensions and constraints to the model, parameters appear under the Model Parameters folder
in the part browser. The Model Parameters dialog box provides a central location where you can view, create,
and edit the dimensional parameters of the model. You can define parameters to create additional model
relationships later.
It is often more efficient to assign numeric values to dimensions and other feature parameters as you build
the model. When you finalize the geometry, you can edit the model parameters to add calculated values.
Equation The mathematical expression that defines the value of the parameter. Constants, other model
and user-defined parameters, and mathematical operators can be used in an equation. You can use the
Equation Assistant to define the equation.
NOTE When using a constant value in an equation, be sure to define the constant as a model parameter. You
should verify that the result of the equation is non-zero to avoid undesirable results in your model.
Size Parameters
Part sizes are controlled by size parameters that set the dimensions of the part size.
Model parameters define the default part size of the model, and act as placeholders for new values that can
be specified later. There is a direct connection between the model parameters and size parameters in that
each model parameter is added to the size parameters in the part browser. Size parameters enable you to
create different sizes for the model to represent multiple part sizes and to add non-graphical parameters to
the part family.
You work with size parameters in the Edit Part Sizes dialog box. This dialog box lets you view and edit
parameter values and configuration attributes in a table. Each parameter is viewed or modified independently
of the others, so you can modify a single parameter at a time without scrolling through a large table.
The Edit Part Sizes dialog box has three working modes: Calculations, Parameter Configuration, and Values.
■ The Calculations mode provides access to the calculation formula of the parameter.
■ The Parameter Configuration mode provides access to attributes of the parameters, and includes
description, data storage, data type, units, visibility, context, and index.
NOTE When parameters are added to the model, the name, data storage, context, and type attributes are
assigned, and they cannot be changed.
■ The Values mode provides access to defined values of the parameter when they are stored as constants,
lists, and tables.
NOTE Any calculations set in the model are fixed and can be changed only in the model.
The parameter configuration allows you to configure data storage. The type of data storage lets you define
the parameter as a list or table of values, in addition to a constant or calculated value. You can also revise
the parameter description and control parameter visibility. For more information, see Adding Individual
Part Sizes (page 1456). You can define constant values, and copy and paste lists of values from other parts to
define multiple part sizes. Calculated values can only be viewed. Use the Model Parameters dialog box to
modify formulas for calculated values.
By creating a new parameter, you can define values that store additional information about the part. You
can add custom parameters in which you define all parameter attributes, such as data storage type. You can
also add parameters by selecting from a list of optional parameters that have been defined for you. The list
■ Save a backup copy of the part catalogs before using Part Builder, in case you need to revert to the original
catalogs provided with AutoCAD Civil 3D. You can use a browser application, such as Windows® Explorer,
to copy and paste the catalogs and their sub-folders to a new location.
■ Determine model dependencies. Analyze the model design to determine how features interrelate; then
decide how to create the model.
■ Work in a three-dimensional (3D) view. Creating the model in a two-dimensional (2D) view may lead
to confusion.
■ Start any new model in the top work plane and pick your fixed insertion position before modeling.
■ Use the order of the folders in the part browser as a guide to the steps involved in the creation process.
■ Do not use the EXPLODE command. Exploding a part deletes the part definition from the catalog.
■ Part Builder generates drawing views of your pipe network part. The AutoCAD MVIEW command does
not create associative views of your parts.
1451
Tips for Modeling the Part
Keep the following tips in mind as you model the part:
■ Use work planes to control the UCS orientation. Using the AutoCAD UCS command does not associate
the current plane with your part.
■ Use the AutoCAD Point Style command to increase point sizes. It is recommended to use an absolute
point size.
■ Use a minimum number of points. Reusing points is less confusing and helps in constraining the model.
■ Use both constraints and dimensions. Some constraint combinations may distort unconstrained features
of the model. If so, delete the last constraint and consider using a dimension or a different constraint
combination.
■ Use Part Builder dimensions. AutoCAD dimensions are not parametric and therefore cannot control the
size, shape, or position of part content.
■ Dimension large features before small features. To minimize distortion, define larger features that have
an overall bearing on the model. Dimensioning small features first may restrict overall size. Delete or
undo a dimension if the model shape is distorted.
■ Define shape before size. If you apply constraints before dimensions, your model shape is less likely to
become distorted.
■ Determine model dependencies before applying constraints. A single constraint can often be used to
define more than one feature’s shape. Therefore, analyze the model design to help identify necessary
constraints.
■ Add constraints as needed to define the model shape. Because constraints often restrict more than one
feature, use fewer constraints to avoid distorted models.
■ When using calculated values for model parameters, be aware that calculated values are not available in
the part Add Size dialog box.
Creating a Part
This section contains step-by-step instructions for creating a simple part using Part Builder.
Each section describes a separate phase in the creation process. You should perform the steps in the order
in which they are presented to avoid creating unusable parts.
2 Select the Structure part catalog by selecting Structure from the Part Catalog list at the top of this dialog
box.
3 Select the Simple Shapes folder, then click New Parametric Part .
The New Part dialog box is displayed.
4 Enter a name for this new part family. For example, enter Simple Cylinder 2.
2 To specify the part type, right-click Undefined Part Type, click Edit, and select a part type, such as
General Structure.
The predefined part types are dependent on the selected part domain. For example, for a pipe part, the
only available part type choice is “Pipe”. For structure shapes, which are more complex than pipe shapes,
there are multiple part type choices, such as general, inlet-outlet structures, junctions structures, and
so on.
3 To specify the part subtype, right-click Undefined Bounded Shape, click Edit, and select Cylinder.
The list of predefined subtypes depends on the selected type. For example for pipes, choices are arched,
circular, egg-shaped, elliptical, rectangular, and undefined shape. For structures, you can specify the
following subtypes for undefined bounded shapes: box, cylinder, sphere, and undefined.
Modeling a Part
To model a part, you must first define work planes on which to create the geometry of your model.
You can then create profiles and apply modifiers to define the shape and default size of the part. To avoid
distortion in the model, start with the larger features, which have more impact on the overall size of the
part, and then add the smaller features.
1 To create the new cylindrical structure, in the part browser, right-click XY Plane and click Add
Profile ➤ Circular.
For more information about profiles, see Profiles (page 1443).
2 Select a center point in the modeling area and specify a second point, or enter a value such as 12, to
define the cylindrical shape radius.
3 The next step is to add model dimensions to the part. Proceed to Adding Model Dimensions (page 1455).
For some shapes, you may want to add constraints or extrusion modifiers. For more information, see
Constraints and Modifiers in Understanding Part Builder.
TIP You may find it easier to add model dimensions in the top view, rather than in a model view direction. To
change the view, on the View menu, click 3D Views ➤ Top.
1 To define the overall length of the part, in the part browser, right-click Model Dimensions, and then
click Add Distance.
NOTE For constant parameter values, you can define a constant dimension, or choose not to add a dimension
and use the default value based on the actual size of the geometry. When no dimensions are added, the
parameter and its value are not displayed during part size selection.
2 Select the model modifier feature in the modeling area, and specify a location to place the dimension.
A length dimension (for example, LenB1 or LenB2) is placed in the model and is added to Model
Parameters and Size Parameters in the part browser.
4 Double-click the Equation column value for a model parameter (such as LenB1), and you can enter a
value or an equation to specify the length of the part.
5 The next step is to add individual part sizes to the model. Proceed to Adding Individual Part Sizes (page
1456)
1 To add part sizes, in the part browser, right-click Size Parameters and click Edit Configuration.
The Edit Part Sizes dialog box is displayed, showing all of the currently available size parameters for the
selected part. For the Simple Cylindrical Structure part example, some default size parameters are Part
Size Name (PrtSN) and Structure Vertical Pipe Clearance (SVPC).
2 To add a list of available sizes for the part, change the data storage type of a size parameter to List.
4 To add new sizes for the part, click a parameter value such as the LenB1 parameter, and click Edit on
the toolbar.
The Edit Values dialog box is displayed.
TIP You can cut and paste values from other part families using standard Microsoft® Windows cut and paste
functionality (CTRL+C and CTRL+V). Open another part in Part Builder, select the size parameter you want
to copy, and then paste the selected values in the desired parameter of your part. You can also create a list
of values in Microsoft® Excel, select the list of values you want to add, and then paste the values in the desired
parameter of your part.
Now when you click in the size parameter value you edited (for example, LenB1) on the Edit Part Sizes
dialog box, the list of sizes you just added is displayed.
6 To specify a unique, calculated part size name, select Calculations from the toolbar list box.
The calculation strings associated with parameter values are displayed. For example, the calculation
formula for a Part Size Name (PrtSN) for a structure could be “SHBW x SHBTh x SBSH inch Concrete
Rectangular Headwall”. Or for a pipe, it could be FormatNumber($PID,0) + “ inch Concrete Pipe”.
■ Click the value of PrtSN:Part Size Name and enter the text you want to display in the Part Size Name
string. For example, enter inch Dia. Concrete Pipe to add that text to the part size name.
10 Click OK.
The calculation value of PrtSN is updated with the valid string and, when selected, the result is displayed
in the status bar.
IMPORTANT The part size name is generated using VB (Visual Basic) Script’s FormatNumber function and
simple string substitutions. Correct syntax is crucial. Use the Calculator to ensure that the string is valid.
11 Click OK.
Adding a Constraint
Use this procedure to add constraints to the model.
The procedure below uses the example of aligning the top and bottom faces of a rectangular shaped part.
For more information on constraints, see Constraints in Understanding Part Builder.
1 In the part browser, right-click XY Plane and click Add Geometry ➤ Point.
2 In the modeling area, specify a point near the center of the top face rectangular profile and press Enter.
3 In the part browser, right-click XY Plane and click Add Constraints ➤ Equal Distance.
5 For the first pair, select the point in the center of the top face, and then the lower-left edge of the top
face rectangular profile.
6 For the second pair, select the point in the center of the top face, and then the upper-right edge of the
top face rectangular profile.
The model of the top face is updated to the specified constraint.
NOTE When adding constraints, you may be prompted that the geometry is unconstrained by a specific
number of dimensions. These prompts are for informational purposes only to assist you during the modeling
process. It is recommended that you add a minimum number of constraints to define the shape of the part
to avoid undesirable results.
8 To ensure the alignment of the top and bottom faces, in the part browser, right-click Bottom Face and
click Add Geometry ➤ Point Reference.
9 Select the existing point in the center of the top face rectangular profile.
A reference point is added to the bottom face work plane.
10 Repeat steps 3 through 5 to constrain all four edges of the bottom face using the reference point in the
center of the bottom face.
The model of the bottom face is updated to the specified constraints.
Applying a Modifier
Use this procedure to apply modifiers to the model.
The procedure below uses the example of applying a transition modifier to the two rectangular shaped parts
described in Adding a Constraint. For more information on modifiers, see Modifiers in Understanding Part
Builder.
2 In the modeling area, select the top face rectangular profile for the start profile; then select the bottom
face rectangular profile for the end profile.
A transitional box is created to represent the diffuser, and a transition modifier is added to Modifiers
in the part browser.
3 To add the lip of the diffuser, in the part browser, right-click Work Planes and click Add Work Plane.
The Create Work Plane dialog box is displayed.
4 Click Offset, enter Lip Offset for Name, and click OK.
5 In the modeling area, select the XY plane as the reference work plane, drag the cursor above the XY
plane, and enter 1 for the offset distance.
The Lip Offset work plane is created.
6 In the part browser, expand Modifiers, right-click Transition, and click Visible.
The transition modifier display is turned off in the modeling area.
7 In the part browser, right-click Modifiers, click Add Extrusion, and select the top face rectangular profile.
The Extrusion Modifier dialog box is displayed.
8 Under Termination, select Plane for Type, select Lip Offset for To, and then click OK.
A box is created to represent the top lip of the diffuser, and an extrusion modifier is added to Modifiers
in the part browser.
9 To see the entire model of the part, in the part browser, right-click Transition and click Visible.
2 Under Generate View, click a view direction for the preview image of the part.
TIP As you select a view, the preview image window in the dialog box is updated. This enables you to view
all the available preview images for the part before selection.
You can also click Browse to navigate to and select a bitmap image. Predefined images must be 200 x
200 pixels saved with 256 colors.
3 Click OK.
NOTE It is helpful to clean up the appearance of the model before defining the placement point. To turn off all
work planes and the associated geometry, profiles, and dimensions on those work planes, in the part browser,
right-click each feature and click Visible.
2 Make sure the check box in the Value column for the Custom Sizing Flag property is unchecked, and
that the Hide Part Flag property is checked, then click OK.
3 Change the model view to plan view. On the View menu, click 3D Views ➤ Plan View ➤ World UCS.
4 In the part browser, expand Autolayout Data, right-click Layout Data and click Add Trim Length.
NOTE To ensure components are trimmed correctly when placing a part into a drawing, you must define
trim lengths for the part in a specific order—left to right, then bottom to top.
You are prompted to select the start and end of the trim length. Repeat this for the three trim lengths
required for auto layout of the part.
■ Define the first trim length.
For the start of trim length 1, select the point at the center of the part. For the end of trim length
2, select the point at the left end of the part.
5 In the part browser, right-click Layout Data and click Select Placement Point.
You are prompted to select a point on your model. This point is the location at which connecting
segments would intersect if they were extended along their logical paths. The placement point is used
as the insertion point for the part when it is added to a drawing during autolayout.
If you have errors in your model, the status bar message displays that the part validation failed, and a
dialog box is displayed listing the errors. Review the errors, make necessary modifications, and repeat
this step until validation is successful.
Part is invalid
NOTE You may have warnings in the Part Family Validation Results dialog box even when the part is valid.
2 Once validation is successful, on the toolbar, click Save Part Family or Save Part Family As.
NOTE This prompt toggles the Hide Part option in the Options dialog box in Part Builder.
NOTE At this point, you are prompted to save changes to the drawing file <new part family name>.dwg. If
you saved the part family, you should also save this drawing file, so click Yes at this prompt. If you did not
save the part family, then you should click No at this prompt and not save this drawing file.
TIP To quickly change display configurations for a viewport, select a display configuration from the list in the
bottom-right corner below the drawing area.
1 Verify that the part catalog you modified is the current catalog that is selected in the Part Catalog field
of the Getting Started - Catalog Screen dialog box.
For example, if you modified the pipe catalog, make sure Pipe is selected in the Part Catalog field. If
you modified the structure catalog, make sure Structure is selected in the Part Catalog field.
2 On the Getting Started - Catalog Screen dialog box, select the top-level catalog folder in the tree view,
and then click the Catalog Regen button. This regenerates the selected part catalog and updates the
catalog to reflect new or deleted part sizes.
The Catalog Regen dialog box is displayed, showing the status of the regeneration process.
3 To verify that the part catalog has been regenerated and updated, open Windows Explorer.
5 In the Validate folder, open Catalog_Regen_Summary.txt, and scroll through the file to verify that the
selected part sizes have been copied to, or deleted from, the part catalog.
1 Verify that the appropriate part catalog is the current catalog that is selected in the Part Catalog field
of the Getting Started - Catalog Screen dialog box.
For example, if you want to validate the pipe catalog, make sure Pipe is selected in the Part Catalog
field. If you want to validate the structure catalog, make sure Structure is selected in the Part Catalog
field.
2 On the Part Builder Getting Started - Catalog Screen dialog box, click the Catalog Test button.
The Test Catalog feature steps through the catalog structure and validates part sizes by verifying that
necessary part size information exists for each part size. The Catalog Test dialog box is displayed, showing
the status of the testing process. When the catalog test is complete, an AutoCAD alert dialog box is
displayed, reporting the results of the test.
3 To verify that the part sizes in the part catalog have been validated, open Windows Explorer.
5 In the Validate folder, open Catalog_Validation_Summary.txt, and scroll through the file to verify that
all the part sizes have been validated. If a part was not validated, an error notice in the file states which
information is missing for the part size.
Modifying Parts
This section summarizes how to modify existing parts using Part Builder.
For parts in the pipe network catalogs provided by AutoCAD Civil 3D, you can change the part behavior
and part size parameters. For parts you create using Part Builder, you can change the part behaviors, part
size parameters, and part model including geometry, profiles, modifiers, constraints, and dimensions. You
can also delete parts that you no longer need. Deleting parts can be helpful when creating custom catalogs
to ensure that all associated definition files are managed correctly.
IMPORTANT When making changes to a part, refer to the illustration in Part Modeling (page 1436). This illustration
shows the relationship dependencies between features that must be maintained to ensure you are creating a
usable part.
1 Open Part Builder by selecting Home tab ➤ Create Design panel Part Builder .
The Getting Started - Catalog Screen dialog box is displayed.
2 In the Getting Started - Catalog Screen dialog box, open the desired pipe or structure part catalog.
For example, under Pipe ➤ US Imperial Pipe Catalog ➤ Circular Pipes, open the Concrete Pipe catalog
by double-clicking it, or by clicking Getting Started - Catalog Screen Modify Part Sizes.
3 In the Part Builder left pane, right-click Size Parameters, and then click Add.
4 On the New Parameter dialog box, click Material, and then click OK.
Notice that when you do this, the Mat (material) property is added to the Edit Part Sizes dialog box.
You may need to scroll to the right on this dialog box to see this property added.
5 Now that the Material property is added to this dialog box, you can configure the attributes for this
property by clicking in the cell for each attribute.
For example, you may want this Material property to show or not show in AutoCAD Civil 3D drawings.
Do this by setting the Visible attribute to True or False.
6 Make sure you set the Visible attribute to True so that the value for the Material property displays in
the drawing.
Now the Material property is available for parts in this part family. Using AutoCAD Civil 3D labeling features,
you can add text to this property to identify the type of material used for the pipe. For more information,
see Adding a Material Type to a Pipe or Structure Label (page 1413).
1469
1470
Corridors
32
You can test use AutoCAD Civil 3D corridor modeling to create flexible and configurable 3D models of corridors, such as
roads, highways and railways.
1471
You can create corridors with multiple baselines, which enables you to create more complex designs, such
as intersections.
NOTE There is no limit to the number of alignments that can be used to define an AutoCAD Civil 3D corridor.
Corridors are created from and based on existing AutoCAD Civil 3D objects, which include:
■ Alignments (horizontal). Used by a corridor as its centerline. For information, see Alignments (page 923).
■ Profiles (vertical alignments). Used to define surface elevations along a horizontal alignment. For
information, see Creating Profiles (page 1141).
■ Surfaces. Used to derive alignments and profiles, and for corridor grading. For information, see Surfaces
(page 645).
■ Assemblies. Represent a typical section of a corridor. Assemblies comprise one or more subassemblies
connected together. For more information, see Understanding Assemblies (page 1537).
After you have created a corridor, you can extract data from it, including surfaces, feature lines (as polylines,
alignments, profiles, and grading feature lines), and volume (quantity takeoff) data. For information, see
Exporting Corridor Data (page 1528) and Analyzing Sectional Volumes (page 1277).
NOTE There is no limit to the number of feature lines that can be created at a AutoCAD Civil 3D corridor station
or range of stations.
Corridors have their own display style and also inherit styles from their components. Before creating corridors,
you should be familiar with creating and managing styles (page 66) and command settings (page 114).
■ Feature lines connecting points along the point codes, which are defined in the subassemblies (used to
create the assemblies).
For overview information about AutoCAD Civil 3D objects, see Understanding Objects and Styles (page 63).
■ Display styles for corridor components include alignments, code sets, slope patterns, surfaces, and feature
line styles.
■ Components of the corridor object have their own labels. Corridor surface objects support all annotation
capabilities that a regular surface supports.
Corridor Section Code Set style; assigned from View of an assembly, so all ele-
corridor. ments, such as links, points, and
shapes, are displayed through
respective styles in the set.
For more information about styles, see Object and Label Styles (page 66).
For more information about the contents of this shortcut menu, see “The Object Collection (Settings Tree)”.
For more information, see Edit Feature Settings - Corridor dialog box (page 2053).
Creating Corridors
You can use two methods to create a corridor: using the Create Corridor command or the Create Simple
Corridor command.
All corridors are managed in the same way, regardless of how you create them. Also, all corridors are listed
in the Corridors collection in the prospector tree.
Before you can create a corridor, you must create the underlying data, such as surfaces, alignments, profiles,
subassemblies, and assemblies.
For information about how a corridor is displayed after it is created, see Changing Corridor-Related Default
Style Settings (page 1480).
For information about adding more complexity, see Managing and Editing Corridors (page 1478).
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Corridor drop-down ➤ Create Simple Corridor .
2 In the Create Simple Corridor Dialog Box (page 2052), in the Name field, enter a name for the corridor.
To name the corridor, select its default name and enter a new name, or use the name template. For
more information, see Name Template Dialog Box (page 2022).
4 To change the style used by the corridor, click the Corridor Style list or use the standard style creation
tools to edit or create a style. For more information about the style creation tools, see the Select Style
Dialog Box (page 2021).
The corridor style controls the appearance of corridor region boundaries and assembly insertion stations.
For more information, see Corridor Styles and Display (page 1473).
5 Click to select a layer. For more information about layers, see Object Layer Dialog Box (page 2221).
NOTE If you do not select a layer, the corridor is placed on the default layer.
6 Click OK.
7 Select an alignment in the drawing or press Enter to select an alignment in the Select An Alignment
dialog box (page 2027).
8 Select a profile in the drawing or press Enter to select a profile in the Select A Profile dialog box (page
2062).
9 Select an assembly in the drawing or press Enter to select an assembly in the Select An Object dialog
box (page 2027).
10 The corridor name is displayed in the Corridors collection on the Prospector tab. For information about
editing and managing the corridor, see Managing and Editing Corridors (page 1478).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Corridor drop-down ➤ Create Simple Corridor
Menu
Creating a Corridor
Use the Create Corridor command to specify complex parameters at creation time.
Other parameters could include station frequency and controlling offsets, as well as information about
multiple baselines and regions.
To create a corridor
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Corridor drop-down ➤ Create Corridor .
2 Select an alignment in the drawing or press Enter to select an alignment in the Select An Alignment
dialog box (page 2027).
3 Select a profile in the drawing or press Enter to select a profile in the Select A Profile dialog box (page
2062).
4 Select an assembly in the drawing or press Enter to select an assembly in the Select An Assembly dialog
box (page 2027).
5 In the Create Corridor dialog box (page 2049), in the Name field, enter a name for the corridor.
To name the corridor, select its default name and enter a new name, or use the name template. For
more information, see Name Template Dialog Box (page 2022).
7 Click to select a layer. For more information about layers, see Object Layer Dialog Box (page 2221).
NOTE If you do not select a layer, the corridor is placed on the default layer.
8 To change the style used by the corridor, click the Corridor Style list or use the standard style creation
tools to edit or create a style. For more information about the style creation tools, see the Select Style
Dialog Box (page 2021).
The corridor style controls the appearance of corridor region boundaries and assembly insertion stations.
For more information, see Corridor Styles and Display (page 1473).
9 Edit the parameters in the properties table. You can add additional controlling baselines, regions, or
offsets, modify alignments, profiles, assemblies, or station ranges and frequency, or edit targets. For
more information, see Editing Corridor Parameters (page 1486).
NOTE If targets are required for the corridor and not set, messages are displayed in the Event Viewer. To
display the Event Viewer, click General ➤ Utilities ➤ Event Viewer. For more information about the event
viewer, see The Event Viewer Vista (page 1817).
■ In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click a corridor and then click Select.
You can use the Corridor Properties dialog box to view and or change:
■ code sets
Many of these functions can also be accessed from the Corridor tab in the ribbon.
The topics in this section describe only those settings that affect corridor-related commands. They do not
apply to the drawing ambient settings that you can change at the Corridor collection level. For more
information about the drawing ambient settings, see Specifying Ambient Settings (page 84).
For more information, see Edit Feature Settings - Corridor dialog box (page 2053).
■ To edit settings for a specific command: In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Corridor
collection. Expand the Commands collection. Right-click the name of the command and click Edit
Command Settings. For example, right-click the CreateCorridor command and click Edit Command
Settings.
2 To specify the default highlight settings for corridor region baselines, boundaries, targets and internal
assemblies; right-click the Corridor collection and click Edit Feature Settings. Edit the Region Highlight
Graphics settings.
3 To specify the default assembly frequency along tangents, curves, and spirals, right-click the
CreateCorridor or CreateSimpleCorridor commands and click Edit Command Settings. Edit the Assembly
Insertion Defaults settings.
4 To specify whether assemblies are to be inserted at specific points, such as horizontal geometry or
superelevation critical points, right-click the CreateCorridor or CreateSimpleCorridor commands and
click Edit Command Settings. Edit the Assembly Insertion Defaults settings.
5 To edit the default scale to view corridor sections, right-click the ViewEditCorridorSection command
and click Edit Command Settings. Expand the View/Edit Options property group. Edit the Default View
Scale setting.
6 To specify whether a corridor is automatically rebuilt when you edit a subassembly parameter, right-click
the ViewEditCorridorSection command. Click Edit Command Settings. Expand the View/Edit Options
property group. Edit the Rebuild On Edit setting.
7 To specify the front and back clip values for 3D objects displayed in a corridor section view, right-click
the ViewEditCorridorSection command and click Edit Command Settings. Expand the View/Edit Options
property group. Edit the Front Clip and Back Clip settings.
9 To specify the grid and grid text display settings for a corridor section view, right-click the
ViewEditCorridorSection command and click Edit Command Settings. Expand the Grid Settings and
Grid Text Settings property groups. Edit the grid line, grid spacing, color, and text size settings.
10 To edit the default naming format for corridors and data that can be extracted from the corridor, expand
the Default Name Format property group. Edit the Corridor Name Template settings.
11 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the Corridor collection. Click Edit Feature Settings to open
the Edit Feature Settings - Corridor dialog box (page 2053).
3 To specify a default style for corridor output objects, such as alignments and profiles generated from
corridors, click the corresponding field. Click to open the Select Style dialog box.
4 To specify a default corridor style, click Corridor Style. Click to open the Select Style dialog box.
5 To specify a default style for a label set, click the corresponding field. Click to open the Select Label
Set dialog box.
6 To specify a default style for viewing corridor sections, click Section View Style. Click to open the
Select Style dialog box.
7 Click Apply.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Corridors collection. Right-click the corridor. Click
Properties. (You can also click the corridor in the drawing, and then click Corridor Properties in the
Modify Corridor panel of the corridors contextual ribbon.)
2 In the Corridor Properties dialog box, click the Information tab (page 2035).
3 To change the name of the corridor, enter a new name in the Name field.
4 To change the description of the corridor, enter a new description in the Description field.
5 To change the style of the corridor, click the Object Style list. Alternately, or use the standard buttons
to create, edit, or select a style.
6 Click Apply to make the changes, or click OK to make the changes and close the Corridor Properties
dialog box.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Corridor tab ➤ Modify Corridor panel ➤ Corridor Properties drop-down ➤ Corridor Properties
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Setting Targets
On a corridor, you can set and edit the values of subassembly target objects, such as surfaces, alignments,
and profiles.
Targets are required when the geometry of one or more of an assembly’s subassemblies requires corresponding
surface, offset, or elevation targets for defining that geometry.
NOTE If targets required for the corridor are not set, messages are displayed in the Event Viewer, indicating that
target objects are not found. To display the Event Viewer, click View tab ➤ Palettes panel Event Viewer .
For more information about the event viewer, see The Event Viewer Vista (page 1817).
For example, a subassembly ‘SideSlope’ parameter is used to define roadside grading, starting from the edge
of shoulder, and sloping at a specified grade, until it intercepts with an existing ground surface. In the
subassembly, references to the target surface are made by calling a surface object named ‘TargetDTM.’
However, when you create the corridor, and apply the subassembly to a corridor definition, there may not
be a surface named ‘TargetDTM’, and there may be multiple ground surfaces. Therefore, after the assembly
is applied to the corridor, you need to map the target name (TargetDTM) to an actual surface object name.
Typically, subassembly parameters that can use a target object to define a width or an offset can use the
following types of objects to define that width or offset: alignments, polylines, feature lines, or survey figures.
Similarly, subassembly parameters that can use a target object to define an elevation can use the following
types of objects to define that elevation: profiles, 3D polylines, feature lines, or survey figures.
Subassemblies that can use a target object to define a surface can only use a surface object to define that
surface.
As previously mentioned, a few subassemblies allow you to use pipe network objects as targets, such as the
TrenchPipe subassemblies.
The following table summarizes these capabilities:
surfaces surfaces
The Help topic for each subassembly lists the parameters in the subassembly that can be associated with a
target object.
BEST PRACTICE It is generally considered a best practice to set region targets after creating the regions. For
example, while creating regions, leave the targets set to “None”, and proceed with creating the regions. After
the regions are created, set the targets on the regions. This reduces the processing load because processing the
assembly insertion points (during region creation), and processing the setting of the assembly targets, are two
separate operations instead of one.
See also:
3 In the Corridor Properties dialog box, click the Parameters tab (page 2035).
■ To view or map the targets for a specific baseline or assembly, click the Target field for that baseline
or assembly.
5 In the Target Mapping dialog box (page 2064), set the surface, offset, and elevation targets in the
corresponding Object Name fields.
7 Click Apply.
1 In the drawing, click the corridor, then right-click and click Corridor Properties.
2 In the Corridor Properties dialog box, click the Parameters tab (page 2035).
■ To view or map the targets for a specific baseline or assembly, click the Target field for that baseline
or assembly.
4 In the Target Mapping dialog box (page 2064), set the surface, offset, and elevation targets in the
corresponding Object Name fields.
6 Click Apply.
1 In the Target Mapping dialog box (page 2064), do one of the following:
■ To select surfaces individually, click the Object Name field next to the corresponding surface in the
Target column.
■ To select all surfaces at once, click <Click Here To Set All> in the Object Name field. This is useful
for mapping TargetDTM's that are referenced by multiple subassemblies used in the corridor through
multiple assembly regions. For example, all side slope subassemblies typically need to be mapped
to the same existing ground surface.
2 In the Pick a Surface dialog box, select the surface from the list or click and select the surface in the
drawing.
1 In the Target Mapping dialog box (page 2064), click the Object Name field next to the corresponding
width or offset target name in the Target column.
■ Select an alignment from the Alignment list, or click and select an alignment in the drawing,
to add to the list.
■ Click Add >> to add an alignment to the Selected Entities to Target list.
■ Click Select By Layer to import all named targets on any layer selected in the Select By Layer, dialog
box or click Select From Drawing to select entities in the drawing.
■ Click to remove any excess entities from the Selected Entities To Target list.
■ If there are two or more targets in the Selected Entities To Target list, select Target To Nearest Offset
or Target To Farthest Offset for Selection Choice If Multiple Targets Are Found.
NOTE If you select more than one target object, **Varies** is displayed in the Object Name field.
1 In the Target Mapping (page 2064) dialog box, click the Object Name field next to the corresponding
slope or elevation target name in the Target column.
2 To target a profile:
■ In the Set Slope Or Elevation Target dialog box (page 2063), in the Select Object Type To Target list,
select Profiles.
■ Select from the Select An Alignment list, or click and select an alignment in the drawing.
■ Select from the Select Profiles list, or click and in the drawing select a profile to add to the list.
■ Click Add >> to add a profile to the Selected Entities To Target list.
■ Click Select By Layer to import all named targets on any layer selected in the Select By Layer dialog
box or click Select From Drawing to select entities in the drawing.
■ Click to remove any excess entities from the Selected Entities to Target list.
■ If there are two or more targets in the Selected Entities To Target list, select Target To Nearest Offset
or Target To Farthest Offset for Selection Choice If Multiple Targets Are Found.
NOTE If you select more than one target object, **Varies** is displayed in the Object Name field.
NOTE Using this feature adds additional stations to the corridor at the offset targets geometry points. Therefore,
if you have large or complex corridors, you may notice an increase in the time it takes to process (rebuild) corridor
models. It is important to note, though, that the corridor stations are only being added based on the horizontal,
and not on the vertical, geometry points of the offset targets.
3 Right-click CreateCorridor, and click Edit Command Settings. In the Edit Command Settings dialog
box, and then expand the Assembly Insertion Defaults property group.
4 Set the Value field for the Offset Target Geometry Points to Yes to enable this option.
4 In the Frequency To Apply Assemblies dialog box, expand the Apply Assembly node.
5 Set the Value field for the At Offset Target Geometry Points to Yes to enable this option.
6 Click OK.
Settings tab: Corridor ➤ Commands ➤ Right-click CreateCorridor ➤ Edit Command Settings ➤ Assembly
Insertion Defaults ➤ Offset Target Geometry Points
Dialog Box
Edit Feature Settings - Corridor (page 2053)
Frequency To Apply Assemblies (page 2060)
■ add baselines
■ add regions
■ isolate regions
■ hide regions
■ delete regions
If you want to edit the start or end point of a region without editing the adjacent region, additional grips
enable you to edit the extents of the regions independently.
3 If the grip is diamond-shaped, the start of one region and the end of another are both at this location.
You can edit the two regions at the same time, or edit the extents of the regions independently.
BEST PRACTICE Set region targets after creating the regions. For example, when creating regions, leave the
targets set to “None” and proceed with creating the regions. After the regions are created, set the targets on the
regions. This reduces the processing load because processing the assembly insertion points (during region creation),
and processing the setting of the assembly targets, are two separate operations instead of one.
4 In the Target Mapping dialog box (page 2064), set the surface, offset, and elevation targets in the
corresponding Object Name fields.
For more information, see Setting Targets (page 1481).
6 Click Apply.
NOTE You can also edit targets using the Parameters tab (page 2035) of the Corridor Properties dialog box. For
more information, see Setting Targets (page 1481).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
4 Zoom in and click the station (or enter the station value) where you want to split the region.
■ You can continue splitting regions by selecting another region to split, and another split location.
Press Enter when you are finished selecting regions and split locations.
NOTE You can also split regions using the Parameters tab of the Corridor Properties dialog box. In the table on
this tab, right-click a corridor region, and click Split Region. In the drawing, click a point or points parallel to the
alignment to split the selected region. Right-click to stop selecting split point(s), then click OK to split the region.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Isolate Region
This command turns off the visibility of all corridor regions, except the selected one. This command has
the same effect as clearing all region check boxes on the Parameters tab of the Corridor Properties dialog
box, except that of the selected region.
BEST PRACTICE Instead of creating one region for a long corridor, dividing the corridor into multiple, smaller
regions typically results in faster processing time for corridor rebuilds and o ther functions. For example, on a
5,000 meter corridor, create five regions, each of which is about 1,000 meters long. This reduces the processing
load when rebuilding the corridor.
3 If the corridor has multiple baselines, select a baseline. In the drawing, hover over the corridor region
to highlight the baselines.
■ Enter F to fill an entire gap area as a new region. After entering F, you are prompted to specify the
region location.
5 In the Create Corridor Region dialog box, specify a name for the new region, and specify an assembly.
Click OK.
NOTE If the assembly has offsets defined, the offsets are displayed as children of the region. For information
about creating an assembly offset, see Creating an Assembly Offset (page 1543). For information about editing
a corridor region’s offset, see Editing Offsets (page 1499).
6 On the Target Mapping dialog box, set and edit targets the region.
1 In the drawing, click the corridor, and then click Corridor Properties.
2 In the Corridor Properties dialog box, click the Parameters tab (page 2035). Do one of the following:
■ To add a new region after any existing regions, right-click the baseline for which you want to add
a new region. Click Insert Region - After.
■ To insert a new region between two existing regions, right-click the first region. Click Insert Region
- After.
3 In the Create Corridor Region dialog box, select the assembly to assign to the region. Optionally, you
may specify a custom region name; otherwise accept the default region name.
The region is added to the corridor.
NOTE If the assembly has offsets defined, the offsets are displayed as children of the region. For information
about creating an assembly offset, seeCreating an Assembly Offset (page 1543). For information about editing
a corridor region’s offset, see Editing Offsets (page 1499)
4 Edit the region. For information, see To Edit a Corridor Region (page 1490).
2 Select a corridor in the drawing, or press Enter to select from the list of corridors in the current drawing.
3 In the Corridor Properties dialog box, click the Parameters tab (page 2035).
4 To edit a selected region from the drawing, click Select Region From Drawing and select the region
in the drawing.
6 To change either the start or end station for the region, select either the Start Station or End Station
field. Enter the station number or click and click the station in the drawing.
7 To change the station frequency, click Set All Frequencies. Specify the frequency in the Frequency To
Apply Assemblies dialog box (page 2060).
8 To change the target to which the region is mapped, click Set All Targets. Specify the targets in the
Target Mapping dialog box (page 2064).
If you do not change the target when you change an assembly, the target will remain the same for most
common target types.
9 To delete a region, select the region, right-click, and click Remove Region.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE This method of adding stations by editing the frequency is the method that is typically used to change the
regular intervals for a region. To add manual stations to a corridor, it is best to use the Add a Section command
on the Modify Corridor Sections panel. This method lets you specify stations on any region and any baseline.
4 In the Frequency To Apply Assemblies dialog box (page 2060), click . Select the station location in the
drawing.
5 To add a description for the station, click the Description field and enter a description.
6 Click OK.
1 In the drawing, click the corridor, and then click Corridor Properties.
2 In the Corridor Properties dialog box, click the Parameters tab (page 2035).
3 Click the Frequency field for the region to which you want to add stations.
5 To add a description for the station, click the Description field. Enter the description.
6 Click OK.
■ Along tangents. Specify the assembly insertion frequency along the tangent portion of an alignment.
■ Along curves. Specify the assembly insertion frequency along the curve portion of an alignment.
■ Along spirals. Specify the assembly insertion frequency along the spiral portion of an alignment.
■ Along profile curves. Specify the assembly insertion frequency along the curve portion of the profile.
■ At specific points. Specify whether assemblies should be inserted at specific geometry points, including
horizontal geometry, superelevation critical, profile geometry, and profile high and low points.
NOTE If both an assembly frequency setting that references horizontal geometry and a setting that references
vertical geometry apply to a portion of a corridor, the setting that results in a smaller interval is used. For example,
if a segment is both a horizontal tangent and a vertical curve, and the vertical curve frequency adds assemblies
at more frequent intervals, the frequency specified for vertical curves is used.
You can also modify station location and frequency by manually adding stations.
4 In the Frequency To Apply Assemblies dialog box (page 2060), modify the properties as required.
5 To manually add a station, click . Select the station location in the drawing.
6 To add a description for the station, click the Description field. Enter the description.
7 Click OK.
To change the station frequency for a region using the Corridor Properties dialog box
1 In the drawing, click the corridor, then right-click and click Corridor Properties.
2 In the Corridor Properties dialog box, click the Parameters tab (page 2035).
3 Click the Frequency field for the region to which you want to add stations.
4 In the Frequency To Apply Assemblies dialog box (page 2060), modify the properties as required.
6 To add a description for the station, click the Description field. Enter the description.
7 Click OK.
To change the station frequency for a region using the Prospector list view
4 Click the Frequency field for the region to which you want to add stations.
5 In the Frequency To Apply Assemblies dialog box (page 2060), modify the properties as required.
6 To manually add a station, click . Select the station location in the drawing.
7 To add a description for the station, click the Description field. Enter the description.
8 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
4 Optionally, you can type ‘S’ and press Enter to display the Match Region Parameters dialog box.
Select the parameters to match (assembly, target, and or frequency). By default, all three are matched.
See also:
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Select another (more) consecutive region, and press Enter to end the command.
When you merge corridor regions, the new region keeps the region name of the first region.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE Only valid locations are available for selection. For example, only stations along the current baseline
that do not have a corridor region can be selected.
■ Enter F to fill an entire gap area with the copied region. After entering F, you are prompted to specify
the region location.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE You may have to rebuild (page 1615) the corridor to restore the visibility of all its regions.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 Click a corridor.
■ Select more regions to delete. Each selected region is highlighted gray. Press Enter to delete selected
regions, and end the command.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
4 Edit the appropriate properties in the Corridor Region Properties dialog box (page 2041)Corridor Region
Properties dialog box.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Adding Baselines
Add additional baselines to a corridor to create offset alignments.
Typically, you need to add additional baselines if you require offsets or more complex corridor models, such
as ones with intersections.
4 Specify a horizontal alignment by selecting one from the drop-down list, or click to select a baseline
in the drawing.
5 Click OK.
6 On the Select a Profile dialog box, specify a profile by selecting one from the drop-down list, or click
7 Click OK.
1 In the drawing, click the corridor, then right-click and click Corridor Properties.
2 In the Corridor Properties dialog box, click the Parameters tab (page 2035).
5 To select the profile for the baseline, click the Profile field. Select the profile from the list or click
to select a profile in the drawing.
6 To add a region to the baseline, right-click the baseline. Click Add. For information, see Adding Corridor
Regions (page 1489).
7 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Editing Offsets
If a region has an assembly offset specified, you can edit the alignment, profile, and station start and end
for the offset.
For information, on assembly offsets, seeCreating an Assembly Offset (page 1543).
1 In the drawing, click the corridor, then right-click and click Corridor Properties.
2 In the Corridor Properties dialog box, click the Parameters tab (page 2035).
3 To change the alignment for the offset, click the Alignment field. Select the alignment in the Pick
Horizontal Alignment dialog box.
4 To change either the start or end station for the region, select either the Start Station or End Station
field. Enter the station number or click and select the station in the drawing.
5 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 In the drawing, select the corridor, right-click, and click Corridor Properties.
3 For a region that has assembly overrides, click the Overrides column. For information about creating
assembly overrides, see Editing Corridor Sections (page 1523).
4 In the Assembly Override Stations dialog box (page 2034), the assembly name, range, stations, and override
method are displayed.
5 To remove the assembly overrides from a station (and apply the default assembly parameters) and delete
the station from the list, click the station and click .
6 To remove all the assembly overrides from the region, click Delete All.
The list is cleared and the default assembly parameters are applied to all stations in the corridor region.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
To edit a corridor’s code set style using the Corridor Properties dialog box
1 In the drawing, click the corridor, then right-click and click Corridor Properties.
2 In the Corridor Properties dialog box, click the Codes tab (page 2037). All codes used by the corridor with
their corresponding descriptions, style, and label style information are displayed in the properties table.
3 To change the code set style used by the corridor, click the Code Set Style list or use the standard style
creation tools to edit or create a style. For more information about the style creation tools, see the Select
Style Dialog Box (page 2021).
These styles control the way the corridor is displayed in section view.
5 Click Apply.
2 Click Corridor tab ➤ Modify Corridor panel ➤ ➤ Edit Code Set Styles .
4 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Assemblies with a varying number point codes of the same type are used at the stations.
■ The circular points on the gray lines are of one type of point code.
■ The circular points on the green lines are of another type point code.
■ There are two groups in each assembly: left and right (of the baseline).
Inward branching and extra points (with the same point code) are not connected:
Inward branching and extra points (with the same point code) are connected:
Outward branching and extra points (of the same point type) are connected:
1 In the drawing, click the corridor, then right-click and click Corridor Properties.
2 In the Corridor Properties dialog box, click the Feature Lines tab (page 2037).
3 By default, all identical point codes are connected as longitudinal feature lines. To delete feature lines
between one or more types of point codes, clear the check box in the Connect field for the appropriate
code.
NOTE If the Connect check box is disabled, the feature line is being used in a corridor surface definition. It
cannot be disconnected.
4 To control how to connect point codes that are used a varying number of times at different sections,
use the Branching field. Select one of the following:
■ Inward: The feature line branches inward, joining the innermost points.
■ Outward: The feature line branches outward, joining the outermost points.
5 To prevent feature lines from being disconnected when there is branching, select Connect Extra Points.
6 Click Apply.
3 By default, all identical point codes are connected as longitudinal feature lines. To delete feature lines
between one or more types of point codes, clear the check box in the Connect field for the appropriate
code.
NOTE If the Connect check box is disabled, the feature line is being used in a corridor surface definition. It
cannot be disconnected.
■ Outward: The feature line branches outward, joining the outermost points.
5 To prevent feature lines from being disconnected when there is branching, select Connect Extra Points.
6 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
To edit the feature line styles using the Corridor Properties dialog box
1 In the drawing, click the corridor, then right-click and click Corridor Properties.
2 In Corridor Properties dialog box, click the Feature Lines tab (page 2037). All point codes with their
corresponding types and feature line style information are displayed in the grid.
3 To change the style for an individual code, for the point code you want to change, click in the
Feature Line Style field. Select a style in the Pick Feature Line Style dialog box. For more information
about the style creation tools, see the Select Style Dialog Box (page 2021).
4 Click Apply.
4 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Feature Line tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Feature Line Properties drop-down ➤ Edit Feature Line Style
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Surfaces on the Corridors contexual ribbon tab also displays the dialog box that lets you create a corridor
surface.
For information about creating a detached surface, see Exporting Corridor Surfaces (page 1532).
When you create a corridor surface, it is added to the Surfaces collection on the Toolspace Prospector tab
with the corridor surface icon . You can work with a corridor surface the same way you do with any
surface in the Surfaces collection, including changing its style, adding labels to it, and using it for surface
analysis. The following features and behaviors are unique to corridor surfaces:
■ When you select a corridor surface, only the surface is selected. The corridor it is based on is not selected.
■ When you change the surface style of a corridor surface using its surface properties, the style is also
changed on the corridor properties Surfaces tab.
■ When a corridor is rebuilt, corridor surfaces are updated to reflect any changes in the corridor, and then
any edits are applied to the corridor model.
■ The corridor from which the surface was taken is listed in the surface properties definition.
■ Create a corridor surface. Use this method if a corridor surface is to be extracted from a set of link codes
and corridor feature lines. For example, create a surface using the Links data type and the Top code. After
a surface is created, you can add more link codes and feature lines to the surface definition.
■ Create a corridor surface from each link code. Use this method to create one surface based on each link
code. For example, if Top, Paved, and Side_slope are defined as link codes (in the subassemblies used to
build the corridor), this method creates three surfaces: one surface using Top as breaklines, a second
surface using Paved, and a third surface using Side_slope.
When creating corridor surfaces, sometimes you may need to correct overhanging surfaces in the corridor.
Overhanging surfaces are corrected in the Surfaces tab, Corridor Properties dialog box. For more information,
see Resolving an Overhanging Surface (page 1510).
NOTE You can also access this dialog box by right-clicking a corridor in Toolspace, selecting Properties, then
clicking the Surfaces tab.
3 Optional ly, click to open the Name Template dialog box. Set or modify the corridor surface naming
convention. For information about the name template, see Name Template Dialog Box (page 2022).
5 To add data to the surface, select it in the grid. Select the data type from the Data Type list. Select the
code from the Specify Code list. Click .
8 Optionally, to create another surface and add data to it, repeat Steps 2 and 3.
9 Optionally, you may need to resolve overhanging surfaces. For more information, see Resolving an
Overhanging Surface (page 1510).
10 If you do not want to create a dynamic corridor surface, clear the check box next to the surface name.
5 Click to create a corridor surface from each link code. Corridor surfaces are created from all link
codes and are listed in the grid. You can view and modify them.
6 If you do not want a corridor surface added to the Surfaces collection on the Toolspace Prospector tab,
clear the check box next to that surface name.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE Because a corridor has a large number of dependencies, it cannot be moved, copied, rotated, nor scaled
up or down. However, a corridor surface can be copied. You can then edit the copied surface.
When a corridor surface is copied, a naming convention is used. For example if the original corridor surface
is named ‘Corridor - Datum’, the new surface is named ‘Corridor - Datum (1)’. If the ‘Corridor - Datum‘
surface is copied again, the new surface is named ‘Corridor - Datum (2)’. If the ‘Corridor - Datum (1)’ surface
is copied, the new surface is named ‘Corridor - Datum (1) (2)’.
1 In the drawing area, click the corridor surface. Right-click and click Basic Modify Tools ➤ Copy.
At the command line, you are prompted to specify a base point for the corridor surface.
3 To edit the name of the corridor surface, right-click the surface in the Prospector tree. Click Properties.
The Surface Properties dialog box is displayed with the Information tab (page 2656) active. The Name
field contains the name of the copied corridor, which is, by default, “ <surface-name> (1).”
6 Click Apply to make the changes, or click OK to make the changes and close the Surface Properties
dialog box.
4 In the properties table, select the surface that you want to edit.
5 To modify the name of the surface, click the name. Modify accordingly.
6 To change the surface display style used by the corridor surface, click the Surface Style field. Select the
style from the Pick Corridor Surface Style dialog box or use the standard style creation tools to edit or
create a style. For more information about the style creation tools, see the Select Style Dialog Box (page
2021).
7 To change the render material used by the corridor surface, click the Render Material field. Select the
style from the Select Render Material dialog box or use the standard style creation tools to edit or create
a style. For more information about rendering corridor surfaces, see the Rendering Corridor Models
(page 1533).
8 To add data to the surface, select the surface in the properties table. Select the data type in the Data
Type list. Select the code in the Specify Code list. Click .
9 To remove data from a surface, in the properties table, expand the surface. Select the data component
that you want to delete, and click .
10 To remove the corridor surface from the Surfaces collection on the Toolspace Prospector tab, clear the
check box next to the surface name.
11 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 In the drawing, click the corridor, then right-click and click Corridor Properties.
2 In Corridor Properties dialog box, click the Surfaces tab (page 2038).
4 Click in the Overhang Correction column, and select Top Links or Bottom Links. The entry defaults to
None.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Render Only. Used to represent different parts of corridor surface with different materials (when rendering),
for example, asphalt and grass. For more information about rendering, see Rendering Objects (page 1764).
■ Hide Boundary. Used to mask to create void areas or punch holes in the corridor surface. For example,
if a link code Paved is used on either side of the corridor with another surface (a median), separating
them, when you create a corridor surface using Paved as the data, AutoCAD Civil 3D tries to connect the
gap in between two link codes. To create voids, you define boundaries to represent the surface
appropriately.
■ Outside Boundary. Used to define the outer boundary of the corridor surface.
NOTE A corridor surface must exist before you can add a corridor boundary. For information about creating
a corridor surface, see Creating and Editing Corridor Surfaces (page 1506).
■ Add Automatically, when there is a single baseline, based on point codes to which feature lines are
assigned
■ Add From Polygon, using a closed polygon that forms the boundary
When selecting the feature lines from which to create the boundary, first select the bottom end of one
feature line, followed by the top end of its pair.
For example, select the bottom outside edge of a lane followed by the top outside edge of a lane to create a
boundary that encompasses both lanes:
If you are creating the corridor boundary using a polygon, you can create the required polygon by exporting
corridor feature lines as polylines, and then join them to create the required polygon.
For more information about converting feature lines to polylines, see Exporting Corridor Data (page 1528).
NOTE The Add Automatically option to add boundaries Automatically is not available if more than one baseline
is used in the corridor. In that case, select Corridor Extents As Outer Boundary, to automatically add a boundary
for each corridor surface.
1 In the drawing, click the corridor, then right-click and click Corridor Properties.
You can also access this functionality from the ribbon by clicking Corridor tab ➤ Modify Corridor
panel ➤ Corridor Surfaces ..
NOTE Only point codes that form a pair of feature lines in the corridor are listed, for example daylight
and ETW.
■ To automatically add a boundary to a corridor with multiple baselines, click Corridor Extents As
Outer Boundary.
The boundary is added to the corridor surface where you can modify its name, style usage and type.
For information, see Editing a Corridor Boundary (page 1514).
1 In the drawing, click the corridor, then right-click and click Corridor Properties.
You can also access this functionality from the ribbon by clicking Corridor tab ➤ Modify Corridor
panel ➤ Corridor Surfaces .
3 Right-click the corridor surface to which you want to add a boundary. Click Add Interactively.
NOTE A corridor surface must exist before you can add a corridor boundary. For information about creating
a corridor surface, see Creating and Editing Corridor Surfaces (page 1506).
4 In the drawing, click a corridor feature line that will form one side of the boundary. If you make an
ambiguous selection, the Select A Feature Line dialog box is displayed. Select a feature line from the
list.
5 In the drawing, click the corridor feature line that will form the other side of the boundary. If you make
an ambiguous selection, the Select A Feature Line dialog box is displayed. Select a feature line from the
list.
7 In the Boundaries tab grid, expand the corridor surface to display the boundary.
8 Click Use Type. Select the type of boundary, either: Render Only, Hide Boundary, or Outside Boundary.
9 Click Apply.
1 In the drawing, click the corridor, then right-click and click Corridor Properties.
You can also access this functionality from the ribbon by clicking Corridor tab ➤ Modify Corridor
panel ➤ Corridor Surfaces ..
3 Right-click the corridor surface to which you want to add a mask. Click Add From Polygon.
4 In the drawing window, click the closed polygon you want to use to define the boundaries of the
corridor surface.
5 The boundary is added to the corridor surface where you can modify its name, render style, and type.
For more information, see Editing a Corridor Boundary (page 1514).
NOTE If you create an invalid boundary, you will be prompted to continue (and correct the error), to save the
invalid boundary (which can be corrected later) or to cancel the boundary creation.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel Create Boundary From Corridor.
2 Click a corridor in the drawing, or press Enter to select a corridor in the Select A Corridor dialog box.
A closed polyline is created as the outer boundary of the corridor. This closed polyline can then be used
to create a surface boundary, using the Add From Polygon (page 1513) command.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Specify if the boundary is to be drawn on a feature line in reverse of the station incrementing order.
1 In the drawing, click the corridor, then right-click and click Corridor Properties.
You can also access this functionality from the ribbon by clicking Corridor tab ➤ Modify Corridor
panel ➤ Corridor Surfaces ..
3 Expand the corridor surface for which you want to modify a boundary.
4 To modify the boundary name or description, click its Name or Description field. Enter a new name or
description.
5 To change the render material, which is used for Render Only boundaries, click the Render Material
field for the boundary. Select a render material from the Select Render Material dialog box.
6 To view the boundary definitions and change the extents, click [...] in the Definition column.
7 In the Corridor Boundary Definition dialog box (page 2032), to change either the start or end points for
the boundary, either select the Start Point or End Point fields and enter the values number, or click
and click the point in the drawing.
8 To reverse the boundary draw direction along a feature line, either select or clear the Reverse Direction
check box.
9 To add a new feature line to the boundary definition, click . Click the feature line in the drawing.
10 To delete a feature line from the boundary definition, select the feature line. Click .
13 To verify that the boundary polygon is well formed (for example, that its edges do not cross each other),
click .
A message is displayed next to the button, indicating the state of the boundary.
15 To change the boundary type, click Use Type. Select the boundary type.
16 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
To add a corridor slope pattern using the Corridor Properties dialog box
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand Corridors, right-click the corridor, and click Properties.
2 In Corridor Properties dialog box, click the Slope Patterns tab (page 2040).
4 In the drawing, select the first corridor feature line that will form one side of the slope. If you make an
ambiguous selection, the Select A Feature Line dialog box is displayed. Select a feature line from the
list.
5 Select the second corridor feature line that will form the other side of the slope. If you make an ambiguous
selection, the Select A Feature Line dialog box is displayed. Select a feature line from the list.
6 Click Apply.
4 In the drawing, select the first corridor feature line that will form one side of the slope. If you make an
ambiguous selection, the Select A Feature Line dialog box is displayed. Select a feature line from the
list.
5 Select the second corridor feature line that will form the other side of the slope. If you make an ambiguous
selection, the Select A Feature Line dialog box is displayed. Select a feature line from the list.
6 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand Corridors. Right-click the corridor. Click Properties.
2 In the Corridor Properties dialog box, click the Slope Patterns tab (page 2040).
3 To change the slope pattern style, click in the Slope Pattern Style field. Select a style from the Pick
Style dialog box or use the standard style creation tools to edit or create a style. For more information
about the style creation tools, see the Select Style Dialog Box (page 2021).
4 To change either the start or end points for the slope pattern, select either the Station Start or Station
End fields. Enter the values, or click and click the location in the drawing.
5 Click Apply.
3 To change the slope pattern style, click in the Slope Pattern Style field. Select a style from the Pick
Style dialog box or use the standard style creation tools to edit or create a style. For more information
about the style creation tools, see the Select Style Dialog Box (page 2021).
4 To change either the start or end points for the slope pattern, select either the Station Start or Station
End fields. Enter the values, or click and click the location in the drawing.
5 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Rebuilding Corridors
After making certain types of changes to a corridor, you need rebuild the corridor.
Rebuilding a corridor updates it to apply all changes made to the corridor’s dependent components, such
as its baselines, profiles, or dependent surfaces.
Corridors that need to be rebuilt have a warning icon displayed next to the corridor’s name in the
Prospector tree.
2 Click Corridor tab ➤ Modify Corridor panel ➤ Rebuild Corridor drop-down ➤ Rebuild Corridor .
NOTE You can also rebuild a corridor by right-clicking the corridor in Prospector and selecting Rebuild.
2 Click Corridor tab ➤ Modify Corridor panel ➤ Rebuild Corridor drop-down ➤ Rebuild All Corridors
.
NOTE You can also rebuild all corridors in the drawing by right-clicking the Corridors collection in Prospector and
selecting Rebuild All.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Deleting a Corridor
You can delete a corridor, erasing it from the drawing and removing it from the Corridors collection in the
Prospector tree.
■ In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Corridors collection. Right-click the corridor. Click
Delete.
The corridor is erased from the drawing and removed from the Corridors collection in the Prospector
tree.
NOTE You cannot delete objects that have dependencies (other objects). For example, if you have created a
section object from the corridor, you must delete the section before you delete the corridor.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
3 Optionally, you can use the Select A Baseline list to select another baseline for the corridor or click
and select an alternate alignment in the drawing.
Alternately, in the prospector or the viewport, you can right click on the corridor you wish to view as sections,
right-click and click View/Edit Corridor Section.
1 To view a section at a different station: On the Station Selection panel, select it from the Select a Station
drop-down list.
2 On the Station Selection panel, click or to view the first or end station.
3 Click to view the previous station or click to view the next station.
4 To view only the stations that have assembly overrides applied to them, click Show Overridden
Stations. Only stations with assembly overrides are displayed in the list.
■ Click Zoom to an Offset and Elevation to lock the zoom to a selected elevation or offset.
7 Optionally, to view detailed information about the assembly and subassemblies used by the region in
the Corridor Parameters vista: On the Corridor Edit Tools panel, click Parameter Editor.
1 To change corridor section viewing and editing options: On the Section Editor tab, View Tools panel,
click View/Edit Options.
2 In the View/Edit Corridor Section Options (page 2065) dialog box, under View/Edit Options, select a style
from the Code Set Style list, to change the display of corridor section elements such as shapes, links,
and points.
3 Under View/Edit Options, enter a new scale in the Default View Scale field.
4 Under View/Edit Options, select the Rebuild on Edit option, to automatically rebuild the corridor model
when you edit a subassembly using the section viewing and editing tools.
NOTE To change the default section viewing scale or automatic corridor rebuild value, on the Toolspace
Settings tab, expand Corridor ➤ Commands. Right-click ViewEditCorridorSection, and click Edit Command
Settings. In the Edit Command Settings dialog box, expand the View/Edit Options property group. Modify
the Default View Scale and Rebuild On Edit settings as required.
5 Under View/Edit Options, edit the values in the Front Clip and Back Clip fields, to display 3D objects,
such as pipe network parts located at the specified station.
You can display any 3D object located at the station, including pipe network parts, blocks, and polylines.
The clip values control the start and end of the visible extents of objects in the corridor section, from
front to back.
NOTE Unless 3D Objects reside on a visible layer, they are not displayed in the corridor section view. By
default, layers for objects that are not referenced by the corridor are not visible.
6 Under Grid Settings, set the visibility and separation of grid lines, the color of grid lines, and the visibility
and color of a center axis for the grid.
7 Under Grid Text Settings, set the style, color and size of text, along with the visibility of center axis
annotation.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ In the Edit Command Settings - ViewEditCorridorSection dialog box, expand the View/Edit Options
property group.
■ Click OK.
■ In the Viewports dialog box, New Viewports tab, Standard Viewports list, select Three: Above.
■ Click OK.
3 Set the corridor plan view in one of the smaller viewports, and the profile view in the other smaller
viewport.
6 In the Section Editor tab, Station Selection panel, Select a Station list, select a station.
That station’s corridor section view will be displayed in the top viewport. Station Tracker displays the
station location in both plan and profile views.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Edit the assembly manually by adding links and points to the subassembly part geometry.
Overriding assemblies may require you to edit the way points, links, and shapes are represented in the
corridor as feature codes. Use the Edit User Defined Codes command to change or delete codes as required.
NOTE If you have edited a subassembly by either adding or deleting a point, adding or deleting a link, or editing
the subassembly geometry using grips, you cannot edit the values of the changed parameters in the Corridor
Section Editor.
3 To view detailed information about the assembly and subassemblies used by the region in the Corridor
Parameters vista: On the Section Editor tab, Corridor Edit Tools panel, click Parameter Editor.
4 Click the station drop-down list and select the station for which you initially want to override one or
more assembly parameters.
5 In the Corridor Parameters vista, click the Value field for the parameter that you want to override. Enter
a new value. When an override is applied, the Override column displays True. To remove an individual
override, clear the check box next to the subassembly or parameter. To remove all overrides in an
assembly, clear the checkbox in the Override column next to the assembly name.
6 To apply the override to a range of stations: On the Section Editor tab, Corridor Edit Tools panel, click
Apply to a Station Range.
7 In the Apply To A Range Of Stations dialog box, enter both the start station and the end station. Click
OK.
8 To view only the stations that have assembly overrides applied to them: On the Station Selection panel,
click Show Overridden Stations. Only stations with assembly overrides are displayed in the list.
10 If the corridor is not set to rebuild automatically, click Update Corridor to rebuild the corridor.
Corridor surfaces and any other data that is derived from the corridor are updated using the overrides.
Parameters vista: On the Section Editor tab, Corridor Edit Tools panel, click Parameter Editor.
4 In the Section Editor tab, Station Selection panel, Select a Station list, select the station to which you
want to add a point.
5 To add a point: On the Section Editor tab, Corridor Edit Tools drop-down, click Add Point.
6 In the drawing window, select the link you want to break by adding a point.
8 To delete a point: On the Corridor Edit Tools drop-down click Delete Point.
10 To view only the stations that have assembly overrides applied to them: On the Station Selection panel,
click Show Overridden Stations. Only stations with assembly overrides are displayed in the list.
12 If the corridor is not set to rebuild automatically, on the Corridor Edit Tools panel, click Update
Corridor to rebuild the corridor. Corridor surfaces and any other data that is derived from the corridor
are updated using the overrides.
NOTE You can add links only to individual subassemblies. You cannot add links that connect two subassemblies.
3 In the Section Editor tab, Station Selection panel, Select a Station list, select the station to which you
want to add a link.
4 To add a link: On the Corridor Edit Tools drop-down, click Add Link.
5 In the drawing window, select the first point of the two points you want to connect.
7 To delete a link: On the Corridor Edit Tools drop-down, click Delete Link.
9 To view only the stations that have assembly overrides applied to them: On the Station Selection panel,
click Show Overridden Stations. Only stations with assembly overrides are displayed in the list.
11 If the corridor is not set to rebuild automatically, on the Corridor Edit Tools panel, click Update
Corridor to rebuild the corridor. Corridor surfaces and any other data that is derived from the corridor
are updated using the overrides.
3 To view detailed information about the assembly and subassemblies used by the region in the Corridor
Parameters vista: On the Section Editor tab, Corridor Edit Tools panel, click Parameter Editor.
4 In the Section Editor tab, Station Selection panel, Select a Station list, select the station to which you
want to add subassemblies.
7 To add the subassembly to the assembly: On the Corridor Edit Tools drop-down, click Add
Subassembly.
8 In the drawing window, select the subassembly to which you want to attach the new subassembly.
9 Optionally, if you are inserting the subassembly between two existing subassemblies, select the second
assembly.
10 To delete a subassembly: On the Corridor Edit Tools drop-down, click Delete Subassembly.
12 To view only the stations that have assembly overrides applied to them: On the Station Selection panel,
click Show Overridden Stations. Only stations with assembly overrides are displayed in the list.
14 If the corridor is not set to rebuild automatically, on the Corridor Edit Tools panel, click Update
Corridor to rebuild the corridor. Corridor surfaces and any other data that is derived from the corridor
are updated using the overrides.
NOTE You cannot undo a subassembly deletion. To rebuild the original design, insert a new instance of the
subassembly or repeat the assembly selection for the region.
3 In the Section Editor tab, Station Selection panel, Select a Station list, select the station for which you
want to edit feature codes.
■ Enter d (delete), and then click Yes to delete the user-defined codes associated with the feature.
NOTE You can only delete user-defined point, link, and shape codes. You cannot delete codes added by the
subassembly macro using the Edit User Defined Code command.
7 If the corridor is not set to rebuild automatically, on the Corridor Edit Tools panel, click Update
Corridor to rebuild the corridor. Corridor surfaces and any other data that is derived from the corridor
are updated using the overrides.
3 In the Section Editor tab, Station Selection panel, Select a Station list, select the station at which you
want to edit.
Square grip at end of link Moves the end of one of more links at this point to any
point in the grid. When active, the following values are
labeled: offset from baseline or controlling offset, elevation,
grade, and slope.To maintain the elevation value while
editing, keep the point near its original vertical location.
To maintain the offset value, keep the point near the ori-
ginal horizontal location.
Triangular grip at end of Moves the endpoint of a link while preserving the grade.
link When active, the following values are labeled: offset and
length of link, elevation difference from original location.
Square grip at link mid- Moves the link to a parallel position above or below the
point current position. When active, the following values are
labeled: offset from baseline or controlling offset, elevation,
elevation difference from original location.
5 Identify the grip you want to move, and then Ctrl+click it once to make it active.
The grip changes color from blue to red, and the link property labels are displayed.
6 To edit a value in one of the grip labels, press Ctrl + Tab until the value you want to edit is active. Enter
a new value.
7 Drag the grip to its new location, and click to place it there. The grip follows your mouse pointer, within
the limits imposed by the grip type.
3 If the corridor has multiple baselines, you are prompted to select a baseline.
4 Select a manual assembly insertion station, and press Enter to add the section.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
3 If the corridor has multiple baselines, you are prompted to select a baseline.
4 Select a manual assembly insertion station, and press Enter to delete the section.
NOTE Exported feature lines are not connected to the corridor and are not updated if the corridor changes.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel Create Polyline From Corridor .
2 In the drawing, click the corridor feature line. If you make an ambiguous selection, the Select A Feature
Line dialog box is displayed. Select a feature line from the list.
The feature line is exported as a polyline. The feature line’s point code is displayed at the command
line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Feature Line drop-down ➤ Create Feature Line From Corridor
.
You can also access this command by selecting a corridor in the drawing, and clicking Corridors tab
➤ Launch Pad panel ➤ Feature Lines From Corridor.
2 In the drawing, click the corridor feature line you want to export. If you make an ambiguous selection,
the Select A Feature Line dialog box is displayed. Select a feature line from the list.
■ Click the Create Dynamic Link To The Corridor check box to maintain a link between the feature
line and the corridor.
4 If more than one site exists in the drawing, the Pick A Site dialog box is displayed. Select a site.
5 The feature line is exported as a grading feature line. For information about grading feature lines, see
Creating Feature Lines (page 808).
NOTE Grading feature line objects are not named components in AutoCAD Civil 3D. The style for the feature
line is derived from the corridor object properties for the point code from which the feature line was derived.
For information about changing the style for the grading feature line, see Using Grading Styles (page 802).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Feature Line drop-down ➤ Create Feature Line From Corridor
Menu
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Alignment drop-down ➤ Create Alignment From Corridor
.
2 In the drawing, select a corridor feature line to export. If you make an ambiguous selection, the Select
A Feature Line dialog box is displayed. Select a feature line from the list.
3 Enter the required data in the Create Alignment - From Polyline dialog box. For more information, see
Creating an Alignment from Graphic Entities (page 952).
4 Select another feature line to export as an alignment or press Enter to end the command.
5 The feature line(s) is exported as an alignment and can be viewed and edited in the Toolspace Prospector
tree. For information, see Editing Alignments (page 1060).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Alignment drop-down ➤ Create Alignment From Corridor
Menu
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Profile drop-down ➤ Create Profile From Corridor .
2 In the drawing, select the corridor feature line to export. If you make an ambiguous selection, the Select
A Feature Line dialog box is displayed. Select a feature line from the list.
3 In the Create Profile - Draw New dialog box, enter the required data. For more information, see Creating
Layout Profiles (page 1143).
The message “<profile name> is created” is displayed at the command line. If you have any profile views
in the current drawing for the baseline alignment, the new corridor profile is added to it and displayed
with the selected style.
4 Select another feature line to export as a profile or press Enter to end the command.
5 The feature line(s) is exported as a profile and can be viewed and edited in the Toolspace Prospector
tree. For information, see Profile Properties (page 1119).
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Profile drop-down ➤ Create Profile From Corridor
Menu
2 In the drawing, click the corridor from which you want to export the points.
3 In the Export COGO Points (page 2048) dialog box, click For Entire Corridor Range to export all points
or click For User Specified Range to select a range of points.
4 Optionally, if you selected For User Specified Range, click the Select A Baseline list to select the baseline
5 If you selected For User Specified Range, enter the start and end range in the Alignment Start and
Alignment End fields, or click and click the locations in the drawing.
6 In the New Point Group Name field, enter the name for the point group that will contain all the extracted
points. For information about point groups, see Point Groups (page 553).
7 Optionally, select the points you want to export, based on their point codes, by selecting or clearing
the point code’s Select field in the Select Point Codes To Create table. For information about point
codes, see Understanding Point, Link, and Shape Codes (page 1568).
8 Click OK.
The point group is created and is displayed in the Point Groups collection in the Toolspace Prospector
tree. The points are displayed in the drawing using the default Point Group display settings. They are
labeled with their point code names.
NOTE Exported surfaces are no longer part of the corridor. They will not react to changes to the underlying
corridor object.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Surfaces drop-down ➤ Create Surface From Corridor
.
2 In the drawing, click the corridor from which you want to export the surface.
The Export Corridor Surfaces (page 2051) dialog box is displayed. View all the available corridor surfaces
for the selected corridor.
3 Clear the Select field for a surface you do not want to export.
4 Optionally, to set the style for an exported surface, click the Surface Style field. Select a new style in the
Pick Corridor Surface Style dialog box.
5 Optionally, to set the render material for an exported surface, click the Render Material field. Select a
new render material in the Select Render Material dialog box.
6 Click OK.
The surface(s) is created and available in the Surfaces collection in the Toolspace Prospector tree. The
surfaces are displayed in accordance to the surface style set in the Export Corridor Surfaces dialog box.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Surfaces drop-down ➤ Create Surface From Corridor
2 Optionally, create feature line styles (page 1505) with different colors and apply them to the feature lines
in the corridor model. For example, create a blue Edge Of Pavement style to distinguish it from a red
Shoulder style.
3 Use the Feature Lines tab (page 2037) of the Corridor Properties dialog box to assign the feature line styles
to the feature lines. This step helps distinguish the feature lines for easier selection when you are creating
the corridor boundaries. A corridor boundary specifies an area of the corridor to render using a specified
render material.
4 Use the Surfaces tab (page 2038) of the Corridor Properties dialog box to create a corridor surface. For
example, create a surface using the Links data type and the Top code. Assign a simple surface style that
does not have triangles visible, such as border and contours only.
NOTE You can more easily create the corridor boundaries if the triangles are not visible.
6 Optionally, use the Boundaries tab (page 2039) of the Corridor Properties dialog box to create corridor
boundaries that correspond to the areas on the corridor that you want to render with a specific material.
You create the boundaries by selecting corridor feature lines that form the boundaries of the area. You
should select the bottom end of one feature line followed by the top end of its pair.
For example, select the bottom outside edge of the lane followed by the top outside edge of the lane
to create a boundary that encompasses both lanes:
7 Use the AutoCAD Render command to render the corridor. For more information, see Rendering Objects
(page 1764).
■ Drive - Use this tool to simulate driving through a 3D model by following a corridor, alignment, feature
line, or 3D polyline.
■ Point to Point Line of Sight - Use this tool to perform a local sight distance check, for example, at a high
risk location in an intersection.
■ Sight Distance Along a Corridor - Use this tool to calculate sight distances along a roadway, and to ensure
that the design meets the required minimum sight distances.
■ Zone of Visual Influence - Use this tool when you need to determine if a vertical object, such as a traffic
light or a tower, can be seen from within a certain radius. You can also use this tool to determine how
far a driver can see from a stop line at an intersection.
For more information on using these tools, see Visibility Checks (page 1842) in the Utilities chapter.
Command Description
Understanding Assemblies
Assembly objects contain and manage a collection of subassemblies that are used to form the basic structure
of a 3D corridor model.
Adding one or more subassembly objects, such as travel lanes, curbs, and side slopes, to an assembly baseline
creates an assembly object. This forms the design for a corridor section. The subassemblies are provided in
a set of catalogs.
NOTE There is no limit to the number of slope segments a user may define in an AutoCAD Civil 3D assembly.
The following illustration shows a simple assembly object that represents one side (lane) of a two-lane road.
Subassembly objects named BasicLane and BasicCurbAndGutter have been added to a baseline alignment,
forming a single travel lane with a curb and gutter.
1537
Each subassembly has a defined cross-section, and some subassemblies automatically adapt to their location.
For example, the slope of a road lane changes as superelevation is applied, and a side slope automatically
creates either a cut or fill slope, depending on the relative elevation of the existing surface.
The dimensions of a subassembly, such as the width of a lane or the height of a curb are stored as properties.
You can also create custom subassemblies from AutoCAD polylines. In this case, you must also specify the
subassembly behavior within an assembly and in the process of corridor creation. You can define custom
subassemblies and their behavior using .NET scripts, then use the AutoCAD Civil 3D COM application
programming interface (API) to link these to the main application.
It is also possible to create more advanced assemblies referred to as conditional assemblies. A conditional
assembly contains one or more conditional subassemblies, which apply subsequent subassemblies when
specified conditions at a given station are met. For more information, see Creating Assemblies with
Conditional Subassemblies (page 1545).
After creating assembly objects, you can proceed with other corridor modeling tasks, such as creating corridor
objects, feature lines, and section views. For more information, see Corridors (page 1471).
Review the assemblies and corridors tutorials for step-by-step instructions on how to create a variety of
assemblies for corridor model.
■ Insertion Point. This is the initial point in the drawing that is selected to create the assembly object. It
corresponds to the centerline of the eventual corridor object. This is also known as the ground reference
point and typically follows an alignment as well as a design profile (vertical alignment).
■ Baseline. The baseline of an assembly typically displays as a visual aid (marker) representing a vertical
axis at the assembly baseline point. If you want to attach a subassembly to the baseline point, you can
do so by selecting the baseline marker. This method of attaching subassemblies to an assembly is sometimes
easier than selecting the baseline point, especially when there are already one or more subassemblies
attached at that point.
■ Baseline Point. This is a point on the assembly typically representing the start point of the first subassembly
that is attached to the assembly near the controlling alignment. By default, the baseline point coincides
with the insertion point and therefore follows the centerline alignment and profile. If you want to begin
sectional elements oriented away (horizontally and vertically) from the centerline, do so by moving this
baseline point away from the assembly insertion point.
■ Offset Line. The offset line is a typically vertical line visually representing a vertical axis at the offset
point. If you want to attach a subassembly at an offset point, you can do so by selecting the offset line
marker instead of selecting the offset point. This method of attaching subassemblies to an assembly offset
point is sometimes easier than selecting the offset point, especially when there are already one or more
subassemblies attached at that point.
■ Offset Point. This is a point on the assembly representing the ground reference point along an offset
alignment for the eventual corridor object. Subassemblies attached at this point follow an offset alignment
and its designed profile. For example, in the case of a highway with service roads on one or both sides,
the service road centerlines are represented by offset points. There is always just one baseline point on
an assembly, and there can be zero or many offset points on an assembly. Offset points can be added to
or deleted from an assembly at any time.
To complete the definition of an assembly object, you typically add multiple subassembly objects, such as
lanes, curbs, or ditches, along an alignment. Each subassembly can connect to the assembly baseline point,
any assembly offset point, or to another subassembly already associated with the assembly. A subassembly
can also be attached to these points with a relative offset and/or elevation from the point.
A subassembly definition references point, link, and shape codes. Points are the vertices of the subassembly,
and they can be attachment points for adjacent assemblies. Links are the line segments or curves between
the points. Shapes are two-dimensional polygons that represent the cross-sectional shape of the subassembly.
The following figure shows a coding diagram for a Basic Curb and Gutter subassembly:
Assembly Settings
Use assembly settings to control the behavior of assembly-related commands.
Work with assembly settings the same way you work with other object settings in AutoCAD Civil 3D, using
the Toolspace Settings tree. You can control assembly-related settings at both the object collection (feature)
level and at the command level. For information about how the levels of settings work together, see Specifying
Drawing Settings (page 79).
Right-click the Settings tree Assemblies collection to establish defaults for all assembly-specific settings and
to override the drawing ambient settings for all assembly-related commands. Use the Commands collection
in the Settings tree Assembly collection to override assembly-specific settings or drawing ambient settings
for a specific command.
NOTE Overrides to the drawing ambient settings at the Assemblies collection level and the Assembly Commands
collection level affect only the specified level. The drawing level settings are not affected. For more information,
see Understanding Settings (page 77).
Assembly Properties
Specify administrative, and codes structural information using assembly properties.
Assembly properties specify all the information associated with an assembly, including its style, subassemblies,
and link, point, and shape codes.
Display the properties of an assembly:
For more information, see Assembly Properties Dialog Box (page 1995) and The Toolspace Item View (page
99).
Expand the Assembly collection to display and edit the styles and command settings available for assemblies.
Creating Assemblies
You can create an assembly from the ribbon, from a tool palette, from a catalog, or from an assembly drawing.
You can create a basic assembly, without an offset, or you can create an assembly with an offset. When you
create an assembly without an offset, the subassemblies included in the assembly are controlled by a single
baseline. When you add an offset to an assembly, the subassemblies included in the assembly are controlled
by the baseline and by the offset alignment.
It is also possible to specify different subassemblies to apply depending on the conditions that exist at a
given corridor station. This type of assembly is referred to as a conditional assembly. For more information,
see Creating Assemblies with Conditional Subassemblies (page 1545).
Creating an Assembly
Use the Create Assembly command to define the baseline of an assembly, and start adding subassemblies
to the assembly.
Define the assembly basepoint (1), then add subassemblies (2,3,4) to the baseline to build the assembly (5).
Copy To Assembly lets you copy subassemblies from one assembly to another, or to another location
(marker point) on the same assembly.
Move To Assembly lets you move subassemblies from one assembly to another, or to another location
(marker point) on the same assembly.
Mirror Subassemblies is available on subassemblies that have a Side parameter. You can use it to quickly
copy subassemblies from one side of an assembly to the other.
While creating an assembly, you can first add the right-side (right lane) subassemblies, then use Mirror
Subassemblies to copy the right-side subassemblies to the left-side (left lane) of the assembly. Subassembly
parameter values are automatically set to appropriate values.
Alternately, you can enter CopySubassemblyTo, MoveSubassemblyTo, or MirrorSubassembly on the Command
line, to invoke the commands.
NOTE Corridor target settings (page 1481) of a copied, moved or mirrored subassembly are not preserved. You will
have to set any targets (page 1482) of the subassembly.
To create an assembly
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Assembly drop-down ➤ Create Assembly .
2 In the Create Assembly dialog box (page 2000), in the Name field, enter a name for the assembly.
NOTE To name the assembly, select its default name and enter a new name, or you can use the Name
Template. For more information, see Name Template Dialog Box (page 2022).
4 For Assembly Style and Code Set Style, either accept the default style, select another style, or create a
new style. For more information, see Assembly Styles and Display (page 1550) and Using Code Set Styles
(page 1577).
5 Click to select a layer. For more information about layers, see Object Layer Dialog Box (page 2221).
NOTE If you do not select a layer, the assembly is placed on the default layer.
6 Click OK.
7 To insert the assembly into the drawing, click a baseline location in the drawing.
The assembly name is displayed under the Assemblies collection in the Prospector tree. A vertical line
with a circular marker in the middle is inserted into the drawing. This is the assembly baseline location
point, where you will attach one or more subassemblies.
8 Select a subassembly from a tool palette in the Tooltip Palette vista (page 1544), or from a tool catalog
through the Content Browser.
NOTE Not all subassemblies in AutoCAD Civil 3D are located on a tool palette by default. All subassemblies
are stored in the Content Browser, and you can add subassemblies (page 122)that you use frequently to a
tool palette for easy access.
■ Select a subassembly that is already attached to an assembly and click Copy To Assembly,
Move To Assembly, or Mirror Subassemblies on the Modify Subassembly panel of the Subassembly
tab. You can also select multiple subassemblies using these features.
When you add a set of subassemblies sequentially to a baseline (for example, lane, curb, sideslope, then
ditch), they are all added to the same subassembly group. The next time you select the assembly baseline,
a new group is created and subsequent subassemblies added belong to the new subassembly group.
For information about editing and managing assemblies, see Managing and Editing Assemblies (page 1548).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Assembly drop-down ➤ Add Assembly Offset .
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Assembly drop-down ➤ Add Assembly Offset
Command Line
AddAssemblyOffset
3 On the tool palette, click the assembly, and then click a location in the drawing. Press Enter to end the
command. You can also use drag and drop.
The assembly object is added to the drawing. The assembly name is displayed under the Assemblies
collection in the Prospector tree.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 Create an assembly containing at least one subassembly. For instructions on how to do this, refer to
Creating an Assembly (page 1541).
2 In the tool palette, click the desired conditional subassembly. For example, you may want to select the
ConditionalCutOrFill subassembly, which may be located on the Conditional tool palette.
3 In the Properties palette, set the subassembly’s Side, Layout Width, Layout Grade, Type, and
Minimum\Maximum Distance parameters to indicate the conditions under which they should be
applied. For example, the table below shows how to set these parameters for the ConditionalCutOrFill
subassembly in a fill situation. You may want to specify these settings differently, depending on the
type of condition you want to configure.
Parameter Value Description
NOTE For the ConditionalCutOrFill subassembly, the Layout Width and Layout Grade parameters only affect
the appearance of the subassembly in layout view. These parameters enable you to position the conditional
subassembly and the subassemblies that are attached to it, but do not affect the corridor model.
4 If desired, you can add more conditional subassemblies to the same side of the assembly.
6 When you are finished adding subassemblies to the assembly, press Esc to exit subassembly placement
mode.
The next step is to assign descriptive names to each of the subassemblies in the conditional assembly.
Assigning meaningful names to the subassemblies makes it easier to identify them when you are assigning
targets, and helps you to identify subassemblies in the Subassemblies collection in Prospector.
7 For instructions on how to add meaning names to conditional subassemblies in an assembly, see
Assigning Meaningful Names to Conditional Subassemblies (page 1547).
After assigning meaningful names to the conditional subassemblies, the final step is to set the corridor
targets. For more information, see Setting Targets (page 1481).
1 In the drawing, right-click the conditional assembly and select Assembly Properties.
3 In the Item list, select the conditional subassembly that is located on the left side of the assembly. Click
it again to highlight the text. Change the name so that it indicates the type of condition it is set to
detect. In the following example, the name of the first conditional subassembly has been changed to
COND Fill 0-5 for TR-L. In this example, COND indicates that this is a conditional subassembly. Fill
indicates the type of condition that activates it. 0-5 indicates the minimum and maximum distance
value of the fill condition it is looking for. In this example, TR-L is a reference to the name of the parent
assembly this particular subassembly is associated with (in this case, “Through Road” or “TR” and “Left
side” or “L”.)
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Object Shortcut Menu
Planning an Assembly
Before creating an assembly, identify the different types of subassemblies you need, make sure they are
available, and decide how you want them to display.
The easiest way to access subassemblies is through a tool palette. Drag a subassembly (2) from a palette to
add it to an assembly (1). You can add more subassemblies to the expanded assembly (3).
You can also add assemblies to a tool palette you create. For more information, see Understanding
Subassemblies (page 1555).
You can design styles that control the appearance of the assembly components, such as the insertion point
and baseline point, in the drawing. For more information, see Assembly Styles and Display (page 1550).
Use code set styles (page 1577) to control the appearance of subassembly components, such as points, links,
and shapes. These components will display within your assembly object.
To copy an assembly
1 In the drawing area, right-click the assembly baseline and click Basic Modify Tools ➤ Copy.
At the command line, you are prompted to specify a base point for the assembly.
3 To edit the name of the assembly, right-click the assembly in the Prospector tree and click Properties.
The Assembly Properties dialog box is displayed with the Information tab (page 1995) active. The Name
field contains the name of the copied assembly, which is, by default “ <assembly name> (1).”
5 To edit the description of the assembly, enter a new description in the Description field.
6 Click Apply to accept the changes, or click OK to accept the changes and close the Assembly Properties
dialog box.
Quick Reference
Object Shortcut Menu
Deleting an Assembly
Deleting an assembly erases it, and associated subassemblies, from the drawing and removes them from the
Assemblies and Subassemblies collections in the Prospector tree.
You can delete a subassembly within an assembly, and it deletes the subassembly but not the assembly.
■ In the drawing area, right-click the assembly baseline, or select the entire assembly object, and click Basic
Modify Tools ➤ Erase.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In the drawing area, right-click the assembly baseline and click Add Offset.
Quick Reference
Object Shortcut Menu
1 In the drawing area, select the assembly baseline from which you want to remove the offset.
If there are multiple offsets associated with the assembly, you are prompted to select an offset. If there is
only one offset associated with the assembly, it is removed.
Quick Reference
Object Shortcut Menu
On the Settings tab in Right-click a style in the Assembly Styles folder and
Toolspace then click Edit.
NOTE When you click New on the shortcut menu of a collection folder, the new style you create is based on
installation defaults, not on the existing styles in the collection. To create a new style from an existing style,
right-click the style, click copy, and then save the style with a new name.
Use the various tabs in the Assembly Style dialog box to set the following style information:
■ Marker. Specifies the display of marker symbols (such as for the baseline point) within an assembly.
■ Display. Lists the assembly components and display options as well as the choice of 2D or 3D visibility.
You can display components in a 2D plan view or a 3D view using other tools, such as Orbit or Vpoint.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Assembly Styles collection and right-click an existing
style.
3 In the Assembly Style dialog box, click the Information (page 1997) tab and enter a new name and
description for the assembly style.
4 To specify the display of marker symbols (such as for the baseline, baseline point, and insertion point),
click the Marker (page 1997) tab and specify the marker properties for the assembly.
5 To define the display properties for the assembly style, click the Display (page 1998) tab and specify the
display properties for the assembly.
6 To view a summary of information about the style, click the Summary (page 1999) tab.
7 Click Apply.
Previewing an Assembly
You can preview an assembly in the Prospector Item List View.
To preview an assembly
1 Ensure that the Item Preview button on the Prospector tab is selected. For more information, see
Graphical View (page 100).
2 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click the Assemblies collection and click Show Preview.
NOTE A check mark is displayed next to the Show Preview menu item when the preview is enabled.
3 In the Prospector tree, click the assembly that you want to preview.
The assembly is displayed in the Prospector item view.
NOTE The preview of the assembly uses the same display styles as the assembly in the drawing area.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Sharing Assemblies
You can access and share assemblies using tool palettes, catalogs, or assembly drawings.
For example, you can create an assembly in your drawing, and then drag and drop it to a tool palette. Once
it is in a tool palette, you can copy an assembly from a tool palette into a catalog. You can create a tool
palette or a catalog that contains multiple assemblies, and then share that tool palette or catalog with others.
You can also save an assembly to a drawing file (.dwg), and then drag and drop that drawing file into your
current drawing.
The following list summarizes ways you can share assemblies:
NOTE You cannot copy an assembly directly from a drawing into a catalog. You must first copy the assembly to
a tool palette. From a tool palette, you can copy an assembly to a catalog.
4 Select the desired assembly, and click and hold down the mouse button to drag it onto the tool palette.
NOTE To select an assembly, make sure that you click only on the assembly baseline (vertical line). Do not
click on any grips on the assembly baseline.
3 In the tool palette, click the desired assembly, and then click a location in the drawing area.
1 To display catalogs:
TIP When working with both the AutoCAD Civil 3D workspace and the Content Browser, you may find it
useful to have the Content Browser window displayed at all times. To do this, right-click in the Content
Browser title bar and select Always On Top.
3 Open the tool palette that contains the desired assembly or assemblies.
4 In the tool palette, click on the desired assembly or assemblies, and hold down the mouse button to
drag and drop them into the desired catalog.
1 To display catalogs in the Content Browser: Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ .
TIP When working with both the AutoCAD Civil 3D workspace and the Content Browser, you may find it
useful to have the Content Browser window displayed at all times. To do this, right-click in the Content
Browser title bar and select Always On Top.
3 Once you have located the desired assembly, click on the i-drop icon that is located on the assembly
1 To display catalogs in the Content Browser: Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ .
TIP When working with both the AutoCAD Civil 3D workspace and the Content Browser, you may find it
useful to have the Content Browser window displayed at all times. To do this, right-click in the Content
Browser title bar and select Always On Top.
3 Once you have located the desired assembly, click on the i-drop icon that is located on the assembly
1 Using Windows Explorer, navigate to the folder containing the assembly drawing file.
2 Right-click on the assembly drawing file and drag and drop it into the AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing area.
The assembly contained in the assembly drawing file is copied into the currently open AutoCAD Civil 3D
drawing.
The assembly is inserted as a block. Explode it to create the assembly object. When the assembly object is
created, it appears in the Assemblies node in Prospector.
Understanding Subassemblies
Subassemblies are the basic building blocks of a corridor design.
A subassembly is an AutoCAD drawing object (AECCSubassembly) that defines the geometry of a component
used in a corridor section. Through the tool palette and tool catalogs, AutoCAD Civil 3D provides
preconfigured subassemblies for components such as travel lanes, curbs, side slopes and ditches. These
subassemblies are defined by a set of points, links, and optionally closed areas referred to as shapes.
The subassemblies provided with AutoCAD Civil 3D have built-in intelligent behavior. They can automatically
adapt to conditions such as superelevation and cut or fill requirements. For example, a side slope subassembly
has variable slopes that change automatically depending on the depth of cut along the corridor. In fill
conditions exceeding a given depth, the shoulder automatically widens to include a guardrail or barrier.
After you determine the kinds of subassemblies to use, make sure they are available through an AutoCAD
Civil 3D tool palette or tool catalogs available through the Content Browser. For more information, see the
Content Browser Help.
In addition to ready-to-use subassemblies, AutoCAD Civil 3D also lets you create your own custom subassembly
objects from polylines, or design more sophisticated ones using a .NET language. (See AutoCAD Civil 3D
Developer’s Guide.)
Conditional Subassemblies
You can use a special type of subassembly called a conditional subassembly that automatically inserts other
specified subassemblies when certain conditions are met.
For example, a conditional corridor assembly could contain two ConditionalCutOrFill subassemblies. The
first ConditionalCutOrFill subassembly can be configured to apply a ditch subassembly when a cut condition
exists. The second ConditionalCutOrFill subassembly can be configured to apply a guardrail, shoulder, and
daylight to surface when a fill condition exists. Using conditional subassemblies enables you to reduce the
number of corridor regions and assemblies that you have to maintain.
An assembly that contains one or more conditional subassemblies can be referred to as a conditional assembly.
For more information, see Creating Assemblies with Conditional Subassemblies (page 1545), or the tutorial
exercise Creating an Assembly with Conditions.
Subassembly Styles
Use code set styles to control the appearance of subassemblies.
The subassembly object itself does not have its own style. However, since you will typically be working with
sets of subassemblies, you can assign styles to subassembly components (point, links, and shapes) through
code set styles. For more information, see Using Codes and Code Set Styles (page 1567).
Subassembly Settings
Use subassembly settings to control the behavior of subassembly-related commands.
Work with subassembly settings the same way you work with other object settings in AutoCAD Civil 3D,
using the Toolspace Settings tree. You can control subassembly-related settings at both the object collection
(feature) level and at the command level. For information about how the levels of settings work together,
see Specifying Drawing Settings (page 79).
Right-click the Settings tree Subassembly collection to establish defaults for all subassembly-specific settings
and to override the drawing ambient settings for all subassembly-related commands. Use the Commands
collection in the Settings tree Subassembly collection to override subassembly-specific settings or drawing
ambient settings for a specific command.
NOTE Overrides to the drawing ambient settings at the Subassembly collection level and the Subassembly
Commands collection level affect only the specified level. The drawing level settings are not affected. For more
information, see Understanding Settings (page 77).
Subassembly Properties
Specify administrative, parameter and codes information using subassembly properties.
Subassembly properties specify all the information associated with a subassembly, including its code set
style, input and output parameters, the name of the macro file it is derived from, and a list of the link, point,
and shape codes associated with it.
Display the properties of a subassembly:
For more information, see Subassembly Properties Dialog Box (page 2006) and The Toolspace Item View (page
99).
If a subassembly has been added to the current drawing, you can expand the Subassemblies collection to
view the names of the subassemblies in the Prospector list view. For more information, see The Toolspace
Item View (page 99).
Each subassembly in a site is displayed as a named object under the Subassemblies node of the site. Right-click
a subassembly name to do the following:
Expand the Subassembly collection to display and edit the subassembly commands.
Creating Subassemblies
Add subassemblies to a drawing using the subassemblies provided through the AutoCAD Civil 3D tool palette
or tool catalog, or create your own custom subassemblies.
When using the preconfigured AutoCAD Civil 3D subassemblies, adding the subassembly to the drawing
creates the subassembly object.
If you want to create a custom shape and use it as a subassembly, use the Create Subassembly from Polyline
feature. For more information, see Creating Subassemblies From Polylines (page 1558).
Another approach to creating customized subassemblies is using scripts in a .NET language. This method
provides you with the ability to create custom subassemblies with simple or complex conditional behavior
built in. For more information, see Creating Custom Subassemblies Using .NET in the AutoCAD Civil 3D
Developer’s Guide.
■ To add the subassembly to the drawing, and not associate it with an assembly, press Enter then click
a location in the drawing.
The subassembly name is displayed under the Subassemblies collection in the Prospector tree.
If you subsequently move the subassembly from its original insertion point in an assembly, you can return
it to that point by clicking Clear Offset in Assembly on the Modify Subassembly panel, or by entering
SubassemblyClearOffset at the command line.
The Clear Offset in Assembly button is only enabled if a selected subassembly is part of an assembly, and
was moved away from its original insertion point.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
2 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel Create Subassembly From Polyline .
4 In the Create Assembly (page 2000) dialog box, for Name, enter a name for the subassembly.
NOTE To name the subassembly, you can select its default name and enter a new name, or you can use the
Name Template. For more information, see Name Template Dialog Box (page 2022).
6 In the Code Set Style list, select a Code Set Style or accept the default. For more information, see Using
Codes and Code Set Styles (page 1567).
7 Click to select a layer. For more information about layers, see Object Layer Dialog Box (page 2221).
NOTE If you do not select a layer, the subassembly is placed on the default layer.
9 In the Link Creation list, choose the behavior for link creation by selecting Multiple, Single, or None.
Multiple is the default.
Multiple: Creates a new link for each segment created from the object selected. This is useful for
assigning link codes to different components of the subassembly for creating surfaces, or other
display features.
Single: Creates one link from all segments created from the selected object. This is provided to make
creating shapes simpler. Using the Add Shape right-click command, you only need to perform one
action.
10 Optionally, you may clear Erase Existing Entities if you want to save the original polyline object selected
to create the subassembly. By default, this option is checked and the polyline selected is automatically
deleted.
11 Click OK. The new subassembly is created and is displayed in the Subassemblies collection in the
Prospector tree.
To add codes to the subassembly, see Adding Codes to a Subassembly (page 1576).
To add the subassembly to an assembly, see Creating Assemblies (page 1541).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ DaylightToOffset
■ DaylightToRow
■ LinkOffsetAndElevation
■ LinkOffsetAndSlope
■ LinkOffsetOnSurface
■ OverlayMillAndLevel1
■ OverlayWidenMatchSlope1
■ OverlayWidenWithSuper
You can also use the Mirror option to automatically copy a subassembly, or multiple subassemblies, from
one side of an assembly to the other. For more information, see Creating an Assembly (page 1541)
To insert a subassembly on the left side of a corridor using the Side parameter
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Assembly drop-down ➤ Create Assembly .
2 In the Create Assembly (page 2000) dialog box, accept the default settings. Click OK.
3 When you are prompted to specify the assembly baseline location, click a point in the drawing to insert
the assembly.
4 In the Tool Palettes window, open the Imperial - Basic tool palette by clicking the Imperial - Basic tab.
(To display the Tool Palettes window, click Home tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ .)
6 Click on the assembly. The BasicLane subassembly is inserted onto the right side of the assembly.
7 On the tool palette, click the BasicLane subassembly again. Again the Properties dialog box is displayed.
8 In the Properties dialog box, in the Advanced section, click the value for the Side parameter and change
it from Right to Left.
9 Click on the assembly. The BasicLane subassembly is inserted on the left side of the assembly.
To insert a subassembly on the left side of a corridor using (negative) insertion point values
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Assembly drop-down ➤ Create Assembly .
2 In the Create Assembly dialog box, accept the default settings. Click OK.
3 When you are prompted to specify the assembly baseline location, click a point in the drawing to insert
the assembly.
4 In the Tool Palettes window, open the Imperial - Daylight tool palette by clicking the Imperial - Daylight
tab. (To display the Tool Palette window, click Home tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ .)
5 Click the DaylightToOffset subassembly. The Properties dialog box is displayed for the DaylightToOffset
subassembly. Note that the Daylight Offset from Baseline parameter is set to 10 by default.
6 Click on the assembly. The DaylightToOffset subassembly is inserted onto the right side of the assembly.
7 On the tool palette, click the DaylightToOffset subassembly again. Again the Properties dialog box is
displayed.
8 In the Properties dialog box, in the Advanced section, click the value for the Daylight Offset from
Baseline parameter and change it from positive 10 to negative 10.
9 Click on the assembly. The DaylightToOffset subassembly is inserted on the left side of the assembly.
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Assembly drop-down ➤ Create Assembly .
2 In the Create Assembly (page 2000) dialog box, accept the default settings. Click OK.
3 When you are prompted to specify the assembly baseline location, click a point in the drawing to insert
the assembly.
4 In the Tool Palettes window, open the Imperial - Basic tool palette by clicking the Imperial - Basic tab.
(To display the Tool Palette window, click Home tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ .)
5 Click the BasicLane subassembly. The Properties dialog box is displayed for the BasicLane subassembly.
Note that the Side parameter is set to Right by default.
6 Click on the assembly. The BasicLane subassembly is inserted onto the right side of the assembly.
7 On the assembly, right-click on the BasicLane subassembly and click Mirror. The BasicLane subassembly
is inserted on the left side of the assembly. Note that the Mirror option is only available for subassemblies
that contain a Side parameter.
Deleting a Subassembly
Deleting a subassembly erases it from the drawing and removes it from the Subassemblies collection in the
Prospector tree.
When you delete an assembly, and subassemblies associated with that assembly are also deleted.
■ In the drawing area, right-click the subassembly and click Basic Modify Tools ➤ Erase.
The subassembly is erased from the drawing and removed from the Subassemblies collection in the Prospector
tree. If the subassembly was attached to an assembly, it is removed from the assembly too.
Quick Reference
Object Shortcut Menu
NOTE Subassembly groups are not processed according to the numeric order associated with their subassembly
group name. For example, a subassembly group named Group (1) located at the bottom of the Item list is processed
last, even though the group is named Group (1).
You can change the order of subassembly groups by moving them up or down. However, you cannot reorder
subassemblies within a group. If you delete subassemblies or subassembly groups using this tab, the
subassemblies are deleted from the drawing.
Subassemblies that are not associated with assemblies (detached subassemblies and subassemblies created
from polylines) are not associated with groups.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Assemblies collection and right-click an existing
assembly.
2 Click Properties.
4 In the Item list, right-click the name of a subassembly group and select Move up or Move down.
The group of subassemblies is moved up or down in the list.
Previewing a Subassembly
You can preview a subassembly in the Prospector Item List View.
To preview a subassembly
1 Ensure that the Item Preview button on the Prospector tab is selected. For more information, see
Graphical View (page 100).
2 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click the Subassemblies collection and click Show Preview.
NOTE A check mark is displayed next to the Show Preview menu item when the preview is enabled.
NOTE The preview of the subassembly uses the same display styles as the subassembly in the drawing area.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
3 In the drawing, click a location on the subassembly where you want to specify the new origin (attachment
point).
For more information, see Creating Subassemblies From Polylines (page 1558).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE This command only converts the VBA-based AutoCAD Civil 3D stock subassemblies that were included
with the product. It does not convert any VBA-based subassemblies that were created from user-defined (custom)
VBA code.
To determine if a subassembly is VBA-based, .NET-based, or created from a polyline, use the Subassembly
Properties dialog box or the Properties palette to display the subassembly definition.
For information on creating custom subassemblies, see the AutoCAD Civil 3D Developer’s Guide.
■ To convert all subassemblies in a selected assembly, select an assembly, and then press Enter. All
VBA subassemblies in the selected assembly are converted to VB.NET.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Sharing Subassemblies
You can access and share subassemblies using tool palettes, the AutoCAD Civil 3D Corridor Modeling catalogs,
or package files.
For example, you can create custom subassemblies in your drawing, and then drag and drop them onto a
tool palette or catalog. You can create a tool palette or catalog that contains multiple custom subassemblies
and then share that tool palette or catalog with others.
Custom subassemblies that have been created using .NET or VBA can be exported and imported using a
package file. Subassemblies created from polylines cannot be included in a package file.
A package file contains all the files necessary for the custom subassemblies to work. Once the package file
is created, users can import the package file contents into AutoCAD Civil 3D using the ImportSubassemblies
2 Open the tool palette that you want to copy the subassemblies into. You may open an existing tool
palette or create a new one.
4 On the Import Subassemblies (page 2003) dialog box, click the folder icon to navigate to and select the
package file.
5 In the Import To section, click Tool Palette, and then select the desired tool palette in the drop-down
list.
NOTE You can import the subassemblies to a tool palette and to a catalog at the same time. When you
import subassemblies to a catalog, they automatically get imported to the My Imported Tools catalog. If the
My Imported Tools catalog does not exist, it is automatically created.
6 Click OK.
The subassemblies contained in the package file are copied to the tool palette. If you chose to copy the
subassemblies to a catalog at the same time, the subassemblies are also copied to the My Imported Tools
catalog.
NOTE Subassemblies created from polylines cannot be included in a package file. Package files are intended for
sharing custom subassemblies that have been created using .NET or VBA.
TIP When working with both the AutoCAD Civil 3D workspace and the Content Browser, you may find it
useful to have the Content Browser window displayed at all times. To do this, right-click in the Content
Browser title bar and select Always On Top.
3 On the Import Subassemblies (page 2003) dialog box, click the folder icon to navigate to and select the
package file.
5 Click OK.
The subassemblies contained in the package file are copied to the My Imported Tools catalog.
NOTE When you import subassemblies to a catalog using this method (package files), you can only copy the
subassemblies to the My Imported Tools catalog. If the My Imported Tools catalog does not exist, one is
automatically created. Once the subassemblies are in the My Imported Tools catalog, you can then copy them to
other catalogs.
If you chose to copy the subassemblies to a tool palette at the same time, the subassemblies are also copied
to the selected tool palette.
NOTE Subassemblies created from polylines cannot be included in a package file. Package files are intended for
sharing custom subassemblies that have been created using .NET or VBA.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Shape. Defined from links and define a closed region that represents materials used in a corridor model.
The standard link codes from top to bottom are Pave, Pave1, Pave2, Base, and Subbase. The code Top is also
assigned to all finish grade links, thus coinciding with the Pave links on paved sections. The code Datum is
also assigned to the bottom of subbase. The shape codes for the material areas from top to bottom are Pave1,
Pave2, Base, and Subbase.
The subassemblies that create paved sections have the depth or thickness of each layer as user-definable
input parameters. Each subassembly that creates paved sections closes the layer areas to form a closed shape,
even if those layers actually continue into the adjacent component. Layers can be omitted by setting the
corresponding depth to zero. This collapses that layer so that the shape also has a zero area.
■ Right-of-way acquisition
■ Slopestake reporting
Nearly all of these operations depend on the codes assigned to points, links, and shapes in the corridor
model. To create models that integrate into all of the operations listed above, the coding scheme must be
carefully designed before creating the first subassembly. The best practice is to diagram all of the different
roadway types and situations that can be anticipated for the users you are supporting. Next, devise and
annotate codes for all critical points, links, and shapes. Use this diagram when documenting the codes for
each subassembly. Note that it is difficult to design a single set of codes that meet needs of every operation.
For this reason, AutoCAD Civil 3D lets you assign any number of codes to each point, link, and shape. How
these codes are utilized is described in the following sections.
Point Codes
Point codes are the feature codes assigned to the endpoints of the links that make up the subassembly
component
Operation Description
Design Surface Modeling Point codes make it possible to extract finish grade profiles
and Staged Design at critical points on the corridor model surfaces. For ex-
ample, a profile connecting the left edge-of-pavement
points of a roadway can be used in drainage analysis and
design, tying links from an adjacent road’s model, and to
combine corridor models with grading models.
Slopestake reporting and Identifying critical points on the different layers of the
construction stakeout corridor model is essential to creating construction staking
reports, or when exporting data to survey data recorders
for construction stakeout. Since grading is nearly always
done to the subbase line, not to the finish grade, it may
be necessary to define distinct codes on both the finish
grade and subbase surface links. For example, the edge-
of-traveled-way may use code ETW on finish grade, and
ETW_Sub on the subbase layer.
The cut/fill daylight points are a good example of where two codes may be needed for the same point. If
the daylight points for both cut and fill links have the code “Daylight”, then it is easy to depict and extract
a single figure defining the limit of construction on each side. If the same points have the code “Daylight_Cut”
or “Daylight_Fill,” depending on circumstances, it is also easy to annotate cut and fill daylight lines differently.
Link Codes
Link codes are the feature codes assigned to each of the links that make up the roadway component. A link
is defined as a single straight-line segment between endpoints.
Operation Description
Design surface modeling Design surfaces can be built by extracting all links with a
particular code. Link codes should be designed so that it
is easy to extract the types of surfaces needed for surface
modeling. Typically these are used for earthwork calcula-
tions, additional grading, visualization, and drainage ana-
lysis. Depending on the application, you may need to ex-
tract paved surfaces, all finish grade surfaces, or subbase
surfaces.
Earthwork and material Different layers of the corridor model can be separated
volume analysis and used for volume calculations using tables that define
materials in terms of which link codes are above, below,
left, and right of the material layers. Simple cut and fill
quantities are usually determined by comparing the existing
ground to a combination of unpaved finish grade links and
subbase links. Pavement layers, such as wearing course,
asphalt base, and granular subbase, are determined based
on the surface links defining those as closed areas.
To meet the requirements of these operations, it is usually necessary to assign multiple codes to links on
certain portions of the roadway. A typical scheme:
Top Assigned to all links on the finished grade, whether paved or unpaved
Pave A second code assigned to all paved links on the finished grade
Datum Assigned to all unpaved finished grade links, and all links on the bot-
toms and sides of the subbase layers
Subbase Assigned to all links on the bottoms and sides of the subbase layers
Thus, the Top links can be used to build a surface model of the entire finished grade surface, which is used
for visualization and drainage analysis. The Pave links can be used to render the paved portions of the
finished grade surface with a particular color or texture. The Datum links can be used to model the surface
that is graded with earth moving equipment, and is also used for simple cut and fill volume analysis. The
Subbase links are used to define the bottom of the granular base material areas for material volume analysis.
Shape Codes
Shapes are closed cross-sectional areas created by a single subassembly. The primary use for shape codes;
defining hatch patterns for different materials, and to extract areas for material volume tabulation. The
codes should reflect how you want the materials identified in the earthwork reports.
C/L 21,23
6 7 8 9 9 8 7 6
19 12
13 12 19
14 17 13
15 17 14
16 18 15
29 30 10 18 16
10 24 25,38,39
19
27,38,40
26
21,22
The table following the illustrations provides descriptions of the point codes used in the illustrated assemblies.
The following illustration shows the location of the standard point codes on subassemblies defining a divided
road with a depressed median and extended shoulders:
20
10
10
20
The following illustration shows the location of the standard point codes on subassemblies defining an
undivided road with a curb-and-gutter. Not all layers are shown.
35
33
32
37 36 1
6,31
4
9
5
10
The table below names and describes the standard point codes used in the example assembly illustrations.
Point Codes
No. Code Description
6 ETW Edge of traveled way; inside or outside edges of travel lanes on finish grade.
16 EPS Edge of paved shoulder; outer edge of paved portions of shoulder on finish
grade.
20 EPS_Sub Edge of paved shoulder; outer edge of paved portions of shoulder on the
Subbase layer.
24 Daylight_Sub Subgrade intercept point; point where the subbase surface extends and
intersects the finish grade.
To view all actual code numbers, the code names and brief code descriptions: In Notepad, open ..\Documents
and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\C3D2010\enu\C3DStockSubassemblyScripts.codes.
1,7 1,7
5
6,7
The table following the illustrations provides descriptions of the link codes used in the illustrated assemblies.
The following illustration shows the location of the standard link codes on subassemblies defining a divided
road with a depressed median and extended shoulders.
1,2 1,2
1,8 1,6
1,8 1,8
1,7
4,7
1,7 5 1,7
The following illustration shows the location of the standard link codes on subassemblies defining an
undivided road with a curb-and-gutter. Not all layers are shown.
1,7
1,2 1,13
1,12
5
6,7
The table below names and describes the standard link codes used in the example assembly illustrations.
Link Codes
No. Code Description
7 Datum All finish grade links on unpaved sections, and all subbase links on paved sections.
For most roadways, the Datum links trace the unpaved finished grade and sub-
base from the left catch point to the right catch point. These links would build
the surface used to calculate cut and fill volumes.
To view all actual code numbers, the code names and brief code descriptions: In Notepad, open ..\Documents
and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\C3D2010\enu\C3DStockSubassemblyScripts.codes.
1
1
2
2 1
3 2
3
3
4
4
4
6 6
5 5
The table below names and describes the standard shape codes used in the example assembly illustration.
Shape Codes
No. Code Description
1 Pave1 Closed shape between the finish grade and first pavement surface on paved sections.
2 Pave2 Closed shape between the first and second pavement surface on paved sections.
3 Base Closed shape between the second pavement surface and the base surface on paved
sections.
4 SubBase Closed shape between the base and subbase surfaces on paved sections.
To view all actual code numbers, the code names and brief code descriptions: In Notepad, open ..\Documents
and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\C3D2010\enu\C3DStockSubassemblyScripts.codes.
1 In the drawing, select the subassembly, then right-click it and click Add Code.
NOTE The code you enter must be an existing code, or, if it is a new code, you must make sure that it gets
added to the codes file (C3DStockSubassemblyScripts.codes). For more information, see Adding a New Code
to the AutoCAD Civil 3D Stock Subassemblies (page 1581).
4 To see the code, in Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click the subassembly and select Properties.
Click the Codes tab. The code added is displayed in the Name column under the point, link, or shape
collections.
1 In the drawing, select the subassembly from which you want to remove the code.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Subassemblies
■ Assemblies
■ Corridors
■ Section views
An individual subassembly typically contains just a few points, links and shapes. Therefore, most subassemblies
typically contain a relatively simple code list. Since an assembly manages a group of subassemblies, the code
list for an assembly is comparatively larger. Furthermore, since a corridor can have multiple assemblies
applied within it, the code list becomes larger and complex. The same holds true for the section views.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the General collection, the Multipurpose Styles collection,
then the Code Set Styles collection, and right-click an existing style.
3 In the Code Set Style dialog box, click the Codes (page 1999) tab.
4 Right-click a code collection (one of Link, Point, or Shape) in the Name column. Click Add.
5 In the Pick Style dialog box, select a style for the code.
6 In the Name column, click NEW CODE, enter the name of the code you want to add, and press Enter.
7 Click Apply.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the General collection, the Multipurpose Styles collection,
then the Code Set Styles collection, and right-click an existing style.
3 In the Code Set Style dialog box, click the Codes (page 1999) tab.
5 In the drawing, click on a subassembly, assembly, or corridor object, and press Enter. The codes are
automatically displayed in the Codes tab list.
6 Click Apply.
Settings tab: General collection ➤ Multipurpose Styles collection ➤ Code Set Styles collection ➤
Right-click <style name>
Dialog Box
Codes tab (Code Set Style) (page 1999)
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the General collection, the Multipurpose Styles collection,
then the Code Set Styles collection, and right-click an existing style.
3 In the Code Set Style dialog box, click the Information (page 1999) tab and enter a new name and
description for the code set style.
4 Click the Codes (page 1999) tab to define styles for each link, point (marker), or shape code associated
with this code set.
5 Click Apply.
■ In the ribbon, click Modify ➤ Corridor. In the Modify Corridor panel, click the down arrow, select
Edit Code Set Styles, then select a corridor.
■ In the drawing, right-click a corridor, and select Properties. On the Corridor Properties dialog box,
click the Codes tab.
2 Click the drop-down arrow next to the Code Set Style, and select a new code set style.
3 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: Right-click <code set style item>
Dialog Box
Code Set Style (page 1999)
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the General collection, the Multipurpose Styles collection,
then the Link Styles collection, and right-click an existing style.
3 In the Link Style dialog box, click the Information (page 2004) tab and enter a new name and description
for the link style.
4 To define the display properties for the link style, click the Display (page 2004) tab and specify the display
properties for the link.
5 To view a summary of information about the style, click the Summary (page 2004) tab.
6 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: Right-click <link style item>.
Dialog Box
Link Style (page 2004)
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the General collection, the Multipurpose Styles collection,
then the Marker Styles collection, and right-click an existing style.
3 In the Marker Style dialog box, click the Information Tab (Marker Style Dialog Box) (page 2004)tab and
enter a new name and description for the marker style.
4 To define the symbol used to display markers, click the Marker (page 2004) tab and specify the type of
symbol, as well as the size, scaling and rotation, for the marker symbol.
5 To define the display properties for the marker style, click the Display (page 2005) tab and specify the
display properties for the marker.
6 To view a summary of information about the style, click the Summary (page 2005) tab.
7 Click Apply.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the General collection, the Multipurpose Styles collection,
then the Shape Styles collection, and right-click an existing style.
3 In the Shape Style dialog box, click the Information (page 2006) tab and enter a new name and description
for the shape style.
4 To define the display properties for the shape style, click the Display (page 2006) tab and specify the
display properties for the shape.
5 To view a summary of information about the style, click the Summary (page 2006) tab.
6 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: Right-click <shape style item>
Dialog Box
Shape Style (page 2006)
■ Index Number: An integer value used (for a point, link, or shape as required) to assign a label to the
subassembly module.
■ Localized Code: The value that will be displayed AutoCAD Civil 3D in your Subassembly, Assembly, and
or Corridor Properties Codes tab, and is used to set the style for the link.
■ Original Code: The code variable used by AutoCAD Civil 3D. No matter what localized version of the
subassembly is used, it is interpreted the same way to make drawings portable across different language
versions.
■ Code Description: A localized description to further explain the functionality associated with this code.
This text is displayed in the Description column of the Codes tab on the subassembly, assembly, and or
corridor properties dialog box. This text is optional.
NOTE Codes files must be saved in Unicode format. For example, if you are using Notepad to update the codes
file, when you save the file, the Save As dialog box lets you choose an encoding method. Make sure you choose
Unicode.
1 Add <New Code> at the end of the C3DStockSubassemblyScripts.Codes file, with a new index, localized
name, original code, and optional description.
2 In the CodesSpecific.vb of the C3DStockSubassemblies VB project, add the following at the end of the
AllCodes structure: Public <New Code> as CodeType
3 In the CodesSpecific.vb of the With/End With block of the FillCodeStructure routine, add the following
at the end: GetFromCollection colCodesAndDescriptionHashtable, n, .<NewCode>
4 Declare the default value, in case the codes file is not found, for the CodesDefault(<New Code Index>)
in InitializeDefaults() function of the CodesSpecific module.
A new code added using these procedures can be used for any existing or new .NET-coded subassemblies in
AutoCAD Civil 3D Stock Subassemblies.
For VBA subassemblies, you can do the following:
1 Add <New Code> at the end of the C3DStockSubassemblyScripts.Codes file, with a new index, localized
name, and optional description.
2 In the CodesSpecific module of C3DStockSubassemblyScripts.dvb file, add the following at the end of
the AllCodes structure: g_s<New Code> as CodeType
3 In the CodesSpecific file, in the With/End With block of the FillCodeStructure routine, add the following
at the end: GetFromCollection colCodesAndDescriptionHashtable, n, .g_s<NewCode>
4 Declare the default value, in case the codes file is not found, for the g_arrDefaults(<New Code Index>)
in InitializeDefaults() function of the CodesSpecific module.
A new code added using these procedures can be used for any existing or new VBA-coded subassemblies in
AutoCAD Civil 3D Stock Subassemblies.
NOTE The process of associating point codes is primarily done for easy localization of default content. If you are
writing custom subassemblies, you do not have to follow this procedure. You can create a new module that
contains a customized list of codes your subassemblies can reference. You can also bypass this process by
hard-coding strings locally within each module.
NOTE By default, on English-language-based systems, the AutoCAD Civil 3D subassembly tool catalog .atc files
are installed to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\C3D2011\enu\Tool
Catalogs\Road Catalog.
The following list identifies the data element values you can change in the subassembly tool catalog .atc file
for localization purposes:
■ The <ItemName> value is the descriptive name of the catalog, category, palette, or subassembly.
■ Description: Descriptive text that is displayed at the lower left corner of the AutoCAD Properties
window for a selected subassembly.
■ The <Units> value which supports feet and meters in AutoCAD Civil 3D.
■ The <Macro Module = ...> (for VBA subassemblies), which can be modified to point to a different
macro.
NOTE Only the values of a data element should be changed, not the data element name itself (such as Width in
the BasicLane subassembly). These data elements are global variable names that are used in subassembly scripts.
■ C3DStockSubassemblyScripts.codes
■ C3DStockSubassemblyScripts_US.codes
Command Description
Intersections
This chapter describes how to use the intersection design features in AutoCAD Civil 3D.
You can use AutoCAD Civil 3D intersection design features to automatically create flexible 3D models of
corridor intersections.
Understanding Intersections
An intersection object builds on and manages various object data, including alignments, profiles, corridors,
assemblies, subassemblies, and surfaces.
In its simplest form, an intersection object can be created by selecting the location where two alignments
intersect. This automatically creates an intersection object in the drawing, and this intersection object is
also displayed in the Prospector tree.
1585
Another approach to creating intersections is to first create roadway alignments, offset alignments, and
profiles. Once these preliminary design items are in place, you can create an intersection object that utilizes
the 3D aspects of these road design geometry components.
Intersections are created from and based on existing AutoCAD Civil 3D objects, which include:
■ Alignments (horizontal). Used by an intersection to define the centerlines of the two roads that intersect.
Three types of alignments are used in intersections: centerline alignments, offset alignments, and curb
return alignments. The centerline and offset alignments are used to define the horizontal geometry
aspects of an intersection object.
■ Profiles (vertical alignments). Used to define surface and design elevations along a horizontal alignment.
■ Surfaces. Used to build surface profiles, and for corridor grading in an intersection.
■ Corridors. A corridor can be built automatically to represent the 3D aspects of the intersection. You can
also add to this new corridor information to an existing corridor on the intersecting alignment(s).
■ Assemblies. Roadway assemblies are required to build a corridor representing the intersection. To build
an intersection corridor, you must be able to access appropriate assemblies to build the intersection
model. AutoCAD Civil 3D comes with a set of default intersection assemblies that you can use, or you
can create your own custom assemblies that have been designed specifically to suit the needs of
intersections you create.
■ Assembly set. An intersection corridor requires an assembly set, which is a set of assemblies that are
designed specifically for a specific type of intersection design. The assemblies included in an assembly
set are defined in an .xml file that is referred to as the assembly set file. A default assembly set and
assembly set file is included with AutoCAD Civil 3D. You can create an intersection using this default
assembly set, or you can create your own custom assembly sets.
■ Subassemblies. Subassemblies define the geometry of a corridor section (through an assembly). For
example, a typical roadway may be composed of paved lanes on either side of a centerline, a paved
shoulder, a gutter and curb, and a roadside grading. These components are defined independently as
subassemblies. You can add any type of subassembly to make up a typical assembly, and then apply that
assembly for a station range along an alignment.
Intersection objects have their own display style that controls the intersection object marker. Intersection
components, such as offset alignments, curb return alignments, and corridors, also each have their own
display styles. Before creating intersections, you should be familiar with creating and managing styles (page
66) and command settings (page 114). For more information on intersection styles, see Intersection Styles
and Display (page 1588).
Intersection Object Considerations
It is important to understand the following before you begin creating intersections:
■ Using the Create Intersection wizard, you can create an intersection object that contains up to four
quadrants.
■ If the default intersection assembly mapping and target assignments does not meet your design
requirements, you can create the intersection using these components, and then edit the intersection
regions manually to satisfy your design requirements.
■ If you create an intersection, and then manually edit the intersection corridor regions, those changes
will be overwritten if the intersection is regenerated (by clicking Recreate Corridor Regions on the
Intersection tab) or by rebuilding the intersection.
■ When creating an intersection, targeting (both horizontally and vertically) is done automatically. If you
want to change targets, you must manually modify the intersection corridor region(s) using the Corridor
Properties dialog box.
Before creating an intersection object, you must have two alignments that intersect. If you want to create a
three-dimensional intersection model, you must also have profiles associated with the intersecting alignments.
Once you have the desired prerequisites, then you can create the intersection object using the Create
Intersection wizard.
When the intersection object is created, a variety of tasks can be performed automatically, including the
following:
■ creates profiles for the offset alignments and curb return alignments created when the intersection was
created (Note: An exception to this is that if you set pre-defined static alignments as offsets, it is expected
that you will specify profiles too. No dynamic offset profiles will be created.)
■ creates new corridor regions for the existing corridors in the intersection area, or creates new corridor
objects in the intersection area
■ locks the profile elevations of the secondary road to the main (primary) road profile
Some of these tasks are optional. They depend on options selected on the wizard dialog boxes.
For overview information about AutoCAD Civil 3D objects, see Understanding Objects and Styles (page 63).
Curb returns Curb return alignment style Defined in the Create Intersec-
tion command settings
Offset profile Curb return alignment style Defined in the Create Intersec-
tion command settings
Curb return pro- Curb return alignment style Defined in the Create Intersec-
file tion command settings
For more information about styles, see Object and Label Styles (page 66).
To use this command, right-click an alignment in the Intersecting Alignments collection, and select Explore
In Prospector.
The same alignment is automatically displayed and selected in under the Alignments ➤ Centerline
Alignments collection of the Prospector tree. Use this command to quickly find the location of an intersecting
alignment in the Prospector tree.
The Explore In Prospector command is available for centerline alignments, offset alignments, and curb return
alignments, and is available from the Intersecting Alignments collection as well as from the Intersection
Quadrants collection.
Item Description
Edit Curb Return Profile Rules Displays the Intersection Curb Return Pro-
file Parameters dialog box. You can change
whether to extend the profile along the
incoming or outgoing lanes, and also
change the length by which to extend the
profile. Editable parameters have a white
background in the Value column, while
read-only parameters have a shaded back-
ground.
Expand the Intersection collection to display and edit the intersection object style, label styles, and command
settings that are available for the intersection feature.
Creating Intersections
You can create an intersection using the Create Intersection wizard.
■ two intersecting centerline alignments with one or more road edge offset alignments and or their profiles
You can have profiles defined already, or not. However, if profiles are not available, then features that are
associated with 3D modeling will not be available on the wizard. For example, if you begin creating an
intersection object with no profiles, then the following wizard options will not be available for selection:
creating offset alignment and curb return profiles, as well as the ability to create a new corridor, or to add
to an existing corridor in the intersection area.
With any of the scenarios just described, you can start the Create Intersection command, select the point
where the centerline alignments intersect, and proceed with creating an intersection using the Create
Intersection wizard.
NOTE You cannot change the “Driving Direction” setting on an intersection object that has already been created.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the name of the drawing at the top of the Settings tree
collection, and click Edit Drawing Settings.
2 Click the Ambient Settings tab, and expand the General collection.
3 Next to Driving Direction, click in the Value cell and select Left Side of the Road or Right Side of the
Road.
Quick Reference
Dialog Box
Ambient Settings Tab (Drawing Settings) (page 2078).
NOTE If you wish to create a 3-way intersection, it is important that the alignments meet precisely and do
not overlap or undershoot. If the two alignments overlap, a 4-way intersect is created.
2 In the drawing, click the location in the drawing where two alignments intersect.
3 If you are creating a 4-way intersection, you will be prompted to select the alignment that will be
identified as the primary road. If so, select the alignment by clicking the alignment in the drawing, or
by pressing Enter and selecting from the list of alignments in the drawing.
If you are creating a T-shaped (3-way) intersection, then the alignment that passes through the
intersection is automatically specified as the primary road (main road). In this situation, you are not
prompted to specify which road is the primary road because this happens automatically. It is possible
to change the road priority only during intersection object creation (on the Geometry Details page of
the Create Intersection wizard). For more information, see Changing Road Priority (page 1595).
4 On the General page of the Create Intersection wizard, enter a name for the intersection object, or
accept the default. You can also enter an optional description, and change defaults for marker styles,
layer, and labels.
5 For the Intersection Corridor Type, select one of the following to specify the corridor grade options
through the intersection area:
■ Primary Road Crown Maintained: When this options is selected, the primary road crown is maintained
through the intersection.
■ All Crowns Maintained: When this options is selected, the crowns of both roads included in the
intersection are maintained through the intersection.
An illustration at the bottom of the wizard dialog box provides a conceptual graphic of the grade type
selected.
7 On the Geometry Details page, you may accept or change the defaults. For example, if desired you can
perform the tasks listed in the following table:
To perform this option... do this...
Change the alignment priority Select an alignment in the list and click the
arrows. For more information, see Chan-
ging Road Priority (page 1595).
Select different profiles for the alignments Select an alignment in the list and click in
the Profile cell to select a profile from the
drop-down list of available profiles in the
current drawing.
Choose to create or not create offset Place or remove the check mark from the
alignments and curb returns for the inter- appropriate box on this wizard dialog box.
section
Change parameters for the offset align- Click the appropriate Parameters button
ments, curb returns, lane slopes, curb re- on this wizard dialog box.
turn profiles
8 By default, new offset alignment objects will be created. However, if you want to specify an existing
offset alignment from the drawing, click the Offset Parameters button, set Use An Existing Alignment
to Yes, and select the alignment by clicking next to the Alignment Name property.
9 When you are finished configuring the Geometry Details page, click Next to proceed to the next page
of the wizard.
10 On the Corridor Regions page, you may accept or change the defaults. For example, if desired you can
perform the tasks listed in the following table:
To perform this option... do this...
Create or not create a new corridor in the Add or remove the check mark next to this
intersection area option. For more information, see Creating
Corridors in the Intersection Area (page
1597).
Add to an existing corridor Select this option. If you do not have cor-
ridor objects in the drawing, this option is
not available. For more information, see
Creating Corridors in the Intersection Area
(page 1597).
Select an assembly set to import Click Browse, select the assembly set, then
ensure the assembly set is selected using
the drop-down arrow under Select As-
sembly Set To Import. For more informa-
tion, see Assembly Sets (page 1619).
11 Click the items listed under Corridor Region Section Type, and notice that the conceptual graphics
update with each selection. The location where the assembly will be applied along the intersection is
highlighted in the conceptual graphic.
If you are creating a T-shaped (3-way) intersection, then the alignment that passes through the intersection
is automatically specified as the primary road (main road). In this situation, the Priority is automatically set
to a value of 1 for that alignment, and you are not prompted to specify which road is the primary road
because this happens automatically.
You cannot change the priority of a road in an intersection after it has been created. However, if you want
to change the priority of the alignments during the intersection creation, you can do so from the Geometry
Details page of the Create Intersection wizard.
It is also important to note that typically, the secondary road (or lower priority) profile is automatically
locked at the intersection location to the elevation of the main road (higher priority) main road. The profile
of the main road is not modified.
3 At the top of this dialog box, in the Intersecting Alignments section, select the road (alignment) you
want to change by clicking the name of the alignment in the list.
NOTE Once the intersection object is created, you cannot change the value of the road priority for an
alignment.
5 Continue creating the intersection. For more information, see Using the Create Intersection Wizard
(page 1592).
This represents how the grading occurs for the intersection object.
NOTE Once an intersection object is created, you cannot change the value of the intersection Corridor Type
property.
If the above items have not been met, then the create corridor options on the Create Intersection wizard
dialog box are not available.
The following table describes the options that are provided through the Create Intersection wizard dialog
box:
Option Description
No Corridors in the Intersection Area When neither of the previouos two options
are selected, no corridor object are created
in the intersection area.
You can specify these options during intersection object creation, using the Create Intersection wizard, or
you can choose to edit these options after the intersection object has been created.
For example, you can select an existing intersection object, and click Recreate Corridor Regions from the
shortcut menu. This displays the Intersection Corridor Regions dialog box which lets you edit corridor
regions on the intersection. From this dialog box, you can change the options selected for corridor object
creation. After making changes on this dialog box, you need to recreate the corridor regions for the intersection
area.
2 Configure the first two pages of the wizard as desired, and advance to the Corridor Regions page. For
more information, see Using the Create Intersection Wizard (page 1592).
3 On the Corridor Regions page, place a check mark in the Create Corridors in the Intersection Area check
box.
2 Configure the first two pages of the wizard as desired, and advance to the Corridor Regions page. For
more information, see Using the Create Intersection Wizard (page 1592).
3 On the Corridor Regions page, place a check mark in the Create Corridors in the Intersection Area check
box.
5 Select an existing corridor using the drop-down list or by picking from the drawing.
NOTE If you do not have corridor objects in the drawing, these options is not available.
2 On the Intersection Corridor Regions dialog box, select one of the following: Create a New Corridor or
Add to an Existing Corridor.
3 If you selected, Add to an Existing Corridor, select an existing corridor using the drop-down list or by
picking from the drawing.
NOTE If you do not have corridor objects in the drawing, this option is not available.
4 Configure the rest of the choices on this dialog box. For example, you may want to select a different
assembly set, or select different assemblies. For more information, see Intersection Corridor Regions
Dialog Box (page 2165).
5 To apply the changes, click the Recreate button on this dialog box.
NOTE Because this command deletes and recreates the corridors in the intersection, if you made any changes
to the corridors in the intersection object, those changes will be overwritten (discarded) when the new
corridors are created. For more information, see Recreating Corridor Regions in Intersections (page 1615).
NOTE Overrides to the drawing ambient settings at the Intersection collection level and the Commands collection
level affect only the specified (and subordinate) levels. The drawing level settings are not changed.
The topics in this section describe only those settings that affect intersection-related commands. They do
not apply to the drawing ambient settings that you can change at the Intersection collection level. For more
information about the drawing ambient settings, see Specifying Ambient Settings (page 84).
If a closed lock icon is displayed in the Lock column for a property, the property is locked at a higher
level of the Settings tree. It cannot be changed at this level.
If you change a property value, a check mark is displayed in the Override column. This override is also
noted in the property table for related objects higher up the Settings tree, where an arrow is displayed in
the Child Override column.
■ To edit settings for a specific command: In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Intersection
collection. Expand the Commands collection. Right-click the name of the command and click Edit
Command Settings. For example, right-click the CreateIntersection command and click Edit
Command Settings.
2 To specify defaults for intersection creation, right-click the CreateIntersection command and click Edit
Command Settings. For example, to edit default frequencies for inserting assemblies along tangents,
curves, and spirals, expand Assembly Insertion Defaults. For more information on intersection defaults,
see the Edit Feature Settings - Intersection (page 2159) dialog box.
3 To edit the default naming format for intersection data, expand the Default Name Format property
group. Edit the various name template settings.
4 Click Apply.
■ Intersection label
■ Offset alignment
You can also create label sets for offset alignments and for curb return alignments.
The default styles specified for these components are used to establish the default styles that are used when
these items are created using the CreateIntersection command.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the Intersection collection. Click Edit Feature Settings to
open the Edit Feature Settings - Intersection dialog box (page 2159).
4 To specify a default intersection style, click Intersection Style. Click to open the Select Style dialog
box.
5 To specify a default style for a label set, click the corresponding field. Click to open the Select Label
Set dialog box.
6 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Editing Intersections
There are a variety of ways that you can edit intersections.
You can edit intersections using commands available from the ribbon, from right-click shortcut menus, or
by editing the objects directly in the drawing using grips.
The following lists describe some of the ways that you may want or need to edit an intersection object after
it has been created.
■ Change the parametric values of the intersection object definition, such as nominal offsets/ cross slopes,
curb return profile rules, and corridor regions
■ Change edge offsets from parametric (nominal offset) values to predefined alignments
■ Change edge offset profiles from parametric (nominal cross slopes) to predefined profiles
■ Change (intersection) rule-based dynamic offset alignments and dynamic profiles to static and then
make edits to them
■ Change the frequency that the assemblies are applied to the dynamic corridor regions
Typically you will need to update corridor regions after making these types of edits to intersection objects.
When an update is necessary, an out-of-date icon is displayed in Prospector for the corridors in the
intersection. If you have Update Regions Automatically turned on for the intersection object, then the
corridor regions are updated automatically after these types of edits. For more information, see Updating
Corridor Regions in Intersections (page 1614).
■ Change the intersection area corridor region extents and or add more regions within the intersection
extents
■ Change the corridor targets in the intersection for the edge offsets and profiles
■ Edit corridor parameters in the intersection area regions using the Corridor Section View Editor
Because these last three types of changes do not modify the intersection object definition, it is important
to understand that if you do make these types of changes, they could be overwritten or ignored if you update
the corridor regions in the intersection, or if you recreate the intersection.
NOTE When you edit the horizontal or vertical geometry of the intersection object, the road that is specified as
the secondary road is automatically adjusted to accommodate the horizontal and vertical position of the road that
is specified as the primary road.
The sections that follow describe how to make various types of edits to intersection objects.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Intersection collection. Right-click the intersection.
Click Properties.
2 In the Intersection Properties dialog box, click the Information tab (page 2169).
3 To change the name of the intersection, enter a new name in the Name field.
4 To change the description of the intersection, enter a new description in the Description field.
5 To change the style of the intersection, click the Object Style list. You can also use the standard buttons
to create, edit, or select a style.
6 Click Apply to make the changes, or click OK to make the changes and close the Intersection Properties
dialog box.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
■ Intersection Details. Displays information about the alignments and the quadrants included in the
intersection. This tab displays the names of the alignments, the station of the point of intersection, and
profile associated with each alignment. If multiple profiles are available, you can change the profile
associated with the alignment by clicking in the Profile cell and selecting a new profile from the drop-down
list. The Intersection Quadrants section displays the names of the alignments included in each quadrant,
and identifies incoming and outgoing alignments, as well as the value for the intersection angle between
the two alignments. This is for information only and cannot be edited in the properties dialog.
See also:
NOTE The tab most recently opened in the Intersection Properties dialog box is displayed by default.
2 In the Intersection Properties dialog box, click the Information tab (page 2169).
5 In the Object Style list, select an existing intersection style. Note that this only affects the intersection
marker style.
6 Click the Style Detail button to open the Style Detail dialog box. Preview the intersection marker style.
NOTE The tab most recently opened in the Intersection Properties dialog box is displayed by default.
2 In the Intersection Properties dialog box, click the Intersection Details tab (page 2170).
3 In the Alignment Details section, click a profile name in the Profile column. Select a profile from the
drop-down list. If there are not multiple profiles in the drawing, no other profiles will be displayed.
5 After changing the profile, you may also need to rebuild the corridor, recreate corridor regions in the
intersection, or rebuild the intersection. For more information see Rebuilding Corridors (page 1517),
Recreating Corridor Regions in Intersections (page 1615), or Updating Corridor Regions in Intersections
(page 1614).
On the Settings tab in Toolspace Right-click a style in the Intersection Styles folder
➤ Edit.
NOTE When you click New in a collection folder, the new style you create is based on installation defaults, not
on the existing styles in the collection. To create a style from an existing style, right-click the style. Click Copy and
save the style with a new name.
Use the tabs in the Intersection Style dialog box to set style information. For more information, see Intersection
Style Dialog Box (page 2170).
The following intersection components derive their styles from their own object styles: primary and secondary
road alignments, offset alignments, curb return alignments, profiles, corridors.
The right side offset alignment named First Street is selected in the Intersection Offset parameters dialog
box, shown on the left. In the drawing, that offset alignment is highlighted.
Similarly, if you are editing intersection curb return parameters using the Intersection Curb Return Parameters
dialog box, each time you select a quadrant or curb return in this dialog box, the selected quadrant or curb
return is highlighted in the drawing.
The following illustration shows temporary arrows along the alignments that indicate the direction of
incoming and outgoing traffic. These arrows are displayed when you are specifying intersection curb return
parameters.
Similarly, when you select the “Primary Road Full Section” corridor region
This behavior also exists on the Create Intersection wizard dialog boxes.
Shading of Non-editable Properties: In editing dialog boxes, properties that are not editable are displayed
with a gray (shaded) background color. Properties that are editable are displayed with a white (not shaded)
background color.
■ In the drawing, click the intersection object. On the ribbon, click Edit Offsets on the Modify
panel of the Intersection contextual tab.
■ In the drawing, right-click the intersection object, and then select Edit Offset Parameters from the
object shortcut menu.
■ In Prospector, expand the Intersections collection, right-click the intersection object, and then select
Edit Offset Parameters from the Toolspace shortcut menu.
2 On the Intersection Offset Parameters dialog box, expand the collection for the alignment you want
to edit.
Notice that when the Use An Existing Alignment property is set to No, the Alignment Name property
is read only. Notice also how the Offset Value property is set, and that it is currently editable.
3 Set the Use An Existing Alignment property to Yes, and notice that the Alignment Name property
becomes editable.
NOTE If you select another alignment in the Alignment Name field, the original offset alignment that was
created during intersection object creation is not deleted.
5 On the Intersection Offset Parameters dialog box, expand the collection for the alignment you want
to edit.
6 Set the Use An Existing Alignment property to Yes, and notice that the Offset Alignment Name Format
property is replaced with the Alignment Name property.
7 In the Value field for the Alignment Name property, click to select an offset alignment from the
current drawing.
Notice that the Offset Value is set to *Varies* if the alignment is not a dynamic offset alignment based
on a centerline. Otherwise, the Offset Value specifies the offset value of the attached dynamic alignment.
NOTE When you assign an offset value to an existing alignment, either dynamic or static, the Intersection
object does not remember the original dynamic object associated with it.
8 Click OK on the Intersection Offset Parameters dialog box, and proceed with using the wizard to create
the intersection object. For more information, see Using the Create Intersection Wizard (page 1592).
1 In the drawing, select the desired offset alignment in the intersection object.
2 On the offset alignment, click and drag the Change Offset (triangle grip) to specify the new offset value.
Notice that the intersection object and the associated curb returns update.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ In the drawing, click the intersection object. On the ribbon, click Edit Curb Returns on the
Modify panel of the Intersection contextual tab.
■ In the drawing, right-click the intersection object, and then select Edit Curb Return Parameters from
the object shortcut menu.
■ In Prospector, expand the Intersections collection, right-click the intersection object, and then select
Edit Curb Return Parameters from the Toolspace shortcut menu.
2 Use the Intersection Curb Return Parameters dialog box to edit the following parameters associated
with this component.
■ Intersection Quadrant: You can specify which quadrant of the intersection to edit.
■ Widen Turn Lane For Incoming\Outgoing Road: These options automatically add widening to the
incoming or outgoing road in the intersection when the intersection is created.
■ Intersection Quadrant Name: Displays the name of the intersection quadrant. You can change the
name here, if desired.
■ Incoming Road Centerline Name: Displays the name of the centerline alignment for the incoming
road.
■ Outgoing Road Centerline Name: Displays the name of the centerline alignment for the outgoing
road.
■ Intersection Quadrant Angle: Specifies the angle in degrees that is created by the two alignments
that intersect, forming this intersection quadrant.
■ Curb Return Type: Specifies the type of curb return, either chamfer, circular fillet, or 3-centered arc.
■ Radius: When the curb return type is circular fillet or 3-centered arc, you can specify radius parameters
for the curb return.
■ Copy These To All Quadrants: On this dialog box, you can right-click the Curb Return Parameters
node in the Property column, and select Copy These To All Quadrants. When this option is selected,
the curb return parameters currently selected are automatically applied to all quadrants in the
intersection.
■ Widening At Incoming\Outgoing Lane: Specifies details for the widening at the incoming and
outgoing lanes in the intersection.
■ Widening Details: Specifies the widening details for the incoming or outgoing lanes in the
intersection.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ In the drawing, click the intersection object. On the ribbon, click Side Road Profile on the Modify
panel of the Intersection contextual tab.
■ In the drawing, right-click the intersection object, and then select Adjust Side Road Profile from the
object shortcut menu.
■ In Prospector, expand the Intersections collection, right-click the intersection object, and then select
Adjust Side Road Profile from the Toolspace shortcut menu.
NOTE If one or more of the dynamic PVIs created by the intersection are unlocked, a task dialog is displayed
prompting you to either relock the PVIs to match the primary road, or to continue the command without
relocking the PVIs. If they do not match the primary road elevation, the corridor top surface in the curb return
fillet areas will be uneven. Choose to either relock the PVIs, if possible, or to continue the command without
relocking the PVIs.
■ Maximum Grade: Specifies the maximum grade that can be used for the tangents leading in to or
leaving the intersection along the secondary road.
■ Maximum Grade Change: Specifies the maximum grade change between the intersection area and
the tangent leading to the intersection along the secondary road.
■ Distance Rule to Adjust the Grade: Specifies to use a user-defined length or to the extents of the
intersection, as lengths, for incoming and outgoing grades along the secondary roads.
■ Distance Value: When using the Distance Rule to Adjust the Grade option, this specifies the distance
rule value used for the grade used for the secondary road in the intersection.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Prospector tab: Right-click <intersection item > ➤ Adjust Side Road Profile
Object Shortcut Menu
■ In the drawing, click the intersection object. On the ribbon, click Lane Slopes on the Modify
panel of the Intersection contextual tab.
■ In the drawing, right-click the intersection object, and then select Edit Lane Slope Parameters from
the object shortcut menu.
2 Use the Intersection Lane Slope Parameters dialog box to edit the following parameters associated with
this component.
■ Left or Right Edge Profile Definition: Specifies the parameters defining the left and right edge of the
slope
■ Use an Existing Profile: When Yes is selected, you can select a profile from the available profiles in
the current drawing. When No is selected, this indicates that the profile was created during
intersection creation.
■ Cross Fall From Centerline: Specifies the slope of the grade from the centerline.
■ Profile Name: Displays the name of the profile associated with this edge profile definition. When
Use An Existing Profile is set to Yes, you can select a new profile from available profiles in the current
drawing.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Prospector tab: Right-click <intersection item > ➤ Edit Lane Slope Parameters
Object Shortcut Menu
■ In the drawing, click the intersection object. On the ribbon, click Curb Return Profiles on the
Modify panel of the Intersection contextual tab.
■ In the drawing, right-click the intersection object, and then select Edit Curb Return Parameters from
the object shortcut menu.
2 Use the Intersection Curb Return Parameters dialog box to edit the following parameters associated
with this component.
■ Extend Profile Along Incoming (or Outgoing) Lane: Specifies whether to extend the curb return
profile along the incoming (or outgoing) lane of the intersection.
■ Length To Extend Along Incoming (or Outgoing) Lane: When Extend Profile Along Incoming (or
Outgoing) Lane is set to Yes, this option lets you specify the length to extend the curb return profile
along the incoming (or outgoing) lane of the intersection.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Prospector tab: Right-click <intersection item > ➤ Edit Curb Return Profile Rules
Object Shortcut Menu
■ Corridor region station for that curb return fillet area (in quadrant 2) will be updated as 0+50 to 3+50.
■ Frequencies for this region will be based on the newly set values.
If the corridor is set to rebuild automatically, then the corridor will be updated with the changes noted
above, including manual stations (which would remain at their previous station values).
If one of the manual stations is no longer part of the new curb return fillet area, then that manual station
is removed from the list.
If the corridor is set with Rebuild Automatic turned off, then the intersection will still change the corridor
regions to the new stations. However, the corridor is not rebuilt unless “Rebuild” is selected on the corridor
object, either in the drawing, or in Prospector.
NOTE The above steps describe behavior when the corridor is set to rebuild automatically. If it is not set to rebuild
automatically, this behavior occurs only when you explicitly click the Rebuild button.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the Intersection collection. Expand the Commands collection.
4 Click in the Value cell for the following frequency options, and specify the desired values: Frequency
Along Tangents, Frequency Along Curves, Frequency Along Spirals, Frequency Along Profile Curves.
5 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
If the intersection definition is out-of-date, is displayed next to the intersection in the Prospector tree.
This indicates that the corridor regions in the intersection need to be updated.
When you update corridor regions in an intersection, any manual edits that were made to the regions or
targets within the intersection corridor are lost.
You can update corridor regions in an intersection manually, or you can specify that the intersection object
update corridor regions automatically. When you configure the intersection object to update corridor regions
automatically, a check mark is displayed next to the Update Regions Automatically option on the Toolspace
shortcut menu.
Options Description
Update Regions and Rebuild Corridor Updates the corridor regions in an intersec-
tion object and rebuilds the corridors that
are included in the intersection object.
When the Update Regions and Rebuild Corridor command is invoked, the corridor region stations in the
intersection are updated (recalculated) in order to stay in synchronization with the intersection area geometry.
The corridor properties are updated to reflect these new region station values.
■ In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Intersections collection. Right-click the intersection.
Click Update Regions and Rebuild Corridor.
NOTE If the intersection definition is out-of-date, is displayed next to its node in the Prospector tree.
■ In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, expand the Intersections collection. Right-click the intersection.
Click Update Regions Automatically.
NOTE When you toggle this option on, if AutoCAD Civil 3D detects that changes have been made to the
intersection that require the corridor regions to be updated, then the update occurs immediately when you
toggle the option on.
A check mark is displayed next to the Update Regions Automatically option on the Toolspace shortcut menu,
indicating that this option is turned on.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Intersections ➤ right-click <intersection name> ➤ Update Regions and Rebuild Corridor
or Update Regions Automatically
Object Shortcut Menu
Update Regions and Rebuild Corridor or Update Regions Automatically
■ All corridor regions in the selected intersection are deleted, and are recreated according to the parameters
that were specified on the Intersection Corridor Regions dialog box.
■ Any user-defined corridor regions within the extents of the intersection are deleted.
■ A new set of corridor regions is created according to the assembly insertion frequency that is specified
in the command settings.
Because this command deletes and recreates the corridors in the intersection, if you made any changes to
the corridors in the intersection object, those changes will be overwritten (discarded) when the new corridors
are created.
■ In the Intersection tab on the ribbon, click the Modify panel ➤ Recreate Corridor Regions .
Quick Reference
Ribbon
The following components associated with an intersection object are not deleted when you delete an
intersection object:
■ the following 2D geometry components associated with the intersection object: intersecting alignments,
offset alignments, curb return alignments
■ the following other components associated with the intersection object: offset profiles, curb return
profiles
■ If you created a new corridor object inside the intersection area, this corridor object is not deleted when
you delete an intersection object. You must delete this corridor object manually, if desired.
■ In the drawing, select the intersection object, and delete or erase it.
■ If you delete one or both of the intersecting alignments that create the intersection, then the intersection
object is automatically deleted.
■ In the drawing, if you move one or both of the intersecting alignments that create the intersection so
that the alignments no longer intersect, then the intersection object is automatically deleted.
■ Centerline Profiles: If any of the centerline profiles associated with the intersection are deleted, then the
curb return profiles will become static (no longer a dynamic profile). Accordingly, the intersection
corridors will be updated. This behavior is similar to how a corridor reacts to its profile grade line, or
when a centerline profile is deleted. In this scenario, the intersection object still exists (is not deleted),
with just horizontal geometry.
■ Offset Alignments: If an offset alignment associated with an intersection object is deleted, and that offset
alignment has a curb return alignment attached to it, the curb return attached to that offset alignment
is not deleted; however, the curb return alignment is no longer dynamic to the intersection object. It
becomes a static curb return alignment, meaning that if you move the intersection object, the now static
curb return alignment does not move. The same is true for the profile associated with the curb return
alignment. It becomes a static (non-dynamic) profile.
■ Assemblies: If any of the assemblies used the intersection are deleted, and the corridor is set to “Rebuild
Automatic”, then the corridor regions that use the deleted assemblies are set to <None>. This creates an
empty corridor even though corridor regions still exist. You can use the Recreate Corridor command to
download the assemblies from the source location into the current drawing, and this recreates the corridor
regions.
■ In the drawing, select the intersection object, and use the AutoCAD Delete or Erase command.
The intersection object, and its label, are erased from the drawing. The intersection object is also removed
from the Intersections collection in the Prospector tree.
Labeling Intersections
You can add labels to intersection objects.
There are three ways to add labels to intersection objects:
By default, the standard intersection object label contains the name of the intersection object, the names
of the intersecting alignments, and the station value locations where the alignments intersect.
There is no placement option available for an intersection label. The label is always placed at the intersection
point. If that point is already labeled, then a second label is placed on top of the existing label.
For more information, see Understanding Labels in AutoCAD Civil 3D (page 1646).
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Add Intersection Label .
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Add Intersection Label
Command Line
AddIntersectionLabel
Assembly Sets
An assembly set is a group of assemblies used to create a corridor in an intersection object.
Assembly sets are used only with intersection object creation. A default assembly set is included with AutoCAD
Civil 3D. You can create an intersection using this default assembly set, or you can create your own custom
assembly sets to suit the needs of specific intersection design.
When you apply the assembly set, and create or update the intersection object corridors, the referenced
assembly objects are imported into the current drawing, if they are not already there.
The following table describes the components that are associated with an assembly set:
Component Description
assembly set A group of assemblies that have been designed for use
in specific type of intersection design. An assembly set
is defined in an assembly set file.
assembly set file An .xml file containing information that defines the
assemblies that are included in an assembly set. An
assembly set file contains the names of the assembly
objects, the location (path) where the individual as-
sembly drawings exist, and other information about
the assemblies included in the set. This .xml file serves
primarily as a pointer (reference mechanism). It does
not contain the actual assembly drawing data.
assembly object names The name of each assembly object referenced in the
set is maintained in the assembly set file. Note that the
assembly object data itself is not contained in the as-
sembly set file, just the information that enables Auto-
CAD Civil 3D to locate the assembly object data (a
reference to the assembly name, and the name of the
drawing file that contains the assembly object.)
The fist time you use the Create Intersection wizard, it is recommended that you accept and use the assembly
set that is referenced by default on the wizard. As you become more familiar with creating intersections,
you will want to create your own customized assembly sets. For instructions see, To Create an Assembly Set
(page 1620).
The assembly set that is included with AutoCAD Civil 3D is typically located by default in the following
location:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\ Autodesk\C3D2011\enu\Assemblies\Imperial (or Metric)
NOTE If the assembly set file references an assembly name that cannot be found, then a null assembly (page 2779)
will be used to in its place to create the intersection object. For more information, see Null Assemblies (page 1622).
The following illustration shows the contents of the default assembly set file that is included with AutoCAD
Civil 3D.
1 Ensure that the assemblies that you intend to save to the new assembly set exist in the current drawing.
You can perform this procedure using the Create Intersection wizard, or by editing an existing intersection
object.
■ Edit an Existing Intersection: Select an existing intersection, and then click Recreate Corridor Regions
on the Modify panel of the Intersection contextual tab. On the Intersection Corridor Regions dialog
box, select the assemblies in the Assemblies To Apply section of this dialog box.
4 On the Select Assembly Set File dialog box, enter a name for the new assembly set file, and then click
Save.
NOTE At this point, the new assembly set file is created. You may or may not want to proceed with applying
the new assembly set to the current intersection. If you do want to apply the new assembly set to the current
intersection, follow the next step.
■ If you selected the assemblies from the Intersection Corridor Regions dialog box, click the Browse
button, select the newly created assembly set file, and then click Recreate.
1 In the current drawing, create the desired assemblies. You can edit the existing assemblies, or create
new ones from scratch.
■ On an existing intersection, select the intersection, and then click Recreate Corridor Regions on the
Modify panel of the Intersection contextual tab. On the Intersection Corridor Regions dialog box,
select the assemblies in the Assemblies To Apply section of this dialog box.
4 On the Select Assembly Set File dialog box, specify the name and location for the assembly set file, and
click Save. If desired, you can select an existing assembly set file and save (update) it with the information
about the newly specified assemblies.
5 Click Browse to navigate to and select the desired assembly set file.
6 Use the drop-down arrow on the Select Assembly Set To Import field to ensure that the desired assembly
set file is specified on this dialog box.
7 To apply the new assembly set to the intersection, do one of the following:
■ If you are creating a new intersection, click Create Intersection on the Corridor Regions page of the
Create Intersection wizard.
■ If you edited an existing intersection, click Recreate on the Intersection Corridor Regions dialog
box.
After the intersection is created, you can assign appropriate assemblies, or a different assembly set. If you
do, you will need to recreate the intersection corridor regions, as well as rebuild the intersection, to apply
the new assembly or assemblies to the intersection. You may also need to rebuild corridors. For more
information on recreating intersection corridor regions, or on rebuilding an intersection, see Updating
Corridor Regions in Intersections (page 1614) and Recreating Corridor Regions in Intersections (page 1615).
Command Description
Roundabouts
AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011 includes features that let you create and edit 2D roundabouts in roadway models.
Understanding Roundabouts
The roundabout features include several commands that let you create and edit 2D roundabouts.
You can quickly create a 2D roundabout that comprises the following components:
■ Roundabout Central Area - Includes a central island and a circulatory roadway. The central area geometry
is defined by circular alignments. Appropriate road markings are automatically added as polylines.
■ Approach Roads - Alignments define the centerline and outer boundaries of approach roads entering
the roundabout. Optional polylines that represent construction triangles, splitter islands, and other road
markings, can be included.
Roundabouts | 1623
■ Slip Lanes - You can add slip lanes, or bypass lanes, to an existing roundabout. The geometry boundaries
of the slip lane are drawn with alignments. Polylines indicate road markings.
■ Markings and Signs - These can be added to various parts of a roundabout by specifying linetypes, blocks,
and other parameters. The default signs that are used are specified using existing AutoCAD blocks.
However, to suit your project’s needs, you can create and specify your own signs using AutoCAD blocks.
A roundabout created using the Create Roundabout command is a 2D representation of a roundabout, and
has no vertical data associated with it. Alignments and polylines define the shape. There is no roundabout
object and no roundabout node in Prospector.
Roundabout Limitations
It is important to be aware of the following when using the Create Roundabout feature, or when opening
drawings that contain roundabouts created using this feature.
Intersecting Alignments
If you create a roundabout from intersecting alignments, you may need to add additional approach roads
after you create the roundabout. For example, the following illustration shows two alignments that intersect.
This roundabout contains only two approach roads. If you want more approach roads in this roundabout,
you can add them using the Add Approach command.
Non-Intersecting Alignments
If you create a roundabout from alignments that do not intersect, can create all four approach roads at once.
In this scenario, the approach roads are added automatically, according to the alignments that have been
selected. For example, the following illustration shows four alignments that do not intersect.
Central Area
The central area of a roundabout includes the central island, the traversable area, and the outside edge of
the roundabout.
This geometry is constructed with alignments as shown in the following illustration. The first arrow (1)
identifies the alignment that defines the outer edge of the circulatory road. The second arrow (2) identifies
the alignment that defines the inner edge of the circulatory road. There is also a circular alignment defining
the central island in the middle of the roundabout central area.
The central area can also include pavement markings that are constructed as polylines offset from the
traversable area and the outside edge.
Approach Roads
Before you can create a roundabout, you must create at least one alignment to represent an approach road.
This is the alignment to which an approach will be dynamically connected. If you change or move this base
approach alignment, the roundabout approach is dynamically updated.
The Create Roundabout - Approach Roads dialog box provides parameters that let you define the approach
road geometry. It creates three alignments that define the approach road. The following table lists the default
naming convention that is used to name the approach road alignments. You can change the “Approach_”
prefix to something that better suits your project’s needs. However, you cannot edit the “_EW_EDGE_LEFT”
suffix during creation.
NOTE In the above example, “EW” in the alignment name identifies the alignment as the “East-West” alignment.
This two-letter naming convention is based on the alignment direction, and not on the roundabout approach
road direction. For example, NW is used for an alignment that runs from the north to the west, and so on.
The island, construction triangle, and pavement markings on the approach road are constructed as polylines.
Slip Lanes
You can add an extra lane for right turning or left turning vehicles, as a bypass lane, to allow vehicles to
avoid traveling through the central area of the roundabout.
A slip lane is constructed with two alignments - one each for the left and right side boundary of that lane.
Road markings constructed as polylines are placed on top of the alignments. If you grip edit and move the
polyline road markings, as shown in the following illustration, you expose the slip lane alignments.
alignment that defines the left edge of the slip lane SlipLane_EDGE_LEFT
Roundabout Parameters
Roundabout creation and editing dialog boxes display conceptual illustrations of most roundabout parameters.
These conceptual illustrations are displayed in the dialog box when you place your cursor on one of the
roundabout parameters fields.
For example, on the Create Roundabout - Circulatory Road dialog box, place your cursor over the Outer
Radius parameter field, or click in that field. The following conceptual illustration is displayed in the dialog
box.
The arrow that is displayed identifies the distance this parameters controls.
Next, place your cursor over the Apron Width field in the dialog box. The following illustration is displayed
in the dialog box.
Creating Roundabouts
Use the Create Roundabout command to create a roundabout in your roadway model.
After you have completed setup tasks, such as setting up sites, alignment styles, layers, and alignment label
sets, create the base alignments that will be used to define the approach roads that lead in to and out of the
roundabout central area.
Once you have appropriate base alignments created, you can execute the Create Roundabout command.
You will be prompted to select a location for the roundabout center point. Once you select the roundabout
center point location, a series of Create Roundabout dialog boxes are displayed. These wizard dialog boxes
let you specify a variety of parameters for the roundabout.
You can start with alignments that intersect, or with alignments that do not intersect. If your alignments
intersect, you may need to add approach roads after the alignment has been created. If you start with
alignments that do not intersect, the approach roads are added automatically.
To create a roundabout
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Intersections drop-down ➤ Create Roundabout .
You are prompted to select a roundabout center point.
2 Click on the location where you want to insert the roundabout center point.
After selecting the center point location, you are prompted to select an approach road.
NOTE When an alignment is selected, the alignment temporarily displays as a dashed line. If the alignment
does not change to a dashed line, is not selected.
You are prompted to select the next, and successive, approach roads. For more information, see Adding
Approach Roads (page 1632).
5 Select desired options on the Create Roundabout - Circulatory Roads dialog box (page 2149), and then
click Next to proceed to the next roundabout dialog box.
6 On the Create Roundabout - Approach Roads dialog box (page 2151), select the desired options, and then
click Next.
7 On the Create Roundabout - Islands dialog box (page 2153), select the desired options, and then click
Next.
8 On the Create Roundabout - Markings and Signs dialog box (page 2155), select the desired options, and
then click Finish.
NOTE Informational messages may be displayed to inform you of certain conditions. Click OK to close these
messages.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Intersections drop-down ➤ Create Roundabout .
Command Line
CreateRoundabout
Dialog Box
Create Roundabout - Circulatory Road Dialog Box (page 2149)
Create Roundabout - Approach Roads Dialog Box (page 2151)
Create Roundabout - Islands Dialog Box (page 2153)
Create Roundabout - Markings and Signs Dialog Box (page 2155)
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Intersections drop-down ➤ Add Approach .
You are prompted to select a location along the circular area of the roundabout.
2 Select a location along the circular area of the roundabout, and then press Enter.
You are prompted to select the alignment for the approach road. When you are finished selecting
alignments, press Enter. The Create Roundabout - Approach Roads dialog box (page 2151) is displayed.
3 Specify the desired parameters on the Create Roundabout - Approach Road dialog box, and then click
next to proceed to the Islands dialog box.
4 If desired, you can edit the default choices on the Islands and Markings and Signs dialog box.
5 Click Finish on the Markings and Signs dialog box to add the approach road.
NOTE Informational messages may be displayed to inform you of certain conditions. Click OK to close these
messages.
The approach road is added to the roundabout. Depending on your base design, you can add one or
multiple approach roads using this procedure.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Intersections drop-down ➤ Add Approach .
Command Line
AddApproach
Dialog Box
Create Roundabout - Approach Roads Dialog Box (page 2151)
1 Click Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Intersection drop-down ➤ Add Turn Slip Lane.
You are prompted to select the entry approach lane.
2 In the roundabout, select the approach road that will be used as the start (entry) of the slip lane.
You must select a location along one of the existing roundabout approach road alignment extents. For
example, the following illustration shows the valid area of a roundabout for selecting an approach road.
3 Select the end (exit) of the slip lane by clicking on an appropriate (adjacent) approach road in the
roundabout.
If you click on an invalid alignment, it will not be selected. When you make a valid selection, the Draw
Slip Lane dialog box (page 2158) is displayed.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Design panel ➤ Intersection ➤ Add Turn Slip Lane
Command Line
CreateTurnSlipLn
Dialog Box
Draw Slip Lane Dialog Box (page 2158)
Editing Roundabouts
Edit roundabouts using the Edit Roundabout command.
When you use this command, you are prompted to select the roundabout.
You can click anywhere on the roundabout to edit it. Depending on which roundabout component you
click on, the corresponding roundabout dialog box is displayed. Make changes to the dialog boxes to edit
the roundabout.
For example, if you click on the central area of the roundabout, the Create Roundabout - Circulatory Road
dialog box is displayed. If you click on an approach road, the Create Roundabout - Approach Roads dialog
box is displayed. Similarly, if you click on an island, marking, or slip lane, the appropriate dialog box is
displayed.
You can move forward or backwards through the roundabout dialog boxes using the Next and Back buttons.
Any changes you make on the dialog boxes updates the roundabout when you click Finish on the Create
Roundabout - Marking and Signs dialog box.
For more information, see Understanding Roundabouts (page 1623).
Moving Roundabouts
You can move a roundabout by selecting the centerpoint of the roundabout, and dragging it. If you move
the base alignment that a roundabout approach road was created from, the roundabout components remain
dynamic to the base alignment, and move with the base alignment.
If you need to change the centerpoint location of a roundabout, you can do it by deleting the roundabout,
recreating the roundabout, and selecting a new roundabout center point location.
To edit a roundabout
4 In the roundabout dialog boxes, make changes to the desired options, and then click Next.
You can click Back or Next to move through all of the roundabout dialog boxes.
5 When you are finished making changes, click Next to advance to the Create Roundabout - Markings
and Signs dialog box, and then click Finish.
The roundabout is updated in the drawing.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the roundabout. Click Modify tab ➤ Design panel ➤ Intersection ➤ Edit Roundabout.
Command Line
EditRoundabout
Dialog Box
Create Roundabout - Circulatory Road Dialog Box (page 2149)
NOTE You must click on an approach road to display the Create Roundabout - Approach Road dialog box.
4 Make changes to the Create Roundabout - Approach Road dialog box and click OK.
The approach road is updated in the drawing.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the roundabout. Click Modify tab ➤ Design panel ➤ Intersection ➤ Edit Roundabout.
Command Line
EditRoundabout
NOTE You must click on a slip lane to display the Draw Slip Lane dialog box.
4 Make changes to the Draw Slip Lane dialog box and click OK.
The slip lane is updated in the drawing.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the roundabout. Click Modify tab ➤ Design panel ➤ Intersection ➤ Edit Roundabout.
Command Line
EditRoundabout
Deleting Roundabouts
You can delete an entire roundabout, including approach roads and slip lanes, or just certain components
of the roundabout.
Where you click on the roundabout determines which roundabout components are deleted. The following
table describes the resulting behavior, depending on which roundabout component you clicked on after
executing the Delete Roundabout command.
the roundabout central area, including the circulat- Deletes the entire roundabout, including all com-
ory road alignments, markings, signs, or labels loc- ponents associated with the roundabout (approach
ated in the central area roads, slip lanes, islands, marking, signs, and labels).
marking (roundabout road marking, crosswalk, etc.) Deletes the marking, and the parent roundabout
component the marking is attached to, such as the
approach road, or slip lane. To delete just the
marking, select the marking, and then use the
AutoCAD Delete command.
When you delete a roundabout, or roundabout components, the pre-existing base alignments used to create
the roundabout, are not deleted.
To delete a roundabout
3 Click on the roundabout central area to delete the entire roundabout, and all of its associated
components, or click on one of the following roundabout components to delete just that component:
approach road, slip lane.
The roundabout, or roundabout component, is deleted from the drawing.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the roundabout. Click Modify tab ➤ Design panel ➤ Intersection ➤ Delete Roundabout.
Command Line
DeleteRoundabout
Quick Reference
Ribbon
2 In the roundabout, click on the desired slip lane, and then press Enter.
The slip lane is deleted from the drawing.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Using Presets
You can create presets to save time when creating or editing roundabouts.
On roundabout dialog boxes, you can save the geometry parameter settings as a preset. To do this, use the
Predefined Parameters To Import choice on the dialog box.
Inner Offset
Exit Radius
Width At Departure
Entry Radius
Width At Approach
Base
Rounding At Exit
Offset At Exit
Offset At Departure
Rounding At Tip
Rounding At Entry
Offset At Entry
Offset At Approach
Rounding At Crosswalk
3 On the roundabout dialog box, click the button in the Predefined Parameters To Import section of
the dialog box.
The Preset - Add dialog box is displayed.
4 In the Preset Name field, type in a unique name to identify this set of presets.
NOTE All roundabout presets are stored in the currently selected roundabout drawing standards .xml file,
located by default in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\C3D
2010\enu\Data\Corridor Design Standards\Imperial or Metric. The Preset name identifies a particular set of
presets that are defined in that file. This provides a way to quickly create your own custom XML file to define
these settings.
Command Description
Label Objects
AutoCAD Civil 3D includes independent label objects. Most labels in AutoCAD Civil 3D are implemented
as label objects that reside on their own layer.
NOTE Points, surface watershed, and all corridor labels are not object type labels. They are sub-entities of a parent
object and their properties are managed in the Label Properties dialog box.
■ Label objects are not highlighted when the parent object is selected as they are separate independent
objects.
■ Labels can include references to other AutoCAD Civil 3D objects by including Referenced Text (page 1693)
components.
■ You can label external reference (xref) data objects. When you insert xref objects from a source drawing
into your current drawing, you can annotate them as you would other objects. For more information,
see Labeling External References (Xrefs) (page 1710).
■ You can use alignment label styles to label superelevation critical points (page 929).
■ Label text can be overridden by using the Edit Label Text (page 1714) command on the shortcut menu.
■ Group Label Properties (page 1712) such as layer, linetype, and color are changed with the AutoCAD
Properties palette. You have the ability to simultaneously edit group labels with the Properties palette.
■ Label object properties are separate from the parent object. Use the Label List command (page 1665) to
display the label properties (including its designation as a single or group label object).
■ Label visibility (page 1665) can be controlled with label style settings or through layer management.
■ New label styles can reference the layer in the style, or the layer that the label(s) resides on. This gives
you the option of managing labels with styles (page 1671) or the use of layers.
1643
■ Labels that are part of a group can be selected individually and changed using “Ctrl+click” selection (page
1713).
■ A label’s default layer (page 1667) can be specified and changed with the Properties palette, or other AutoCAD
layer manipulation tools.
■ Alignment label styles are edited in the Alignment Labels Dialog Box (page 1952).
■ Use the Mapcheck Analysis command to determine values from label objects based on the precision of
the annotation of the label object. Click Analyze tab ➤ Ground Data panel ➤ Survey
drop-down ➤ Mapcheck . For more information, see Performing a Mapcheck Analysis (page 1796).
■ This release of AutoCAD Civil 3D features label leader line enhancements for improved control and
flexibility when grip editing labels. See Editing Line, Arc, and Polyline Labels with Grips (page 1717), and
Managing Leader Vertices (page 1684) for more information.
■ Use the Label Stagger options to avoid densely populated graph views. These options allow you to stagger
labels for profile views, section views, and data bands for improved visibility. For more information, see
Staggering Profile and Section Labels (page 1707) and Staggering Data Band Labels (page 1707).
■ Data band labels are now object labels that can be edited, dragged, and reset like other label objects. See
Editing Data Band Labels (page 1708), Deleting Band Labels (page 1724), and Restoring Band Labels (page 1725)
for more information.
■ This release of AutoCAD Civil 3D include projected object label styles for profile and section views. See
Adding Profile View Labels (page 1132)and Using Section View Labels (page 1243)for more information.
The label objects are listed in the table below. Note that the label objects include two distinct object types:
group and single labels.
Group label objects and single label objects behave differently with respect to screen interaction and AutoCAD
object management. The selection of the group label objects is limited to the group (the entire group is
highlighted when selected), which means the context menu no longer applies to the perceived selected
label.
This group selection functionality allows you to simultaneously edit an entire group of labels. As group type
labels have an object controlling the creation and application of the label within a group, the AutoCAD
Properties palette lists information regarding the annotated object.
Single type labels do not list this information, but both types display Standard AutoCAD properties and
Label properties with the Properties palette. See Modifying Labels in a Drawing (page 1712) for more information.
The label objects are listed in the table below and are identified as either group or single labels.
Note Single
Segment Single
Understanding Labels
In AutoCAD Civil 3D, labels and tags are controlled by label styles.
In the Toolspace Settings tree, most feature collections, such as parcels, alignments, and surfaces, contain
their own unique label styles. When you define a label style, you determine the purpose of the label and set
up a relationship with the object that uses it. Labels always remain associated with the object they are
annotating.
General line and curve label styles can be used for parcel segments labels, and alignment line/curve labels.
Previously, general line label styles could modify only lines, curves, and polylines. For more information,
see Editing Label Styles (page 1661).
The general line label styles are available for the parcel, alignment, grading, and survey labeling commands.
Parcel tables now support general line/curve label types. Parcel tables display either general/line curve labels
or parcel segment labels. For more information, see Adding Parcel Tables (page 912).
There are three levels of label settings in addition to settings that you define in the label styles themselves.
For more information, see The Hierarchy of Label Settings (page 1648).
As you create AutoCAD Civil 3D objects in a drawing, they are labeled automatically using specified label
styles. However, after an object is created, you can add more labels manually.
Labels are defined by the following properties:
■ Location. Label location in a drawing depends on the object using the label.
For example, a parcel area label is usually placed at the center of the parcel, and surface contour labels
are usually placed on the contour line.
■ Mode. Many label styles have two modes: label and tag. Tags are used to identify labeled objects within
a table. For more information, see Setting Up Label Styles To Be Used as Tags (page 1663).
■ Behavior. Labels behave according to their association with objects. For example, if you move an object
in a drawing, the label moves with it.
Also, behavior can also depend on how a label is positioned in a drawing.
■ Placement. A label is placed in relation to an object or another label style component. For more
information, see Anchor Points and Attachment Points (page 1671).
■ Plan-Readable text. Labels can be placed at any angle, but you can select a plan-readability setting to
maintain legibility. For more information, see Using Plan-Readability (page 1668) and Changing Label
Insertion (page 1669).
■ Orientation. Label orientation refers to the rotation angle of the labels in 3D space. For more information
about label orientation, see Changing Label Orientation (page 1667).
The commands used to add single and multiple label types from the parcels, alignments, and line/curve
menus support each of the three object types. For example, if you click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables
panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Line And Curve ➤ Add Single Segment Line/Curve Label and then select
a parcel in the drawing, a parcel segment (line or curve) label is created.
The following object type/segments are supported by these commands:
■ line
■ arc
The following table lists what determines the default style/style type when you use the add label command
from particular menus.
Create label on Styles come from Styles come from Styles come from
line, curve, pline, or line/curve settings Parcel settings line/curve settings
feature line (General line/curve (General line/curve (General line/curve
style type). style type, or parcel style type).
types supported).
Create label on Par- Styles come from Styles come from Styles come from
cel Segment line/curve settings Parcel settings Parcel settings
(General line/curve (General line/curve (General line/curve
style type). style type, or parcel style type, or parcel
types supported). types supported).
Create label on Styles come from Styles come from Styles come from
Alignment Seg- line/curve settings Alignment settings Alignment settings
ment (General line/curve (General line/curve (General line/curve
style type). When style type, or Align- style type, or Align-
labeling using ment types suppor- ment types suppor-
"Multiple" or ted). When labeling ted).
"Single," and any using "Multiple" or
spirals are labeled "Single," and any
they use the align- spirals are labeled,
ment settings for they use the align-
the spiral style. ment settings for
the spiral style.
Create label on Styles come from Styles come from Styles come from
Line, Curve, Pline Add Labels dialog Add Labels dialog Parcel settings
or Feature Line (General line/curve
style type, or parcel
types supported).
Create label on Styles come from If current style refer- Styles come from
Alignment Seg- Add Labels dialog. enced in label tool Add Labels dialog.
ment When labeling us- is line/curve type,
ing "Multiple" or then that style is
"Single," and any applied. If style is
spirals are labeled, parcel type, get
they use the align- styles from align-
ment settings for ment settings.
the spiral label When labeling spir-
style. als using "Multiple"
or "Single," and any
spirals are labeled,
they use the align-
ment settings for
the spiral style.
Each level of settings controls the characteristics in subordinate levels, unless a setting has been specifically
changed or overridden in the subordinate.
At the drawing level you can determine how table tags are numbered. Click the drawing name, right-click
and click Table Tag Numbering to access the Table Tag Numbering Dialog Box (page 2209). For more
information, see Creating Label Tags (page 1723).
Each label type has a Standard label style. The AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing templates also contain several
other label styles you can use.
You can create child styles that are based on an existing style. For more information, see Defining Children
of Existing Label Styles (page 1657).
NOTE You can identify a label style in the Settings tree by next to it. If a label style is in use in the drawing,
then is displayed when the Drawing Item State icons are visible in Toolspace.
TIP From the View Control list, select Active Drawing Labels Only View. Or, if you have more than one
drawing open, select Labels Only View.
4 Expand the Label Styles collection to display the label style types inherent to that object.
In the Alignment, Profile, and Section collections, you can also view any label sets (page 1725) for that
feature.
5 Expand the label style type collection to view the available label styles.
6 Right-click a label style to access commands for working with the style. You can edit, delete, or copy
the style, or create a new child style.
NOTE Right-click the label style type collection and click New to create a new label that is not a child style
of an existing style.
OR
1 In the drawing, select the label to edit. Right-click and select Edit Label Style.
2 In the Label Style Control (page 2203) box, click the Select a Style arrow to display a list of available styles.
OR
2 In the Properties palette, click Line or Curve label style to display a list of available styles.
Select the Edit/Create option to access the Label Style Control (page 2203) dialog box with which you can
create a new style, copy the currently selected style, create a child style, or edit the currently selected
style with the Label Style Composer.
OR
2 Select the Labels tab ➤ Label Properties drop-down menu ➤ Edit Label Style to access the Label Style
Control (page 2203) dialog box.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Labels tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Label Properties drop-down ➤ Edit Label Style
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤ <label
style name>
Right-click label style ➤ New Create a label style that is based on the settings
(page 1657) of a parent label style. This command displays
Right-click label type ➤ New Create a label style that is not a child of an ex-
(page 1656) isting label style. The new label style is a parent-
level style and obtains its defaults from the label
type settings.
Right-click label style ➤ Edit Edit a label style in the Label Style Composer.
(page 1686)
■ Yes: Copies the style to the new drawing and renames the style using the format <source drawing
name>.<style name>.1
TIP Because you can only drag one label style at a time into another drawing, it is more efficient to set up your
commonly used label styles in a DWT file that you can use for each new drawing you create.
1 Open the drawing that contains the styles you want to copy (Drawing1, for example), and the drawing
you want to copy styles to (Drawing2, for example).
3 From the View Control list, select Labels Only View to see the labels in all open drawings.
4 In the Settings tree, expand the Drawing1 collection and select the label style that you want to copy.
5 Drag and drop the label style to Drawing2 in the Settings tree. You must drag the style over the drawing
name in the Settings tree before releasing the mouse button.
NOTE Do not rename the Preview folder or its sub-folders. Any changes to the folder structure prevents AutoCAD
Civil 3D from accessing the preview drawings.
1 Create a new drawing, create one or more label styles, and label an object with the label styles you want
to preview.
1 On the General, Layout, or Dragged State tabs of the Label Style Composer (page 2180), click the Preview
arrow in the upper-right corner of the dialog box to display a list of preview drawings.
3 Right-click in the preview pane to access commands you can use to change the display of the preview
drawing.
■ In a 1:50 scale drawing, with the label text height 0.1, the labels are created at a height of 5'.
■ In a 1:100 scale drawing, with the label text height 0.1, the labels are created at a height of 10'.
NOTE To label an xref object, the scale of the inserted xref is must be 1,1,1.
■ Use the Standard Scale in the View Port Properties Palette window. This will not change the Annotation
Scale.
■ Use the zoom command in the viewport to get the desired viewport zoom scale.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click a drawing name, and click Edit Label Style Defaults.
2 In the Edit Label Style Defaults - Drawing (page 2179) dialog box, define defaults for all labels in a drawing
by changing the settings in the Value column.
TIP Using the Visibility setting in the drawing-level label settings is a quick way to turn off all labels in a
drawing.
If you want a different setting for an individual label style, you can override the default in a subordinate
setting.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click a feature collection and click Edit Label Style Defaults.
2 In the Edit Label Style Defaults <Feature Name> (page 2179) dialog box, define defaults for all label styles
belonging to the feature by changing the property settings in the Value column.
When you change a value at the current level, the check box is selected in the Override (page 2198)
column.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ Right-click <object collection> ➤ Edit Label Style Defaults
Dialog Box
Edit Label Style Defaults <Feature Name> (page 2179)
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click a label style type and click Edit Label Style Defaults.
NOTE Label style types are the lowest-level collection within the Label Styles collection. For example, under
Alignment, expand Station to display the label style types Major Station, Minor Station, Geometry Point, and
so on.
2 In the Edit Label Style Defaults <Style Type> (page 2180) dialog box, define defaults for all label styles
belonging to that label type collection by changing the property settings in the Value column.
When you change a value at the current level, the check box is selected in the Override (page 2198)
column.
4 Click OK.
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ Right-click <label style type name>
➤ Edit Label Style Defaults
Dialog Box
Edit Label Style Defaults <Style Type> (page 2180)
To specify default styles for Note and Line and Curve Labels
6 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ General ➤ Commands ➤ Right-click <command name> ➤ Edit
Command Settings
Dialog Box
Edit Feature Settings - General Dialog Box (page 2015)
NOTE Label style names are case-sensitive. For example, the label name “Standard” is not the same as “standard”.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click a label style type and click New.
NOTE Label style types are the lowest-level collection within the Label Styles collection. For example, under
Alignment, expand Station to display the label style types Major Station, Minor Station, Geometry Point, and
so on.
2 In the Label Style Composer, click the Information (page 2180) tab and enter a name in the Name box.
3 Use the other tabs in the Label Style Composer (page 2180) to change the settings.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ right-click <label style type name>
➤ New
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click a label style and click Copy.
2 In the Label Style Composer, click the Information (page 2180) tab and enter a name in the Name box.
3 Use the other tabs in the Label Style Composer (page 2180) to change the settings.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Copy
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click a label style, and click New.
2 Click the Information (page 2180) tab, and enter a name in the Name box.
3 Use the other tabs in the Label Style Composer (page 2180) to change the settings.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ New
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
■ You can select the labels to add to the table from the drawing.
When you use the second method, you are prompted to create a child style if the selected labels are currently
in Label display mode.
The following illustration shows the Selection section of the Add Table dialog box:
To add all labels of a particular label style name to a table, select the Apply check box next to the label style
name. When you use this method, all the labels are switched to tag mode, and a child style is not created.
■ Always use the style-based selection method when creating tables. You can specifically set up “tag” label
styles to use for this purpose, and use the tag label styles to label only those entities you want to insert
into the table. For more information, see Setting Up Label Styles To Be Used as Tags (page 1663).
■ Before creating a table, switch the label style display mode to Tag. Then when you use the Select In
Drawing method when tags are displayed, child styles are not created. For more information on switching
to tag mode, see Displaying Labels as Tags (page 1666).
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the General ➤ Label Styles collection.
3 Use the tabs on the Label Style Composer (page 2180)to set up the label style.
NOTE From the Layout tab, you can add or edit label components to include the overall length of lines and
polylines and the total area of polylines. Follow the steps in Adding Text Components to Labels (page 1686)
and use the General Overall Length and General Overall Area properties.
4 If you have multiple components in the label style, be sure to specify appropriate Anchor Points and
Attachment Points (page 1671) so the components do not overlap. You can use the Preview window to
check the label layout.
NOTE Specify the default layer for Line and Curve labels on the Layers tab (page 82) of the Drawing Settings
dialog box. You can also change the layer of these labels by using the AutoCAD Properties palette (right-click label
and select Label Properties or Properties).
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ General ➤ Label Styles ➤ right-click Line or Curve ➤ New
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
Offset = - 50 feet
from station 9+50 on Oak Street
3 On the Information tab of the Label Style Composer dialog box, specify a name for the new style.
5 A default text component is created by default. To change the text string, under Text, click the Contents
row. Then click .
6 In the Text Component Editor (page 2199), edit the text for the note as needed. You can type directly
into the window.
8 If you want to reference objects in the drawing, create a Referenced Text (page 1693) component for each
object you want to reference.
For example, you can create a note label with two Referenced Text components, each which refers to
an alignment name. You can then insert that label at the intersection of two alignments, and select the
intersecting alignments as the object data.
9 If you have multiple components in the label style, be sure to specify appropriate Anchor Points and
Attachment Points (page 1671) so the components do not overlap. You can use the Preview window to
check the label layout.
10 Use the other tabs on the Label Style Composer (page 2180)to set up the label style.
NOTE Specify the default layer for Note labels on the Layers tab (page 82) of the Drawing Settings dialog box.
You can also change the layer of these labels by using the AutoCADProperties palette (right-click label and select
Label Properties or Properties).
See also:
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ General ➤ Label Styles ➤ right-click Note ➤ New
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the label style you want to edit and click Edit.
2 Use the Label Style Composer (page 2180) to edit the label style.
3 Click OK.
OR
1 In the drawing, select a label, right-click and select Properties or Label Properties.
2 In the Properties palette, click Line or Curve label style to display a list of available styles.
Select the Edit/Create option to access the Label Style Control (page 2203) dialog box with which you can
create a new style, copy the currently selected style, create a child style, or edit the currently selected
style with the Label Style Composer.
OR
3 In the Label Style Control (page 2203) dialog box, specify a label style, create a new style, or copy or edit
an existing style. Press to access the Label Style Composer.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the label. Click Labels tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Label Properties drop-down ➤ Edit Label Style
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
1 In the Settings tree, right-click an existing label style and click Edit.
TIP Create a new drawing using one of the default AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing templates, which contain a
set of pre-defined label styles.
2 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout tab.
3 Click the Component Name list to see which components have been defined for the label style. The
components control the label content.
4 To modify the content of a label component, select its name in the Component Name list.
5 Under Text, click in the Value column of the Contents row to display the Browse button , as shown
in the following illustration:
6 Click to display the Text Component Editor, where you can change the label properties. For more
information, see Adding Text Components to Labels (page 1686).
7 You can also edit the static text in the label. For more information, see Editing Text in the Text
Component Editor (page 1690).
■ Display Mode. Controls whether the labels are currently displayed as labels or tags. This switches to tag
mode automatically when a table is inserted into the drawing using the style-based selection method.
■ Table Tag Component. A unique component that is defined on the Layout tab of the Label Style Composer
and is required for labels that support tables.
■ Label “Used In” Property. Controls whether label style components (such as text or blocks) are used in
label mode, tag mode, or both.
A single label style can contain settings for both the label mode and the tag mode. You do not have to have
separate label styles set up for tags. However, it may help you manage your drawings (and prevent additional
1 Create a new label style and give the style a unique name. For more information, see Creating and
Editing Label Styles (page 1656).
2 With the new style open in the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the General tab.
3 Under Label, set the Display Mode to Tag. This sets the default state of this label style to tag mode.
Then, when you label an object with this style, tags are created rather than full labels. For more
information, see Displaying Labels as Tags (page 1666).
4 Click the Layout tab and select the Table Tag component in the Component Name list. This component
is required for labels that support tables. You cannot delete or change the name of this component.
5 Under General, set the value of Used In property. For Table Tag components, the tag can be displayed
in tag mode or in label and tag modes. For more information, see Layout Tab (Label Style Composer
Dialog Box) (page 2183).
6 Under Text, click the Value column for Contents and then click to display the Text Component
Editor.
7 Note the property listed in the Properties list. Table tags support only the Segment Number property
field. For more information, see Property Fields (page 1691).
8 In the Text Component Editor, edit the static text as needed. You can change “C” to “Curve” for
example. Do not alter the property field itself. For more information, see Editing Text in the Text
Component Editor (page 1690).
9 You can click the Format tab to change the tag justification or color, for example. For more information,
see Formatting Text (page 1688).
10 Click OK in the Text Editor window and the Label Style Composer to close them.
11 Use the new label style for tagging objects, and then insert an object table into the drawing. For more
information, see Adding Labels to Drawings (page 1701).
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the General (page 2181) tab.
2 Under Label, click the Value column for the Text Style property, and then click .
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
3 The AutoCAD Text Window dialog box displays the label type, entity type, and layer.
Group type labels display “GROUP” at the end of the entity type, as well as the parent object and the
default label style. For example, AECC_ALIGNMENT_STATION_LABEL_GROUP Layer: "0". In this case,
the entity type is alignment station. The label type is group, and the layer is set to zero.
4 Single type labels differ from group labels as they do not display “GROUP” at the end of the entity type
listing, and the label style is displayed.
NOTE The alignment label type vertical geometry point label does not include “GROUP” at the end of the
entity type listing. It is called: AECC_ALIGNMENT_VAGEOMPOINT_LABELING.
Quick Reference
Command Reference
List
Dialog Box
AutoCAD Text Window
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the General (page 2181) tab.
3 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
NOTE By setting label styles to Tag display mode before creating tables, you can avoid creating unnecessary child
styles. For more information, see Automatically-Created Child Styles (page 1658).
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the General (page 2181) tab.
NOTE Some label types (such as parcel area labels and alignment station labels) cannot be displayed in tag
mode and therefore do not have the Display Mode property.
3 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
NOTE Specify the default layer for labels on the Object Layers tab (page 82) of the Drawing Settings dialog box.
You can also change the layer of these labels by using the AutoCAD Properties palette (right-click label and select
Label Properties or Properties), or any other object layer manipulation tool.
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the General (page 2181) tab.
2 Under Label, click the Value column for Layer and then click .
3 In the Layer Selection dialog box, select a layer, or create a new one.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the General (page 2181) tab.
2 Under Behavior, change the Orientation Reference value to the desired item.
3 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
The following illustration shows labels with Plan Readable set to True:
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the General (page 2181) tab.
NOTE The labels are flipped again when they reach 180 degrees from the Readability Bias angle. For example,
if the bias angle is 90, the labels are flipped at 90 degrees, and then are flipped again at 270 degrees.
4 Set the Flip Anchors With Text setting to False to flip labels so they are mirrors of the original labels.
Set this setting to True if you also want to flip the label’s anchor point.
NOTE In most cases, it is not desirable to have this setting set to True. However, there are cases where it is
needed, such as with a station label with a plus sign located always at the station tick.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
Top
This setting ensures that the label is always placed on top of the object, regardless of the relationship to the
zero angle of an object. The Top setting determines label placement based on the same calculation used for
Plan Readability. For more information, see Using Plan-Readability (page 1668).
Bottom
This setting ensures that the label is always placed beneath the object, regardless of the relationship to the
zero angle of an object. The Bottom setting determines label placement based on the same calculation used
for Plan Readability.
None
This setting places labels as they relate to the calculated zero angle of an object. It does not change label
composition and, in essence, ignores any label placement rules.
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the General (page 2181) tab.
2 Under Behavior, change the Forced Insertion value to either None, Top, or Bottom.
3 Click OK.
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the General (page 2181) tab.
2 Under Behavior, change the Force Inside Curve value to either True or False.
3 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
■ Table Tag. A text component. Used only for table insertion. Required for labels that can be inserted into
tables.
■ Direction Arrow. A direction arrow component that is positioned relative to the Bearing.
You can use the Layout properties to control each of these components separately.
NOTE For more information about defining new label components, see Adding Content to Labels (page 1686).
NOTE This section describes the Layout Properties for Text Components. Many of the same properties are available
for Block, Tick, Line, and Direction Arrow components. Additional layout properties are described in Blocks (page
1696), Ticks (page 1697), Lines (page 1695), and Direction Arrows (page 1699).
■ Anchor Component. The anchor component is the item that the label component is positioned relative to.
It can be the object that is labeled, or it can be another label component.
■ Anchor Point. The anchor point is the location on the anchor that is attached to the label component’s
attachment point. It can be the label location (when the anchor component is set to Feature) or it can be
one of several locations on the label component (when the anchor component is set to a specific label
component).
■ Attachment Point. The attachment point is the location on the label component that is attached to the
anchor point.
The following illustration shows how these points work together to position the label component (the
rotated text in the illustration):
The anchor is on a line (the anchor is set to Feature and the anchor point to Label Location). The attachment
point on the text is set to Bottom Left. Note how the X and Y offsets, angle, and border gap all affect how
the label is positioned relative to the attachment and anchor points
The following illustrations show the different points on label components that can be used either as anchor
points or attachment points.
NOTE The location of the insertion point is defined in the block itself. The anchor and attachment points are the
same on blocks and ticks.
NOTE The anchor and attachment points are the same on direction arrows and lines.
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout (page 2183) tab.
3 Under General, specify the Anchor Component value for the component.
The Anchor Component defines what the selected component should be “anchored to” — or positioned
relative to—in the label.
For example, if you are setting up a Direction Arrow component for a direction label, you might want
to specify the Bearing as the Anchor Component so that you can position the arrow in relation to the
bearing label text.
4 Change the Anchor Point value to specify the location of the anchor point.
This value specifies precisely where on the Anchor Component you want to place the anchor.
5 Under Text, change the Attachment value to specify the location on the label component that will be
attached to the anchor point.
6 Optionally, specify X and Y offsets and a Rotation Angle. For example, you may want to specify X or
Y offsets from the anchor point to add some space between the components. For more information,
see Offset (page 1676) and Rotation (page 1677).
TIP Refer to the Label Preview window when editing the label layout properties. This preview dynamically
shows the effect of each of these settings.
7 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
NOTE Anchor points do not support the spanning option for parcel segment labels.
For spiral labels, in addition to the label location, start, end, and middle points anchors, there is a Point of
Intersection anchor.
With curve label anchors, you can attach a label to the center point of the arc.
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout tab.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
Background Mask
Use a background mask for Text and Referenced Text components to mask the background of a label
component.
without mask
1234
with mask
1234
The size and shape of the mask is configured using the border settings. For example, if you specify a rectangular
border with a gap of 0.1, the mask respects those settings, even if the border visibility is set to False.
You can use the AutoCAD Properties palette to include a background mask for surface contour labels
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout (page 2183) tab.
2 Select a Text or Referenced Text component from the Component Name list.
4 Configure the other Borders (page 1680) settings to adjust the mask and border size and shape.
To set the background mask setting for surface contour labels in AutoCAD Properties
2 In the AutoCAD Properties palette, under Labels change the Masking property to From Label Style. This
sets the contour label to the label background mask setting from the assigned label style.
OR
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
Offset
Specify X and Y offsets to define the distance between the anchor point of the anchor component and the
attachment point of the label component.
■ Label Orientation Reference set to Object. X and Y offset values are relative to the X and Y coordinate
system as defined by the anchor component direction. In the preceding illustration, the anchor component
direction is zero (0) degrees, so X, and Y offsets are measured relative to zero (X direction = 0° and Y
direction = 90°). If the anchor component direction changed to 45°, then the X direction is measured at
45°, and the Y direction is measured at 135°.
■ Label Orientation Reference set to World. X and Y offset values are relative to the world coordinate system
(X direction = 0° and Y direction = 90°).
■ Label Orientation Reference set to View. X and Y offset values are relative to the current view (X direction
= bottom of screen and Y direction = 90° from bottom of screen).
For more information about these settings, see General Tab (Label Style Composer Dialog Box) (page 2181).
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout (page 2183) tab.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
Rotation
Specify a rotation angle for a label component.
Rotation angles are dependent on the Orientation Reference of the label style:
■ Label Orientation Reference set to Object. The rotation angle is measured relative to the X and Y coordinate
system as defined by the anchor component direction. For example, if the anchor component direction
is 45°, then the rotation angle is measured relative to 45°.
■ Label Orientation Reference set to World. The rotation angle is measured relative to the world coordinate
system (X direction = 0° and Y direction = 90°).
■ Label Orientation Reference set to View. The rotation angle is measured relative to the current view (X
direction = bottom of screen and Y direction = 90° from bottom of screen).
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout (page 2183) tab.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
Colors
Assign colors to individual components in a label.
■ ByLayer. Labels obtain their color from the label style’s layer (defined on the General tab of the Label
Style Composer).
■ ByBlock. Labels obtain their color from the parent object’s AutoCAD properties. The object is first examined
for any property overrides. If none are found, then the color property of the object layer is used.
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout (page 2183) tab.
4 In the Select Color dialog box, select a color or select ByLayer or ByBlock.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
Right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
Linetypes
Assign linetypes to individual components in a label.
Use the Select Linetype dialog box to assign a specific linetype or use one of the following options:
■ ByLayer. Labels obtain their linetype from the label style’s layer (defined on the General tab of the Label
Style Composer).
■ ByBlock. Labels obtain their linetype from the parent object’s AutoCAD properties. The object is first
examined for any property overrides. If none are found, then the linetype property of the object layer
is used.
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout (page 2183) tab.
4 In the Select Linetype dialog box, select a linetype or select ByLayer or ByBlock.
5 Click OK.
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
Lineweights
Assign lineweights to individual components in a label.
Use the Select Lineweight dialog box to select a specific lineweight or use one of the following options:
■ ByLayer. Labels obtain their lineweight from the label style’s layer (defined on the General tab of the
Label Style Composer).
■ ByBlock. Labels obtain their lineweight from the parent object’s AutoCAD properties. The object is first
examined for any property overrides. If none are found, then the lineweight property of the object layer
is used.
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout (page 2183) tab.
4 In the Select Lineweight dialog box, select a lineweight, or select ByLayer or ByBlock.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
Text Height
Specify text height for label text components.
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout (page 2183) tab.
4 Click OK.
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
Curved Text
For label styles designed to label curves, you can specify that the label text is drawn to follow the curve.
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout (page 2183) tab.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
Borders
You can add rectangular, circular, or rounded rectangular borders to individual label components.
1234
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout (page 2183) tab.
3 Under Border, change the values for Visibility, Type, Gap, Color, Linetype, Lineweight, and Background
Mask.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
A leader line remains attached to the original insertion point of the label and stretches to the label’s new
location. A leader can be drawn with an arrowhead and can be a straight line or a spline curve.
Text in a dragged label is stacked according to settings that you specify in the Dragged State (page 2196) tab
of the Label Style Composer.
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Dragged State (page 2196) tab.
2 Under Leader, change the Visibility value to True to display leaders when you move a label away from
its original placement.
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
2 Move the grip to the new location. A vertex is created. Note that new grips display on the resulting
leader lines. Use these grips to create additional vertices.
NOTE Click the grip once to reset the leader. Click the grip twice to reset a dragged label to its
undragged state.
NOTE If the leader type in label style dragged state is set to spline, an AutoCAD spline fit is made passing
through the vertex points.
2 Select the grip and the leader line is reset to its original state.
NOTE Click the grip a second time to reset the dragged label to its undragged state.
However, you can set the label text to be always left-justified regardless of the location of the leader, as
shown in the following illustration.
You can also define the leader attachment position, which defines where the leader appears in relation to
the label content.
NOTE If you set the display of a dragged label component to As Composed, then all the Dragged State Components
properties are unavailable for editing. To control leader placement for “as composed” labels, edit the text
attachment, anchor point, and offset settings on the Layout tab.
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Dragged State (page 2196) tab.
2 Under Dragged State Components, change the Display value to either As Composed or Stacked Text.
NOTE When you use the As Composed setting, you may need to adjust the text attachment point on the
Layout tab to prevent the leader from crossing the text. For more information, see Anchor Points and
Attachment Points (page 1671).
3 If you select Stacked Text, specify the border and leader values, including the Leader Justification value:
■ True. Text is right-justified when the leader is on the left side of the text and is left-justified when
the leader is on the right.
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
Text
Use the Text Component Editor to format and define label text components.
■ To define static text, enter text directly into the Text Component Editor window.
All text components are based on the AutoCAD text style that is defined on the General tab (page 2181) of
the Label Style Composer.
■ Segment length
■ Segment direction
When you label a parcel using the label style, the labels are generated based on the parcel object’s properties.
If the parcel properties change, then the labels are updated dynamically.
There are two basic strategies you can use when adding text components to a label. If you want more precise
control over the label’s appearance, you can either add several properties to one text component or define
a separate component for each piece of text in the label.
■ The ability to turn off the visibility of one or more of the text components while leaving others visible
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout tab.
TIP Use a descriptive name that describes the content of the text component.
4 Under Text, click the Value column for Contents and then click :
5 In the Text Component Editor, on the Properties (page 2200) tab, select a property from the Properties
list. This list contains a set of properties applicable to each label style type.
When you select a property, Modifiers and their Values are displayed in the grid below it. These modifiers
control such things as the units and precision of the labels.
7 Click . This inserts a property field into the Text Component Editor window.
For example, if you are setting up a parcel area label, and you insert the Parcel Area property, the
following property field is inserted:
<[Parcel Area(Usq_m|P2|RN|AP|Sn|OF)]>
WARNING You cannot edit the label property fields after you have inserted them into the Text Component
Editor window. If you alter anything about the field itself, such as using the shortcut menu to change
capitalization, the label style will not function correctly.
For more information about property fields, see Property Fields (page 1691).
WARNING To later change any of the modifier values you specified, delete the property field from the Text
Component Editor window and then reinsert the property by clicking . Simply changing a modifier value
and clicking OK does not update the label style.
Text | 1687
For example, you might want to add “Area =” before the parcel area property field, and “square meters”
after the property field.
To do this, click in the Text Component Editor window and enter the text directly. You can also insert
a paragraph return after a property field and then insert additional properties to create a multi-line
label.
You can use the formatting options on the Text Component Editor window shortcut menu to modify
the text that you manually enter.
9 If you want to add additional properties to the text component, select them from the Properties list
and insert them, as shown in Step 7.
10 If you want to specify different justification, fonts, or colors for the label component, click the Format
(page 2201) tab in the Text Component Editor. For more information, see Formatting Text (page 1688).
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
Text Component Editor (page 2199)
Formatting Text
Use the formatting options on the Format tab in the Text Component Editor to determine how text is
displayed in a label.
Some options require you to select text in the Text Component Editor window first.
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout tab.
3 Under Text, click the Value column for Contents, and then click .
4 In the Text Component Editor dialog box, click the Format tab (page 2201).
6 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout tab.
3 Under Text, click the Value column for Contents, and then click .
4 In the Text Component Editor dialog box, click the Format tab (page 2201).
5 In the Text Component Editor window, enter the text you want to stack separated by one of the following
characters:
■ Slash (/) stacks text vertically, separated by a horizontal line.
6 In the Text Component Editor window, select the text that you want to stack, and then click on
the Format tab.
NOTE If you enter numbers separated by stack characters and then either enter a nonnumeric character or
press Spacebar or Enter, the Multiline Text - AutoStack Properties dialog box is displayed. In the Multiline
Text - AutoStack Properties dialog box, you can select to automatically stack numbers (not nonnumeric text)
and to remove leading blanks. You can also specify whether the slash character creates a diagonal fraction
or creates a vertical fraction. If you do not want to use AutoStack, click Cancel to exit the dialog box.
8 To edit stacked text properties, select the stacked text, right-click, and click Properties to display the
AutoCAD Stack Properties dialog box.
You can edit the upper and lower text separately. The Appearance options control the stack style,
position, and text size of the stacked text.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
Text Component Editor (page 2199)
Text | 1689
Adding Special Characters
Use the Symbol option to add symbols to label text.
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout tab.
3 Under Text, click the Value column for Contents, and then click .
4 In the Text Component Editor dialog box, click the Format tab (page 2201).
5 Click in the Text Component Editor window in the location where you want to add the symbol or
special character.
6 Click Symbol.
7 From the list, select a symbol, such as degree, diameter, or plus/minus, or a non-breaking space.
The symbol is added to the label text at the cursor location.
8 To select a special character, click Other to display the Character Map dialog box.
10 In the Text Editor window, place the pointer in the location where you want to add the special character.
11 Paste the copied character by either right-clicking and clicking Paste or pressing Ctrl+V.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
Text Component Editor (page 2199)
WARNING You cannot edit the label property fields. If you alter anything about the field itself, such as using the
shortcut menu to change capitalization, the label style will not function correctly.
Right-click in the Text Component Editor window to display the shortcut menu.
The lower part of the shortcut menu contains specific formatting options. If you have selected stacked text,
then options that are specific to stacked text are added to the menu.
■ Change Case
■ UPPERCASE. Changes all selected text to uppercase characters.
■ Remove Formatting. Removes any formatting, such as underline, bold, and italic.
■ Stack. Stacks selected text. Available only when text separated by stack characters is selected. For more
information, see Creating Stacked Characters (page 1689).
■ Properties. Displays the AutoCAD Stack Properties dialog box. Available only when stacked text is selected.
Property Fields
Use property fields to control the label content. You add property fields to label text components to act as
placeholders for the label or tag content.
NOTE You cannot edit the property fields in the edit pane of the Text Component Editor window. You can only
add or delete a property field or add static text.
As you view the property field in the edit pane of the Text Component Editor, the characters are defined
and separated by the following symbols:
Character Description
| Modifier separator
For example, the property field format may look like this:
<[Attribute(Unit|Precision|Rounding|Sign|Capitalization|Format|Direction|Output)]>
Property fields attributes are formatted with predefined modifiers, such as measurement units (acres, feet,
and meters), precision, and rounding.
For more information about the modifiers for feature property fields in AutoCAD Civil 3D, see Property Field
Modifiers (page 1692).
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout tab.
2 Select a component from the Component Name list, or create a new text component.
4 In the Text Component Editor dialog box, click the Properties tab (page 2200).
NOTE If you have defined user-defined property classifications, these are displayed in the Properties list for
you to select and add to certain label styles. For more information, see Using Custom Properties with Points
(page 445).
The modifier values are displayed in the grid below the property.
NOTE Because certain label style types have many possible properties, an additional filtering feature is
provided for these types so you can restrict the list. Click to display the Property Filter (page 2201) Property
Filter dialog box. A filter remains active until you turn it off.
8 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
Text Component Editor (page 2199)
U= Units S= Sign
F= Format D= Direction
P= Precision C= Capitalization
R= Rounding O= Output
A= Decimal character
■ P2: Precision = 2
Referenced Text
Use Referenced Text components in label styles to include references to other objects in a label. You can
insert references to surfaces, profiles, parcels, and alignments.
Referenced Text components are supported for most object label types. See Label Objects (page 1643) for a list
of label objects supported by Referenced Text.
NOTE Referenced Text is supported for most label object types in AutoCAD Civil 3D. Label types for points, parcel
face, parcel segment, corridor labels, and surface watershed do not support reference text.
Each Referenced Text component can refer to only one AutoCAD Civil 3D object. For example, you can
format a Referenced Text component to include an alignment name and its description, but it cannot refer
to two different alignment names. To include references to two different alignments you need to include
two Referenced Text components in the label style, one for each different alignment.
NOTE You can format a Referenced Text component to include an expression. Note that if you have referenced
an expression with a property that is not supported through the referenced text property field this results in
questions marks (???) inserted into the label.
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout tab.
3 In the Select Type (page 2187) dialog box, select the type of object data to include in the Referenced Text
component. Click OK.
You are returned to the Label Style Composer dialog box. The type of object data you selected is listed
as the Reference Text Object Type in the General section.
4 Under Text, click the Value column for Contents, and then click .
5 In the Text Component Editor dialog box, ensure the Properties tab (page 2200) is selected.
6 From the Properties list, select a property. The list of properties available reflects the object you selected
in step 2 previously.
9 Add other properties or descriptive text as needed. Click OK to return to the Label Style Composer
dialog box.
NOTE If the Visibility setting is set to True for the Referenced Text component in the label style, and you do
not select an object for the reference when you insert the label, question marks (???) are inserted into the
label. This is because the reference text component is not yet connected to an object. You can specify an
object by editing the label properties and the question marks will be replaced with the object data.
See also:
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
Text Component Editor (page 2199)
Text-For-Each
Use the Text Component Editor to format and define text-for-each components for a variety of object types.
Text-for-each components label each object associated with a parent object (the object you are labeling). For
example, you can use a text-for-each component in a structure label style to include labels for pipes associated
with that structure. These components are only used in structure label styles and structure tables.
Text-for-each components are formatted just like text components, except that you select which child objects
to label when you first create a text-for-each component. For example, you can add labels for all the pipes
that enter or exit a structure, or only for invert-in or invert-out pipes. These label components are dynamic,
so that if you remove or add a child object, the labels are updated.
The following shows an example of a structure label where the first three lines of the label contain structure
data. The last three lines of the label contain data about the pipes that connect to the structure:
MH - 54 TYPE “B”
STA. 20+11.35, 6.00’ RT
TOP ELEV. = 62.91
INV. IN = 47.08 (N)
INV. IN = 54.42 (SE)
INV. OUT = 47.08 (W)
You would set up this label style by including two text-for-each components. One component is for all pipes
in, which lists invert in values. The other component is for all pipes out, which lists the one invert out value.
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout tab.
NOTE The text-for-each component type is available only for structure label styles.
3 In the Select Type (page 2187) dialog box, select the type of data to include in the text-for-each component
and click OK.
4 Set up the other Layout settings the text-for-each component using the same settings that are available
for text components (page 1686).
For example, if you are setting up a label for invert in pipes, you could use the Text Component Editor
to add static text (INV. IN =), and also add a dynamic property field that labels the pipe elevation.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
Text Component Editor (page 2199)
Lines
Add line components to a label style using one of two methods.
■ Start Point, Length, and Angle: Use this method to anchor the start point of the line component to the
anchor component. Then, specify the length and angle. The following illustration shows a line defined
using this method:
■ Start Point and End Point: Use this method to anchor the start and end point of the line component.
The length and angle of the line are determined by the position of the anchor objects, and adjust if the
anchor components are edited. The following illustration shows a line defined using this method:
Lines | 1695
To add lines
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout (page 2183) tab.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
Blocks
Add block components, such as a custom arrowhead or symbol, to a label style.
To add blocks
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout (page 2183) tab.
4 Under Block, click the Value column for Block Name, and then click .
5 In the Select A Block dialog box, select the block to use, and then click OK.
NOTE The AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing templates contain several blocks you can use.
7 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
Ticks
You can add tick components, which are short lines inserted at a perpendicular angle to another object, to
a label style. For example, ticks can be used to mark the location of a station label on an alignment.
Ticks cannot be edited with grips or moved from the object on which they are inserted. They are always
anchored to the object.
Ticks | 1697
Tick component properties
The following illustrations show the effect of the Align With Object setting for ticks:
■ True. Inserts the tick at an angle relative to the object, as shown in the following illustration:
■ False. Inserts the tick at an angle relative to the UCS setting, as shown in the following illustration:
To add ticks
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout (page 2183) tab.
NOTE This option is not available in label style types that do not support ticks.
4 Under Tick, click the Value column for Block Name, and then click .
5 In the Select A Block dialog box, select the block to use, and then click OK.
NOTE The AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing templates contain several blocks you can use.
7 Click OK.
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
Direction Arrows
Add an arrow to a label style to indicate direction.
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout (page 2183) tab.
NOTE This option is not available in label style types that do not support direction arrows.
5 Specify the desired settings in the General and Direction Arrow categories.
NOTE The direction arrow length must be at least twice that of the specified arrow head size. If not, the
arrow head is not displayed. For example, if you specify an arrow head size of 0.2, the arrow length must be
at least 0.4. This behavior is similar to AutoCAD leaders.
Arrow head is not displayed when
arrow length is decreased
6 Click OK.
For more information, see Managing Layout Properties for Label Styles (page 1671).
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout (page 2183) tab.
2 Select the component you want to copy from the Component Name list.
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
Right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
1 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout (page 2183) tab.
3 In the Component Draw Order (page 2196) dialog box, select a label component in the list and click the
Up or Down arrows to move it up or down in the display order. The item at the top of the list is drawn
last, so it will appear on top of all other objects.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Component Draw Order (page 2196)
■ You specify the label styles to use when creating objects, and these labels are created automatically. For
more information, see the Help about creating individual features.
■ You can also insert labels using the Add Labels (page 2208) dialog box, and by using other feature-specific
commands, such as the surface contour label command.
■ You can also insert labels using the Annotate tab. This tab provides an efficient work environment for
when you are ready to label objects that you have created. This tab provides quick access to all AutoCAD
The labels that are created when you create objects can be deleted. Specifically, you can erase a whole group
of labels and restore them by resetting the label group. You can also hide a single label and restore its visibility
by resetting the label group. You can also explode labels and delete the labels that you manually insert.
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels Drop-down ➤ Add <feature-specific label>.
2 In the Add Labels (page 2208) dialog box, select the desired label type and style.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ <Feature ➤ Add <Feature> Labels
Menu
➤ Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels drop-down ➤ Add <feature-specific label>.
OR
To label lines, arcs, polylines, feature lines, parcel, and alignments with general line label styles
1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Line and Curve ➤ Add Line and
Curve Labels .
2 In the Add Labels (page 2208) dialog box, under Feature, select Line and Curve.
3 Under Label Type, select Single Segment or Multiple Segment. Multiple Segment labels all segments on
a selected polyline or feature line.
5 If the label styles use Referenced Text (page 2781), specify the Reference Text Object Prompt Method to
use.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Line and Curve ➤ Add Line and Curve Labels
Menu
1 Create a new parcel line label style or open an existing style to edit.
NOTE You can also set up parcel curve label styles to span multiple segments.
2 On the Layout tab of the Label Style Composer, select or create the label component that you want to
span multiple segments.
3 In the Properties list, under General, change the Span Outside Segments property to True.
Specify this setting for each component that you want to span multiple segments.
20.00
10.00
4 Make sure that the components are all set up to display on the outside of the parcel line.
■ On the Layout tab, adjust the Anchor Component, Attachment position, and Y Offset values as
needed.
For example, if the Anchor Component is Feature, set the Attachment to Bottom Center adjust the
Y Offset to a positive number so the label will appear above the feature.
■ On the General tab, set the Orientation Reference setting to Object and the Forced Insertion setting
to None.
The None setting forces the label component to the outside of most segments. However, on some
segments, you may need to use the Flip Label command to flip the label to the outside.
15.00
15.00
5 To insert the labels, use the Parcels ➤ Add Labels command, select Single Segment as the label type,
and select the label style that you set up to span.
The span label is inserted at the location you click, and the values contain the overall data for the
contiguous parcels.
However, the left side of the parcel group is broken up into three segments, as shown below. The span label
will not label all three. If you want to label the overall distance of that side, you would need to redraw the
left side as one parcel entity.
The following workflow describes how to set up the profile view labels, and the same concepts can be applied
to setting up the section view labels.
To create profile view labels that contain data for multiple profiles
NOTE The Profile-3.dwg file in the \AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011\Help\Civil Tutorials\drawings folder contains a
profile view you can use for experimenting.
3 With the style open in the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout tab.
4 Verify that the Station Elevation Data component is selected in the Component Name list.
5 Under Text, click the Value column for Contents, and then click to display the Text Component
Editor.
6 Expand the Properties list. Note the following properties you can specify:
■ Profile 1 Name
■ Profile 1 Elevation
■ Profile 2 Name
■ Profile 2 Elevation
Because there may be multiple profiles in a profile view, you can assign any of those profiles to be
“Profile 1” or “Profile 2.” After you add these property fields to the label style and label the profile view,
you can edit the label properties to specify which profiles you want to use.
7 In the Text Component Editor window, place your cursor at the end of the existing property fields and
press Enter to create a new row.
8 In the Properties list, select a Profile 1 or Profile 2 property to add, and then click to insert the
property field. For more information, see Adding Text Components to Labels (page 1686).
For example, you could insert the “Profile 1 Name” property, enter a colon, and then insert the “Profile
1 Elevation” property, enter a paragraph return, and then insert similar properties for Profile 2.
10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Profile View ➤ Add Profile View
Labels .
12 In the Station Elevation Label Style list, select the new style you created or the style you edited.
14 Specify the station and the elevation, and then press Enter to end the command.
The label is inserted with question marks (???) as placeholders for the profile 1 and profile 2 data.
16 In the Label Properties dialog box, click the Profile 1 Object column, and then click .
17 In the Profile 1 Object dialog box, select the profile that you want to use as Profile 1, and then click
OK.
NOTE If the label does not update immediately, enter Regen at the command line.
20 Use the label staggering options to avoid label collisions and to improve readability. For more
information, see Staggering Profile and Section Labels (page 1707).
Profile with
staggered labels to
avoid collisions
2 In the Label Set Dialog Box (page 2206) dialog box, specify the Stagger Labels settings as required.
NOTE Layer, linetype and other AutoCAD properties of the stagger lines are determined by the leader settings
in the Dragged State tab of the corresponding label style.
OR
2 In the AutoCAD Properties palette under Staggering, specify the stagger label settings as required.
NOTE Data band labels can also be grip edited like other label objects.
The staggering options are available for the following label types
The following workflow describes how to stagger profile view labels, and the same concepts can be applied
to setting up the section view labels.
2 In the Profile View Properties dialog box, click the Bands (page 2430) tab. Specify the Stagger Labels setting
as required.
OR
2 In the AutoCAD Properties palette under Staggering, specify the stagger label settings as required.
2 In the Profile Data Band Style dialog box, click the Band Details (page 2414) tab. Select the Compose Label
button.
3 Use the Label Style Composer Dialog Box (page 2180) to edit the data band label style.
4 Click OK.
1 Specify the layer for Note labels on the Layer tab (page 82) of the Drawing Settings dialog box.
2 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Notes .
3 In the Add Labels (page 2208) dialog box, under Feature, select Note.
4 Select the Note label style to use. For more information, see Creating Note Labels (page 1660).
5 Optionally, select a Marker Style to use. Using a Marker Style places a symbol at the Note label insertion
point. If you do not select a Marker Style now, you can specify one later by editing the Label Properties.
NOTE You can set up new Marker Styles from the Toolspace Settings tab. Expand the General collection ➤
Multipurpose Styles ➤ Marker Styles.
6 If the label style uses Referenced Text (page 2781), specify the Reference Text Object Prompt Method to
use.
7 Click Add.
8 Select the location in the drawing where you want to insert the note.
9 If the label uses Referenced Text, select the object(s) to reference by doing one of the following:
■ If you specified Command Line as the prompt method: Refer to the command line prompts to select
the objects.
■ If you specified Dialog as the prompt method: The Label Properties (page 2204) dialog box is displayed.
NOTE If the Visibility setting is set to True for the Referenced Text component in the label style, and you do
not select an object for the reference when you insert the label, question marks (???) are inserted into the
label. You can specify an object by editing the label properties.
NOTE See Referenced Text (page 1693) for a list of other label types that support Referenced Text.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Notes
Menu
Objects in an xref cannot be individually context selected. Xref commands, such as detach, bind, and unload,
can alter the association between a label and the object within an xref. For more information, see Xref Label
Behavior (page 1711).
If a drawing containing AutoCAD Civil 3D objects and labels is inserted as an xref into another drawing,
the labels will not be altered. It is recommended that if you insert xrefs that include labels, you should set
the labels on layers that can be frozen.
NOTE Xrefs can only be used to create parcel and alignment tables. Other xref objects are not currently supported
by tables.
2 In the Select Reference File dialog box, select the DWG to insert into the current drawing.
3 In the External Reference dialog box, set the Insertion Point values (X, Y, and Z) to 0.00.
6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Notes .
NOTE Labels for View Frames and Matchlines are NOT supported through xrefs.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Labels menu ➤ Notes
Menu
Command Result
Broken (Xref not found) This occurs when an xRef file is renamed,
deleted or path to it changed. While not
found, the labels temporarily disappear,
but still exist. When the xref is reloaded,
the labels reappear.
Xref Detach (or erase) The labels are erased and cannot be re-
stored.
AutoCAD command that alters the size or Labels are converted to a single line of text
position of the xref. Such as move, rotate, "???", at the new insertion point. When the
or stretch. xref is altered back to meet the insertion
requirements listed previously, the labels
regenerate and appear as designed. When
an xref is moved, the label displays xref
moved.
You cannot select a pick-sensitive context (right-click) menu for an object within an xref. Some labeling
commands are available in <object> feature menus so they can be used with xref objects. Commands for
editing alignment station labels (page 1045), profile labels (page 1128), sample line (page 1241), and section labels
(page 1242) are now available in their respective label menus on the Annotate tab.
1 Select a label in a drawing (the entire group is selected), right-click, and select Label Properties or
Properties.
3 Click OK.
Select the label. Click Labels tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Label Group
Object Shortcut Menu
4 Click OK.
OR
3 In the Label Style Control (page 2203) box, specify a label style, create a new style, or copy or edit an
Quick Reference
Object Shortcut Menu
2 In the Label Properties (page 2204) dialog box, change the desired properties.
3 Click OK.
Select the label. Click Labels tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Label Properties drop-down ➤ Label Properties
Quick Reference
Object Shortcut Menu
■ Line
■ Curve
■ Note
■ Segment
■ Surface Slope
■ Alignment Line
■ Alignment Curve
■ Profile Line
■ Sample Line
■ Section Segment
After you have overridden a label component, any changes you make to the text content in the label style
are not applied until you clear the label text overrides. Changes you make to the non-text content in the
label style (such as border, visibility, or color) are still applied to the overridden label.
1 Select the label in the drawing. Right-click and click Edit Label Text.
Quick Reference
Use these commands to edit label text.
Ribbon
Select the label. Click Labels tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Clear Label Text
Command Line
EditLabelText
Quick Reference
Object Shortcut Menu
NOTE
To return the label to its original position, if the leader is not modified from its original state, click the
reset grip or right-click the label and click Reset Label. For group labels, click the reset grip or right-click
the label and click Reset All Group Labels.
If the leader has been divided into multiple segments, a single click will restore the leader to its original state.
Click the reset grip twice to reset the label to its original location.
1 Click the point label to display the round and square grips.
3 Click a diamond-shaped grip and move the label component to the new location.
To move line, arc, and polyline labels away from the entity
2 Move the label to the new location. A leader is created and the label is displayed using the Dragged
State settings defined in the label style. A grip is also displayed on the label.
NOTE If no additional leader line vertices have been added, click the grip store a dragged label to its
undragged state. If there are multiple leader lines, click the grip once to restore the leader to its original
state. Click the grip twice to restore a dragged label to its undragged state.
To drag a Note label away from its insertion point and create a leader
2 Move the label to the new location. A leader is created and the label is displayed using the Dragged
State settings defined in the label style. A grip is also displayed on the label.
NOTE If no additional leader line vertices have been added, click the grip to restore a dragged label to
its undragged state. If there are multiple leader lines, click the grip once to restore the leader to its original
state. Click the grip twice to restore a dragged label to its undragged state.
Use the grip on data band labels to drag the label off of the entity.
2 Move the label to the new location. A leader is created and the label is displayed using the Dragged
State settings defined in the label style.
3 Manage the label leader as you would for other label objects. For more information, see Managing
Leader Vertices (page 1684).
4 NOTE If no additional leader line vertices have been added, click the grip to restore a dragged label to
its undragged state. If there are multiple leader lines, click the grip once to restore the leader to its original
state. Click the grip twice to restore a dragged label to its undragged state.
NOTE To reset a single sub-entity of a group label, the available command is Reset Label.
NOTE You can also click the grip to restore a dragged label to its default state. Click once to reset the
leader to its original state if vertices have been added. Click twice to reset the label to its undragged state.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the label. Click Labels tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Reset Label Group
Object Shortcut Menu
NOTE You can also click the grip to restore a dragged label to its default state. Click once to reset the
leader to its original state if vertices have been added. Click twice to reset the label to its undragged state.
Select the label. Click Labels tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Reset Label
Object Shortcut Menu
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the label. Click Labels tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Reset Label Group
Object Shortcut Menu
Exploding Labels
Use the Explode command to convert labels to AutoCAD MText, line, and block entities without affecting
the parent object.
If the label has a leader, then it is converted to an AutoCAD leader entity.
To explode labels
Modify ➤ Explode
Command Line
Explode
Flipping Labels
Flip a label in its location to reverse the placement order of the label components. You can flip labels for
lines, curves, and spirals.
For example, flipping a bearing over distance label moves the bearing and distance to the other sides of the
line or arc.
To flip labels
NOTE To return the label to its original position, right-click the label and select Reset Label.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the label. Click Labels tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Flip Label
Object Shortcut Menu
To pin labels
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the label. Click Labels tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Toggle Label Pin
Object Shortcut Menu
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the label. Click Labels tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Reverse Label
Object Shortcut Menu
■ In the Toolspace Settings tab, right-click the drawing name, and click Table Tag Numbering.
■ In the Table Tag Numbering (page 2209) dialog box, specify the default tag starting number and the
increment number. No duplicate tags are created unless you manually create them with the Renumbering
label tags tool. If there is a duplicate with the starting number, the number increments up by the specified
amount. If there is still a duplicate, it increments up, until an unused tag number is found and applied.
The starting number is then set to the next number according to the increment (even if it is a duplicate).
Quick Reference
Object Shortcut Menu
To renumber tags
1 Click <Object Name> tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Renumber Tags .
■ At the command line, enter S. In the Table Tag Numbering (page 2209) dialog box, set the starting
number and increment for the label types, either line, curve or spiral. Then press OK.
Click <Object name> tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Renumber Tags.
Menu
NOTE You can also explode labels, and then erase the exploded entities. For more information, see Exploding
Labels (page 1720).
If you delete an object, all labels that are associated with it are also deleted.
NOTE Some labels cannot be deleted, but can be hidden. For more information, see Hiding and Displaying
Labels in the Drawing (page 1665).
Quick Reference
Object Shortcut Menu
2 In the Profile View Properties dialog box, click the Bands tab.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the label style you want to delete.
2 Click Delete.
NOTE You cannot delete a label style that is referenced by an object or by another label style.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Delete
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand a drawing’s Alignment, Profiles, or Section object collection,
and then expand Label Styles.
3 In the <Feature Name> Label Set (page 2206) dialog box, click the Information tab.
7 Under <label style name> Label Style, select a specific label style from the list.
9 Repeat Steps 7–8 for each label style that you want to add to the set.
10 Specify values for the label properties, such as the Increment value for station labels. For more
information, see Labels Tab (Label Set Dialog Box) (page 2207).
11 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <Alignment, Profile, or Section object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤
right-click Label Sets ➤ New
Dialog Box
<Feature Name> Label Set (page 2206)
Expressions
Set up mathematical expressions to use in label styles.
Label styles are composed of property fields that display information about an object. Expressions allow you
to convert the object information using a formula, then insert the result into a label style component.
Expressions are stored in the Settings tree, within the label style type folders. They are not available for label
style types that do not have relevant properties, such as Note label styles.
You insert expressions into label styles using the Text Component Editor when you are editing a label style
text component.
You can use design data to determine how a label style is drawn using text, lines or block components. You
can insert expressions into label styles by selecting expressions in place of static values for text, line, and
block component modifiers. For example, in the Layout tab of the Label Style Composer dialog box, you
can insert an expression in place of a static value when determining the text height of a label. This expression
could increase the text height of a spot elevation label to coincide with the elevation height.
You can insert expressions in label styles to create custom graphics. For example, you can create a graphical
profile band, in which the graphics of the vertical grades are relative to the actual grades in order to visually
reinforce the data representation, or match graphical standards. A PVI can be represented by a symbol, where
the lines/values representing the grade in and grade out change quadrants based on the sign of the grades.
Do not insert anything else into the curly brackets, and do not remove them. If the property name does not
have any spaces (like Northing), then curly brackets are not required.
For expression grouping, use parentheses. For example:
0.567*({Segment Length} + 56)
Restrictions
Expressions are mathematical formulas that are used to compute a value. No text can be added directly to
them. Any text you want to include can be added to the label style. For example, to convert feet to meters,
you could set up the following expression:
{Segment Length} *.3084
If you want to add “meters” to the end of this string, you must add it later when you set up the label style.
To set up an expression
3 In the Expressions dialog box, enter a name and description for the expression.
NOTE It is recommended that you use a clear naming convention such as “Parcel line expression: Length in
meters” so you can distinguish them when composing a label style.
4 Click the Insert Property button and select a property from the list.
The property appears in the editor box.
NOTE Do not insert anything into the curly brackets that surround the property fields.
■ Use the calculator buttons or click in the editor field and use your keypad to enter numbers and
mathematical operators like * (multiply) or \ (divide).
■ Use the Insert Function button to insert mathematical functions like TAN.
6 Specify how the expression should be formatted by selecting a format from the Format Result As list.
7 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object type collection> ➤ <label style type collection> ➤ right-click
Expressions ➤ New
Dialog Box
Expressions (page 2211)
Expression Examples
Following are some examples of expression syntax.
Editing Expressions
After you create an expression, it is listed in the Settings tree item view.
Click the Expressions collection to display the list of defined expressions in the Toolspace item view.
Right-click an expression to access commands.
To edit an expression
1 Select the Expressions collection that contains the expression you want to edit.
4 Edit the expression using the Expressions (page 2211) dialog box.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object type collection> ➤ <label style type collection> ➤ Expressions
➤ right-click expression in item view ➤ Edit Expression
Dialog Box
Expressions (page 2211)
2 Open an existing label style in the Label Style Composer or create a new label style. The type of this
label style must match the type of the expression you created.
For example, if you created an expression for a parcel line, you can only add that expression to a parcel
line label style.
5 In the Text Component Editor, on the Properties (page 2200) tab, click the Down arrow on the Properties
list.
This list contains a set of properties and expressions applicable to each label style type.
6 Select the expression and click . This inserts the expression into the Text Component Editor window.
7 Add any descriptive label text before or after the expression as needed. For example, add descriptive
information about the expression, such as units, that will distinguish it in the label.
WARNING Expressions have the same editing restrictions as property fields. If you alter anything about the
expression, such as using the shortcut menu to change capitalization, the expression will not function correctly.
8 Click OK to close the Text Component Editor and the Label Style Composer dialog boxes.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
Text Component Editor (page 2199)
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand a label style collection. For example, expand Parcel ➤ Label
Styles ➤ Line.
3 In the Label Style Composer dialog box, click the Layout tab and click a component modifier to access
a drop-down list of compatible expressions. You can also type in a new value.
4 Click OK.
NOTE When inserting expressions as values for text, line, block or tick components, any non-number, or
"double" type property cannot be used and will not appear in the drop-down list. Height, length, or size
modifiers must be absolute numbers, so that the property is converted to an absolute value. For example, if
the entered value for text height is zero, the default height from drawing label style defaults will be used.
Text Components
Text Height
Rotation Angle
X Offset
Y Offset
Line Components
Length
Angle
Block Component
Block Height
Rotation Angle
X Offset
Y Offset
Tick Components
Block Height
Rotation Angle
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Label Styles ➤ <label style type name> ➤
right-click <label style name> ➤ Edit
Dialog Box
Label Style Composer (page 2180)
Text Component Editor (page 2199)
Functions
NOTE Functions can be either upper case or lower case but not mixed case. The editor buttons will always insert
functions in upper case. Unless otherwise stated, theta is in radians.
Operators
NOTE Logical operators return 1.0 for true and 0.0 for false. Since they return values, you can perform logical
AND and OR with addition and multiplication. For example: ((a<b) + (b>c)) tests for a < b or b > c. ((a<b)*(b>c))
tests for a<b and b>c.
= logical equals
! logical not
Or boolean "OR"
+ binary addition
- binary subtraction
* binary multiplication
/ binary division
- unary minus
+ unary plus
^ power
Command Description
AddLabels Adds labels with the Add Labels dialog box (page 1701)
AddSegmentLabel Adds line, arc, and polyline segment labels (page 1702)
Understanding Tables
Each row in a table contains information about a single object component, such as a line. Tables are supported
for points, parcels, alignments, surfaces, pipes, and structures.
■ The first column of data in a table is reserved for the tag number or identifier.
NOTE For point tables, the point number is used as the identifier. For parcel tables, the parcel ID is used as
the identifier for the area and tag numbers are used for lines and curves.
■ Set up a table style for the object. The table style specifies the type of data that is inserted into the table.
When you insert a table into a drawing, most labels are required to be displayed in tag mode (the exceptions
to this rule are parcel area tables and point tables).
If the labels are currently set to label mode, they are automatically switched to tag mode when you insert
the table. Although it is not required, you may prefer to set the label styles to tag mode before inserting a
table to avoid the creation of unwanted styles. For more information, see Setting Up Label Styles To Be Used
as Tags (page 1663).
1737
After creating tags, you can renumber them to reset their sequential order. For more information, see
Renumbering Label Tags (page 1723).
■ Perform a surface analysis. For more information, see Analysis Tab (Surface Properties Dialog Box) (page
2659).
■ Modify the surface style so that it displays the analysis type. For more information, see Display Tab
(Surface Style Dialog Box) (page 2655).
■ Set up a surface legend table style to display the surface data. For more information, see Table Styles (page
1738).
Table Styles
Edits table content and style.
Table styles define which data is displayed in the table, and control the table appearance.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click a table style type name, and click New.
2 In the Table Style dialog box, click the Information tab (page 2735).
3 Enter a name.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Table Styles ➤ Right-click <table style type name>
➤ New
Command Line
EditTableStyle
Dialog Box
Table Style (page 2735)
1 In the Table Style dialog box, click the Data Properties (page 2735) tab.
2 Under Text Settings, select text styles from the Title Style, Header Style, and Data Style lists.
3 Under Text Settings, set text heights for the Title Style, Header Style, and Data Style text styles.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the table. Click Table tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Table Properties drop-down ➤ Edit Table Style
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Table Styles ➤ <table style type name> ➤
Right-click <table style name> ➤ Edit
Object Shortcut Menu
NOTE Except for Alignment tables, you cannot define property fields as a table title.
1 In the Table Style dialog box, click the Data Properties (page 2735) tab.
2 Under Structure, double-click the table title element in the top row of the table heading. The Text
Component Editor opens.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Table Styles ➤ <table style type name> ➤
Right-click <table style name> ➤ Edit
1 In the Table Style dialog box, click the Data Properties (page 2735) tab.
2 Under Structure, double-click a column heading to open the Text Component Editor.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Table Styles ➤ <table style type name> ➤
Right-click <table style name> ➤ Edit
Object Shortcut Menu
1 In the Table Style dialog box, click the Data Properties (page 2735) tab.
4 In the Properties list, select a property, and enter the Modifier values.
6 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Table Styles ➤ <table style type name> ➤
Right-click <table style name> ➤ Edit
Object Shortcut Menu
Table Format
Manage table size and appearance.
■ You can set the column width to Manual and specify the number of characters allowed in a string. Strings
over the specified amount are truncated unless word wrapping is selected.
■ You can set the column width to Automatic, which adjusts the width to accommodate the longest string
in the column.
1 In the Table Style dialog box, click the Data Properties (page 2735) tab.
5 Click OK.
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Table Styles ➤ <table style type name> ➤
Right-click <table style name> ➤ Edit
Object Shortcut Menu
Rearranging Columns
Rearrange and move columns in the table by dragging them.
To rearrange columns
1 In the Table Style dialog box, click the Data Properties (page 2735) tab.
2 Under Structure, click the column to be moved in its title cell and drag it to the new position.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Table Styles ➤ <table style type name> ➤
Right-click <table style name> ➤ Edit
Object Shortcut Menu
To add columns
1 In the Table Style dialog box, click the Data Properties (page 2735) tab.
5 Double-click the blank Column Value cell and select a property on the Properties tab of the Text
Component Editor. For more information, see Linking Table Data (page 1740).
To delete columns
1 In the Table Style dialog box, click the Data Properties (page 2735) tab.
3 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Table Styles ➤ <table style type name> ➤
Right-click <table style name> ➤ Edit
Object Shortcut Menu
Sorting Columns
Sort columns in ascending or descending order.
To sort a column
1 In the Table Style dialog box, click the Data Properties (page 2735) tab.
3 Select the column whose rows you want to sort and specify whether the sort should be in Ascending
or Descending order.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Table Styles ➤ <table style type name> ➤
Right-click <table style name> ➤ Edit
Object Shortcut Menu
Splitting Tables
Split tables into smaller sets and customize the display of the headers.
1 In the Table Style dialog box, click the Data Properties (page 2735) tab.
3 Click OK.
NOTE When you create a table, or edit table properties, you can specify both whether the table should be
split and how many rows each section should contain. For more information, see Table Properties Dialog
Box (page 2741).
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Table Styles ➤ <table style type name> ➤
Right-click <table style name> ➤ Edit
Object Shortcut Menu
Word Wrapping
If any columns are set to a Manual width, you can enable the Wrap Text option. This option wraps text that
exceeds the character limit instead of truncating it.
1 In the Table Style dialog box, click the Data Properties (page 2735) tab.
3 Click OK.
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Table Styles ➤ <table style type name> ➤
Right-click <table style name> ➤ Edit
Object Shortcut Menu
View Orientation
Use the Maintain View Orientation option to ensure that tables appear plan-readable.
1 In the Table Style dialog box, click the Data Properties (page 2735) tab.
2 Under Table Settings, select the Maintain View Orientation check box.
3 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Table Styles ➤ <table style type name> ➤
Right-click <table style name> ➤ Edit
Object Shortcut Menu
Table Display
Specify layer, color, and linetype options for a table style.
1 In the Table Style dialog box, click the Display (page 2738) tab.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Table Styles ➤ <table style type name> ➤
Right-click <table style name> ➤ Edit
Object Shortcut Menu
■ In the Table Style dialog box, click the Summary (page 2739) tab.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Table Styles ➤ <table style type name> ➤
Right-click <table style name> ➤ Edit
Object Shortcut Menu
1 Open the drawing that contains the styles you want to copy (Drawing1, for example), and the drawing
you want to copy styles to (Drawing2, for example).
4 In the Settings tree, expand the Drawing1 collection and select the table style to copy.
5 Drag and drop the table style to Drawing2 in the Settings tree. You must drag the style over the drawing
name in the Settings tree before releasing the mouse button.
■ In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the object collection, expand the table style type collection (if
applicable), right-click the table style name, and click Delete.
For example, to delete the surface direction table style named ‘Standard’:
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: <drawing name> ➤ <object collection> ➤ Table Styles ➤ <table style type name> ➤
Right-click <table style name> ➤ Delete
■ Survey figure tables. Select survey figure labels or tags, or label styles.
When creating parcel tables, you can select any general line/curve label types and/or parcel segment labels
including any line or curve label, applied to a line, curve, feature line, or polyline.
You can create an alignment segment label that references a general line or curve style for inclusion in a
table.
General line and curve label styles have a Tag Mode which supports general line and curve labels, parcel
segment labels that reference a general line or curve style, and alignment segment labels that reference a
general line or curve style.
The Add Table commands are available from the Annotate tab.
1 Do the following:
■ Click Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ <feature> ➤ Add <feature-specific>
Table .
2 In the Table Creation dialog box, select the table style, layer, and behavior properties. For more
information, see Table Creation Dialog Box (page 2739).
■ For alignment segment tables, select By Alignment and click to select an alignment. Or, select
Multiple Selection and select the check boxes or click to select tags.
■ For point tables, click to specify a point group or click to select points from the drawing.
■ For parcel tables, click to select tags or area labels. Note that you can select line and curve labels
within the drawing, just as you would select parcel segment or alignment labels. These labels go
into tag mode when selected. If they are selected in the drawing, you are prompted to create a child
style in tag mode for the selected label.
NOTE To avoid creating child label styles, set up label styles to be used as tags. For more information, see
Setting Up Label Styles To Be Used as Tags (page 1663).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ <feature> ➤ Add <feature-specific> Table
Menu
■ Perform a surface analysis. For more information, see Analysis Tab (Surface Properties Dialog Box) (page
2659).
■ Modify the surface style so that it displays the analysis type. For more information, see Display Tab
(Surface Style Dialog Box) (page 2655).
■ Set up a surface legend table style to display the surface data. For more information, see Table Styles (page
1738).
1 Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Add Surface Legend Table
4 At the Command prompt, enter Dynamic to enable the table to be updated automatically if the surface
analysis is updated. Enter Static to require manual updating.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Annotate tab ➤ Labels & Tables panel ➤ Add Tables menu ➤ Add Surface Legend Table
Menu
Modifying Tables
You can modify the appearance of a table, or add or remove data.
2 In the Table Properties (page 2741) dialog box, you can change the Table Style, Split Table, and Behavior
options.
3 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the table. Click Table tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Table Properties drop-down ➤ Table Properties
Object Shortcut Menu
NOTE The Table Selection shortcut commands are not available for surface legend tables and alignment segment
tables.
2 In the Selection dialog box, select the data by doing the following:
■ All table types: Select label styles by selecting the Apply check box and then selecting Add Existing
or Add Existing And New from the Selection Rule list.
■ Point tables: Click and select point groups, or click and select points in the drawing.
3 Click OK.
2 In the Selection dialog box, select the data by doing the following:
■ All table types: Select label styles by selecting the Apply check box, click and select table rows.
3 Click OK.
2 In the Selection dialog box, select the data by doing the following:
■ All table types: Select label styles by selecting the Apply check box and then selecting Add Existing
or Add Existing And New from the Exclusion Rule list.
■ Point tables: Click and select point groups, or click and select points in the drawing.
3 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the table. Click Table tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Add Items
Click Table tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Remove Items
Click Table tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Replace Items
Object Shortcut Menu
NOTE You can select this option only when the Reactivity Mode is set to Static.
3 Click OK.
OR
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the table. Click Table tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Update Content
Object Shortcut Menu
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the table. Click Table tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Static Mode
Moving Tables
Use the grip in a table’s upper-left corner to move it.
■ Select the table and use its grip to drag it to a new location.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select the table. Click Table tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Realign Stacks
Object Shortcut Menu
2 In the Table Properties dialog box, clear the Split Table check box.
3 Click OK.
Exploding Tables
Use the AutoCAD EXPLODE command to explode a table into an AutoCAD unnamed block.
An exploded table retains its appearance. However, if you use EXPLODE again, then table components are
converted to AutoCAD objects as follows:
text MText
boundary polyline
To explode a table
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Modify ➤ Explode
Command Line
EXPLODE
Deleting Tables
Delete a table in a drawing.
Table Commands
The following table lists the table-related AutoCAD Civil 3D commands that can be entered at the command
line.
Command Description
■ The LandXML reports use LandXML data output for report generation, and use predefined or custom
XSL style sheets to format the report data. LandXML reports use the Report Settings (page 1757) for all
settings, such as report header information, units, precision, and so on.
TIP You can tell if a report is a LandXML-based report if the Export To XML Report dialog box is displayed
when you run the report.
■ The .NET reports use custom dialog boxes for selecting the data and options for the report. .NET reports
use a combination of Report Settings (page 1757) (for Client and Owner settings), but they use the drawing
Ambient Settings (page 84) for units, precision, and so on.
NOTE The LandXML Reporting tool is included with AutoCAD Civil 3D as an application that you can run
independently of AutoCAD Civil 3D. To use this tool, you export a LandXML file (page 1884) and then open it within
the LandXML Reporting tool. Access the LandXML Reporting tool by double-clicking Reporting.exe in the
\Autodesk\LandXML Reporting 8 folder.
■ LandXML reports use the Report Settings (page 1757) for all settings, such as report header information,
units, precision, and so on.
1757
TIP You can tell if a report is a LandXML-based report if the Export To XML Report dialog box is displayed
when you run the report.
■ .NET reports use a combination of Report Settings (page 1757) (for Client and Owner settings), but they
use the drawing Ambient Settings (page 84) for units, precision, and so on.
NOTE Not all settings are displayed in each report. If the style sheet or html formatter does not include an option
to display an item, it is not displayed in the report results.
3 In the Edit Report Settings (page 2464) dialog box, expand the tree view and edit the values in the Value
column.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Generating a Report
Generate reports by double-clicking a report in the Reports Manager.
To generate a report
“LandXML export complete,” “Generating XSLT Report...”, and “Generating XSLT Report Complete...”
are displayed at the command line. The report is then displayed in the default Internet browser
window.
NOTE It is recommended that Microsoft® Internet Explorer is specified as your default web browser when
you are generating reports. If a different browser is specified as your default browser, and you notice
issues with the output, please change your default browser to Internet Explorer.
NOTE Some LandXML reports display a Save As dialog box which you can use to specify a file location
and file type. LandXML reports can be saved in HTML or Adobe® PDF formats. However, some LandXML
reports are not saved automatically. For more information, see Saving LandXML Report Files (page 1759).
■ .NET Reports: Select the data to include and specify the location to save the report. For more
information on the specific dialog boxes, see Reports Dialog Boxes (page 2463). Click Create Report.
NOTE .NET reports can be saved in several formats, including HTML, Adobe® PDF, Microsoft® Word
Document, Microsoft® Excel Workbook, and Text Document. If Microsoft® Office is not installed, then
the options for Word Document, Excel Workbook, and Text Document are not available.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE .NET reports are saved automatically to the specified location in the report dialog box.
2 Change the folder to an appropriate location, or use the default, which is the last folder used.
3 Enter the file name and specify the file type for the report.
4 Click Save.
3 To edit the Reports Manager items, in the Toolbox Editor vista (page 2463), expand the Reports Manager
item.
■ To add a new report, right-click a collection (category) and click New Tool.
A new tool is inserted into the category with a default name. Expand the collection and click the
New Tool item to select it. Specify the properties for the new tool by editing the values in the right
pane.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Command Description
1761
Rendered image of a surface object simulated with grass and the underlying concrete
drainage pipes and catch basins
For more information about render materials, including how to create custom render materials, modify render materials,
add render materials to the drawing, and apply render materials to objects, see Materials and textures in the AutoCAD User’s
Guide.
For instructions about how to create a render material, see Create Materials in the AutoCAD User’s Guide.
Quick Reference
Menu
2 In the Tool Palettes window, right-click the Tool Palettes Window button, and choose Civil Materials
from the list.
NOTE In addition to civil-specific render materials, you can access and use all the render materials contained
in the AutoCAD Materials Library palette. Choose one of the Materials Library palettes from the Tools Palettes
Window shortcut menu.
The selected render material is added to the drawing. For more information, see “Materials Dashboard
and Tools Palettes” in AutoCAD Help.
Quick Reference
Menu
General ➤ Tool Palettes Window ➤ click the Properties button ➤ choose Materials Library ➤ right-click
a render material swatch ➤ Add to Current Drawing
Command Line
ToolPalettes
TIP Use corridor boundaries to apply different render materials to one corridor surface. For more information, see
Rendering Corridor Models (page 1533).
2 In the Tool Palettes window, click the Properties button, and choose Civil Materials from the list.
NOTE In addition to civil-specific render materials, you can access and use all the render materials contained
in the AutoCAD Materials Library palette. Choose Materials Library from the Propertied menu.
■ Drag and drop a render material swatch onto the object in the drawing.
The selected render material is added to the drawing. For more information, see Materials Tool Palettes
in the AutoCAD Help.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
General menu ➤ Tool Palettes Window ➤ click the Properties button ➤ choose Materials Library ➤
right-click a render material swatch ➤ Apply Material to Objects
Command Line
ToolPalettes
Rendering Objects
You can use the Render command to render objects.
To render objects
2 In the Materials window, apply a render material to the object you want to render. For more information,
see Applying Render Materials to Objects (page 1763).
4 If you are rendering a corridor, create one or more corridor surfaces and corridor surface boundaries,
and optionally export the corridor surface. For more information, see Exporting Corridor Surfaces (page
1532).
Quick Reference
Menu
NOTE For more information about AutoCAD transparent commands see AutoCAD Help.
Some of the AutoCAD Civil 3D transparent commands require a Z coordinate for the point elevation. For more information,
see Transparent Command Settings (page 1767).
NOTE Angle, Direction, and Lat Long ambient settings are set to a single unit type (degree, grad or radian) and
format (digital or various degree/minute/second formats for degrees). You will have to change these settings, if
you wish to use a different unit/format for angles, bearings or latitudes/longitudes.
You can use the Transparent Command settings to control the following prompts for transparent commands:
The Transparent Command settings are drawing ambient settings that can be overridden at either the object
(feature) level or at the individual command level. For more information, see Ambient settings (page 84).
1767
Activating a Transparent Command
You can activate transparent commands by entering a command or by using a toolbar.
■ Enter the name of the transparent command at the command line. A transparent command always
begins with an apostrophe (‘).
■ Select the command from the toolbar. To display the toolbar for accessing transparent commands,
right-click any toolbar and select Transparent Commands.
Using Previously Entered Points in a Running Command for Relative Data Input
When you use a transparent command that requires baseline data from which to calculate a relative location,
you must enter the required data before specifying the command parameters. If you use a transparent
command within a running command, the transparent command remembers the last points entered during
the running command and uses them to calculate new relative locations.
For example, when you use the Bearing Distance (‘BD) transparent command, you must first identify a
baseline point from which the bearing and distance are measured. If you initiate the Bearing Distance
command before you enter any points, you are prompted for the baseline point before you are prompted
for quadrant, bearing, and distance. If you use the Bearing Distance command after you have entered at
least one point, the last point you entered is used as the baseline.
For more information, see Using Point Filters Within Transparent Commands (page 1787).
Zooming to a Point
Zoom to a point name, point number, or a range of point numbers.
Run this command at the command line or as a transparent command from within another command.
■ On the ribbon, click COGO Points contextual tab ➤ COGO Point Tools ➤ Zoom To Point . At the
command line, enter the point name or number.
■ At the command line, enter ZTP and then enter point numbers separated by commas.
■ At the command line, enter ZTP and then enter the range of points separated by a hyphen.
If a point is not in the current drawing a message is displayed at the command line. If a point is missing
from a series of points, then it is ignored and the location of all the other points will be used.
To zoom to a point from within another command
■ At the command line, enter ‘ZTP and then enter a point name, point number, or a range of point numbers.
After you run the command as a transparent command, the command line returns to the main command
after a single zoom.
NOTE At the command line you can enter a comma delimited list that contains both point numbers and point
names.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 When you are prompted to enter a point within a command, do one of the following:
■ Enter 'ad.
2 If you have not yet entered any points in the main command, you must specify a temporary reference
line by doing one of the following:
■ Select a line.
■ Enter p, then specify a start point and endpoint for the line.
3 If you have entered one point in the main command, that point is used as the starting point for the
temporary reference line. Specify the ending point for the temporary reference line.
■ Enter c to switch the angle between counterclockwise and clockwise, and then specify the angle.
6 If you are prompted, enter an elevation. For more information, see Entering an Elevation for a Transparent
Command (page 1786).
NOTE Elevation prompting for transparent commands is controlled by the Transparent Command setting
Prompt For 3D Points. For more information, see Transparent Command Settings (page 1767).
Quick Reference
Command Line
‘AD
Toolbar
1 When you are prompted to enter a point within a command, do one of the following:
■ Enter 'bd.
2 If you have not yet entered any points in the main command, specify a temporary point from which
the bearing and distance will be measured.
3 Specify a quadrant number by either clicking in the drawing or entering a value between 1 and 4.
4 Specify the bearing within the quadrant by clicking in the drawing or entering a bearing using the
angular units for the drawing.
6 If you are prompted, enter an elevation. For more information, see Entering an Elevation for a Transparent
Command (page 1786).
NOTE Elevation prompting for transparent commands is controlled by the Transparent Command setting
Prompt For 3D Points. For more information, see Transparent Command Settings (page 1767).
Quick Reference
Command Line
‘BD
Toolbar
A transparent command can only be used within a running command. The reference line is updated each
time you enter a point.
1 When you are prompted to enter a point within a command, do one of the following:
■ Enter 'dd.
2 If you have not yet entered any points in the main command, you must specify a temporary reference
line by doing one of the following:
■ Select a line.
■ Enter p, then specify a start point and endpoint for the line.
3 If you have entered one point in the main command, that point is used as the starting point for the
temporary reference line. Specify the ending point for the temporary reference line.
■ Enter c to switch the angle between counterclockwise and clockwise, and then specify the angle.
6 If you are prompted, enter an elevation. For more information, see Entering an Elevation for a Transparent
Command (page 1786).
NOTE Elevation prompting for transparent commands is controlled by the Transparent Command setting
Prompt For 3D Points. For more information, see Transparent Command Settings (page 1767).
Quick Reference
Command Line
‘DD
A transparent command can only be used within a running command. The reference point is updated each
time you enter a point.
1 When you are prompted to enter a point within a command, do one of the following:
■ Enter 'zd.
2 If you have not yet entered any points in the main command, specify a temporary point from which
the azimuth and distance will be measured.
5 If you are prompted, enter an elevation. For more information, see Entering an Elevation for a Transparent
Command (page 1786).
NOTE Elevation prompting for transparent commands is controlled by the Transparent Command setting
Prompt For 3D Points. For more information, see Transparent Command Settings (page 1767).
Quick Reference
Command Line
‘ZD
Toolbar
To define a line, you can either select an existing line in the drawing or enter two points. If you have already
entered one point in the command, you are prompted to enter a second point to define the reference line.
A transparent command can only be used within a running command. In this command, the reference line
is not updated; it remains the same for all points entered.
1 When you are prompted to enter a point in a command, do one of the following:
■ Enter 'ss.
2 If you have not yet entered any points in the main command, you must specify a temporary reference
line by doing one of the following:
■ Select a line.
■ Enter p, then specify a start point and endpoint for the line.
3 If you have entered one point in the main command, that point is used as the starting point for the
temporary reference line. Specify the ending point for the temporary reference line.
■ Enter c to switch the direction of the angle between clockwise and counterclockwise.
NOTE Elevation prompting for transparent commands is controlled by the Transparent Command setting
Prompt For 3D Points. For more information, see Transparent Command Settings (page 1767).
Additional side shot locations are calculated using the reference line established at the start of the
transparent command.
Quick Reference
Command Line
‘SS
Toolbar
1 When you are prompted to enter a point in a command, do one of the following:
■ Enter 'ne.
NOTE The order in which you are prompted for northing and easting is controlled by the Transparent
Command setting Prompt For Easting Then Northing. For more information, see Transparent Command
Settings (page 1767).
4 If you are prompted, enter an elevation. For more information, see Entering an Elevation for a Transparent
Command (page 1786).
NOTE Elevation prompting for transparent commands is controlled by the Transparent Command setting
Prompt For 3D Points. For more information, see Transparent Command Settings (page 1767).
1 When you are prompted to enter a point in a command, do one of the following:
■ Enter 'gn.
4 If you are prompted, enter an elevation. For more information, see Entering an Elevation for a Transparent
Command (page 1786).
NOTE Elevation prompting for transparent commands is controlled by the Transparent Command setting
Prompt For 3D Points. For more information, see Transparent Command Settings (page 1767).
Quick Reference
Command Line
‘GN
Toolbar
NOTE The order in which you are prompted for latitude and longitude is controlled by the Transparent
Command setting Prompt For Longitude Then Latitude. For more information, see Transparent Command
Settings (page 1767).
4 If you are prompted, enter an elevation. For more information, see Entering an Elevation for a Transparent
Command (page 1786).
NOTE Elevation prompting for transparent commands is controlled by the Transparent Command setting
Prompt For 3D Points. For more information, see Transparent Command Settings (page 1767).
Quick Reference
Command Line
‘LL
Toolbar
1 When you are prompted to enter a point in a command, do one of the following:
■ Enter 'pn.
NOTE Elevation prompting for transparent commands is controlled by the Transparent Command setting
Prompt For 3D Points. For more information, see Transparent Command Settings (page 1767).
Quick Reference
Command Line
‘PN
Toolbar
1 When you are prompted to enter a point in a command, do one of the following:
■ Enter 'po.
NOTE Elevation prompting for transparent commands is controlled by the Transparent Command setting
Prompt For 3D Points. For more information, see Transparent Command Settings (page 1767).
Quick Reference
Command Line
‘PO
Toolbar
NOTE Use the Prompt For Point Names setting to control whether points are created with point names. For more
information, see Editing the Default Point Creation Settings (page 444).
1 When you are prompted to enter a point in a command, do one of the following:
■ Enter 'pa.
NOTE Elevation prompting for transparent commands is controlled by the Transparent Command setting
Prompt For 3D Points. For more information, see Transparent Command Settings (page 1767).
Quick Reference
Command Line
‘PA
Toolbar
1 When you are prompted to enter a point in a command, do one of the following:
■ Enter 'so.
5 If you are prompted, enter an elevation. For more information, see Entering an Elevation for a Transparent
Command (page 1786).
NOTE Elevation prompting for transparent commands is controlled by the Transparent Command setting
Prompt For 3D Points. For more information, see Transparent Command Settings (page 1767).
Quick Reference
Command Line
‘SO
Toolbar
To specify a point location using a station along the parent alignment of a profile view
1 When you are prompted to enter a point in a command, do one of the following:
■ Enter 'stae.
2 If the main command is not a profile layout or profile view label command, select a profile view.
4 Specify a station on the alignment by either entering the station value or clicking a point on or near
the alignment in plan view.
A selection marker displays the current location on the alignment.
6 Specify an elevation in the profile view by either entering an elevation value or clicking a point in the
profile view.
In the profile view, a selection marker displays the current elevation. The station location is held at the
station you selected.
Quick Reference
Command Line
‘STAE
Toolbar
1 When you are prompted to enter a point in a command, do one of the following:
■ Enter 'sse.
3 Select the surface from which you want to derive elevation data.
Quick Reference
Command Line
‘SSE
Toolbar
To specify a point location in a profile view using an alignment and a COGO point
1 When you are prompted to enter a point in a command, do one of the following:
■ Enter 'spe.
Quick Reference
Command Line
‘SPE
Toolbar
1 When you are prompted to enter a point in a command, do one of the following:
■ Enter 'pse.
3 Specify a station in the profile view by either entering the station value or clicking a point in the profile
view.
4 Specify an elevation in the profile view by either entering an elevation value or clicking a point in the
profile view.
Quick Reference
Command Line
‘PSE
Toolbar
1 When you are prompted to enter a point in a command, do one of the following:
■ At the command line, enter ‘PGE and then enter the point name or number.
■ Activate the transparent command toolbar and select Profile Grade Elevation.
3 Specify a grade in the profile view by either entering a numeric value or clicking two points in the
profile view.
4 Specify an elevation in the profile view by either entering a numeric value or clicking a point in the
profile view.
Using Elevation and Grade to Specify a Point Location in a Profile View | 1783
Quick Reference
Command Line
‘PGE
Toolbar
1 When you are prompted to enter a point in a command, do one of the following:
■ Enter 'pgl (the last letter is an L).
3 Specify a grade by either entering a numeric value or clicking two points in the profile view.
4 Specify a length, which is the horizontal distance from the last point picked in the running command,
by either entering a value or clicking two points.
Quick Reference
Command Line
‘PGL
Toolbar
1 When you are prompted to enter a point in a command, do one of the following:
■ Enter 'pgs.
3 Specify a grade by either entering a numeric value or clicking two points in the profile view.
4 Specify a station in the profile view by either entering a numeric value or clicking a point in the profile
view.
Quick Reference
Command Line
‘PGS
Toolbar
1 When you are prompted to enter a length or a distance in a command, do one of the following:
■ Enter 'ml (the last letter is an L).
Quick Reference
Command Line
‘ML
Toolbar
1 When you are prompted to enter a point in a command, do one of the following:
■ Enter 'mr.
Quick Reference
Command Line
‘MR
Toolbar
■ Specify a grade
■ Specify a slope
The default elevation, displayed at the prompt, is determined by the transparent command in use. If the
current transparent command is ‘PN (point number), ‘PO (point object), or ‘PA (point name), the default
elevation is taken from the specified point. In all other cases, the default elevation is the AutoCAD default
elevation.
A transparent command can only be used within a running command.
NOTE Elevation prompting for transparent commands is controlled by the Transparent Command setting Prompt
For 3D Points. For more information, see Transparent Command Settings (page 1767).
■ Enter s. The elevation is calculated using the entered slope and a previously entered point.
■ Enter y. The elevation is taken from the X, Y location on the current surface.
■ Enter t. If there is more than one surface in the drawing, you are prompted to select the surface from
which the elevation is read.
NOTE During a running command, the default prompts for elevation change, depending on how the previous
elevation was entered. Enter e to reset the prompts back to the defaults described above.
■ Enter the point filter on the command line. You must always begin a transparent command point filter
with a period (.).
■ Select the point filter from the transparent command filter toolbar. If the toolbar is not displayed, right
click any toolbar and select Transparent Command Filters.
The following table lists the point filters available within the Civil transparent commands.
To specify a location using this Enter this point Or click this icon on the
information... filter... Transparent Command
Filter Toolbar...
point number .p
a point in a drawing .g
A point filter is active only while you enter a single point location. Control then returns to the main
transparent command.
Point filters are available for use only when you are prompted for a point location during the following
transparent commands:
When you are working with the .p (point number) point filter, the system searches for the point first within
the active drawing, then within the project, if the drawing is attached to a project.
1 When you are prompted for a coordinate location from within a transparent command, do one of the
following:
■ To specify a point using a point number, enter .p and enter the point number.
■ To specify the coordinates from a point object in a drawing, enter .g and select the point.
■ To enter a known northing and easting, enter .n and enter the northing and easting values.
Quick Reference
Command Line
.p
.g
.n
Toolbar
To specify a point location using this in- Use this transpar- Toolbar
formation... ent command... Icon
The following table lists the point filters available within the Civil transparent commands.
The following table lists the transparent commands that are not used to specify point locations:
NOTE The COGO inquiry commands use the World Coordinate System (WCS) and ignore current User Coordinate
System (UCS) settings. Therefore, north is always considered to point along the WCS positive Y axis, and inquiry
results are reported in WCS coordinates.
Adding Distances
You can calculate the total of several disjunct distances on your drawing.
Specify the distance by selecting points in your drawing, enter distances on the command line, or select
numeric text, such as measurements, in your drawing.
1791
Select all the distances you want to add. When you press Enter, AutoCAD Civil 3D displays the total of all
the distances.
To add distances
4 When you finish selecting distances, press Enter to view the total of the distances.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
TIP To add distances that are not continuous, see Adding Distances (page 1791).
4 Select another point. If you selected Base, AutoCAD Civil 3D displays the distance from first (or base)
point to the new point. If you selected Continuous, AutoCAD Civil 3D displays the distance from the
last point to the new point.
5 When you finish selecting points, press Enter to view the total of the distances.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Quick Reference
Ribbon
2 Select the line or arc, or enter p to specify the points for a line.
3 If you entered p, specify a starting point and an ending point for the line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
3 If you entered p, specify a starting point and an ending point for the line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Mapcheck Analysis
Perform a Mapcheck Analysis by selecting AutoCAD Civil 3D line and curve labels to determine values from
label objects based on the precision of the annotation of the label object, or enter mapcheck data manually.
A mapcheck analysis is typically performed for each labeled polygon that represents a parcel, a labeled parcel
object, or survey figure to ensure that errors and omissions are minimized. If error is introduced and
accumulated, the coordinates of the last segment endpoint will not equal that of the point of beginning
(POB) which creates the 'error of closure'.
The report is computed based on the start and end coordinates of each parcel segment, relative to the
coordinates of the POB and the previous segment.
NOTE The mapcheck report data is stored in the drawing database so you can continue a mapcheck from a
previous AutoCAD Civil 3D session. The Mapcheck Analysis window must be open to enable the display of the
temporary graphics.
From the POB, the annotation for each side in the parcel is used to calculate the coordinates of the endpoint
of the side. As you enter data for each parcel, the Output View in the Mapcheck Analysis window updates
to indicate error of closure and area based on the previously entered sides. Entering the information for the
last side closes to the POB. The Mapcheck Analysis output view contains the following information:
■ POB coordinates
■ A sequential list of each course, direction and distance, or curve data, and end point coordinates
4 Click to Use Command Line Interface and follow the prompts at the command line.
5 Specify a Point of Beginning. The interactive graphics display the POB in the drawing.
NOTE Colors displayed in the temporary graphics are controlled by the Mapcheck command settings. For
more information, see Mapcheck Command Default Settings (page 1803).
6 At the command line you are prompted to select a label. After selecting a label, the interactive graphics
display in the drawing. If you need to make a change, at the command line you have options to do the
following:
■ Clear: Clears the current side.
NOTE If the mapcheck requires more information to make the calculation, a red circle displays in the drawing
and you are prompted at the command line.
The following illustration shows how the Reverse command can be used to change the direction of the
mapcheck line:
9 Click Output View to review the mapcheck analysis report. Click to return to the input window.
10 Optionally, in either the Input View or the Output View, click Insert Mtext to insert either the
current mapcheck or all mapchecks into the drawing. Specify an insertion point in the drawing and
insert the Mapcheck Report.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE To manually enter mapcheck data, ensure that the Use Command Line Interface is toggled off.
4 Enter the Easting and Northing values for the Point of Beginning or click and select a point in the
drawing.
5 Click to create a New Side. Specify the values for the side.
For a line side, enter the following:
■ Side Type: Select Line from the drop-down list.
■ Angle Type: Select Direction, Angle, or Deflection Angle from the drop-down list.
■ Traverse Method: Select Across Chord or Through Radius from the drop-down list.
NOTE This option is used to specify how the error of closure is calculated and displayed in the Output
View. If you select Across Chord, the endpoint of the curve is calculated from the Chord direction and
distance. If you select Through Radius, the endpoint of the curve is calculated based on the direction to
the radius point, the radius length, the delta angle, and the direction from the radius point to the point
of tangency. If this option is selected, additional information is displayed in the Output View.
■ Angle Type: Select Direction, Angle, or Deflection Angle from the drop-down list.
6 Click Insert Side Before, or Insert Side After, if you have omitted a side before or after the current
selected side in the mapcheck. Specify values as shown in the previous step.
7 Click New Mapcheck to add a new mapcheck to the mapcheck report. Repeat steps 3 through 6.
NOTE You can switch between input and output views at any time.
9 Optionally, click Create Polyline to create a polyline for the current mapcheck. The polylines can
be converted to AutoCAD Civil 3D objects.
NOTE If there is no current mapcheck then a polyline for all mapchecks are inserted into the drawing. Press
ESC to clear a selection in tree view.
10 Optionally, click Copy To Clipboard to copy the contents of the input view or output view to the
Windows Clipboard of the current mapcheck.
NOTE If there is no current mapcheck then all mapchecks are copied to the clipboard. Press ESC to clear a
selection in tree view.
11 Optionally, in either the Input View or the Output View, click Insert Mtext. Specify an insertion
point in the drawing and insert the mapcheck analysis report.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
To adjust a Mapcheck
2 In the Mapcheck Analysis dialog box, specify the Horizontal Adjustment Method, Horizontal Closure
Limit, and Angle Error Per Set. For more information, see Adjust Mapcheck Analysis Dialog Box (page
2748).
3 Specify Yes to update the mapcheck. The icon is displayed next to the mapcheck name indicating
the mapcheck has been adjusted. To clear the adjustment, right-click the Mapcheck ➤ Clear Adjustment.
2 In either the Input View or the Output View of the Mapcheck Analysis window, click Insert Mtext.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
2 In the Edit Command Settings-MapCheck dialog box, expand the Mapcheck group and specify values
for the mapcheck properties.
Quick Reference
Toolspace
3 Press Enter.
The Notes dialog box is displayed.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Not available on the ribbon
Menu
2 In the drawing, select an object on which you want to attach an external reference document.
3 Press Enter.
The Notes dialog box is displayed.
■ To edit a reference file: Select the file name in the list, click Edit, and change the document or the
description in the Reference Document dialog box. To edit the file itself, double-click the reference
file name to start its application.
■ To detach a reference file: Select the file name in the list and click Delete.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Not available on the ribbon
Menu
by clicking .
The Object Viewer contains the ViewCube and the SteeringWheel. For more information, see Use ViewCube
and Navigation Wheels in the AutoCAD Help.
3 Press Enter.
The Object Viewer is displayed.
4 From the View Control list at the upper right of the Object Viewer, select any of the following.
■ Top, Bottom, Left, Right, Front, or Back: Sets the current view to the selected view.
■ SW Isometric, SE Isometric, NE Isometric, or NW Isometric: Sets the current view to the selected
isometric view.
■ 3D Wireframe To display objects in the current view in a 3D wireframe representation with all lines
displayed, including those objects hidden by other objects.
■ Conceptual To display objects in a transparently shaded 3D view with all lines visible.
6 Choose from the following zoom options from the Object Viewer to increase or decrease the apparent
size of objects in the current viewport:
7 Click to set the view in the drawing to match the current view in the Object Viewer.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
it is selected automatically. After the inquiry is complete, you can use the object select buttons. Click
To perform an inquiry
Or select an object first, and then click General Tools panel ➤ Inquiry on the contextual ribbon tab.
When you select the Inquiry command from the contextual ribbon, the most recently-run inquiry type
for the selected object is selected automatically.
2 In the Inquiry Tool window, under Select An Inquiry Type, click the Down arrow and select the inquiry
to run.
After you select an inquiry type, you are prompted to select the objects that are required for the inquiry.
NOTE To run Corridor queries, a corridor section view must be active. Select a corridor. Click Corridor tab
➤ Modify panel ➤ Corridor Section Editor . Then select the station to query. Use the Zoom command
to zoom closer to the view.
3 Select the objects and locations for the inquiry. You can use Osnaps and transparent commands to
select the objects.
The data is displayed in the Inquiry Tool window.
4 To change selected objects or locations, click or in the Inquiry Tool window next to a value
and select the new object or location in the drawing.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Right-click object ➤ Inquiry. The most recently used inquiry type for the selected object runs automatically.
➤ Right-click in the Inquiry Tool results area and click Copy To Clipboard. Or click .
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Inquiry Types
You can run inquiries on points, surfaces, alignments, profiles, profile views, sections, section views, and
corridor sections.
Alignment Two Stations and ■ Two alignments ■ Stations and offsets (in relation
Offsets at Point to both alignments)
■ Offset point
Section View Elevation and ■ Section view ■ Station of selected section view
Grade Between Points
■ Two points on section ■ Elevation difference between
view points
■ Distance between points
■ Grade (percentage)
■ Slope
■ Grade (degree)
TIP To select a section, zoom into a section view and click the section object inside the view. If you
sampled multiple surfaces and you have trouble selecting the correct section surface, edit the section
view properties (Sections Tab (Section View Properties Dialog Box) (page 2544)) and turn off the display
of the sections you do not want to select.
This command calculates the 2D distance between entities. Elevations are not considered in the calculations.
■ Line
■ Arc
■ Circle
■ Survey figure
■ Alignment
■ Parcel segment
2 Select the first entity in the drawing, and then select the second entity.
The minimum distance is displayed at the command line, along with the X,Y locations on the two
entities where this minimum distance was calculated.
The following prompt is displayed: Draw shortest distance line? [Yes/No] <Yes>:
3 Enter Yes to draw a line to mark this location, using the current layer and linetype. The line is persistent
and remains in the drawing after you save it.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Line
■ Arc
■ Circle
■ Survey figure
■ Profile
1 Click Analyze tab ➤ Inquiry panel Minimum Vertical Distance Between Entities .
2 Select the first entity in the drawing, and then select the second entity.
NOTE If you select an alignment, press Enter to specify the appropriate profile.
■ X,Y locations on the two entities where the distance was calculated
3 Enter Yes to draw a marker at the location at which the entities cross in plan, using the current layer
and linetype. The marker is persistent and remains in the drawing after you save it.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
2 In the Coordinate Tracker (page 2760), in the Surface list, select the surface from which Z values (elevations)
are read.
If the drawing contains only one surface, it is automatically selected.
4 To suspend cursor tracking and capture the current X, Y, and Z coordinate values, do the following:
■ Enter the keys listed in the Coordinate Capture Keys edit box by pressing, and not releasing, each
key in the specified order until you are holding all the specified keys down.
Coordinate tracking is suspended and the current X, Y, and Z coordinates are captured.
5 Optionally, send the X, Y, and Z coordinates to the command line for use in the current command.
You can edit the values before you send them. For more information, see Sending Coordinate Tracker
Values to the Current Command (page 1815).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ X, Y, and Z values
Send the value required by the current command. If the current command requires a 3D (X, Y, and Z) value,
an error occurs if you send a 2D (X and Y only) value.
Send a value by first moving the cursor to the desired location and entering the coordinate capture keys.
This suspends tracking and captures the X, Y, and Z values. You can edit one or more of the values before
you send them.
You send the values to the command line using the buttons directly beneath the X, Y, and Z values. The
buttons are shown in the following illustration:
TIP Move the cursor over each button to view a tooltip that tells you what value the button sends to the command
line.
1 Display the Coordinate Tracker. Select a surface if required. For more information, see Viewing Cursor
Coordinates Using the Coordinate Tracker (page 1814).
2 Run any command until you are prompted at the command line for a 2D point, a 3D point, or an
elevation.
3 Move the cursor until the Coordinate Tracker displays the desired coordinate and elevation values.
4 To suspend cursor tracking and capture the current X, Y, and Z coordinate values, do the following:
■ Enter the keys listed in the Coordinate Capture Keys edit box by pressing, and not releasing, each
key in the specified order until you are holding all the specified keys down.
Coordinate tracking is suspended and the current X, Y, and Z coordinates are captured.
5 Optionally, edit the coordinate information before sending it. In the Coordinate Tracker (page 2760),
click in either the X:, Y:, or Z: edit box and enter a new value.
TIP Move the cursor over each button to view a tooltip that tells you what value the button sends to the
command line.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
■ Ctrl+Shift+Z
■ Ctrl+Alt+Z
■ Ctrl+Shift+Alt+Z
You change the coordinate capture keys by clicking and entering the new key sequence.
4 While holding down Ctrl, press and hold down Alt and/or Shift.
5 While holding down the other keys, press and hold down a single character key.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
2 To change the location of a column in the event list, in the Event Viewer Vista (page 2753), click and drag
the heading right or left.
■ In the Choose Columns (page 2757) dialog box, specify columns to be added or removed.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
2 In the Event Viewer (page 2753), do one of the following in the event tree:
■ Click the Event Viewer collection to display all the events in the event list.
■ Expand the Event Viewer collection and click a collection to display the events in that collection.
3 Click View menu ➤ Filter. Use the Filter Events (page 2755) dialog box to filter the event list to meet
only specified criteria.
4 To display the event list by date, on the View menu, click one of the following:
■ Newest First: Displays the event list with the most recent event at the top.
■ Oldest First: Displays the event list with the least recent event at the top.
6 Click Action menu ➤ Clear All Events to permanently remove all events from the event list.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
View ➤ Filter
Action ➤ Clear All Events
Dialog Box
Filter Events (page 2755)
2 In the Event Viewer (page 2753), on the Action menu, click Save Log File As.
3 In the Save As dialog box, browse to the folder where you want the log file to be located, enter a file
name, and click Save.
The current event list is saved to the log file.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
2 In the Event Viewer (page 2753), on the Action menu, click Open Log File.
3 In the Open dialog box, browse to the folder that contains the log file, select a file name, and click
Open.
The displayed event list is replaced by the contents of the selected log file.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
2 In the Event Viewer (page 2753), on the Action menu, click Export List.
■ Specify a file type, which determines the format the text file is saved in.
■ Click Save.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
3 In the Find Event (page 2756) dialog box, specify the criteria that match the event you are searching for.
5 To search for the next event that matches the specified criteria, click Find Next again.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
View ➤ Find
Dialog Box
Find Event (page 2756)
2 In the Event Viewer (page 2753), select the event from the event list that you want to copy to the clipboard.
4 In the Event Properties (page 2754) dialog box, click Copy To Clipboard.
The information about the event is copied to the Windows clipboard, and can be pasted into another
application.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Action ➤ Properties
OR
Dialog Box
Event Properties (page 2754)
Multi-View Blocks
A multi-view block is an AutoCAD Civil 3D object that can have different representations in different view
directions. You create a multi-view block from AutoCAD blocks that represent the different views of the
custom object that you are creating.
■ Vehicles
■ Signage
Multi-view blocks can be displayed differently in each view direction and each display representation. For
example, the top view of a multi-view block representing a traffic sign shows the top of the sign. The bottom
view shows the bottom of the sign, and there are representations for left, right, front, and back views.
Additionally, you can define a different group of displays for each display representation. You can have one
set of views for plan view and another one for reflected view.
The top and profile view blocks representing a pine tree might look like:
1 Create a set of view blocks for each view direction in each display representation that you need.
2 Create a multi-view block definition where you assign the view blocks to view directions in individual
display representations.
3 If you want the new multi-view block definition to be available in DesignCenter, add the definition to
DesignCenter.
4 If you want the new multi-view block definition to be available from a tool palette, add it to a palette.
To create the AutoCAD blocks used to represent each view of the multi-view block
■ To create views for the left and right directions, draw them on the YZ plane.
■ To create views for the top and bottom directions, draw them on the XY plane.
2 Specify additional insertion points on the defpoints layer in the AutoCAD point command, if necessary.
NOTE The points added to view blocks are cumulative. For example, if you add one point to a view block
used for the top view and two points to the view block used for the model view, you have a total of four
points to cycle through. The fourth point is the regular basepoint defined during the creation of the block.
3 Make sure the current coordinate system is the world coordinate system before making blocks from
these individual views.
For more information about coordinate systems, see “Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems” in the
online AutoCAD User's Guide.
4 Define each view as a block, and specify the location of the insertion base point as you define each
block.
For example, if you specify the insertion base point of the model view block as the dead center of the
top side, the front, back, left, and right view blocks will all have an insertion base point at the midpoint
of the bottom edge. In the following illustration, the insertion points for the top, front, and side view
blocks are indicated by an “X”. For more information about blocks, see “Create and Use Blocks” in the
online AutoCAD User's Guide.
NOTE If there is already a multi-view block in the drawing, press Enter when the prompt Select Multi-View
Blocks is displayed.
2 In the New Multi-View Block Definition dialog box, enter a name for the new multi-view block definition.
Click OK.
3 In the Multi-View Block Definition Properties dialog box, set up the new multi-view block definition:
■ To connect view blocks representing different display representations, see Adding View Blocks to
the Multi-View Block Definition (page 1825).
■ To add notes and files to the multi-view block definition, see Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files
to a Multi-View Block (page 1832).
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
2 In the Multi-View Block Definition Properties dialog box, select the multi-view block definition from
the Multi-View Block Name list.
3 Under Multi-View Block Components, select the display representation to which you want to connect
view blocks.
There are two display representations available for multi-view blocks:
■ Select 2D for all Plan views.
7 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE A side effect of this process is that the multi-view block, when inserted using DesignCenter, will be embedded
in an enclosing block reference and must be exploded before it will be recognized by AutoCAD Civil 3D as a
multi-view block object.
3 Browse to and select the folder where you would like to place the multi-view block.
6 In the Block list, select the name of the multi-view block definition that you would like to add to the
folder selected in DesignCenter.
7 Under Destination, browse to the folder specified in DesignCenter. Click Save in the Browse For Drawing
File dialog box.
8 Verify the insert units for the multi-view block drawing file.
NOTE When using DesignCenter, the insert units will be used to convert the units assigned to the multi-view
block to the units specified for the active drawing.
9 Click OK in the Write Block dialog box to write the multi-view block to the drawing file.
10 In DesignCenter, press the F5 key to refresh the contents. The multi-view block is placed in the selected
DesignCenter folder.
NOTE Multi-view blocks are embedded in an enclosing block reference when they are initially inserted and must
be exploded before they can be recognized by AutoCAD Civil 3D as a multi-view block object.
NOTE Multi-view blocks are embedded in an enclosing block reference when they are initially inserted and must
be exploded before they can be recognized by AutoCAD Civil 3D as a multi-view block object.
2 In DesignCenter, select the folder containing the DWG file or files (do not select individual blocks
within the DWG files).
3 From the DesignCenter preview pane, drag the image representing the multi-view block DWG file into
the drawing.
■ To dynamically set the scale, use the pointing device, and click when you see the appropriate scale.
■ To dynamically set the rotation, use the pointing device, and click when you see the appropriate
rotation
2 Use the AutoCAD Properties Palette to select the multi-view block to insert. All available blocks are
listed in the Definition list on the Design tab.
NOTE If you do not see the block you want to insert, add it to the drawing by dragging it from the Tool
Palette or by adding it from the DesignCenter.
3 Specify the insertion point, rotation, and other settings. You can enter these values in the Properties
Palette, or you can use the command line options.
NOTE If you select a multi-view block in a drawing and the multi-view block contextual ribbon is not displayed,
use the EXPLODE command to explode the multi-view block. Multi-view blocks are embedded in an enclosing
block reference when they are initially inserted and must be exploded before they can be recognized by AutoCAD
Civil 3D as a multi-view block object.
To change the multi-view block definition associated with the multi-view block
4 Click Definition. Select a new multi-view block definition for the multi-view block.
2 Click Multi-View Block tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit View Block Offsets.
NOTE If you select a multi-view block in a drawing and the multi-view block contextual ribbon is not displayed,
use the EXPLODE command to explode the multi-view block.
4 Offset the multi-view block to the desired location and click once, or enter a value and press Enter.
If you want to enter a specific value for the second direction in any edit mode (for example, in the Y
direction when editing along the XY plane), press Tab to cycle to the second direction.
To relocate an existing multi-view block by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point
3 Move the multi-view block to the desired location and click once, or enter a value and press Enter.
If you want to enter a specific value for the second direction in any edit mode (for example, in the Y
direction when editing along the XY plane), press Tab to cycle to the second direction.
You can also lock the movement of the multi-view block along a specific direction. If you enter a value
for either of the dimension directions in the current edit mode and then press Tab, the movement of
the multi-view block is constrained to the second dimension direction. When editing along the XY
To attach hyperlinks, enter notes, or attach reference files to a multi-view block in a drawing
5 To add or edit a note, click next to Notes. Enter text. Click OK.
■ To edit a reference file, double-click the reference file name to start its application.
4 Click Attributes.
6 Click OK.
NOTE You can also select the multi-view block to display the Multi-View Block ribbon tab, and then use the Edit
Attributes command on the Modify panel to edit the attributes.
3 Enter y (Yes) to include text style properties (for example, width factor, oblique, mirroring) when
updating attributes, or n (No) to update all attributes properties except those relating to text style.
Drafting Tools
You can perform a variety of editing operations on linework components and certain Civil objects using the
AEC Modify Tools.
This suite of tools can be used on any of the following objects and is available on the shortcut menu regardless
of whether any of these objects of these types are selected:
■ Hatches
■ Polylines
■ Circles
■ Arcs
Although the modify tools can only be applied to the types of objects listed, objects of any type can be used
as reference points or boundaries for the editing operations. For example, linework can be trimmed or
To trim linework
4 Click the side of the trim line where the region you want to remove is located.
All linework on the selected side of the trim line is removed. Boundaries for any closed polylines on
the other side of the trim line are redrawn along the trim line.
TIP If you need to trim linework to the edge of an arced segment of an object, use either the Crop option (see
Cropping Linework Objects (page 1841)) or the Subtract option (see Subtracting from Linework Objects (page 1838)).
The Crop option removes linework outside the implied boundary of the arc, while the Subtract option removes
linework inside the implied boundary of the arc.
3 Press Enter.
4 Move the cursor over the edge or line to which you want to trim the selected linework or object.
3 Move the cursor over the edge or line to which you want to extend the selected linework. Click when
a temporary line is displayed extending along and beyond the edge/line in both directions.
4 Click any point on the linework you want to extend or click the edge or line to which you want to
extend the linework.
The linework is extended to the edge. If you selected multiple lines, clicking on any one of them extends
them all.
3 Specify two points to establish the dividing line. In the case of a closed-boundary object, the points
can be inside or outside the boundaries. The dividing line is automatically extended until it intersects
all boundaries of the selected object.
You can select the divided parts of the linework or object on either side of the divide line. The divide
line is not visible after you select the second point.
NOTE Anything subtracted by this operation is actually deleted from the drawing. If you want to hide linework
from view, you may want to use the Obscure command instead. For more information, see Obscuring Regions of
Linework (page 1839).
1 If it does not already exist, draw the linework that delineates what you want to subtract.
2 Select the linework or object from which to subtract the delineated part.
4 Select the linework delineating the part you want to subtract. Press Enter.
5 Press Enter to retain the selected linework. Enter y (Yes) to erase it.
3 Select the foreground linework that will obscure the linework selected in step 1.
4 Press Enter.
The obscured region is delineated with a dashed line. You can select it (or its component segments)
separately from the linework it was part of before being obscured.
To merge linework
1 Select the linework or object to which you want to add one or more other linework entities or objects.
3 Select the linework/object(s) you want to merge with the originally selected linework/object, and press
Enter.
4 Press Enter to retain the selected linework. Enter y (Yes) to erase it.
All selected linework and/or objects are merged into a single entity.
1 Draw the linework that defines the new boundary to which you want to crop the existing linework.
4 Select the linework you want to use to define the new boundary (the linework you drew in Step 1), and
press Enter.
5 Press Enter to retain the selected linework (the crop boundary), or enter y (Yes) to erase it.
All of the originally selected linework outside the crop boundary is erased. If you choose to erase the
crop boundary, boundaries are redrawn for any closed-boundary entities inside the crop area. But any
open-boundary objects that have been cropped remain open.
Drive Tool
Use this tool to simulate driving through a 3D model by following an alignment, feature line, or 3D polyline.
1 Open a drawing that contains a corridor, alignment, feature line, or 3D polyline that has an associated
profile.
4 Select a profile.
The Drive tab is displayed, and the view switches to the Drive mode view.
6 Click Play/Pause at any time to pause the motion. Other controls on the Drive tab let you navigate
along the selected object.
For information on using other Drive features, see Specifying Drive Settings (page 1843).
7 When you are finished using the Drive command, end the command by clicking Close on the Drive
tab. Your view changes back to a normal view, and you are no longer in Drive mode.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Eye Panel
This option, along with the Eye Offset option, controls the
Eye Height “eye” location or, center point of the view perspective, when
using the Drive command. It specifies the vertical distance
or height of the eye location starting from the road surface
in relation to the roadway center line. The road surface is
determined by the profile, feature line, or 3D polyline height
at that location. This is a relative value, based on the eleva-
tion of the selected drive path at a given (each) station of
the roadway.
This option, along with the Eye Height option, controls the
Eye Offset “eye” location or, center point of the view perspective, when
using the Drive command. It specifies the horizontal distance
or offset of the eye location starting from the center line (of
the chosen alignment and profile, or feature line, or 3D
polyline).
NOTE The default values for Eye Height and Target Height are controlled by the Stopping Eye Height and Stopping
Object Height items in the Profile Creation collection in the Profile Edit Feature Setting dialog box.
Navigate Panel
Starts or pauses the moving display of the view along the
Play\Pause roadway.
Increment Sets the increments that the view moves through during
Drive mode.
Go To (Current Sta- Displays the current station being displayed and lets you
tion) select a station to move to from a drop-down list.
Visual Styles Specifies the visual style used when using the Drive com-
mand.
Target Panel
Specifies the Y-axis location of the target object, in relation
Target Height to the roadway center line. This is a relative value, based on
the elevation of the selected drive path at a given (each)
station of the roadway. The target object is a vertical cyl-
indrical-shaped object that can be displayed or not displayed
using the Show Target option. The top of the target object
is always at the middle center of your viewpoints when using
the Drive command.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE All sight lines that are drawn during a single command are drawn as an AutoCAD block on layer 0 so that
you can easily select them all and delete them if necessary.
1 Click Analyze tab ➤ Design panel ➤ Visibility Check drop-down ➤ Point To Point .
2 Select a surface or press Enter and select a surface from the list.
■ location of eye
■ height of target
■ location of target
A green arrow is displayed if the target is visible from the eye location. The command line displays the
distance from the eye to the target.
NOTE All sight lines that are drawn during a single command are drawn as an AutoCAD block on layer 0 so
that you can easily select them all and delete them if necessary.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE All graphic elements are drawn as blocks on the specified layers so that you can easily select them all and
delete them if necessary.
1 Click Analyze tab ➤ Design panel ➤ Visibility Check drop-down ➤ Check Sight Distance .
2 On the Sight Distance Check - General page, specify the path along which you want to check.
NOTE To enable the Next and Finish buttons you must specify a valid sight path.
3 Select a surface to perform the check against and click to add it to the list. The surfaces are listed in
the order of priority. If there are multiple surfaces at a given location, then the check is done against
the surface with the highest priority. You can change the priority by clicking the and arrows.
4 Click Next.
5 On the Sight Distance Check - Sight Distance page, enter values for the following:
■ Minimum Sight Distance
■ Eye Height
■ Eye Offset
■ Target Height
■ Target Offset
6 Click Next.
7 On the Sight Distance Check - Results page, select the sight distance graphic components that you want
drawn in the model. You can hover over a component in the list to see a preview.
8 Click to select a hatch color for the display of the obstructed areas.
9 Optionally, create a sight analysis report. From the Choose A File Type list, specify one of the following
report style sheets:
■ ReportCSV
■ ReportHTML
■ ReportTXT
■ ReportXML
NOTE All graphic elements are drawn as blocks on the specified layers so that you can easily select them all
and delete them if necessary.
See also:
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Analyze tab ➤ Design panel ➤ Visibility Check drop-down ➤ Check Sight Distance
Dialog Box
Sight Distance Check Wizard (page 2765)
Command Line
SightDistanceCheck
1 Set the drawing to the layer on which you want to create the hatch patterns.
2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Design panel ➤ Visibility Check drop-down ➤ Zone Of Visual Influence .
3 Select a surface, or press Enter and select a surface from the list.
After the command is completed, the colored areas (hatch patterns) on the surface within the specified
radius indicate the following:
Color Visibility
Quick Reference
Toolspace
Analyze tab ➤ Design panel ➤ Visibility Check drop-down ➤ Zone Of Visual Influence
Command Line
ZoneOfVisualInfluence
Command Description
ShowEventViewer Opens the Event Viewer window where you can view
messages that are logged during an AutoCAD Civil
3D session (page 1817)
1853
1854
Sharing Drawings and Data
With Other Applications 41
AutoCAD Civil 3D provides many utilities for sharing your drawings and data with other applications.
Data Sharing Use of objects in Status of objects 2D and 3D style Objects still exist
Method other AutoCAD- in other applica- display settings when reopened
based applica- tions honored in dif- in AutoCAD Civil
tions ferent viewports 3D
Object Enabler View, plot, copy, Objects are main- Yes Yes
and manipulate tained as intelligent
object labels. objects.
Design data is not
editable.
1855
Data Sharing Use of objects in Status of objects 2D and 3D style Objects still exist
Method other AutoCAD- in other applica- display settings when reopened
based applica- tions honored in dif- in AutoCAD Civil
tions ferent viewports 3D
Export to SDF Points, parcels, Primarily a format SDF is a separate SDF is a separate
alignments, pipes for AutoCAD Map. file. Original draw- file. Original draw-
and structures are ing is not affected. ing is not affected.
exported to the
SDF file. Can be
used in applica-
tions that can
read SDF. Auto-
CAD Map can im-
port this data.
Export to 3D Uses the 3D dis- Autodesk Design Autodesk Design Original drawing is
DWF play representa- Review or DWF Review or DWF not affected.
tions of the ob- Viewer is required. Viewer is required.
jects for display. 3D DWF uses the
Some objects do 3D display com-
not have a 3D dis- ponent when ex-
play component ported.
so are not dis-
played in 3D
DWF. There is also
object meta-data
exported with 3D
DWF. All of the
objects export the
meta-data.
NOTE Depending on the complexity of the drawing, a drawing saved with proxy graphics can become extremely
large, slowing drawing performance. It is recommended that you make a copy of the drawing without proxy
graphics before turning them on in the drawing you want to share with other users.
1 Set up the drawing to display the view for which you want to create proxy graphics.
3 Enter 1.
2010 2010-2011
2007 2007-2009
2004 2004-2006
2000 2000-2003
R14 R14
The Export To AutoCAD commands respect the current display settings of the objects in your drawing. For
example, if a surface in the drawing is set up to display the border and contours only, the drawing created
with the ExportTo Auto CAD command will contain primitives that represent the surface border and contours
only.
If the current drawing contains multiple viewports, the Export To AutoCAD commands create the primitives
based on the view of the objects in the active viewport.
TIP For information about the Save As AutoCAD DWG command and how it is different from the Export To
AutoCAD commands, see Save A Drawing in the AutoCAD Help.
5 Click Save.
TIP You can use the Autodesk Civil Batch Drawing Converter Utility to convert multiple drawings to a legacy
AutoCAD drawing format. See Converting Multiple Drawings to a New Format or Changing Units (page 1859).
When converting AutoCAD Civil 3D drawings to legacy AutoCAD drawing formats, the application does
not convert AutoCAD Civil 3D objects to the previous version.
Quick Reference
Application Menu
2 In the AutoCAD Options dialog box, click the AEC Editor tab (page 2751).
3 Under Block Properties Of Exploded Objects, select Maintain Resolved Layer, Color, Linetype to maintain
the layer, color, and linetype of objects when you explode them.
4 Under Export To AutoCAD, select Bind Xrefs if you want to bind the xrefs to the host drawing when
exploding, thus creating local block definitions. If you select this option, all xrefs and their dependent
named objects become a part of the exported drawing.
6 Enter a prefix or a suffix to be added to the drawing filename when the drawing is exported with the
Export To AutoCAD commands.
NOTE The other options on the AEC Editor tab are not supported by AutoCAD Civil 3D.
7 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Application Menu
■ AutoCAD 2007
■ AutoCAD 2004
■ AutoCAD 2000
■ R12 DXF
NOTE When converting AutoCAD Civil 3D drawings to legacy AutoCAD drawing formats, the application does
not convert AutoCAD Civil 3D objects to the previous version.
NOTE To change only the drawing Units in multiple files, specify the new Units Value and set the Drawing
Save Format to Current. Civil objects are not exploded if you only change the Units Value.
■ Filename Prefix: in the Value column, click the cell and enter a prefix to be added to the files you
convert.
TIP Adding a filename prefix is helpful to easily identify the newly converted files, for example you could
use ACAD-.
■ Filename Suffix: in the Value column, click the cell and enter a suffix to be added to the files you
convert.
■ Explode Objects: in the Value column, click the cell and select Yes to explode Civil Objects to
AutoCAD primitives. Select No to convert drawings in the current format.
NOTE If you select Yes and explode objects in a AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing, the primitive objects are not
restored to AutoCAD Civil 3D objects when you re-open the drawing in AutoCAD Civil 3D.
■ Bind Xrefs: in the Value column, click the cell and select Yes or No.
■ Use Insert Method When Binding Xrefs: in the Value column click the cell and select Yes or No.
■ Under Search For Files Named, select a file type from the list, or enter a file type or file name in the
box. To search for multiple file types you can enter a comma delimited list. You can also use an
asterisk as a wildcard, for example auto*.dwg.
■ Under Destination Folder, browse to the location where you want to save the converted files.
NOTE By default, all drawing files are selected. To select files individually, click the Clear All button to clear
all check boxes and then select the check boxes for the drawing files you want to convert.
■ Click OK to convert the selected files and close the dialog box.
A message box displays when the conversion is complete.
See also:
Quick Reference
Menu
This process creates a new DXF file with all AutoCAD Civil 3D objects exploded to AutoCAD primitives. The
original drawing is not affected.
NOTE When you use the Export To AutoCAD commands, all AutoCAD Civil 3D objects are exploded to AutoCAD
primitives. Opening the drawing in AutoCAD Civil 3D does not restore these primitive objects to AutoCAD Civil
3D objects.
5 Click Save.
Quick Reference
Application Menu
2 In the Export To SDF (page 2761) dialog box, specify a name for the SDF file.
NOTE If the drawing already has a coordinate system specified, it is used automatically and the Select
Coordinate System controls in the Export To SDF dialog box are grayed out.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE To export to 2D DWF format, use the Plot feature. For more information see Create and Modify a Drawing
Set for Publishing.
4 In the Files of Type drop-down, click 3D DWF, enter a filename, and specify a path, if necessary.
The .dwf extension for the file name is specified by default.
5 Optionally, click Tools ➤ Options and modify the publishing options. For more information, see DWF
Publishing Options Dialog Box (page 2762).
6 Click OK to close the DWF Publishing Options dialog box and click Save to generate the DWF file.
Quick Reference
Application Menu
Exporting to LandXML
Use the LandXML export commands to export drawing data to LandXML format. For more information,
see Understanding LandXML Import and Export (page 1875).
Exporting Points
Use the Points export command to export drawing points to an ASCII (text) file or a Microsoft® Access .mdb
file. For more information, see Exporting Point Data (page 534).
Command Description
■ Import surface images and terrain data from Google Earth to better visualize the future development environment.
■ Publish the model space entities from AutoCAD Civil 3D to Google Earth to quickly view your design data in the Earth
terrain imagery.
■ Import the elevation data for the current Google Earth view as a mesh.
■ Attach time-related information to each piece of the model data and then display published model data based on start
and end times.
NOTE You can use the imported Google Earth data for demonstration purposes only. Images imported from Google
Earth are low resolution and are not suitable for a land survey. In the same manner, publishing Civil data to Google
Earth can only serve as a conceptual planning and design tool.
1 In Google Earth, fly to a point of interest (see the Google Earth User Guide for more information).
The image that is displayed in the Google Earth 3D Viewer is the source image that will be imported.
See the Google Earth User Guide for more information.
2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Google Earth drop-down ➤ Google Earth Image .
1867
3 Follow the instructions at the command prompt and, depending on whether your drawing has a
coordinate system defined (see Specifying Units and Zone Settings (page 80)), do one of the following:
■ Choose to locate the image using the defined coordinate system or manually identify the image
location.
■ Manually specify the image insertion point and define image rotation angle by entering the
corresponding values or clicking in the drawing workspace.
NOTE If a map projection coordinate system is defined, AutoCAD Civil 3D can automatically place the image
or terrain data in the proper location in the drawing.
The image is displayed in the drawing as a new object. The image file name is generated and the image is
saved in JPEG format in the same folder as the current drawing file. You can use the imported image for
adding design objects and data.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Google Earth drop-down ➤ Google Earth Image
Menu
To create a surface using the image terrain data from Google Earth
1 In Google Earth, fly to a point of interest (see the Google Earth User Guide for more information). The
image that is displayed in the Google Earth 3D Viewer is the source image whose terrain data will be
imported.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Surfaces drop-down ➤ Create Surface From Google
Earth .
3 Follow instructions in the command prompt and, depending on whether your drawing has a coordinate
system defined (see Specifying Units and Zone Settings (page 80)), do one of the following:
■ Choose to locate the surface using the defined coordinate system or by selecting the previously
imported image.
4 In the Create Surface dialog box, follow the steps for creating a TIN surface. See Creating a TIN Surface
(page 649).
A surface is created. It is displayed in AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing and the Prospector tab. The location of
the surface points is based on the closest values obtained from the transformation of the Google Earth
geographical coordinates to the linear coordinates of the drawing.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Home tab ➤ Create Ground Data panel ➤ Surfaces drop-down ➤ Create Surface From Google Earth
Menu
To create a surface and import an image using the Google Earth data
1 In Google Earth, fly to a point of interest (see the Google Earth User Guide for more information).
2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Google Earth drop-down ➤ Google Earth Image And Surface .
3 Follow the instructions at the command prompt and, depending on whether your drawing has a
coordinate system defined (see Specifying Units and Zone Settings (page 80)), do one of the following:
■ Choose to locate the image and surface using the defined coordinate system or manually identify
the image location.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Google Earth drop-down ➤ Google Earth Image And Surface
Menu
IMPORTANT Before importing Google Earth elevation data, maximize the Google Earth application window.
1 In Google Earth, fly to a point of interest (see the Google Earth User Guide for more information).
2 In AutoCAD Civil 3D, click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Google Earth drop-down ➤ Google Earth Image
And Surface .
3 In the drawing, specify the insertion point and rotation angle to orient the image. The mesh is imported
into the drawing.
NOTE If a map projection coordinate system is defined, AutoCAD Civil 3D can automatically place the image
or terrain data in the proper location in the drawing.
AutoCAD Civil 3D creates a render material, using the displayed Google Earth 3D Viewer image. This
render material is associates with the current drawing and assigned to the created mesh.
The image captured from the Google Earth view is saved in the same folder as the current drawing. The
image filename inherits the first three letters from the drawing file name.
4 Optionally, to view the image draped on the mesh, select Realistic from the Type list in the Material
Editor of the Materials window. For more information, see Object Rendering (page 1761) and Draping
Images On Surfaces (page 750).
When importing the Google Earth elevation data to a AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing, note the following:
■ When you place the mesh into the drawing, you can use the AutoCAD MOVE and ROTATE commands
to refine the position of the mesh relative to your model. Do not adjust the position of your model.
Rather, adjust the position of the mesh relative to your model.
■ The dimensions of the mesh are defined by the extent of longitude and latitude that the mesh covers in
Google Earth, and transformation of these extents to the linear units of the drawing.
■ The material created in the drawing is named using the first three letters of the drawing file, followed
by several random numbers.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Google Earth drop-down ➤ Google Earth Image And Surface
2 On the Describe page, specify information about the published drawing. See the Describe page of the
wizard (page 2091).
3 On the Items page, specify the model space entities that you want to publish. See the Items page of the
wizard (page 2091).
NOTE When there are render materials attached to model space entities in AutoCAD Civil 3D, you can publish
the materials with the entities. If timespan information is attached to model space entities, this information
is not published to Google Earth when you select to publish render materials. See Attaching Time Information
to Model Data (page 1872).
4 On the Geo-Reference page, use the controls to transform the linear coordinates of the drawing to
geographic coordinates used in Google Earth. See the Geo-Reference page of the wizard (page 2092).
5 On the Nudge page, fine-tune the location of the created model. See the Nudge page of the wizard (page
2093).
6 On the File page, specify the name and location for your published file. See the File page of the wizard
(page 2094).
8 After the operation is finished, click View to view the published model in Google Earth.
NOTE If Google Earth is not running, it is launched and the published model is displayed in the Google Earth
3D Viewer.
The resulting .kml or .kmz file is stored in the location that you specified. You can share the published file
with remote project participants, who can view it using Google Earth.
NOTE You can control the appearance of the published data using the Google Earth controls. For more information,
see the Google Earth User Guide.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE If you plan to publish your model to Google Earth in the same session, ensure that Google Earth is running.
■ Select an object. Click Surface tab ➤ General Tools panel ➤ Google Earth Timespan .
3 In the Timespan for Google Earth dialog box (page 2095), specify the start and end dates by selecting
them from the calendar. Click OK.
TIP Hover over an object to see a tooltip with timespan information attached to the model space entity.
You can view the published model in the Google Earth 3D Viewer and adjust the necessary parameters using
the timeline controls. See “Viewing a Timeline” in the Google Earth User Guide.
When you attach timespan information to Civil models, note the following:
■ If you do not attach the start-time information to an object entity, Google Earth starts the playback from
the beginning of the timeline.
■ If you do not attach the end-time information to an object entity, Google Earth starts the playback from
the start-time point and continues up to the end of the timeline.
■ An object entity without any timespan information attached is displayed in Google Earth constantly.
■ When publishing an object to Google Earth, you can not attach time information to this object and
associate a render material with it at the same time.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Select an object. Click Surface tab ➤ General Tools panel ➤ Google Earth Timespan
Command Line
GETime
Dialog Box
Timespan for Google Earth (page 2095)
Command Description
■ LandXML-1.0
■ LandXML-1.1
■ LandXML-1.2
■ Exchange data. Import LandXML data into other software applications. The data can then be modified
and delivered to customers and agencies in the required formats.
■ Transfer or archive data. Transfer data to another AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing. Also, you can archive data
in a non-proprietary format.
1875
■ Convert units. Export data using imperial measurements. Then, import it using metric to scale and convert
values.
Units
Application
Author
Alignments
AlignPI
StaEq
Superelevation
DesignSpeeds
CrossSects
DesignCrossSectSurf As subassembly
Surfaces
SourceData
Definition
GRID
Survey
PlanFeatures
Units.diameterUnit
Structs
Units.diameterUnit
PipeFlow
StructFlow
Author
Alignments
AlignPI
StaEq
Superelevation
DesignSpeeds
Profiles
ProfSurf
CrossSects
Parcels
SourceData
Breaklines
Contours
DataPnts
Definition
TIN
GRID
PipeNetworks
Pipes
Units.diameterUnit
Structs
Units.diameterUnit
PipeFlow
StructFlow
■ Alignments Site allows you to specify the site on which the alignments will reside. The default selection
is <none>, which places the alignments in the top-level Alignments collection and prevents them from
interacting with parcels.
■ Parcels Site allows you to specify the site on which the parcels will reside. If no sites exist in the drawing,
the parcels are placed on the default site (Site 1). If the LandXML file has a site name for its features, then
that site name is created in the drawing and the parcels are assigned to it.
For more information about sites, see Understanding Sites (page 779).
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the <drawing name> collection ➤ Edit LandXML Settings.
2 In the LandXML Settings dialog box, click Import tab (page 2214) and modify the settings.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
NOTE Previously, it was required that you specify International or US Survey Foot in the LandXML settings. This
specification is now done in the drawing settings.
NOTE Unit conversion is not applied to descriptive LandXML attributes that may contain numeric values. For
example, if you are importing a point with the description “12 oak” into a metric project, it will not be changed
to “305mm oak.”
■ Base point values. The base point coordinates in the drawing are used to translate and rotate all imported
values. These coordinates are in the drawing units.
■ Translate coordinate values. The coordinate values are used to translate data from the base point. These
coordinates are in the drawing units.
NOTE In certain circumstances, you can assign the same values to both the translated coordinates and the
base point coordinates. For example, the values would be the same if you want to rotate the coordinates
without translating them.
For example, the following formula is used to translate the imported elevation values:
(Translation Coordinate Elevation - Base Point Elevation) + LandXML Elevation = Imported elevation
value
Therefore, if the LandXML file elevation is 90 feet, the base point elevation is 0.000 feet, and the translate
coordinate elevation is 10.000 feet, the formula is:
(10.000 - 0.000) + 90 = 100
■ Rotation angle and direction. The angle and direction, measured about the base point, about which the
data is rotated.
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click <drawing name> ➤ Edit LandXML Settings.
2 In the LandXML Settings dialog box, click the Export tab (page 2217) and modify the settings.
For more information, see Point Reference Export Options (page 1882) and Point Description and Code
Matching (page 1882).
3 Click OK.
The settings are saved as the default settings for the drawing.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
It is also valid for a coordinate geometry element to have a mix of pntRef and coordinate values as shown
in the following example:
<Line> <Start pntRef="250" /> <End>5632.87775298 3944.16966215</End> </Line>
This situation could occur for the endpoint if a COGO point does not exist within the specified tolerance.
NOTE Typically, you would export the raw description to the ‘code’ attribute.
You can either disable or match the ‘desc’ attribute in the LandXML to a point’s description:
NOTE Typically, you would export the full description to the ‘desc’ attribute.
You can also specify whether to export the full description if it is the same as the raw description. For
example, if the raw and full descriptions are the same, then only one value is exported. This would occur
when points do not have defined description keys.
1 Specify the import settings that prepare the data for import. For more information, see Viewing and
Editing LandXML Drawing Settings (page 1880).
2 Select the files and the specific data in the file to import.
The LandXML import functionality automatically handles the conversion between the units specified in
the LandXML file and the current drawing units.
NOTE LandXML does not transform coordinate systems automatically. No specific coordinate system transformation
is applied other than what is specified by the translation and rotation settings (page 1881).
2 In the Import LandXML dialog box, select or browse to the LandXML (*.xml) file you want to import.
Click Open.
3 In the Import LandXML dialog box (page 2213), select sites for the alignments and parcels. See LandXML
and Sites (page 1880) for more information.
4 The data tree displays each of the major data collections in the LandXML file. Use the data tree to:
■ Navigate a data collection and view its subcomponents.
■ Expand the collections. Select or clear the check boxes to filter the data types that you want to
import into the drawing. By default, all data components are selected for import.
NOTE The check boxes have a tri-state display. If only some objects are selected under a collection, the check
box is shaded . If all the items are selected, the check box is selected . If all the items below the
collection are cleared, the check box for the collection is cleared .
NOTE As each object is imported, the Event Viewer Vista (page 2753) dialog box can display the status of each
operation. For more information, see The Event Viewer Vista (page 1817).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
2 or
Prospector tab: Right-click <collection name> ➤ Export LandXML
The Export To LandXML (page 2219) dialog box, which contains a data tree, is displayed.
NOTE When you export from the Prospector tree, the Export To LandXML dialog box contains a pre-defined
selection set of that collection’s data. When you export from the Output tab, all drawing data is selected by
default, and you can adjust the selection by clearing check boxes. You can alternately specify the objects to
export by selecting them from the drawing.
NOTE The check boxes have a tri-state display. If only some objects are selected under a collection, the
check box is shaded . If all the items are selected, the check box is selected . If all the items below
the collection are cleared, the check box for the collection is cleared .
■ Select data from the drawing by clicking and selecting the objects in the drawing. Press Enter
after you finished selecting the objects.
5 In the Export To LandXML dialog box, enter the name of the LandXML (*.xml) file you want to export
and specify the location. Click Save.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Command Description
1 In AutoCAD Civil 3D, open a drawing that contains a stream you would like to study, along with an
existing ground surface.
2 Define the stream centerline as an alignment. Be sure the stationing goes in the desired direction. For
more information, see Creating Alignments (page 948) and Reversing Alignment Direction (page 1083).
3 Create a sample line group with stations at the desired section locations along the stream centerline
alignment. For more information, see Creating Sample Lines (page 1246).
NOTE For HEC-RAS analysis, be sure that the sample lines do not extend beyond the extents of the surface.
4 Optionally, create alignments or draw polylines to represent left and/or right stream banks.
NOTE The bank locations appear in the HEC-RAS application as red dots on the sections. The left and right
bank locations tell HEC-RAS where the Manning’s n values change for left, channel, and right bank situations
in the section. This effects the calculations and the level of water in the section.
1887
BEST PRACTICE It is recommended to use the same drawing for exporting data to be used in HEC-RAS that you
use for importing data from HEC-RAS.
3 In the Export To HEC RAS (page 2141) dialog box, for Surface, select the surface you want to sample for
the stream sections.
4 For Site, select the site that contains the stream centerline alignment, or select <None> if the alignment
is not located in a site.
5 For Reach Alignment, select the alignment that represents the stream centerline.
6 Select the Sample Line Group that contains the sections you want to export.
7 Enter a River Name. This should typically be the name of the stream alignment. This name is used in
the HEC-RAS application as the title of the GEO file and is used as a label for the stream in the HEC-RAS
Geometric Data window.
8 To export river bank information, select Check This To Use River Banks, click Left and/or Right, and
select the polylines or alignments in the drawing.
NOTE The bank locations appear in the HEC-RAS application as red dots on the sections. The left and right
bank locations tell HEC-RAS where the Manning’s n values change for left, channel, and right bank situations
in the section. This effects the calculations and the level of water in the section. The Bank Positions exported
to the GEO file are measured as percentages of the overall section length rather than as offset distances.
9 Click Export.
10 In the Export Data To GEO File dialog box, navigate to the location where you want to save the GEO
file.
13 Follow the steps in Importing To and Exporting From HEC-RAS Software (page 1889).
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE This procedure describes only how to import a GEO file into, and export an SDF file out of, HEC-RAS
software. Please refer to the HEC-RAS Help for information on how to use the application itself.
3 In the Geometric Data dialog box, click File menu ➤ Import Geometry Data ➤ GIS Format.
4 In the Import GIS Format Data File dialog box, navigate to and select the GEO file you exported from
AutoCAD Civil 3D. Click OK.
5 In the Import Geometry Data wizard, confirm the import geometry data and click Finished - Import
Data.
The geometry data will be visible in the Geometric Data window.
7 In the main HEC-RAS window, click File menu ➤ Export GIS Data.
■ Select any profiles you may have created during the analysis.
1 In AutoCAD Civil 3D, open the drawing from which you exported the GEO file (page 1889).
3 In the Import HEC RAS (page 2142) dialog box, select the Site For Reach Alignment. If no sites exist in
the drawing, then a new site named RASimport is selected and will be created.
NOTE The stream alignment is imported into the drawing only if an alignment of the same name does not
already exist in the site you specify. Existing alignments of the same name and site are not overwritten. LINE
objects that represent the sections are only imported if the alignment is imported.
9 Click Open.
10 In the Import HEC RAS dialog box, select the stream to import. When you select a stream, the number
of profiles and sections that exist for that stream are shown in the dialog box.
■ The profiles are imported as AutoCAD Civil 3D profile objects. You must create a profile view in the
drawing to view them. For more information, see Creating Profile Views (page 1208).
NOTE Existing profiles of the same name inside the same alignment will be overwritten. This is designed
to allow multiple iterations within the HEC-RAS application without having to manually delete profiles in
AutoCAD Civil 3D when you bring in updated data.
■ The section data is imported as LINE objects along the alignment. These lines show where the top
water surface intersects each section (according to the HEC-RAS application). They are created on
layers using the convention <alignment name> - <profile name>. The section lines are imported
only if the alignment is imported.
11 Click Import.
The flood elevation profiles are imported into the drawing and are visible in Prospector.
If an alignment of the same name and site as the selected stream alignment does not already exist in
the drawing, then it and the section lines are also imported. Section lines are not imported if the
alignment is not imported.
12 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Command Description
■ Finalize the site plans before the architectural design has been completed.
■ Obtain enough information to start preparing the site for construction.
■ Reduce the communication cycle between architectural and civil engineering teams.
■ Data for the building footprint (for example, area and perimeter)
■ Images of building model categories (doors, floors, roofs) visible in specific views
■ Data for the building model categories (for example, slope and area for the Roof model category)
1891
■ Project information data (for example, building type, occupancy, and total gross building area)
The following high-level procedure is performed by an architect in Autodesk Revit Architecture to prepare
the architectural model for sharing with AutoCAD Civil 3D.
■ Prepare and simplify the file. The user applies a Civil Engineering View template and related visibility
settings and filters.
■ Launch the Export Module and specify export settings. The user specifies a footprint level, location, base
point, and the number of building model elements to export.
■ Save the file. The user specifies the file location and file name.
■ View the Export Building Site report that lists a summary of the output contents.
For details, see Exporting Building Sites in the Autodesk Revit Architecture 2011 User’s Guide.
■ When preparing a design package file for export, the architect can create site utilities with host connectors
that are functional in AutoCAD Civil 3D. You should make the architect aware of the utilities that are
relevant to the civil project beforehand, so they are exported with the design package file. If the required
utilities are not supported in Revit Architecture, the architect would be able to notify you. If you prefer
to set up the utility connections yourself, ask the architect to omit the Utilities parameter in the export
settings.
■ Before finalizing the building site model export, the architect may contact you about the site survey
point coordinates, so they can be exported with the model file.
■ The architect should apply as much model simplification settings as possible. You should communicate
to the architect your minimum requirements regarding the design package file content.
■ If the import operation is slow, you can request the architect to reexport the model with modified settings
to reduce file size.
■ The Export Building Site report is saved with the ADSK building site model file. You can use the report
to compare the content of the original file with the imported file.
■ Establish a procedure when every time the source design package file is modified, the architect notifies
you immediately, so you can update the building site object in your drawing.
2 On the Select File page of the Import Building Site wizard, click and select the published ADSK file
to import.
The model image appears in the Preview window. The marker shows the base point specified in
the building site object.
3 Click to select or modify a template for the building site object name.
4 Optionally, use the ViewCube to manipulate the object in the Preview window. See Overview of ViewCube
in the AutoCAD User’s Guide.
5 Click Next.
NOTE You can click Finish at any time to close the wizard and finish the import.
6 On the Confirm Units page, compare the units used in the building site object, as defined in the ADSK
file, with the units used in the current AutoCAD Civil 3D session. All the controls on this page are
read-only. Use them for reference information.
7 Click Next.
8 On the Display Properties page, click to specify the object layer (page 2221).
9 Optionally, click to edit the default building site style. See Editing a Building Site Style (page 1894).
10 Click Next.
11 On the Insertion Point page, confirm and modify the coordinates and rotation angle of the building
site object base point or click Specify In Drawing to orient the model in the drawing manually.
12 Optionally, click Preview to insert the building site object into the drawing as a test.
■ Press Enter to close the Import Building Site wizard and leave the building site object in the drawing.
14 Click Finish.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the Building Site Styles collection and click New.
2 On the tabs of the Building Site Style (page 2012) dialog box, enter the required data or specify the settings.
3 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the name of the building site style that you want to edit
and click Edit.
2 In the Building Site Style (page 2012) dialog box, change the properties of the building site style.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: Building Site ➤ Building Site Styles ➤ right-click <style name> ➤ Edit
Command Line
EditBuildingSiteStyle
Dialog Box
Building Site Style (page 2012)
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click a Building Site item and select Building Site Properties.
2 In the Building Site Properties (page 2014) dialog box, modify the name of the building site object, enter
or edit the description, and modify the style.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Building Site ➤ right-click <building site name> ➤ Building Site Properties
Command Line
EditBuildingSiteStyle
Dialog Box
Building Site Properties (page 2014)
posted in the shared location. When changes are made to the package file, the out-of-date icon displays
next to a building site item in the Prospector tree. You can update the building site object references without
reimporting the object into the drawing.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, right-click a Building Site item and select Update Building Site
Definition.
2 In the Select Autodesk Exchange File dialog box, select the updated ADSK file.
3 Click Open.
The definition of the imported building site object is updated and all its references are redefined with new
data.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Prospector tab: Building Site ➤ right-click <building site name> ➤ Update Building Site Definition
Command Line
UpdateBuildingSite
Command Description
EditBuildingSiteStyle Opens the Building Site Style dialog box where, you
can edit the building site style (page 1894)
1897
Ignore Duplicate Names
Ignores any duplicate symbol tables names in the DGN file, and gives precedence to the host definition for
duplicates.
For more information, see the AutoCAD Help topic Import MicroStation DGN Files.
NOTE If you save a AutoCAD Civil 3D DWG into which a DGN file has been imported, and then open the DWG
in another AutoCAD product, the linetypes will be displayed as Continuous.
2 In the Import DGN File dialog box, find and select the DGN file to import, or enter the name of the
DGN file at File Name.
3 Click Open.
4 In the Import DGN Settings dialog box, make sure the Import Into Current Drawing check box is
selected.
This option brings the DGN entities, and their associated linestyles, into the current drawing.
NOTE If this check box is cleared, the DGN entities are placed in a new drawing.
5 Under Import Into Current Drawing, specify how to name incoming objects during the import:
■ Prefix Dependent Definitions: Adds the DGN file and model name as a prefix to the incoming
object’s name. If the prefixed name results in a new name conflict, then an incremental number is
appended to the name.
■ Ignore Duplicate Names: Ignores any duplicate symbol table names in the DGN file, and gives
precedence to the host definition for duplicates.
6 Select a design model from the list, and then specify the remaining import options.
7 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Command Line
DGNImport
Dialog Box
Import DGN Settings Dialog Box
3 Press Enter.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
For information on recommended workflows when working with plan production tools, see Plan Production Tools
Workflow (page 61)
Plan and Profile ■ The current drawing must contain an alignment and a
profile.
1901
Sheet type Prerequisites for using plan production tools
■ You must be able to access a template that contains a
viewport with a Viewport Type defined as Plan, and a
viewport with a Viewport Type defined as Profile, such as
the Civil 3D (Imperial) Plan and Profile.dwt template located
in the Template\Plan Production folder.
For more information about setting the Viewport Type in a template, see Setting Up Drawing Templates for
Plan Production (page 1902).
NOTE The templates that are preconfigured with viewport types are located in: \Template\Plan Production.
■ For Windows Vista and Windows 7 operating systems, the Template\Plan Production folder is located in:
\Users\<user name>\AppData\Local\Autodesk\C3D 2011\enu.
■ For XP operating systems, the Template\Plan Production folder is located in: \Documents and Settings\<user
name>\Local Settings\Application Data\Autodesk\C3D 2011\enu.
You can also use your own custom templates or existing AutoCAD Civil 3D templates. If you choose to use
templates other than the ones located in the Plan Production folder, an important prerequisite is that you
first set the viewport types for plan view, profile view, or section view.
While you are using the Create View Frames wizard, or the Create Multiple Views command, if you select a
template that does not have appropriately defined viewports, AutoCAD Civil 3D detects this and displays a
message indicating that layouts containing the necessary viewports for the sheet type were not found.
General AutoCAD Civil 3D object styles Object and Label Styles (page 66)
General AutoCAD Civil 3D label styles Defining Label Settings (page 1654)
Plan production tool object styles and la- Editing Plan Production Tool Settings (page
bels 1913)
4 Select the viewport that you want to display plan, profile, or section data, right-click, and then click
Properties. The Properties palette is displayed.
5 Scroll down to the Viewport section at the bottom of the Properties palette. Set the Viewport Type to
Plan, Profile, or Section.
6 Optionally, for Plan viewports, you may want to insert a north arrow block in the desired location in
the layout.
View frames represent the alignment data that will be displayed in layout sheets
■ Plan Production commands. You can access the plan production commands from the Output tab and
Plan Production contextual tab on the ribbon. The Plan Production contextual tab is displayed when
you select a view frame or a match line in the drawing.
■ Create View Frames Wizard. Start the process of using the plan production tools by using this wizard
to define a group of view frames along an alignment. For information, see Creating View Frames for
Plan/Profile Sheets (page 1904).
■ View Frame Group. The view frame group object helps you manage a single group of view frames
that are displaying consecutive station ranges along the same alignment. You can set many options at
the view frame group level, such as styles and labeling. View frame group objects are displayed in the
Prospector tree, and you can control their default command settings in the Settings tree. For information,
see The View Frame Group Object (page 1930).
■ View Frames. View frames are rectangular-shaped regions along an alignment that define an area
that will be displayed in a sheet. The view frame size, shape, and scale comes from a designated viewport
that exists on the layout tab of a specified template. After view frames are created, the properties of the
view frame objects are saved in the currently open drawing. The view frame objects are displayed in the
drawing and in the Prospector tree, and you can control their default style and labeling in the Settings
tree. For information, see The View Frame Object (page 1931).
■ Match Lines. In the AutoCAD Civil 3D plan production features, a match line is a straight line that
indicate locations in a view frame group where one view frame intersects or matches up with another
view frame. Match lines are only displayed in paper space and only in plan view. They are designed to
visually indicate the locations (start and end stations) along an alignment where each view frame begins
and ends. Match lines have their own object style and they typically include labels that can identify both
the previous and next sheet (view frame) along an alignment. You have the option to include a left side
match line label, a right side match line label, both, or none, and you can choose where along the match
line you want the label to be displayed (top, middle, end of match line). Like view frame objects, match
line objects are also displayed in the Prospector tree, and you can control their default style and labeling
in the Settings tree. For information, see The Match Line Object (page 1932).
■ Create Sheets Wizard. After you have used the Create View Frames wizard, the next step is to use
the Create Sheets wizard to quickly create your sheets. For information, see Creating Plan/Profile Sheets
(page 1909).
After you have created view frames and sheets, you can then use the Sheet Set Manager to organize, publish,
share, and manage sheet sets. For information, see “Work with Sheets in a Sheet Set” in the AutoCAD Help.
NOTE On any page of this wizard, you can click Create View Frames to create the view frames using the
default choices on the wizard pages. If a criteria is needed that has not been supplied, then the Create View
Frames button is unavailable (grayed out). You can also click the links on the left side of the wizard to go
directly to a wizard page.
■ User Specified: When this is selected, you may enter a value or click to specify a start and end
location (stations) along the alignment in the drawing area.
5 In the Sheets page (page 2323), in the Sheet Settings section, under Choose The Sheet Type You Want
To Generate, select one of the following:
Option Result (Conceptual Image)
Plan Only
Profile Only
In the Template For Plan And Profile Sheet field, click to open the Select Layout As Sheet Template
dialog box and browse to the template to use for the sheets that will be created. The template you select
must have viewports defined as plan and/or profile, depending on the sheet type selected in this dialog
box (Plan And Profile, Plan Only, or Profile Only).
NOTE If you select a template that does not have appropriately defined viewports for the sheet type you
select (Plan Only, Profile Only, or Plan and Profile), AutoCAD Civil 3D detects this and displays a warning
message. For more information see, Setting Up Drawing Templates for Plan Production (page 1902).
7 In the View Frame Placement section, select one of the following or accept the default:
Option Result (Conceptual Image)
Along Alignment
Rotate To North
8 Optionally, you may select the check box next to the Set The First View Frame Before The Start Of The
Alignment option, and then enter a value in the value field.
This sets the distance before the start station of the alignment that the first view frame is placed. Entering
a distance here provides the specified amount of space before the selected alignment start so that the
alignment start does not coincide with the edge of the viewport. If this check box is not selected, then
this field is ignored, and the first view frame may be placed at the start of the alignment. Often the
view frame start will be as desired without altering this option.
10 On the View Frame Group page (page 2324), specify a name, and optionally, a description of the view
frame group object that will be created using this wizard.
11 On the View Frame section, specify a layer, name, style, and label style for the view frames.
12 In the Label Location field, choose the desired location to place the view frame labels. For example,
choosing Top Left places the view frame labels at the top left side of the view frame.
14 On the Match Lines page (page 2325), if you chose Plan Only, you can choose to insert match lines on
the view frames by selecting the check box next to Insert Match Lines. Match lines are only displayed
in model space and in plan views. They are not displayed in profile views.
NOTE If you do not want match lines included on the plan only view frames, clear the check mark from this
option. This disables the options on this page. If you selected to create plan and profile or profile only sheets,
this check box is automatically selected, and you cannot edit it (not available, grayed out).
15 In the Positioning section, you may select one or both of the following options, and enter desired values
in the text fields. Both these options let you adjust where match lines are placed, and how they may
be moved after creation, so that they do not obstruct important drawing data.
■ Snap Station Value Down To The Nearest: When this check box is not selected (cleared), match line
positioning on the view frame is determined by using a rounding value based on derived stations.
When this check box is selected, the match lines are positioned on the view frames based on the
rounding calculation value entered. The rounding calculation always rounds down. For example, if
the calculated station for a match line is 48+37.69, then a rounding of 100 would place the match
line on 48+00.
When Snap Station Value the station will round to
Down To The Nearest is set
to ...
100 18+00
50 18+50
10 18+60
1 18+65
NOTE This option will not accept values that cause the match lines to be placed in undesirable locations,
such as before the previous match line or before the beginning of the alignment. If a rounding calculation
would result in the match line being placed in an undesirable location, then the rounding calculation is
ignored and the match lines are placed at calculated station.
■ Allow Additional Distance For Repositioning (Increases View Overlap): Because the location of match
lines is calculated automatically, it is possible that after you might need to move the match line
slightly. For example, in some cases match lines or match line labels may be obscuring data of
interest. You can use this option to increase the margin by which you can move (reposition) match
lines. Using this option will have a side-effect of increasing the overlap area of view frames. When
this check box is selected, you can move the match lines in plan view by the distance specified with
this option. This ensures that the match line remains within (between) the intersection of the two
neighboring view frames. You should enable this option if you want to be able to move the match
lines by a certain distance. Note that having this option enabled is useful if you need to force an
overlap of view frames when, on a straight line alignment, adjacent edges or sides of two view frames
are at the same location, thereby not allowing enough room for labels.
16 In the Match Line section, specify a layer, name, and style for the match lines that will be created.
17 In the Labels section, specify the labeling criteria for the match line labels, including location.
NOTE The Profile Views page is not available (grayed out) if a sheet type of Plan Only was chosen on the
Sheet Set page of this wizard.
19 On the Profile Views page (page 2327), verify that an appropriate profile view style and band set have
been selected. If desired, you may select a different profile view style and band set.
NOTE It is important to understand that the profile view style and band set for the profile view cannot be
changed later when you are using the Create Sheets wizard to create sheets. For more information, see
Understanding Profile View Options (page 1915).
When the wizard has completed creating the view frames, you will notice the following:
■ The view frames and match lines are created in the drawing.
■ In the Prospector tree, the following objects are created: one view frame group, one or more view frames
in a view frames collection, one or more match lines in a match lines collection.
NOTE If the Insert Match Lines check box on the Match Lines page was not selected (cleared), then match lines
are not created.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Prospector tab: right-click View Frame Groups collection ➤ Create View Frames
Command Line
CreateViewFrames
Dialog Box
Create View Frames Wizard (page 2322)
NOTE If you choose to create sheets that display profile views, the profile views will be created and placed in the
drawing automatically in model space in the file containing the sheets.
Before you can use the Create Sheets wizard, in the drawing you must have already created a view frame
group using the Create View Frames wizard.
It is important to note that the profile view style and band set that were used during the Create View Frames
wizard are used to calculate the placement of view frames. These styles cannot be changed later for the view
frame group.
NOTE On any page of this wizard, you can click Create Sheets to create the sheets using the default choices
on the wizard pages. If a criteria that is needed that has not been supplied, then the Create Sheets button is
not available (grayed out). You can also click the links on the left side of the wizard to go directly to a wizard
page.
2 On the View Frame Group And Layouts page (page 2327), select a view frame group from the list.
NOTE As a reminder, the sheet type that was selected for this view frame group is displayed beneath the
View Frame Group list.
3 For View Frame Range, all view frames are selected for processing by default, but you can choose a single
view frame, or multiple view frames from the group by clicking Selection and then clicking the Choose
View Frames button.
4 In the Layout Creation section, choose how the layouts will be created. A conceptual image on the
right side of the wizard page provides an indication of the result.
Option Description
Number Of Layouts Per New Drawing (1) This option may be an appropriate choice
if you plan to have several people working
on individual sheets. When this option is
selected, and you enter 1 for the value,
one new layout (sheet) is created in each
new drawing. The total number of sheets
and drawings depends on the length of
the alignment selected and other criteria,
such as the size of the viewports in the
referenced template.
Number Of Layouts Per New Drawing (>1) If you choose this option and enter a value
greater than 1 (3, for example), then 3
new layouts are created in each new
drawing. The total number of sheets and
drawings depends on the length of the
alignment selected and other criteria, such
as the size of the viewports in the refer-
enced template.
All Layouts In One New Drawing This option may be an appropriate choice
if having each individual layout in a separ-
ate drawing is not necessary for you, and
if you have less than 10 sheets. You may
place all the layouts in one newly created
drawing. The total number of sheets de-
pends on the length of the alignment se-
lected and other criteria, such as the size
of the viewports in the referenced tem-
plate. For optimal results, it is recommen-
ded that you create no more than 10
sheets per drawing. Therefore, this option
All Layouts In The Current Drawing If you are generating less than 10 sheets,
you may want to generate the layouts in
the current drawing. The total number of
sheets depends on the length of the
alignment selected and other criteria, such
as the size of the viewports in the refer-
enced template.
5 Specify a name for the layouts or accept the default naming template.
6 Optionally, you can use the Choose The North Arrow Block To Align In Layouts option to automatically
align a north arrow block in the sheet(s). Any blocks that exist in the referenced template (.dwt) are
displayed in the drop-down list. If no blocks exist in the referenced template, the list displays None. If
you select a block from this list, that block will be aligned to the north on the sheet(s).
■ If you want to manage the sheets using the Autodesk Vault project management features, and you
are not logged in to the desired vault, click Log In To Vault ..., log in to the desired project, and
then return to the Sheet Set page and click Add Files To Vault.
■ If you do not want to manage the sheets using the Autodesk Vault project management features,
make sure the Add Files To Vault check box is not selected (cleared).
NOTE If you choose to manage sheets using the Autodesk Vault project management features, the sheet set
file (.dst), and the sheet files (.dwg), will be added to the vault project you selected. If Autodesk Vault is not
currently installed on the machine you are using, these options are not available (grayed out and not available
for edit).
9 In the Sheet Set section, select either New Sheet Set or Add To Existing Sheet Set.
10 In the Sheet Set File (.DST) Storage Location field, specify a location where the sheet set file (.dst) will
be stored. If you selected Add To Existing Sheet Set, this field displays the path of the sheet set file for
the sheet set selected in the Add To Existing Sheet Set field. If you want to use the Sheet Set Manager
later to manage this sheet set, you will need to know this location and filename.
11 In the Sheets section, specify a storage location and name for the sheet file(s) that will be created during
this wizard session. If you have chosen to save all sheets in the current drawing (the All Layouts In The
■ Sheet File Name: Specifies the name of the sheet file(s) that will be created.
12 Click Next to display the next page in the wizard sequence. If the view frames do not include any profile
views, then the Profile Views page of the Create Sheets wizard is not available, and the Data References
page is displayed next.
13 On the Profile Views page (page 2329), you can specify additional settings for profile views. Note that the
profile view style and the band set that were selected during view frame creation cannot be changed at
this stage; however, the current profile view style and band set that will be used are displayed as read-only
on this page. Only additional settings relating to profile views (Other Profile View Options) can be
changed at this part of the process. For more information, see Understanding Profile View Options
(page 1915).
NOTE If you need to change these profile view or band set style settings, you must cancel out of the Create
Sheets wizard and recreate the view frames, using the updated style choices for the profile views and/or the
band sets.
14 In the Other Profile View Options section, you can get other settings from an existing profile view, or
you can choose settings by launching the Profile View wizard at this point (from this page of the Create
Sheets wizard). If you choose to launch the Profile View wizard from the Create Sheets wizard, you will
be returned to the Profile Views page of the Create Sheets wizard when you are finished selecting profile
view options.
15 If you are creating plan and profile sheets, you can choose how to align the data that is displayed in
the plan and profile views using the Align Views options. If you are creating plan only or profile only
sheets, these options are not available. These options are useful on projects that require the data displayed
in sheets to be aligned according to certain project requirements (such as aligned left, center, or right).
■ Align Profile And Plan View At Start: When this option is selected, the left side (start station) match
line in the plan view aligns with the left side (start) of the profile view.
■ Align Profile And Plan View At Center: When this option is selected, the center of the plan view
aligns with the center point of the profile view.
■ Align Profile And Plan View At End: When this option is selected, the right side (end station) match
line in the plan view aligns with the right side (end) of the profile view.
NOTE The Data References page is not available if you chose All Layouts In The Current Drawing in the
Layout Creation section of the View Frame Group and Layout page.
17 On the Data References page (page 2330), you can select or omit the data you want to be included in your
sheets. Select the check box next to the data references you want displayed in the sheets. Some references
cannot be removed from the selection, such as the alignment and profile associated with these sheets.
If you are including pipe networks in the destination drawing(s), you may want to check the Copy Pipe
Network Labels To Destination Drawings to also copy the labels associated with any selected pipe
networks.
You will only see profile views in the current drawing if you selected the All Layouts in the Current Drawing
option in the Layout Creation section of the View Frame Group and Layout page.
Depending on your Event Manager settings, Event Manager messages may inform you of the location of the
sheet sets, as well as the number of layouts created.
Once the sheets are created, the Sheet Set Manager automatically displays, showing the newly created sheets
in a sheet set. For more information about the Sheet Set Manager, see the Sheet Set Manager Help topics in
the AutoCAD Help.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
NOTE Overrides to the drawing ambient settings at the View Frame Group collection level and the Commands
collection level affect only the specified level. The drawing level settings are not changed.
The topics in this section describe only those settings that affect plan production tool-related commands.
They do not apply to the drawing ambient settings that you can change at the View Frame Group collection
level and the View Frame Group command level, even though those settings are displayed in the Edit Feature
Settings - View Frame Group dialog box. For more information about the drawing ambient settings, see
Specifying Ambient Settings (page 84).
■ To edit settings for a specific command: In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, expand the View Frame
Group collection. Expand the Commands collection. Right-click the name of a command and click
Edit Command Settings. For example, right-click the CreateSheets command and click Edit Command
Settings.
2 To specify the default sheet creation and view frame creation options, right-click either the CreateSheets
or CreateViewFrames commands and click Edit Command Settings.
3 To edit the default naming format for plan production tool objects (such as view frame groups, view
frames, and match lines), expand the Default Name Format property group. Edit the Name Template
settings for each item.
4 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: Right-click View Frame Group collection ➤ Edit Feature Settings
OR
Settings tab: Right-click View Frame collection ➤ Edit Feature Settings
OR
Settings tab: Right-click Match Line collection ➤ Edit Feature Settings
OR
Settings tab: View Frame Group ➤ Commands ➤ Right-click <command-name> ➤ Edit Command
Settings
Dialog Box
Edit Feature Settings (View Frame Group) (page 2319)
Edit Feature Settings (View Frame) (page 2322)
Edit Feature Settings (Match Line) (page 2322)
To change the plan production tool objects style and label settings
1 In Toolspace, on the Settings tab, right-click the View Frame Groups collection. Click Edit Feature
Settings to open the View Frame Group Settings (page 2319) dialog box.
3 To specify default styles for plan production tool objects (view frames and match lines), click the
corresponding field. Click to open the Select Style dialog box.
4 To specify a default view frame or match line style, click View Frame Style or Match Line Style. Click
to open the Select Style dialog box.
5 To specify a default style for view frame or match line labels, click the corresponding field. Click to
open the Select Label Style dialog box.
6 To specify a default location for view frame or match line labels, click the corresponding field and select
a location in the drop-down list.
7 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: right-click View Frame Group collection ➤ Edit Feature Settings
Dialog Box
View Frame Group Settings (page 2319)
Selecting an existing profile view Selecting an existing profile view does not override
the profile view style and band set information used
when the view frames were created.
Using the Create Multiple Profile View wizard Using this option will allow you to step through the
Create Multiple Profile View wizard with several
values pre-populated (some of which cannot be
changed, such as style, station range, etc.).
The options that will either be extracted from the
selected profile view, or gathered from the Create
Multiple Profile View wizard, and subsequently used
in creating profile views for sheets include:
■ split profile view options
■ profile display options
■ pipe network display options
■ data band (band set) information
If desired, you can select an existing profile view when you are using the Create View Frames wizard, and
then, when you are using the Create Sheets wizard, you can modify that profile view using the Multiple
Profile View wizard.
NOTE View frame groups are not dynamically associated with the sheet files that are created from them. Updating
a view frame group, moving match lines, or moving view frames will not affect the sheet files. The same is true
with the sheet files created from the view frame groups. Updating the sheet files has no impact on the view frame
groups.
After a view frame group is created, you can delete the alignment from which it was created, if you need to.
Labeling functionality, such as the ability to display the sheet number in labels in the view frames, is still
maintained even if the original alignment from which the view frame group was created is deleted.
See also:
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, ensure that the correct project folder is identified on the Data
Shortcuts node.
2 Expand the Data Shortcuts ➤ View Frame Groups collection, right-click the desired group, and then
click Create Reference.
The Create View Frame Groups Reference dialog box is displayed, in which you can optionally change
properties of the reference view frame group, as described in the following steps.
3 In the Create View Frame Group Reference dialog box, to change the source of the reference, select the
source in the Source View Frame Group list.
4 Enter a unique name for the view frame group and optionally, a description.
5 For the view frames and match lines included in this view frame group, you can specify a style, label
style, and layer, or accept the defaults.
1 In Toolspace, on the Prospector tab, in Master View, expand the Projects ➤ <project name> ➤ View
Frame Groups collection, right-click the desired view frame group, and then click Create Reference.
The Create Surface Reference dialog box is displayed, in which you can optionally change properties
of the reference group, as described in the following steps.
2 In the Create View Frame Group Reference dialog box, to change the source of the reference, select the
source in the Source View Frame Group list.
3 Enter a unique name for the view frame group and optionally, a description.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Right-Click Menu (for data shortcut project)
Prospector tab: Data Shortcuts ➤ View Frame Groups ➤ <view frame group name> ➤ Create Reference
Toolspace Right-Click Menu (for Vault project)
Prospector tab: Projects ➤ <project name> ➤ View Frame Groups ➤ <view frame group name> ➤ Create
Reference
Command Line
CreateViewFrameGroupReference (for use only with view frame groups in Vault)
Dialog Box
Create View Frame Group Reference (page 2454)
■ Although you can move view frames and match lines within a view frame group, view frame groups
themselves are not designed to be moved as an entity.
■ You can delete an entire view frame group, which deletes all view frames, match lines, and labels associated
with the group.
■ You can delete individual view frames or match lines within a view frame group.
1 Click a view frame in the group. Click Plan Production tab ➤ Modify View Frame panel Delete
Group .
2 The view frame group, and all view frame and match line objects belonging to it, are removed from
the View Frame Groups collection on the Prospector tab. The view frames and match lines are
automatically removed from the drawing.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Click a view frame in the group. Click Plan Production tab ➤ Modify View Frame panel Delete Group
Prospector tree: Right-click View Frame Groups collection ➤ View frame group ➤ Delete
Command Line
DeleteViewFrameGroup
1 In either model space, click the view frame you want to move or rotate.
■ Slider grip: Moves the view frame forward or backward along the alignment. If the view frame
is moved off the alignment, the offset to the alignment is maintained. If the view frame remains
parallel to the tangent to the alignment, the grips stay on alignment.
■ Rotation grip: Rotates the view frame about the center of the view frame.
NOTE If the view frame is set to align with a north arrow block in the drawing, the rotation grip is not
displayed (not available).
NOTE When two view frames share a common match line, and you delete one of the view frames, the shared
match line is not removed.
For more information, see Deleting View Frame Groups (page 1918).
■ In the Prospector tree, expand the desired View Frame Group object, then right-click a view frame and
click Delete.
The view frame and its associated match line object(s) are removed from the View Frames and Match
Lines collections in the Prospector tree, and in the drawing.
NOTE When two view frames share a common match line, and you delete one of the view frames, the shared
match line is not removed.
1 In the Settings tree, expand the View Frame collection, and then expand the Label Styles collection.
3 Use the Label Style Composer to edit the default Standard view frame label style, or create your own
custom label style for view frames.
■ to select a single view frame label, use Ctrl + left-click on a view frame label
3 Use the Edit View Frame Labels dialog box to select a different label style, create a new label style, edit
the existing label style, or change the label location.
■ to select a single view frame label, use Ctrl + left-click on a view frame label
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
■ entering the InsertViewFrame command and specifying an insertion point in the drawing
■ If there is no gap (blank space) between the selected view frame and its previous view frame, the new
view frame is inserted before the selected view frame (towards the beginning of the alignment).
■ If there is a gap (blank space) between the selected view frame and its previous view frame, the new view
frame is inserted by finding the center (at the alignment) of the two match lines, and inserting the new
view frame centered on this point. If the selected view frame is the first view frame in the view frame
group, and therefore, has no left match line, a new left match line is created.
■ If the selected point is a valid location for a view frame, the new view frame is inserted, centered in the
selected point.
■ If the selected point is not a valid location for a view frame, a message indicates that the location is not
valid for view frame insertion, and the new view frame is not inserted.
A valid location is some other point along the alignment, or close to the alignment.
■ In the drawing area, right-click on a view frame and click Insert View Frame.
Quick Reference
Drawing Area Shortcut Menu
1 In the Settings tree, expand the Match Line collection, and then expand the Match Line Style collection.
2 Double-click a match line style to open the Match Line Style dialog box.
4 Select a View Direction (2D or 3D). You can set different hatch patterns for 2D and 3D.
5 In the Component Hatch Display section at the bottom, click the current value for Pattern. The Hatch
Pattern dialog box is displayed.
6 Select a hatch type from the list. Optionally, you may browse to another hatch pattern palette. For
more information about hatch patterns, see “Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fill” in the AutoCAD
Help.
9 Click either Apply or OK on the Display tab of the Match Line Style dialog box.
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
Settings tab: Expand Match Line ➤ Match Line Styles collection ➤ right-click style name ➤ Edit
Command Line
EditMatchLineStyle
100 18+00
50 18+50
10 18+60
1 18+65
NOTE This option will not accept values that cause the match lines to be placed in undesirable locations, such as
before the previous match line or before the beginning of the alignment. If a rounding calculation would result
in the match line being placed in an undesirable location, then the rounding calculation is ignored and the match
lines are placed at calculated station.
When this check box is not selected (cleared), match line positioning on the view frame is determined by
using a rounding value based on derived stations.
1 In either model space or paper space, click the match line you want to move.
■ Slider grip: Moves the match line forward or backward along the alignment.
■ Rotation grip: Rotates the match line about the center of the match line.
■ Start: Places the match line label at the start of the match line, near the top of the view frame.
■ End: Places the match line label at the end of the match line, near the bottom of the view frame.
■ Middle: Places the match line label at the middle of the match line.
■ Alignment Intersection: Places the match line label where the alignment intersects the match line.
In the Match Line collection in the Toolspace Settings tree, you can create and edit match line label styles.
For the match line text component, by default you can select from the following properties to add to a
match line label:
See Creating and Editing Label Styles (page 1656) for more information.
1 In the Settings tree, expand the Match Line collection, and then expand the Label Styles collection.
2 Expand the Match Line Left collection. Double-click the Standard label style.
3 Use the Label Style Composer to edit the default Standard match line label style, or create your own
custom label style for the left side match line.
■ to select a single match line label, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking on a match line label
■ use the Edit Match Line Label dialog box to edit a single match line label
You can select a different label style, create a new label style, edit the existing label style, or change the label
location for the selected match lines.
■ to select a single match line label, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking on a match line label
Quick Reference
Toolspace Shortcut Menu
On the Toolspace Settings tab, in the View Frame ➤ Label Style collection, set up label styles to use for
view frames. Do the same for match lines using the Match Line ➤ Label Style collection.
See also:
If you are saving sheets to the current drawing file, and the current drawing file is already in the vault, that
drawing file cannot be checked in to vault automatically. This must be done by you.
The Add To Autodesk Vault check box is not available for editing (grayed out) when sheets are being saved
to the current file. In other words, when All Layouts In The Current Drawing is selected on the View Frame
Group And Layouts page in the Create Sheets wizard, the Add To Autodesk Vault option is also not available
(grayed out).
■ surfaces
■ alignments
■ profiles
When you select an object by placing a check mark next to it, a data reference (data shortcut) to that object
is created in the sheet. This provides a way for you to include or exclude certain objects from the sheets.
Including data references in your sheets instead the actual data ensures that the geometry of the source data
can be modified only in the source drawing, not in the resulting sheet drawing. However, display styles and
labels for the reference object can be modified in the sheet drawing.
Another benefit of using data references is that if the source data objects change, the information displayed
in the sheets dynamically updates.
For more information, see Using Data Shortcuts (page 145).
The following table describes the display styles available for the plan production tools components:
For more information about styles, see Object and Label Styles (page 66), View Frame Style dialog box (page
2336) and Match Line Style dialog box (page 2337).
For more information about labeling for view frames and match lines, see Labeling View Frames (page 1921),
and Labeling Match Lines (page 1926).
See also:
■ Edit Feature Settings - View Frame Group Dialog Box (page 2319)
See also:
View frame group settings Edit Feature Settings - View Frame Group Dialog
Box (page 2319)
View frame group styles Plan Production Tools Object Styles and Display
(page 1929)
See also:
For more information about the contents of this shortcut menu, see “The Object Collection (Settings Tree)”.
Expand the View Frame collection to display and edit the styles that are available for view frames.
View frame settings Edit Feature Settings - View Frame Dialog Box (page
2322)
View frame styles Plan Production Tools Object Styles and Display
(page 1929)
NOTE When creating plan and profile or profile only sheets, match lines will always be inserted, and the Insert
Match Lines check box is selected but unavailable (you cannot remove the check mark). If you are creating plan
only sheets, you can remove the check mark from the box and match lines will not be inserted in the resulting
plan views.
Properties of match lines, such as where they are positioned on the alignment, a match line style, and a
match line label style, can be specified on the Match Lines page of the Create View Frames wizard. You can
set defaults for their styles using the Match Line settings available on the Settings tab in Toolspace.
Match lines have a match line mask area on the outside of each match line. This lets you mask data outside
of the match lines. You can set hatch pattern options for this area using the Match Line Style dialog box.
Match lines and the match line mask area are displayed only in plan views, not in profile views. The match
line mask area exists only in paper space.
The Display tab of the Match Line Style dialog box includes an option to specify a hatch pattern for this
match line mask area. Use this option to help you make your construction documents look better by masking
the drawing data that exists outside of the match lines. See Editing the Match Line Mask Area (page 1923) for
more information.
Match line labels are displayed on top of the match line mask area, and are therefore visible over it.
For more information about the contents of this shortcut menu, see “The Object Collection (Settings Tree)”.
Match line settings Edit Feature Settings - Match Line Dialog Box (page
2322)
Match line styles Plan Production Tools Object Styles and Display
(page 1929)
1 Use the Create Multiple Views (page 1259) command to generate production-ready section views. When
creating the section views, you must select a template that contains a Section-type viewport (page 1902).
3 In the Create Section Sheets (page 2340) dialog box, select the section view group for which to create
layouts. You can filter the selection in the Section View Group list by first selecting an alignment and
sample line group.
5 Specify the Sheet Set options. You can add the layouts to an existing sheet set, or create a new sheet
set file.
NOTE The Sheet Set Manager opens and displays the newly-created sheets. Double-click on a sheet name
to display it in a layout view. You can also use the Quick View Layouts button on the application status
bar to open the sheets. You can also right-click the Model button and click Display Model and Layout
Tabs to display tabs for accessing the sheets.
Quick Reference
Ribbon
Command Description
Accessing Commands
You can access many AutoCAD Civil 3D commands using more than one method.
In Help, click the Quick Reference tab on a tabbed Help topic to display a table providing the methods
available for accessing a specific command. Not all methods are available for all commands. Where applicable,
the following information is available on the Quick Reference tab:
Menu Describes how to access the command from the menu bar.
Toolspace Shortcut Describes how to access the command from Toolspace by right-
Menu clicking an object in the Prospector or Settings tree.
Object Shortcut Describes how to access the command from a drawing by right-
Menu clicking the applicable object.
Command Line Describes how to access the command from the command line.
Toolbar Shows the toolbar icon to click or describes how to access the
command from a toolbar.
Dialog Box Provides a link to the dialog box that is opened by the command.
1937
Command Listing
Use the links in this section to access Help topics that describe the commands that are available at the
command line in AutoCAD Civil 3D.
Drawing and Data Sharing Drawing Sharing Command Reference (page 1865)
Google Earth Import and Google Earth Import and Export Command Reference
Export (page 1873)
HEC-RAS Import and Export HEC-RAS Import and Export Command Reference (page
1890)
NOTE Exploding an object results in an unnamed AutoCAD block. Exploding again results in a base AutoCAD
entity.
Most AutoCAD Civil 3D objects support other commands to some degree. These commands include Copy,
Move, Mirror, Offset, Scale, Block/wBlock, Rotate, Trim and Extend.
NOTE You can get the “Copy” behavior by using the Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy command on
the ribbon, or by entering COPY at the command line or by using the Basic Modify Tools ➤ Copy command on
the shortcut menu. You can get the “Block/Wblock” behavior by using the Clipboard ➤ Copy or Clipboard ➤
Copy With Base Point commands on the shortcut menu, pressing Ctrl + C, or entering WBLOCK at the command
line.
Surface
If the surface is erased or exploded, profiles and sections that reference that surface become static.
Mirror will create a copy but will not honor the mirror settings.
Point groups used in the surface definition are included as part of the Wblock.
Point
When Wblocking and Inserting points, or copying points, a dialog box is displayed to resolve number
conflicts.
Table
Wblocking a table also copies the required geometry. For example, the points are copied along with the
point table.
Alignment
Exploding or erasing an alignment explodes or erases all objects that are dependent on the alignment
(such as profiles, profile views, sample lines, sections, and section views).
Copying the alignment will create an alignment with a new name in the same site. All dependent objects
will be copied and included with the new alignment.
Wblock/Insert will copy the alignment and all dependent objects into a new site.
Grading
There are two distinct copy operations which can be done on a grading object. Copying the footprint
feature line or individual target line creates a new feature line in a new site. Copying the entire grading
object copies the footprint, target, and criteria.
The footprint can be moved. The target line cannot be moved.
If the grading criteria references a surface, the surface will be included in a Wblock/Insert operation.
Profile
Erasing a profile or section erases it from all profile or section views.
Profiles and sections can only be moved vertically within a view.
Profile View
If the profile or profile view is Wblocked, all objects required for the profile or profile view (such as the
surface, alignment, profile, sample lines, and sections) are copied. If the objects are copied into the same
drawing, a new site is created.
Sample Line
You cannot copy or move a Sample Line
Section
Erasing a profile or section erases it from all profile or section views.
Profiles and sections can only be moved vertically within a view.
If the sample line, section, or section view is Wblocked, all objects that are required for the sample line,
section, or section view (such as the surface, alignment, sections, and sample lines) are copied. If the objects
are copied into the same drawing, a new site is created.
Assembly
The names of assemblies and subassemblies are incremented when copied. Copying an assembly copies
the assembly and all dependent subassemblies.
Mirror will create a copy but will not honor the mirror settings.
Corridor
Copying or Wblocking a corridor copies all of the dependent data such as assemblies, alignments, and
surfaces.
Pipe Network
Network Objects are not accessible through Object Enabler environment.
Pipe
Copying a network part profile will create a copy of the parent network part (pipe or structure).
Structure
Copying, mirroring, arraying, and offsetting pipes and structures updates the references of any connected
parts.
Copied pipes and structures will be in the same network.
Moving or rotating a structure causes any connected parts to move with it. (the connections are main-
tained).
Moving or rotating a pipe breaks the connection to any connected parts.
Scaling a pipe or structure affects position but does not affect size.
Wblocking pipes and structures copies all dependent objects.
Survey Figure
Using the offset command on a survey figure generates a feature line object, not a survey figure.
The move commands dissassociates the figure from the model.
Intersection
Explode will keep the layer and display settings.
Building Site
Explode will keep the layer and display settings.
1943
1944
Alignment Dialog Boxes
49
The following topics provide information about the Alignment dialog boxes.
At Selected Curves
Specifies to apply the automatic widening at the curves that are selected using the Select Curves Along
Parent Alignment button. For more information, see To add automatic widening at selected curves (page
967).
1945
Parent Alignment Design Criteria File
Displays the name and location of the design criteria file that is associated with the parent alignment for
this offset alignment.
Widening Method
The default value for this property is defined in the Widening Methods section of the specified design
criteria file.
Widening To Apply On
This property specifies how the manual widening is applied. The choices are: a.) Inside Only: Applies the
automatic widening to just the insides of curves, not the outsides of the specified curves. b.) Outside Only:
Applies the automatic widening to just the outsides of curves, not the insides of the specified curves.
c.)Both Sides: Applies the automatic widening to both the inside and outside of the specified curves.
When specifying widening manually, all other controls in the property table are disabled, except for this
one.
The default value for this property is defined in the command settings (Automatic Widening Around
Curves property group).
Attainment Method
The default value for this property is defined in the Widening Methods section of the specified design
criteria file.
Specifies the lane width or click and select a distance in the drawing area. The default value for this
property is defined in the command settings (Superelevation Options property group).
Wheelbase Length
Specifies a numeric value for the wheelbase length that is used in the formula for widening around curves.
This value is used only when the widening method is through design standards. It is not used when the
widening is specified manually.
The default value for this property is defined in the command settings (Automatic Widening Around
Curves property group).
Transition Length
Specifies the length of the transition to which the automatic widening is applied. The default value for
this property is defined in the command settings for the Create Offset Alignment command (Automatic
Widening Around Curves property group, Manual Widening Transition Length property).
Widening To Apply On
This property specifies how the manual widening is applied. The choices are: a.) Inside Only: Applies the
automatic widening to just the insides of curves, not the outsides of the specified curves. b.) Outside Only:
Applies the automatic widening to just the outsides of curves, not the insides of the specified curves.
c.)Both Sides: Applies the automatic widening to both the inside and outside of the specified curves.
When specifying widening manually, all other controls in the property table are disabled, except for this
one.
The default value for this property is defined in the command settings (Automatic Widening Around
Curves property group).
Related procedures:
NOTE Two column configurations are available: default and criteria-based design. To switch between the
configurations, or to create your own configuration, right-click a column heading, and click Customize Columns.
This window remains open when you grip edit the alignment or enter another command. The window
closes when you either delete the currently selected alignment, click the X button, or click on the
Alignment Layout Toolbar (page 1959).
No.
Specifies the entity number in the order of selection. This variable changes as entities are selected and
deselected.
Number
Specifies the entity number in the order in which it appears along the alignment. This value changes as
alignment entities ahead of it are created or deleted. This column cannot be hidden or deleted.
Type
Specifies either line, curve, or spiral as the entity type.
Length
Specifies the length of the entity.
A warning symbol is displayed in this cell if the sub-entity length value is not greater than or equal
to the value in the Minimum Length cell.
Direction
Specifies the direction of the entity.
Minimum Length
Specifies the minimum transition length defined in the design criteria file (page 2773) for the current design
speed.
Radius
Specifies the radius of the curve.
A warning symbol is displayed in this cell if the sub-entity radius value is not greater than or equal
to the value in the Minimum Radius cell.
Minimum Radius
Specifies the minimum radius value defined in the design criteria file (page 2773) for the current design speed.
A
Specifies the A value.
Constraint1
Specifies the constraint of the entity: either fixed, free, or floating.
Constraint2
Specifies the number of points in the constraint of the tangent.
If the entity was created by best fit, [...] appears to the right of the Best Fit entry. If the entity has been
edited since it was created from best fit regression data, appears. Click [...] to open the Regression Data
vista (page 2226) and review the regression points and synchronize the entity to the regression data.
Bearing
Specifies the direction of the entity.
Start Station
Specifies the starting station for the entity.
End Station
Specifies the ending station for the entity.
End Point
Specifies the coordinates for the end point of the entity.
Spiral Type
Specifies the spiral type.
Incurve
Specifies whether the curve is incoming or outgoing.
Compound
Displays True when a spiral has a curve at each end.
Radius In
Specifies the incoming curve radius.
Radius Out
Specifies the outgoing curve radius.
Total X
Specifies the tangent distance between the beginning point of the incoming spiral (TS) and the endpoint
of the spiral and beginning point of the circular curve.
Total Y
Specifies the perpendicular offset distance between the beginning point of the circular curve (SC) and the
incoming tangent.
Short Tangent
Specifies the distance from the spiral point of the horizontal tangent intersection (SPI) to the end of the
spiral (SPI).
Long Tangent
Specifies the distance from the beginning of the spiral (TS) to the spiral point of horizontal tangent
intersection (SPI).
P
Specifies the offset distance from the incoming tangent to the beginning point (PC) of the shifted circular
curve.
K
Specifies the abscissa between the beginning point of the spiral (TS) and the beginning point of the shifted
circular curve.
Spiral Definition
Specifies the spiral definition.
SPI Northing
Specifies the XY coordinates of the spiral point of horizontal tangent intersection.
SPI Easting
Specifies the XY coordinates of the spiral point of horizontal tangent intersection.
Center Point
Specifies the coordinate of the center point of a circular curve.
■ Displays False if the curve angle is defined as less than 180 degrees.
Compound
Displays True when the spiral has a curve at each end.
Delta Angle
Specifies the angular difference in the direction of the incoming and out going tangents.
External Tangent
Specifies the distance from the beginning of the curve (PC) to the PI or from the PI to the end of the curve
(PT).
Chord Direction
Specifies the bearing along the line joining the beginning of the curve (PC) and the end of the curve (PT).
External Secant
Specifies the radial difference from the PI to the midpoint of the curve.
PI Included Angle
Specifies the included angle between the incoming and outgoing tangents of the curve.
Chord Length
Displays the chord length of the circular curve.
Specifies the distance along the line joining the beginning of the curve (PC) and the end of the curve (PT).
Mid-Ordinate
Specifies the distance from the midpoint of the curve, perpendicular to the midpoint of the chord.
Design Speed
Specifies the design speed for each sub-entity.
A warning symbol is displayed in this cell if the sub-entity radius value is not greater than or equal
to the value in the Minimum Radius cell.
A warning symbol is displayed in this cell if the sub-entity length value is not greater than or equal
to the value in the Minimum Length cell.
Attainment Method
Specifies the superelevation attainment method for each sub-entity. The Attainment Method is defined
in the design criteria file (page 2773).
Related procedures:
Select All
Selects all check boxes in the Label column.
Deselect All
Clears all check boxes in the Label column.
NOTE The Abbreviations (page 2077) tab in the Drawing Settings dialog box also lists these geometry points.
Label Column
Specifies whether to label a geometry point.
Related procedures:
■ Minor station
■ Geometry points
■ Station equations
■ Design speeds
NOTE You can add a label type multiple times in a label set. For example you could add geometry points twice
and then apply a style to the first entry of geometry points at specified starting and ending stations. Then, in
the second entry for geometry points, you could specify another style and the starting and ending stations
where you want to apply that style.
Style Selection
Specifies the style options. Create a new style, copy or edit the current style selection, or pick a style from
the drawing.
Style Detail
Opens the Style Detail dialog box. Preview the style and creation information.
NOTE You must first select major stations in order to add minor stations.
Resets manual or grip edits that may have been made to any labels.
Type
Displays the label types added from the Type list.
Style
Displays the label style selected and added from the Style list. Click to change the style.
Start Station
Displays the starting station at which the label is displayed. By default, the start station is at the beginning
of the alignment. To change the default display, clear the check box and enter a new value.
End Station
Displays the ending station at which the label is displayed. By default, the end station is at the end of the
alignment. To change the default display, clear the check box and enter a new value.
geometry points using a different style. Click to select the geometry points to label.
Profile
For Profile Geometry Points label types, specifies which profile’s geometry points are labeled on the
Related procedures:
panels that can be collapsed by clicking . If design criteria has not been associated with the alignment,
then only the Layout Parameters panel is available.
You cannot dock the Alignment Layout Parameters window, but you can pin or resize it.
This window stays open when you grip edit the alignment or enter another command. The window closes
when you either delete the currently selected alignment, click the X button in the upper right-hand corner
of the window, or click on the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar (page 1959).
Design Speed
Specifies the design speed of the current sub-entity.
NOTE If multiple speeds are assigned to a sub-entity, then the highest speed is used to look up constraint values
from the design criteria file and to validate the design checks. This ensures the safest design for that sub-entity.
A warning symbol in the Property column indicates that the sub-entity design violates the criteria set
in the design criteria file. You can find and correct the specific parameter that has been violated by examining
the Layout Parameters panel.
Minimum Radius Table
Defines the minimum radii for a given road type and design speed.
Attainment Method
Specifies how superelevation is applied, and the method (crowned or planar) that is used to calculate
superelevation transition stations for different types of roadways.
Layout Parameters
Use this panel to examine and change the general layout parameters of the selected sub-entity.
Click Show More to expand the number of parameters that appears in the window. The default, collapsed
view displays editable and other important parameters. Use the horizontal and vertical scroll bars when the
list is longer or wider than the window.
When a design criteria file has been associated with an alignment, the Constraints column displays the value
to which a given parameter is limited. The selected design criteria file defines the constrained values. When
a parameter value violates the range displayed in the Constraints column, a warning symbol appears
next to the parameter name.
NOTE The constraint definition for each alignment entity determines the parameters that are displayed in the
Layout Parameters panel.
Type
Specifies either Line, Curve, or Spiral as the sub-entity type.
Constraint1
Specifies either Fixed, Free, or Floating as the general constraint type.
Constraint2
Specifies a detailed description of the entity constraints.
Length
Specifies the Line length.
NOTE You can edit the length of a floating line that is attached to the end of an entity.
Bearing
Specifies the direction of the line.
Start Station
Specifies the starting station of the line for the solved portions of the alignment.
End Station
Specifies the end station of the Line for the solved portions of the alignment.
Start Point
Specifies the XY coordinates for the start point of the Line.
End Point
Specifies the XY coordinates for the endpoint of the Line.
Type
Specifies Curve as the entity type.
Constraint2
Specifies a detailed description of the entity constraints.
Radius
Specifies the radius of the curve entity.
Length
Specifies the length of the curve entity.
Center Point
Specifies the XY coordinates of the center point.
Start Station
Specifies the starting station of the curve for the solved portion of the alignment. Unsolved curves do not
display a Start Station.
Start Point
Specifies the XY coordinates of the start point of the curve.
End Station
Specifies the end station of the curve for solved portions of the alignment. Unsolved curves do not display
an end station.
End Point
Specifies the XY coordinates of the endpoint of the curve.
■ Displays False if the curve angle is defined as less than 180 degrees.
Compound
■ Displays True if the curve is defined as compound to the curve before it.
■ Displays False if the curve is defined in the reverse direction to the curve before it.
Delta Angle
Specifies the included angle of the solved portion of the curve.
Chord Direction
Specifies the bearing along the line joining the beginning of the curve (PC) and the end of the curve (PT).
External Secant
Specifies the radial difference from the PI to the midpoint of the curve.
PI Included Angle
Specifies the included angle between the incoming and outgoing tangents of the curve.
Chord Length
Specifies the distance along the line joining the beginning of the curve (PC) and the end of the curve (PT).
Mid-Ordinate
Specifies the distance from the midpoint of the curve, perpendicular to the midpoint of the chord.
PI Station
Specifies the station value of the PI by adding the PC to the PI tangent length to the station value at the
beginning of the curve (PC).
Spiral
Entity
Specifies the spiral number relative to the order of creation.
Type
Specifies Spiral as the entity type.
Constraint1
Specifies the spiral as either Fixed or Free.
Constraint2
■ Specifies the Spiral In, Radius, and Spiral Out for free spirals that are part of a Spiral-Curve-Spiral group.
■ Specifies the start point, direction, radius, and length for fixed spirals.
Spiral Type
Displays True when the spiral has a curve at both ends.
Start Station
Specifies the Start Station at the beginning of the spiral.
Start Point
Specifies the XY coordinates of the Start Point of the spiral.
End Station
Specifies the end station for the solved spiral portions of the alignment. Unsolved portions do not display
an end station.
Incurve
Specifies the incoming curve radius.
Length
Specifies the length of the Spiral.
A
Specifies the A value.
Compound
■ Displays True if the curve is defined as compound to the curve before it.
■ Displays False if the curve is defined in the reverse direction to the curve before it.
Radius In
Specifies the incoming curve radius.
Radius Out
Specifies the outgoing curve radius.
Total X
Specifies the tangent distance between the beginning point of the incoming spiral (TS) and the endpoint
of the spiral and beginning point of the circular curve.
Total Y
Specifies the perpendicular offset distance between the beginning point of the circular curve (SC) and the
incoming tangent.
Short Tangent
Specifies the distance from the spiral point of the horizontal tangent intersection (SPI) to the end of the
spiral (SPI).
Long Tangent
Specifies the distance from the beginning of the spiral (TS) to the spiral point of horizontal tangent
intersection (SPI).
P
Specifies the offset distance from the incoming tangent to the beginning point (PC) of the shifted circular
curve.
K
Specifies the abscissa between the beginning point of the spiral (TS) and the beginning point of the shifted
circular curve.
Spiral Definition
This read-only field specifies the spiral definition. If the alignment is created using the Alignment Layout
tools, or converted from AutoCAD entities, then the spiral definition for these spirals is specified as one
of the following values: Clothoid, Bloss, Cubic (JP), Cubic Parabola, Sinusoidal, Sine Half-Wavelength,
Bi-Quadratic.
If the alignment is created using a dynamic offset alignment command, the spirals have a special geometry
based on the parent alignment spiral definition with the offset parameter. So, for dynamic offset alignments,
the spiral definition can be specified as one of the following values: Offset Clothoid, Offset Bloss, Offset
Cubic (JP), Offset Cubic Parabola, Offset Sinusoidal, Offset Sine Half-Wavelength, Offset Bi-Quadratic.
SPI Station
Specifies the station value of the SPI. Adds the tangential distance from the beginning of the Spiral (TS)
to the SPI to the station value of the TS.
SPI Northing
Specifies the XY coordinates of the spiral point of horizontal tangent intersection.
SPI Easting
Specifies the XY coordinates of the spiral point of horizontal tangent intersection.
Design Checks
The Design Checks panel displays the name and contents of the design check set that is associated with the
alignment.
When the sub-entity design violates a design check, a warning symbol appears next to the affected
design check.
NOTE The Design Checks panel is available only for alignments that use a design check set.
Related procedures:
Insert PI
Breaks a fixed line into two adjacent fixed lines by creating a point of intersection (PI) at a point that you
specify.
Delete PI
Creates a single tangent from two adjacent tangents by removing their point of intersection (PI).
Break Apart PI
Separates the point of intersection (PI) where the endpoints of two fixed or floating tangents meet.
■ After the AutoCAD entity has been converted, it may be joined to the solved alignment geometry
using the alignment layout tools.
Delete Sub-Entity
Deletes a specified alignment sub-entity.
Pick Sub-entity
Displays a selected sub-entity's parameters for editing.
Alignment Entities
Displays a horizontal table of numeric data about multiple, selected alignment subentities.
Undo
Reverses the last AutoCAD Civil 3D or AutoCAD command.
Line Tools
Add constraint-based fixed, free, or floating lines to an alignment.
Curve Tools
Add constraint-based fixed, free, or floating curves to an alignment.
Floating Reverse Curve with Spirals (From curve, radius, through point)
Adds a floating reverse spiral-spiral-curve group, which is defined by a specified radius and pass-through
point, to a curve.
■ A tangent and a curve, creating a compound spiral at one end and a simple spiral at the other end.
Spiral Tools
Fixed Spiral
Adds a fixed spiral, which is defined by a specified radius and length, to the end of a line or curve.
Related procedures:
See also:
Description
Specifies an optional description of the current alignment style.
Object Style
Specifies the alignment style. Select other styles from the list.
Style Selection
Specifies the style options. You can create a style, copy or edit the current style selection, or pick a style
from drawing.
Style Detail
Opens the Style Detail dialog box. Preview the style and creation information.
Type
Specifies the alignment type: Centerline, Offset, Curb Return, or Miscellaneous.
Show Tooltips
Controls whether tooltips are displayed for the object in the drawing (not over toolbar icons).
Y
Specifies the Y coordinate value for the Station Reference Point. By default, this value corresponds to the
starting point on the alignment. Enter a value or pick a point in the drawing.
Station
Specifies the station at the reference point.
Station Information
Start
Displays the beginning station for the first solved entity in the alignment.
End
Displays the ending station for the last solved entity in the alignment.
Length
Displays the length of the alignment as the summation of the length of solved entities along each
alignment.
Station Equations
Equation
Displays the index number of the equation sorted by raw station location on the alignment.
Station Back
Displays the station value at the location of the Station Equation value before any Station Equations are
assigned. If there is only one Station Equation value, then the Raw Station Back and Station Back values
match.
If the alignment contains more than one Station Equation value, then the Station Back value of all Station
Equation values, except for the first equation, are relative to the Station Ahead value and the Station
Equation value directly before it.
Increase/Decrease
Specifies whether the stations increase or decrease in value following the Station Equation location.
Comment
Specifies notes or instructions relevant to the station equations. Enter optional comments. These comments
can be used in labels for station equations.
Masking Table
Region
Identifies the mask region along the alignment.
Mask
When selected, the mask is applied; the mask region does not display. When deselected, the mask is
removed; the region displays. A deselected mask remains in the table for future use.
Lock to Start
Click to set the start of the first mask region at the start of the alignment.
Start Station
Displays the alignment station at which the mask region begins.
Lock to End
Click to set the end of the last mask region at the end of the alignment.
End Station
Displays the alignment station at which the mask region ends.
Comment
Use this space to add text notes about the mask region.
Station
Displays the station location of the design speed.
Design Speed
Specifies the design speed for the location. Click in the cell to enter a new design speed or accept the
default.
Comment
Specifies notes or instructions relevant to the design speeds. Enter optional comments. These comments
can be used in labels.
Description
Specifies an optional description for the profile.
Type
Specifies whether the current profile represents the existing ground or a finished grade.
Surface Name
Displays the name of the surface from which the EG Profile gets elevations.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the centerline of the parent horizontal alignment: either 0 for a centerline
profile, a positive number for a right offset, or a negative number for a left offset.
■ Static: The profile shows surface elevations at the time of its creation. It does not update to reflect
changes that occur later.
Layer
Specifies the drawing layer on which the profile is placed.
Style
Specifies the style used by the profile.
Station Start/End
Specifies the first and last station numbers for the profile. The station numbers represent distances along
the parent horizontal alignment.
Elevation Minimum/Maximum
Specifies the highest and lowest elevation values that occur along the profile.
Description
Specifies an optional description for the profile.
Stations Start/End
Specifies the first and last station numbers for the profile. The station numbers represent distances along
the parent horizontal alignment.
Style
Specifies the style used by the profile.
Band Style
Specifies the band style used by the profile.
Update Mode
Specifies whether the offset alignment reacts to edits of the parent alignment:
■ Dynamic. The offset is updated with any changes to the parent alignment.
■ Static. The offset alignment geometry is preserved, unaffected by changes to the parent alignment.
Lock Mode
For dynamic update mode, specifies how the offset alignment is associated with the geometry of the parent
alignment:
■ Geometry Locking. The start and end of the offset are located in relation to the nearest geometry points
on the parent alignment.
■ Station Locking. The start and end of the offset are locked to the specified start and end stations on
the parent alignment.
Parent Alignment 2
Name
Specifies the alignment that forms the basis of the design at the end of the curb return alignment.
Update Mode
Specifies whether the curb return alignment reacts to edits of the parent alignment or offset. This field is
editable.
■ Dynamic. The curb return alignment is updated in response to edits of other intersection objects.
■ Static. The curb return alignment is at a fixed location, and does not respond to edits of other
intersection objects.
Lock Mode
Specifies that the curb return is always geometry locked. The start and end of the curb return offset are
located in relation to the nearest geometry points on the parent alignment.
See also:
NOTE The snap value is based on zero. For example, if the current radius is 150.5 and the radius snap value is
10, when you grip edit the alignment to the next highest radius the radius value is 160, not 160.5.
Marker Style
Specifies the style for the point on the alignment. Click to open the Pick Marker Style dialog box where
you can select a style or <None>.
Arrowhead
Type
Specifies the arrowhead style for the alignment direction arrow. Select a style from the list or select User
Arrow to select an AutoCAD block.
■ Use Size in Absolute Units: Specifies that the arrowhead size is an absolute value based on the displayed
units. Enter the value.
■ Use Size Relative to Screen: Specifies that the size of the arrowhead is a percentage of the drawing
screen size. Enter the percentage.
Inches/Meters
Specify value for feet or meters.
Fit Options
Specifies how the arrow is displayed when the profile segment is shorter than the arrowhead. Select Shrink,
Omit, or Always Draw.
Fixed Scale
Specifies independent fixed scale values when Size Options is set to Use Fixed Scale. Enter a value for X.
Copy to Clipboard
Copies regression data to the clipboard with the appropriate formatting. This tool is useful for importing
the regression data into a spreadsheet.
Point Northing
Northing value of the point that is closest to the regression point on the entity.
Point Easting
Easting value of the point that is closest to the regression point on the entity.
Offset to Entity
Specifies the distance of the regression point from the best fit entity.
Northing on Entity
Specifies the Northing ordinate from the best fit entity.
Easting on Entity
Specifies the Easting ordinate from the best fit entity.
Regression Graph
This graph displays the regression points’ relationship to the best fit entity. The red line represents the
regression points and the green line represents the best fit entity. Selecting a row in the Regression Points
table displays an X and dashed line in the graph to indicate the location of the selected point.
Related procedures:
Angle Tolerance
Specifies the weeding angle factor.
Distance
Specifies the maximum distance between vertices. If the distance between vertices on an entity is greater
than the supplementing factor, then points are added along the entity at equal intervals that are less than
or equal to the supplementing distance. The smaller the distance, the greater the number of supplemented
points.
Related procedures:
Related procedures:
Type List
Specifies the type of alignment (Centerline, Offset, Curb Return, or Miscellaneous).
Description
Specifies an optional description of the alignment.
Starting Station
Specifies the station value that is assigned to the beginning of the first alignment entity created.
By default, this value is the lowest station that you specified, or the starting station of the beginning
sub-entity that you selected.
NOTE Use the Station Control tab in the Alignment Properties dialog box to change the starting station after
you create an alignment.
Specifies a site for the alignment. Select a site from the Site list, or click to either create a site or select
one from an object in the drawing. The alignment and the object you select in the drawing are associated
with the same site.
NOTE The default selection is <None>, which places the alignment in the top-level Alignments collection in
Prospector. See Alignment and Site Interaction (page 781) for more information.
Alignment Style
Alignment Style List
Displays the current style. Click the arrow to select another alignment style in the drawing.
Style Selection
Specifies the style options. Create a style, copy or edit the current style selection, or pick a style from
drawing.
Style Detail
Opens the Style Detail dialog box. Preview the style and creation information.
Alignment Layer
Alignment Layer Display List
Displays the layer on which the alignment object is created.
Object Layer
Opens the Object Layer Dialog Box (page 2221), in which you can select or create a layer on which the
alignment is drawn.
Style Detail
Opens the Style Detail dialog box. Preview the label set and creation information.
Design Criteria Tab (Create Alignment from Existing Alignment Dialog Box)
Use this tab to specify the design criteria settings, including the design criteria file and design check set.
Name
Specifies the name of the alignment. Each alignment must have a unique name.
Description
Specifies an optional description of the alignment.
Starting Station
Specifies the station value that is assigned to the beginning of the first alignment entity created.
By default, this value is the lowest station that you specified, or the starting station of the beginning
sub-entity that you selected.
Standards\<units> directory is used by default. Click to select a different design criteria file.
Type
Specifies the alignment type: Centerline, Offset, Curb Return, or Miscellaneous.
Description
Specifies an optional description of the alignment.
Starting Station
Specifies the station value that is assigned to the beginning of the first entity in the alignment.
General Tab
Site
Specifies a site for the alignment. Select a site from the list, or click to either create a site or select one
from an object in the drawing. The alignment and the object you select in the drawing are associated with
the same site.
NOTE The default selection is <None>, which places the alignment in the top-level Alignments collection in
Prospector. See Alignment and Site Interaction (page 781) for more information.
Style Selection
Specifies the style options. Create a style, copy or edit the current style selection, or pick a style from
drawing.
Style Detail
Opens the Style Detail dialog box. Preview the style and creation information.
Object Layer
Opens the Object Layer Dialog Box (page 2221), in which you can select or create a layer on which the
alignment will be drawn.
Style Detail
Opens the Style Detail dialog box. Preview the label set and creation information.
Conversion Options
Add Curves Between Tangents
Specifies whether to automatically add curves between each tangent.
■ Selected: Curves are placed at each tangent-tangent intersection. The radius of the curve is calculated
as a percentage of the tangent length and the deflection angle.
NOTE You can add curves using the Alignment Layout Tools.
Related procedures:
Related procedures:
Description
Specifies an optional description of the alignment.
Starting Station
Specifies the station value that is assigned to the beginning of the first alignment entity created.
NOTE Use the Station Control tab in the Alignment Properties dialog box to change the starting station after
you create an alignment.
Site
Specifies a site for the alignment. Select a site from the Site list, or click to either create a site or select
one from an object in the drawing. The alignment and the object you select in the drawing are associated
with the same site.
NOTE The default selection is <None>, which places the alignment in the top-level Alignments collection in
Prospector. See Alignment and Site Interaction (page 781) for more information.
Alignment Style
Alignment Style List
Displays the current style. Click the arrow to select another alignment style in the drawing.
Style Selection
Specifies the style options. Create a style, copy or edit the current style selection, or pick a style from
drawing.
Style Detail
Opens the Style Detail dialog box. Preview the style and creation information.
Alignment Layer
Alignment Layer Display List
Displays the layer on which the alignment object is created.
Object Layer
Opens the Object Layer Dialog Box (page 2221), in which you can select or create a layer on which the
alignment is drawn.
Style Detail
Opens the Style Detail dialog box. Preview the label set and creation information.
Description
Specifies an optional description of the alignment.
Starting Station
Specifies the station value that is assigned to the beginning of the first alignment entity created.
NOTE Use the Station Control tab in the Alignment Properties dialog box to change the starting station after
you create an alignment.
Standards\<units> directory is used by default. Click to select a different design criteria file.
Weeding Options
Opens the Weeding Options dialog box, which enables you to specify options for adding or removing
vertices when using either feature lines or AutoCAD entities as the input data.
Path 1
Specifies that the alignment is created through a single path of regression points.
Use this option to create an alignment from centerline sample data.
Path 2
Specifies that the alignment is created between two paths of regression points.
Use this option to create a centerline alignment between sample data of the either the edges of pavement
of a road, or the left and right rails.
NOTE This value is an estimate. For best results, specify a value that is slightly greater than the largest known
radius in the input data.
Create Spirals
Specifies that spirals are created between the alignment tangents and curves. The spirals on either side of
a curve are symmetric unless the match tangents option is selected.
NOTE When this option is selected, the options below it become available.
Creation Settings
Alignment Name
Specifies the name of the alignment. Each alignment must have a unique name.
NOTE The default selection is <None>, which places the alignment in the top-level Alignments collection in
Prospector. See Alignment and Site Interaction (page 781) for more information.
Alignment Style
Displays the current style. Click the arrow to select another alignment style.
Layer
Displays the layer on which the alignment object is created. Click the arrow to select another layer.
Show Report
Opens the Best Fit Alignment Report Vista (page 1972), which lists the results of the best fit regression, including
the coordinates of each regression point.
Related procedures:
Station Range
Specifies the start and end stations on the parent alignment where the offset alignments will start and
end. You can either enter numeric values, or click the buttons and pick locations in the drawing.
General Tab
Site
Specifies a site for the alignment. Select a site from the list, or click to either create a site or select one
from an object in the drawing. The alignment and the object you select in the drawing are associated with
the same site.
NOTE The default selection is <None>, which places the alignment in the top-level Alignments collection in
Prospector. See Alignment and Site Interaction (page 781) for more information.
Style Selection
Specifies the style options. Create a style, copy or edit the current style selection, or pick a style from
drawing.
Style Detail
Opens the Style Detail dialog box. Preview the style and creation information.
Object Layer
Opens the Object Layer Dialog Box (page 2221), in which you can select or create a layer on which to draw
the alignment.
Style Detail
Opens the Style Detail dialog box. Preview the label set and creation information.
Related procedures:
NOTE If the alignment has design criteria applied to it, the default values specified in the Curve and Spiral Settings
dialog box will not be used. Instead, the minimum values in the specified design criteria file will be applied. For
more information, see Creating an Alignment with the Alignment Layout Tools (page 948).
For more information on spirals and spiral formulas, see Spiral Definitions (page 1011).
Type
Specifies the spiral type.
NOTE The spiral type you specify is used in all spiral commands on the Alignment Layout Tools toolbar.
Spiral In
Specifies whether your design includes a spiral either before a curve or before a Spiral Out.
Length
Specifies the length for the Spiral In.
A Value
Specifies the A value for the Spiral In.
Curve
Specifies how a curve is inserted: either with or without the Spiral In, with or without the Spiral Out or
by itself.
Radius
Specifies a radius value. This value applies to curves and spirals. If you change the curve radius, the A
value also changes.
Spiral Out
Specifies whether your design includes a Spiral Out.
Length
Specifies the length for the Spiral Out.
A Value
Specifies the A value for the Spiral Out.
■ Alignment feature settings are listed near the top of this dialog box, after the General property group,
and are identified by the alignment icon.
For general information about drawing, feature, and command settings and their interaction, see Working
with the Standard Settings Dialog Box Controls (page 78).
For information about drawing-level ambient settings, see Ambient Settings Tab (Drawing Settings Dialog
Box) (page 2078)
These settings establish the default styles assigned to alignments and alignment-related labels.
Default Styles
Use these settings to specify the default styles for new alignments.
Alignment Style
Specifies the default alignment style. Click in the Value column, and click to select a style in the
Alignment Style dialog box.
Specifies the default alignment label set. Click a cell in the Value column, and click to select the label
set in the Alignment Label Set dialog box.
Marker Style
Specifies the display and appearance of points on the alignment. Click in the Value column, and click
Specifies the default line label style. Click in the Value column, and click to select a style in the Line
Label Style dialog box.
Specifies the default curve label style. Click in the Value column, and click to select a style in the
Curve Label Style dialog box.
Specifies the default spiral label style. Click in the Value column, and click to select a style in the Spiral
Label Style dialog box.
Specifies the default station offset label style. Click in the Value column, and click to select a style in
the Station Offset Label Style dialog box.
Specifies the default tangent intersection label style. Click in the Value column, and click to select a
style in the Tangent Intersect Label Style dialog box.
Station Indexing
Use this setting to specify the default station increment.
Default Station Index Increment
Specifies the default value for station increments.
Superelevation Options
Use these settings to specify defaults for calculating superelevation.
Number of Lanes - Left
Specifies the number of lanes on the left side of the roadway.
Roadway Type
Specifies the roadway type as Divided or Undivided.
■ Crowned: When no superelevation is applied, travel lanes slope downward in opposite directions from
a common crown point.
■ Right Edge: Specifies that the high side of the roadway is on the right edge on tangent (unsuperelevated)
sections, when the corridor type is Undivided and the Cross Section Shape is planar.
Specifies the lane width or click and select a distance in the drawing area.
NOTE The following options for Outside Shoulder Superelevation Method and Inside Shoulder Superelevation
Method are only available if the Cross Section Shape is Crowned. These options are not available for Planar roads.
■ Match Lane Slopes: Shoulder slopes match the slopes applied to the adjacent traveled ways through
out the superelevation process.
■ Breakover Removal: Shoulders on the outside edge of the curve are adjusted upward to match the
Normal Lane Slope (%) before the lane begins to superelevate. The high-side shoulder slope matches
the high-side lane slope throughout the superelevation process, and it then rotates downward back
to the Normal Shoulder Slope (%) value when the lanes are back to the unsuperelevated condition.
■ Match Lane Slopes: Shoulder slopes match the slopes applied to the adjacent traveled ways through
out the superelevation process.
■ Breakover Removal: Shoulders on the outside edge of the curve are adjusted upward to match the
Normal Lane Slope (%) before the lane begins to superelevate. The high-side shoulder slope matches
the high-side lane slope throughout the superelevation process, and it then rotates downward back
to the Normal Shoulder Slope (%) value when the lanes are back to the unsuperelevated condition.
■ Use Nearest Higher Speed: Uses the table values that correspond to the next highest design speed found
in the table. (Conservative rule)
■ Round To Nearest Speed: Uses the table values corresponding to the nearest speed, either higher or
lower.
■ Use Nearest Lower Radius: Uses table values corresponding to the next lowest radius found in the
table.(Conservative rule)
■ Round To Nearest Radius: Uses table values corresponding to the nearest radius value found in the
table.
Wheelbase Length
Specifies a numeric value for the wheelbase length that is used in the formula for widening around curves.
This value is used only when the widening method is through design standards. It is not used when the
widening is specified manually.
Widening By
Specifies the default method for applying the automatic widening - either by using design standards, or
manually (by entering values into the Increase in Width and Transition Length fields on the Add Automatic
Widening dialog box). When Through Design Standards is the default, the Specify Widening Using Criteria
option on the Add Automatic Widening dialog box is selected by default. When Manually is the default,
the Specify Widening Manually option is selected.
Specifies the default alignment design speed. Enter a speed in the Value column or click and select a
design speed in the drawing area.
NOTE If the Criteria-Based Design Option is set to False, then the remaining Criteria-Based Design Options are
not available.
Specifies the default design check set. Click in the Value column, and click to select a set in the Default
Design Check Set dialog box.
NOTE If the offset alignment does not have any widening or automatic widening specified on it, this dialog box
shows just the parent alignment name and nominal offset values.
Nominal Offset
Specifies the current offset distance for regions of the alignment that are not widened. You can edit this
value.
Add a Widening
Click to add a new widening, and then specify the parameters.
NOTE When you select an item in the property table on this dialog box, it is highlighted in the drawing.
Transition In\Out
Expand this node to view the Transition In and Transition Out properties.
Transition Type
For widenings, the transition type can be one of following four types:
Linear transition
Curve-Line-Curve transition
Widening Region
Expand this node to view the Widening Region properties.
Region Type
This read-only field displays the type of widening applied to the region. When the widening was applied
using the Add Widening command, the region type is User Defined. When the widening was applied
using the Add Automatic Widening command, the region type is Automatic Widening.
Offset
Specifies the offset width (distance) when the widening has been added using the Add Widening command.
This property is not available when Automatic Widening has been applied.
Start/End Station
Specifies the start or end station for the currently selected offset alignment. You can edit numeric values
in this dialog box, or click and then click a station value in the drawing.
Region Length
Specifies the length of the region this offset alignment is associated with. You can edit the numeric value
in the table, or click and click two points in the drawing to specify a length. Changes to this value
also change the end station value for the region.
Widening Criteria
Expand this node to view the Widening Criteria properties. Click in the cell to specify a different value.
Widening Method
When automatic widening has been applied, and the automatic widening has been specified according
to values defined in a design criteria file, this field displays the value of the Widening Method property
defined in the criteria file. When automatic widening has been applied, and the automatic widening has
been specified manually, this field is blank.
Widening To Apply On
Specifies how the manual widening is applied. The choices are: a.) Inside Only: Applies the automatic
widening to just the insides of curves, not the outsides of the specified curves. b.) Outside Only: Applies
the automatic widening to just the outsides of curves, not the insides of the specified curves. c.)Both Sides:
Applies the automatic widening to both the inside and outside of the specified curves.
The default value for this property is defined in the command settings (Automatic Widening Around
Curves property group).
Attainment Method
Specifies the attainment method to use when applying the widening. This property is defined in the
Widening Methods section of the specified design criteria file.
Specifies the lane width or click and select a distance in the drawing area. The default value for this
property is defined in the command settings (Superelevation Options property group).
Wheelbase Length
Specifies a numeric value for the wheelbase length that is used in the formula for widening around curves.
This value is used only when the widening method is through design standards. It is not used when the
widening is specified manually.
The default value for this property is defined in the command settings (Automatic Widening Around
Curves property group).
Related procedures:
Select Profile
Lists the profiles that are available for selection. Click to select a profile from the drawing.
Description
Displays the description of the selected profile. A profile description is set in the profile properties.
Select Geometry Points To Label
Select All
Selects all check boxes in the Label column.
Deselect All
Clears all check boxes in the Label column.
Label Column
Specifies whether to label a geometry point.
Related procedures:
Select All
Selects all check boxes in the Label column.
Deselect All
Clears all check boxes in the Label column.
NOTE The Abbreviations (page 2077) tab in the Drawing Settings dialog box also lists these geometry points.
Label Column
Specifies whether to label a geometry point.
Related procedures:
Description
Specifies an optional description for the current assembly.
Object Style
Specifies the style used to display the current assembly. See Select Style Dialog Box (page 2021) or Assembly
Style Dialog Box (page 1997) for more information.
Show Tooltips
Controls whether tooltips are displayed for the object in the drawing (not over toolbar icons).
1995
connected to a primary baseline, or to a given offset line. You can delete, move or rename many items in
this view using the right-click shortcut menu.
Input Value
When a subassembly is selected in the left pane, this pane lists information on the input parameter values
that are used to calculate the size, shape, and geometry of the subassembly.
Value Name
Specifies the name of each input parameter associated with the subassembly.
Parameter Reference
Specifies that the output value from another subassembly is used as the input parameter value for the
selected subassembly.
■ Use: The value specified in the Get Value From field is used for the input parameter value instead of
the default input parameter value.
■ Get Value From: Specifies the output value from another subassembly that is used as the input parameter
value for the selected subassembly.
Output Value
Lists read-only information about any output parameter values used during processing for the selected
subassembly. These output values can be used as input values for other subassemblies. The actual output
values are calculated only when the assembly is applied (when the corridor is created).
Value Name
Specifies the name of any output parameters for the selected subassembly.
Output Value
Specifies the value of any output parameters for the selected subassembly.
Subassembly Help
When a subassembly is selected in the tree view, click this button to display the Help topic describing the
construction, behavior, and other details of the subassembly.
Description
Displays the description of each code.
Style
Displays the style assigned to each code.
Render Material
Displays the render material assigned to each code or <none> if no render material is assigned.
Pay Item
Displays the ID of any pay item attached to any Link or Point. For more information, see Assigning Pay
Items to Corridors (page 1301).
■ Right-click in the block list window and click Browse to select a block located in another folder.
Size
Options
Specifies symbol scaling:
■ Use Drawing Scale: Determines size of the marker by multiplying the specified value by the drawing
scale. Enter the scale factor.
■ Use Size in Absolute Units: Specifies that the marker size is an absolute value based on the displayed
units. Enter the value. This is the only setting applicable for the baseline and offset line components.
■ Use Size Relative to Screen: Specifies that the size of the marker is a percentage of the drawing screen
size. Enter the percentage.
Fixed Scale
Specifies independent fixed scale values when Options is set to Use Fixed Scale. Enter values for X, Y, or
Z.
Orientation reference
Specifies the marker rotation angle:
■ Orient Marker To World Coordinates: Specifies that the maker rotation angle is relative to the world
coordinate system.
■ Orient Marker To View: Specifies that the maker rotation angle is relative to the current AutoCAD view
direction.
■ Insertion Point: Specifies the location in the drawing where the assembly is inserted.
■ Baseline: In layout mode, the symbol that is used to identify the assembly baseline in a drawing.
■ Baseline Point: Specifies the location that is used as the baseline location (point) for the assembly in the
drawing.
■ Offset: If the assembly is associated with an offset, specifies the offset value.
■ Offset Point: If the assembly is associated with an offset, specifies the offset location in the drawing.
Description
Specifies an optional description of the code set style.
Description
Displays the description of each code.
Style
Displays the style assigned to each code. Click to select a style in the Pick Style dialog box.
Label Style
Displays the label style assigned to each code or <none> if no label style is assigned. Click to select a
style in the Pick Style dialog box.
Render Material
Displays the render material assigned to each link code or <none> if no render material is assigned. Click
to select a render material in the Select Render Material dialog box, or click to select a render
material from an object in the drawing. You can only assign render materials to link codes, not point
codes or shape codes.
codes, not to link codes or shape codes. des. Click to select a style in the Pick Style dialog box.
Pay Item
Specifies the ID of any pay item attached to any Link or Point. Click to edit the pay item(s) in the Pay
Item List dialog (page 2588).
Import Codes
Adds codes from a selected subassembly, assembly, or corridor to this code set.
Related procedures:
Opens the Name Template (page 2022) dialog box, where you can modify the naming template.
Description
Specifies an optional description of this assembly.
Assembly Style
Style List
Specifies the assembly style. Select a new style by clicking the drop-down arrow.
Style Selection
Specifies the style options. You can create a new style, copy or edit the current style, or pick a style from
the drawing.
Style Detail
Opens the Style Detail dialog box where you can preview the style and creation information.
Style Selection
Specifies the style options. You can create a new style, or copy or edit the current style.
Style Detail
Opens the Style Detail dialog box where you can preview the style and creation information.
Assembly Layer
Specifies the name of the layer on which this assembly object will be created. To change the layer, click the
Object Layer icon and select a layer.
Opens the Name Template (page 2022) dialog box, where you can modify the naming template.
Description
Specifies an optional description of this subassembly.
Style Selection
Specifies the style options. You can create a new style, copy or edit the current style, or pick a style from
the drawing.
Style Detail
Opens the Style Detail dialog box where you can preview the style and creation information.
Subassembly Layer
Displays the name of the layer on which this subassembly object will be created. To change the layer, click
the Object Layer icon and select a layer.
Conversion Options
Mid-Ordinate Distance
If the subassembly object contains curves, all curves will be tessellated (converted into a finite number of
segments) using this value to determine the length of the tessellated segments.
Link Creation
Specifies symbol scaling:
■ None: Generates no links. Only points will be created at the vertices.
■ Single: Creates one link from all the segments created from the object selected. This is provided to
make creating shapes simpler. Using the Add Shape right-click command, you only need to perform
one action.
■ Multiple: Creates a new link for each segment created from the object selected. This is useful for
assigning link codes to different parts of the subassembly for creating surfaces and other display
characteristics.
For general information about drawing, feature, and command settings and their interaction, see Working
with the Standard Settings Dialog Box Controls (page 78).
For information about drawing-level ambient settings, see Ambient Settings Tab (Drawing Settings Dialog
Box) (page 2078)
Default Styles
These settings establish the default styles assigned to assembly components:
Assembly Style
Specifies the default style for assemblies. Click in the Value column. Click in the Value column, and click
to select a style in the Assembly Style dialog box.
Specifies the default code set style. Click in the Value column, and click to select a style in the Code
Set Style dialog box.
For information about style selection, see Select Style Dialog Box (page 2021).
Default Name Format
Use these settings to specify the default name formats for assemblies, assembly offsets, and assembly groups.
Click in the Value column, and click to make changes in the Name Template dialog box (page 2022).
■ Subassembly feature settings are listed near the top of this dialog box, after the General property group,
For general information about drawing, feature, and command settings and their interaction, see Working
with the Standard Settings Dialog Box Controls (page 78).
For information about drawing-level ambient settings, see Ambient Settings Tab (Drawing Settings Dialog
Box) (page 2078)
Default Styles
These settings establish the default styles assigned to subassemblies.
Specifies the default code set style. Click in the Value column, and click to select a style in the Code
Set Style dialog box.
For information about style selection, see Select Style Dialog Box (page 2021).
Use these settings to specify the default behavior for creating subassemblies from polylines.
Mid-ordinate Distance
Specifies mid-ordinate distance to approximate curvilinear segments. Enter a distance in the Value column
Link Creation
Specifies the quantity of subassembly links (None, Single, Multiple) created from the polyline(s).
Related procedures:
Source File
Specifies the name and location of the package file (.pkt) containing one or more subassemblies.
Opens the Select File dialog box where you can navigate to the package file (.pkt) containing the
subassembly or subassemblies to be imported.
Import To
You can import subassemblies to a tool palette, to a catalog, or to both locations at the same time.
Tool Palette
When this option is selected, the subassemblies will be imported to the selected tool palette. Select a tool
palette by clicking the drop-down arrow. The name of the currently open tool palette is displayed (selected)
by default.
Blocks list
Lists block definitions available in the drawing. Do one of the following:
■ Click a block name to select the block to use for the point symbol. The block is displayed in the Preview
window.
■ Right-click in the block list window. Click Browse to select a block located in another folder.
Orientation Reference
Specifies the Marker Rotation Angle:
■ World Coordinate System: Specifies that the marker rotation angle is relative to the world coordinate
system.
■ View: Specifies that the marker rotation angle is relative to the current AutoCAD view direction.
Size
Options
Specifies symbol scaling:
■ Use Drawing Scale: Determines the size of the marker by multiplying the specified value by the drawing
scale. Enter the scale factor.
■ Use Size in Absolute Units: Specifies that the marker size is an absolute value based on the displayed
units. Enter the value.
■ Use Size Relative to Screen: The size of the marker is a percentage of the drawing screen size. Enter the
percentage.
Fixed Scale
Specifies independent fixed scale values when Options is set to Use Fixed Scale. Enter values for X, Y, or
Z.
Description
Specifies an optional description of the current subassembly.
Show Tooltips
Controls whether a tooltip description is displayed for the subassembly object in the drawing.
NOTE To enter values for grades, enter % values with the percent symbol included. To enter values for slopes,
you can enter a ratio such as 4:1, with the colon included between two numbers, or you can enter a number that
gets converted into a percent value when you click OK or Apply.
Value Name
This read-only field displays the name of each input parameter associated with the subassembly.
Output Values
Lists read-only information on any output parameter values used during processing for the subassembly.
These output values can be used as input values for other subassemblies. The actual output values are
calculated only when the assembly is applied.
Value Name
Displays the name of any output parameters used for the subassembly.
Output Value
Displays the value for any output parameters from the subassembly.
Defined From
This read-only field displays the method that was used to create this subassembly. If the subassembly was
created using .NET, .NET is displayed. If the subassembly was created from a polyline, Entities is displayed.
If the subassembly was created using .NET, .NET is displayed.
.NET Class Name
If the subassembly is created from .NET, this field displays the name of the .NET class that defines this
subassembly. If the subassembly is created from VBA, or from a polyline, this field is not displayed.
Macro Name
If the subassembly is created from VBA, this field displays the name of the macro file that defines this
subassembly. If the subassembly is created from a polyline, this field is not available. If the subassembly
is created from .NET, this field is not displayed.
Project Name
If the subassembly is created from VBA, this field displays the name of the project that defines this
subassembly. If the subassembly is created from a polyline, this field is not available. If the subassembly
is created from .NET, this field is not displayed.
Subassembly Help
Clicking opens the Help topic that describes the construction, behavior, and other definitions of this
subassembly. If the subassembly is created from a polyline, a Help topic is not available.
NOTE When a subassembly is attached to an assembly, the code set style is governed by the assembly object’s
code set style, and all controls on this tab are disabled.
Description
Displays the description of each code.
Style
Displays the style assigned to each code.
Label Style
Displays the label style assigned to each code or <none> if no label style is assigned.
Render Material
Displays the render material assigned to each code or <none> if no render material is assigned.
Pay Item
Displays the ID of any pay item attached to any Link or Point.
Related procedures:
■ Building site feature settings are identified by the Building Site object icon.
For general information about drawing, feature, and command settings and their interaction, see Working
with the Standard Settings Dialog Box Controls (page 78).
For information about drawing-level ambient settings, see Ambient Settings Tab (Drawing Settings Dialog
Box) (page 2078)
Default Styles
Use these settings to specify the default styles assigned to building sites.
Building Site Style
Specifies the default building site style (page 1894). Click in the Value column, and click to select a style
in the Building Site Style dialog box.
For information about style selection, see Select Style Dialog Box (page 2021).
2009
Building Site Name Template
Specifies the default name format for building site objects. Click in the Value column, and click to
make changes in the Name Template dialog box (page 2022).
Related procedures:
Click to select the file in the Autodesk Design Package File dialog box.
Click to display the Name Template dialog box. See Name Template dialog box (page 2022).
Preview
Provides a visualization of the building site object.
Related procedures:
Scale Factor
Specifies the scaling factor that is applied to Revit architectural model data during import.
Drawing Scale
Specifies the scaling factor of the current Civil drawing session.
Angular Units
Specifies the angular units of the current Civil drawing.
Zone
Coordinate System Zone Code
Specifies the code of the coordinate system used in the Civil drawing.
Description
Specifies a description of the current zone used in the Civil drawing.
Projection
Specifies the projection method for the coordinate system.
Datum
Specifies the abbreviation for the datum on which the coordinate system is based.
Related procedures:
Click to change the default layer in the Object Layer dialog box. See Object Layer dialog box (page 2221).
Click to modify the default style. See Editing a Building Site Style (page 1894).
Related procedures:
Northing (Y)
Specifies the northing coordinate value of the building site base point read from the ADSK package file.
Easting (X)
Specifies the easting coordinate value of the building site base point read from the ADSK package file.
Elevation (Z)
Specifies the elevation coordinate value of the building site base point read from the ADSK package file.
Rotation Angle
Specifies the rotation angle of the building site base point read from the ADSK package file.
Preview
Click to zoom in to the extents of the building site object as it would be located on the drawing.
Finish
Click to insert the building site object at the specified coordinates. Specify In Drawing must be cleared.
Related procedures:
Created By
Specifies the name of the person who created the style.
Date Created
Specifies the date the style was created.
Last Modified By
Specifies the name of the last person who modified the style.
Date Modified
Specifies the date the style was modified.
Related procedures:
Click to modify the marker style in the Marker Style dialog box. See Marker Style dialog box (page 2004).
Click to view the details of the marker style in the Style Detail dialog box. See Style Detail dialog box (page
2020).
Related procedures:
Model
Displays building site components in the Model view (all but top-down view).
Component Display
Specify the Visibility, Layer, and Linetype properties of the following building site object components:
Building Footprint
Specifies the footprint of the architectural model.
Property Lines
Specifies the property lines that relate to the building site object.
Utilities
Specifies the utilities and utility connections that relate to the architectural model.
Site Model
Specifies the site details that relate to the architectural model, such as topography, parking, and landscaping.
Building Model
Specifies the 3D model of the building.
Related procedures:
Display
Specifies the style of the building site marker.
Collapse All
Click to collapse all items in the Property column.
Expand All
Click to expand all items in the Property column.
Related procedures:
Description
Specifies any additional information about the building site object.
Click to modify the default base layer in the Object Layer dialog box.
Related procedures:
■ General feature settings are listed near the top of this dialog box, after the General property group, and
For general information about drawing, feature, and command settings and their interaction, see Working
with the Standard Settings Dialog Box Controls (page 78).
For information about drawing-level ambient settings, see Ambient Settings Tab (Drawing Settings Dialog
Box) (page 2078).
Default Styles
Use these settings to establish the default styles assigned to label components:
General Note Label Style
Specifies the default style to use when inserting Note labels. Click in the Value column, and click to
select a style in the General Note Label Style dialog box.
Specifies the default style to use when inserting Line labels. Click in the Value column, and click to
select a style in the General Line Label Style dialog box.
2015
General Curve Label Style
Specifies the default style to use when inserting Curve labels. Click in the Value column, and click to
select a style in the General Curve Label Style dialog box.
For information about style selection, see Select Style Dialog Box (page 2021).
Use these settings to specify the default behavior when curve entities are used as an input option for best
fit arc, line, and parabola creation.
Tessellate Curve
Specifies whether to tessellate curve segments if they are included as an input option.
Mid-ordinate Tolerance
Specifies the mid-ordinate tolerance based on a distance across the tessellated curve segments. Enter a
length in the Value column or click and select two points along a curve.
Use this setting to specify the default behavior for regression analysis graphs in best fit arc, line, and parabola
creation.
Spline Fit For Regression Analysis Graph
Specifies whether the regression graph displays splines on the green line that represents the best fit entity.
Mapcheck
NOTE This property group is displayed when accessing the settings from the MapCheck command. For more
information, see Performing a Mapcheck Analysis (page 1796).
Mapcheck Color
Specifies the color for Mapcheck lines and curves which are not part of the current mapcheck. Click in
the Value column, and click to select a color in the Select Color dialog box.
Description
Specifies an optional description for the current style.
Created By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who created the style.
Date Created
Displays the date and time the style was created.
Last Modified By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who last modified the style.
Date Modified
Displays the date and time the style was last modified.
Related procedures:
View Direction
Object styles have unique display values and varying numbers of displayed components, depending on the
view direction that is selected. You can set style characteristics that control how the object components are
displayed in plan view, model view, profile view, and section view. For example, you may want to set the
object styles differently depending on the view direction that is selected.
Plan
Specifies how the object is displayed in plan view. Plan view is the view of a site if you look straight down
from an elevated position.
Model
Specifies how the object is displayed in model view. Model view is a 3D rotated view, such as when the
Orbit command is used.
Profile
Specifies how the object is displayed in a profile view.
Section
Specifies how the object is displayed in a section view.
Component Display
Use this grid to specify the visibility and layer use for components of each object. In the Color, Linetype,
and Lineweight columns you can select a specific value or set the value to BYLAYER or BYBLOCK. For more
information, see Using ByLayer and ByBlock to Assign Display Values (page 2019).
Component Type
Specifies the component. The number and type of object components varies, depending on the object
and whether the view is 2D or 3D.
Visible
Specifies the component visibility. Click the light bulb on or off to change the visibility.
Layer
Specifies the display layer for components, which is referenced if you select a ByLayer setting for any
values. A setting of 0 means that the display layer is the same as the layer on which the component is
drawn.
Color
Specifies a color for the component. Click to select a specific value or specify ByLayer or ByBlock.
Linetype
Specifies the line type for the component. You can click in the Linetype column and use the Select Linetype
dialog box.
If you choose ByLayer, the linetype value is determined by examining the properties of the layer referred
to in the Display tab pane.
If you choose ByBlock, the value is determined by examining the properties of the object for layer override
settings first. If the object doesn't have layer overrides, the layer referred to in the Display tab pane is used
to determine the properties.
LT Scale
Specifies the linetype scale for the component.
NOTE The Current Object Scale value controls the CELTSCALE system variable, which sets the linetype scale
for new objects. The CELTSCALE value is multiplied by the LTSCALE to get the displayed linetype scale.
Plot Style
Specifies the plot style for the component.
Pattern
Specifies the hatch pattern for the component. You can click in the column and select a new pattern from
the Hatch Pattern dialog box.
Angle
Specifies the angle value for the component.
Scale
Specifies the scale for the hatch pattern.
Related procedures:
Layer column and select a specific Is displayed in the color assigned to that
layer layer.
Color column and select ByLayer Is displayed in the color specified by the
Layer column.
Color column and select ByBlock The software determines if you made
changes to the AutoCAD Layer Properties
or AutoCAD Color Properties.
■ if you made changes, the component
color reflects those changes.
■ if you did not make changes, the com-
ponent is displayed in the color specified
in the Layer column of the Display tab.
Value
Displays the value for each property.
Related procedures:
the Preview folder. When you click , the Style Detail dialog box is displayed with an Information tab
that contains creation information and a description, and a Preview tab that lists the drawings in the Preview
folder. AutoCAD Civil 3D has several default Preview drawings.
NOTE Some styles are not supported in the Style Detail Preview. Styles that are not supported display only the
name and creation information.
Style List
Lists the object styles.
Preview List
Lists the defined previews in the current drawing.
Information Tab
Description
Displays the description of the current style.
Created By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who created the style.
Date Created
Displays the date and time the style was created.
Last Modified By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who last modified the style.
Date Modified
Displays the date and time the style was last modified.
Preview Tab
Style List
Displays a list of available styles for the object.
Preview Window
Displays the selected style preview.
Specifies the style options. You can create a new style, copy or edit the current style selection, or pick a
style from drawing.
Opens the Style Detail dialog box where you can preview the style and creation information.
Related procedures:
■ ByLayer: Uses the render material of the current layer that the object is on.
■ Use a specified render material. You can select from the list of available render materials in the drawing.
Related procedures:
Insert
Click to add the specified property to the name. The property is inserted where the cursor is placed in the
Name field.
Name
Displays the property fields you have inserted. You can enter text directly into this box to accompany the
property fields.
Starting Number
Specifies the starting number.
Increment Value
Specifies the number that is added to each value to get the next value.
Related procedures:
Duplicate Station
Displays the duplicate station values.
Related procedures:
Index
Displays the order in which the columns are displayed.
Column
Name
Displays the name of the column.
Visibility
Specifies if the column is visible. Clear the check box to hide the column.
Width
Specifies the width of the column.
New
Click to create a new configuration. The Enter New Name dialog box is displayed from which you can
enter the name of the configuration.
Delete
Click to delete the selected configuration.
Related procedures:
Projection styles are listed in the General ➤ Multipurpose Styles ➤ Projection Styles collection on the
Settings tab of Toolspace.
Multipurpose Projection Styles are used for AutoCAD objects. Each Projection Style includes settings for all
types of AutoCAD objects that can be projected. Ensure that you have the correct object selected in the
drop-down list when you are making the edits to the style.
See also:
Object Display
Specify As Drawn or select a marker style for the current object. If a suitable marker style is not available
from the list, you can create a new style and select a custom marker or AutoCAD block. The marker is
displayed in the Preview pane.
Related procedures:
Object Display
Specify As Drawn or select a marker style for the current object. If a suitable marker style is not available
from the list, you can create a new style and select a custom marker or AutoCAD block. The marker is
displayed in the Preview pane.
Style
Specifies the style of the projected object. Click a style name to change it. If you want to set a consistent
style for all objects of the same type, click the main heading for the object type and select the style.
Elevation Options
Specifies how the elevation of the projected object is determined:
■ Use Object. Projected object is at the same elevation as the source object in plan view.
NOTE The Manual option is not available for all object types. It is available for blocks, points, and 3D solids
only.
Elevation Value
Displays the current elevation of the projected object. If the elevation option is Manual, you can change
the elevation in this column.
Pick Objects
Click to select additional objects to project into the current view.
Related procedures:
Override Indicator
Indicates that a value has been overridden at a lower level. Click to remove the lower level setting
override value and replace the setting value with the current setting. The icon then changes to .
When you click either OK or Apply in the dialog box, the override values are removed and replaced with
the current setting.
Lock
Protects a settings value by assuring that any lower-level setting is fixed at the value specified at this level.
To lock a setting, click to change it to . The lock cannot be set if a child override is set.
NOTE When a setting is locked at a higher level setting, the lower-level settings display a lock to the left of
the property name to indicate that it is dependent on the higher-level setting and cannot be changed.
Control Icons
Parent Value
Indicates the value that the setting will have if a dependency on the higher level value is maintained.
Parent
Indicates the higher level setting from which this default setting is derived.
Related procedures:
■ Working with the Standard Settings Dialog Box Controls (page 78)
Related procedures:
Related procedures:
TIP This name will appear in lists along with default properties, so it may be helpful to use a prefix or naming
convention so it is clear which properties you have added.
Type
Specifies the property data type. Choose the data type based on how you want to specify the data, as well
as how you want it formatted.
■ Boolean: Creates a property type that allows you to specify true or false values.
■ String: Creates a property type that allows you to enter text as the value. Use this property type when
you want to be able to enter any characters or numerals, for example, a tree species.
■ Enumeration: Creates a property type that allows you to specify values by selecting from a drop-down
list. If you select this property type, define the items that will appear in the drop-drop down list in the
Enumeration section of the dialog box.
■ Integer: Creates a property type that allows you to enter a whole numeral without decimals, for
example, 1, 2, or 3. This value is not formatted.
■ Double: Creates a property type that allows you to enter a numeral with decimals, for example, 1.05.
This value is formatted using the Unitless type settings (defined in the Ambient Settings) (page 2078).
The default values for the following data types are also formatted according to the settings on the Ambient
Settings Tab (Drawing Settings Dialog Box) (page 2078) in the Drawing settings:
■ Angle
■ Area
■ Coordinate
■ Dimension
■ Direction
■ Distance
■ Elevation
■ Grade/Slope
■ Latitude
■ Longitude
■ Station
■ Volume
NOTE If the property type you select is Boolean, String, or Enumeration, the lower and upper bound values
are not available.
Default Value
Specifies the default value that is used when the Default Value check box is selected.
Enumeration
For enumeration (page 2773) property field types only. Specifies the list of values you can choose from. For
example, if you are defining a property type for soil types, you could define different soil types in the
enumeration list.
Related procedures:
■ Rename: The item in the destination drawing is renamed so it will not be overwritten. The item you
are copying is copied to the drawing with its original name.
■ Skip: The item is not copied and the original is not overwritten.
■ Cleared: Applies the resolution to the current item only. You are prompted to resolve any additional
conflicts.
Related procedures:
End Station
Specifies the last station for which to apply the assembly override.
To edit the station start, enter a value or click to select a location in the drawing window.
Related procedures:
Description
Specifies descriptions for the corresponding point codes.
2031
Connect
Specifies whether the point codes at each station are connected. By default, all identical point codes are
connected as longitudinal feature lines. To delete feature lines between point codes, clear the check box
for the applicable point code.
NOTE If the Connect check box is unavailable, the feature line is being used in a corridor surface definition. It
cannot be disconnected. For more information, see Creating and Editing Corridor Surfaces (page 1506).
Specifies the feature line style. To change the style, click in a cell and click .
Pay Item
Specifies any pay item attached to any Code. Click to edit the pay item(s) in the Pay Item List dialog
box (page 2588).
Branching
Specifies how the feature lines for the corridor are branched if a point code is used a varying number of
times at different stations:
■ Inward: The feature lines branch inward joining the innermost point codes.
■ Outward: The feature lines branch outward, joining the outermost point codes.
Related procedures:
Baseline
Displays the baseline alignment for the feature lines.
Reverse Direction
Specifies whether the boundary is to be drawn in the reverse direction of the corridor station order.
Start Point
Specifies the start point along the corridor for the boundary. To edit the start point, enter a value or click
to select a location in the drawing.
End Point
Specifies the end point along the corridor for the boundary. To edit the end point, enter a value or click
to select a location in the drawing.
Moves the selected feature line down in the boundary draw order.
Verifies that the boundary polygon is well-formed (that is, it does not cross on itself). A message is displayed
indicating if the boundary is well-formed or is ill-formed with crossing edges.
Related procedures:
At the top of the vista, click to expand or to collapse the tree view.
Design Value
Displays the default value set for the subassembly parameters.
If the default value is overridden by manually editing the subassembly in the corridor section view (for
example, by grip editing subassembly parts), the values cannot be edited.
Override
Specifies subassemblies that have been edited manually in the corridor section view (for example, by grip
editing subassembly parts) and the parameters that have overrides on their design values. A selected check
box is displayed for any subassembly parameter that is overridden. A selected check box is displayed at
the assembly level, if any of its subassemblies or parameters are overridden.
To clear an override and set the subassemblies or parameters to their design value, clear the check box.
To set an override, select or enter an override value for any subassembly in the Value column. To all
overrides for an assembly’s subassemblies or parameters to their design values, clear the check box at the
assembly level.
Value
Specifies the override value for a parameter.
When you override a value in this column, the Override column displays a check box.
NOTE Grayed out fields indicate that the value cannot be changed from the default.
Related procedures:
Start Station
Displays the value of the first station in the region’s range.
End Station
Displays the value of the last station in the region’s range.
Deletes the override applied to the station selected in the list of stations.
Delete All
Deletes all the overrides applied to stations in the selected region and clears the list of stations.
NOTE Deleting one or all stations from the list only deletes the overrides applied to the stations.
The table displays a list of overridden stations and the override method.
Station
Displays the station’s value.
Parameter
Displays whether or not the assembly has been edited by overriding subassembly parameters.
Geometry
Displays whether or not a subassembly located at the station has been added, deleted, or edited by adding
or deleting points or links.
Related procedures:
See also:
Description
Specifies an optional description for the current corridor.
Object Style
Specifies the default corridor style used to display corridor components, such as region boundaries and
assembly insertion stations. Select a style from the list or use the standard selection tools. For more
information about the standard selection tools, see the Select Style (page 2021) dialog box.
Show Tooltips
Specifies whether tooltips are displayed for the object in the drawing (not over toolbar icons).
Related procedures:
Add Baseline
Adds a baseline (alignment) to the corridor definition.
NOTE Offset alignments are displayed if the assembly is defined with assembly offsets. For more information,
seeCreating an Assembly Offset (page 1543).
The check boxes next to the baselines or region names specify whether to show (selected) or hide (cleared)
the baselines or regions. If the check box is cleared, that section of corridor is not reprocessed when
underlying elements (for example, alignments, subassemblies, or surfaces) change.
NOTE The check boxes have a tri-state display. If only one of the regions is selected under a baseline, the check
box is dimmed and unavailable.
Alignment
Specifies the alignment for a baseline or offset alignment. Click this field to open the Pick Horizontal
Alignment dialog box where you can select an alignment.
Profile
Specifies the profile for a baseline offset alignment. Click this field to open the Select A Profile dialog box
where you can select a profile.
Assembly
Specifies the assembly for the corridor region. Click to open the Select An Assembly dialog box where you
can select an assembly.
Start Station
Specifies the start station for the corridor region or controlling offset. By default, for the first region added
to a baseline, this value is set to the start station of the baseline. If one or more corridor regions already
exist, this value is set to the end station of last region. Enter a value or click to select a location in the
drawing area.
End Station
Specifies the end station for the corridor region or controlling offset. By default, for the first region added
to a baseline, this value is set to the end station of the baseline. Enter a value or click to select a location
in the drawing area.
Frequency
Specifies the frequency at which assemblies are placed for a given region. Click this field to open the
Frequency To Apply Assemblies dialog box (page 2060), where you can modify the station frequency and
manually add stations.
Target
Opens the Target Mapping dialog box (page 2064), where you can modify the mapping of targets from
subassembly definitions to appropriate drawing object names. For more information, see Setting Targets
(page 1481).
Overrides
Opens the Corridor Parameter Override Stations dialog box (page 2034), where you can view and delete
assembly overrides to stations in the selected region.
Related procedures:
NOTE To change the style, description, or label style for any of the codes displayed in this tab, edit the code set
style (page 1577).
Description
Displays the description of each code.
Style
Displays the style assigned to each code.
Label Style
Displays the label style assigned to each code or <none> if no label style is assigned.
Render Material
Specifies the render material (page 1761) associated with the corridor surface.
Pay Item
Displays the IDs of pay items attached to any Link or Point.
Related procedures:
Connect
Specifies whether the point codes at each station are connected. By default, all identical point codes are
connected as longitudinal feature lines. To delete feature lines between point codes, clear the check box
for the applicable point code.
NOTE If the Connect check box is unavailable, the feature line is being used in a corridor surface definition. It
cannot be disconnected. For more information, see Creating and Editing Corridor Surfaces (page 1506).
Specifies the feature line style. To change the style, click in a cell and click .
Pay Item
Specifies any pay item attached to any Code. Click to edit the pay item(s) in the Pay Item List dialog
box (page 2588).
Branching
Specifies how the feature lines for the corridor are branched if a point code is used a varying number of
times at different stations:
■ Inward: The feature lines branch inward joining the innermost point codes.
■ Outward: The feature lines branch outward, joining the outermost point codes.
Related procedures:
Creates an empty corridor surface to which you can subsequently add data using the Add Data fields.
Creates individual corridor surfaces from all link codes. The corridor surfaces are listed in the grid where
you can view and modify them.
Opens the Name Template (page 2022) dialog box, where you can modify the surface corridor naming
template.
Deletes the surface or data component that is currently selected in the Name column of the grid.
Specify Code
Specifies the available links or features lines, depending on whether the Data Type is set to Feature Lines
or Links.
Adds the data specified with the Data Type and Specify Code fields to the selected surface.
NOTE You must first select a corridor surface before adding the data.
Surface Style
Specifies the surface style associated with the corridor surface. Click this field to open the Pick Corridor
Surface Style dialog box where you can select a style. The value is also specified on the surface properties
Information tab.
Render Material
Specifies the render material (page 1761) associated with the corridor surface. Click this field to open the
Select Render Material dialog box and select a render material.
Add as Breakline
Specifies whether the corridor surface is built using breaklines (page 667).
Overhang Correction
Specifies whether an overhang is to be corrected when rendered, and whether it is to be corrected following
the top links or bottom links.
Description
Specifies a description for the corridor surface.
Related procedures:
NOTE A corridor surface must exist before you can create a boundary. For information about creating a corridor
surface, see Creating and Editing Corridor Surfaces (page 1506).
Specifies the corridor surface names and their corresponding boundaries. Click next to the surface
name to display its boundaries. To add a boundary to a surface, right-click the corridor surface name and
click Add Interactively, Add Automatically, or Add From Polygon.
Description
Specifies the description for the corridor surface boundary.
Render Material
Specifies the render material style (page 1761) associated with the corridor surface boundary. Click this field
to open the Select Render Material dialog box and select a render material.
Definitions
Specifies the boundary definition. Click [...] to open the Corridor Boundary Definition (page 2032) dialog
box, where you can view and modify the boundary definition.
Use Type
Specifies the boundary type:
■ Render Only. Renders specified areas of the corridor surface with different materials (when rendering),
for example, asphalt and grass.
■ Hide Boundary. Creates void areas or punches holes in the corridor surface.
Related procedures:
Feature Line1
Displays the point code of the first feature line selected to define the slope pattern.
Feature Line2
Displays the point code of the second feature line selected to define the slope pattern.
Specifies the slope pattern style. Click and select a style in the Pick Style dialog box or use the standard
style creation tools to edit or create a style. For more information about the style creation tools, see the
Select Style Dialog Box (page 2021).
Baseline
Displays the feature line’s corresponding baseline.
Station Start
Specifies the start station for the slope pattern display. To edit the station start, enter a value or click
to select a location in the drawing area.
Station End
Specifies the end station for the slope pattern display. To edit the station end, enter a value or click
to select a location in the drawing area.
Related procedures:
Baseline Name
Displays the name of the baseline associated with the selected corridor region.
Properties
Region Name
Displays the name of the currently selected corridor region.
Assembly
Specifies the assembly associated with the currently selected corridor region. Click this field to select a
different assembly, if desired.
Frequency
Specifies the frequency at which assemblies are placed for a given region. Click this field to modify the
station frequency and manually add stations, if desired.
Target
Click this field to modify the mapping of targets from subassembly definitions to appropriate drawing
object names. For more information, see Setting Targets (page 1481).
Overrides
If there are overrides, you can click this field to view and delete assembly overrides to stations in the
selected region.
Inquiry
Performs an inquiry at a selected station.
Station Selection
Displays the corridor section view at the first or Start Station on the corridor.
Use the Start Station button and the Next Station button to view the change in daylight elevation along
the corridor.
Displays the corridor section view at the Previous Station on the corridor.
Select a Station
Lists all the stations for which there are corridor section views. If you click Show Overridden Stations,
this list displays only stations where assemblies were edited with override parameters. Click to select a
station.
Displays the corridor section view at the Next Station on the corridor.
Displays the corridor section view at the End Station on the corridor.
Use the End Station button and the Previous Station button to view the change in daylight elevation
along the corridor.
Parameter Editor
Edits the subassembly parameters of selected corridor sections.
Edit the override locations and values of selected subassemblies in the Corridor Parameter Editor vista.
Update Corridor
Rebuilds the corridor using the subassembly overrides.
All corridor surfaces and any other data that derives from the corridor are updated with the subassembly
overrides. Has no effect when no overrides are present or when the corridor is set to rebuild automatically.
NOTE When you close the Section Editor ribbon, the corridor is automatically rebuilt with the changes.
Add Point
Prompts you to add points to a subassembly by selecting a link in the corridor section view. The point is
placed at the midpoint of the link.
The points at the end of the links retain the codes from the original link.
Delete Point
Prompts you to delete points from a subassembly by selecting a point in the corridor section view.
All links connected to deleted points are also deleted.
Add Link
Prompts you to add links by selecting points within a subassembly to connect.
You cannot add a link by connecting points from two different subassemblies.
Delete Link
Prompts you to delete links from a subassembly by selecting links in the corridor section view.
The points that were connected in order to create the deleted link are not deleted.
Add Subassembly
Prompts you to add subassemblies by attaching a new subassembly to an existing subassembly or by
inserting a new subassembly between two existing subassemblies.
If you insert a subassembly between two existing subassemblies, the Override column (in the assembly
parameters) displays True.
Delete Subassembly
Prompts you to delete subassemblies by selecting a subassembly to delete in the corridor section view.
If the deleted subassembly connected two subassemblies, the remaining subassemblies are attached to
each other.
Edit/View Options
Sets the view/edit corridor section options.
In the View/Edit Corridor Section Options dialog box you can specify a new view scale, section view, or
code set style, and select to automatically rebuild the corridor.
Zoom to Extents
Click to zoom to the extents of the corridor section view.
Zoom to Subassembly
Click to lock the zoom to a subassembly object. Opens the Pick Subassembly dialog box.
Close
Close
Closes the Corridor Section Editor ribbon and exits the corridor section view.
Related procedures:
See also:
Related procedures:
Related procedures:
Creates an empty corridor surface to which you can subsequently add data using the Add Data fields.
Creates individual corridor surfaces from all link codes. The corridor surfaces are listed in the grid where
you can view and modify them.
Opens the Name Template (page 2022) dialog box, where you can modify the surface corridor naming
template.
Deletes the surface or data component that is currently selected in the Name column of the grid.
Specify Code
Specifies the available links or features lines, depending on whether the Data Type is set to Feature Lines
or Links.
Adds the data specified with the Data Type and Specify Code fields to the selected surface.
NOTE You must first select a corridor surface before adding the data.
Surface Style
Specifies the surface style associated with the corridor surface. Click this field to open the Pick Corridor
Surface Style dialog box where you can select a style. The value is also specified on the surface properties
Information tab.
Render Material
Specifies the render material (page 1761) associated with the corridor surface. Click this field to open the
Select Render Material dialog box and select a render material.
Add as Breakline
Specifies whether the corridor surface is built using breaklines (page 667).
Overhang Correction
Specifies whether an overhang is to be corrected when rendered, and whether it is to be corrected following
the top links or bottom links.
Description
Specifies a description for the corridor surface.
Related procedures:
NOTE A corridor surface must exist before you can create a boundary. For information about creating a corridor
surface, see Creating and Editing Corridor Surfaces (page 1506).
Specifies the corridor surface names and their corresponding boundaries. Click next to the surface
name to display its boundaries. To add a boundary to a surface, right-click the corridor surface name and
click Add Interactively, Add Automatically, or Add From Polygon.
Description
Specifies the description for the corridor surface boundary.
Render Material
Specifies the render material style (page 1761) associated with the corridor surface boundary. Click this field
to open the Select Render Material dialog box and select a render material.
Definitions
Specifies the boundary definition. Click [...] to open the Corridor Boundary Definition (page 2032) dialog
box, where you can view and modify the boundary definition.
Use Type
Specifies the boundary type:
■ Render Only. Renders specified areas of the corridor surface with different materials (when rendering),
for example, asphalt and grass.
■ Hide Boundary. Creates void areas or punches holes in the corridor surface.
Related procedures:
Reset Labels
Resets the code set style labels to their original default property values. This button is enabled only when
the function is available.
Description
This read-only field displays the description of each code.
Label Style
This read-only field displays the label style assigned to each code or <none> if no label style is assigned.
Render Material
This read-only field displays the render material (page 1761) associated with the corridor surface.
Pay Item
This read-only field displays the IDs of pay items attached to any Link or Point.
Related procedures:
Select Baseline
Specifies the baseline alignment from which to extract the points. Select a baseline or click to select
an alignment in the drawing. Available only if For User Specified Range is selected.
Alignment Start
Specifies the start of the range along the alignment from which to extract points. To edit the start point,
enter a value or click to select a location in the drawing.
Alignment End
Specifies the end of the range along the alignment at which to extract points. To edit the end point, enter
a value or click to select a location in the drawing.
Related procedures:
Specifies the format of the corridor baseline (alignment) name. Click to open the Name Template
dialog box.
Horizontal Alignment
Lists the horizontal alignments that are available. Click to select an alignment in the drawing. The
alignment selected in the drawing is then displayed as the selected alignment in the list.
Related procedures:
NOTE To name the corridor, click on its default name and enter a new name or use the naming template.
Opens the Name Template (page 2022) dialog box, where you can modify the surface corridor naming
template.
Description
Specifies a description for the corridor.
Corridor Layer
Displays the layer that the corridor will be created on.
Opens the Object Layer dialog box where you can select a different layer for the corridor.
Corridor Style
Displays the style that is used to display corridor components, such as region boundaries and assembly
insertion stations. For more information, see Corridor Styles and Display (page 1473).
Add Baseline
Adds another baseline (alignment) to the corridor definition.
NOTE If targets are required and not set, messages are displayed in the Event Viewer. To display the Event
Viewer, click General ➤ Utilities ➤ Event Viewer. For more information on the event viewer, see The Event
Viewer Vista (page 1817).
NOTE Offset alignments are displayed if the assembly is defined with assembly offsets. For more information,
seeCreating an Assembly Offset (page 1543).
The check boxes beside the baselines and regions specify whether to show (selected) or hide (cleared) the
baselines or regions. If the check box is cleared, that section of corridor is not reprocessed when underlying
elements (for example, alignments, subassemblies, or surfaces) change.
NOTE The check boxes have a tri-state display. If only one of the regions is selected under a baseline, the check
box is dimmed and unavailable.
Alignment
Specifies the alignment for a baseline or offset alignment. Click this field to open the Pick Horizontal
Alignment dialog box where you can select an alignment.
Profile
Specifies the profile for a baseline offset alignment. Click this field to open the Select A Profile dialog box
where you can select a profile.
Assembly
Opens the Select An Assembly dialog box where you can select an assembly for the corridor region.
Start Station
Specifies the start station for the region or controlling offset. By default, for the first region added to a
baseline, this value is set to the start station of the baseline. If one or more corridor regions already exist,
this value is set to the end station of last region. Enter a value or click to select a location in the drawing
area.
End Station
Specifies the end station for the region or controlling offset. By default, for the first region added to a
baseline, this value is set to the end station of the baseline. Enter a value or click to select a location
in the drawing area.
Frequency
Specifies the frequency at which assemblies are placed for a given baseline or region. Click to open the
Frequency To Apply Assemblies dialog box (page 2060), where you can modify the station frequency and
manually add stations.
Target
Click to open the Target Mapping dialog box (page 2064), where you can map targets from subassembly
definitions to appropriate drawing object names for the region. For more information, see Setting Targets
(page 1481).
Overrides
This field is disabled when you are creating a corridor. For more information, see Viewing and Deleting
Overridden Stations (page 1500).
Related procedures:
Specifies the format of the corridor region name. Click to open the Name Template dialog box.
Assembly Name
Lists the assemblies that are available. Click to select an assembly in the drawing. The assembly selected
in the drawing is then displayed as the selected assembly in the list.
Related procedures:
Select
Specifies whether to export the corresponding surface.
Surface Style
Specifies the style for the surface. Click to open the Pick Corridor Surface Style dialog box where you can
select a style.
Render Material
Specifies the render material style (page 1761) associated with the surface. Click this field to open the Select
Render Material dialog box where you can select a render material.
Related procedures:
Specifies the site in which to place the feature line. Select a site from the list or click to select a site
from the drawing.
Name
Specifies the name of the feature line. Select the check box and click to open the Name Template dialog
box.
Style
Select the check box and select a feature line style in the list. Click to edit the style. Click to preview
the selected style. A style is optional for a feature line, but it provides useful display options and allows
you to control color, visibility, and other settings.
Specifies the layer on which the feature line should be created. Click to open the Object Layer dialog
box and specify the layer. Click Use Current Layer to specify that layer be used.
Smoothing
Select this check box to enable the curve smoothing settings.
Horizontal Deviation
Specifies the maximum 2D distance within which the non-colinear points must be located from the
resulting smooth curve. If set to 0, the curve will interpolate all points.
Weeding Distance
Specifies the minimum distance between co-linear points in the resulting smooth curve. The intermediate
co-linear points are weeded.
Related procedures:
NOTE To name the corridor, click on its default name and enter a new name or use the naming template.
Opens the Name Template (page 2022) dialog box, where you can modify the corridor naming template.
Description
Specifies a description for the corridor.
Corridor Style
Displays the style that is used to display corridor components, such as region boundaries and assembly
insertion stations. For more information, see Corridor Styles and Display (page 1473).
Corridor Layer
Displays the layer that the corridor will be created on.
Related procedures:
Feature Line1
Displays the point code of the first feature line selected to define the slope pattern.
Feature Line2
Displays the point code of the second feature line selected to define the slope pattern.
Specifies the slope pattern style. Click and select a style in the Pick Style dialog box or use the standard
style creation tools to edit or create a style. For more information about the style creation tools, see the
Select Style Dialog Box (page 2021).
Baseline
Displays the feature line’s corresponding baseline.
Station Start
Specifies the start station for the slope pattern display. To edit the station start, enter a value or click
to select a location in the drawing area.
Station End
Specifies the end station for the slope pattern display. To edit the station end, enter a value or click
to select a location in the drawing area.
Related procedures:
■ Corridor feature settings are listed near the top of this dialog box, after the General property group, and
are identified by the corridor icon.
For general information about drawing, feature, and command settings and their interaction, see Working
with the Standard Settings Dialog Box Controls (page 78).
For information about drawing-level ambient settings, see Ambient Settings Tab (Drawing Settings Dialog
Box) (page 2078)
Use this setting, to establish the defaults when exporting alignments and profiles from a corridor.
Create Profile From Corridor
Specifies whether a profile is automatically created when creating an alignment from a corridor feature
line. If set to Yes, the profile is automatically added to the profile view.
Use this setting to establish the defaults when exporting feature lines from a corridor:
Smoothen Created Entities
Specifies whether corridor feature lines are smoothed when created.
distance in the Value column or click and select a distance in the drawing area.
distance in the Value column or click and select a distance in the drawing area.
distance in the Value column or click and select a distance in the drawing area.
distance in the Value column or click and select a distance in the drawing area.
Use these settings to specify the defaults when creating feature lines.
Feature Line Name
Specifies whether a name is applied to feature lines when created.
Layer Setting
Specifies the layer that is applied to feature lines when created. The settings are: Use The Layer Setting
(from the drawing settings); and Use The Current Layer.
Horizontal Deviation
Specifies the maximum 2D distance within which the non-collinear points must be located from the
resulting smooth curve. If set to 0, the curve will interpolate all points.
Inclusion Distance
Specifies the maximum distance within which the non-collinear points must be located to be converted
into arcs.
Weeding Distance
Specifies the minimum distance between co-linear points in the resulting smooth curve. The intermediate
co-linear points are weeded.
Use these settings to establish the default behavior for viewing corridor sections.
Default View Scale
Specifies the scale factor to use when viewing the corridor sections. For example, enter 1 to fit the section
exactly to the viewing area.
NOTE The new view scale is used for the next section that is viewed.
Rebuild on Edit
Specifies whether the corridor model is automatically rebuilt when you edit a subassembly using the
Corridor Section Editor Ribbon (page 2042).
Front Clip
Specifies the visible extent of 3D objects displayed in a corridor section, measured forward from the
sampled section.
Back Clip
Specifies the visible extent of 3D objects displayed in a corridor section, measured from the sampled
section back.
Grid Settings
NOTE This property group is displayed when you access the settings from the ViewEditCorridorSection command.
Use these settings to establish the default behavior for corridor section view grids:
Display Horizontal Grid
Specifies whether there are horizontal grid lines.
Specifies the interval between horizontal grid lines. Enter a distance in the Value column or click and
select a distance in the drawing area.
Specifies the interval between vertical grid lines. Enter a distance in the Value column or click and
select a distance in the drawing area.
Grid Color
Specifies the color for grid lines. Click in the Value column, and click to select a color in the Select
Color dialog box.
Specifies the color for the center axis line. Click in the Value column, and click to select a color in the
Select Color dialog box.
Use these settings to establish the default behavior for viewing corridor section grid text:
Text Style
Specifies the text style. Click in the Value column, and click to select a style in the Select Text Style
dialog box.
Text Color
Specifies the color for grid text. Click in the Value column, and click to select a style in the Select
Color dialog box.
Use these settings to specify the defaults used when using the MatchCorrRegionParams command. These
command settings specify the default state of the Match Region Parameters dialog box (page 2061) options
(checked or unchecked) when you use this command.
Match Assembly
Specifies whether or not to match assemblies by default when using this command.
Match Targets
Specifies whether or not to match targets by default when using this command.
Match Frequency
Specifies whether or not to match assembly frequency by default when using this command.
Default Styles
Use these settings to establish the default styles assigned to corridor components:
Alignment Style
Specifies the default style for an alignment created from the corridor. Click in the Value column, and click
to select a style in the Alignment Style dialog box.
Specifies the default code set style. Click in the Value column, and click to select a style in the Code
Set Style dialog box.
Specifies the default corridor surface style. Click in the Value column, and click to select a style in the
Corridor Surface Style dialog box.
Corridor Style
Specifies the default style for the corridor. Click in the Value column, and click to select a style in the
Corridor Style dialog box.
Specifies the default profile label set style. Click in the Value column, and click to select a style in the
Profile Label Set dialog box.
Profile Style
Specifies the default style for a profile created from the corridor. Click in the Value column, and click
to select a style in the Profile Style dialog box.
Specifies the default render material style for the corridor. Click in the Value column, and click to
select a style in the Render Material style dialog box.
For information about style selection, see Select Style Dialog Box (page 2021).
Baseline Color
Specifies the color for the baseline. Click in the Value column, and click to select a color in the Select
Color dialog box.
Baseline Lineweight
Specifies the default baseline lineweight. Click in the Value column, and click to select a style in the
Lineweight dialog box.
Specifies the color for the region boundary. Click in the Value column, and click to select a color in
the Select Color dialog box.
Specifies the default region boundary lineweight. Click in the Value column, and click to select a style
in the Lineweight dialog box.
Specifies the color for horizontal targets. Click in the Value column, and click to select a color in the
Select Color dialog box.
Specifies the default horizontal targets lineweight. Click in the Value column, and click to select a
style in the Lineweight dialog box.
Specifies the color for interior assemblies. Click in the Value column, and click to select a color in the
Select Color dialog box.
Specifies the default interior assemblies lineweight. Click in the Value column, and click to select a
style in the Lineweight dialog box.
Use these settings to specify the defaults used when creating a profile using design criteria.
NOTE The design criteria values of the parent alignment take precedence over the default design criteria values
of the profile. If the parent alignment does not use design criteria values, then the criteria-based design options
in the profile are used.
Specifies the default design check set. Click in the Value column, and click to select a set in the Default
Design Check Set dialog box.
NOTE This setting is not available if the Use Design Checks Option is set to False.
Baseline Name
Displays the corridor baseline (alignment) name.
Apply Assembly
Specifies the frequency and placement settings for stations along the corridor.
NOTE Change the default values for the frequency and placement settings from the Edit Feature Settings dialog
box for the CreateCorridor and CreateSimpleCorridor commands. For information, see Changing Corridor Creation
Settings (page 1479).
Along Tangents
Specifies the assembly insertion frequency along the tangent portion of an alignment. Enter a value or
click and select a distance in the drawing.
Along Curves
Specifies the assembly insertion frequency along the curve portion of an alignment. Enter a value or click
Along Spirals
Specifies the assembly insertion frequency along the spiral portion of an alignment. Enter a value or click
NOTE If both an assembly frequency setting that references horizontal geometry and a setting that references
vertical geometry apply to a portion of a corridor, the setting that results in a smaller interval is used. For example,
if a segment is both a horizontal tangent and a vertical curve, and the vertical curve frequency adds assemblies
at more frequent intervals, the frequency specified for vertical curves is used.
Adds a station. You are prompted to select a station location in the drawing. The station is added to the
table of stations.
Description
Specifies a description for the station. Click to enter a description.
Related procedures:
Related procedures:
Click to select an alignment in the drawing. The alignment selected in the drawing is then displayed as
the selected alignment in the horizontal alignment listing.
Select A Profile
Displays the profiles that are available for selected alignment.
Click to select a profile in the drawing. The profile selected in the drawing is then displayed as the selected
profile in the Select A Profile list.
Related procedures:
Description
Specifies the optional description of the subassembly.
Related procedures:
Related procedures:
Select
Click to select all entities on a layer for targeting.
NOTE All entities on any selected layer will be listed in Selected Entities To Target list in either the Set Width Or
Offset Target or the Set Slope Or Elevation Target dialog box.
Profiles
Select An Alignment
Select from the list any alignment whose profiles you intend to target.
Click to select an alignment in the drawing. The alignment selected in the drawing is then displayed as
the selected alignment in the horizontal alignment listing.
Select Profiles
Select from the list any profile you intend to target.
Click to select a profile in the drawing. The profile selected in the drawing is then displayed as the selected
profile in the Select Profiles list.
Add >>
Click to add a selected profile to the Selected Entities To Target list.
Select By Layer
Click to select objects in the Select Entities By Layer dialog box.
NOTE All entities on any layer selected in the Select Entities By Layer dialog box will be listed in Selected Entities
To Target list.
Related procedures:
Alignments
Select from the list any alignment you intend to target and click Add >>, or click to select an alignment
from the drawing.
Select By Layer
Click to select objects in the Select Entities By Layer dialog box.
NOTE All entities on any layer selected in the Select Entities By Layer dialog box will be listed in Selected Entities
To Target list.
Related procedures:
Assembly Name
Displays the name of the assembly. If you are viewing the target for an entire corridor, for which there is
more than one baseline, ‘**Varies**’ is displayed.
End Station
Displays the end station for the assembly’s region or the end station on the corridor baseline. If you are
viewing the target for the entire corridor for which there is more than one baseline, ‘**Varies**’ is displayed.
Object Name
Opens either the Pick A Surface, Set Width Or Offset Target, Set Slope Or Elevation Target or Select Pipe
Network dialog box, where you can select the AutoCAD Civil 3D object name to map to the subassembly
target.
NOTE To quickly set all surface targets to the same surface object, click <Click Here To Set All> next to the
Surfaces collection and select the surface object.
Subassembly
Displays the name of the subassembly that requires the target.
Assembly Group
Displays the name of the assembly group.
Related procedures:
NOTE The new view scale is used for the subsequent section that is viewed.
Rebuild On Edit
Specifies whether the corridor model is automatically rebuilt when you edit a subassembly using the
View/Edit Corridor Section Tools toolbar (page 2042).
Front Clip
Specifies the visible extent of 3D objects displayed in a corridor section, measured forward from the
sampled section.
Back Clip
Specifies the visible extent of 3D objects displayed in a corridor section, measured from the sampled
section back.
Grid Settings
Horizontal Grid
Specifies whether there are horizontal grid lines.
Vertical Grid
Specifies whether there are vertical grid lines.
Grid Color
Specifies the color for grid lines. Click to open the Select Color dialog box.
Center Axis
Specifies whether there is a center axis line for the grid.
Specifies the color for the center axis line. Click to open the Select Color dialog box.
Text Color
Specifies the color for grid text. Click to open the Select Color dialog box.
Related procedures:
New Button
Creates an empty design criteria file containing the Units, Alignments, and Profiles nodes in the design
criteria hierarchy panel.
Open Button
Opens a browse dialog box, which allows you to select another design criteria file to edit.
Save Button
Saves unsaved changes to the currently open design criteria file.
Save As Button
Saves the currently open design criteria file using a new, user-specified name.
Undo Button
Reverses the most recent change to the currently open design criteria file.
Redo Button
Reverses the most recent undo operation in the currently open design criteria file.
2067
Make File Read-Only Check Box
Prevents the currently open design criteria file from being modified. If selected, the Save, Save As, Undo,
and Redo buttons are not available.
Cancel Button
Clears unsaved changes to the currently open design criteria file and closes the Design Criteria Editor
dialog box.
Help Button
Opens the Design Criteria Editor dialog box help topic.
Nodes that are preceded by are containers for criteria tables or other container nodes. Nodes that are
preceded by are criteria tables, which contain the design criteria property values that are applied to the
alignment or profile. Right-cli node to add new or nodes to it. Click a node to edit the table
contents in the Attributes panel.
Units Node
Specifies the units of measure for the design criteria file. This value can be either Metric or Imperial. Select
a units value, and then specify the individual unit values in the Attributes panel.
Alignments Node
Contains the design criteria for alignments. Select a criteria table, and then specify the individual
criteria values in the Attributes panel. The following categories and criteria are available this node:
■ Minimum Radius Tables
■ Superelevation Tables: Design Speed (Superelevation Design Speed or Transition Length Tables)
Profiles Node
Contains the design criteria for profiles. Select a criteria table, and then specify the individual criteria
values in the Attributes panel. You can create multiple Minimum K Tables in this category. Each Minimum
K Table can contain any of the following criteria tables:
■ Stopping Sight Distance
Add Button
Adds a row to the attribute table. If an existing row is selected, the new row is added below the selected
row. If a row is not selected, the new row is added to the end of the attribute table.
Delete Button
Deletes the currently selected rows.
Attribute Columns
Specify the attributes for the currently selected criteria table. Values in the individual cells are editable.
Comments Panel
User-specified comments for the currently selected container or criteria table node. Comments may be added
to any node in the design criteria hierarchy panel.
Related procedures:
NOTE Do not enter functions, constants, or logical operators inside the { } brackets that surround Properties such
as {Minimum Radius}.
To set up a design check, you can use the buttons in the dialog box and the keypad on your keyboard. There
are menus in the dialog box from which you can choose Properties and functions to insert into the design
check.
If you enter a combination of items that is invalid, a parse error appears when you click OK.
NOTE Because design checks return either a true or false value, they must contain one of the following logical
operators: > (greater than), < (less than), >= (greater than or equals), <= (less than or equals), != (not equals), =
(equals).
Description
Specifies a description that appears in the Settings tab item list view.
Calculator Buttons
Enter numbers and logical operators (page 1732)into the Design Check box to define the expression.
Insert Property
Inserts a property into the design check. Click the icon to display a list of properties relevant to the design
check type. Select a property to insert it into the design check.
Insert Function
Inserts a function into the expression. See functions (page 1732)for more information.
Related procedures:
See also:
Description
Specifies the description of the current design check set.
Created By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who created the design check set.
Last Modified By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who last modified the design check set.
Date Modified
Displays the date and time the design check set was last modified.
<Type> Checks
Specifies the user-defined design checks that are available for the design check type specified in the Type
list. Select a design check from this list, and then click Add to add it to the design check set.
Type Column
Displays the entity types to which the design checks apply.
Apply To Column
For profile curve design checks, specifies the type of curve that the design check will validate. Select one
of the following options:
■ Crest And Sag Curves
NOTE This column is not available for alignment design check sets.
Related procedures:
Angular Units
Specifies the angular units for drawing entities in AutoCAD model space:
■ Degrees
■ Grads
■ Radians
2073
Scale
Specifies the intended plot scale in imperial or metric units.
Custom Scale
Specifies the plotted size of various annotation-related components, such as label text, ticks, and band
heights. If you change the scale, all annotation objects adjust accordingly.
Zone
NOTE If you know the code of the coordinate system you want, you can enter it directly in the Selected Coordinate
System Code box. A period (.) in this box means no zone has been selected.
Categories
Specifies the geographic zone.
Description
Displays a description of the selected zone.
Projection
Displays the projection method for the coordinate system.
Datum
Displays the abbreviation for the datum on which the coordinate system is based.
Related procedures:
■ User Defined: Allows you to specify your own scale factor. For example, you can enter the average
scale factor of the points in your survey. This value is used for all points or locations within the zone
and is constant.
■ Reference Point: Uses the scale factor of the specified reference point as the grid scale factor for all
points within the zone.
■ Prismoidal Formula: Uses the prismoidal formula to calculate the grid scale factor. This method is
recommended because it accounts for the fact that every point has a different scale factor. The following
equation is used to calculate prismoidal scale factor.
Where:
■ Kmid is the scale factor of the midpoint between the reference point and the current point.
A different value is used for each point or locations within the zone.
Scale Factor
Specifies the grid scale factor. Enabled only when you select User Defined for Computation.
Reference Point
Use this section to specify a reference point for transformation. The reference point could be a benchmark
that was used in a survey. It can be any point for which you know both the local coordinates and the grid
coordinates.
Point Number, Local Northing, Local Easting, Grid Northing, Grid Easting
Specifies a reference point by its point number, Local Northing and Easting values, or Grid Northing and
Easting values.
Rotation Point
Use this section to specify a rotation about the reference point in one of two ways: specify a rotation point,
or apply a grid rotation angle.
Specifies the rotation angle to north. Enter an angle or click and pick a point or line in the drawing.
The rotation to grid north is the difference between the local coordinate system's north meridian and the
grid north meridian of the current zone. If you are using True North, this value may equal the convergence
angle. If you are using Magnetic North, this value is derived from the declination angle and the convergence
angle.
Azimuth
Specifies the direction of the azimuth. Enter an angle or click and pick a point or line in the drawing.
Grid azimuth is the angle between the drawing north and the line defined by reference grid and rotation
grid points.
Related procedures:
■ Profile-Labeling setting
■ Section-Labeling setting
■ Pipe-Labeling setting
■ Structure-Labeling setting
Object
Lists all object types in AutoCAD Civil 3D.
Layer
Displays the layer on which the object is drawn. Click to open the Layer Selection dialog box.
Modifier
Specifies whether the layer name includes a text-string modifier, and if so, the location of the modifier:
■ None: No modifier.
Value
Specifies the text string to use as the modifier. You can enter an asterisk (*) to include the object name as
the modifier in the layer name and to put each named object on its own layer. For example, if C-ROAD
is the name specified for alignment layers and you add -* as a suffix, an alignment named overpass is
created on layer C-ROAD-OVERPASS.
Locked
Specifies whether layer settings are locked for the drawing to prevent overrides for individual objects.
■ Cleared: If an object layer is turned off, the object subcomponents are also turned off (or not drawn)
even in situations where the subcomponents are on a different layer.
Related procedures:
NOTE For individual abbreviation definitions, see the Glossary (page 2767).
Left/Right
Supported as a unique label text component property field name Offset Side. The left and right side is
determined by looking up-station along the entity.
Superelevation
Used for abbreviations that are specific to superelevation.
Property
Specifies the superelevation default properties.
Profile
Used for abbreviations that are specific to profile geometry points.
Property
Specifies the geometric point or other entity.
Related procedures:
Show Tooltips
Specifies whether to display tooltips in the drawing. This setting does not affect tooltips for toolbar icons.
For example, if you move your cursor near an alignment, you see a tooltip that shows the station and
offset location of the cursor. Tooltips can also show surface elevation, point, profile, and section
information.
NOTE You can also control tooltip display at the feature settings level and by editing the properties of an
individual object.
Drawing Unit
Displays the linear units that are used in the model space of the drawing. Set this value on the Units And
Zone tab of this dialog box.
Drawing Scale
Displays the intended plot scale. Set this value on the Units And Zone tab of this dialog box.
Driving Direction
Determines how curb return alignments are drawn for intersection objects. Left Side of the Road is typically
selected for projects where vehicles travel on the left side of the road; for example, in countries such as
the United Kingdom. In this case, curb return alignments in intersection objects are drawn starting from
the left side of the outgoing road, and ending on the left side of the merging road. Right Side of the Road
is typically selected for projects where vehicles travel on the right side of the road; for example, in countries
such as the United States. In this case, curb return alignments in intersection objects are drawn starting
from the right side of the outgoing road, and ending on the right side of the merging road. For more
information, see Setting Driving Direction (page 1592).
Independent Layer On
Has the same effect as the Immediate And Independent Layer On/Off Control Of Display Components
setting on the Object Layers (page 2076) tab.
Labeling
This setting specifies the default method for prompting for objects when inserting labels that contain
Referenced Text components.
Labeling Prompt Method
■ Command Line: When inserting a label that contains Referenced Text, you are prompted at the
command line to select the objects to refer to in the label.
■ Dialog: When inserting a label that contains Referenced Text, the Label Properties dialog box is
displayed.
Unitless
These settings specify how to display numeric values that are not specifically defined by the unit type settings
in this dialog box such as distance and coordinate.
Precision
Specifies the number of digits to show to the right of the decimal.
Rounding
Specifies how numbers are rounded up or down to the number of decimal places specified in Precision:
■ Round Normal: If the last displayable digit is even, and the next digit is exactly 5, the program rounds
down. If the last displayable digit is odd, and the next digit is exactly 5, the program rounds up. An
input value of 100.12345 with precision of 4 would be displayed as 100.1234.
If the next digit after the last displayable digit is greater than 5, the program rounds up. If the next
digit after the last displayable digit is less than 5, the program rounds down.
NOTE AutoCAD is limited to 8 displayed decimal places. However, the actual precision beyond the display
capability will still effect rounding. For example, 25.12500000001 would round to 25.13 with two place
precision labeling.
■ Round Up: Numbers are always rounded up. The value 100.12345 with precision of 4 would be 100.1235
and with precision 2 would be 100.13.
■ Truncate: Numbers are limited to the specified number of decimal places without rounding. The value
100.12345 with precision of 4 would be 100.1234 and with precision 2 would be 100.12.
Sign
Specifies how to mark numbers as positive or negative:
■ Sign Negative: A sign is used only with negative values. Example: 100.00, -100.00
■ Sign Always +/-: A sign is used with both positive and negative values. Example: +100.00, -100.00
Distance
These settings specify how to display linear distances.
Unit
Specifies the linear unit to use:
■ Meter
■ Kilometer
■ Decimeter
■ Centimeter
■ Millimeter
■ Foot
■ Inch
■ Yard
■ Mile
Rounding
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Sign
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Dimension
These settings specify how to display linear dimensions.
Unit
Specifies the linear unit to use:
■ Meter
■ Kilometer
■ Decimeter
■ Centimeter
■ Millimeter
■ Foot
■ Inch
■ Yard
■ Mile
Precision
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Rounding
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Sign
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Coordinate
These settings specify how to display X and Y coordinates.
Unit
Specifies the linear unit to use:
■ Meter
■ Kilometer
■ Decimeter
■ Centimeter
■ Millimeter
■ Foot
■ Inch
■ Yard
Precision
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Rounding
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Sign
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Elevation
These settings specify how to display surface elevations.
Unit
Specifies the linear unit to use:
■ Meter
■ Kilometer
■ Decimeter
■ Centimeter
■ Millimeter
■ Foot
■ Inch
■ Yard
■ Mile
Precision
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Rounding
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Sign
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Area
These settings specify how to display surface areas.
Unit
Specifies the drawing unit to use:
■ Square Meter
■ Square Foot
■ Acre
■ Hectare
■ Square Kilometer
■ Square Mile
■ Square Yard
Rounding
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Sign
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Volume
These settings specify how to display terrain volumes.
Unit
Specifies the drawing unit to use:
■ Cubic Meter
■ Cubic Foot
■ Cubic Yard
Precision
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Rounding
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Sign
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Speed
These settings specify how to display speeds for design criteria.
Unit
Specifies the speed as:
■ Kilometer/hr.
■ Meter/sec.
■ Foot/sec.
■ Mile/hr.
Precision
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Rounding
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Sign
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Angle
These settings specify how to display deflection angles between two vectors.
Unit
Specifies the angular unit to use:
■ Radian
■ Grad
Precision
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Rounding
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Format
Specifies how to display angles:
■ Decimal (DD.DDDDDD)
Sign
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Direction
These settings specify how to display directions.
Unit
Specifies the angular unit to use:
■ Radian
■ Degree
■ Grad
Precision
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Rounding
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Format
Specifies how to display angles:
■ Decimal (DD.DDDDDD)
Capitalization
Specifies how to display direction names:
■ Preserve Case
Sign
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Measurement Type
Specifies how to calculate the direction of a vector:
■ Bearings
■ North Azimuth
■ South Azimuth
Bearing Quadrant
Specifies which bearing quadrant to use:
■ 1 - NE
■ 2 - SE
■ 3 - SW
■ 4 - NW
Lat Long
These settings specify how to display latitude and longitude.
Unit
Specifies the angular unit to use:
■ Radian
■ Degree
Precision
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Rounding
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Format
Specifies how to display angles:
■ Decimal (DD.DDDDDD)
Direction
Specifies the format of lat/long labels:
■ Prefix Short Name (example: N 50° 45')
■ Signed: Includes minus signs for negative values (example: -72° 45’ 35.45678”)
Capitalization
Specifies how to display direction names:
■ Preserve Case
Sign
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Rounding
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Format
Specifies how to display grade and slope values:
■ Rise:Run (example 1:5)
Sign
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Grade
These settings specify how to display grade measurements.
Precision
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Rounding
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Format
Specifies how to display grade values:
■ Percent (example 20%)
Sign
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Slope
These settings specify how to display slope measurements.
Precision
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Rounding
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Format
Specifies how to display grade and slope values:
■ Rise:Run (example 1:5)
Station
These settings specify how to display linear features that use station or chainage.
Unit
Specifies the drawing unit to use:
■ Meter
■ Decimeter
■ Centimeter
■ Millimeter
■ Kilometer
■ Foot
■ Inch
■ Yard
■ Mile
Format
Specifies the station format in labels, tooltips, and elsewhere:
■ Station Format: Specifies that normal station formatting is used (example: 0+010.123).
■ Station Index Format: Specifies that indexing is used and applies the Station Index Increment that is
specified on the Labels tab of the Alignment Properties dialog box. For example, if the Station Index
Increment is 200m, then the station at 200m will appear as 1+00 and the station at 400m will appear
as 2+00, and so on. To view this format in labels, you must set up the station label style to use Station
Index Format (page 1051) also.
Precision
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Rounding
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
Sign
For information, see the Unitless section of this topic.
■ Automatic (plus or minus depending on whether the station value is positive or negative)
■ Underscore ‘_’
■ None
■ 1+00
■ 1+000
■ 1+0000
■ 1+00000
■ No (example: 120+00.000)
Transparent Commands
These settings specify the prompting behavior of transparent commands across all features. The formats
used to prompt for grade and slope values are set using the Grade and Slope ambient settings.
Prompt For 3D Points
Specifies the prompt sequence (X,Y or X, Y, Z) when creating a point in 3D:
■ True (prompt for 3D points)
■ False (X first)
Description
Specifies the details about the published DWG file (optional).
Hyperlink
Specifies the url related to the description field. Only available if the description is specified.
Related procedures:
2091
Selected Model Space Entities
Activates the specific entities selection mode. Select to specify individual model space entities to publish
in Google Earth.
Click to select model space entities from the drawing to publish in Google Earth.
Publish Text
Select to include all text strings from the drawing in the published file. The text strings are displayed in
the Google Earth data file as named placemarks.
NOTE All text elements are formatted based on Google Earth default style. Your original formatting may not
be preserved.
Publish Materials
Select to include render materials associated with the model space entities.
NOTE If timespan information (page 1872)is attached to model space entities, this information is not published
to Google Earth when you select to publish render materials.
Related procedures:
DWG Location
Specifies the coordinate value in the DWG linear units. Specify the following:
■ X: The X-coordinate of the point in the drawing to be associated with the specific longitudinal position
on the Earth’s surface.
■ Y: The Y-coordinate of the point in the drawing to be associated with the specific latitudinal position
on the Earth’s surface.
■ Latitude: The latitudinal position of the point on the Earth’s surface that is associated with the
Y-coordinate of a specific point on the drawing.
Click to open the Geographic Location dialog box. See Geographic Location Dialog Box (page 2094).
Click to open the Geographic Location dialog box. See Geographic Location Dialog Box (page 2094).
Related procedures:
Related procedures:
Click to browse to the location where you want to save your DWG model data file.
NOTE Using the .kml extension may result in large data files. Use the .kmz extension to reduce file size.
Related procedures:
Publish and View Page (Publish AutoCAD DWG to Google Earth Wizard)
Use this page to view the status of the publishing operation.
Publishing Status
Shows the publishing operation status bar.
View button
Click to view the published model in Google Earth.
Related procedures:
Direction
Specifies the latitude vertical direction.
Longitude
Specifies the longitude and direction in decimal values. Positive values represent west longitudes.
Longitude
Specifies the longitude of the current location. You can specify the value or select the location on the
map. The valid range is 1 - 180.
Direction
Specifies the longitude horizontal direction.
Displays the North Direction. Move the bar to adjust the North direction angle value.
Map
Specifies a location by using the pointing device. The latitude and longitude values are updated when
you select a location. If you enter latitude and longitude values, the pointer moves to show the location.
Region
Specifies the region of the world.
Nearest City
Specifies a city in the selected region.
Time Zone
Specifies the time zone. Time zones are estimated by reference to the location. You can set the time zone
directly.
Related procedures:
■ Grading feature settings are listed near the top of this dialog box, after the General property group, and
The precision and number format display used by all grading commands and used to display grading values
is specified in the drawing ambient settings.
For general information about drawing, feature, and command settings and their interaction, see Working
with the Standard Settings Dialog Box Controls (page 78).
For information about drawing-level ambient settings, see Ambient Settings Tab (Drawing Settings Dialog
Box) (page 2078)
Default Styles
Use these settings to specify the default styles for for new feature lines and grading groups.
Feature Line Style
Specifies the default style to apply when creating feature lines. Click in the Value column, and click
to select a style in the Feature Line Style dialog box.
Grading Style
Specifies the default style to apply when creating grading. Click in the Value column, and click to
select a style in the Grading Style dialog box.
2097
Cut Slope Grading Style
Specifies the default style to apply when creating cut slope grading. Click in the Value column, and click
to select a style in the Cut Slope Grading Style dialog box.
For information about style selection, see Select Style Dialog Box (page 2021).
Layer Setting
Specifies what layer is applied to feature lines when created. The default is Use the Layer Setting which is
from drawing settings.
Weed Points
Specifies whether to open the Weed Vertices dialog box so you can weed the objects when converting to
a feature line. Change this value to True to open the Weed Vertices dialog box.
Mid-ordinate Distance
Specifies the mid-ordinate distance for tessellating curves into short line segments. The default is 0.100.
For more information, see Creating Feature Lines from Alignments (page 810)
Weed Points
Specifies whether to open the Weed Vertices dialog box so you can weed the objects when converting to
a feature line. Change this value to True to open the Weed Vertices dialog box.
Assign Elevations
Specifies whether to open the Assign Elevations dialog box.
Elevation Source
Specifies whether to assign elevations from a surface, from selected gradings or to set a fixed elevation.
For more information, see Creating Feature Lines from Objects (page 808)
Layer Setting
Specifies the default layer setting when feature lines are created.
Grading Creation
NOTE This property group is displayed when accessing the settings from the CreateGrading command.
Use this setting to specify the default behavior for creating grading.
Transition Region Length
Specifies the default length for transition regions. Enter a length in the Value column or click and
select a distance in the drawing area. Creation commands prompt for the transition length if you select
the start point of a grading to be within or near to an existing grading.
For more information, see Creating Grading from a Footprint (page 856)
Use these settings to specify the default behavior for creating grading groups.
Grading Surface Creation
Specifies whether a grading group generates an automatic surface by default.
Surface Style
Specifies the default style for the grading group. Click in the Value column, and click to select a style
in the Surface Style dialog box.
an angle in the Value column or click and select an angle in the drawing area.
Tessellation settings control the placement of
breaklines along rounded exterior corners and
straight grading segments
For more information, see Creating a New Grading Group (page 806)
Use these settings to specify the default behavior for creating feature lines along arcs.
Tolerance
Specifies the maximum distance from a PI along the feature to the arc that is to be inserted. When an arc
is inserted, it should pass through all the feature line points (between the start and end points). The
tolerance specifies how much any one point can be off of the arc that is averaged through all the points.
For more information, see Converting Tessellated Lines to Arcs (page 842)
Use these settings to specify the default behavior for the Elevation Editor, when editing feature lines.
Raise/Lower Increment
Specifies the default vertical distance used for each increment when the feature lines of a grading are
raised or lowered to adjust volumes.
For more information, see Editing Feature Lines with the Grading Elevation Editor (page 820)
Use these settings to specify the default criteria for grading layout.
Grading Criteria Set
Specifies the default Criteria Set to use when creating grading. Click in the Value column, and click
to select a criteria set in the Grading Criteria Set dialog box.
Grading Criteria
Specifies the default Criteria to use when creating grading. Click in the Value column, and click to
select criteria in the Grading Criteria dialog box.
Use these settings to specify the default criteria for grading volumes.
Raise/Lower Elevation Increment
Specifies the default vertical distance used for each increment when the feature lines of a grading are
raised or lowered to adjust volumes. Enter a incremental length in the Value column or click and select
a length in the drawing area.
For more information, see Displaying and Adjusting Surface Volumes (page 868)
Join Features
NOTE This property group is displayed when accessing the settings from the JoinFeatures command.
Use this setting to specify the default tolerance for joining feature lines.
Tolerance
Specifies how close feature lines must be when using the Join (page 836) command.
Angle Factor
Specifies the default Angle factor. Enter an angle in the Value column or click and select an angle in
the drawing area.
Grade Factor
Specifies the default Grade factor. Enter a percentage in the Value column or click and select a
percentage in the drawing area.
Length Factor
Specifies the default Length factor. Enter a length in the Value column or click and select a length in
the drawing area.
Specifies the default 3D Distance factor. Enter a distance in the Value column or click and select a
distance in the drawing area.
Related procedures:
Description
Specifies an optional description of the grading group.
Tessellation Spacing
Used for surface creation. Specifies the distance along the footprint to add supplemental breaklines for
better definition of the grading group surface.
Tessellation Angle
Used for surface creation. Specifies the angular spacing of supplemental breaklines added around rounded
exterior corners, for better definition of the grading group surface.
Related procedures:
Description
Specifies a text description of the current criteria.
Created By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who created the style.
Date Created
Displays the date and time the style was created.
Last Modified By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who last modified the style.
Date Modified
Displays the date and time the style was last modified.
NOTE The parameters that are displayed under the Grading Method and Projection groups vary, depending on
the Target and Projection parameters. For example, if you select Elevation for the target, the Elevation parameter
is displayed below Target. You can then enter the elevation.
If a criteria is currently used by one or more grading objects, you cannot edit the values for Target or
Projection.
Grading Method
Target
Specifies the target method for the grading. Click one of the following:
■ Surface: Specifies that the grading projection lines will be extended from the footprint until they
match into a surface. You are prompted to select a target surface when you create a grading that uses
these criteria.
Surface as target (section view)
surface as target
daylight
footprint
■ Elevation: Specifies that the grading projection lines will be extended from the footprint until they
reach a specified elevation. Enter a positive or negative number in the Elevation field.
footprint
daylight
specified elevation
■ Relative Elevation: Specifies that the grading projection lines will be extended from the footprint until
they reach an elevation (depth or height) relative to the footprint. Enter a positive or negative number
in the Relative Elevation field.
Relative elevation as target (section view)
footprint
relative elevation
daylight
■ Distance: Specifies that the grading projection lines will be extended from the footprint until they are
match a specified horizontal distance. Enter a positive number in the Distance field.
Distance as target (section view)
footprint
daylight
■ Cut Slope: Creates the grading by projecting a specific slope value up to a target. Slopes can be formatted
as a slope value (run:rise or rise:run), or a grade value (percent or decimal).
■ Fill Slope: Creates the grading by projecting a specific slope value down to a target. Slopes can be
formatted as a slope value (run:rise or rise:run), or a grade value (percent or decimal).
■ Distance: Creates the grading with projection lines that extend a fixed horizontal distance from the
footprint.
■ Slope: Creates the grading by projecting to a specific (absolute) elevation using a specific slope value.
Enter a positive or negative value. Slopes can be formatted as a slope value (run:rise or rise:run), or a
grade value (percent or decimal).
■ Relative Elevation: Creates the grading by projecting to an elevation value that is measured relative to
the elevation of the footprint.
Search Order
Specifies whether to search first for cut or fill slopes in cases where both would work. For example, where
the target surface has a steep slope, both cut and fill slopes may intersect the surface.
■ Cut First: Creates the grading by trying to grade up from the footprint. If no solution is found, it will
grade down.
■ Fill First: Creates the grading by trying to grade down from the footprint. If no solution is found, it
will grade up.
Different results achieved based on Cut First and Fill First settings (section
view)
NOTE Technically both of these situations are “fill”. However, AutoCAD Civil 3D treats the up-slope direction
as cut and the down-slope direction as fill.
Distance
Specifies the fixed distance from the footprint for the projection. Enter a value, or click to select a
distance in the drawing area.
Slope
Specifies the slope value. Enter a positive value in the form of run:rise or rise:run.
Grade
Specifies the grade value. Enter a positive value as a decimal percent.
Conflict Resolution
Interior Corner Overlap
Specifies how interior corner projections are cleaned up when the footprint corner has different elevations.
This situation results in two possible daylight point elevations. You can choose to average the slopes to
reach the same point, or increase or decrease one of the slopes.
Corner elevation conflict (plan view)
82.4 82.2
footprint
3:1
daylight line
3:1
80.4
82.0
80.0
■ Use Average Slope: Averages the slopes to reach same daylight point.
slope increased
footprint
2.73:1
daylight line
slope flattened
3.33:1
82.0
80.2
■ Hold Slope As Maximum: Holds the specified grade or slope as the maximum and flattens out the slope
projected from the footprint on one side.
82.4 82.2
footprint
3:1
daylight line
slope flattened
3.75:1
82.0
80.4
■ Hold Slope As Minimum: Holds the specified grade or slope as the minimum and increases the slope
projected from the footprint on one side.
slope increased
footprint
2.5:1
daylight line
3:1
82.0
80.0
Related procedures:
Description
Contains the description of the current grading criteria set.
Created By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who created the criteria set.
Date Created
Displays the date and time the criteria set was created.
Last Modified By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who last modified the criteria set.
Date Modified
Displays the date and time the criteria set was last modified.
Related procedures:
Select a Grading
Selects a different grading for editing.
Related procedures:
Select Line
Selects a feature line, lot line, or survey figure for editing.
Zoom To
Zooms the drawing display to the selected point of intersection (PI) or elevation point.
Quick Profile
Creates a quick profile (page 1153) of the feature line.
Raise/Lower
Adjusts the elevation of rows either upward or downward. If no rows are selected, prompts for a new
elevation for the first point, then adjusts all rows by the same relative amount. If rows are selected, prompts
for the new elevation of the first selected row, then adjusts all the selected rows by the same relative
elevation.
Raise Incrementally
Adjusts the elevations of all points upward by the increment value. If no rows are selected, the option
adjusts all points, otherwise it adjusts the points only for the selected rows.
Lower Incrementally
Adjusts the elevations of all points downward by the increment value. If no rows are selected, it adjusts
all points, otherwise it adjusts the points for the selected rows.
Set Increment
Specifies the value to be used by the Raise and Lower commands. Enter the value.
Reverse
Changes the direction of feature lines. Updates the editor so that the order of points is reversed. This
command affects the labeling and stationing of feature lines.
Station
Identifies the point that starts the current segment.
Elevation
Specifies the elevation of the point identified by the Station.
Length
Displays the length of the current segment.
Grade Ahead
Specifies the end elevation of the current segment in the forward direction. Modifying this grade will
change the elevation of the segment. This is the elevation of the next Station point in the next row of
the grid.
NOTE To edit the grade of multiple rows, select the desired rows and edit the grade of one of the selected rows.
The new grade will be applied to all selected rows.
Grade Back
Specifies the grade of the current segment from its end to start. Modifying this grade will change the start
elevation of the segment, which is the point at the beginning of the current row.
Related procedures:
See also:
Description
Specifies an optional description of the group.
■ Cleared: If the check box is already cleared, no dynamic surface exists for the grading group. You can
select the check box to create a dynamic surface, and the Create Surface dialog box is opened.
Tessellation Spacing
Specifies the gap between projection lines on the grading group surface.
Related procedures:
■ Volume report
■ Number of times the grading group used specific grading criteria and styles
Related procedures:
Select a Criteria
Create Grading
Creates grading by using prompts on the command line. The grading uses the current style and criteria.
Create Transition
Creates a transitional slope between two different criteria or two different values.
Create Infill
Creates a grading face that has no criteria to fill in any holes that are left by creating grading.
Edit Grading
Provides a series of command line prompts for you to change the criteria of a grading object.
Delete Grading
Deletes a grading and removes it from the grading group.
Grading Utilities
Grading Editor
Prompts you to select an existing grading and opens the Grading Editor dialog box.
Expand
Shows or hides the current grading criteria values and the style selectors. You can view the criteria values
here.
Related procedures:
Style Name
Specifies the grading style for the selected grading.
Related procedures:
Description
Displays a description of the current grading style.
Created By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who created the style.
Date Created
Displays the date and time the style was created.
Last Modified By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who last modified the style.
Related procedures:
■ Plotted Size: Marker size is based on the current drawing scale (inches or millimeters).
■ Fixed Size: Marker size is specified in the current drawing units (usually feet or meters).
Related procedures:
Slope Range
Specifies whether the slope pattern is applied to a limited range of slope values, and specifies the range.
Related procedures:
Component
Specifies the name of the grading component.
Visible
Controls component visibility.
Color
Specifies the component’s color. You can select a color for the component from the Select Color dialog
box, or you can specify that the component should derive its color BYLAYER or BYBLOCK.
Linetype
Displays the Select Linetype dialog box, which allows you to specify the linetype for the component.
Lineweight
Displays the Select Lineweight dialog box, which allows you to specify the lineweight for the component.
Linetype Scale
Specifies the linetype scale for the component.
Plot Style
Sets the plot style for the component.
Related procedures:
Description
Specifies the description of the current grading style.
Created By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who created the style.
Date Created
Displays the date and time the style was created.
Last Modified By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who last modified the style.
Date Modified
Displays the date and time the style was last modified.
Related procedures:
Description
Displays a description of the current feature line style.
Created By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who created the style.
Date Created
Displays the date and time the style was created.
Last Modified By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who last modified the style.
Date Modified
Displays the date and time the style was last modified.
Related procedures:
line. Click to edit the style. Click to preview the selected style.
Related procedures:
Related procedures:
Select the check box and specify a marker style in the list. Click to edit the style. Click to preview
the selected style.
Component Type
Specifies the name of the feature line component.
Visible
Controls component visibility.
Layer
Opens the AutoCAD Layer Selection dialog box. You can assign components to a layer that you create
during drawing setup or you can click the New button and create a new layer for the component.
Color
Specifies the component’s color. You can select a color for the component from the Select Color dialog
box, or you can specify that the component should derive its color BYLAYER or BYBLOCK.
Linetype
Displays the Select Linetype dialog box, which allows you to specify the linetype for the component.
LT Scale
Specifies the linetype scale for the component.
Lineweight
Displays the Select Lineweight dialog box, which allows you to specify the lineweight for the component.
Plot Style
Sets the plot style for the component.
Related procedures:
Created By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who created the style.
Date Created
Displays the date and time the style was created.
Last Modified By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who last modified the style.
Date Modified
Displays the date and time the style was last modified.
Related procedures:
Entire Group
Click to adjust the elevation of the whole grading group.
Selection
Click to select one or more features. Click to select the features to adjust.
Surface is specified in the Grading Group Properties to display the Grading Group Properties dialog box.
Volume Display
Displays the current cut and fill volumes and the resulting net requirements for the grading group. This
display updates whenever you modify either of the two surfaces involved in the comparison.
Related procedures:
Elevation
Specifies the elevation of the PVI. Edit the elevation if needed.
Related procedures:
Related procedures:
Select the site you want from the list of the sites in the current drawing. Click to select a site in the
drawing.
Select the group you want from the list of the grading groups in the current drawing. Click to select
Description
Displays the description of the grading group, if one has been defined.
Related procedures:
Opens the Object Layers dialog box, which allows you to specify the layer.
Description
Specifies the description of the style.
Created By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who created the style.
Date Created
Displays the date and time the style was created.
Last Modified By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who last modified the style.
Date Modified
Displays the date and time the style was last modified.
Add Component
Creates a new component using the default parameters. Opens the New Slope Pattern Component dialog
box. Specify the position of the new component in relation to existing components.
Copy Component
Creates a new component using the same parameters as the current component. Opens the New Slope
Pattern Component dialog box (page 2122). Specify the position of the new component in relation to existing
components.
Delete Component
Removes the current component from the slope pattern. Not available if only one component exists.
Length Type
Specifies how to determine the line length for this component. Each option invokes one or more additional
parameters, as described:
■ Length: Specifies that Line length is a fixed value. Related parameter Length specifies the value in
drawing units (usually feet or meters). The line is trimmed if the slope is shorter than this length.
■ Percent of Length: Specifies that Line length is a percentage of the slope length, up to a specified
maximum. Related parameters: Percent of Length specifies the percentage value; Maximum Length
specifies the maximum line length in drawing units.
■ Slope Ratio: Specifies that line length varies directly with the steepness of the slope. Related parameters:
Slope 1 and Slope 2 specify outside limits for slope values that are represented by line length; Percent
of Length 1 specifies the line length as a percent of slope length for Slope 1; Percent of Length 2
specifies the same value for Slope 2. Example: Slope 1 = 6:1, Percent of Length 1 = 20%, Slope 2 = 2:1,
Percent of Length 2 = 80%. On a 10-feet long slope, a 6:1 slope is marked with a 2-feet line and a 2:1
slope is marked with an 8-feet line. An intermediate value, 4:1, is marked with a 5-feet line. An outside
value, 10:1, is marked with a 1-foot line.
Color
Specifies the color of the line.
Linetype
Opens the Select Linetype dialog box. Specify the linetype for the component.
■ Distance: Specifies that Offset is a fixed value. Related parameters: Distance specifies the linear value
in drawing units (usually feet or meters); Radial Offset Angle specifies the angular value. The Radial
Offset Angle parameter is not used in corridors.
■ Divide: Specifies that Offset evenly divides the distance between the previous and the next components
to insert one or more instances of the current component. This option is not available if the previous
or next component is set to Divide. Related parameter: Number of Lines specifies the number of
instances of this component to insert.
■ AutoCAD Block: Adds a block that is defined in the drawing. Related parameter: Block Name specifies
the block to insert.
■ Tapered Lines: Adds a set of lines parallel to the edge of the slope, tapering toward the slope line in a
triangular pattern. A gap exists between the last tapered line and the slope line. Related parameter:
Number of Lines specifies the number of lines to include in the set.
■ Tapered Lines (No Gap): Adds a set of tapered lines, and attaches the last tapered line to the slope
line. Related parameter: Number of Lines specifies the number of lines to include in the set.
Length Type
Specifies how to determine the length of the symbol. Each option invokes an additional parameter:
■ Length: Specifies that Symbol length is a fixed value. Related parameter Length specifies the value in
drawing units (usually feet or meters).
■ Percent of Length: Specifies that symbol length is a percentage of the slope length. Related parameter
Percent of Length specifies the percentage value.
Width Ratio
Specifies the ratio of the symbol’s width to its length along the slope line (width = length * width ratio).
Color
Specifies the color of the symbol.
Lineweight
Opens the Select Lineweight dialog box. Specify the lineweight for the symbol.
General Properties
Minimum Display Length
Specifies the minimum slope length on which to display the slope pattern.
Use the following parameters to configure the sample slope in the preview window.
Preview Feature Length
Specifies the length of feature line to display.
Preview Slope
Specifies the slope value to display.
Related procedures:
This is a standard panel that you access by selecting Modify tab ➤ Edit Geometry panel.
NOTE See Editing Feature Lines (page 816) for a list of supported objects for each command. Supported objects
are also listed at the command line when you run the command.
Break
Breaks a feature line into two feature lines. (page 849)
Trim
Trims a feature line. (page 850)
Join
Joins multiple feature lines, creating a single object. (page 836)
Reverse
Reverses the direction of feature lines for stationing purposes. (page 837)
Fillet
Rounds the corners of feature lines. (page 841)
Fit Curve
Converts tessellated curves to true arcs for better grading results. (page 842)
Weed
Deletes vertices and elevation points from feature lines. (page 846)
Stepped Offset
Offsets feature lines at an elevational difference. (page 848)
This is a standard panel that you access by selecting Modify tab ➤ Edit Elevations panel.
NOTE See Editing Feature Lines (page 816) for a list of supported objects for each command. Supported objects
are also listed at the command line when you run the command.
Elevation Editor
Edits feature line elevations using the Elevation Editor. (page 818)
Edit Elevations
Edits feature-line or lot-line elevations, using the command line. (page 818)
Raise/Lower
Raises and lowers feature line elevations. (page 829)
Insert PI
Inserts points of intersection. (page 834)
Delete PI
Deletes points of intersection. (page 836)
Break
Breaks a feature line into two feature lines. (page 849)
Trim
Trims a feature line. (page 850)
Join
Joins multiple feature lines, creating a single object. (page 836)
Reverse
Reverses the direction of feature lines for stationing purposes. (page 837)
Fillet
Rounds the corners of feature lines. (page 841)
Fit Curve
Converts tessellated curves to true arcs for better grading results. (page 842)
Smooth
Smooths out jagged feature lines. (page 844)
Weed
Deletes vertices and elevation points from feature lines. (page 846)
Stepped Offset
Offsets feature lines at an elevational difference. (page 848)
You can access these commands by selecting a feature line and then select Feature line tab ➤ Modify panel.
NOTE See Editing Feature Lines (page 816) for a list of supported objects for each command. Supported objects
are also listed at the command line when you run the command.
Specifies the site in which to place the feature line. Select a site in the list or click to select a site from
the drawing.
Name
Specifies the name of the feature line. To name the feature line, click on its default name and enter a new
name or use the naming template. Click to open the Name Template Dialog Box (page 2022), where
you can modify the feature line naming template.
Feature line names are optional and can be used to name significant feature lines in the drawing. When
there are named feature lines you can select feature lines to edit by name from a list.
Style
When selected, specifies a feature line style. Select a style in the list. Click to edit the style. Click
to preview the selected style. A style is optional for a feature line, but it provides useful display options
and allows you to control color, visibility, and other settings. A style is also used to set the control the
feature line split point resolution.
Layer
Opens the Object Layer dialog box, where you can specify the layer the feature line should be created on.
This layer cannot be specified if Use Selected Entity Layers is selected under Conversion Options.
NOTE This can make it difficult to select the feature line if the Erase Existing Entities check box is cleared.
■ Cleared: Places the feature lines on the layer specified by the Layer setting above.
Conversion Options
Erase Existing Entities
Specifies whether the selected objects are erased when they are converted to feature lines.
■ Selected: Erases the selected objects from the drawing.
Assign Elevations
Specifies whether to assign elevations to the entities being converted.
■ Selected: Click OK to open the Assign Elevations dialog box.
Weed Points
Specifies whether the selected objects are weeded when they are converted to feature lines.
■ Selected: Click OK to open the Weed Vertices dialog box.
Related procedures:
From Gradings
Creates a temporary surface from selected gradings to compute the feature line elevation. This produces
the same result as selecting the grading group surface if you have not created a grading group surface.
From Surface
Assigns elevations to the feature line from a surface in the drawing.
Related procedures:
Site
Specifies the site in which to place the feature line. Select a site in the list or click to select a site in
the drawing.
NOTE The feature line can not be created in the same site as the alignment. If the alignment is in a site, that
site will not be available in the site list.
Name
Specifies the name of the feature line. Select the check box and click to open the Name Template
dialog box. In addition to the style and counter properties, there are properties to include the alignment
and profile names in the feature line name.
Profile
Specifies a vertical alignment from which to acquire the elevations for the feature line. Click to select
a profile in the drawing. If the alignment does not have a vertical alignment, you can create the feature
line only while the dynamic link option is disabled. For the dynamic link, a vertical alignment is required.
Mid-ordinate Distance
Sets the vertical curve tessellation factor.
Weed Points
Specifies whether to open the Weed Vertices dialog box so you can weed the objects when converting to
a feature line. Change this value to True to open the Weed Vertices dialog box.
Style
Select the check box and specify a feature line style in the list. Click to edit the style. Click to
preview the selected style. A style is optional for a feature line, but it provides useful display options,
allowing you to control color, visibility, and other settings.
Layer
Opens the Object Layer dialog box. Specify the layer on which the feature line should be created. This
layer cannot be specified if Use Selected Entity Layers is selected under Conversion Options.
■ Cleared: The feature line is not linked to the alignment and can be edited with any of the feature line
editing commands.
Related procedures:
■ Specifies that a name is applied to the feature line. Click to edit the name template.
Style
Specifies the style for the feature line.
Specifies the style options. You can create a new style, copy or edit the current style selection, or pick a
style from drawing.
Opens the Style Detail dialog box where you can preview the style and creation information.
NOTE To create a dynamic link, the alignment must have a profile. If the alignment does not have a profile, the
options for Dynamic Link, Mid-ordinate Distance, and Weed Points are not available.
Dynamic Link
■ Displays the name of the alignment and profile to which the feature line is linked. You can change
the profile that is used to set the elevations and the mid-ordinate distance can be changed.
Mid-ordinate Distance
Specifies the mid-ordinate distance for tessellating curves into short line segments. The default is 0.100.
Weed Points
Specifies whether to open the Weed Vertices dialog box so you can weed the objects when converting to
a feature line. Change this value to True to open the Weed Vertices dialog box.
PI Points
Displays the total number of PI points.
Elevation Points
Displays the total number of intermediate elevation points.
2D Length
Displays the total 2D length.
3D Length
Displays the total 3D length.
Minimum Elevation
Displays the minimum elevation.
Maximum Elevation
Displays the maximum elevation.
Minimum Grade
Displays the minimum grade.
Maximum Grade
Displays the maximum grade.
Breakline Data
If the feature line is used by any surfaces as breakline data, the following list is displayed.
Surface
Displays the name of the surface.
Breakline Group
Displays the breakline group.
Related procedures:
possible vertex to be
deleted
Grade
Specifies the weeding grade.
G1 %
G2
%
Length
Specifies the weeding distance. Enter the distance value or click to select it in the drawing.
Related procedures:
Related procedures:
PI Points
Displays the total point of intersection (PI) points.
Elevation Points
Displays the total elevation points.
2D Length
Displays the total 2D length.
3D Length
Displays the total 3D length.
Minimum Elevation
Displays the minimum elevation.
Maximum Elevation
Displays the maximum elevation.
Minimum Grade
Displays the total point of intersection (PI) points.
Maximum Grade
Displays the maximum grade.
2D Length
Displays the total 2D length.
3D Length
Displays the total 3D length.
Minimum Elevation
Displays the minimum elevation.
Maximum Elevation
Displays the maximum elevation.
Minimum Grade
Displays the total point of intersection (PI) points.
Maximum Grade
Displays the maximum grade.
Save as Default
Sets the default command setting to the currently set priority.
Grouped Statistics Tab (Feature Line Site Properties Dialog Box) | 2137
Apply Feature Line Names Dialog Box
Use this dialog box to edit the names for a selection set of feature lines.
Name
Toggles the feature line names on or off. If only a single feature line was edited, you can use the name
template, or type in a new name. Click to access the Name Template Dialog Box (page 2022), where
you can modify the feature line naming template. If multiple feature lines are selected, use the name
template to apply unique names to the selection set. If you attempt to use a name template that does not
include the counter, an error message will display.
Related procedures:
Specifies the style options. You can create a new style, copy or edit the current style selection, or pick a
style in the drawing.
Opens the Style Detail dialog box, where you can preview the style and creation information. You can
also use the checkbox to turn off styles for the selected feature lines.
Related procedures:
Length
Displays the length of the arc.
Tangent
Displays the length of the tangent.
Maintain Tangency
When the curve is not tangent, the Maintain Tangency button is activated. If you toggle this button the
curve will be adjusted, to making it tangent to the adjacent segments. If the curve is tangent, the button
is disabled.
NOTE The left and right arrow keys can also be used to navigate the curves. You can edit the radius, then press
the arrow key to move without using the mouse.
Site
Specifies the site that contains the stream centerline alignment. Select <None> if the alignment is not
located in a site.
Reach Alignment
Specifies the stream centerline alignment to be exported.
River Name
Specifies the name that is used in the HEC-RAS application as the title of the GEO file and is used as a
label for the stream in the HEC-RAS Geometric Data window. This name should typically be the name of
the stream alignment.
2141
River Banks
Check This To Use River Banks
Exports either polylines or alignments as river bank information. Select the check box and then click Left
and/or Right, and select the polylines or alignments in the drawing.
NOTE The bank locations appear in the HEC-RAS application as red dots on the sections. The left and right
bank locations tell the HEC-RAS application where the Manning’s n values change for left, channel, and right
bank situations in the section. This effects the calculations and the level of water in the section. The Bank Positions
exported to the GEO file are measured as percentages of the overall section length rather than as offset distances.
Export
Exports the data to a GEO file that you can import into the HEC-RAS application. For more information,
see Importing To and Exporting From HEC-RAS Software (page 1889).
Related procedures:
NOTE The stream alignment is imported into the drawing only if an alignment of the same name does not
already exist in the site you specify. Existing alignments of the same name and site are not overwritten. LINE
objects that represent the sections are only imported if the alignment is imported.
Profile Style
Specifies the profile style to use for imported profiles.
SDF To Import
File
Specifies the SDF file that was exported from the HEC-RAS software application. Click the browse button
to select the file. For more information, see Importing To and Exporting From HEC-RAS Software (page
1889).
Stream
Specifies which stream within the SDF file to import. When you select a stream, the number of profiles
and sections that exist for that stream are shown in the dialog box.
■ The profiles are imported as AutoCAD Civil 3D profile objects. You must create a profile view in the
drawing to view them. For more information, see Creating Profile Views (page 1208).
■ The section data is imported as LINE objects along the alignment. These lines show the top water
surface at each section. They are created on layers using the convention <alignment name> - <profile
name>. The section lines are imported only if the alignment is imported.
Import
Imports the specified SDF file.
Related procedures:
2145
Style Selection
Specifies the style options. Create a new style, copy or edit the current style selection, or pick a style from
the drawing.
Style Detail
Opens the Style Detail dialog box, where you can preview the style and creation information.
Specifies the layer of the intersection object marker. Click to open the Object Layer dialog box where
you can select a different layer for the intersection object marker.
Intersection Label Style
Style List
Displays the current style for intersection object labels. Click the arrow to display the intersection label
styles in the drawing. Note that there is no placement option available for an intersection label. The label
is always placed at the intersection point. If that point is already labeled, then a second label is placed on
top of the existing label.
Style Selection
Specifies the style options. Create a new style, copy or edit the current style selection, or pick a style from
the drawing.
Style Detail
Opens the Style Detail dialog box, where you can preview the style and creation information.
On this dialog box, you can click Next to move to the next wizard dialog box, Create Intersection to create
the intersection using the currently selected setting, or Cancel to cancel creating the intersection.
Offset Parameters
Before deciding to create offset alignments, you can view or edit the parameters that will be used for
creating the offset alignments by clicking the Offset Parameters button. This displays the Intersection
Offset Parameters dialog box (page 2168) which lets you specify an existing alignment to use, or create a
new one according to the offset value you specify. For more information, see Editing Offsets in Intersections
(page 1607).
On this dialog box, you can click Back to return to previous wizard dialog boxes, Next to move to the next
wizard dialog box, Create Intersection to create the intersection using the currently selected setting, or Cancel
to cancel creating the intersection.
Save As A Set
Saves the currently selected assembly set to an xml file. When you click this button, you are prompted
to choose a name and location for the assembly set.
On this dialog box, you can click Back to return to previous wizard dialog boxes, Create Intersection to create
the intersection using the currently selected settings, or Cancel to cancel creating the intersection.
When you create an intersection object, the following objects are added to the current drawing:
■ intersection object
■ corridor(s)
■ assemblies
■ subassemblies
■ offset alignments
Related procedures:
To add a new set of parameters to the list, click . The Preset - Add dialog box is displayed.
Enter a preset name for the new set of parameters, and then enter the values for all parameters. If you want
to edit existing sets of predefined parameters, select the preset that you want to edit from the list of presets
and click . To delete a set of predefined parameters, select the preset that you want to delete and click
. You can only delete user-defined presets (ones that you or someone else has created). You cannot
delete the default presets. For more information, see Using Presets (page 1639).
Roundabout Parameters
These parameters specify the location and geometry of the central area components of the roundabout.
Hovering the cursor over these controls displays a conceptual illustration of the component or geometry
specified by that control on the right side of this dialog box. For more information, see Roundabout Parameters
(page 1630).
Outer Radius
Specifies the outer radius of the roundabout driving area.
Apron Width
When the US_Imperial roundabout drawing standard is selected, this parameter is displayed. It specifies
the apron strip width.
Inner Radius
When the French (SETRA) roundabout drawing standard is selected, this parameter is displayed. It specifies
the inner radius of the roundabout driving area (outer radius of the traversable strip).
Markings Parameters
These parameters specify the markings for the central area components of the roundabout.
Hovering the cursor over these controls displays a conceptual illustration of the component or geometry
specified by that control on the right side of this dialog box. For more information, see Roundabout Parameters
(page 1630).
Inner Offset
Specifies the distance of the inner radius marking from traversable area of a roundabout.
Site
Specifies the site to which the roundabout will be added. Site also controls the site parameters of all approaches
connected to this roundabout.
Alignment Style
Specifies the alignment style from the list of styles available in the drawing.
Alignment Layer
Specifies the alignment layer from the list of layers available in the drawing.
Alignment Name Prefix
Displays the name of the alignment used to specify the central approach road. This name is used as a prefix
for the alignments that are generated by the roundabout creation. For the right edge alignment, the suffix
“_EDGE_RIGHT” will be added to the alignment name. For the left edge alignment, the suffix “_EDGE_LEFT”
will be added to this name.
Alignment Label Set
Specifies the alignment label set from the list of label sets available in the drawing.
To add a new set of parameters to the list, click . The Preset - Add dialog box is displayed.
Enter a preset name for the new set of parameters, and then enter the values for all parameters. If you want
to edit existing sets of predefined parameters, select the preset that you want to edit from the list of presets
and click . To erase an existing set of predefined parameters, select the preset that you want to erase
from the list of presets and click . For more information, see Using Presets (page 1639).
Default Connecting Radius
This radius is used in the case where the existing alignment does not run through the center of a roundabout.
In this case, an arc with that radius is inserted in a way that the central alignment runs directly to the center
of the roundabout. If the radius you chose does not fit the geometry, then the smallest radius possible is
used to satisfy the standard.
Approach Road Parameters
These parameters specify the geometry of the approach roads in the roundabout.
Hovering the cursor over these controls displays a conceptual illustration of the component or geometry
specified by that control on the right side of this dialog box. For more information, see Roundabout Parameters
(page 1630).
Exit Road Width
When the US_Imperial roundabout standard is selected, the exit road width is measured from the pavement
marking.
When the French (SETRA) standard is selected, the exit road width is the width of the exit lane at the
beginning of the exit radius.
Exit Radius
This parameter specifies the radius at the point where the left approach edge connects to the roundabout.
Entry Radius
Specifies the radius at the point where the right approach edge connects to the roundabout.
Alignment Style
Specifies the alignment style from the list of styles available in the drawing.
Alignment Layer
Specifies the alignment layer from the list of layers available in the drawing.
Alignment Name Prefix
Displays the name of the alignment used to specify the central approach road. This name is used as a prefix
for the alignments that are generated by the roundabout creation. For the right edge alignment, the suffix
“_EDGE_RIGHT” will be added to the alignment name. For the left edge alignment, the suffix “_EDGE_LEFT”
will be added to this name.
Alignment Label Set
Specifies the alignment label set from the list of label sets available in the drawing.
To add a new set of parameters to the list, click . The Preset - Add dialog box is displayed.
Enter a preset name for the new set of parameters, and then enter the values for all parameters. If you want
to edit existing sets of predefined parameters, select the preset that you want to edit from the list of presets
and click . To erase an existing set of predefined parameters, select the preset that you want to erase
from the list of presets and click . For more information, see Using Presets (page 1639).
Construction Triangle Parameters
These parameters specify the geometry of the construction triangle in the islands included in the roundabout.
Hovering the cursor over these controls displays a conceptual illustration of the component or geometry
specified by that control on the right side of this dialog box. For more information, see Roundabout Parameters
(page 1630).
Length
Specifies the length of the construction triangle.
Base
Specifies the width of the construction triangle base.
Base Offset
When the French (SETRA) roundabout drawing standard is selected, this parameter is displayed to specify
the offset of the base from the central alignment. If your base offset is half of the base value, then the
central alignment will go through the midpoint of the construction triangle base.
Tip Offset
When the French (SETRA) roundabout drawing standard is selected, this parameter is displayed to specify
the offset of tip of the construction triangle from the central alignment. If you use the value “0”, then
the tip of the construction triangle will be exactly on the central alignment.
Length
When the Provide Crosswalk option is selected, the Length option are displayed. This specifies the length
of the crosswalk being added to the splitter island.
Rounding At Exit
Specifies the rounding of the splitter island at the exit.
Offset At Exit
Specifies the offset from the splitter island on the exit lane at the base of the construction triangle.
Offset At Departure
Specifies the offset from the splitter island on the exit lane at the tip of the construction triangle.
Rounding At Tip
Specifies the rounding of the splitter island at the tip.
Rounding At Entry
Specifies the rounding of the splitter island at the entry.
Offset At Entry
Specifies the offset from the splitter island on the entry lane at the base of the construction triangle.
Offset At Approach
Specifies the offset from the splitter island on the entry lane at the tip of the construction triangle.
Rounding At Crosswalk
Specifies the rounding of the splitter island at the crosswalk.
Base Offset
Specifies the offset of the splitter island to the base of the construction triangle.
Side Offset
Specifies the offset of the splitter island to the left and right side of the construction triangle.
Apply to All
Clicking this button applies the parameters that are currently specified on this dialog box to all of the
approach roads included in this roundabout.
Signs
These parameters specify which blocks should be inserted into the roundabout to represents signs in the
roundabout. To insert a sign, place a check mark in the Draw check box, then navigate to and select the
Draw
Place a check mark in this check box to add the sign to the roundabout. If you do not want the sign to
be added, clear this check box.
Name
Displays the name of the selected block representing a roundabout sign.
Block
Click to select a block for this sign.
Distance
For some sign types, you can specify a distance. This specifies where the sign will be inserted, relative to
the outer edge of the roundabout. This parameter specifies a point back from the yield line from where a
tangent is established to define where the driver’s line of sight will intersect with the central island.
Offset
Specifies the offset of the traffic sign insertion point relative to the edge of the roundabout. For example,
the offset of the B21-1 sign defines the distance of the sign from the central island. This allows the sign
to be placed in the driver’s line of sight.
This parameter is used along with the Distance parameter to control where the sign is placed.
Leader Length
Specifies the leader length for the sign. Set this parameter to zero if you want the sign to be inserted
without a leader.
Post Height
Specifies the height of the sign post. Set this parameter to zero if you want the sign to be inserted without
a post.
Pavement Markings
These parameters specify the pavement markings for the roundabout. You can add four different types of
pavement markings: Outer Edge, Island Edge, Central Line, and Yield Line. For each one, you can specify a
line type and marking width. All markings are created as AutoCAD polyline objects with a defined width
factor.
Outer Edge
Adds pavement markings to the outer edge of the roundabout.
Island Edge
Adds pavement markings to the edge of the island in the roundabout.
Central Line
Adds pavement markings to the central line in the roundabout.
Yield Line
Adds pavement markings to the yield line in the roundabout.
Draw
Adds or omits pavement markings for the selected roundabout component.
Linetype
Specifies the linetype of the pavement marking.
Width
Specifies the width of the pavement marking.
Offset
Specifies the offset location for the island tip marking.
Width
Specifies the width of the island tip marking.
Angle
Specifies the angle that the island tip marking is inserted.
Gap
Specifies the gap between where the crosswalk marking is inserted and where the island edge marking is
inserted.
Crosswalk Markings
These parameters specify markings for the crosswalk included in the roundabout.
You can include or omit crosswalk markings for the roundabout.
Entry
Specifies parameters for crosswalk markings at the roundabout’s entry (approach road) lanes.
Draw
Adds or omits crosswalk markings at the roundabout’s entry (approach roads) and or exit lanes.
Distance
Specifies the distance of the crosswalk markings from the outer edge of the roundabout.
Length
Specifies the length of the crosswalk markings.
Width
Specifies the width of the crosswalk stripe.
Gap
Specifies the width between two crosswalk stripes.
Gap
Specifies a gap that you can insert between the crosswalk marking and the island edge marking.
Click Back to move to the previous dialog box in this series of dialog boxes, Finish to execute the command
and create the roundabout, or Cancel to close the dialog box and cancel creating the roundabout.
Lane Width
Specifies the width of the slip lane.
Radius
Specifies the radius of arc in the middle of the slip lane.
Draw
Specifies whether or not to add (draw) the pavement markings.
Linetype
Specifies the linetype of the pavement markings.
Width
Specifies the width of the pavement markings.
Offset
Specifies an offset for the pavement markings.
Alignment Style
Specifies the alignment style from the list of styles available in the drawing.
Alignment Layer
Specifies the alignment layer from the list of layers available in the drawing.
Alignment Label Set
Specifies the alignment label set from the list of label sets available in the drawing.
Alignment Name Prefix
Displays the name of the alignment used to specify the central approach road. This name is used as a prefix
for the alignments that are generated by the roundabout creation. For the right edge alignment, the suffix
“_EDGE_RIGHT” will be added to the alignment name. For the left edge alignment, the suffix “_EDGE_LEFT”
will be added to this name.
Click OK to add the slip lane to the roundabout.
■ Intersection feature settings are listed after the General and Labeling property groups, and are identified
For general information about drawing, feature, and command settings and their interaction, see Working
with the Standard Settings Dialog Box Controls (page 78).
For information about drawing-level ambient settings, see Ambient Settings Tab (Drawing Settings Dialog
Box) (page 2078)
Use these settings to specify the defaults assigned during intersection object creation. For more information,
see Changing Corridor Assembly Frequency (page 1613).
Frequency Along Tangents
Specifies the frequency to insert assemblies along tangent segments of the intersection area corridor
baseline.
Intersection Options
NOTE This property group is displayed when accessing the settings from the CreateIntersection command.
Use these settings to specify the default styles assigned to intersection creation.
Intersection Type
Specifies the corridor grade option for the corridors created in the intersection area. Primary Road Crown
Maintained: When this option is selected, the primary road crown is maintained through the intersection.
All Crowns Maintained: When this option is selected, the crowns of both roads included in the intersection
are maintained through the intersection.
Default Offsets
NOTE This property group is displayed when accessing the settings from the CreateIntersection command.
Use these settings to specify the default styles assigned to intersection creation.
Primary Road - Left Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the centerline on the left side of the primary road.
Use these settings to specify the default styles assigned to intersection creation.
Primary Road - Left Cross Slope
Specifies the cross slope of the left side of the primary road.
Use these settings to specify the default styles assigned to intersection creation.
Curb Return Type
Specifies the type of curb return used for the intersection: Chamfer, Circular Fillet, or 3-Centered Arcs.
Use these settings to specify the default styles assigned to intersection creation. For more information, see
Widenings (page 964), or Editing Offset Alignments and Widenings (page 1077).
Widening At Incoming Lane
Specifies whether to widen the incoming lane as it enters the intersection.
Widened Offset
Specifies the offset distance applied to the widened regions, at both the entrance to the intersection, and
as it exits the intersection.
Transition Type
Specifies the type of transition used for the widening: Linear, Curve-Line-Curve, Curve-Curve -Reverse
Curve, or Curve - Reverse Curve.
Transition Length
When By Length is selected as the Linear Transition Type, this option lets you specify the length of the
transition for the widening.
Radius of Curve X
When a curve option is selected as the Transition Type, this option lets you specify the radius for the first
and second curves used in the widening.
Use these settings to specify the default styles assigned to intersection creation.
Apply Grade Rules
Specifies whether to apply grade rules.
Maximum Grade
Specifies the maximum grade that can be used in the profile for the secondary road.
Distance Value
Specifies the distance that is used to adjust the incoming and outgoing grade along the secondary road
profile when Specify Distance is selected for Distance Rule to Adjust the Grade.
Use these settings to specify the default styles assigned to intersection creation.
Define Curb Return Profile By
Specifies the method that is used to define the curb return profile.
Specifies the default style for intersections. Click in the Value column, and click to select a style in the
Intersection Style dialog box.
Specifies the default style for intersection object labels. Click in the Value column, and click to select
a label style. Note that there is no placement option available for an intersection label. The label is always
placed at the intersection point. If that point is already labeled, then a second label is placed on top of
the existing label.
Specifies the default style for offset alignments. Click in the Value column, and click to select a style
in the Offset Alignment Style dialog box.
Specifies the default style for curb return alignments. Click in the Value column, and click to select a
style in the Curb Return Alignment Style dialog box.
Specifies the default style for offset profiles. Click in the Value column, and click to select a style in
the Offset Profile Style dialog box.
Specifies the default style for curb return profiles. Click in the Value column, and click to select a style
in the Curb Return Profile Style dialog box.
Specifies the default style for offset alignment label sets. Click in the Value column, and click to select
a style in the Offset Alignment Label Set dialog box.
Specifies the default style for curb return alignment label sets. Click in the Value column, and click to
select a style in the Curb Return Alignment Label Set dialog box.
For general information about style selection, see Select Style Dialog Box (page 2021).
■ intersection object
■ intersection quadrant
■ offset alignment
■ offset profile
Click in the Value column, and click to select a style in the Name Template dialog box (page 2022).
NOTE If you have made any changes to the corridor in the intersection area, those changes will be lost (overwritten)
when you apply new assemblies by clicking Recreate on this dialog box.
For more information, see Creating Corridors in the Intersection Area (page 1597).
Create a New Corridor
Specifies to create a new corridor object to the intersection object.
Save As A Set
If desired, you can save the set of assemblies currently displayed on this dialog to a new or existing assembly
set. For more information, see Assembly Sets (page 1619).
Related procedures:
Click the expand and collapse buttons at the top right to expand and collapse the property information
displayed in this dialog box.
Widen Turn Lane For Incoming or Outgoing Road
When you select either of these options, the incoming or outgoing road in the intersection is widened.
Intersection Quadrant Details
Specifies details for the quadrants in the intersection.
Intersection Quadrant Name
Displays the name of the intersection quadrant currently selected. You can change the name here, if
desired.
Radius
If the radius type is circular fillet or 3-centered arc, you can specify radius parameters.
Widening Details
Specifies the widening details for the incoming or outgoing lanes in the intersection.
Related procedures:
Click the expand and collapse buttons at the top right to expand and collapse the information
displayed in this dialog box.
When you select an item on this dialog box, the affected object is highlighted in the drawing, and the
conceptual graphic on the dialog box updates to indicate the location affected by the edit. For more
information, see Intersection Editing Visual Cues (page 1605).
Intersection Quadrant
This drop-down list lets you specify each quadrant in the intersection. You can also click Next and Previous
to advance through the quadrants.
Incoming\Outoging Lane Details
Specifies curb return profile details for the incoming and outgoing lanes.
Incoming or Outgoing Road Centerline Name
Displays the name of the centerline alignment for the incoming and outgoing road.
Side
Displays which side of the road this profile reflects.
Related procedures:
Click the expand and collapse buttons at the top right to expand and collapse the information
displayed in this dialog box.
When you select an item on this dialog box, the affected object is highlighted in the drawing, and the
conceptual graphic on the dialog box updates to indicate the location affected by the edit. For more
information, see Intersection Editing Visual Cues (page 1605).
Left or Right Edge Profile Definition
Specifies the parameters defining the left and right edge of the slope.
Use an Existing Profile
When Yes is selected, you can select a profile from the available profiles in the current drawing. When
No is selected, this indicates that the profile was created during intersection creation.
Profile Name
Displays the name of the profile associated with this edge profile definition. When Use An Existing Profile
is set to Yes, you can select a new profile from available profiles in the current drawing.
Related procedures:
Click the expand and collapse buttons at the top right to expand and collapse the information
displayed in this dialog box.
You can select offset alignments for the primary or secondary road in the intersection.
When you select an item on this dialog box, the affected object is highlighted in the drawing, and the
conceptual graphic on the dialog box updates to indicate the location affected by the edit. For more
information, see Intersection Editing Visual Cues (page 1605).
Offset Value
Specifies the offset distance for the offset alignment. This property is automatically set to Varies if an
alignment is selected that is not a dynamic offset alignment based on a centerline.
Alignment Name
Displays the name of the offset alignment currently specified. When Use an Existing Alignment is set to
Yes, you can click to specify another alignment from the current drawing. When you do this, the
Offset Value property is automatically set to Varies, if the selected alignment is not a dynamic offset
alignment based on a centerline. It is also important to note that if you do select another offset alignment
from the drawing, the original offset alignment that was created during intersection object creation is not
deleted.
Related procedures:
See also:
Description
Specifies an optional description for the current intersection.
Object Style
Specifies the default style used to display intersections. Select a style in the list or use the standard style
selection tools. For more information about the standard style selection tools, see the Select Style (page
2021) dialog box.
Intersection Quadrants
In this section, you can click Previous and Next to advance through the quadrants in this intersection.
For each quadrant, the names of the incoming and outgoing alignments, as well as the intersection angle,
are displayed. Most of this information is read-only, however you can change the name of the intersection
quadrant if desired.
See also:
■ Click a block name to select the block to be used for the assembly symbol.
■ Right-click in the block list window and click Browse to select a block located in another folder.
■ Use Size in Absolute Units: Specifies that the marker size is an absolute value based on the displayed
units. Enter the value.
■ Use Size Relative to Screen: Specifies that the size of the marker is a percentage of the drawing screen
size. Enter the percentage.
Fixed Scale
Specifies independent fixed scale values when Options is set to Use Fixed Scale. Enter values for X, Y, or
Z.
For more information, see Display Tab (Style Dialog Box) (page 2017).
Apron Width
When the US_Imperial roundabout drawing standard is selected, this parameter is displayed. It specifies
the apron strip width.
Markings Parameters
These parameters specify the geometry and design of the roundabout markings.
Outer Offset
Specifies the distance of the outer radius marking from the outer edge of a roundabout.
Inner Offset
Specifies the distance of the inner radius marking from traversable area of a roundabout.
Click OK to apply the specified parameters, or Cancel to close the dialog box and return to the Create
Roundabout - Circulatory Road dialog box.
Click the expand and collapse buttons at the top right to expand and collapse the information
displayed in this dialog box.
When you select an item on this dialog box, the affected object is highlighted in the drawing, and the
conceptual graphic on the dialog box updates to indicate the location affected by the edit. For more
information, see Intersection Editing Visual Cues (page 1605).
Secondary Road Profile Rules
Apply Grade Rules
Specifies whether to apply grade rules for this secondary road profile.
Maximum Grade
Specifies the maximum grade that can be used for the secondary road profile in the intersection.
Distance Value
When Distance Rule to Adjust the Grade option is set to Specify Distance, this specifies the distance value
used to adjust the incoming and outgoing grade of the secondary road profile in the intersection.
Related procedures:
Visibility
Specifies whether all label styles in a drawing are visible.
TIP Use this setting to quickly turn all labels in the drawing off or on.
Layer
Specifies the default layer for all label styles in a drawing.
The default layer is 0. When the layer is set to 0, the labels use the properties of the parent object layer
specified on the Object Layers tab of the Drawing Settings dialog box.
Click to display the Layer Selection dialog box.
NOTE This setting specifies the layer from which the labels obtain their display properties. The labels are drawn
on the parent object layer.
Behavior
Orientation Reference
Specifies the orientation reference of the labels.
■ Object: Rotates labels relative to the zero direction of the object. You can determine the zero direction
of the object based on its start and end points. If the object vector changes at the anchor point on the
label, the orientation updates automatically. This is the default setting.
■ View: Forces labels to realign to a screen-view orientation in both model and layout views. Always
assumes the zero angle is horizontal, regardless of UCS or Dview twist. If the view changes, the label
orientation updates with it.
2175
■ World Coordinate System: Adjusts the labels with respect to the angle between the current view and
world view. Changing the view or current UCS does not affect label rotation with respect to the world
coordinate system.
Forced Insertion
Specifies the position of a label relative to an object. Applies only when the Orientation Reference option
is set to Object and the objects are lines, arc segments, or spline segments.
■ None: Maintains label position as composed relative to the object. This is the default setting.
NOTE Plan Readable should be set to True when using the Top or Bottom settings.
■ Inside : Moves label components on the outside of curve to the inside of curve. The components
maintain the same offset and rotation.
■ Outside : Moves label components on the inside of curve to the outside of curve. The components
maintain the same offset and rotation.
NOTE These settings apply only when the Orientation Reference option is set to Object.
Plan Readability
Plan Readable
Specifies the text rotation to insure that all text components in labels can be read easily in plan view.
■ True: Rotates text to insure that it can be read easily in plan view or as if viewed from an angle at the
bottom or right side of the screen/paper. This is the default setting.
Any text with an angle greater than the angle specified in the Readability Bias setting, or with an angle
less than the Readability Bias plus 180 degrees, is in violation of plan readability, and is adjusted
automatically.
For more information about plan-readable text, see Using Plan-Readability (page 1668).
Readability Bias
Specifies the angle at which label text flips 180 degrees to remain plan readable.
■ False: The flipped label always looks like a mirror of the original.
Color
Specifies the color for label components. Click to open the Select Color dialog box.
Linetype
Specifies the linetype for label components. Click to open the Select Linetype dialog box.
Lineweight
Specifies the lineweight for label components. Click to open the Lineweight dialog box.
NOTE This setting applies to parcel line and curve label styles only).
■ True: Labels the outer boundary of parcels, rather than the individual parcel segments. For example,
if four parcels share an outer boundary, use this option to label the combined outer boundary.
Leader
Arrow Head Style
Specifies an arrow head style for a leader.
Select an arrow head style from the list. Or, select None to display leaders without arrow heads. The default
arrow head style is Closed Filled.
For more information about arrow head styles, see “Choose Dimension Arrowheads” in AutoCAD Help.
Visibility
Specifies whether leaders are visible when you drag a label from its original position.
Type
Specifies the shape of the leader.
■ Straight Leader: Draws a straight leader when you drag a label. This is the default leader type.
Color
Specifies the color for leaders. Click to open the Select Color dialog box.
Linetype
Specifies the linetype for leaders. Click to open the Select Linetype dialog box.
Lineweight
Specifies the lineweight for leaders. Click to open the Lineweight dialog box.
■ Stacked Text. Reformats labels based on the settings in this Dragged State Components category.
NOTE When Display is set to Stacked Text, all blocks, lines, and direction arrows are removed. The text
components are stacked vertically based on the order in which the text components were created in the label
style.
Border Visibility
Specifies whether a border is visible for dragged labels.
Border Type
Specifies the shape of the border.
■ Rectangular: Draws a rectangle.
Text Height
Specifies the plotted height for all text components. Enter a positive value greater than zero.
NOTE When Display is set to As Composed, this property is unavailable for editing.
Leader Attachment
Specifies the location where a leader hook is drawn in relation to label content.
■ Top Of Top Line (of multiple lines of text)
Leader Justification
Specifies how label text is justified in relation to the leader.
■ True. Text is left-justified when the leader is on the left, and right-justified when the leader is on the
right, as shown in the following illustration. This is the default setting.
Color
Specifies the color for dragged components. Click to open the Select Color dialog box.
Linetype
Specifies the linetype for dragged components. Click to open the Select Linetype dialog box.
Lineweight
Specifies the lineweight for dragged components. Click to open the Lineweight dialog box.
Related procedures:
Edit Label Style Defaults Dialog Box (Label Style Type Level)
Use this dialog box to define default settings for all labels belonging to a specific label style type.
For a description of the controls, see Standard Edit Label Style Defaults Dialog Box (page 2175).
These default settings can be dependent on higher settings at the drawing level (page 2179) or at the feature
(page 2179) level.
You can override those settings by clicking the property and entering another value. For a description of
override controls unique to managing the hierarchy of default label settings, see Managing Overrides in
Label Style Dialog Boxes (page 2198).
Related procedures:
NOTE The controls and settings available in the dialog box vary for each object type.
NOTE Label styles names are case sensitive. “Standard” is not the same as “standard”.
Description
Specifies a description of the current style.
Created By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who created the style.
Date Created
Displays the date and time the style was created.
Last Modified By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who last modified the style.
Date Modified
Displays the date and time the style was last modified.
Related procedures:
Value column
Specifies the current value of the property. The value is either derived from a dependency on a higher
setting or it can be set explicitly at the current level.
Label
Text Style
Specifies the default text style on which all text components are based.
Visibility
Specifies whether labels of the current style are visible in the drawing.
Display Mode
Specifies whether labels are displayed as labels or tags.
■ Label: Displays label components that are assigned either the Label Mode or the Label And Tag Modes
“Used In” setting on the Layout tab.
■ Tag: Displays label components that are assigned either the Tag Mode or the Label and Tag Modes
“Used In” setting on the Layout tab.
NOTE Only the label styles that support tables contain this property.
Layer
Specifies the layer for all components in a label style.
Click to open the Layer Selection dialog box, and select a layer.
If you set the layer to 0, the labels use the properties of the parent object layer specified on the Object
Layers tab of the Drawing Settings dialog box.
NOTE There are two options for the style to reference a layer for display control, when using ByBlock or ByLayer
controls. Reference the layer as specified in the style or reference the layer that the object resides on (by setting
the Layer to 0 in the style). If layer 0 is selected, any ByBlock and ByLayer components will display according
to the actual layer that the layer object is residing on in AutoCAD. If a layer other than 0 is selected, any ByBlock
or ByLayer components will display according to the layer as specified in the style.
Behavior
Orientation Reference
Specifies the orientation reference of a label.
■ Object: Rotates labels relative to the zero direction of the object. You can determine the zero direction
of the object based on its start and end points. If the object vector changes at the anchor point on the
label, the orientation updates automatically. This is the default setting.
■ View: Forces labels to realign to a screen-view orientation in both model and layout views. Always
assumes the zero angle is horizontal, regardless of UCS or Dview twist. If the view changes, the label
orientation updates with it.
Forced Insertion
Specifies the position of a label relative to an object. Applies only when the Orientation Reference option
is set to Object and the objects are lines, arc segments, or spline segments.
■ None: Maintains label position as composed relative to the object.
NOTE Plan Readable should be set to True when using the Top or Bottom settings.
NOTE This setting applies only when the Orientation Reference option is set to Object.
Plan Readability
Plan Readable
Specifies the text rotation to insure that all text components in labels can be read easily in plan view.
■ True: Rotates text to insure that it can be read easily in plan view or as if viewed from an angle at the
bottom or right side of the screen/paper.
Any text with an angle greater than the angle specified in the Readability Bias setting, or with an angle
less than the Readability Bias plus 180 degrees, is in violation of plan readability, and is adjusted
automatically.
Readability Bias
Specifies the angle at which label text flips 180 degrees to remain plan readable.
■ False: The flipped label always looks like a mirror of the original.
Preview Pane
Dynamically displays changes to the label style. Right-click the preview pane to access view-related commands.
To change the view, select a preview drawing from the list. For more information, see Previewing Label Styles
(page 1652).
Related procedures:
See also:
Create Component
Creates a new label component. Select a component type from this list to create a new text, text for each,
block, direction arrow, tick, or line component. The Property and Value columns display settings you can
change to define the appearance, location, and orientation of that particular component. Not all
components are available for all label types.
Copy Component
Copies the selected component.
Delete Component
Deletes the selected component.
Preview Pane
Dynamically displays changes to the label style. Right-click the preview pane to access view-related
commands. To change the view, select a preview drawing from the list. For more information, see
Previewing Label Styles (page 1652).
Color
Specifies colors for components, borders, and leaders.
Click the Value column, and then click to open the Select Color dialog box.
Linetype
Specifies linetypes for components and borders.
Click the Value column, and then click to open the Select Linetype dialog box.
Lineweight
Specifies the lineweights for components and borders.
Click the Value column, and then click to open the Lineweight dialog box.
From the Create Component list , click to create a new text component.
General
Name
Specifies the name of the text component.
The default name, such as “Text.1,” is the component name with a numeric increment. If the text
component exists in a parent label style, then the name cannot be edited.
Visibility
Specifies whether the text component is visible in the label style.
Used In
Specifies whether the component is displayed in Tag Mode, Label Mode, or both. Select a mode on the
General tab (page 2181) in the Label Style Composer.
■ Label Mode: Displays the text component when Display Mode is set to Label.
■ Tag Mode: Displays the text component when Display Mode is set to Tag.
■ Label and Tag Modes: Displays the text component regardless of the display mode setting.
NOTE If a label style type does not support tables, then this control is not available.
Anchor Component
Specifies a reference object for positioning the text component. You can select <Feature> (which is the
object being labeled) or another existing label component.
Anchor Point
Specifies the location on the Anchor Component where the text component is attached.
■ When <Feature> is the Anchor Component, Label Location is the only option available. This option
places the anchor point at the location where the label is attached to the object.
■ When the Anchor Component is another label component, you have a choice of anchor points
depending on whether the anchor is a text, block, tick, line, or direction arrow component. For example,
if the anchor is a text component, you can select from the points shown in the following illustration:
■ True: Labels the outer boundary of parcels, rather than the individual parcel segments. For example,
if four parcels share an outer boundary, use this option to label the combined outer boundary.
Text
Contents
Specifies the content of the text component. When a text component is first created, displays “Label Text”
by default.
Click the Value column, and then click to open the Text Component Editor (page 2199) dialog box where
you can create and edit the label content.
Text Height
Specifies the plotted height for text. Enter a positive value greater than zero.
Rotation Angle
Specifies the angle for the text component. Enter a positive or negative value, or click to select an
angle in the drawing.
The angle direction is always counterclockwise, and the zero (0) direction is determined by the anchor
component type.
If the text component is anchored to a feature, then the zero direction is determined in relation to the
following Orientation Reference settings on the General (page 2181) tab:
■ Object: Calculates the zero angle by examining the object’s construction and then measuring the zero
angle from the start to the end of the object. If the object is a curve, then the zero angle is tangent to
the curve.
■ View: Sets the zero angle equal to the world coordinate system (WCS) base angle of East (horizontal,
left to right).
■ World Coordinate System: Sets the zero angle equal to the WCS base angle of East (horizontal, left to
right).
X Offset
Specifies the offset distance between the attachment point and the anchor point in the X direction (zero
angle direction).
The X direction is determined by the object to which the text component is anchored. If the text component
is anchored to the label insertion point, then the X direction is determined in relation to the following
Orientation Reference settings on the General (page 2181) tab:
■ Object: Calculates the X direction by examining the object’s construction and measuring the zero
angle direction from the start to the end of the object. If the object is a curve, then the zero angle is
located tangent to the curve.
■ View: The X direction is always horizontal, left to right, regardless of the User Coordinate System (UCS)
or Dview twist direction.
■ World Coordinate System: The X direction is the same as the User Coordinate System (UCS) base angle
of East (horizontal, left to right).
Y Offset
Specifies the offset distance between the attachment point and the anchor point in the Y direction, which
is 90 degrees counterclockwise to the X direction.
Border
Visibility
Specifies whether the border is visible.
Type
Specifies the shape of the border.
■ Rectangular: Draws a rectangle around the text component.
■ Rounded Rectangular: Draws a rectangle with round corners around the text component.
The radius used to create a rounded rectangle is calculated by adding the gap value and half the overall
text height (including descending, subscript, and superscript characters).
Gap
Specifies the distance between the border and text. The Gap is still applied if Border Visibility is set to
False.
Background Mask
Specifies whether a mask is applied to the component using the border shape and size.
1234
with mask
1234
Related procedures:
From the Create Component list , click to create a new Text-For-Each component.
The Select Type (page 2187) dialog box is displayed, where you select the type of data to include in the
Text-For-Each component.
NOTE The Text-For-Each component type is available only for structure label styles.
After you select the Text-For-Each type, your selection is displayed on the Layout tab in the General section.
The remainder of the settings that you specify for a Text-For-Each component are identical to the settings
for a text component. For more information, see Text Component Layout (Label Style Composer Dialog
Box) (page 2184).
Profile
Creates a Referenced Text component with property fields you can use to refer to profile data.
Surface
Creates a Referenced Text component with property fields you can use to refer to surface data.
Parcel
Creates a Referenced Text component with property fields you can use to refer to parcel data.
Related procedures:
From the Create Component list , click to create a new Referenced Text component.
The Select Type (page 2187) dialog box is displayed, where you select the type of data to include in the
Referenced Text component.
NOTE The Referenced Text component type is available for all new label objects. See Label Objects (page 1643)for
a list of supported label objects.
After you select the Referenced Text type, the object type you selected is displayed on the Layout tab in the
General section.
NOTE Once you specify the object type, it cannot be changed. If you want to insert references to a different
object type, you must create a new Referenced Text component and select the other object type when you create
the new component.
The remainder of the settings that you specify for a Referenced Text component are identical to the settings
for a text component. For more information, see Text Component Layout (Label Style Composer Dialog
Box) (page 2184). However, when you set up the label contents, you select Properties that refer to the referenced
object.
Related procedures:
From the Create Component list , click to create a new block component.
General
Name
Specifies the name of the block component.
Visibility
Specifies whether the block component is visible in the label style.
Used In
Specifies whether the component is visible in tag mode, label mode, or both. Select a mode on the General
tab (page 2181) in the Label Style Composer.
■ Label Mode: Displays the block component when Display Mode (on the General tab) is set to Label.
■ Tag Mode: Displays the block component when Display Mode is set to Tag.
■ Label and Tag Modes: Displays the block component regardless of the display mode setting.
NOTE If a label style type does not support tables, then this control is not available.
Anchor Component
Specifies a reference object for positioning the block component. You can select <Feature> (which is the
object being labeled) or another existing label component.
Anchor Point
Specifies the location on the Anchor Component where the block component is attached.
■ When <Feature> is the Anchor Component, Label Location is the only option available. This option
places the anchor point at the location where the label is attached to the object.
■ When the Anchor Component is another label component, you have a choice of anchor points
depending on whether the anchor is a text, block, tick, line, or direction arrow component.
Block
Block Name
Specifies the block to use in the block component.
Click the Value column, and then click to open the Select A Block dialog box.
In the Select A Block dialog box, click to open a Viewer in which you can use standard AutoCAD
viewing tools to preview the block.
Block Height
Specifies the height to which the block is scaled to fit. The block’s extents in the X direction are used for
scaling the height. The block’s aspect ratio is maintained when scaled.
Rotation Angle
Specifies the angle for the block component. Enter a positive or negative value, or click to select an
angle in the drawing.
Attachment
Specifies the location on the block component that is attached to the anchor point. Attachment points
are calculated based on a rectangle that encompasses the block, the size of which is determined by including
the Gap value specified in the Border category. The following illustration shows block attachment points:
X Offset
Specifies the offset distance between the attachment point and the anchor point in the X direction (zero
angle direction).
The X direction is determined by the object to which the block component is anchored. If the block
component is anchored to the label insertion point, then the X direction is determined in relation to the
following Orientation Reference setting on the General (page 2181) tab:
■ Object: Calculates the X direction by examining the object’s construction and measuring the zero
angle direction from the start to the end of the object. If the object is a curve, then the zero angle is
located tangent to the curve.
■ View: The X direction is always horizontal, left to right, regardless of the User Coordinate System (UCS)
or Dview twist direction.
■ World Coordinate System: The X direction is the same as the User Coordinate System (UCS) base angle
of East (horizontal, left to right).
Y Offset
Specifies the offset distance between the attachment point and the anchor point in the Y direction, which
is 90 degrees counterclockwise to the X direction.
Related procedures:
From the Create Component list , click to create a new line component.
A line component can be defined in two ways, depending on the Use End Point Anchor setting:
■ Start Point, Length, and Angle: Use this method to anchor the start point of the line component to the
anchor component. Set the Use End Point Anchor setting to False, and then specify the Length and
Angle.
■ Start Point and End Point: Use this method to anchor the start and end point of the line component.
Set the Use End Point Anchor setting to True, and then specify the End Point Anchor Component and
General
Name
Specifies the name of the line component.
The default name, such as “Line.1,” is the component name with a numeric increment. If the line
component exists in a parent label style, then the name cannot be edited.
Visibility
Specifies whether the line component is visible in the label style.
Used In
Specifies whether the component is visible in tag mode, label mode, or both. Select a mode on the General
tab (page 2181) in the Label Style Composer.
■ Label Mode: Displays the line component when Display Mode is set to Label.
■ Tag Mode: Displays the line component when Display Mode is set to Tag.
■ Label and Tag Modes: Displays the line component regardless of the display mode setting.
NOTE If a label style type does not support tables, then this control is not available.
■ When another label component is the Anchor Component, you have a choice of anchor points
depending on whether the anchor is a text, block, tick, line, or direction arrow component.
■ False: Uses the Start Point, Length, and Angle method to define the line component.
The End Point Anchor Component, End Point Anchor Point, End Point X Offset, and End Point Y
Offset properties become unavailable for editing.
Angle
Specifies the angle of the line component from the start point. Enter a positive or negative value, or click
■ View: The X direction is always horizontal, left to right, regardless of the User Coordinate System (UCS)
or Dview twist direction.
■ World Coordinate System: The X direction is the same as the User Coordinate System (UCS) base angle
of East (horizontal, left to right).
Related procedures:
From the Create Component list , click to create a new tick component.
NOTE Unlike other label components, ticks are always anchored to the feature that is being labeled. Therefore
ticks do not have Anchor Component or Anchor Point properties.
General
Name
Specifies the name of the tick component.
Visibility
Specifies whether the tick component is visible in the label style.
Used In
Specifies whether the component is visible in Tag Mode, Label Mode, or both. Select a mode on the General
tab (page 2181) in the Label Style Composer.
■ Label Mode: Displays the tick component when Display Mode is set to Label.
■ Tag Mode: Displays the tick component when Display Mode is set to Tag.
■ Label and Tag Modes: Displays the tick component regardless of the display mode setting.
NOTE If a label style type does not support tables, then this control is not available.
Tick
Block Name
Specifies the block to use for the tick component.
Click the Value column, and then click to open the Select A Block dialog box.
In the Select A Block dialog box, click to open a Viewer in which you can use standard AutoCAD
viewing tools to preview the block.
Block Height
Specifies the height to which the tick block is scaled to fit. The block’s extents in the X direction are used
for scaling the height. The block’s aspect ratio is maintained when scaled.
Rotation Angle
Specifies the angle for the tick component. Enter a positive or negative value, or click to select an
angle in the drawing.
Related procedures:
From the Create Component list , click to create a new direction arrow component.
General
Name
Specifies the name of the direction arrow component.
The default name, such as “Direction Arrow.1,” is the component name with a numeric increment. If the
arrow component exists in a parent label style, then the name cannot be edited.
Visibility
Specifies whether the direction arrow component is visible in the label style.
Used In
Specifies whether the component is visible in tag mode, label mode, or both. Select a mode on the General
tab (page 2181) in the Label Style Composer.
■ Label Mode: Displays the direction arrow component when Display Mode is set to Label.
■ Tag Mode: Displays the direction arrow component when Display Mode is set to Tag.
■ Label and Tag Modes: Displays the direction arrow component regardless of the display mode setting.
NOTE If a label style type does not support tables, then this control is not available.
Anchor Component
Specifies a reference object for positioning the direction arrow component. You can select <Feature>
(which is the object being labeled) or another existing label component.
Anchor Point
Specifies the location on the Anchor Component where the direction arrow component is attached.
■ When <Feature> is the Anchor Component, Label Location is the only option available. This option
places the anchor point at the point where the label is attached to the object being labeled.
■ When the Anchor Component is another label component, you have a choice of anchor points
depending on whether the anchor is a text, block, tick, line, or direction arrow component.
NOTE This setting applies to parcel line and curve label styles only).
■ True: Labels the outer boundary of parcels, rather than the individual parcel segments. For example,
if four parcels share an outer boundary, use this option to label the combined outer boundary.
Direction Arrow
Arrow Head Style
Specifies the arrow head style. Select an arrow head style from the list.
NOTE The direction arrow length must be at least twice that of the specified arrow head size. If not, the arrow
head is not displayed. For example, if you specify an arrow head size of 0.2, the arrow length must be at least
0.4. This behavior is similar to AutoCAD leaders.
Arrow head is not displayed when
arrow length is decreased
Fixed Length
Specifies whether the arrow length is controlled by the Length setting or by the length of the object being
labeled.
■ True: Uses the Length setting.
■ False: Draws the length of the direction arrow to match the length of the object being labeled.
Length
Specifies the overall length of the direction arrow, including the arrow head.
The Length setting is unavailable when the Fixed Length property is set to False.
X Offset
Specifies the offset distance between the mid-point of the direction arrow and the anchor component in
the X direction.
Y Offset
Specifies the offset in the Y direction.
The following illustration shows X and Y offsets for a direction arrow:
Related procedures:
Visibility
Specifies whether the leader is visible when a label is dragged from its default position.
Type
Specifies the shape of the leader.
■ Straight Leader: Draws a straight leader.
■ Stacked Text: Reformats labels based on the settings in this Dragged State Components category.
When you select Stacked Text, all blocks, lines, ticks, and direction arrows are removed. The text
components are stacked vertically in the order they were defined in the label style.
NOTE The Summary tab of the Label Style Composer dialog box lists the components in the order in which
they were defined.
Border Visibility
Specifies whether the border is visible when a label is dragged from its original position.
Border Type
Specifies the shape of the border.
■ Rectangular: Draws a rectangle around text.
Text Height
Specifies the plotted height for text.
Leader Attachment
Specifies the location where the leader hook is drawn relative to the label content.
Leader Justification
Specifies how label text is justified in relation to the leader.
■ True: Text is left-justified when the leader is on the left of the text, and is right-justified when the
leader is on the right.
Related procedures:
Status Update
At the bottom of the Summary tab the status of overrides is displayed as you select an item. For more
information, see Managing Overrides in Label Style Dialog Boxes (page 2198).
Related procedures:
Value column
Displays the current value for each property. When you change the default value in this column, a check
mark is displayed in the Override column.
NOTE Even if you don’t want to change the default value, you can manually select the check box in the Override
column to prevent the setting from being affected by changes to a higher-level setting.
Override column
Identifies whether a property is overridden at the current level. A clear check box indicates the value
is the same as the higher level default setting.
A selected check box indicates that the value has been explicitly set at the current level. If you click
the check box to clear it, the setting is restored to the default, higher-level setting.
You can clear the check box to clear the override and set the value back to the value of its parent setting.
Even if you don’t specifically change a value, you can select the check box manually to disconnect the
setting from the higher-level setting. This prevents it from changing if the higher-level setting changes.
Indicates that the value setting has been overridden at a lower level.
Displays when you click and removes lower-level overrides in other settings and styles when you
click OK or Apply.
WARNING Using this option resets the property in subordinate settings and/or styles even if they are locked.
Lock
Prevents the property value from being changed at a subordinate level. To lock a value, click to change
it to . The lock cannot be set if there is a child override set.
Status Update
At the bottom of the Summary tab in the Label Style Composer dialog box and in the three different Edit
Label Style Defaults dialog boxes, the override status is displayed as you select an item.
Property
Displays the selected property name followed by a single line description of the property.
Parent
Displays the name of the parent from which the default value was derived. This is always the next-highest
level at which the value was explicitly specified or overridden. Parents can include the following:
■ Drawing Settings
For example, if you are reviewing a label style, the parent may be the Drawing Settings if none of the
intermediate settings were changed. However, if an intermediate setting was changed, for example, at the
feature level, then the <Feature Name> settings is listed as the parent.
Parent Value
Displays the value of the property as defined in the parent setting or style.
Related procedures:
See also:
When you select a property and click , the property field is inserted into the window. For more
information, see Properties Tab (Text Component Editor Dialog Box) (page 2200).
You can also type text directly into this window. For more information, see Text Editor (Text Component
Editor Dialog Box) (page 2203).
Import Text
Imports static text into the Text Component Editor window. Click Import Text to open the Select File
dialog box. You must select a file that is either ASCII or RTF format.
You can format imported text by using the options on the Format tab (page 2201).
Related procedures:
WARNING The angle and square bracket combination is reserved for use by property fields. If you enter an angle
and square bracket combination manually, it will cause an error in the text component. Also, manually editing
modifier codes causes an error in the property field. The errors are displayed as three question marks (???) in the
label when the property fields are processed. To change a property field in the Text Component Editor window,
delete the property field completely from the window (including the angle and square bracket combinations),
and insert a new property field.
Properties
Specifies a property to insert into the label text component. Properties are based surface spot elevation.
When you select a property, Modifiers and their Values are displayed in the grid below it.
NOTE Edit the values as needed before clicking the Add Properties button. If you make changes to the values
after you insert the property, you must delete and reinsert the property.
Filter
Opens the Property Filter (page 2201) dialog box where you can select which type of properties to include
in the Properties list. This restricts the Properties list so it shows only relevant properties for the label type
you are creating. For example, this is useful when you are creating a pipe label and want to restrict the
properties shown to those relevant only to a particular type, such as circular pipes. Not available for all
label types.
Add Properties
Inserts the property field into the Text Component Editor window at the cursor location.
Value
Lists the value for each modifier. The values and the method of formatting them vary according to the
type of modifier.
Related procedures:
Value
Specifies the filter to use. Select a specific filter or specify one of the following:
■ <All>: Resets the filter to include all properties. A restrictive filter remains active until you use this
option.
NOTE After you select a filter, it remains active for new label styles also. If you do not see the properties you expect
in the Text Component Editor, click the Filter icon to determine whether the Properties list is filtered. Use the <All>
option to turn filters off.
Related procedures:
NOTE The text style for a label is specified on the General (page 2181) tab of the Label Style Composer dialog
box.
Font
Specifies the font for new or selected text.
TrueType® fonts are listed by font family name. AutoCAD compiled shape (SHX) fonts are listed
by the name of the file in which the fonts are stored. Custom fonts or third-party fonts are substituted
with Autodesk-supplied proxy fonts. A custom SHX font is available for character formatting overrides
only if it is defined for a text style in the drawing.
Color
Specifies the text color.
Select a color from the list or click to open the Select Color dialog box.
Formatting options
Bold
Turns bold formatting on and off for new or selected text. This option is available only for characters
using TrueType fonts.
Italic
Turns italic formatting on and off for new or selected text. This option is available only for characters
using TrueType fonts.
Underline
Turns underlining on and off for new or selected text.
Undo
Reverses the most recent action in the Text Component Editor, including changes to either text content
or text formatting.
NOTE You can also press Ctrl+Z to undo the most recent change.
Redo
Reverses the effects of the last Undo that you performed, including changes to either text content or text
formatting. The Redo option must immediately follow the Undo command.
Stack/Unstack
Stacks selected text that is formatted using stack characters, or unstacks stacked text. For more information,
see Creating Stacked Characters (page 1689).
NOTE Diameter symbols appear as %%c in the Text Component Editor window but are converted to Ø in
labels.
Related procedures:
■ It contains the property fields that you specify for the text component
Property fields should not be edited or the label will not be created correctly. You can, however, enter text
in the window and use the following shortcut menu items to format it:
Shortcut Menu
Select the text, and right-click to display a shortcut menu for quick formatting options. The menu is
context sensitive to cursor position, text selection, and stacked text.
The shortcut menu is divided into three parts. The top part has standard editing commands: Undo, Redo,
Cut, Copy, and Paste.
The lower part of the shortcut menu contains specific formatting options.
■ Select All: Selects all text in the editor window.
■ Remove Formatting: Removes any formatting, such as underline, bold, italic, and word-wrapping.
■ Stack: Stacks selected text. This option appears only when text that is formatted with stacking characters
is selected. For more information, see Creating Stacked Characters (page 1689).
■ Unstack: Unstacks text. This option appears only when stacked text is selected.
■ Properties: Displays the AutoCAD Stack Properties dialog box. This option appears only when stacked
text is selected.
Related procedures:
Create New
Creates a new label of the same type in the Label Style Composer dialog box.
Label Style
Displays the style used by the selected label. Click the Value column, and then click to open the Label
Style dialog box and to select a different style.
Visibility
Specifies whether the label is visible in the drawing.
■ True: Displays the label.
■ False: Hides the label. This setting deletes the label unless it is reset before you close the dialog box.
Flip Label
Specifies whether the label is flipped.
■ True: Flips the label components to the opposite side of a line or curve object.
Label Is Pinned
Specifies whether the label is fixed to its location.
■ True: Pins a label to its current location regardless of edits to the object referenced by that label.
Marker Style
Displays the style used by the currently selected marker. Click in the Value column and then click to
display the Marker Style dialog box and to select a different style.
Fixed XY
Specifies the label position for fixed point alignment station/offset labels.
■ True: Moves the label with the alignment.
Profile 2 Object
Specifies a profile to be used as “Profile 2” in the profile view labels.
Section 1
Specifies a section to be used as “Section 1” in the section view labels.
Section 2
Specifies a section to be used as “Section 2” in the section view labels.
■ Below: Moves the dimension line anchor down the distance specified in the Dimension Anchor Value.
■ Fixed: Places the dimension line anchor at a fixed elevation on a profile view. Specify the elevation in
the Dimension Anchor Value field.
■ Graph View Top: Places the line anchor at the top of the section view grid. This creates a vertical graph
line above the label. To ensure the full line extent is displayed, set Dim Anchor Val to 0.
■ Graph View Bottom:Anchors the line to the bottom of the section view grid. This creates a vertical
graph line below the label. To ensure the full line extent is displayed, set Dim Anchor Val to 0.
Related procedures:
Description
Specifies the description of the current label set.
Created By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who created the label set.
Date Created
Displays the date and time the label set was created.
Last Modified By
Displays the AutoCAD login name of the person who last modified the label set.
Date Modified
Displays the date and time the label set was last modified.
Related procedures:
Style Detail
Opens the Style Detail dialog box where you can preview the selected label style.
Style Column
Specifies the label style to include in the set. Click to open the Pick Label Style dialog box.
Increment Column
Specifies the increment at which to insert major and minor station labels.
geometry points using a different style. Click to select the geometry points to label.
■ Fixed Elevation: Places the dimension line anchor at a fixed elevation on a profile view. Specify the
elevation in the Dim Anchor Val field.
■ Distance Below: Moves the dimension line anchor down the distance specified in the Dim Anchor Val
field.
■ Graph View Top: Places the line anchor at the top of the section view grid. This creates a vertical graph
line above the label. To ensure the full line extent is displayed, set Dim Anchor Val to 0.
■ Graph View Bottom: Anchors the line to the bottom of the section view grid. This creates a vertical
graph line below the label. To ensure the full line extent is displayed, set Dim Anchor Val to 0.
Weeding
Specifies a label exclusion distance for grade break labels only. Use this setting to remove overlapping
labels and make it easier to read the remaining labels. If another break occurs within the specified distance
from a given grade break, it is not labeled.
The following options are available when you are editing a profile or section label set.
They are not part of the style.
Start Station
Clear the check box and specify the station where the label type begins.
End Station
Clear the check box and specify the station where the label type ends.
Related procedures:
Label Type
Specifies the type of label to add. This list changes depending on the feature selected.
Style Detail
Displays the Style Detail dialog box where you can preview the selected label style.
■ Dialog: When inserting a label that contains Referenced Text, the Label Properties dialog box is
displayed. Click in the Value column and then click to display the Property Field Object dialog
box. Select the object to refer to and click OK.
■ Suppress Prompts: When inserting a label that contains Referenced Text, all prompting for objects is
suppressed. No objects are specified for Referenced Text fields that may exist in the label style. You
can edit the label properties later to specify the objects to refer to.
Add
Inserts labels of the selected style into the drawing after you select the object. The prompts that are
displayed after you click Add vary based on the label style.
Related procedures:
NOTE When creating tags, the renumbering starting number and increment will not be changed (unless you
manually change them in the Table Tag Numbering dialog box.
Lines Increment
Specifies the difference between numbers in the numbering sequence.
Curves Increment
Specifies the difference between numbers in the numbering sequence.
Spirals Increment
Specifies the difference between numbers in the numbering sequence.
Lines Increment
Specifies the difference between numbers in the numbering sequence.
Curves Increment
Specifies the difference between numbers in the numbering sequence.
Spirals Increment
Specifies the difference between numbers in the numbering sequence.
Related procedures:
Related procedures:
Related procedures:
For other examples, see Expression Examples (page 1728). For procedures, see Setting Up Expressions (page
1727).
■ Do not enter functions, constants, or logical operators inside the curly brackets that surround Properties
such as {Segment Length}.
■ Do not enter plain text, such as “meters” in expressions. You can add this text later when you set up a
label style that includes the expression.
To set up an expression, you can use the buttons in the dialog box, and the keypad on your keyboard. There
are menus in the dialog box from which you can choose Properties and functions to insert into the expression.
If you enter a combination of items that is invalid, you will receive a parse error when you click OK.
Name
Specifies a name for the expression. It is recommended that you use a clear naming convention such as
“Parcel line expression: Length in meters”. Expressions are listed by name along with all the other label
properties in the Label Style Text Component Editor.
Description
Specifies a description that appears in the Settings tab item list view.
Calculator Buttons
Enter numbers and operators (page 1732)into the Editor box to define the expression.
Insert Property
Inserts a property into the expression. Click the icon to display a list of properties relevant to the expression
type. Select a property to insert it into the expression. These are the same Properties (page 1691) that are
available for label styles.
Properties are inserted inside brackets. Do not add operators or functions within these brackets.
Insert Function
Inserts a function into the expression. See Functions (page 1732) for more information.
Format Result As
Specifies how the expression results are formatted.
■ Double: This value is formatted using the Unitless type.
NOTE The following are all of type Double but are formatted according to the settings on the Ambient
Settings tab (page 2078) in the Drawing settings:
■ Angle
■ Area
■ Coordinate
■ Dimension
■ Direction
■ Distance
■ Elevation
■ Grade/Slope
■ Latitude
■ Longitude
■ Station
■ Volume
Related procedures:
Specifies a site for imported alignments. Select a site from the drop-down list or click to select an object
(parcel, alignment, or grading) contained in the site to which you want to add the new objects.
NOTE The default selection is <None>, which places the alignments in the top-level Alignments collection in
Prospector. See Alignment and Site Interaction (page 781) for more information.
Parcels Site
Specifies a site for any imported parcels. Select a site from the drop-down list or click to select an object
(parcel, alignment, or grading) contained in the site to which you want to add the new objects.
NOTE If no sites exist in the drawing, the objects are placed in a default site.
Data Tree
Lists the LandXML header information for each data component that can be imported. Expand each of
the collections to display all of the subcomponents.
Select or clear the check boxes to the left of each data component name to filter the data that is imported
into AutoCAD Civil 3D. By default, all data components are selected for import.
NOTE The check boxes have a tri-state display. If only some items are selected under a collection, the check
box is shaded . If all items are selected, the check box is selected . If all items below the collection are
cleared, the check box for the collection is cleared .
OK
Converts LandXML data into AutoCAD Civil 3D objects. Imports each object from the LandXML file into
the AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing using the name as specified in the LandXML file.
2213
Each object uses the appropriate creation behavior based on the command setting for the object being
imported. For example, if the Surface Default Style is set to High Altitude, any surfaces imported with this
operation will use the High Altitude style.
NOTE As each object is imported, the Event Viewer Vista (page 2753) dialog box can display the status of each
operation. For more information, see The Event Viewer Vista (page 1817).
Browse
Opens the Open dialog box. Select another LandXML file from which to import data.
Related procedures:
NOTE If Translate is set to Off, all other data translation options are unavailable.
NOTE The units used for base point and translated values are set at the drawing level in the Ambient Settings
Tab (Drawing Settings Dialog Box) (page 2078).
NOTE If Rotate is set to Off, all other data rotation options are disabled.
Angle
Specifies the angle about the base point where the LandXML data is rotated.
NOTE The angle units are set at the drawing level in the Ambient Settings Tab (Drawing Settings Dialog Box)
(page 2078).
Direction
Specifies the direction of rotation. Select this option to calculate the angle in a clockwise or
counter-clockwise rotation about the base point.
■ Use “Desc” Value: Uses the “desc” attribute value for the point description.
■ Use “Code” Then “Desc”: Attempts to use the “code” attribute value for the point description. If a
point does not have a “code” attribute, the “desc” attribute value, if available, is used.
■ Use “Desc” Then “Code”: Attempts to use the “desc” attribute value for the point description. If a
point does not have a “desc” attribute, the “code” attribute value, if available, is used.
■ Full Import: Imports both the points and the surface faces, if available. Creates the surface information
from the face edges and creates a surface that is identical to the surface definition in the LandXML
file.
NOTE If the LandXML surface you intend to import has only breaklines (for example, no other points and
faces definition data is present), the resulting AutoCAD Civil 3D surface is built from the breakline data.
However, the breaklines are not available for editing (that is, they do not appear in the Prospector tree).
This data is created on the following layers prefixed with the surface name:
■ <surface name>_Breaklines
■ <surface name>_Contours
■ <surface name>_Chains
■ <surface name>_DataPoints_PntList3D
NOTE This data is not added to the surface definition in the Prospector tree. You can manually add it if desired,
or create a different surface from it for comparison purposes.
■ Update: On import, replaces unlocked drawing object with object in LandXML file.
■ Append: Imports conflicting objects but renames the imported copy using the default name format
that is specified in the feature settings.
Metric
Defines the default metric pipe and structure diameter units that are applied when units are not specified
in the source LandXML file.
Related procedures:
NOTE If Write Identification Elements is set to Off, all other identification options are disabled.
Creator
Specifies the creator of the LandXML file.
Email Address
Specifies the creator’s email address.
Company
Specifies the creator’s company.
Company URL
Specifies the company’s URL.
Data Settings
Imperial Units
Specifies how to tag LandXML data when working in Imperial units:
■ International Foot: Tags the data in the LandXML file as International feet.
■ Survey Foot: Tags the data in the LandXML file as Survey feet.
Angle/Direction Format
Specifies the units of the exported angles and directions:
■ Degrees Decimal (DDD.DDDDDD): Exports angles and directions as decimal degrees. Decimal degrees
express the minutes and seconds of an angle as its decimal equivalent. For example, 3°30'36" equals
3.51 decimal degrees.
■ Degrees Decimal dms (DDD.MMSSSS): Exports angles and directions using the degrees, minutes, and
seconds convention, in which the numbers after the decimal are read as minutes and seconds, not
decimal degrees. For example, 3°30'36" equals 3.303600.
■ Grads: Exports angles and directions using grads (where one grad equals 1/100 of a 90° angle, or 360°
= 400 grads).
■ Radians: Exports angles and directions using radians (where 2PI radians equals 360°).
NOTE Directions are always reported in azimuths. The LandXML schema does not support bearings.
NOTE Typically you would export the raw description to the ‘code’ attribute. For more information, see Point
Description and Code Matching (page 1882).
Desc Attribute
Specifies the field that is used for the ‘desc’ attribute in the LandXML file:
■ Disabled: Does not export the point description to a ‘desc’ attribute.
NOTE Typically, you would export the full description to the ‘desc’ attribute. If you select Disabled for both
the Code Attribute and Desc Attribute, then no descriptions are exported. For more information, see Point
Description and Code Matching (page 1882).
■ Points and Faces: Exports both the points and the surface faces, if available. Creates the surface
information from the face edges and creates a surface that is identical to the surface definition.
Related procedures:
NOTE The check boxes have a tri-state display. If only some items are selected under a collection, the check
box is shaded . If all the items are selected, the check box is selected . If all the items below the collection
are cleared, the check box for the collection is cleared .
NOTE If you access this dialog box by right-clicking a collection in the Prospector tree and selecting Export
LandXML, the Pick From Drawing button is not available.
OK
Converts AutoCAD Civil 3D objects to LandXML format and exports the LandXML data.
Related procedures:
Modifier
Specifies whether the layer name includes a text-string modifier, and if so, the location of the modifier:
■ None: No modifier.
Modifier Value
Specifies the text string to use as the modifier. You can enter an asterisk (*) to include the object name as
the modifier in the layer name and to put each named object on its own layer. For example, if C-ROAD
is the name specified for alignment layers and you add -* as a suffix, an alignment named overpass is
created on layer C-ROAD-OVERPASS.
Preview
Displays the final name of the layer for any newly created objects.
Related procedures:
2221
Layer Selection Dialog Box
Use this dialog box to select the layer on which to create objects of the selected type. Click anywhere in the
row to select the layer, then click Apply.
When you select a layer from a source outside the current drawing, the layer is created in the current drawing.
If you select a layer that exists in the current drawing, a warning dialog box is displayed, where you can
overwrite the current layer definition or cancel the command.
Layer Source
Specifies the drawing that contains the layer. Select one of the open drawings.
Layer
Displays the name of the layer.
Color
Displays the color of the layer.
Linetype
Displays the linetype of the layer.
Lineweight
Displays the lineweight of the layer.
Plot
Displays whether the layer is plotted or not.
Plot Style
Displays the plot style of the layer.
New
Creates a layer using the Create Layer (page 2222) dialog box. This option is available only if the current
open drawing is selected for the Layer Source.
Color
Specifies the layer color.
Linetype
Specifies the layer linetype. Select a linetype from the drawing or from those defined in the drawing.
Lineweight
Specifies the layer lineweight.
Locked
Specifies whether the layer is locked. On a locked layer, you cannot select or modify objects.
On
Specifies whether the layer is visible.
Freeze
Specifies whether the layer is frozen or thawed. A frozen layer is not updated.
Plot
Specifies whether the layer can be plotted.